MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CURRICULUM I TO VIII: B. TECH MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Every course of B. Tech. Program shall be placed in one of the nine categories as listed in table
below.
Sl. Category Code Credits
No
1 Humanities and Social Sciences including Management HMC 8
courses
2 Basic Science courses BSC 26
3 Engineering Science Courses ESC 22

4 Program Core Courses PCC 76

5 Program Elective Courses PEC 15

6 Open Elective Courses OEC 3

7 Project work and Seminar PWS 10

8 Mandatory Non-credit Courses (P/F) with grade MNC -----

9 Mandatory Student Activities (P/F) MSA 2

Total Mandatory Credits 162

10 Value Added Course (Optional) VAC 20

No semester shall have more than six lecture-based courses and two laboratory and/or
drawing/seminar/project courses in the curriculum. Semester-wise credit distribution shall be as
below:
Sem 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Total

Credits 17 21 22 22 23 23 15 17 160

Activity 50 50 ---
Points
Credits for 2 2
Activity
G.Total 162

316
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Basic Science Courses: Maths, Physics, Chemistry, Biology for Engineers, Life Science etc
Engineering science courses: Basic Electrical, Engineering Graphics, Programming, Workshop,
Basic Electronics, Basic Civil, Engineering Mechanics, Mechanical Engineering, Thermodynamics, ,
Design Engineering, Materials Engineering etc.
Humanities and Social Sciences including Management courses: English, Humanities, Professional
Communication, Management, Finance & Accounting, Life Skills, Professional Communication,
Economics etc.
Mandatory non-credit courses: Sustainable Engineering, Constitution of India/Essence of Indian
Knowledge Tradition, Industrial Safety Engineering, disaster management etc.
Course Code and Course Number
Each course is denoted by a unique code consisting of three alphabets followed by three numerals
like E C L 2 0 1. The first two letter code refers to the department offering the course. EC stands for
course in Electronics & Communication, course code MA refers to a course in Mathematics, course
code ES refers to a course in Engineering Science etc. Third letter stands for the nature of the
course as indicated in the Table 1.
Table 1: Code for the courses
Code Description

T Theory based courses (other the lecture hours, these courses can have tutorial
and practical hours, e.g., L-T-P structures 3-0-0, 3-1-2, 3-0-2 etc.)
L Laboratory based courses (where performance is evaluated primarily on the basis
of practical or laboratory work with LTP structures like 0-0-3, 1-0-3, 0-1-3 etc.)
N Non-credit courses
D Project based courses (Major, Mini Projects)
Q Seminar Courses

Course Number is a three digit number and the first digit refers to the Academic year in which the
course is normally offered, i.e. 1, 2, 3, or 4 for the B. Tech. Programme of four year duration. Of
the other two digits, the last digit identifies whether the course is offered normally in the odd (odd
number), even (even number) or in both the semesters (zero). The middle number could be any
digit. ECL 201 is a laboratory course offered in EC department for third semester, MAT 101 is a
course in Mathematics offered in the first semester, EET 344 is a course in Electrical Engineering
offered in the sixth semester, PHT 110 is a course in Physics offered both the first and second
semesters, EST 102 is a course in Basic Engineering offered by one or many departments. These
course numbers are to be given in the curriculum and syllabi.

317
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Departments
Each course is offered by a Department and their two-letter course prefix is given in Table 2.
Table 2: Departments and their codes

Sl.No Department Course Sl.No Department Course

Prefix Prefix

01 Aeronautical Engg AO 16 Information Technology IT

02 Applied Electronics & AE 17 Instrumentation & IC
Instrumentation Control

03 Automobile AU 18 Mandatory Courses MC

04 Biomedical Engg BM 19 Mathematics MA

05 Biotechnology BT 20 Mechanical Engg ME

06 Chemical Engg CH 21 Mechatronics MR
07 Chemistry CY 22 Metallurgy MT
08 Civil Engg CE 23 Mechanical (Auto) MU
09 Computer Science CS 24 Mechanical(Prod) MP
10 Electrical & Electronics EE 25 Naval & Ship Building SB
11 Electronics & Biomedical EB 26 Physics PH
12 Electronics & EC 27 Polymer Engg PO
Communication
13 Food Technology FT 28 Production Engg PE
14 Humanities HU 29 Robotics and Automation RA

15 Industrial Engg IE 30 Safety & Fire Engg FS

318
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER I

SLOT COURSE NO. COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT

A MAT 101 LINEAR ALGEBRA AND CALCULUS 3-1-0 4 4

B PHT 110 ENGINEERING PHYSICS B 3-1-0 4 4

1/2
CYT 100 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY 3-1-0 4 4

C EST 100 ENGINEERING MECHANICS 2-1-0 3 3

1/2
EST 110 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 2-0-2 4 3

D EST 120 BASICS OF CIVIL & MECHANICAL 4-0-0 4 4

1/2 ENGINEERING
EST 130 BASICS OF ELECTRICAL & 4-0-0 4 4
ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
E HUN 101 LIFE SKILLS 2-0-2 4 --

S PHL 120 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB 0-0-2 2 1

1/2
CYL 120 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB 0-0-2 2 1

T ESL 120 CIVIL & MECHANICAL WORKSHOP 0-0-2 2 1

1/2
ESL 130 ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS 0-0-2 2 1
WORKSHOP
TOTAL 23/24 * 17

*Minimum hours per week

NOTE:
To make up for the hours lost due to induction program, one extra hour may be
allotted to each course

319
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER II

SLOT COURSE NO. COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT

A MAT 102 VECTOR CALCULUS, DIFFERENTIAL 3-1-0 4 4

EQUATIONS AND TRANSFORMS
B PHT 110 ENGINEERING PHYSICS B 3-1-0 4 4
1/2
CYT 100 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY 3-1-0 4 4

C EST 100 ENGINEERING MECHANICS 2-1-0 3 3

1/2
EST 110 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 2-0-2 4 3

D EST 120 BASICS OF CIVIL & MECHANICAL 4-0-0 4 4

1/2 ENGINEERING
EST 130 BASICS OF ELECTRICAL & 4-0-0 4 4
ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
E HUN 102 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION 2-0-2 4 --

F EST 102 PROGRAMMING IN C 2-1-2 5 4

S PHL 120 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB 0-0-2 2 1

1/2
CYL 120 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB 0-0-2 2 1

T ESL 120 CIVIL & MECHANICAL WORKSHOP 0-0-2 2 1

1/2
ESL 130 ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS 0-0-2 2 1
WORKSHOP
TOTAL 28/29 21

NOTE:
1. Engineering Physics B and Engineering Chemistry shall be offered in both semesters.
Institutions can advise students belonging to about 50% of the number of branches in the
Institution to opt for Engineering Physics B in SI and Engineering Chemistry in S2 & vice
versa. Students opting for Engineering Physics B in a semester should attend Physics Lab in
the same semester and students opting for Engineering Chemistry in one semester should
attend Engineering Chemistry Lab in the same semester.

2. Engineering Mechanics and Engineering Graphics shall be offered in both semesters.

Institutions can advise students belonging to about 50% of the number of branches in the
Institution to opt for Engineering Mechanics in SI and Engineering Graphics in S2 & vice
versa.

320
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Basics of Civil & Mechanical Engineering and Basics of Electrical & Electronics Engineering
shall be offered in both semesters. Basics of Civil & Mechanical Engineering contain equal
weightage for Civil Engineering and Mechanical Engineering. Slot for the course is D with
CIE marks of 25 each and ESE marks of 50 each. Students belonging to branches of AEI, EI,
BME, ECE, EEE, ICE, CSE, IT, RA can choose this course in S1.
Basics of Electrical & Electronics Engineering contain equal weightage for Electrical Engineering
and Electronics Engineering. Slot for the course is D with CIE marks of 25 each and ESE
marks of 50 each. Students belonging to AERO, AUTO, CE, FSE, IE, ME, MECHATRONICS,
PE, METTULURGY, BT, BCE, CHEM, FT, POLY can choose this course in S1. Students having
Basics of Civil & Mechanical Engineering in one semester should attend Civil & Mechanical
Workshop in the same semester and students having Basics of Electrical & Electronics
Engineering in a semester should attend Electrical & Electronics Workshop in the same
semester.

4. LIFE SKILLS
Life skills are those competencies that provide the means for an individual to be resourceful and
positive while taking on life's vicissitudes. Development of one's personality by being
aware of the self, connecting with others, reflecting on the abstract and the concrete,
leading and generating change, and staying rooted in time-tested values and principles is
being aimed at. This course is designed to enhance the employability and maximize the
potential of the students by introducing them to the principles that underlie personal and
professional success, and help them acquire the skills needed to apply these principles in
their lives and careers.

5. PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION
Objective is to develop in the under-graduate students of engineering a level of competence in
English required for independent and effective communication for their professional
needs. Coverage: Listening, Barriers to listening, Steps to overcome them, Purposive
listening practice, Use of technology in the professional world. Speaking, Fluency &
accuracy in speech, Positive thinking, Improving self-expression, Tonal variations, Group
discussion practice, Reading, Speed reading practice, Use of extensive readers, Analytical
and critical reading practice, Writing Professional Correspondence, Formal and informal
letters, Tone in formal writing, Introduction to reports. Study Skills, Use of dictionary,
thesaurus etc., Importance of contents page, cover & back pages, Bibliography, Language
Lab.

321
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER III
SLOT COURSE COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.
A MAT201 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION AND 3-1-0 4 4
COMPLEX ANALYSIS

B MET201 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS 3-1-0 4 4

C MET203 MECHANICS OF FLUIDS 3-1-0 4 4

D MET205 METALLURGY & MATERIAL SCIENCE 3-1-0 4 4

E EST200 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING 2-0-0 2 2

1/2
HUT200 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 2-0-0 2 2

F MCN201 SUSTAINABLE ENGINEERING 2-0-0 2 --

S MEL201 COMPUTER AIDED MACHINE DRAWING 0-0-3 3 2

T MEL203 MATERIALS TESTING LAB 0-0-3 3 2

R/M VAC REMEDIAL/MINOR COURSE 3-1-0 4** 4

TOTAL 26/30 22/26

NOTE:
1. Design & Engineering and Professional Ethics shall be offered in both S3 and S4.
Institutions can advise students belonging to about 50% of the number of branches in the
Institution to opt for Design & Engineering in S3 and Professional Ethics in S4 & vice versa.
2. *All Institutions shall keep 4 hours exclusively for Remedial class/Minor course (Thursdays
from 3 to 5 PM and Fridays from 2 to 4 PM). If a student does not opt for minor
programme, he/she can be given remedial class.

322
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER IV

SLOT COURSE NO. COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT

A MAT202 PROBABILITY, STATISTICS AND 3-1-0 4 4

NUMERICAL METHODS

B MET202 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS 3-1-0 4 4

C MET204 MANUFACTURING PROCESS 3-1-0 4 4

D MET206 FLUID MACHINERY 3-1-0 4 4

EST200 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING 2-0-0 2 2

E
1/2 HUT200 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 2-0-0 2 2

F MCN202 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA 2-0-0 2 --

S MEL202 FM & HM LAB 0-0-3 3 2

T MEL204 MACHINE TOOLS LAB-I 0-0-3 3 2

R/M/ VAC REMEDIAL/MINOR/HONORS COURSE 3-1-0 4* 4

H
TOTAL 26/30 22/26

NOTE:
1. Design & Engineering and Professional Ethics shall be offered in both S3 and S4.
Institutions can advise students belonging to about 50% of the number of branches in the
Institution to opt for Design & Engineering in S3 and Professional Ethics in S4 & vice versa.
2. *All Institutions should keep 4 hours exclusively for Remedial class/Minor course
(Thursdays from 3 to 5 PM and Fridays from 2 to 4 PM). If a student does not opt for minor
programme, he/she can be given remedial class.

323
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER V

SLOT COURSE COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDI

NO. T
A MET301 MECHANICS OF MACHINERY 3-1-0 4 4

B MET303 THERMAL ENGINEERING 3-1-0 4 4

C MET305 3-1-0 4 4
INDUSTRIAL & SYSTEMS ENGINEERING

D MET307 MACHINE TOOLS AND METROLOGY 3-1-0 4 4

E HUT300 INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS AND 3-0-0 3 3

1/2 FOREIGN TRADE
HUT310 MANAGEMENT FOR ENGINEERS 3-0-0 3 3

F MCN301 DISASTER MANAGEMENT 2-0-0 2 --

S MEL331 MACHINE TOOLS LAB-II 0-0-3 3 2

T MEL333 THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB-I 0-0-3 3 2

R/M/H VAC REMEDIAL/MINOR/HONORS COURSE 3-1-0 4* 4

TOTAL 27/31 23/27

NOTE:
1. Industrial Economics & Foreign Trade and Management for Engineers shall be offered in
both S5 and S6. Institutions can advise students belonging to about 50% of the number of
branches in the Institution to opt for Industrial Economics & Foreign Trade in S5 and
Management for Engineers in S6 and vice versa.
2. *All Institutions should keep 4 hours exclusively for Remedial class/Minor/Honours course
(Tuesdays from 3 to 5 PM and Wednesdays from 3 to 5 PM). If a student does not opt for
minor/honours programme, he/she can be given remedial class.

324
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI

SLOT COURSE NO. COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT

A MET302 HEAT & MASS TRANSFER 3-1-0 4 4

B MET304 DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY & 3-1-0 4 4

MACHINE DESIGN
C MET306 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING 3-1-0 4 4
ENGINEERING
D METXXX PROGRAM ELECTIVE I 2-1-0 3 3

HUT300 INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS AND 3-0-0 3 3

E FOREIGN TRADE
½ HUT310 MANAGEMENT FOR ENGINEERS 3-0-0 3 3

F MET308 COMPREHENSIVE COURSE WORK 1-0-0 1 1

S MEL332 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN & 0-0-3 3 2

ANALYSIS LAB
T MEL334 THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB-II 0-0-3 3 2

R/M/ VAC REMEDIAL/MINOR/HONOURS 3-1-0 4* 4

H COURSE
TOTAL 25/29 23/27

PROGRAM ELECTIVE I

SLOT COURSE NO. COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT

MET312 NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING 2-1-0

MET322 DATA ANALYTICS FOR ENGINEERS 2-1-0
MET332 ADVANCED MECHANICS OF SOLIDS 2-1-0
D IC ENGINE COMBUSTION AND 2-1-0
MET342
POLLUTION 3 3
MET352 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING 2-1-0
MET362 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT 2-1-0
ADVANCED METAL JOINING 2-1-0
MET372
TECHNIQUES
NOTE:
1. Industrial Economics & Foreign Trade and Management for Engineers shall be offered in
both S5 and S6. Institutions can advise students belonging to about 50% of the number of
branches in the Institution to opt for Industrial Economics & Foreign Trade in S5 and
Management for Engineers in S6 and vice versa.

325
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

2. **All Institutions should keep 4 hours exclusively for Remedial class/Minor/Honours course
(Tuesdays from 2 to 4 PM and Wednesdays from 2 to 4 PM). If a student does not opt for
minor/honors programme, he/she can be given remedial class.

3. Comprehensive Course Work: The comprehensive course work in the sixth semester of
study shall have a written test of 50 marks. The written examination will be of objective
type similar to the GATE examination and will be conducted online by the University.
Syllabus for comprehensive examination shall be prepared by the respective BoS
choosing any 5 core courses studied from semester 3 to 5. The pass minimum for this
course is 25. The course should be mapped with a faculty and classes shall be arranged for
practising questions based on the core courses listed in the curriculum.

326
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VII

SLOT COURSE NO. COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT

A MET401 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS 2-1-0 3 3

B METXXX PROGRAM ELECTIVE II 2-1-0 3 3

C METXXX OPEN ELECTIVE 2-1-0 3 3

D MCN401 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY ENGINEERING 2-1-0 3 ---

S MEL411 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LAB 0-0-3 3 2

T MEQ413 SEMINAR 0-0-3 3 2

U MED415 PROJECT PHASE I 0-0-6 6 2

R/M/ VAC REMEDIAL/MINOR/HONORS COURSE 3-1-0 4* 4

H
TOTAL 24/28 15/19

PROGRAM ELECTIVE II
SLOT COURSE NO. COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT

MET413 ADVANCED METHODS IN 2-1-0

NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING
MET423 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES AND 2-1-0 3 3
APPLICATIONS
B
MET433 FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 2-1-0
MET443 AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 2-1-0
MET453 HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES 2-1-0
MET463 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 2-1-0
MET473 AIR CONDITIONING AND 2-1-0
REFRIGERATION

OPEN ELECTIVE
The open elective is offered in semester 7. Each program should specify the courses
(maximum 5) they would like to offer as electives for other programs The courses listed
below are offered by the Department of MECHANICAL ENGINEERING for students of
other undergraduate branches offered in the college under KTU.

327
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SLOT COURSE NO. COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT

MET415 INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS 2-1-0

ANALYTICS
MET425 QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR 2-1-0 3 3
ENGINEERS
C
MET435 AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY 2-1-0
MET445 RENEWABLE ENERGY ENGINEERING 2-1-0
MET455 QUALITY ENGINEERING AND 2-1-0
MANAGEMENT

NOTE:
1. *All Institutions should keep 4 hours exclusively for Remedial class/Minor/Honors course
(Mondays from 10 to 12 and Wednesdays from 10 to 12 Noon). If a student does not opt
for minor/honours programme, he/she can be given remedial class.
2. Seminar: To encourage and motivate the students to read and collect recent and reliable
information from their area of interest confined to the relevant discipline from technical
publications including peer reviewed journals, conference, books, project reports etc.,
prepare a report based on a central theme and present it before a peer audience. Each
student shall present the seminar for about 20 minutes duration on the selected topic. The
report and the presentation shall be evaluated by a team of internal members comprising
three senior faculty members based on style of presentation, technical content, adequacy
of references, depth of knowledge and overall quality of the report.
Total marks: 100, only CIE, minimum required to pass 50
Attendance : 10
Guide : 20
Technical Content of the Report : 30
Presentation : 40
3. Project Phase I: A Project topic must be selected either from research literature or the
students themselves may propose suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The
object of Project Work I is to enable the student to take up investigative study in the broad
field of Mechanical Engineering, either fully theoretical/practical or involving both
theoretical and practical work to be assigned by the Department on a group of three/four
students, under the guidance of a Supervisor. This is expected to provide a good initiation
for the student(s) in R&D work. The assignment to normally include:
⮚ Survey and study of published literature on the assigned topic;
⮚ Preparing an Action Plan for conducting the investigation, including team work;
⮚ Working out a preliminary Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned topic;
⮚ Block level design documentation
⮚ Conducting preliminary Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Experiment/ Design/

328
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Feasibility;
⮚ Preparing a Written Report on the Study conducted for presentation to the
Department;
⮚ Final Seminar, as oral Presentation before the evaluation committee.
Total marks: 100, only CIE, minimum required to pass 50
Guide : 30
Interim evaluation by the evaluation committee : 20
Final Seminar : 30
The report evaluated by the evaluation committee : 20
The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project coordinator and
project supervisor.

329
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII

SLOT COURSE NO. COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT

A MET402 MECHATRONICS 2-1-0 3 3

B METXXX PROGRAM ELECTIVE III 2-1-0 3 3

C METXXX PROGRAM ELECTIVE IV 2-1-0 3 3

D METXXX PROGRAM ELECTIVE V 2-1-0 3 3

E MET404 COMPREHENSIVE VIVA VOCE 1-0-0 1 1

U MED416 PROJECT PHASE II 0-0-12 12 4

R/M/ VAC REMEDIAL/MINOR/HONORS COURSE 3-1-0 4* 4

H
TOTAL 25/28 17/21

PROGRAM ELECTIVE III

SLOT COURSE NO. COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT

MET414 QUALITY MANAGEMENT 2-1-0

MET424 DECISIONS WITH METAHEURISTICS 2-1-0
MET434 PRESSURE VESSEL AND PIPING DESIGN 2-1-0
B MET444 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS 2-1-0 3 3
MET454 INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY 2-1-0
MET464 MICRO AND NANO MANUFACTURING 2-1-0
MET474 HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEMS 2-1-0

PROGRAM ELECTIVE IV
SLOT COURSE COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.
MET 416 COMPOSITE MATERIALS 2-1-0
MET 426 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE 2-1-0
LEARNING
3 3
MET 436 ACOUSTICS AND NOISE CONTROL 2-1-0
MET 446 HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT DESIGN 2-1-0
C
MET 456 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION 2-1-0
MET 466 TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT 2-1-0
MET 476 CRYOGENIC ENGINEERING 2-1-0

330
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PROGRAM ELECTIVE V
SLOT COURSE NO. COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT

MET 418 RELIABILITY ENGINEERING 2-1-0

MET 428 INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS 2-1-0
MET438 FRACTURE MECHANICS 2-1-0
D MET 448 GAS TURBINES AND JET PROPULSION 2-1-0 3 3
MET 458 ADVANCED ENERGY ENGINEERING 2-1-0
MET 468 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 2-1-0
MET 478 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING 2-1-0

NOTE
1. *All Institutions should keep 4 hours exclusively for Remedial class/Minor/Honours course
(Mondays from 10 to 12 and Wednesdays from 10 to 12). If a student does not opt for
minor/honors programme, he/she can be given remedial class.
2. Comprehensive Course Viva: The comprehensive course viva in the eighth semester of
study shall have a viva voce for 50 marks. The viva voce shall be conducted based on the
syllabus mentioned for comprehensive course work in the sixth semester. The viva voce
will be conducted by the same three member committee assigned for final project phase II
evaluation towards the end of the semester. The pass minimum for this course is 25. The
course should be mapped with a faculty and classes shall be arranged for practising
questions based on the core courses listed in the curriculum. The mark will be treated as
internal and should be uploaded along with internal marks of other courses.
3. Project Phase II: The object of Project Work II & Dissertation is to enable the student to
extend further the investigative study taken up in Project 1, either fully
theoretical/practical or involving both theoretical and practical work, under the guidance
of a Supervisor from the Department alone or jointly with a Supervisor drawn from R&D
laboratory/Industry. This is expected to provide a good training for the student(s) in R&D
work and technical leadership. The assignment to normally include:
⮚ In depth study of the topic assigned in the light of the Report prepared under
PhaseI;
⮚ Review and finalization of the Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned
topic;
⮚ Detailed Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Design/ Problem Solving/ Experiment as
needed;
⮚ Final development of product/process, testing, results, conclusions and future
directions;
⮚ Preparing a paper for Conference presentation/Publication in Journals, if possible;

331
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

⮚ Preparing a Dissertation in the standard format for being evaluated by the

Department;
⮚ Final Presentation before a Committee
Total marks: 150, only CIE, minimum required to pass 75
Guide : 30
Interim evaluation, 2 times in the semester by the evaluation committee : 50
Quality of the report evaluated by the above committee : 30
Final evaluation by a three member committee : 40
(The final evaluation committee comprises Project coordinator, expert from Industry/research
Institute and a senior faculty from a sister department. The same committee will conduct
comprehensive course viva for 50 marks).

MINOR

Minor is an additional credential a student may earn if s/he does 20 credits worth of additional
learning in a discipline other than her/his major discipline of B.Tech. degree. The objective is to
permit a student to customize their Engineering degree to suit their specific interests. Upon
completion of an Engineering Minor, a student will be better equipped to perform interdisciplinary
research and will be better employable. Engineering Minors allow a student to gain
interdisciplinary experience and exposure to concepts and perspectives that may not be a part of
their major degree programs.

The academic units offering minors in their discipline will prescribe the set of courses and/or other
activities like projects necessary for earning a minor in that discipline. A specialist basket of 3-6
courses is identified for each Minor. Each basket may rest on one or more foundation courses. A
basket may have sequences within it, i.e., advanced courses may rest on basic courses in the
basket. S/he accumulates credits by registering for the required courses, and if the requirements
for a particular minor are met within the time limit for the course, the minor will be awarded. This
will be mentioned in the Degree Certificate as “Bachelor of Technology in xxx with Minor in yyy”.
The fact will also be reflected in the consolidated grade card, along with the list of courses taken. If
one specified course cannot be earned during the course of the programme, that minor will not be
awarded. The individual course credits earned, however, will be reflected in the consolidated
grade card.
(i) The curriculum/syllabus committee/BoS shall prepare syllabus for courses to be included in the
curriculum from third to eight semesters for all branches. The minor courses shall be identified by
M slot courses.
(ii) Registration is permitted for Minor at the beginning of third semester. Total credits required is
182 (162 + 20 credits from value added courses)
(iii) Out of the 20 Credits, 12 credits shall be earned by undergoing a minimum of three courses
listed in the curriculum for minor, of which one course shall be a mini project based on the chosen
area. They can do miniproject either in S7 or in S8. The remaining 8 credits could be acquired by
undergoing 2 MOOCs recommended by the Board of studies and approved by the Academic
Council or through courses listed in the curriculum. The classes for Minor shall be conducted along
with regular classes and no extra time shall be required for conducting the courses.

332
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(iv) There won’t be any supplementary examination for the courses chosen for Minor.
(v) On completion of the program, “Bachelor of Technology in xxx with Minor in yyy” will be
awarded.
(vi) The registration for minor program will commence from semester 3 and the all academic units
offering minors in their discipline should prescribe set of such courses. The courses shall be
grouped into maximum of 3 baskets. The basket of courses may have sequences within it, i.e.,
advanced courses may rest on basic courses in the basket. Reshuffling of courses between various
baskets will not be allowed. In any case, they should carry out a mini project based on the chosen
area in S7 or S8. Students who have registered for B.Tech Minor in MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Branch can opt to study the courses listed below:

S BASKET I BASKET II BASKET III

e H C H C H C
m Course Course Name O R Course Course Name O R Course Course Name O R
e No. U E No. U E No. U E
st R D R D R D
er S I S I S I
T T T
S3 MET281 MECHANICS OF 4 4 MET283 FLUID MECHANICS 4 4 MET285 MATERIAL 4 4
MATERIALS & MACHINERY SCIENCE &
TECHNOLOGY
S4 MET282 THEORY OF 4 4 MET284 THERMODYNAMICS 4 4 MET286 MANUFACTURIN 4 4
MACHINES G TECHNOLOGY
S5 MET381 DYNAMICS OF 4 4 MET383 THERMAL 4 4 MET385 MACHINE TOOLS 4 4
MACHINES ENGINEERING ENGINEERING
S6 MET382 MACHINE DESIGN 4 4 MET384 HEAT TRANSFER 4 4 MET386 INDUSTRIAL 4 4
ENGINEERING
S7 MED481 MINIPROJECT 4 4 MED481 MINIPROJECT 4 4 MED481 MINIPROJECT 4 4

S8 MED482 MINIPROJECT 4 4 MED482 MINIPROJECT 4 4 MED482 MINIPROJECT 4 4

HONOURS
Honours is an additional credential a student may earn if s/he opts for the extra 20 credits needed
for this in her/his own discipline. Honours is not indicative of class. KTU is providing this option for
academically extra brilliant students to acquire Honours. Honours is intended for a student to gain
expertise/specialise in an area inside his/her major B.Tech discipline and to enrich knowledge in
emerging/advanced areas in the branch of engineering concerned. It is particularly suited for
students aiming to pursue higher studies. Upon completion of Honours, a student will be better
equipped to perform research in her/his branch of engineering. On successful accumulation of
credits at the end of the programme, this will be mentioned in the Degree Certificate as “Bachelor
of Technology in xxx, with Honours.” The fact will also be reflected in the consolidated grade card,
along with the list of courses taken. If one specified course cannot be earned during the course of
the programme, Honours will not be awarded. The individual course credits earned, however, will
be reflected in the consolidated grade card.
The courses shall be grouped into maximum of 3 groups, each group representing a particular
specialization in the branch. The students shall select only the courses from same group in all

333
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

semesters. It means that the specialization is to be fixed by the student and cannot be changed
subsequently. The internal evaluation, examination and grading shall be exactly as for other
mandatory courses. The Honours courses shall be identified by H slot courses.

(i) The curriculum/syllabus committee/BOS shall prepare syllabus for courses to be

included in the curriculum from fourth to eight semesters for all branches. The honours
courses shall be identified by H slot courses.
(ii) Registration is permitted for Honours at the beginning of fourth semester. Total credits
required is 182 (162 + 20 credits from value added courses).
(iii) Out of the 20 Credits, 12 credits shall be earned by undergoing a minimum of three
courses listed in the curriculum for honours, of which one course shall be a mini project
based on the chosen area. The remaining 8 credits could be acquired by undergoing 2
MOOCs recommended by the Board of studies and approved by the Academic Council
or through courses listed in the curriculum. The classes for Honours shall be conducted
along with regular classes and no extra time shall be required for conducting the
courses. The students should earn a grade of ‘C’ or better for all courses under
honours.
(iv) There won’t be any supplementary examination for the courses chosen for honours.
(v) On successful accumulation of credits at the end of the programme, “Bachelor of
Technology in xxx, with Honours” will be awarded if overall CGPA is greater than or
equal to 8.5, earned a grade of ‘C’ or better for all courses chosen for honours and
without any history of ‘F’ Grade.
(vi) The registration for honours program will commence from semester 4 and the all
academic units offering honours in their discipline should prescribe set of such courses.
The courses shall be grouped into maximum of 3 groups, each group representing a
particular specialization in the branch. The students shall select only the courses from
same group in all semesters. It means that the specialization is to be fixed by the
student and cannot be changed subsequently. In any case, they should carry out a mini
project based on the chosen area in S8. Students who have registered for B.Tech
Honours in MECHANICAL ENGINEERING can opt to study the courses listed below.

SE GROUP III
ME GROUP I GROUP II
STE
R H C
Course Course H C Course Course H C Course Course Name O R
No. Name O R No. Name O R No. U E
U E U E R D
R D R D S I
S I S I T
T T
S4 MET292 CONTINUUM 4 4 MET294 ADVANCED 4 4 MET296 MATERIALS IN 4 4
MECHANICS MECHANICS MANUFACTURING
OF FLUIDS
S5 MET393 EXPERIMENT 4 4 MET395 ADVANCED 4 4 MET397 FLUID POWER 4 4
AL STRESS THERMODYNA

334
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
ANALYSIS MICS AUTOMATION

S6 MET394 ADVANCED 4 4 MET396 4 4 MET398 ADVANCED 4 4

DESIGN COMPRESSIBL NUMERICAL
SYNTHESIS E FLUID FLOW CONTROLLED
MACHINING

S7 MET495 ADVANCED 4 4 MET497 COMPUTATIO 4 4 MET499 4 4

THEORY OF NAL PRECISION
VIBRATIONS METHODS IN MACHINING
FLUID FLOW &
HEAT
TRANSFER
S8 MED496 MINIPROJEC 4 4 MED496 MINIPROJECT 4 4 MED496 MINIPROJECT 4 4
T

INDUCTION PROGRAM
There will be three weeks induction program for first semester students. It is a unique three-week
immersion Foundation Programme designed especially for the fresher’s which includes a wide
range of activities right from workshops, lectures and seminars to sports tournaments, social work
and much more. The programme is designed to mould students into well-rounded individuals,
aware and sensitized to local and global conditions and foster their creativity, inculcate values and
ethics, and help students to discover their passion. Foundation Programme also serves as a
platform for the fresher’s to interact with their batchmates and seniors and start working as a
team with them. The program is structured around the following five themes:
The programme is designed keeping in mind the following objectives:

● Values and Ethics: Focus on fostering a strong sense of ethical judgment and moral
fortitude.
● Creativity: Provide channels to exhibit and develop individual creativity by expressing
themselves through art, craft, music, singing, media, dramatics, and other creative
activities.
● Leadership, Communication and Teamwork: Develop a culture of teamwork and group
communication.
● Social Awareness: Nurture a deeper understanding of the local and global world and our
place in at as concerned citizens of the world.

335
 LINEAR ALGEBRA AND CALCULUS CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of
MAT Introduction
101 BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This course introduces students to some basic mathematical ideas and tools which are at
the core of any engineering course. A brief course in Linear Algebra familiarises students with some
basic techniques in matrix theory which are essential for analysing linear systems. The calculus of
functions of one or more variables taught in this course are useful in modelling and analysing
physical phenomena involving continuous change of variables or parameters and have applications
across all branches of engineering.

Prerequisite: A basic course in one-variable calculus and matrix theory.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 solve systems of linear equations, diagonalize matrices and characterise quadratic forms
CO 2 compute the partial and total derivatives and maxima and minima of multivariable functions
CO 3 compute multiple integrals and apply them to find areas and volumes of geometrical shapes,
mass and centre of gravity of plane laminas
CO 4 perform various tests to determine whether a given series is convergent, absolutely
convergent or conditionally convergent
CO 5 determine the Taylor and Fourier series expansion of functions and learn their applications.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
1 7
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 4 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2
CO 5 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Test 1 Test 2 Examination
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 20 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

marks marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
Assignments: Assignment should include specific problems highlighting the applications of the
methods introduced in this course in science and engineering.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Solve systems of linear equations, diagonalize matrices and characterise
quadratic forms
𝑥
1. A is a real matrix of order 3 × 3and 𝑋 = 𝑦 . What can you say about the solution of 𝐴𝑋 =
𝑧
0if rank of A is 1? 2 ?3?

3 0 2
2. Given𝐴 = 0 2 0 , find an orthogonal matrix 𝑃that diagonalizes A.
−2 0 0

3. Find out what type of conic section the following quadratic form represents

17𝑥 − 30𝑥 𝑥 + 17𝑥 = 128

−2 2 −3
4. The matrix 𝐴 = 2 1 −6 has an eigen value5 with corresponding Eigen vector𝑋 =
−1 −2 0
1
2 . Find 𝐴 𝑋
−1

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): compute the partial and total derivatives and maxima and minima of
multivariable functions

1. Find the slope of the surface 𝑧 = 𝑥 𝑦 + 5𝑦 in the x-direction at the point (1,-2)
 2. Given the function 𝑤 = 𝑥𝑦 + 𝑧, use chain rule to find the instantaneous rate of change of
𝑤at each point along the curve 𝑥 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡, 𝑦 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑡, 𝑧 = 𝑡

3. Determine the dimension of rectangular box open at the top , having a volume 32 cubic ft
and requiring the least amount of material for it’s construction.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): compute multiple integrals and apply them to find areas and volumes of
geometrical shapes, mass and centre of gravity of plane laminas.

1. Evaluate ∬ (𝑥 + 2𝑦) 𝐷𝐴where D is the region bounded by the parabolas 𝑦 = 2𝑥 and

𝑦 = 1+𝑥

2. Explain how you would find the volume under the surface 𝑧 = 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦)and over a specific
region 𝐷in the 𝑥𝑦plane using (i) double integral (ii) triple integral?

3. Find the mass and centre of gravity of a triangular lamina with vertices (0,0), (2,1), (0,3) if
the density function is 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 𝑥 + 𝑦

4. Use spherical coordinates to evaluate ∭ (𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 ) 𝑑𝑉where B is the unit ball

defined by 𝐵 = {(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧): 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 ≤ 1}

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): perform various tests to determine whether a given series is convergent,
absolutely convergent or conditionally convergent.

1. What is the difference between a sequence and a series and when do you say that they are
convergent? Divergent?

∞
2. Determine whether the series ∑ converges or diverges.

∞( )
3. Is the series ∑ convergent? Absolutely convergent? Conditionally convergent?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): determine the Taylor and Fourier series expansion of functions and learn
their applications.

1. Assuming the possibility of expansion find the Maclaurin series expansion of

𝑓(𝑥) = (1 + 𝑥) for|𝑥| < 1where 𝑘is any real number. What happens if 𝑘is a positive

integer?

2. Use Maclaurin series of 𝑙𝑛(1 + 𝑥), −1 < 𝑥 ≤ 1to find an approximate value of𝑙𝑛2.

3. Find the Fourier series of the function𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 , −2 ≤ 𝑥 < 2, 𝑓(𝑥 + 4) = 𝑓(𝑥). Hence
using Parseval’s identity prove that 1 + + + … =

4. Expand the function 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 (0 < 𝑥 < 1⁄2) into a (i) Fourier sine series (ii) Fourier cosine
series.
 Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: MAT 101

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

LINEAR ALGEBRA AND CALCULUs

(2019-Scheme)

(Common to all branches)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1 2 −1
1. Determine the rank of the matrix 𝐴 = −2 −4 2 .
3 6 −3
2 0
2. Write down the eigen values of = . What are the eigen values of 𝑃 𝐴𝑃 where
0 −1
−4 2
𝑃= ?
3 −1
3. Find 𝑓 (1,3) and 𝑓 (1,3) for the function 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 2𝑥 𝑦 + 2𝑦 + 4𝑥.
4. Show that the function 𝑢(𝑥, 𝑡) = sin (𝑥 − 𝑐𝑡) is a solution of the equation =𝑐
.
5. Use double integral to find the area of the region enclosed between the parabolas 𝑦 = 𝑥
and the line 𝑦 = 2𝑥.
6. Use polar coordinates to evaluate the area of the region bounded by 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 4, the line
𝑦 = 𝑥 and the y axis in the first quadrant
7. Test the convergence of the series ∑∞ .
8. Test the convergence of the alternating series ∑∞ (−1) using Leibnitz test.
9. Find the Taylor series expansion of 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜋𝑥about𝑥 = .
10. Find the values to which the Fourier series of

𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥for−𝜋 < 𝑥 < 𝜋, with 𝑓(𝑥 + 2𝜋) = 𝑓(𝑥) converges (10x3=30)
 PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module -I
11. (a) Solve the following system of equations
𝑦 + 𝑧 − 2𝑤 = 0
2𝑥 − 3𝑦 − 3𝑧 + 6𝑤 = 2
4𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 − 2𝑤 = 4
−2 2 −3
(b) Find the eigen values and eigen vectors of the matrix 2 1 −6
−1 −2 0
−1 2 −2
12. (a) Diagonalize the matrix 2 4 1
2 1 4
(b) What kind of conic section the quadratic form3𝑥 + 22𝑥 𝑥 + 3𝑥 = 0 represents?
Transform it to principal axes.
Module - II
13. (a) Find the local linear approximation to 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 𝑥 + 𝑦 at the point (3, 4).Use it to
approximate 𝑓(3.04,3.98)
(b) Let 𝑤 = 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 , 𝑥 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃, 𝑦 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃, 𝑧 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃. Use chain rule to find when
𝜃= .
14. (a) Let 𝑧 = 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) where 𝑥 = 𝑟𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃, 𝑦 = 𝑟𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃, prove that
+ = + .
(b) Locate all relative maxima, relative minima and saddle points
𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 𝑥𝑦 + + (𝑎 ≠ 0, 𝑏 ≠ 0).
Module - III
15. (a) Evaluate∬ (2𝑥 𝑦 + 9𝑦 ) 𝑑𝑥𝑑𝑦 where D is the region bounded by 𝑦 = 𝑥 and 𝑦 = 2√𝑥
(b) Evaluate ∫ ∫ 𝑒 𝑑𝑥𝑑𝑦 changing the order of integration.
√
16. (a) Find the volume of the solid bounded by the cylinder 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 4 and the planes
𝑦 + 𝑧 = 4 and 𝑧 = 0..
(b) Evaluate ∭ 1 − 𝑥 − 𝑦 − 𝑧 𝑑𝑥𝑑𝑦𝑑𝑧, taken throughout the volume of
the sphere 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 = 1, by transforming to spherical polar coordinates

Module - IV
17. (a) Test the convergence of the series
(i) ∑∞ (ii) ∑∞
!

( )!
(b) Determine the convergence or divergence of the series ∑∞ (−1)

( )!
18. (a) Check whether the series ∑∞ (−1) ( )!
is absolutely convergent, conditionally
convergent or divergent.
 . . . . . .
(b) Test the convergence of the series 1 + .
+ . .
+ . . .
+⋯

Module - V
19. (a) Obtain the Fourier series of for𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 , in the interval 0 < 𝑥 < 2𝜋.with 𝑓 𝑥 +
( )
2𝜋 = 𝑓(𝑥). Hence deduce the value of∑∞ .
𝑖𝑓 0 < 𝑥 <
(b) Find the half range sine series of 𝑓(𝑥) = ( )
𝑖𝑓 <𝑥<𝐿
20. (a)Expand (1 + 𝑥) .as a Taylor series about 𝑥 = 0and state the region of convergence of
the series.

(b) Find the Fourier series for 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 in the interval −𝜋 < 𝑥 < 𝜋

with 𝑓(𝑥 + 2𝜋) = 𝑓(𝑥).Hence show that + + +⋯ = . (14X5=70)

Syllabus

Module 1 (Linear algebra)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 8.1,8.3,8.4)

Systems of linear equations, Solution by Gauss elimination, row echelon form and rank of a matrix,
fundamental theorem for linear systems (homogeneous and non-homogeneous, without proof),
Eigen values and eigen vectors. Diagonaliztion of matrices, orthogonal transformation, quadratic
forms and their canonical forms.

Module 2 (multivariable calculus-Differentiation)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 13.3, 13.4, 13.5, 13.8)

Concept of limit and continuity of functions of two variables, partial derivatives, Differentials, Local
Linear approximations, chain rule, total derivative, Relative maxima and minima, Absolute maxima
and minima on closed and bounded set.

Module 3(multivariable calculus-Integration)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 14.1, 14.2, 14.3, 14.5, 14.6, 14.8)

Double integrals (Cartesian), reversing the order of integration, Change of coordinates (Cartesian to
polar), finding areas and volume using double integrals, mass and centre of gravity of
inhomogeneous laminas using double integral. Triple integrals, volume calculated as triple integral,
triple integral in cylindrical and spherical coordinates (computations involving spheres, cylinders).
Module 4 (sequences and series)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 9.1, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6)

Convergence of sequences and series, convergence of geometric series and p-series(without proof),
test of convergence (comparison, ratio and root tests without proof); Alternating series and Leibnitz
test, absolute and conditional convergence.

Module 5 (Series representation of functions)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 9.8, 9.9. Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 11.1, 11.2,
11.6 )

Taylor series (without proof, assuming the possibility of power series expansion in appropriate
domains), Binomial series and series representation of exponential, trigonometric, logarithmic
functions (without proofs of convergence); Fourier series, Euler formulas, Convergence of Fourier
series (without proof), half range sine and cosine series, Parseval’s theorem (without proof).

Text Books

1. H. Anton, I. Biven,S.Davis, “Calculus”, Wiley, 10th edition, 2015.

2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10 thEdition, John Wiley & Sons, 2016.

Reference Books

1. J. Stewart, Essential Calculus, Cengage, 2nd edition, 2017

2. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9 th Edition, Pearson, Reprint,
2002.

3. Peter V. O'Neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics , Cengage, 7th Edition, 2012

4. Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.

5. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 36 Edition, 2010.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Linear Algebra (10 hours)

1.1 Systems of linear equations, Solution by Gauss elimination 1

1.2 Row echelon form, finding rank from row echelon form, fundamental 3
theorem for linear systems

1.3 Eigen values and eigen vectors 2

1.4 Diagonaliztion of matrices, orthogonal transformation, quadratic forms 4

 and their canonical forms.

2 Multivariable calculus-Differentiation (8 hours)

2.1 Concept of limit and continuity of functions of two variables, partial 2

derivatives

2.2 Differentials, Local Linear approximations 2

2.3 Chain rule, total derivative 2

2.4 Maxima and minima 2

3 Multivariable calculus-Integration (10 hours)

3.1 Double integrals (Cartesian)-evaluation 2

3.2 Change of order of integration in double integrals, change of coordinates 2

(Cartesian to polar),

3.3 Finding areas and volumes, mass and centre of gravity of plane laminas 3

3.4 Triple integrals 3

4 Sequences and series (8 hours)

4.1 Convergence of sequences and series, geometric and p-series 2

4.2 Test of convergence( comparison, ratio and root ) 4

4.3 Alternating series and Leibnitz test, absolute and conditional convergence 2

5 Series representation of functions (9 hours)

5.1 Taylor series, Binomial series and series representation of exponential, 3

trigonometric, logarithmic functions;

5.2 Fourier series, Euler formulas, Convergence of Fourier series(Dirichlet’s 3

conditions)

5.3 Half range sine and cosine series, Parseval’s theorem. 3

 CYT ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
100 INTRODUCTION
BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: To enable the students to acquire knowledge in the concepts of chemistry for engineering
applications and to familiarize the students with different application oriented topics like
spectroscopy, electrochemistry, instrumental methods etc. Also familiarize the students with topics
like mechanism of corrosion, corrosion prevention methods, SEM, stereochemistry, polymers,
desalination etc., which enable them to develop abilities and skills that are relevant to the study and
practice of chemistry.

Prerequisite: Concepts of chemistry introduced at the plus two levels in schools

Course outcomes: After the completion of the course the students will be able to

CO 1 Apply the basic concepts of electrochemistry and corrosion to explore its possible
applications in various engineering fields.
CO 2 Understand various spectroscopic techniques like UV-Visible, IR, NMR and its
applications.
CO 3 Apply the knowledge of analytical method for characterizing a chemical mixture or a
compound. Understand the basic concept of SEM for surface characterisation of
nanomaterials.
CO 4 Learn about the basics of stereochemistry and its application. Apply the knowledge of
conducting polymers and advanced polymers in engineering.
CO 5 Study various types of water treatment methods to develop skills for treating
wastewater.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 1 2 1
CO 2 1 1 1 2
CO 3 1 1 1 2
CO 4 2 1
CO 5 1 1 3
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 25 25 50
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts- Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10
questions (2 questions from each module), having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module, of which student should
answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 subdivisions and carries 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO 1):

1. What is calomel electrode? Give the reduction reaction (3 Marks)

2. List three important advantages of potentiometric titration (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain how electroless plating copper and nickel are carried out (10 Marks)

(b) Calculate the emf of the following cell at 30oC, Z n / Zn 2+ (0.1M) // Ag+ (0.01M) // Ag.

Given E0 Zn2+/Zn = -0.76 V, E0 Ag+/Ag = 0.8 V. (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 2 (CO 2)

1. State Beer Lambert’s law (3 Marks)

2. List the important applications of IR spectroscopy (3 Marks)

3. (a) What is Chemical shift? What are factors affecting Chemical shift? How 1H NMR spectrum of
CH3COCH2Cl interpreted using the concept of chemical shift. (10 Marks)

(b) Calculate the force constant of HF molecule, if it shows IR absorption at 4138 cm -1. Given that
atomic masses of hydrogen and fluorine are 1u and 19u respectively. (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 3 (CO 3):

1. Distinguish between TGA and DTA (3 Marks)

2. Give two differences between GSC and GLC (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain the principle, instrumentation and procedure of HPLC (10 Marks)

(b) Interpret TGA of CaC2O4. H2O (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 4 (CO 4):

1. Explain the geometrical isomerism in double bonds (3 Marks)

2. What are the rules of assigning R-S notation? (3 Marks)

3. (a) What are conducting polymers? How it is classified? Give the preparation of polyaniline
(10 Marks)

(b) Draw the stereoisomers possible for CH3-(CHOH)2-COOH (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 5 (CO 5):

1. What is degree of hardness? (3 Marks)

2. Define BOD and COD (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain the EDTA estimation of hardness (10 Marks)

(b) Standard hard water contains 20 g of CaCO3 per liter,50 mL of this required 30mL of EDTA
solution, 50mL of sample water required 20mL of EDTA solution. 50mL sample water after boiling
required 14 mL EDTA solution. Calculate the temporary hardness of the given sample of water, in
terms of ppm. (4 Marks)

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Total Pages:
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CYT100,
Course Name: ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks Marks
1 What is potentiometric titration? How the end point is determined graphically? (3)
2 What is Galvanic series? How is it different from electrochemical series? (3)
3 Which of the following molecules can give IR absorption? Give reason? (3)
(a) O2 (b) H2O (c) N2 (d) HCl
4 Which of the following molecules show UV-Visible absorption? Give reason. (3)
(a) Ethane (b) Butadiene (c) Benzene
5 What are the visualization techniques used in TLC? (3)
6 Write the three important applications of nanomaterials. (3)
7 Draw the Fischer projection formula and find R-S notation of (3)

8 Write the structure of a) Polypyrroleb) Kevlar. (3

9 What is break point chlorination? (3)
10 What is reverse osmosis? (3)

PART B
Answer any one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks
Module 1
11 a) Give the construction of Li-ion cell. Give the reactions that take place at the (10)
electrodes during charging and discharging. What happens to anodic material when
the cell is 100% charged.
b) Calculate the standard electrode potential of Cu, if its electrode potential at 25 °C (4)
2+
is 0.296 V and the concentration of Cu is 0.015 M.
OR
12 a) Explain the mechanism of electrochemical corrosion of iron in oxygen rich and oxygen (10)
deficient acidic and basic environments.
b) Given below are reduction potentials of some species (4)

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5e → Mn2+ + 4H2O; E0 = +1.51 V

Cl2 + 2e → 2Cl- ; E0 = +1.36 V

S2O82- + 2e → 2SO42- ; E0 = +1.98 V

Use the above data to examine whether the acids, dil. HCl and dil. H2SO4 , can be used
to provide acid medium in redox titrations involving KMnO4.
Module 2
13 a) What is spin-spin splitting? Draw the NMR spectrum of (i) CH3 CH2CH2 Br (ii) (10)
CH3CH(Br)CH3 Explain how NMR spectrum can be used to identify the two isomers.
b) A dye solution of concentration 0.08M shows absorbance of 0.012 at 600 nm; while a (4)
test solution of same dye shows absorbance of 0.084 under same conditions. Find the
concentration of the test solution.
OR
14 a) Explain the basic principle of UV-Visible spectroscopy. What are the possible (10)
electronic transitions? Explain with examples.
b) Sketch the vibrational modes of CO2 and H2O. Which of them are IR active? (4)
 Module 3
15 a) Explain the principle, instrumentation and procedure involved in gas chromatography. (10)
b) Explain the DTA of CaC2O4.H2O with a neat sketch. (4)
OR
16 a) Explain the various chemical methods used for the synthesis of nanomaterial (10)
b) How TGA is used to analyse the thermal stability of polymers? (4)

Module 4

17 a) What are conformers? Draw thecis and transisomers of 1, 3-dimethylcylohexane. (10)

Which conformer (chair form) is more stable in each case?
b) What is ABS? Give properties and applications. (4)
OR
18 a) Explain the various structural isomers with suitable example. (10)
b) What is OLED? Draw a labelled diagram. (4)
Module 5
19 a) What are ion exchange resins? Explain ion exchange process for removal of hardness (10)
of water? How exhausted resins are regenerated?
b) 50 mL sewage water is diluted to 2000 mL with dilution water; the initial dissolved (4)
oxygen was 7.7 ppm. The dissolved oxygen level after 5 days of incubation was 2.4
ppm. Find the BOD of the sewage.
OR
20 a) What are the different steps in sewage treatment? Give the flow diagram. Explain the (10)
working of trickling filter.
b) Calculate the temporary and permanent hardness of a water sample which contains (4)
[Ca2+] = 160 mg/L, [Mg2+] = 192 mg/L and [HCO3-] = 122 mg/L.

Syllabus

Module 1

Electrochemistry and Corrosion

Introduction - Differences between electrolytic and electrochemical cells - Daniel cell - redox
reactions - cell representation. Different types of electrodes (brief) - Reference electrodes - SHE -
Calomel electrode - Glass Electrode - Construction and Working. Single electrode potential -
definition - Helmholtz electrical double layer -Determination of E0 using calomel
electrode.Determination of pH using glass electrode.Electrochemical series and its applications. Free
energy and EMF - Nernst Equation - Derivation - single electrode and cell (Numericals) -Application -
Variation of emf with temperature. Potentiometric titration - Introduction -Redox titration
only.Lithiumion cell - construction and working.Conductivity- Measurement of conductivity of a
solution (Numericals).

Corrosion-Electrochemicalcorrosion – mechanism. Galvanic series- cathodic protection - electroless

plating –Copper and Nickel plating.
Module 2

Spectroscopic Techniques and Applications

Introduction- Types of spectrum - electromagnetic spectrum - molecular energy levels - Beer

Lambert’s law (Numericals). UV-Visible Spectroscopy – Principle - Types of electronic transitions -
Energy level diagram of ethane, butadiene, benzene and hexatriene. Instrumentation of UV-Visible
spectrometer and applications.IR-Spectroscopy – Principle - Number of vibrational modes -
Vibrational energy states of a diatomic molecule and -Determination of force constant of diatomic
molecule (Numericals) –Applications. 1H NMR spectroscopy – Principle - Relation between field
strength and frequency - chemical shift - spin-spin splitting (spectral problems ) - coupling constant
(definition) - applications of NMR- including MRI (brief).

Module 3

Instrumental Methods and Nanomaterials

Thermal analysis –TGA- Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and applications – TGA of
CaC2O4.H2O and polymers. DTA-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and applications - DTA of
CaC2O4.H2O. Chromatographic methods - Basic principles and applications of column and TLC-
Retention factor. GC and HPLC-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) - retention time and
applications.

Nanomaterials - Definition - Classification - Chemical methods of preparation - Hydrolysis and

Reduction - Applications of nanomaterials - Surface characterisation -SEM – Principle and
instrumentation (block diagram).

Module 4

Stereochemistry and Polymer Chemistry

Isomerism-Structural, chain, position, functional, tautomerism and matamerism - Definition with

examples - Representation of 3D structures-Newman, Sawhorse, Wedge and Fischer projection of
substituted methane and ethane. Stereoisomerism - Geometrical isomerism in double bonds and
cycloalkanes (cis-trans and E-Z notations). R-S Notation – Rules and examples - Optical isomerism,
Chirality, Enantiomers and Diastereoisomers-Definition with examples.Conformational analysis of
ethane, butane, cyclohexane, mono and di methyl substituted cyclohexane.

Copolymers - Definition - Types - Random, Alternating, Block and Graft copolymers - ABS -
preparation, properties and applications.Kevlar-preparation, properties and applications.Conducting
polymers - Doping -Polyaniline and Polypyrrole - preparation properties and applications. OLED -
Principle, construction and advantages.

Module 5

Water Chemistry and Sewage Water Treatment

Water characteristics - Hardness - Types of hardness- Temporary and Permanent - Disadvantages of

hard water -Units of hardness- ppm and mg/L -Degree of hardness (Numericals) - Estimation of
hardness-EDTA method (Numericals). Water softening methods-Ion exchange process-Principle,
procedure and advantages. Reverse osmosis – principle, process and advantages. Municipal water
treatment (brief) - Disinfection methods - chlorination, ozone andUV irradiation.

Dissolved oxygen (DO) -Estimation (only brief procedure-Winkler’s method), BOD and COD-
definition, estimation (only brief procedure) and significance (Numericals). Sewage water treatment
- Primary, Secondary and Tertiary - Flow diagram -Trickling filter and UASB process.

Text Books

1. B. L. Tembe, Kamaluddin, M. S. Krishnan, “Engineering Chemistry (NPTEL Web-book)”,

2018.

2. P. W. Atkins, “Physical Chemistry”, Oxford University Press, 10th edn., 2014.

Reference Books

1. C. N. Banwell, “Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy”, McGraw-Hill, 4thedn., 1995.

2. Donald L. Pavia, “Introduction to Spectroscopy”, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd., 2015.

3. B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma, M. S. Pathania, “Principles of Physical Chemistry”, Vishal Publishing

Co., 47th Edition, 2017.

4. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merritt, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, CBS Publishers, 7th Edition,

2005.

5. Ernest L. Eliel, Samuel H. Wilen, “Stereo-chemistry of Organic Compounds”, WILEY, 2008.

6. Raymond B. Seymour, Charles E. Carraher, “Polymer Chemistry: An Introduction”, Marcel

Dekker Inc; 4th Revised Edition, 1996.
7. MuhammedArif, Annette Fernandez, Kavitha P. Nair “Engineering Chemistry”, Owl Books,
2019.

8. Ahad J., “Engineering Chemistry”, Jai Publication, 2019.

9. Roy K. Varghese, “Engineering Chemistry”, Crownplus Publishers, 2019.

10. Soney C. George,RinoLaly Jose, “Text Book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company
Pvt Ltd, 2019.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
(hrs)

1 Electrochemistry and Corrosion 9

1.1 Introduction - Differences between electrolytic and electrochemical cells- Daniel 2

cell - redox reactions - cell representation. Different types of electrodes (brief) -
Reference electrodes- SHE - Calomel electrode - Glass Electrode - Construction
and Working.

1.2 Single electrode potential – definition - Helmholtz electrical double layer - 3

Determination of E0 using calomel electrode. Determination of pH using glass
electrode. Electrochemical series and its applications. Free energy and EMF -
Nernst Equation – Derivation - single electrode and cell (Numericals) -Application
-Variation of emf with temperature.

1.3 Potentiometric titration - Introduction -Redox titration only. Lithiumion cell - 2

construction and working. Conductivity- Measurement of conductivity of a
solution (Numericals).

1.4 Corrosion-Electrochemicalcorrosion – mechanism. Galvanic series- cathodic 2

protection - electroless plating –Copper and Nickel plating.

2 Spectroscopic Techniques and Applications 9

2.1 Introduction- Types of spectrum - electromagnetic spectrum - molecular energy 2

levels - Beer Lambert’s law (Numericals).

2.2 UV-Visible Spectroscopy – Principle - Types of electronic transitions - Energy 2

level diagram of ethane, butadiene, benzene and hexatriene. Instrumentation of
UV-Visible spectrometer and applications.

2.3 IR-Spectroscopy – Principle - Number of vibrational modes -Vibrational energy 2

states of a diatomic molecule and -Determination of force constant of diatomic
molecule (Numericals) –Applications.
1
2.4 H NMR spectroscopy – Principle - Relation between field strength and frequency 3
- chemical shift - spin-spin splitting (spectral problems ) - coupling constant
(definition) - applications of NMR- including MRI (brief).

3 Instrumental Methods and Nanomaterials 9

3.1 Thermal analysis –TGA- Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and 2

applications – TGA of CaC2O4.H2O and polymers. DTA-Principle, instrumentation
(block diagram) and applications - DTA of CaC2O4.H2O.
3.2 Chromatographic methods - Basic principles and applications of column and TLC- 2
Retention factor.

3.3 GC and HPLC-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) - retention time and 2

applications.

3.4 Nanomaterials - Definition - Classification - Chemical methods of preparation - 3

Hydrolysis and Reduction - Applications of nanomaterials - Surface
characterisation -SEM – Principle and instrumentation (block diagram).

4 Stereochemistry and Polymer Chemistry 9

4.1 Isomerism-Structural, chain, position, functional, tautomerism and matamerism 2

- Definition with examples - Representation of 3D structures-Newman, Sawhorse,
Wedge and Fischer projection of substituted methane and ethane.
Stereoisomerism - Geometrical isomerism in double bonds and cycloalkanes (cis-
trans and E-Z notations).

4.2 R-S Notation – Rules and examples - Optical isomerism, Chirality, Enantiomers 1
and Diastereoisomers-Definition with examples.

4.3 Conformational analysis of ethane, butane, cyclohexane, mono and di methyl 2

substituted cyclohexane.

4.4 Copolymers - Definition - Types - Random, Alternating, Block and Graft 4

copolymers - ABS - preparation, properties and applications. Kevlar-preparation,
properties and applications. Conducting polymers - Doping -Polyaniline and
Polypyrrole - preparation properties and applications. OLED - Principle,
construction and advantages.

5 Water Chemistry and Sewage Water Treatment 9

5.1 Water characteristics - Hardness - Types of hardness- Temporary and Permanent 3

- Disadvantages of hard water -Units of hardness- ppm and mg/L -Degree of
hardness (Numericals) - Estimation of hardness-EDTA method (Numericals).
Water softening methods-Ion exchange process-Principle, procedure and
advantages. Reverse osmosis – principle, process and advantages.

5.2 Municipal water treatment (brief) - Disinfection methods - chlorination, ozone 2

andUV irradiation.

5.3 Dissolved oxygen (DO) -Estimation (only brief procedure-Winkler’s method), BOD 2
and COD-definition, estimation (only brief procedure) and significance
(Numericals).

5.4 Sewage water treatment - Primary, Secondary and Tertiary - Flow diagram - 2
Trickling filter and UASB process.
 EST ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of Introduction
100 MECHANICS ESC 2 1 0 3 2019

Preamble: Goal of this course is to expose the students to the fundamental concepts of mechanics
and enhance their problem-solving skills. It introduces students to the influence of applied force
system and the geometrical properties of the rigid bodies while stationary or in motion. After this
course students will be able to recognize similar problems in real-world situations and respond
accordingly.
Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Recall principles and theorems related to rigid body mechanics

CO 2 Identify and describe the components of system of forces acting on the rigid body

Apply the conditions of equilibrium to various practical problems involving different force
CO 3 system.

CO 4 Choose appropriate theorems, principles or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.

CO 5 Solve problems involving rigid bodies, applying the properties of distributed areas and masses

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 2 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks) End Semester Examination (Marks)
Remember 10 10 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 30 30 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

marks marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Part A
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): (One question from each module to meet the course objective 1: To
recall principles and theorems related to rigid body mechanics)
1. Explain D’Alembert’s principle

2. Distinguish static and dynamic friction

3. State and explain perpendicular axis theorem

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) (One question from each module to meet the course objective 2: To
identify and describe the components of system of forces acting on the rigid body)

1. A simply supported beam AB of span 5 m is carrying point loads 5 kN, 3 kN and 2 kN at 1m, 3m
and 4m respectively from support A. Calculate the support reaction at B.

2. A gymnast holding onto a bar, is suspended motionless in mid-air. The bar is supported by two
ropes that attach to the ceiling. Diagram the forces acting on the combination of gymnast and bar

3. While you are riding your bike, you turn a corner following a circular arc. Illustrate the forces that
act on your bike to keep you along the circular path ?

Part B

All the questions under this section shall assess the learning levels corresponding to the course
outcomes listed below.
 To apply the conditions of equilibrium to variou
variouss practical problems involving different force
CO 3
system.

CO 4 To choose appropriate theorems, principles or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.

To solve problems involving rigid bodies, applying the properties of distributed areas and
CO 5 masses

1. Two rollers each of weight 100 N are supported by an inclined plane and a vertical wall. Find the
reaction at the points of contact A, B, C. Assume all the surfaces to be smooth.

Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium Applying – (Sketch the free
CO 3 to various practical problems involving body diagram that represent 4
different force system. equilibrium state of the body )

To choose appropriate theorems, Applying (Choose the equations

CO 4 principles or formulae to solve and formulae required for 4
problems of mechanics. calculation)

To solve problems involving rigid Applying ( Solve the problem

CO 5 bodies, applying the properties of based on the descriptions given 6
distributed areas and masses in CO3 and CO4)

Total 14

2. A cylindrical disc, 50 cm diameter and cm thickness, is in contact with a horizontal conveyor belts
running at uniform speeds of 5 m/s. Assuming there is no slip at points of contact determine (i)
angular velocity of disc (ii) Angular acceleration of disc if velocity of conveyor changes to 8 m/s. Also
compute the moment acting about the axis of the disc in both cases.
 Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Sketch the
CO 3 various practical problems involving different free body diagram that 4
force system. represent state of the
body )
Applying (Choose the
To choose appropriate theorems, principles or
CO 4 equations and formulae 4
formulae to solve problems of mechanics.
required for calculation)

Applying ( Solve the

To solve problems involving rigid bodies,
problem based on the
CO 5 applying the properties of distributed areas 6
descriptions given in CO3
and masses
and CO4)

Total 14

3. Determine the centroid of the given section

Course Marks
outcome Description of course outcome Learning level assessed allocat
identifier ed
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Illustrate the
CO 3 various practical problems involving computation of centroid for 4
different force system. the given geometrical shape)
To choose appropriate theorems, Applying (Choose the
CO 4 principles or formulae to solve problems equations and formulae 4
of mechanics. required for calculation)

To solve problems involving rigid bodies, Applying ( Solve the problem 6

CO 5
applying the properties of distributed based on the descriptions
 areas and masses given in CO3 and CO4)

Total 14

4. A rectangular hole is made in a triangular section as shown. Find moment of inertia about the
section x-x passing through the CG of the section and parallel to BC.

Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Illustrate the 4

CO 3 various practical problems involving different computation of moment

force system. of inertia for the given
geometrical shape)
Applying (Choose the
To choose appropriate theorems, principles
CO 4 equations and formulae 4
or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.
required for calculation)

Applying ( Solve the

To solve problems involving rigid bodies,
problem based on the
CO 5 applying the properties of distributed areas 6
descriptions given in
and masses
CO3 and CO4)

Total 14
 Model Question Paper

QP CODE:
Reg No.:_______________
Name:__________________________ ___

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 100

ENGINEERING MECHANICS

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part A

(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain D’Alembert’s principle

2. Distinguish static and dynamic frictioni.

3. State and explain perpendicular axis theorem.

4. A simply supported beam AB of span 5 m is carrying point loads 5 kN, 3 kN and 2 kN at 1m, 3m
and 4m respectively from support A. Calculate the support reaction at B.

5. A gymnast holding onto a bar, is suspended motionless in mid-air. The bar is supported by two
ropes that attach to the ceiling. Diagram the forces acting on the combination of gymnast and bar

6. While you are riding your bike, you turn a corner following a circular arc. Illustrate the forces that
act on your bike to keep you along the circular path ?

7. Compare damped and undamped free vibrations.

8. State the equation of motion of a rotating rigid body, rotating about its fixed axis.

9. Illustrate the significance of instantaneous centre in the analysis of rigid body undergoing
rotational motion.

10. Highlight the principles of mechanics applied in the evaluation of elastic collusion of rigid bodies.

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module -I

11. Two identical rollers each of weight 100 N are supported by an inclined plane, making an angle
of 30o with the vertical, and a vertical wall. Find the reaction at the points of contact A, B, C. Assume
all the surfaces to be smooth. (14 marks)
 C
A
B

12. A string tied to a wall is made to pass over a pulley placed 2m away from it. A weight P is
attached to the string such that the string stretches by 2m from the support on the wall to the
location of attachment of weight. Determine the force P required to maintain 200 kg body in
position for  = 30o, The diameter of pulley B is negligible. (14 marks)

Module – 2
13. Two blocks A & B are resting against a wall and the floor as shown in figure below. Find the
value of horizontal force P applied to the lower block that will hold the system in equilibrium.
Coefficient of friction are : 0.25 at the floor, 0.3 at the wall and 0.2 between the blocks.
(14 marks)

14. A beam is hinged at A and roller supported at B. It is acted upon by loads as shown below.
Find the reactions at A & B. (14 marks)

Module – 3
15. A rectangular hole is made in a triangular section as shown. Find moment of inertia about the
section x-x passing through the CG of the section and parallel to BC. (14 marks)
16. Support A has ball and socket connection. Roller support at B prevents motion in the —z
direction. Corner C is tied to D by a rope. The triangle is weightless. Determine the unknown force
components acting at A, B, and C. (14 marks)

Module - 4

17. A cricket ball is thrown by a fielder from a height of 2m at an angle of 300 to the horizontal with
an initial velocity of 20 m/s , hits the wickets at a height of 0.5 m from the ground. How far was the
fielder from the wicket? (14 marks)

18. An engine of weight 500 kN pull a train weighing 1500 kN up an incline of 1 in 100. The train
starts from rest and moves with constant acceleration against a resistance of 5 N/kN. It attains a
maximum speed of 36 kmph in 1 km distance. Determine the tension in the coupling between train
and engine and the traction force developed by the engine. (14marks)

Module – 5

19. A cylindrical disc, 50 cm diameter and 10 cm thickness having mass of 10 kg, is in contact with a
horizontal conveyor belt running at uniform speeds of 5 m/s. Assuming there is no slip at points of
contact determine (i) angular velocity of disc (ii) Angular acceleration of disc if velocity of conveyor
changes to 8 m/s in 10 seconds. Also compute the moment acting about the axis of the disc in both
cases. (14 marks)

20. A wheel rotating about fixed axis at 20 rpm is uniformly accelerated for 70 seconds during which
time it makes 50 revolutions. Find the (i) angular velocity at the end of this interval and (ii) time
required for the velocity to reach 100 revolutions per minute. (14 marks)
 SYLLABUS
Module 1
Introduction to Engineering Mechanics-statics-basic principles of statics-Parallelogram law,
equilibrium law, principles of superposition and transmissibility, law of action and reaction(review)
free body diagrams.
Concurrent coplanar forces-composition and resolution of forces-resultant and equilibrium
equations – methods of projections – methods of moments – Varignon’s Theorem of moments.

Module 2
Friction – sliding friction - Coulomb’s laws of friction – analysis of single bodies –wedges, ladder-
analysis of connected bodies .
Parallel coplanar forces – couple - resultant of parallel forces – centre of parallel forces – equilibrium
of parallel forces – Simple beam subject to concentrated vertical loads. General coplanar force
system - resultant and equilibrium equations.

Module 3
Centroid of composite areas- – moment of inertia-parallel axis and perpendicular axis theorems.
Polar moment of inertia,radius of gyration,mass moment of inertia-ring,cylinder and disc.
Theorem of Pappus Guldinus(demonstration only)
Forces in space - vectorial representation of forces, moments and couples –resultant and equilibrium
equations – concurrent forces in space (simple problems only)

Module 4
Dynamics – rectilinear translation - equations of kinematics(review)
kinetics – equation of motion – D’Alembert’s principle. – motion on horizontal and inclined
surfaces, motion of connected bodies. Impulse momentum equation and work energy equation
(concepts only).
Curvilinear translation - equations of kinematics –projectile motion(review), kinetics – equation of
motion. Moment of momentum and work energy equation (concepts only).

Module 5
Rotation – kinematics of rotation- equation of motion for a rigid body rotating about a fixed axis –
rotation under a constant moment.
Plane motion of rigid body – instantaneous centre of rotation (concept only).
Simple harmonic motion – free vibration –degree of freedom- undamped free vibration of spring
mass system-effect of damping(concept only)

Text Books
1. Timoshenko and Young, Engineering Mechanics, McGraw Hill Publishers
2. Shames, I. H., Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India.
3. R. C. Hibbeler and Ashok Gupta, Engineering Mechanics, Vol. I statics, Vol II Dynamics, Pearson
Education.
References
1. Merriam J. L and Kraige L. G., Engineering Mechanics - Vols. 1 and 2, John Wiley.
2. Tayal A K, Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics, Umesh Publications
3. Bhavikkatti, S.S., Engineering Mechanics, New Age International Publishers
4. F.P.Beer abd E.R.Johnston (2011), Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Vol.I-Statics, Vol.II-Dynamics,
9th Ed, Tata McGraw Hill
5. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G, Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

Course
No. of
Module Topic outcomes
Hours
addressed

1 Module 1 Total: 7

Introduction to engineering mechanics – introduction on statics and

dynamics - Basic principles of statics – Parellogram law, equilibrium CO1 and
1.1 1
law – Superposition and transmissibility, law of action and reaction CO2
(review the topics)

Free body diagrams.

Degree of freedom-types of supports and nature of reactions -
1.2 CO1 and 1
exercises for free body diagram preparation – composition and
CO2
resolution of forces, resultant and equilibrium equations (review the
topics) - numerical exercises for illustration.
Concurrent coplanar forces - analysis of concurrent forces -methods CO1 and
1.3 of projections – illustrative numerical exercise – teacher assisted 1
CO2
problem solving.
Analysis of concurrent forces -methods of moment-Varignon’s CO1 and
1.4 Theorem of Moments - illustrative numerical exercise– teacher 1
CO2
assisted problem solving.
Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4
1.5 1
Session I. and CO5

Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4 1

1.6 and CO5
Session II – learning review quiz.

Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4

1.7 and CO5 1
Session III.
2 Module 2 Total: 7

2.1 Friction – sliding friction - Coulomb’s laws of friction – analysis of CO1 and 1
single bodies –illustrative examples on wedges and ladder-teacher CO2
 assisted problem solving tutorials using problems from wedges and
ladder.
2.2 Problems on friction - analysis of connected bodies. illustrative CO3, CO4 1
numerical exercise– teacher assisted problem solving. and CO5

2.3 Problems on friction-extended problem solving CO3,C04 1

and CO5
2.4 Parallel coplanar forces – couple - resultant of parallel forces – centre CO1 and 1
of parallel forces – equilibrium of parallel forces – Simple beam CO2
subject to concentrated vertical loads.
2.5 General coplanar force system - resultant and equilibrium equations - CO1 and 1
illustrative examples- teacher assisted problem solving. CO2

2.6 General coplanar force system-resultant and equilibrium equations - CO3, CO4 1
illustrative examples and CO5
2.7 General coplanar force system - Extended problem solving - Quiz to CO3, CO4 1
evaluate learning level. and CO5
3 Module 3 Total: 7

3.1 Centroid of simple and regular geometrical shapes – centroid of CO1 and
figures in combination - composite areas- examples for illustration – CO2 1
problems for practice to be done by self.
3.2 Moment of inertia- parallel axis theorem –examples for illustration - CO1 and
1
problems for practice to be done by self. CO2

3.3 Moment of inertia - perpendicular axis theorem - example for CO1 and
illustration to be given as hand out and discussion on the solved CO2 1
example.
3.4 Solutions to practice problems – problems related to centroid and CO3, CO4 1
moment of inertia - problems for practice to be done by self. and CO5
3.5 Polar moment of inertia, Radius of gyration. CO1 and
1
Mass moment of inertia of ring, cylinder and uniform disc. CO2
Theorem of Pappus Guldinus - Demonstration
3.6 Introduction to forces in space – vectorial representation of forces, CO1,and
moments and couples – simple problems to illustrate vector CO2 1
representations of forces, moments and couples to be done in class.
3.7 Solution to practice problems - resultant and equilibrium equations
for concurrent forces in space – concurrent forces in space - 2 simple CO3,CO4 1
problems to illustrate the application of resultant and equilibrium and CO5
equations for concurrent forces in space.
4 Module 4 Total: 7
 Introduction to dynamics – review of rectilinear translation - CO1 and
4.1 equations of kinematics – problems to review the concepts – CO2 1
additional problems involving extended application as exercises .

Solutions to exercises with necessary explanation given as hand out –

introduction to kinetics – equation of motion – D’Alembert’s principle CO1 and
4.2 1
– illustration of the concepts using one numerical exercise from CO2
motion on horizontal and inclined surfaces.
Motion of connected bodies - example for illustration to be given as CO3, CO4 1
4.3 hand out and discussion on the solved example – problems for and CO5
practice to be done by self.
4.4 Motion of connected bodies-extended problem solving. CO3, CO4 1
& CO5
Curvilinear translation - Review of kinematics –projectile motion – 1
simple problems to review the concepts – introduction to kinetics – CO3, CO4
4.5
equation of motion – illustration of the concepts using numerical & CO5
exercises.

4.6 Extended problem solving – rectilinear and curvilinear translation. CO3, CO4 1
& CO5
Concepts on Impulse momentum equation and work energy equation 1
(rectilinear translation – discussions to bring out difference between
4.7 CO1 and
elastic and inelastic collusions).
CO2
Concepts on Moment of momentum and work energy equation
(curvilinear translation).
5 Module 5 Total: 7

Rotation – kinematics of rotation- equation of motion for a rigid body CO1 and 1
5.1 rotating about a fixed axis – simple problems for illustration. CO2
Rotation under a constant moment – teacher assisted problem 1
5.2 solving. CO3,CO4
and CO5
5.3 Rotation under a constant moment - extended problem solving. CO3, CO4 1
and CO5
Plane motion of rigid body- instantaneous centre of rotation (concept CO1 and 1
5.4
only). CO2

Introduction to harmonic oscillation –free vibrations - simple 1

harmonic motion – differential equation and solution.
CO1 and
5.5 Degree of freedom – examples of single degree of freedom (SDOF) CO2
systems – Idealisation of mechanical systems as spring-mass systems
(concept only).
 SDOF spring mass system –equation of motion – undamped free 1
vibration response - concept of natural frequency. CO1 and
5.6 Free vibration response due to initial conditions. CO2
Simple problems on determination of natural frequency and free
vibration response to test the understanding level.
Free vibration analysis of SDOF spring-mass systems – Problem solving CO1and 1
5.7
Effect of damping on free vibration response (concept only). CO2
 EST BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
130 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING INTRODUCTION
ESC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble:
This course aims to (1) equip the students with an understanding of the fundamental principles of
electrical engineering(2) provide an overview of evolution of electronics, and introduce the working
principle and examples of fundamental electronic devices and circuits (3) provide an overview of
evolution of communication systems, and introduce the basic concepts in radio communication.

Prerequisite: Physics and Mathematics (Pre-university level)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply fundamental concepts and circuit laws to solve simple DC electric circuits
CO 2 Develop and solve models of magnetic circuits
CO 3 Apply the fundamental laws of electrical engineering to solve simple ac circuits in steady
state
CO 4 Describe working of a voltage amplifier
CO 5 Outline the principle of an electronic instrumentation system
CO 6 Explain the principle of radio and cellular communication

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 2 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 4 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 6 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
Assessment Pattern

Basic Electrical Engineering Basic Electronics Engineering

Bloom’s Category Continuous End Semester Continuous End Semester
Assessment Tests Examination Assessment Tests Examination
Test 1 Test 2 (Marks) Test 1 Test 2 (Marks)
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 0 0 10 10 10 20
Understand 12.5 12.5 20 15 15 30
Apply 12.5 12.5 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE marks ESE marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part I – Basic Electrical Engineering and
Part II – Basic Electronics Engineering. Part I and PART II carries 50 marks each. For the end semester
examination, part I contain 2 parts - Part A and Part B. Part A contain 5 questions carrying 4 marks
each (not exceeding 2 questions from each module). Part B contains 2 questions from each module
out of which one to be answered. Each question carries 10 mark and can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions. The pattern for end semester examination for part II is same as that of part I. However,
student should answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Solve problems based on current division rule.

2. Solve problems with Mesh/node analysis.

3. Solve problems on Wye-Delta Transformation.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Problems on series magnetic circuits

2. Problems on parallel magnetic circuits

3. Problems on composite magnetic ciruits

4. Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. problems on self inductance, mutual inductance and coefficient of coupling

2. problems on rms and average values of periodic waveforms

3. problems on series ac circuits

4. Compare star and Delta connected 3 phase AC systems.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe working of a voltage amplifier

1.What is the need of voltage divider biasing in an RC coupled amplifier?

2. Define operating point in the context of a BJT amplifier.

3. Why is it required to have a voltage amplifier in a public address system?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Outline the principle of an electronic instrumentation system

1. Draw the block diagram of an electronic instrumentation system.

2. What is a transducer?

3. Explain the working principle of operation of digital multimeter.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Explain the principle of radio and cellular communication

1. What is the working principle of an antenna when used in a radio transmitter?

2. What is the need of two separate sections RF section and IF section in a super heterodyne
receiver?

3. What is meant by a cell in a cellular communication?

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: Pages: 3

Reg No.:_______________

Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 130

Course Name: BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets

PART I

BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions; each question carries 4 marks.

1. Calculate the current through the 4  resistor in the circuit shown, applying current
division rule:
2. Calculate the RMS and average values of a purely sinusoidal current having peak value
15A.

3. An alternating voltage of (80+j60)V is applied to an RX circuit and the current flowing

through the circuit is (-4+j10)A. Calculate the impedance of the circuit in rectangular and
polar forms. Also determine if X is inductive or capacitive.

4. Derive the relation between line and phase values of voltage in a three phase star
connected system.

5. Compare electric and magnetic circuits. (5x4=20)

PART B

Answer one question from each module; each question carries 10 marks.

Module 1

6. . Calculate the node voltages in the circuit shown, applying node analysis:

7. (a) State and explain Kirchhoff’s laws. (4 marks)

(b) Calculate the current through the galvanometer (G) in the circuit shown:

(6 marks)
 Module 2

8. (a) State and explain Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction with examples. (4 marks)

(b) Differentiate between statically and dynamically induced emf. A conductor of length
0.5m moves in a uniform magnetic field of flux density 1.1T at a velocity of 30m/s.
Calculate the emf induced in the conductor if the direction of motion of the conductor is
inclined at 600 to the direction of field. (6 marks)

9. (a) Derive the amplitude factor and form factor of a purely sinusoidal waveform. (5 marks)

(b) A current wave is made up of two components-a 5A dc component and a 50Hz ac

component, which is a sinusoidal wave with a peak value of 5A. Sketch the resultant
waveform and determine its RMS and average values. (5 marks)

Module 3

10. Draw the power triangle and define active, reactive and apparent powers in ac circuits.
Two coils A and B are connected in series across a 240V, 50Hz supply. The resistance of
A is 5  and the inductance of B is 0.015H. If the input from the supply is 3kW and
2kVAR, find the inductance of A and the resistance of B. Also calculate the voltage across
each coil.

11. A balanced three phase load consists of three coils each having resistance of 4Ω and
inductance 0.02H. It is connected to a 415V, 50Hz, 3-phase ac supply. Determine the
phase voltage, phase current, power factor and active power when the loads are connected
in (i) star (ii) delta.

(3x10=30)

PART II

BASIC ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions; each question carries 4 marks.

1. Give the specifications of a resistor. The colour bands marked on a resistor are Blue, Grey,
Yellow and Gold. What are the minimum and maximum resistance values expected from that
resistance?
2. What is meant by avalanche breakdown?
3. Explain the working of a full-wave bridge rectifier.
4. Discuss the role of coupling and bypass capacitors in a single stage RC coupled amplifier.
5. Differentiate AM and FM communication systems.

(5x4=20)
 PART B

Answer one question from each module; each question carries 10 marks.

Module 4
6. a) Explain with diagram the principle of operation of an NPN transistor. (5)
b) Sketch and explain the typical input-output characteristics of a BJT when connected in
common emitter configuration. (5)
OR
7. a) Explain the formation of a potential barrier in a P-N junction diode. (5)
b) What do you understand by Avalanche breakdown? Draw and explain the V-I characteristics
of a P-N junction and Zener diode. (5)
Module 5
8. a) With a neat circuit diagram, explain the working of an RC coupled amplifier. (6)
b) Draw the frequency response characteristics of an RC coupled amplifier and state the reasons
for the reduction of gain at lower and higher frequencies. (4)
OR
9. a) With the help of block diagram, explain how an electronic instrumentation system. (6)
b) Explain the principle of an antenna. (4)

Module 6
10. a) With the help of a block diagram, explain the working of Super hetrodyne receiver. (6)
b) Explain the importance of antenna in a communication system. (4)
OR
11. a) With neat sketches explain a cellular communication system. (5)
b) Explain GSM communication with the help of a block diagram. (5)
(3x10=30)
 SYLLABUS

MODULE 1: Elementary Concepts of Electric Circuits

Elementary concepts of DC electric circuits: Basic Terminology including voltage, current, power,
resistance, emf; Resistances in series and parallel; Current and Voltage Division Rules; Capacitors &
Inductors: V-I relations and energy stored. Ohms Law and Kirchhoff's laws-Problems; Star-delta
conversion (resistive networks only-derivation not required)-problems.

Analysis of DC electric circuits: Mesh current method - Matrix representation - Solution of network
equations. Node voltage methods-matrix representation-solution of network equations by matrix
methods. Numerical problems.

MODULE 2: Elementary Concepts of Magnetic circuits, Electromagnetic Induction and AC

fundamentals

Magnetic Circuits: Basic Terminology: MMF, field strength, flux density, reluctance - comparison
between electric and magnetic circuits- Series and parallel magnetic circuits with composite
materials, numerical problems.

Electromagnetic Induction: Faraday's laws, problems, Lenz's law- statically induced and dynamically
induced emfs - Self-inductance and mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling

Alternating Current fundamentals: Generation of alternating voltages-Representation of sinusoidal

waveforms: frequency, period, Average, RMS values and form factor of waveforms-Numerical
Problems.

MODULE 3: AC Circuits

AC Circuits: Phasor representation of sinusoidal quantities. Trignometric, Rectangular, Polar and

complex forms. Analysis of simple AC circuits: Purely resistive, inductive & capacitive circuits;
Inductive and capacitive reactance, concept of impedance. Average Power Power factor. Analysis of
RL, RC and RLC series circuits-active, reactive and apparent power. Simple numerical problems.

Three phase AC systems: Generation of three phase voltages; advantages of three phase systems,
star and delta connections (balanced only), relation between line and phase voltages, line and phase
currents- Numerical problems

MODULE 4
Introduction to Semiconductor devices: Evolution of electronics – Vacuum tubes to nano
electronics. Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors (constructional features not required): types,
specifications. Standard values, color coding. PN Junction diode: Principle of operation, V-I
characteristics, principle of avalanche breakdown. Bipolar Junction Transistors: PNP and NPN
structures, Principle of operation, relation between current gains in CE, CB and CC, input and
output characteristics of common emitter configuration.
MODULE 5
Basic electronic circuits and instrumentation: Rectifiers and power supplies: Block diagram
description of a dc power supply, Working of a full wave bridge rectifier, capacitor filter (no
analysis), working of simple zener voltage regulator. Amplifiers: Block diagram of Public Address
system, Circuit diagram and working of common emitter (RC coupled) amplifier with its frequency
response, Concept of voltage divider biasing. Electronic Instrumentation: Block diagram of an
electronic instrumentation system.

MODULE 6
Introduction to Communication Systems: Evolution of communication systems – Telegraphy to 5G.
Radio communication: principle of AM & FM, frequency bands used for various communication
systems, block diagram of super heterodyne receiver, Principle of antenna – radiation from
accelerated charge. Mobile communication: basic principles of cellular communications, principle
and block diagram of GSM.

Text Books
1. D P Kothari and I J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. D C Kulshreshtha, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. ChinmoySaha, Arindham Halder and Debarati Ganguly, Basic Electronics - Principles and
Applications, Cambridge University Press, 2018.
4. M.S.Sukhija and T.K.Nagsarkar, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Oxford University
Press, 2012.
5. Wayne Tomasi and Neil Storey, A Textbook On Basic Communication and Information
Engineering, Pearson, 2010.

Reference Books
1. Del Toro V, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Pearson Education.
2. T. K. Nagsarkar, M. S. Sukhija, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Oxford Higher Education.
3. Hayt W H, Kemmerly J E, and Durbin S M, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, Tata McGraw-Hill
4. Hughes, “Electrical and Electronic Technology”, Pearson Education.
5. V. N. Mittle and Arvind Mittal, “Basic Electrical Engineering,” Second Edition, McGraw Hill.
6. Parker and Smith, “Problems in Electrical Engineering”, CBS Publishers and Distributors.
7. S. B. Lal Seksena and Kaustuv Dasgupta, “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering”, Cambridge
University Press.
8. Anant Agarwal, Jeffrey Lang, Foundations of Analog and Digital Electronic Circuits, Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers, 2005.
9. Bernard Grob, Ba sic Electronics, McGraw Hill.
10. A. Bruce Carlson, Paul B. Crilly, Communication Systems: An Introduction to Signals and
Noise in Electrical Communication, Tata McGraw Hill, 5 th Edition.
COURSE CONTENTS AND LECTURE SCHEDULE

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Elementary Concepts of Electric Circuits

1.1 Elementary concepts of DC electric circuits:

Basic Terminology including voltage, current, power, resistance, emf; 1

Resistances in series and parallel; Current and Voltage Division Rules;
Capacitors & Inductors: V-I relations and energy stored.

Ohms Law and Kirchhoff's laws-Problems; 2

Star-delta conversion (resistive networks only-derivation not required)- 1

problems.

1.2 Analysis of DC electric circuits: Mesh current method - Matrix 1

representation - Solution of network equations.

Node voltage methods-matrix representation-solution of network

equations by matrix methods. 1

Numerical problems. 2

2 Elementary Concepts of Magnetic circuits, Electromagnetic Induction and AC

fundamentals

2.1 Magnetic Circuits: Basic Terminology: MMF, field strength, flux density,
reluctance - comparison between electric and magnetic circuits-
1
Series and parallel magnetic circuits with composite materials,
numerical problems. 2

2.2 Electromagnetic Induction: Faraday's laws, problems, Lenz's law- 1

statically induced and dynamically induced emfs -
Self-inductance and mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling 2

2.3 Alternating Current fundamentals: Generation of alternating voltages- 2

Representation of sinusoidal waveforms: frequency, period, Average,
RMS values and form factor of waveforms-Numerical Problems.

3 AC Circuits
3.1 AC Circuits: Phasor representation of sinusoidal quantities. 1
Trigonometric, Rectangular, Polar and complex forms.

Analysis of simple AC circuits: Purely resistive, inductive & capacitive

circuits; Inductive and capacitive reactance, concept of impedance. 2
Average Power, Power factor.

Analysis of RL, RC and RLC series circuits-active, reactive and apparent 1

power.
2
Simple numerical problems.

3.2 Three phase AC systems: Generation of three phase voltages;

advantages of three phase systems, star and delta connections
(balanced only), relation between line and phase voltages, line and 2
phase currents- Numerical problems.

4 Introduction to Semiconductor devices

4.1 Evolution of electronics – Vacuum tubes to nano electronics (In 1

evolutional perspective only)

4.2 Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors: types, specifications. Standard 2

values, color coding (No constructional features)

4.3 PN Junction diode: Principle of operation, V-I characteristics, principle 2

of avalanche breakdown

4.4 Bipolar Junction Transistors: PNP and NPN structures, Principle of 3

operation, relation between current gains in CE, CB and CC, input and
output characteristics of common emitter configuration

5 Basic electronic circuits and instrumentation

5.1 Rectifiers and power supplies: Block diagram description of a dc power 3

supply, Working of a full wave bridge rectifier, capacitor filter (no
analysis), working of simple zener voltage regulator

5.2 Amplifiers: Block diagram of Public Address system, Circuit diagram and 4
working of common emitter (RC coupled) amplifier with its frequency
response, Concept of voltage divider biasing

5.3 Electronic Instrumentation: Block diagram of an electronic 2

instrumentation system

6 Introduction to Communication Systems

6.1 Evolution of communication systems – Telegraphy to 5G 1

6.2 Radio communication: principle of AM & FM, frequency bands used for 4
various communication systems, block diagram of super heterodyne
receiver, Principle of antenna – radiation from accelerated charge

6.3 Mobile communication: basic principles of cellular communications, 2

principle and block diagram of GSM.

Suggested Simulation Assignments for Basic Electronics Engineering

1. Plot V-I characteristics of Si and Ge diodes on a simulator

2. Plot Input and Output characteristics of BJT on a simulator
3. Implementation of half wave and full wave rectifiers
4. Simulation of RC coupled amplifier with the design supplied
5. Generation of AM signal

Note: The simulations can be done on open tools such as QUCS, KiCad, GNURadio or similar software
to augment the understanding.
 CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
HUN LIFE SKILLS INTRODUCTION
101 MNC 2 0 2 --- 2019

Preamble: Life skills are those competencies that provide the means for an individual to be
resourceful and positive while taking on life's vicissitudes. Development of one's personality by being
aware of the self, connecting with others, reflecting on the abstract and the concrete, leading and
generating change, and staying rooted in time-tested values and principles is being aimed at. This
course is designed to enhance the employability and maximize the potential of the students by
introducing them to the principles that underly personal and professional success, and help them
acquire the skills needed to apply these principles in their lives and careers.

Prerequisite: None

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Define and Identify different life skills required in personal and professional life
CO 2 Develop an awareness of the self and apply well-defined techniques to cope with emotions
and stress.
CO 3 Explain the basic mechanics of effective communication and demonstrate these through
presentations.
CO 4 Take part in group discussions
CO 5 Use appropriate thinking and problem solving techniques to solve new problems
CO 6 Understand the basics of teamwork and leadership

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 2 1 2 2 1 3
CO 2 3 2
CO 3 1 1 3
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 1 3

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

100 50 50 2 hours
Continuous Internal Evaluation
Total Marks: 50

Attendance : 10 marks
Regular assessment : 15 marks
Series test (one test only, should include first three modules) : 25 marks

Regular assessment

 Group Discussion (Marks: 9)

Create groups of about 6 students each and engage them on a GD on a suitable topic
for about 20 minutes. Parameters to be used for evaluation are as follows:

 Communication Skills : 3 marks

 Subject Clarity : 2 marks
 Group Dynamics : 2 marks
 Behaviours & Mannerisms : 2 marks

 Presentation Skills (Marks: 6)

Identify a suitable topic and ask the students to prepare a presentation (preferably a
power point presentation) for about 10 minutes. Parameters to be used for
evaluation are as follows:

 Communication Skills : 2 marks

 Platform Skills : 2 marks
 Subject Clarity/Knowledge : 2 marks

End Semester Examination

Total Marks: 50 Time: 2 hrs.

Part A: Short answer question (25 marks)

There will be one question from each MODULE (five questions in total, five marks each). Each
question should be written in about maximum of 400 words. Parameters to be used for evaluation
are as follows:
(i) Content Clarity/Subject Knowledge
(ii) Presentation style
(iii) Organization of content

Part B: Case Study (25 marks)

The students will be given a case study with questions at the end. The students have to analyze the
case and answer the question at the end. Parameters to be used for evaluation are as follows:
(i) Analyze the case situation
(ii) Key players/characters of the case
(iii) Identification of the problem (both major & minor if exists)
(iv) Bring out alternatives
(v) Analyze each alternative against the problem
(vi) Choose the best alternative
(vii) Implement as solution
(viii) Conclusion
 (ix) Answer the question at the end of the case

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. List 'life skills' as identified by WHO

2. What do you mean by effective communication?

3. What are the essential life skills required by a professional?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Identify an effective means to deal with workplace stress.

2. How can a student apply journaling to stress management?

3. What is the PATH method? Describe a situation where this method can be used effectively.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Identify the communication network structure that can be observed in the given situations.
Describe them.

(a) A group discussion on development.

(b) An address from the Principal regarding punctuality.

(c) A reporter interviewing a movie star.

(d) Discussing the answers of a test with a group of friends.

2. Elucidate the importance of non-verbal communication in making a presentation

3. Differentiate between kinesics, proxemics, and chronemics with examples.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. How can a participant conclude a group discussion effectively?

2. 'Listening skills are essential for effectively participating in a group discussion.' Do you
agree? Substantiate your answer.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Illustrate the creative thinking process with the help of a suitable example

2. Translate the following problem from verbal to graphic form and find the solution : In a quiz,
Ananth has 50 points more than Bimal, Chinmay has 60 points less than Ananth, and Dharini
is 20 points ahead of Chinmay. What is the difference in points between Bimal and Dharini?
 3. List at least five ways in which the problem "How to increase profit?" can be redefined

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. A group of engineers decided to brainstorm a design issue on a new product. Since no one
wanted to disagree with the senior members, new ideas were not flowing freely. What
group dynamics technique would you suggest to avoid this 'groupthink'? Explain the
procedure.

2. “A group focuses on individual contribution, while a team must focus on synergy.” Explain.

3. Identify the type of group formed / constituted in each of the given situations

a) A Police Inspector with subordinates reporting to him

b) An enquiry committee constituted to investigate a specific incident

c) The Accounts Department of a company

d) A group of book lovers who meet to talk about reading

Syllabus

Module 1

Overview of Life Skills: Meaning and significance of life skills, Life skills identified by WHO: Self-
awareness, Empathy, Critical thinking, Creative thinking, Decision making, problem solving, Effective
communication, interpersonal relationship, coping with stress, coping with emotion.

Life skills for professionals: positive thinking, right attitude, attention to detail, having the big
picture, learning skills, research skills, perseverance, setting goals and achieving them, helping
others, leadership, motivation, self-motivation, and motivating others, personality development, IQ,
EQ, and SQ

Module 2

Self-awareness: definition, need for self-awareness; Coping With Stress and Emotions, Human
Values, tools and techniques of SA: questionnaires, journaling, reflective questions, meditation,
mindfulness, psychometric tests, feedback.

Stress Management: Stress, reasons and effects, identifying stress, stress diaries, the four A's of
stress management, techniques, Approaches: action-oriented, emotion-oriented, acceptance-
oriented, resilience, Gratitude Training,

Coping with emotions: Identifying and managing emotions, harmful ways of dealing with emotions,
PATH method and relaxation techniques.
Morals, Values and Ethics: Integrity, Civic Virtue, Respect for Others, Living Peacefully. Caring,
Sharing, Honesty, Courage, Valuing Time, Time management, Co operation, Commitment, Empathy,
Self-Confidence, Character, Spirituality, Avoiding Procrastination, Sense of Engineering Ethics.

Module 3

21st century skills: Creativity, Critical Thinking, Collaboration, Problem Solving, Decision Making,
Need for Creativity in the 21st century, Imagination, Intuition, Experience, Sources of Creativity,
Lateral Thinking, Myths of creativity, Critical thinking Vs Creative thinking, Functions of Left Brain &
Right brain, Convergent & Divergent Thinking, Critical reading & Multiple Intelligence.

Steps in problem solving: Problem Solving Techniques, Six Thinking Hats, Mind Mapping, Forced
Connections. Analytical Thinking, Numeric, symbolic, and graphic reasoning. Scientific temperament
and Logical thinking.

Module 4

Group and Team Dynamics: Introduction to Groups: Composition, formation, Cycle, thinking,
Clarifying expectations, Problem Solving, Consensus, Dynamics techniques, Group vs Team, Team
Dynamics, Virtual Teams. Managing team performance and managing conflicts, Intrapreneurship.

Module 5

Leadership: Leadership framework, entrepreneurial and moral leadership, vision, cultural

dimensions. Growing as a leader, turnaround leadership, managing diverse stakeholders, crisis
management. Types of Leadership, Traits, Styles, VUCA Leadership, Levels of Leadership,
Transactional vs Transformational Leaders, Leadership Grid, Effective Leaders.

Lab Activities

Verbal

Effective communication and Presentation skills.

Different kinds of communication; Flow of communication; Communication networks, Types of
barriers; Miscommunication
Introduction to presentations and group discussions.
Learning styles: visual, aural, verbal, kinaesthetic, logical, social, solitary; Previewing, KWL table,
active listening, REAP method
Note-taking skills: outlining, non-linear note-taking methods, Cornell notes, three column note
taking.
Memory techniques: mnemonics, association, flashcards, keywords, outlines, spider diagrams and
mind maps, spaced repetition.
Time management: auditing, identifying time wasters, managing distractions, calendars and
checklists; Prioritizing - Goal setting, SMART goals; Productivity tools and apps, Pomodoro technique.

Non Verbal:
Non-verbal Communication and Body Language: Forms of non-verbal communication; Interpreting
body-language cues; Kinesics; Proxemics; Chronemics; Effective use of body language,
Communication in a multi cultural environment.
Reference Books
1. Shiv Khera, You Can Win, Macmillan Books, New York, 2003.
2. Barun K. Mitra, “Personality Development & Soft Skills”, Oxford Publishers, Third impression,
2017.
3. ICT Academy of Kerala, "Life Skills for Engineers", McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,
2016.
4. Caruso, D. R. and Salovey P, “The Emotionally Intelligent Manager: How to Develop and Use
the Four Key Emotional Skills of Leadership”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
5. Kalyana, “Soft Skill for Managers”; First Edition; Wiley Publishing Ltd, 2015.
6. Larry James, “The First Book of Life Skills”; First Edition, Embassy Books, 2016.
7. Shalini Verma, “Development of Life Skills and Professional Practice”; First Edition; Sultan
Chand (G/L) & Company, 2014.
8. Daniel Goleman, "Emotional Intelligence"; Bantam, 2006.
9. Remesh S., Vishnu R.G., "Life Skills for Engineers", Ridhima Publications, First Edition, 2016.
10. Butterfield Jeff, “Soft Skills for Everyone”, Cengage Learning India Pvt Ltd; 1 edition, 2011.
11. Training in Interpersonal Skills: Tips for Managing People at Work, Pearson Education, India;
6 edition, 2015.
12. The Ace of Soft Skills: Attitude, Communication and Etiquette for Success, Pearson
Education; 1 edition, 2013.
 CYL ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
120 BSC 0 0 2 1

Preamble: To impart scientific approach and to familiarize with the experiments in chemistry relevant
for research projects in higher semesters

Prerequisite: Experiments in chemistry introduced at the plus two levels in schools

Course outcomes: After the completion of the course the students will be able to

CO 1 Understand and practice different techniques of quantitative chemical analysis to

generate experimental skills and apply these skills to various analyses

CO 2 Develop skills relevant to synthesize organic polymers and acquire the practical skill to
use TLC for the identification of drugs
CO 3 Develop the ability to understand and explain the use of modern spectroscopic
techniques for analysing and interpreting the IR spectra and NMR spectra of some
organic compounds
CO 4 Acquire the ability to understand, explain and use instrumental techniques for chemical
analysis
CO 5 Learn to design and carry out scientific experiments as well as accurately record and
analyze the results of such experiments

CO 6 Function as a member of a team, communicate effectively and engage in further

learning. Also understand how chemistry addresses social, economical and
environmental problems and why it is an integral part of curriculum

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3
CO 5 3 1 3
CO 6 3 1 3
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

marks marks Duration(Internal)

100 100 - 1 hour

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks
End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (MINIMUM 8 MANDATORY)

1. Estimation of total hardness of water-EDTA method

2. Potentiometric titration
3. Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions.
4. Calibration of pH meter and determination of pH of a solution
5. Estimation of chloride in water
6. Identification of drugs using TLC
7. Determination of wavelength of absorption maximum and colorimetric estimation of Fe3+ in
solution
8. Determination of molar absorptivity of a compound (KMnO4 or any water soluble food
colorant)
9. Synthesis of polymers (a) Urea-formaldehyde resin (b) Phenol-formaldehyde resin
10. Estimation of iron in iron ore
11. Estimation of copper in brass
12. Estimation of dissolved oxygen by Winkler’s method
13. (a) Analysis of IR spectra (minimum 3 spectra) (b) Analysis of 1H NMR spectra (
minimum 3 spectra)
14. Flame photometric estimation of Na+ to find out the salinity in sand
15. Determination of acid value of a vegetable oil
16. Determination of saponification of a vegetable oil
Reference Books

1. G. Svehla, B. Sivasankar, “Vogel's Qualitative Inorganic Analysis”, Pearson, 2012.

2. R. K. Mohapatra, “Engineering Chemistry with Laboratory Experiments”, PHI Learning, 2017.

3. Muhammed Arif, “Engineering Chemistry Lab Manual”, Owl publishers, 2019.

4. Ahad J., “Engineering Chemistry Lab manual”, Jai Publications, 2019.

5. Roy K Varghese, “Engineering Chemistry Laboratory Manual”, Crownplus Publishers, 2019.

6. Soney C George, Rino Laly Jose, “Lab Manual of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand &
Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2019.
ESL 130 ELECTRICAL & CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
ELECTRONICS WORKSHOP INTRODUCTION
ESC 0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: Electrical Workshop is intended to impart skills to plan and carry out simple
electrical wiring. It is essential for the practicing engineers to identify the basic practices and
safety measures in electrical wiring.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Demonstrate safety measures against electric shocks.

CO 2 Identify the tools used for electrical wiring, electrical accessories, wires, cables, batteries
and standard symbols
CO 3 Develop the connection diagram, identify the suitable accessories and materials necessary
for wiring simple lighting circuits for domestic buildings
CO 4 Identify and test various electronic components
CO 5 Draw circuit schematics with EDA tools
CO 6 Assemble and test electronic circuits on boards
CO 7 Work in a team with good interpersonal skills

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 - - - - - 3 - - - - - 1

CO 2 2 - - - - - - - - 1 - -

CO 3 2 - - 1 - 1 - 1 2 2 - 2

CO 4 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2

CO 5 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO 6 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 1

CO 7 - - - - - - - - 3 2 - 2

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

Duration(Internal)

100 100 - 1 hour

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

Syllabus

PART 1

ELECTRICAL

List of Exercises / Experiments

1. a) Demonstrate the precautionary steps adopted in case of Electrical shocks.

b)Identify different types of cables, wires, switches, fuses, fuse carriers, MCB, ELCB
and MCCB with ratings.
2. Wiring of simple light circuit for controlling light/ fan point (PVC conduit wiring)
3. Wiring of light/fan circuit using Two way switches . (Staircase wiring)
4. Wiring of Fluorescent lamps and light sockets (6A) with a power circuit for controlling power
device. (16A socket)
5. Wiring of power distribution arrangement using single phase MCB distribution board with
ELCB, main switch and Energy meter.
6. a)Identify different types of batteries with their specifications.
b)Demonstrate the Pipe and Plate Earthing Schemes using Charts/Site Visit.

PART II

ELECTRONICS

List of Exercises / Experiments (Minimum of 7 mandatory)

1. Familiarization/Identification of electronic components with specification

(Functionality, type, size, colour coding, package, symbol, cost etc. [Active, Passive,
Electrical, Electronic, Electro-mechanical, Wires, Cables, Connectors, Fuses, Switches,
Relays, Crystals, Displays, Fasteners, Heat sink etc.)
2. Drawing of electronic circuit diagrams using BIS/IEEE symbols and introduction to EDA
tools (such as Dia or XCircuit), Interpret data sheets of discrete components and IC’s,
Estimation and costing.

3. Familiarization/Application of testing instruments and commonly used tools.

[Multimeter, Function generator, Power supply, DSO etc.] [Soldering iron, De-
soldering pump, Pliers, Cutters, Wire strippers, Screw drivers, Tweezers, Crimping
tool, Hot air soldering and de- soldering station etc.]

4. Testing of electronic components [Resistor, Capacitor, Diode, Transistor and JFET

using multimeter.]

5. Inter-connection methods and soldering practice. [Bread board, Wrapping, Crimping,

Soldering - types - selection of materials and safety precautions, soldering practice in
connectors and general purpose PCB, Crimping.]

6. Printed circuit boards (PCB) [Types, Single sided, Double sided, PTH, Processing
methods, Design and fabrication of a single sided PCB for a simple circuit with manual
etching (Ferric chloride) and drilling.]
7. Assembling of electronic circuits using SMT (Surface Mount Technology) stations.
8. Assembling of electronic circuit/system on general purpose PCB, test and show the
functioning (Any Two circuits).

1. Fixed voltage power supply with transformer, rectifier diode, capacitor filter,
zener/IC regulator.

2. Square wave generation using IC 555 timer in IC base.

3. Sine wave generation using IC 741 OP-AMP in IC base.
4. RC coupled amplifier with transistor BC107.
MAT VECTOR CALCULUS, CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of
102 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND Introduction
TRANSFORMS BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This course introduces the concepts and applications of differentiation and integration of
vector valued functions, differential equations, Laplace and Fourier Transforms. The objective of this
course is to familiarize the prospective engineers with some advanced concepts and methods in
Mathematics which include the Calculus of vector valued functions, ordinary differential equations
and basic transforms such as Laplace and Fourier Transforms which are invaluable for any engineer’s
mathematical tool box. The topics treated in this course have applications in all branches of
engineering.

Prerequisite: Calculus of single and multi variable functions.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Compute the derivatives and line integrals of vector functions and learn their applications
CO 2 Evaluate surface and volume integrals and learn their inter-relations and applications.
CO 3 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous linear differential equation with constant
coefficients
CO 4 Compute Laplace transform and apply them to solve ODEs arising in engineering
CO 5 Determine the Fourier transforms of functions and apply them to solve problems arising in
engineering

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
2 8
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 5 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

Test 1 Test 2 (Marks)
(Marks (Marks)
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 20 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
Assignments: Assignment should include specific problems highlighting the applications of the
methods introduced in this course in science and engineering.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Compute the derivatives and line integrals of vector functions and learn
their applications

1. How would you calculate the speed, velocity and acceleration at any instant of a particle moving
in space whose position vector at time 𝑡is 𝒓(𝑡)?

2. Find the work done by the force field 𝐹 = (𝑒 − 𝑦 )𝒊 + (cos 𝑦 + 𝑥 )on a particle that travels
once around the unit circle centred at origin having radius 1.

3. When do you say that a vector field is conservative? What are the implications if a vector field is
conservative?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Evaluate surface and volume integrals and learn their inter-relations and
applications

1. Write any one application each of line integral, double integral and surface integral.

2. Use the divergence theorem to find the outward flux of the vector field 𝐹(𝑥, 𝑦 , 𝑧) = 𝑧𝒌across the

𝑥 +𝑦 +𝑧 =𝑎

3. State Greens theorem. Use Green’s theorem to express the area of a plane region bounded by a
curve as a line integral.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous linear differential equation
with constant coefficients

1. If 𝑦 (𝑥) and 𝑦 (𝑥) are solutions of𝑦 + 𝑝𝑦 + 𝑞𝑦 = 0, where 𝑝, 𝑞 are constants, show that

𝑦 (𝑥) + 𝑦 (𝑥) is also a solution.

2. Solve the differential equation 𝑦 + 𝑦 = 0.001𝑥 using method of undetermined coefficient.

3. Solve the differential equation of𝑦 − 3𝑦 + 3𝑦 − 𝑦 = 𝑒 − 𝑥 − 1.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Compute Laplace transform and apply them to solve ODEs arising in
engineering

1. What is the inverse Laplace Transformof (𝑠) = ?

2. Find Laplace Transform of Unit step function.

3. Solve the differential equation of 𝑦 + 9𝑦 = 𝛿 𝑡 − ? Given 𝑦(0) = 2, 𝑦 (0) = 0

Course Outcome 5(CO5): Determine the Fourier transforms of functions and apply them to solve
problems arising in engineering

1. Find the Fourier integral representation of function defined by

𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 for𝑥 > 0 and 𝑓(𝑥) = 0for𝑥 < 0.

2. What are the conditions for the existence of Fourier Transform of a function 𝑓(𝑥)?

3. Find the Fourier transform of 𝑓(𝑥) = 1 for |𝑥| < 1 and 𝑓(𝑥) = 0 otherwise.

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: MAT 102

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

VECTOR CALCULUS, DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND TRANSFORMS

(2019-Scheme)

(Common to all branches)

 PART A

(Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks)

1. Is the vector 𝒓 where 𝒓 = 𝑥𝒊 + 𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧𝒌 conservative. Justify your answer.

2. State Greens theorem including all the required hypotheses
3. What is the outward flux of 𝑭(𝒙, 𝒚, 𝒛) = 𝑥𝒊 + 𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧𝒌 across any unit cube.
4. What is the relationship between Green’s theorem and Stokes theorem?
5. Solve 𝑦 + 4𝑦 + 2.5𝑦 = 0
6. Does the function 𝑦 = 𝐶 cos 𝑥 + 𝐶 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑥form a solution of𝑦 + 𝑦 = 0?. Is it the general
solution? Justify your answer.
7. Find the Laplace transform of 𝑒 sinh 4𝑡
8. Find the Laplace inverse transform of ( )
.

9. Given the Fourier transform 𝑒 of 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 , find the Fourier transform of 𝑥𝑒

√
10. State the convolution theorem for Fourier transform

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module. Each full question carries 14 marks)

MODULE 1

11a) Prove that the force field 𝑭 = 𝑒 𝒊 + 𝑥𝑒 𝒋is conservative in the entire xy-plane

b) Use Greens theorem to find the area enclosed by the ellipse + =1

12 a) Find the divergence of the vector field𝑭 = (𝒙𝟐 𝒚𝟐 𝒛𝟐 )𝟑/𝟐

(𝑥𝒊 + 𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧𝒌)

b) Find the work done by the force field𝑭(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = 𝑥𝑦𝒊 + 𝑦𝑧𝒋 + 𝑥𝑧𝒌along C where

C is the curve𝒓(𝑡) = 𝑡𝒊 + 𝑡 𝒋 + 𝑡 𝒌

MODULE II

13 a) Use divergence theorem to find the outward flux of the vector field

𝑭 = 2𝑥𝒊 + 3𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧 𝒌acrossthe unit cube bounded by or 𝑥 = 0, 𝑦 = 0,𝑧 = 0, 𝑥 =

1,𝑦 = 1,𝑧 = 1

b) Find the circulation of 𝑭 = (𝑥 − 𝑧)𝒊 + (𝑦 − 𝑥)𝒋 + (𝒛 − 𝒙𝒚)𝒌 using Stokes theorem

around the triangle with vertices 𝐴(1,0,0), 𝐵(0,2,0)and 𝐶(0,0,1)

14 a) Use divergence theorem to find the volume of the cylindrical solid bounded
by 𝑥 + 4𝑥 + 𝑦 = 7, 𝑧 = −1, 𝑧 = 4, given the vector field 𝑭 = 𝒙𝑖 + 𝒚𝑗 + 𝒛𝑘
across surfaceof the cylinder

b) Use Stokes theorem to evaluate∫𝑪 𝑭. 𝒅𝒓where𝑭 = 𝑥 𝒊 + 3𝑥𝒋 − 𝑦 𝒌where Cis

 the circle 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 1 in the xy- plane with counterclockwise orientation looking

down the positive z-axis

MODULE III

15 a) Solve 𝑦 + 4𝑦 + 4𝑦 = 𝑥 + 𝑒 cos 𝑥
b) Solve 𝑦 − 3𝑦 + 3𝑦 − 𝑦 = 𝑒 − 𝑥 − 1
16 a) Solve𝒚 + 𝟑𝑦 + 3𝑦 + 𝑦 = 30𝑒 given𝑦(0) = 3,𝑦 (0) = −3 , 𝑦 (0) = −47
b) Using method of variation of parameters, solve𝑦 + 𝑦 = 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥

MODULE IV

17 a) Find the inverse Laplace transform of 𝐹(𝑠) =

b) Solve the differential equation𝑦 + 16𝑦 = 4𝛿(𝑡 − 3𝜋); 𝑦(0) = 2,𝑦 (0) = 0 using Laplace
transform

18 a) Solve𝑦 + 3𝑦 + 2𝑦 = 𝑓(𝑡) where 𝑓(𝑡) = 1 for 0 < 𝑡 < 1 and 𝑓(𝑡) = 1for 𝑡 > 1
using Laplace transform

b) Apply convolution theorem to find the Laplace inverse transform of ( )

MODULE V

19 a) Find the Fourier cosine integral representation for 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 for 𝑥 > 0and
∞
𝑘 > 0 and hence evaluate ∫ the function

b) Does the Fourier sine transform 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 sin 𝑥for 0 < 𝑥 < ∞ exist? Justify your
answer

20 a) Find the Fourier transform of 𝑓(𝑥) = |𝑥 |for |𝑥| < 1 and 𝑓(𝑥) = 0 otherwise

b) Find the Fourier cosine transform of 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 for a> 0

 Syllabus

Module 1 (Calculus of vector functions)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 12.1, 12.2, 12.6, 13.6, 15.1, 15.2, 15.3)

Vector valued function of single variable, derivative of vector function and geometrical
interpretation, motion along a curve-velocity, speed and acceleration. Concept of scalar and vector
fields , Gradient and its properties, directional derivative , divergence and curl, Line integrals of
vector fields, work as line integral, Conservative vector fields , independence of path and potential
function(results without proof).

Module 2 ( Vector integral theorems)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 15.4, 15.5, 15.6, 15.7, 15.8)

Green’s theorem (for simply connected domains, without proof) and applications to evaluating line
integrals and finding areas. Surface integrals over surfaces of the form z = g(x, y), y = g(x, z) or x =
g(y, z) , Flux integrals over surfaces of the form z = g(x, y), y = g(x, z) or x = g(y, z), divergence
theorem (without proof) and its applications to finding flux integrals, Stokes’ theorem (without
proof) and its applications to finding line integrals of vector fields and work done.

Module- 3 ( Ordinary differential equations)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 2.1, 2.2, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.10, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3)

Homogenous linear differential equation of second order, superposition principle,general solution,

homogenous linear ODEs with constant coefficients-general solution. Solution of Euler-Cauchy
equations (second order only).Existence and uniqueness (without proof). Non homogenous linear
ODEs-general solution, solution by the method of undetermined coefficients (for the right hand side
of the form 𝑥 ,𝑒 ,𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑥,𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑎𝑥,𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑥𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑎𝑥and their linear combinations), methods of
variation of parameters. Solution of higher order equations-homogeneous and non-homogeneous
with constant coefficient using method of undetermined coefficient.

Module- 4 (Laplace transforms)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 6.1,6.2,6.3,6.4,6.5)

Laplace Transform and its inverse ,Existence theorem ( without proof) , linearity,Laplace transform
of basic functions, first shifting theorem, Laplace transform of derivatives and integrals, solution of
differential equations using Laplace transform, Unit step function, Second shifting theorems. Dirac
delta function and its Laplace transform, Solution of ordinary differential equation involving unit
step function and Dirac delta functions. Convolution theorem(without proof)and its application to
finding inverse Laplace transform of products of functions.
Module-5 (Fourier Tranforms)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 11.7,11.8, 11.9)

Fourier integral representation, Fourier sine and cosine integrals. Fourier sine and cosine transforms,
inverse sine and cosine transform. Fourier transform and inverse Fourier transform, basic properties.
The Fourier transform of derivatives. Convolution theorem (without proof)

Text Books

1. H. Anton, I. Biven S.Davis, “Calculus”, Wiley, 10th edition, 2015.

2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley, 10 th edition, 2015.

Reference Books

1. J. Stewart, Essential Calculus, Cengage, 2nd edition, 2017

2. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9 th Edition, Pearson,Reprint,
2002.

3. Peter O Neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 7th Edition, Thomson, 2007.

4. Louis C Barret, C Ray Wylie, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 6 th
edition, 2003.

5. VeerarajanT.”Engineering Mathematics for first year”, Tata McGraw - Hill, 2008.

6. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 36 th edition , 2010.

7. Srimanta Pal, Subodh C. Bhunia, “Engineering Mathematics”, Oxford University Press, 2015.

8. Ronald N. Bracewell, “The Fourier Transform and its Applications”, McGraw – Hill
International Editions, 2000.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Calculus of vector functions (9 hours)

1.1 Vector valued function of a scalar variable - derivative of vector valued 2

function of scalar variable t-geometrical meaning

1.2 Motion along a curve-speed , velocity, acceleration 1

1.3 Gradient and its properties, directional derivative , divergent and curl 3

1.4 Line integrals with respect to arc length, line integrals of vector fields. 2
Work done as line integral

1.5 Conservative vector field, independence of path, potential function 1

2 Vector integral theorems( 9 hours)

2.1 Green’s theorem and it’s applications 2

2.2 Surface integrals , flux integral and their evaluation 3

2.3 Divergence theorem and applications 2

2.4 Stokes theorem and applications 2

3 Ordinary Differential Equations (9 hours)

3.1 Homogenous linear equation of second order, Superposition principle, 1

general solution

3.2 Homogenous linear ODEs of second order with constant coefficients 2

3.3 Second order Euler-Cauchy equation 1

3.4 Non homogenous linear differential equations of second order with 3

constant coefficient-solution by undetermined coefficients, variation of
parameters.

3.5 Higher order equations with constant coefficients 2

4 Laplace Transform (10 hours)

4.1 Laplace Transform , inverse Transform, Linearity, First shifting theorem, 2

transform of basic functions

4.2 Transform of derivatives and integrals 1

4.3 Solution of Differential equations, Initial value problems by Laplace 2

transform method.

4.4 Unit step function --- Second shifting theorem 2

4.5 Dirac Delta function and solution of ODE involving Dirac delta function 2

4.6 Convolution and related problems. 1

5 Fourier Transform (8 hours)

5.1 Fourier integral representation 1

5.2 Fourier Cosine and Sine integrals and transforms 2

5.3 Complex Fourier integral representation, Fourier transform and its 3

inverse transforms, basic properties

5.4 Fourier transform of derivatives, Convolution theorem 2

 PHT ENGINEERING PHYSICS B Category L T P CREDIT Year of
110 (FOR NON-CIRCUIT BRANCHES) Introduction
BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: The aim of the Engineering Physics program is to offer students a solid background in the
fundamentals of Physics and to impart that knowledge in engineering disciplines. The
program is designed to develop scientific attitudes and enable the students to
correlate the concepts of Physics with the core programmes

Prerequisite: Higher secondary level Physics, Mathematical course on vector calculus,

differential equations and linear algebra

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Compute the quantitative aspects of waves and oscillations in engineering systems.

CO 2 Apply the interaction of light with matter through interference, diffraction and identify
these phenomena in different natural optical processes and optical instruments.

CO 3 Analyze the behaviour of matter in the atomic and subatomic level through the principles
of quantum mechanics to perceive the microscopic processes in electronic devices.

CO 4 Apply the knowledge of ultrasonics in non-destructive testing and use the principles of
acoustics to explain the nature and characterization of acoustic design and to provide a safe
and healthy environment

CO 5 Apply the comprehended knowledge about laser and fibre optic communication systems in
various engineering applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 1 2 1
CO 2 3 2 1 2 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 1
CO 4 3 1 2 1
CO 5 3 2 1 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 25 25 50
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

MARKS MARKS

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):
1. Explain the effect of damping force on oscillators.
2. Distinguish between transverse and longitudinal waves.
3. (a) Derive an expression for the fundamental frequency of transverse vibration in a
stretched string.
(b) Calculate the fundamental frequency of a string of length 2 m weighing 6 g kept
stretched by a load of 600 kg.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain colours in thin films.
2. Distinguish between Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction.
3. (a) Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and obtain the expression for radii of bright
and dark rings in reflected system. Also explain how it is used to determine the
wavelength of a monochromatic source of light.
(b) A liquid of refractive index µ is introduced between the lens and glass plate. What
happens to the fringe system? Justify your answer.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Give the physical significance of wave function?

 2. What are excitons ?
3. (a) Solve Schrodinger equation for a particle in a one dimensional box and obtain its energy
eigen values and normalised wave functions.
(b) Calculate the first three energy values of an electron in a one dimensional box of width
1 A0 in electron volt.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain reverberation and reverberation time.
2. How ultrasonic waves are used in non-destructive testing.
3. (a) With a neat diagram explain how ultrasonic waves are produced by a piezoelectric
oscillator.
(b) Calculate frequency of ultrasonic waves that can be produced by a nickel rod of length 4
cm. (Young’s Modulus = 207 G Pa, Density = 8900 Kg /m3)

Course Outcome 5 (CO 5):

1. Distinguish between spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
2. Explain optical resonators.
3. (a) Explain the construction and working of Ruby Laser.
(b) Calculate the numerical aperture and acceptance angle of a fibre with a core refractive
index of 1.54 and a cladding refractive index of 1.50 when the fibre is inside water of
refractive index 1.33.
.
Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: PHT 110

Course Name: Engineering Physics B

Max.Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Compare electrical and mechanical oscillators.

2. Distinguish between longitudinal and transverse waves.

3. Write a short note on antireflection coating.

4. Diffraction of light is not as evident in daily experience as that of sound waves. Give reason.

5. State and explain Heisenberg’s Uncertainty principle. With the help of it explain natural

line broadening.

6. Explain surface to volume ratio of nanomaterials.

7. Define sound intensity level. Give the values of threshold of hearing and threshold of pain.

8. Describe the method of non-destructive testing using ultra sonic waves

9. Explain the condition of population inversion

10. Distinguish between step index and graded index fibre. (10x3=30)

PART B

Answer any one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

Module 1

11. (a) Derive the differential equation of damped harmonic oscillator and deduce its
solution. Discuss the cases of over damped, critically damped and under damped
cases. (10)
 (b) The frequency of a tuning fork is 500 Hz and its Q factor is 7×104. Find the relaxation
time. Also calculate the time after which its energy becomes 1/10 of its initial
undamped value. (4)

12. (a) Derive an expression for the velocity of propagation of a transverse wave in a stretched
string. Deduce laws of transverse vibrations. (10)

(b) The equation of transverse vibration of a stretched string is given by y =0.00327 sin
(72.1x-2.72t ) m, in which the numerical constants are in S.I units. Evaluate (i)
Amplitude (ii) Wavelength (iii) Frequency and (iv) Velocity of the wave. (4)

Module 2

13. (a) Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and show that the radius of dark ring is
proportional to the square root of natural numbers. How can we use Newton’s rings
experiment to determine the refractive index of a liquid? (10)

(b) Two pieces of plane glass are placed together with a piece of paper between two at
one end. Find the angle of the wedge in seconds if the film is viewed with a
monochromatic light of wavelength 4800Å. Given β = 0.0555 cm. (4)

14. (a) Explain the diffraction due to a plane transmission grating. Obtain the grating equation.
(10)

(b) A grating has 6000 lines per cm. Find the angular separation of the two yellow lines
of mercury of wavelengths 577 nm and 579 nm in the second order. (4)

Module 3

15. (a) Derive time dependent and independent Schrodinger equations. (10)

(b) An electron is confined to one dimensional potential box of length 2Å. Calculate the
energies corresponding to the first and second quantum states in eV. (4)

16. (a) Classify nanomaterials based on dimensionality of quantum confinement and explain the
following nanostructures. (i) nano sheets (ii) nano wires (iii) quantum dots. (10)

(b) Find the de Broglie wavelength of electron whose kinetic energy is 15 eV. (4)

Module 4

17. (a) Explain reverberation and reverberation time? What is the significance of
Reverberation time. Explain the factors affecting the acoustics of a building and their
corrective measures? (10)
(b) The volume of a hall is 3000 m3. It has a total absorption of 100m2 sabine. If the hall is filled
with audience who add another 80 m2sabine, then find the difference in reverberation time. (4)

18. (a) With a neat diagram explain how ultrasonic waves are produced by piezoelectric
oscillator. Also discuss the piezoelectric method of detection of ultrasonic waves. (10)
 (b) An ultrasonic source of 0.09 MHz sends down a pulse towards the sea bed which
returns after 0.55 sec. The velocity of sound in sea water is 1800 m/s. Calculate the
depth of the sea and the wavelength of the pulse. (4)
Module 5

19. (a) Outline the construction and working of Ruby laser. (8)

(b) What is the principle of holography? How is a hologram recorded? (6)

20. (a) Define numerical aperture of an optic fibre and derive an expression for the NA of a step
index fibre with a neat diagram. (10)

(b) An optical fibre made with core of refractive index 1.5 and cladding with a fractional
index difference of 0.0006. Find refractive index of cladding and numerical aperture. (4)

(14x5=70)
 SYLLABUS

ENGINEERING PHYSICS B (FOR NON-CIRCUIT BRANCHES)

Module 1
Oscillations and Waves
Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of differential equation and its solution,
Over damped, Critically damped and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression, Forced
oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for amplitude and phase of forced
oscillations, Amplitude Resonance-Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness
of Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators

Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its solution, Three dimensional
wave equation and its solution (no derivation), Distinction between transverse and longitudinal
waves, Transverse vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration

Module 2
Wave Optics
Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin films - Cosine law (Reflected
system), Derivation of the conditions of constructive and destructive Interference, Interference due
to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings -
Measurement of wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings

Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, Diffraction grating-Grating

equation, Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive power of a grating with
expression (no derivation)

Module 3
Quantum Mechanics & Nanotechnology
Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of Particles, Uncertainty principle,
Applications-Absence of electrons inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening Mechanism,
Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave equations-Physical Meaning of
wave function, Particle in a one dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and
energy eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)

Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to volume ratio for nanomaterials,
Quantum confinement in one dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots, Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical,
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)

Module 4
Acoustics & Ultrasonics
Acoustics, Classification of sound-Musical sound-Noise, Characteristics of Musical Sounds-Pitch or
frequency-Loudness or Intensity-Measurement of Intensity level-Decibel-Quality or timbre,
Absorption coefficient, Reverberation-Reverberation time-Significance- Sabine’s formula (no
derivation), Factors affecting architectural acoustics and their remedies

Ultrasonics-Production- Magnetostriction effect and Piezoelectric effect, Magnetostriction oscillator

and Piezoelectric oscillator –Working, Detection of ultrasonic waves - Thermal and Piezoelectric
 methods, Ultrasonic diffractometer- Expression for the velocity of ultrasonic waves in a liquid ,
Applications of ultrasonic waves -SONAR,NDT and Medical

Module 5
Laser and Fibre optics
Properties of laser, Absorption and emission of radiation, Spontaneous and stimulated emission,
Einstein’s coefficients (no derivation), Population inversion, Metastable states, basic components of
laser, Active medium, Pumping mechanism, Optical resonant cavity, working principle, Construction
and working of Ruby laser and Helium neon laser ,Construction and working of semiconductor
laser(Qualitative) ,Applications of laser, Holography, Difference between hologram and photograph,
Recording of hologram and reconstruction of image, Applications

Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of fibres-Step index and Graded index fibres,
Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic communication system (block diagram), Industrial,
Medical and Technological applications, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity Modulated and Phase
modulated sensors

Text Books
1. M.N.Avadhanulu, P.G.Kshirsagar,TVS Arun Murthy “A Text book of Engineering Physics”, S.Chand
&Co., Revised Edition, 2019.

2. H.K.Malik , A.K. Singh, “Engineering Physics” McGraw Hill Education, Second Edition, 2017.

Reference Books

1. Arthur Beiser, “Concepts of Modern Physics ", Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 6th Edition 2003

2. D.K. Bhattacharya, Poonam Tandon, “Engineering Physics”, Oxford University Press, 2015

3. Md.N.Khan & S.Panigrahi “Principles of Engineering Physics 1&2”, Cambridge University Press,
2016

4. Aruldhas G., “Engineering Physics”, PHI Pvt. Ltd., 2015

5. Ajoy Ghatak, “Optics”, Mc Graw Hill Education, Sixth Edition, 2017

6. T. Pradeep, “Nano:The Essentials’’, McGraw Hill India Ltd, 2007

7. B. B. Laud, “Lasers and Non linear optics”, New age International Publishers, 2nd Edition ,2005

8. Premlet B., “Advanced Engineering Physics”, Phasor Books,10th edition ,2017

9. I. Dominic and. A. Nahari, “A Text Book of Engineering physics”, Owl Books Publishers, Revised
edition, 2016
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Oscillations and Waves ( 9 hours)

1.1 Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of 2 hrs

differential equation and its solution, Over damped, Critically damped
and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression
1.2 Forced oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for
amplitude and phase of forced oscillations, Amplitude Resonance- 3hrs
Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness of
Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators
1.3 Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its
solution, Three dimensional wave equation and its solution (no
derivation) 2 hrs
1.4 Distinction between transverse and longitudinal waves, Transverse 2 hrs
vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration
2 Wave Optics (9 hours)

2.1 Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin 2 hrs

films - Cosine law (Reflected system), Derivation of the conditions of
constructive and destructive Interference
2.2 Interference due to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness 4 hrs
and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings - Measurement of
wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings
2.3 Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, 2 hrs
Diffraction grating-Grating equation
2.4 Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive 1 hr
power of a grating with expression (no derivation)
3 Quantum Mechanics &Nanotechnology (9hours)

3.1 Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of 2 hrs
Particles, Uncertainty principle, Applications-Absence of electrons
inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening mechanism
3.2 Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave 4 hrs
equations-Physical Meaning of wave function, Particle in a one
dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and energy
eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)
3.3 Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to 2 hrs
volume ratio for nanomaterials, Quantum confinement in one
dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots
3.4 Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical 1 hr
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)
4 Acoustics & Ultrasonics (9hrs)

4.1 Acoustics, Classification of sound-Musical sound-Noise, Characteristics 3 hrs

 of Musical Sounds-Pitch or frequency-Loudness or Intensity-
Measurement of Intensity level-Decibel-Quality or timbre, Absorption
coefficient, Reverberation-Reverberation time-Significance- Sabine’s
formula (no derivation)
4.2 Factors affecting architectural acoustics and their remedies 1 hr

4.3 Ultrasonics-Production- Magnetostriction effect and Piezoelectric 3hrs

effect, Magnetostriction oscillator and Piezoelectric oscillator –
Working, Detection of ultrasonic waves - Thermal and Piezoelectric
methods
4.4 Ultrasonic diffractometer- Expression for the velocity of ultrasonic 2 hr
waves in a liquid ,Applications of ultrasonic waves -SONAR,NDT and
Medical.
5 Laser and Fibre optics ( 9hours)

5.1 Properties of laser, Absorption and emission of radiation, Spontaneous 2 hrs

and stimulated emission, Einstein’s coefficients (no derivation),
Population inversion, Metastable states, basic components of laser,
Active medium, Pumping mechanism, Optical resonant cavity, working
principle
5.2 Construction and working of Ruby laser and Helium neon laser 3 hrs
,Construction and working of semiconductor laser(Qualitative)
Applications of laser
5.3 Holography, Difference between hologram and photograph, Recording 1 hr
of hologram and reconstruction of image, Applications
5.4 Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of fibres-Step index 3 hrs
and Graded index fibres, Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic
communication system (block diagram), Industrial, Medical and
Technological applications, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity Modulated and
Phase modulated sensors
 EST ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of Introduction
110 GRAPHICS ESC 2 0 2 3 2019

Preamble: To enable the student to effectively perform technical communication through graphical
representation as per global standards.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Draw the projection of points and lines located in different quadrants

CO 2 Prepare multiview orthographic projections of objects by visualizing them in different
positions
CO 3 Draw sectional views and develop surfaces of a given object
CO 4 Prepare pictorial drawings using the principles of isometric and perspective projections to
visualize objects in three dimensions.
CO 5 Convert 3D views to orthographic views and vice versa
CO 6 Obtain multiview projections and solid models of objects using CAD tools

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

KTUStudents.in
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3 1
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 2
CO 6 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
( 15 Marks) (15 Marks) (100 Marks)
Remember
Understand 5 20
Apply 10 10 80
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

For more study materials: WWW.KTUSTUDENTS.IN

 Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

CIA for section A carries 25 marks (15 marks for 1 test and Class work 10 marks)
CIA for section B carries 15 marks (10 marks for 1 test and Class work 5 marks)

End Semester Examination Pattern:

ESE will be of 3 hour duration on A4 size answer booklet and will be for 100 marks. ESE question
paper shall contain two questions from each module of Section A only. Student has to answer any
one question from each module. Each question carries 20 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

(Questions may be framed based on the outline given under each course outcome)

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Locate points in different quadrants as per given conditions.

KTUStudents.in
2. Problems on lines inclined to both planes .
3. Find True length, Inclinations and Traces of lines.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2)
1. Draw orthographic views of solids and combination solids
2. Draw views of solids inclined to any one reference plane.
3. Draw views of solids inclined to both reference planes.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. Draw views of solids sectioned by a cutting plane
2. Find location and inclination of cutting plane given true shape of the section
3. Draw development of lateral surface of solids and also its sectioned views
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Draw Isometric views/projections of soilds
2. Draw Isometric views/projections of combination of soilds
3. Draw Perspective views of Soilds
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
1. Draw Orthographic views of solids from the given three dimensional view
2. Draw three dimensional view of the solid from the given orthographic views

For more study materials: WWW.KTUSTUDENTS.IN

 Course Outcome 6 (CO6):
1. Draw the given figure including dimensions using 2D software
2. Create 3D model using modelling software from the given orthographic views or 3D figure or
from real 3D objects

KTUStudents.in

For more study materials: WWW.KTUSTUDENTS.IN

 Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 110

ENGINEERING GRAPHICS

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

Instructions: Retain necessary Construction lines

Show necessary dimensions
Answer any ONE question from each module

KTUStudents.in
Each question carries 20 marks

MODULE I
1. The end point A of a line is 20mm above HP and 10mm in front of VP. The other end of the line is
50mm above HP and 15mm behind VP. The distance between the end projectors is 70mm. Draw
the projections of the line. Find the true length and true inclinations of the line with the
principal planes. Also locate the traces of the line.
2. One end of a line is 20mm from both the principal planes of projection. The other end of the line
is 50mm above HP and 40mm in front of VP. The true length of the line is 70mm. Draw the
projections of the line. Find its apparent inclinations, elevation length and plan length. Also
locate its traces.
MODULE II
3. A pentagonal pyramid of base side 25mm and height 40mm, is resting on the ground on one of
its triangular faces. The base edge of that face is inclined 30o to VP. Draw the projections of the
solid.
4. A hexagonal prism has side 25mm and height 50mm has a corner of its base on the ground and
the long edge containing that corner inclined at 30o to HP and 45o to VP. Draw the projections of
the solid.
MODULE III
5. A triangular prism of base side 40mm and height 70mm is resting with its base on the ground
and having an edge of the base perpendicular to VP. Section the solid such that the true shape of

For more study materials: WWW.KTUSTUDENTS.IN

 the section is a trapezium of parallel sides 30mm and 10mm. Draw the projections showing the
true shape. Find the inclination of the cutting plane with the ground plane.
6. Draw the development of a pentagonal pyramid of base side 30mm and height 50mm. A string is
wound from a corner of the base round the pyramid and back to the same point through the
shortest distance. Show the position of the string in the elevation and plan.
MODULE IV
7. The frustum of a cone has base diameter 50mm and top diameter 40mm has a height of 60mm.
It is paced centrally on top of a rectangular slab of size 80x60mm and of thickness 20mm. Draw
the isometric view of the combination.
8. A hexagonal prism has base side 35mm and height 60mm. A sphere of diameter 40mm is
placed centrally on top of it. Draw the isometric projection of the combination.
MODULE V
9. Draw the perspective view of a pentagonal prism, 20mm side and 45mm long lying on one of its
rectangular faces on the ground and having its axis perpendicular to picture plane. One of its
pentagonal faces touches the picture plane and the station point is 50mm in front of PP, 25mm
above the ground plane and lies in a central plane, which is 70mm to the left of the center of the
prism.

KTUStudents.in
10. Draw three orthographic views with dimensions of the object shown in figure below.

(20X5=100)

For more study materials: WWW.KTUSTUDENTS.IN

 Time : 3 hours EST110 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS Max. Marks: 100

SCHEME OF VALUATION
1. Locating the points and drawing the projections of the line – 4 marks
Finding true length by any one method – 6 marks
Finding true inclination with VP – 2 marks
Finding true inclination with HP – 2 marks
Locating horizontal trace – 2 marks
Locating vertical trace – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
2. Locating the points and drawing true length of the line – 4 marks
Finding projections by any method – 6 marks
Finding length of elevation and plan – 2 marks
Finding apparent inclinations – 2 marks
Locating horizontal trace – 2 marks
Locating vertical trace – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks

KTUStudents.in
3. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks
First inclination views – 4 marks
Second inclination views -8 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Any one method or combination of methods for solving can be used.
If initial position is wrong then maximum 50% marks may be allotted for the answer)

4. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks

First inclination views – 4 marks
Second inclination views -8 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Any one method or combination of methods for solving can be used
If initial position is wrong then maximum 50% marks may be allotted for the answer)

5. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks

Locating section plane as per given condition – 5 marks
Drawing true shape -5 marks
Finding inclination of cutting plane – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
6. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks

For more study materials: WWW.KTUSTUDENTS.IN

 Development of the pyramid – 6 marks
Locating string in development -2 marks
Locating string in elevation – 3 marks
Locating string in plan – 3 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
7. Drawing initial positions – 4 marks
Isometric View of Slab -6 marks
Isometric View of Frustum – 10 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Initial position is optional, hence redistribute if needed.
Reduce 4 marks if Isometric scale is taken)

8. Drawing initial positions – 4 marks

Isometric scale – 4 marks
Isometric projection of prism -5 marks
Isometric projection of sphere – 5 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks

KTUStudents.in
(Initial position is optional, hence redistribute if needed.

9. Drawing the planes and locating the station point – 4 marks

Locating elevation points – 2 marks
Locating plan points – 2 marks
Drawing the perspective view – 10 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
10. Drawing the elevation – 8marks
Drawing the plan – 4 marks
Drawing the side view – 4 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks

For more study materials: WWW.KTUSTUDENTS.IN

 SYLLABUS

General Instructions :
-First angle projection to be followed
- Section A practice problems to be performed on A4 size sheets
- Section B classes to be conducted on CAD lab
- CIA for section A carries 25 marks (15 marks for 1 test and Class work 10 marks)
- CIA for section B carries 15 marks (10 marks for 1 test and Class work 5 marks)

SECTION A
Module 1
Introduction : Relevance of technical drawing in engineering field. Types of lines, Dimensioning, BIS
code of practice for technical drawing.
Orthographic projection of Points and Lines: Projection of points in different quadrants, Projection of
straight lines inclined to one plane and inclined to both planes. Trace of line. Inclination of lines with
reference planes True length of line inclined to both the reference planes.

Module 2
Orthographic projection of Solids: Projection of Simple solids such as Triangular, Rectangle, Square,

KTUStudents.in
Pentagonal and Hexagonal Prisms, Pyramids, Cone and Cylinder. Projection of solids in simple
position including profile view. Projection of solids with axis inclined to one of the reference planes
and with axis inclined to both reference planes.

Module 3
Sections of Solids: Sections of Prisms, Pyramids, Cone, Cylinder with axis in vertical position and cut
by different section planes. True shape of the sections. Also locating the section plane when the
true shape of the section is given.
Development of Surfaces: Development of surfaces of the above solids and solids cut by different
section planes. Also finding the shortest distance between two points on the surface.

Module 4
Isometric Projection: Isometric View and Projections of Prisms, Pyramids, Cone , Cylinder, Frustum of
Pyramid, Frustum of Cone, Sphere, Hemisphere and their combinations.

Module 5
Perspective Projection: Perspective projection of Prisms and Pyramids with axis perpendicular to the
ground plane, axis perpendicular to picture plane.
Conversion of Pictorial Views: Conversion of pictorial views into orthographic views and vice versa

For more study materials: WWW.KTUSTUDENTS.IN

 SECTION B
(To be conducted in CAD Lab)
Introduction to Computer Aided Drawing: Role of CAD in design and development of new products,
Advantages of CAD. Creating two dimensional drawing with dimensions using suitable software.
Conversion of pictorial views into orthographic views. (Minimum 2 exercises mandatory)
Introduction to Solid Modelling: Creating 3D models of various components using suitable modelling
software. (Minimum 2 exercises mandatory)

Text Books
1. Bhatt, N.D., Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
2. John, K.C. Engineering Graphics, Prentice Hall India Publishers.
Reference Books

1. Agrawal, B. and Agrawal, C.M., Engineering Drawing, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers.
2.Duff, J.M. and Ross, W.A., Engineering Design and Visualisation, Cengage Learning.
3.Kulkarni, D.M., Rastogi, A.P. and Sarkar, A.K., Engineering Graphics with AutoCAD, PHI.
4.Luzaddff, W.J. and Duff, J.M., Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, PHI.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

KTUStudents.in
No SECTION A No. of
Hours

1 MODULE I

1.1 Introduction to graphics, types of lines, Dimensioning 1

1.2 Concept of principle planes of projection, different quadrants, locating points 2

on different quadrants

1.3 Projection of lines, inclined to one plane.Lines inclined to both planes, 2

trapezoid method of solving problems on lines.

1.4 Problems on lines using trapezoid method 2

1.5 Line rotation method of solving, problems on line rotation method 2

2 MODULE II

2.1 Introduction of different solids, Simple position plan and elevation of solids 2

2.2 Problems on views of solids inclined to one plane 2

2.3 Problems on views of solids inclined to both planes 2

2.4 Practice problems on solids inclined to both planes 2

For more study materials: WWW.KTUSTUDENTS.IN

 3 MODULE III

3.1 Introduction to section planes. AIP and AVP. Principle of locating cutting 2
points and finding true shape

3.2 Problems on sections of different solids 2

3.3 Problems when the true shape is given 2

3.4 Principle of development of solids, sectioned solids 2

4 MODULE IV

4.1 Principle of Isometric View and Projection, Isometric Scale. Problems on 2

simple solids

4.2 Isometric problems on Frustum of solids, Sphere and Hemisphere 2

4.3 Problems on combination of different solids 2

5 MODULE V

5.1 Introduction to perspective projection, different planes, station point etc. 2

KTUStudents.in
Perspective problems on pyramids

5.2 Perspective problems on prisms 2

5.3 Practice on conversion of pictorial views into orthographic views and vice 2
versa

SECTION B (To be conducted in CAD lab)

1 Introduction to CAD and software. Familiarising features of 2D software. 2

Practice on making 2D drawings

2 Practice session on 2D drafting 2

3 Introduction to solid modelling and software 2

4 Practice session on 3D modelling 2

For more study materials: WWW.KTUSTUDENTS.IN

 EST BASICS OF CIVIL & MECHANICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
120 ENGINEERING INTRODUCTION
ESC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble:

Objective of this course is to provide an insight and inculcate the essentials of Civil Engineering
discipline to the students of all branches of Engineering and to provide the students an
illustration of the significance of the Civil Engineering Profession in satisfying the societal needs.

To introduce the students to the basic principles of mechanical engineering

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course, the student will be able to

Recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various disciplines of Civil
CO 1 Engineering.

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and

CO 2 building construction

CO 3 Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and
CO 4
ramps
Discuss the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green
CO 5 buildings.

CO 6 Analyse thermodynamic cycles and calculate its efficiency

CO 7 Illustrate the working and features of IC Engines

CO 8 Explain the basic principles of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

CO 9 Describe the working of hydraulic machines

CO 10 Explain the working of power transmission elements

CO 11 Describe the basic manufacturing, metal joining and machining processes

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO1 3 - - - - 3 2 2 - - - -
CO2 3 2 - 1 3 - - 3 - - - -
CO3 3 2 - - 3 - - - 2 - - -
 CO4 3 2 - - 3 - - - 2 - - -
CO5 3 2 - - 3 2 3 - 2 - - -

CO6 3 2

CO7 3 1

CO8 3 1

CO9 3 2

CO10 3 1

CO11 3

Assessment Pattern

Basic Civil Engineering Basic Mechanical Engineering

End End Semester
Bloom’s Category Semester Continuous Examination
Continuous Assessment
Examination Assessment (marks)
Test 1 Test 2 (marks) Test 1 Test 2
marks marks marks marks
Remember 5 5 10 7.5 7.5 15
Understand 20 20 40 12.5 12.5 25
Apply 5 5 10
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part I – Basic Civil Engineering and Part II – Basic Mechanical Engineering.
Part I and PART II carries 50 marks each. For the end semester examination, part I contain 2 parts -
Part A and Part B. Part A contain 5 questions carrying 4 marks each (not exceeding 2 questions from
each module). Part B contains 2 questions from each module out of which one to be answered. Each
question carries 10 mark and can have maximum 2 sub-divisions. The pattern for end semester
examination for part II is same as that of part I. However, student should answer both part I and
part 2 in separate answer booklets.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome CO1: To recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various
disciplines of Civil Engineering.

1.Explain relevance of Civil engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the country.
Course outcome 2 (CO2) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and building
construction
1. Discuss the difference between plinth area and carpet area.

Course outcome 3 (CO3) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

1. Explain the importance of surveying in Civil Engineering

Course outcome 4 (CO4) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps

1. Explain the civil engineering aspects of elevators, escalators and ramps in buildings

Course outcome 5 (CO5) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Discuss the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green buildings.

1. Discuss the relevance of Green building in society

Section II Answer any 1 full question from each module. Each full question carries 10 marks

Course Outcome 1 (CO1) (Two full question from each module and each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions)

To recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various disciplines of Civil Engineering
CO Questions

1. a List out the types of building as per occupancy. Explain any two, each in about five sentences.
b. Discuss the components of a building with a neat figure.
2. a.What are the major disciplines of civil engineering and explain their role in the infrastructural
framework.
 b. Explain the role of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms in building rules and regulations prevailing in our
country.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) & Course Outcome 3 (CO3) (Two full question from each module and
each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions)

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and building
construction & Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

CO Questions

1. a. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use.
b. List the properties of good building bricks. Explain any five.
2. a. List and explain any five modern construction materials used for construction.
b. Explain the objectives and principles of surveying

Course outcome 4 (CO4) & Course outcome 5 (CO5) (Two full question from each module and
each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions)

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps & Discuss
the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green buildings.

CO Questions

1. a. Draw the elevation and plan of one brick thick wall with English bond
b. Explain the energy systems and water management in Green buildings

2. a. Draw neat sketch of the following foundations: (i) Isolated stepped footing;
(ii) Cantilever footing; and (iii) Continuous footing.

b. Discuss the civil engineering aspect of MEP and HVAC in a commercial building

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. In an air standard Otto cycle the compression ratio is 7 and compression begins at 35 oC, 0.1
MPa. The maximum temperature of the cycle is 1100oC. Find
i) Heat supplied per kg of air,
ii) Work done per kg of air,
iii) Cycle efficiency
Take Cp = 1.005 kJ/kgK and Cv=0.718 kJ/kgK
2. A Carnot cycle works with adiabatic compression ratio of 5 and isothermal expansion ratio of 2.
The volume of air at the beginning of isothermal expansion is 0.3 m3. If the maximum
temperature and pressure is limited to 550K and 21 bar, determine the minimum temperature
in the cycle and efficiency of the cycle.
3. In an ideal diesel cycle, the temperature at the beginning and end of compression is 65oC and
620oC respectively. The temperature at the beginning and end of the expansion is 1850oC and
850 oC. Determine the ideal efficiency of the cycle.
 4. Explain the concepts of CRDI and MPFI in IC Engines.
Course Outcome 7 (CO7)
1. With the help of a neat sketch explain the working of a 4 stroke SI engine
2. Compare the working of 2 stroke and 4 stroke IC engines
3. Explain the classification of IC Engines.
Course Outcome 8(CO8):
1. Explain the working of vapour compression refrigeration system.
2. With the help of suitable sketch explain the working of a split air conditioner.
3. Define: COP, specific humidity, relative humidity and dew point temperature.
Course Outcome 9 (CO9):
1. Explain the working of a single stage centrifugal pump with sketches.
2. With the help of a neat sketch, explain the working of a reciprocating pump.
3. A turbine is to operate under a head of 25 m at 200 rpm. The discharge is 9 m3/s. If the overall
efficiency of the turbine is 90%. Determine the power developed by the turbine.
Course Outcome 10 (CO10):
1. Explain the working of belt drive and gear drive with the help of neat sketches
2. Explain a single plate clutch.
3. Sketch different types of gear trains and explain.

Course Outcome 11 (CO11):

1. Describe the operations which can be performed using drilling machine.
2. Explain the functions of runners and risers used in casting.
3. With a neat sketch, explain the working and parts of a lathe.

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: EST120 page:3

Reg No:__________________

Name:____________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 120

Course Name: BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets

 PART I: BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING

PART A

(Answer all questions. Each question carries 4 marks)

1. Explain relevance of Civil engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the

country.
2. Discuss the difference between plinth area and carpet area.
3. Explain different types of steel with their properties.
4. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use?
5. Define bearing capacity of soil.
(5 x 4 = 20)

Part B

Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE I

6a. List out the types of building as per occupancy. Explain any two, each in about five
sentences. (5)
b. Discuss the components of a building with a neat figure. (5)
OR
7a. What are the major disciplines of civil engineering and explain their role in the
infrastructural framework. (5)
b. Explain the role of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms in building rules and regulations prevailing in our
country. (5)

MODULE II

8a. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use. (5)
b. List the properties of good building bricks. Explain any five. (5)
OR
9a. List and explain any five modern construction materials used for construction. (5)
b. Explain the objectives and principles of surveying (5)

MODULE III

10a. Draw the elevation and plan of one brick thick wall with English bond (5)
b. Explain the energy systems and water management in Green buildings (5)
OR
11a. Draw neat sketch of the following foundations: (i) Isolated stepped footing;
(ii) Cantilever footing; and (iii) Continuous footing. (5)
b. Discuss the civil engineering aspect of MEP and HVAC in a commercial building (5)

[10 x 3 = 30]
 PART II: BASIC MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 4 marks

1. Sketch the P-v and T-s diagram of a Carnot cycle and List the processes.
2. Illustrate the working of an epicyclic gear train.
3. Explain cooling and dehumidification processes.
4. Differentiate between soldering and brazing.
5. Explain the principle of Additive manufacturing.
4 x 5 = 20 marks

Part B

Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE I

6. In an air standard Otto cycle the compression ratio is 7 and compression begins at 35oC,
0.1MPa. The maximum temperature of the cycle is 1100oC. Find
i) Heat supplied per kg of air,
ii) Work done per kg of air,
iii)Cycle efficiency
Take Cp = 1.005 kJ/kgK and Cv=0.718 kJ/kgK 10 marks

OR

7. a) Explain the working of a 4 stroke SI engine with neat sketches. 7 marks

b) Explain the fuel system of a petrol engine. 3 marks

MODULE II

8. a) Explain the working of a vapour compression system with help of a block

diagram. 7 marks
b) Define: Specific humidity, relative humidity and dew point temperature. 3 marks
OR
9. With the help of a neat sketch, explain the working of a centrifugal pump. 10 marks

MODULE III

10. Explain the two high, three high, four high and cluster rolling mills with neat
sketches. 10 marks
OR

11. a) Describe the arc welding process with a neat sketch. 6 marks
b) Differentiate between up-milling and down-milling operations. 4 marks
 SYLLABUS

Module 1
General Introduction to Civil Engineering: Relevance of Civil Engineering in the overall
infrastructural development of the country. Responsibility of an engineer in ensuring the safety of
built environment. Brief introduction to major disciplines of Civil Engineering like Transportation
Engineering, Structural Engineering, Geo-technical Engineering, Water Resources Engineering and
Environmental Engineering.
Introduction to buildings: Types of buildings, selection of site for buildings, components of a
residential building and their functions.
Building rules and regulations: Relevance of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms (brief discussion only).
Building area: Plinth area, built up area, floor area, carpet area and floor area ratio for a building as
per KBR.

Module 2

Surveying: Importance, objectives and principles.

Construction materials, Conventional construction materials: types, properties and uses of building
materials: bricks, stones, cement, sand and timber
Cement concrete: Constituent materials, properties and types.
Steel: Steel sections and steel reinforcements, types and uses.
Modern construction materials:- Architectural glass, ceramics, Plastics, composite materials,
thermal and acoustic insulating materials, decorative panels, waterproofing materials. Modern uses
of gypsum, pre-fabricated building components (brief discussion only).

Module 3
Building Construction: Foundations: Bearing capacity of soil (definition only), functions of
foundations, types – shallow and deep (brief discussion only). Load bearing and framed structures
(concept only).
Brick masonry: - Header and stretcher bond, English bond & Flemish bond random rubble masonry.
Roofs and floors: - Functions, types; flooring materials (brief discussion only).
Basic infrastructure services: MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps (Civil Engineering aspects
only), fire safety for buildings.
Green buildings:- Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green
buildings. (brief discussion only).
Module 4

Analysis of thermodynamic cycles: Carnot, Otto, Diesel cycles, Derivation of efficiency of these
cycles, Problems to calculate heat added, heat rejected, net work and efficiency. IC Engines: CI, SI, 2-
Stroke, 4-Stroke engines. Listing the parts of different types of IC Engines. Efficiencies of IC
Engines(Definitions only), Air, Fuel, cooling and lubricating systems in SI and CI Engines, CRDI, MPFI.
Concept of hybrid engines.
 Module 5
Refrigeration: Unit of refrigeration, reversed Carnot cycle,COP, vapour compression cycle (only
description and no problems); Definitions of dry, wet & dew point temperatures, specific humidity
and relative humidity, Cooling and dehumidification, Layout of unit and central air conditioners.
Description about working with sketches of: Reciprocating pump, Centrifugal pump, Pelton turbine,
Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine. Overall efficiency, Problems on calculation of input and output
power of pumps and turbines (No velocity triangles)
Description about working with sketches of: Belt and Chain drives, Gear and Gear trains, Single plate
clutches.

Module 6
Manufacturing Process: Basic description of the manufacturing processes – Sand Casting, Forging,
Rolling, Extrusion and their applications.
Metal Joining Processes: List types of welding, Description with sketches of Arc Welding, Soldering
and Brazing and their applications
Basic Machining operations: Turning, Drilling, Milling and Grinding.
Description about working with block diagram of: Lathe, Drilling machine, Milling machine, CNC
Machine. Principle of CAD/CAM, Rapid and Additive manufacturing.

Text Books:

1. Rangwala, S. C., Essentials of Civil Engineering, Charotar Publishing House

2. Mckay, W.B. and Mckay, J. K., Building Construction, Volumes 1 to 4, Pearson India
Education Services

References Books:

1. Chen W.F and Liew J Y R (Eds), The Civil Engineering Handbook. II Edition CRC Press (Taylor
and Francis)
2. Chudley, R and Greeno R, Building construction handbook, Addison Wesley, Longman group,
England
3. Chudley, R, Construction Technology, Vol. I to IV, Longman group, England Course Plan
4. Kandya A A, Elements of Civil Engineering, Charotar Publishing house
5. Mamlouk, M. S., and Zaniewski, J. P., Materials for Civil and Construction Engineering, Pearson
Publishers
6. Rangwala S.C and Dalal K B Building Construction Charotar Publishing house
7. Clifford, M., Simmons, K. and Shipway, P., An Introduction to Mechanical Engineering Part I -
CRC Press
8. Roy and Choudhary, Elements of Mechanical Engineering, Media Promoters &Publishers Pvt.
Ltd., Mumbai.
9. Sawhney, G. S., Fundamentals of Mechanical Engineering, PHI
10. G Shanmugam, M S Palanichamy, Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering, McGraw Hill
Education; First edition, 2018
11. Benjamin,J.,Basic Mechanical Engineering,Pentex Books,9th Edition,2018
12. Balachandran, P.Basic Mechanical Engineering,Owl Books
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

Course
No. of
No Topic outcomes
Lectures
addressed

1 Module I Total: 7

General Introduction to Civil Engineering: Relevance of Civil

Engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the
1.1 CO1 1
country. Responsibility of an engineer in ensuring the safety of
built environment.

Brief introduction to major disciplines of Civil Engineering like

Transportation Engineering, Structural Engineering, Geo-technical
1.2 CO1 2
Engineering, Water Resources Engineering and Environmental
Engineering.

Introduction to buildings: Types of buildings, selection of site for

1.3 CO2 2
buildings, components of a residential building and their functions.

Building rules and regulations: Relevance of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms
1.4 (brief discussion only) CO2 1

Building area: Plinth area, built up area, floor area, carpet area and
1.5 CO2 1
floor area ratio for a building as per KBR.

2 Module 2 Total: 7

2.1 Surveying: Importance, objectives and principles. CO3 1

2.2 Bricks: - Classification, properties of good bricks, and tests on CO2 1

bricks

Stones: - Qualities of good stones, types of stones and their uses.

2.3 Cement: - Good qualities of cement, types of cement and their CO2 1
uses.

Sand: - Classification, qualities of good sand and sieve analysis

2.4 (basics only). CO2 1
Timber: - Characteristics, properties and uses.

2.5 Cement concrete: - Constituent materials, properties and types, CO2 1

Steel: - Steel sections and steel reinforcements, types and uses.
 Modern construction materials: - Architectural glass, ceramics,
plastics, composite materials, thermal and acoustic insulating
2.6 materials, decorative panels, waterproofing materials, modern CO2 2
uses of gypsum, pre-fabricated building components (brief
discussion only)
3 Module 3 Total: 7

Foundations: - Bearing capacity of soil (definition only), functions

of foundations, types – shallow and deep (brief discussion only).
3.1 Brick masonry: - Header and stretcher bond, English bond & CO2 2
Flemish bond– elevation and plan (one & one and a half brick wall
only).
Random rubble masonry.

3.2 Roofs: Functions, types; roofing materials (brief discussion only) CO2 2
Floors: Functions, types; flooring materials (brief discussion only)

3.3 Basic infrastructure services: MEP, HVAC, Elevators, escalators and CO4 2
ramps (Civil Engineering aspects only) fire safety for buildings

3.4 Green buildings:- Materials, energy systems, water management CO5 1

and environment for green buildings. (brief discussion only)

4 MODULE 4

Analysis of thermodynamic cycles: Carnot, Otto, and Diesel cycle- 4

4.1 Derivation of efficiency of these cycles, Problems to calculate heat
added, heat rejected, net work and efficiency

IC Engines: CI, SI, 2-Stroke, 4-Stroke engines. Listing the parts of 2

4.2 different types of IC Engines, efficiencies of IC Engines(Description
only)

Air, Fuel, cooling and lubricating systems in SI and CI Engines, CRDI, 2

4.3
MPFI. Concept of hybrid engines

5 MODULE 5

Refrigeration: Unit of refrigeration, reversed Carnot cycle, COP, vapour 1

5.1
compression cycle (only description and no problems)

Definitions of dry, wet & dew point temperatures, specific humidity and 1
5.2 relative humidity, Cooling and dehumidification, Layout of unit and
central air conditioners.
 Description about working with sketches : Reciprocating pump, 4
Centrifugal pump, Pelton turbine, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine.
5.3
Overall efficiency, Problems on calculation of input and output power
of pumps and turbines (No velocity triangles)

Description about working with sketches of: Belt and Chain drives, Gear 3
5.4
and Gear trains, Single plate clutches

6 MODULE 6

Manufacturing Process: Basic description of the manufacturing 2

6.1 processes – Sand Casting, Forging, Rolling, Extrusion and their
applications.

Metal Joining Processes :List types of welding, Description with 1

6.2
sketches of Arc Welding, Soldering and Brazing, and their applications

Basic Machining operations: Turning, Drilling, Milling and Grinding 3

6.3 Description about working with block diagrams of: Lathe, Drilling
machine, Milling machine, CNC Machine

6.4 Principle of CAD/CAM, Rapid and Additive manufacturing 1

HUN PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
102 MNC 2 0 2 --

Preamble: Clear, precise, and effective communication has become a sine qua non in today's
information-driven world given its interdependencies and seamless connectivity. Any aspiring
professional cannot but master the key elements of such communication. The objective of this
course is to equip students with the necessary skills to listen, read, write, and speak so as to
comprehend and successfully convey any idea, technical or otherwise, as well as give them the
necessary polish to become persuasive communicators.

Prerequisite: None

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Develop vocabulary and language skills relevant to engineering as a profession

CO 2 Analyze, interpret and effectively summarize a variety of textual content
CO 3 Create effective technical presentations
CO 4 Discuss a given technical/non-technical topic in a group setting and arrive at
generalizations/consensus
CO 5 Identify drawbacks in listening patterns and apply listening techniques for specific needs
CO 6 Create professional and technical documents that are clear and adhering to all the
necessary conventions

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 1 3
CO 3 1 1 3
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 1 2 3
CO 6 1 1 1 3

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

100 50 50 2 hours
Continuous Internal Evaluation
Total Marks: 50
Attendance : 10 marks
Regular assessment : 25 marks
Series test (one test only, should include verbal aptitude for placement and higher studies, this test
will be conducted for 50 marks and reduced to 15) : 15 marks
Regular assessment
Project report presentation and Technical presentation through PPT : 7.5 marks
Listening Test : 5 marks
Group discussion/mock job interview : 7.5 marks
Resume submission : 5 marks

End Semester Examination

Total Marks: 50, Time: 2 hrs.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. List down the ways in which gestures affect verbal communication.
2. Match the words and meanings
Ambiguous promotion
Bona fide referring to whole
Holistic not clear
Exaltation genuine
3. Expand the following Compound Nouns - a. Water supply. b. Object recognition. c. Steam
turbine
Course Outcome 2 (CO2)
1. Read the passage below and prepare notes:
Mathematics, rightly viewed, possesses not only truth, but supreme beauty—a beauty cold and
austere, like that of sculpture, without appeal to any part of our weaker nature, without the
gorgeous trappings of painting or music, yet sublimely pure, and capable of a stern perfection such
as only the greatest art can show. The true spirit of delight, the exaltation, the sense of being more
than man, which is the touchstone of the highest excellence, is to be found in mathematics as surely
as in poetry. What is best in mathematics deserves not merely to be learnt as a task, but to be
assimilated as a part of daily thought, and brought again and again before the mind with ever-
renewed encouragement. Real life is, to most men, a long second-best, a perpetual compromise
between the ideal and the possible; but the world of pure reason knows no compromise, no
practical limitations, no barrier to the creative activity embodying in splendid edifices the passionate
aspiration after the perfect from which all great work springs. Remote from human passions, remote
even from the pitiful facts of nature, the generations have gradually created an ordered cosmos,
where pure thought can dwell as in its natural home, and where one, at least, of our nobler impulses
can escape from the dreary exile of the actual world.
So little, however, have mathematicians aimed at beauty, that hardly anything in their work has had
this conscious purpose. Much, owing to irrepressible instincts, which were better than avowed
beliefs, has been moulded by an unconscious taste; but much also has been spoilt by false notions of
what was fitting. The characteristic excellence of mathematics is only to be found where the
reasoning is rigidly logical: the rules of logic are to mathematics what those of structure are to
architecture. In the most beautiful work, a chain of argument is presented in which every link is
important on its own account, in which there is an air of ease and lucidity throughout, and the
premises achieve more than would have been thought possible, by means which appear natural and
inevitable. Literature embodies what is general in particular circumstances whose universal
significance shines through their individual dress; but mathematics endeavours to present whatever
is most general in its purity, without any irrelevant trappings.
How should the teaching of mathematics be conducted so as to communicate to the learner as much
as possible of this high ideal? Here experience must, in a great measure, be our guide; but some
maxims may result from our consideration of the ultimate purpose to be achieved.
- From "On the teaching of mathematics" – Bertrand Russell

2. Enumerate the advantages and disadvantages of speed reading. Discuss how it can impact
comprehension.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. What are the key elements of a successful presentation?

2. Elucidate the importance of non-verbal communication in making a presentation
3. List out the key components in a technical presentation.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Discuss: 'In today's world, being a good listener is more important than being a good
Speaker.'
2. Listen to a video/live group discussion on a particular topic, and prepare a brief summary of
the proceedings.
3. List the do's and don'ts in a group discussion.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
1. Watch a movie clip and write the subtitles for the dialogue.
2. What do you mean by barriers to effective listening? List ways to overcome each of these.
3. What are the different types of interviews? How are listening skills particularly important in
Skype/telephonic interviews?
Course Outcome 6 (CO6):
1. Explain the basic structure of a technical report.
2. You have been offered an internship in a much sought-after aerospace company and are
very excited about it. However, the dates clash with your series tests. Write a letter to the
Manager – University Relations of the company asking them if they can change the dates to
coincide with your vacation.
3. You work in a well-reputed aerospace company as Manager – University Relations. You are
in charge of offering internships. A student has sent you a letter requesting you to change
the dates allotted to him since he has series exams at that time. But there are no vacancies
available during the period he has requested for. Compose an e-mail informing him of this
and suggest that he try to arrange the matter with his college.
 Syllabus

Module 1

Use of language in communication: Significance of technical communication Vocabulary

Development: technical vocabulary, vocabulary used in formal letters/emails and reports, sequence
words, misspelled words, compound words, finding suitable synonyms, paraphrasing, verbal
analogies. Language Development: subject-verb agreement, personal passive voice, numerical
adjectives, embedded sentences, clauses, conditionals, reported speech, active/passive voice.

Technology-based communication: Effective email messages, slide presentations, editing skills using
software. Modern day research and study skills: search engines, repositories, forums such as Git
Hub, Stack Exchange, OSS communities (MOOC, SWAYAM, NPTEL), and Quora; Plagiarism

Module 2

Reading, Comprehension, and Summarizing: Reading styles, speed, valuation, critical reading,
reading and comprehending shorter and longer technical articles from journals, newspapers,
identifying the various transitions in a text, SQ3R method, PQRST method, speed reading.
Comprehension: techniques, understanding textbooks, marking and underlining, Note-taking:
recognizing non-verbal cues.

Module 3

Oral Presentation: Voice modulation, tone, describing a process, Presentation Skills: Oral
presentation and public speaking skills, business presentations, Preparation: organizing the material,
self-Introduction, introducing the topic, answering questions, individual presentation practice,
presenting visuals effectively.

Debate and Group Discussions: introduction to Group Discussion (GD), differences between GD and
debate; participating GD, understanding GD, brainstorming the topic, questioning and clarifying, GD
strategies, activities to improve GD skills

Module 4

Listening and Interview Skills Listening: Active and Passive listening, listening: for general content, to
fill up information, intensive listening, for specific information, to answer, and to understand.
Developing effective listening skills, barriers to effective listening, listening to longer technical talks,
listening to classroom lectures, talks on engineering /technology, listening to documentaries and
making notes, TED talks.

Interview Skills: types of interviews, successful interviews, interview etiquette, dress code, body
language, telephone/online (skype) interviews, one-to-one interview & panel interview, FAQs
related to job interviews
 Module 5

Formal writing: Technical Writing: differences between technical and literary style. Letter Writing
(formal, informal and semi formal), Job applications, Minute preparation, CV preparation
(differences between Bio-Data, CV and Resume), and Reports. Elements of style, Common Errors in
Writing: describing a process, use of sequence words, Statements of Purpose, Instructions,
Checklists.

Analytical and issue-based Essays and Report Writing: basics of report writing; Referencing Style
(IEEE Format), structure of a report; types of reports, references, bibliography.

Lab Activities

Written: Letter writing, CV writing, Attending a meeting and Minute Preparation, Vocabulary
Building
Spoken: Phonetics, MMFS (Multimedia Feedback System), Mirroring, Elevator Pitch, telephone
etiquette, qualities of a good presentation with emphasis on body language and use of visual aids.
Listening: Exercises based on audio materials like radio and podcasts. Listening to Song. practice and
exercises.
Reading: Speed Reading, Reading with the help of Audio Visual Aids, Reading Comprehension Skills
Mock interview and Debate/Group Discussion: concepts, types, Do’s and don’ts- intensive practice

Reference Books

1. English for Engineers and Technologists (Combined edition, Vol. 1 and 2), Orient Blackswan 2010.
2. Meenakshi Raman and Sangeetha Sharma,”Technical Communication: Principles and Practice”, 2nd
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2011
th
3. Stephen E. Lucas, "The Art of Public Speaking", 10 Edition; McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
nd
4. Ashraf Rizvi, "Effective Technical Communication", 2 Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
th
5. William Strunk Jr. & E.B. White, "The Elements of Style", 4 Edition, Pearson, 1999.
6. David F. Beer and David McMurrey, Guide to writing as an Engineer, John Willey. New York, 2004.
7. Goodheart-Willcox, "Professional Communication", First Edition , 2017.
8. Training in Interpersonal Skills: Tips for Managing People at Work, Pearson Education, India, 6 edition,
2015.
9. The Ace of Soft Skills: Attitude, Communication and Etiquette for Success, Pearson Education; 1
edition, 2013.
10. Anand Ganguly, “Success in Interview”, RPH, 5th Edition, 2016.
11. Raman Sharma, “Technical Communications”, Oxford Publication, London, 2004.
 YEAR OF
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
EST PROGRAMING IN C INTRODUCTION
102
ESC 2 1 2 4 2019

Preamble: The syllabus is prepared with the view of preparing the Engineering Graduates capable of writing
readable C programs to solve computational problems that they may have to solve in their professional life.
The course content is decided to cover the essential programming fundamentals which can be taught
within the given slots in the curriculum. This course has got 2 Hours per week for practicing programming in
C. A list showing 24 mandatory programming problems are given at the end. The instructor is supposed to
give homework/assignments to write the listed programs in the rough record as and when the required
theory part is covered in the class. The students are expected to come prepared with the required program
written in the rough record for the lab classes.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyze a computational problem and develop an algorithm/flowchart to find its solution

Develop readable* C programs with branching and looping statements, which uses
CO 2
Arithmetic, Logical, Relational or Bitwise operators.

Write readable C programs with arrays, structure or union for storing the data to be
CO 3
processed

Divide a given computational problem into a number of modules and develop a readable
CO 4 multi-function C program by using recursion if required, to find the solution to the
computational problem

CO 5 Write readable C programs which use pointers for array processing and parameter passing

CO 6 Develop readable C programs with files for reading input and storing output

readable* - readability of a program means the following:

1. Logic used is easy to follow
2. Standards to be followed for indentation and formatting
3. Meaningful names are given to variables
4. Concise comments are provided wherever needed
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

End Semester
Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 Examination Marks
(Marks) (Marks)

Remember 15 10 25

Understand 10 15 25

Apply 20 20 40

Analyse 5 5 10

Evaluate

Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Test 1 (for theory, for 2 hrs) : 20 marks

Continuous Assessment Test 2 (for lab, internal examination, for 2 hrs) : 20 marks

Internal Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions
with 2 questions from each module (2.5 modules x 2 = 5), having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B also contains 5 questions with 2 questions from each module (2.5
modules x 2 = 5), of which a student should answer any one. The questions should not have sub-
divisions and each one carries 7 marks.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Write an algorithm to check whether largest of 3 natural numbers is prime or
not. Also, draw a flowchart for solving the same problem.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Write an easy to read C program to process a set of n natural numbers and to
find the largest even number and smallest odd number from the given set of numbers. The program
should not use division and modulus operators.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):Write an easy to read C program to process the marks obtained by n students
of a class and prepare their rank list based on the sum of the marks obtained. There are 3 subjects for
which examinations are conducted and the third subject is an elective where a student is allowed to
take any one of the two courses offered.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Write an easy to read C program to find the value of a mathematical function
f which is defined as follows. f(n) = n! / (sum of factors of n), if n is not prime and f(n) = n! / (sum of
digits of n), if n is prime.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Write an easy to read C program to sort a set of n integers and to find the
number of unique numbers and the number of repeated numbers in the given set of numbers. Use a
function which takes an integer array of n elements, sorts the array using the Bubble Sorting Technique
and returns the number of unique numbers and the number of repeated numbers in the given array.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Write an easy to read C program to process a text file and to print the
Palindrome words into an output file.
 Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 102

Course Name: Programming in C (Common to all programs)

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Write short note on processor and memory in a computer.

2. What are the differences between compiled and interpreted languages? Give example for
each.
3. Write a C program to read a Natural Number through keyboard and to display the reverse
of the given number. For example, if “3214567” is given as input, the output to be shown is
“7654123”.
4. Is it advisable to use goto statements in a C program? Justify your answer.
5. Explain the different ways in which you can declare & initialize a single dimensional array.
6. Write a C program to read a sentence through keyboard and to display the count of white
spaces in the given sentence.
7. What are the advantages of using functions in a program?
8. With a simple example program, explain scope and life time of variables in C.
9. Write a function in C which takes the address of a single dimensional array (containing a
finite sequence of numbers) and the number of numbers stored in the array as arguments
and stores the numbers in the same array in reverse order. Use pointers to access the
elements of the array.
10. With an example, explain the different modes of opening a file. (10x3=30)

Part B
Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

11. (a) Draw a flow chart to find the position of an element in a given sequence, using linear
searching technique. With an example explain how the flowchart finds the position of a
given element. (10)
(b) Write a pseudo code representing the flowchart for linear searching. (4)
OR
12. (a) With the help of a flow chart, explain the bubble sort operation. Illustrate with an
example. (10)
(b) Write an algorithm representing the flowchart for bubble sort. (4)

13. (a) Write a C program to read an English Alphabet through keyboard and display whether
the given Alphabet is in upper case or lower case. (6)
(b) Explain how one can use the builtin function in C, scanfto read values of different data
types. Also explain using examples how one can use the builtin function in C, printffor text
formatting. (8)
OR

14. (a) With suitable examples, explain various operators in C. (10)

(b) Explain how characters are stored and processed in C. (4)

15. (a) Write a function in C which takes a 2-Dimensional array storing a matrix of numbers and
the order of the matrix (number of rows and columns) as arguments and displays the sum
of the elements stored in each row. (6 )
(b) Write a C program to check whether a given matrix is a diagonal matrix. (8)
OR

16. (a) Without using any builtin string processing function like strlen, strcat etc., write a
program to concatenate two strings. (8)
(b) Write a C program to perform bubble sort. (6)

17. (a) Write a function namely myFact in C to find the factorial of a given number. Also, write
another function in C namelynCr which accepts two positive integer parameters n and r and
returns the value of the mathematical functionC(n,r)( n! / ( r! x (n - r)!) ). The function nCr is
expected to make use of the factorial function myFact. (10)
(b) What is recursion? Give an example. (4)

OR

18. (a) With a suitable example, explain the differences between a structure and a union in C.
(6)
(b) Declare a structure namely Student to store the details (roll number, name, mark_for_C)
of a student. Then, write a program in C to find the average mark obtained by the students
in a class for the subject Programming in C (using the field mark_for_C). Use array of
structures to store the required data (8)

19. (a) With a suitable example, explain the concept of pass by reference. (6)
(b) With a suitable example, explain how pointers can help in changing the content of a
single dimensionally array passed as an argument to a function in C.
(8)
OR

20. (a) Differentiate between sequential files and random access files? (4)
 (b) Using the prototypes explain the functionality provided by the following functions. (10)
rewind()
i. fseek()

ii. ftell()

iii. fread()

iv. fwrite() (14X5=70)

SYLLABUS
Programming in C (Common to all disciplines)

Module 1
Basics of Computer Hardware and Software
Basics of Computer Architecture: processor, Memory, Input& Output devices
Application Software & System software: Compilers, interpreters, High level and low level languages
Introduction to structured approach to programming, Flow chart Algorithms, Pseudo code (bubble
sort, linear search - algorithms and pseudocode)

Module 2
Program Basics
Basic structure of C program: Character set, Tokens, Identifiers in C, Variables and Data Types ,
Constants, Console IO Operations, printf and scanf
Operators and Expressions: Expressions and Arithmetic Operators, Relational and Logical Operators,
Conditional operator, size of operator, Assignment operators and Bitwise Operators. Operators
Precedence
Control Flow Statements: If Statement, Switch Statement, Unconditional Branching using goto
statement, While Loop, Do While Loop, For Loop, Break and Continue statements.(Simple programs
covering control flow)
Module 3
Arrays and strings
Arrays Declaration and Initialization, 1-Dimensional Array, 2-Dimensional Array
String processing: In built String handling functions (strlen, strcpy, strcat and strcmp, puts, gets)
Linear search program, bubble sort program, simple programs covering arrays and strings

Module 4
Working with functions
Introduction to modular programming, writing functions, formal parameters, actual parameters
Pass by Value, Recursion, Arrays as Function Parameters structure, union, Storage Classes, Scope
and life time of variables, simple programs using functions
 Module 5
Pointers and Files
Basics of Pointer: declaring pointers, accessing data though pointers, NULL pointer,array access
using pointers, pass by reference effect
File Operations: open, close, read, write, append
Sequential access and random access to files: In built file handlingfunctions (rewind() ,fseek(), ftell(),
feof(), fread(), fwrite()), simple programs covering pointers and files.

Text Books
1. Schaum Series, Gottfried B.S.,Tata McGraw Hill,Programming with C
2. E. Balagurusamy, Mcgraw Hill,Programming in ANSI C
3. Asok N Kamthane, Pearson,Programming in C
4. Anita Goel, Pearson, Computer Fundamentals
Reference Books
1. Anita Goel and Ajay Mittal, Pearson, Computer fundamentals and Programming in C
2. Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie, Pearson, C Programming Language
3. Rajaraman V, PHI, Computer Basics and Programming in C
4. Yashavant P, Kanetkar, BPB Publications, Let us C

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

Module 1: Basics of Computer Hardware and Software (7 hours)

1.1 Basics of Computer Architecture: Processor, Memory, Input& Output devices 2 hours

Application Software & System software: Compilers, interpreters, High level

1.2 2 hours
and low level languages

1.3 Introduction to structured approach to programming, Flow chart 1 hours

Algorithms, Pseudo code (bubble sort, linear search - algorithms and

1.4 2 hours
pseudocode)

Module 2: Program Basics (8 hours)

Basic structure of C program: Character set, Tokens, Identifiers in C, Variables

2.1 2 hours
and Data Types , Constants, Console IO Operations, printf and scanf

Operators and Expressions: Expressions and Arithmetic Operators, Relational

2.2 and Logical Operators, Conditional operator, sizeof operator, Assignment 2 hours
operators and Bitwise Operators. Operators Precedence
 Control Flow Statements: If Statement, Switch Statement, Unconditional
2.3 Branching using goto statement, While Loop, Do While Loop, For Loop, Break 4 hours
and Continue statements.(Simple programs covering control flow)

Module 3: Arrays and strings: (6 hours)

Arrays Declaration and Initialization, 1-Dimensional Array, 2-Dimensional Array 2 hours

3.1

String processing: In built String handling functions(strlen, strcpy, strcat and

3.2 2 hours
strcmp, puts, gets)

Linear search program, bubble sort program, simple programs covering arrays
3.3 3 hours
and strings

Module 4: Working with functions (7 hours)

4.1 Introduction to modular programming, writing functions, formal parameters, 2 hours

actual parameters

4.2 Pass by Value, Recursion, Arrays as Function Parameters 2 hours

4.3 structure, union, Storage Classes,Scope and life time of variables, simple 3 hours
programs using functions

Module 5: Pointers and Files (7 hours)

5.1 Basics of Pointer: declaring pointers, accessing data though pointers, NULL 3 hours
pointer,array access using pointers, pass by reference effect

5.2 File Operations: open, close, read, write, append 1 hours

Sequential access and random access to files: In built file handlingfunctions

5.3 (rewind() ,fseek(), ftell(), feof(), fread(), fwrite()), simple programs covering 2 hours
pointers and files.

C PROGRAMMING LAB (Practical part of EST 102, Programming in C)

Assessment Method: The Academic Assessment for the Programming lab should be done internally
by the College. The assessment shall be made on 50 marks and the mark is divided as follows:
Practical Records/Outputs - 20 marks (internal by the College), Regular Lab Viva - 5 marks (internal
by the College), Final Practical Exam – 25 marks (internal by the College).

The mark obtained out of 50 will be converted into equivalent proportion out of 20 for CIE
computation.
 LIST OF LAB EXPERIMENTS
1. Familiarization of Hardware Components of a Computer
2. Familiarization of Linux environment – How to do Programming in C with Linux
3. Familiarization of console I/O and operators in C
i) Display “Hello World”
ii) Read two numbers, add them and display theirsum
iii) Read the radius of a circle, calculate its area and display it
iv)Evaluate the arithmetic expression ((a -b / c * d + e) * (f +g)) and display its solution.Read
the values of the variables from the user through console.

4. Read 3 integer values and find the largest amoung them.

5. Read a Natural Number and check whether the number is prime or not
6. Read a Natural Number and check whether the number is Armstrong or not
7. Read n integers, store them in an array and find their sum and average
8. Read n integers, store them in an array and search for an element in the
array using an algorithm for Linear Search
9. Read n integers, store them in an array and sort the elements in the array using Bubble Sort
algorithm
10. Read a string (word), store it in an array and check whether it is a palindrome word or not.
11.Read two strings (each one ending with a $ symbol), store them in
arrays and concatenate them without using library functions.
12. Read a string (ending with a $ symbol), store it in an array and count the number of vowels,
consonants and spaces in it.
13. Read two input each representing the distances between two points in the Euclidean space,
store these in structure variables and add the two distance values.
14. Using structure, read and print data of n employees (Name, Employee Id and Salary)
15. Declare a union containing 5 string variables (Name, House Name, City Name, State and Pin
code) each with a length of C_SIZE (user defined constant). Then, read and display the address of a
person using a variable of the union.
16. Find the factorial of a given Natural Number n usingrecursive and non recursive functions
17. Read a string (word), store it in an array and obtain its reverse by using a user defined function.
18. Write a menu driven program for performing matrix addition, multiplication and finding the
transpose. Use functions to (i) read a matrix, (ii) find the sum of two matrices, (iii) find the product
of two matrices, (i) find the transpose of a matrix and (v) display a matrix.
19. Do the following using pointers
i) add two numbers
ii) swap two numbers using a user defined function
20. Input and Print the elements of an array using pointers
21. Compute sum of the elements stored in an array using pointers and user defined function.
22. Create a file and perform the following
iii) Write data to the file
iv) Read the data in a given file & display the file content on console
v) append new data and display on console
23. Open a text input file and count number of characters, words and lines in it; and store the results
in an output file.
 PHL ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
120 PHYSICS LAB INTRODUCTION
BSC 0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: The aim of this course is to make the students gain practical knowledge to co-relate with
the theoretical studies and to develop practical applications of engineering materials
and use the principle in the right way to implement the modern technology.

Prerequisite: Higher secondary level Physics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Develop analytical/experimental skills and impart prerequisite hands on experience for

engineering laboratories

CO 2 Understand the need for precise measurement practices for data recording

CO 3 Understand the principle, concept, working and applications of relevant technologies and
comparison of results with theoretical calculations
CO 4 Analyze the techniques and skills associated with modern scientific tools such as lasers and
fiber optics
CO 5 Develop basic communication skills through working in groups in performing the laboratory
experiments and by interpreting the results

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 3 1 2 1
CO 2 3 3 1 2 1
CO 3 3 3 1 2 1
CO 4 3 3 1 2 1
CO 5 3 3 1 2 1

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

Duration(Internal)
Marks Marks

100 100 - 1 hour

 Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

(Minimum 8 experiments should be completed)

1. CRO-Measurement of frequency and amplitude of wave forms

2. Measurement of strain using strain gauge and wheatstone bridge
3. LCR Circuit – Forced and damped harmonic oscillations
4. Melde’s string apparatus- Measurement of frequency in the transverse and longitudinal mode
5. Wave length measurement of a monochromatic source of light using Newton’s Rings method.
6. Determination of diameter of a thin wire or thickness of a thin strip of paper using air wedge
method.
7. To measure the wavelength using a millimeter scale as a grating.
8. Measurement of wavelength of a source of light using grating.
9. Determination of dispersive power and resolving power of a plane transmission grating
10.Determination of the particle size of lycopodium powder
11.Determination of the wavelength of He-Ne laser or any standard laser using diffraction grating
12.Calculate the numerical aperture and study the losses that occur in optical fiber cable.
13.I-V characteristics of solar cell.
14.LED Characteristics.
15.Ultrasonic Diffractometer- Wavelength and velocity measurement of ultrasonic waves in a liquid
16.Deflection magnetometer-Moment of a magnet- Tan A position.

Reference books

1. S.L.Gupta and Dr.V.Kumar, “Practical physics with viva voice”, Pragati PrakashanPublishers, Revised
Edition, 2009

2. M.N.Avadhanulu, A.A.Dani and Pokely P.M, “Experiments in Engineering Physics”, S.Chand&Co,2008

3. S. K. Gupta, “Engineering physics practicals”, Krishna Prakashan Pvt. Ltd., 2014

4. P. R. Sasikumar “Practical Physics”, PHI Ltd., 2011.

 ESL YEAR OF
CIVIL & MECHANICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
120 INTRODUCTION
WORKSHOP
0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: The course is designed to train the students to identify and manage the tools, materials
and methods required to execute an engineering project. Students will be introduced to a team
working environment where they develop the necessary skills for planning, preparing and executing
an engineering project.

To enable the student to familiarize various tools, measuring devices, practices and different
methods of manufacturing processes employed in industry for fabricating components.

Prerequisite: None

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

Course
Course Outcome Description
Outcome
CO 1 Name different devices and tools used for civil engineering measurements
CO 2 Explain the use of various tools and devices for various field measurements
Demonstrate the steps involved in basic civil engineering activities like plot
CO 3 measurement, setting out operation, evaluating the natural profile of land, plumbing
and undertaking simple construction work.
Choose materials and methods required for basic civil engineering activities like field
CO 4
measurements, masonry work and plumbing.
CO 5 Compare different techniques and devices used in civil engineering measurements
Identify Basic Mechanical workshop operations in accordance with the material and
CO 6
objects
Apply appropriate Tools and Instruments with respect to the mechanical workshop
CO 7
trades
CO 8 Apply appropriate safety measures with respect to the mechanical workshop trades

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11
12
CO 1 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 - -
CO 2 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 - -
CO 3 1 - - - 1 1 - 2 2 2 1 -
CO 4 1 - - - 1 1 - 2 2 2 1 1
CO 5 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 1
CO 6 2
CO 7 2
CO 8 2

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

100 70 30 1 hour

Assessment Procedure: Total marks allotted for the course is 100 marks. CIE shall be conducted for
70 marks and ESE for 30 marks. CIE should be done for the work done by the student and also
viva voce based on the work done on each practical session. ESE shall be evaluated by written
examination of one hour duration conducted internally by the institute.

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

PART 1

CIVIL WORKSHOP

Exercise 1. Calculate the area of a built-up space and a small parcel of land- Use standard
measuring tape and digital distance measuring devices

Exercise 2. (a) Use screw gauge and vernier calliper to measure the diameter of a steel rod and
thickness of a flat bar

(b) Transfer the level from one point to another using a water level

(c) Set out a one room building with a given plan and measuring tape

Exercise 3. Find the level difference between any two points using dumpy level

Exercise 4. (a) Construct a 1 thick brick wall of 50 cm height and 60 cm length using English
bond. Use spirit level to assess the tilt of walls.

(b) Estimate the number of different types of building blocks to construct this wall.
Exercise 5. (a) Introduce the students to plumbing tools, different types of pipes, type of
connections, traps, valves ,fixtures and sanitary fittings.

(b) Install a small rainwater harvesting installation in the campus

Reference Books:

1. Khanna P.N, “Indian Practical Civil Engineering Handbook”, Engineers Publishers.

2. Bhavikatti. S, "Surveying and Levelling (Volume 1)", I.K. International Publishing House
3. Arora S.P and Bindra S.P, " Building Construction", Dhanpat Rai Publications
4. S. C. Rangwala, “Engineering Materials,” Charotar Publishing House.

PART II

MECHANICAL WORKSHOP

LIST OF EXERCISES

(Minimum EIGHT units mandatory and FIVE models from Units 2 to 8 mandatory)

UNIT 1:- General : Introduction to workshop practice, Safety precautions, Shop floor ethics, Basic
First Aid knowledge.
Study of mechanical tools, components and their applications: (a) Tools: screw drivers,
spanners, Allen keys, cutting pliers etc and accessories (b) bearings, seals, O-rings, circlips,
keys etc.
UNIT 2:- Carpentry : Understanding of carpentry tools
Minimum any one model
1. T –Lap joint 2. Cross lap joint 3. Dovetail joint 4. Mortise joints
UNIT 3:- Foundry : Understanding of foundry tools
Minimum any one model
1.Bench Molding 2. Floor Molding 3. Core making 4. Pattern making
UNIT 4: - Sheet Metal : Understanding of sheet metal working tools
Minimum any one model
1. Cylindrical shape
2. Conical shape
3. Prismatic shaped job from sheet metal
UNIT 5: - Fitting : Understanding of tools used for fitting
Minimum any one model
1. Square Joint
2. V- Joint
3. Male and female fitting
UNIT 6: - Plumbing : Understanding of plumbing tools, pipe joints
Any one exercise on joining of pipes making use of minimum three types of pipe joints

UNIT 7: - Smithy: Understanding of tools used for smithy.

 Demonstrating the forge-ability of different materials (MS, Al, alloy steel and cast steels)
in cold and hot states.
Observing the qualitative difference in the hardness of these materials
Minimum any one exercise on smithy
1. Square prism
2. Hexagonal headed bolt
3. Hexagonal prism
4. Octagonal prism

UNIT 8: -Welding: Understanding of welding equipments

Minimum any one welding practice
Making Joints using electric arc welding. bead formation in horizontal, vertical
and over head positions

UNIT 9: - Assembly: Demonstration only

Dissembling and assembling of
1. Cylinder and piston assembly
2. Tail stock assembly
3. Bicycle
4. Pump or any other machine

UNIT 10: - Machines: Demonstration and applications of the following machines

Shaping and slotting machine; Milling machine; Grinding Machine; Lathe; Drilling
Machine.
UNIT 11: - Modern manufacturing methods: Power tools, CNC machine tools, 3D printing, Glass
cutting.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No Topic No of Sessions

1 INTRODUCTION

Workshop practice, shop floor precautions, ethics and First Aid

knowledge.
1.1 Studies of mechanical tools, components and their applications: (a) 1
Tools: screw drivers, spanners, Allen keys, cutting pliers etc and
accessories (b) bearings, seals, O-rings, circlips, keys etc

2 CARPENTRY

2.1 Understanding of carpentry tools and making minimum one model 2

 3 FOUNDRY

3.1 Understanding of foundry tools and making minimum one model 2

4 SHEET METAL

Understanding of sheet metal working tools and making minimum

4.1 2
one model

5 FITTING

5.1 Understanding of fitting tools and making minimum one model 2

6 PLUMBING

Understanding of pipe joints and plumbing tools and making

6.1
minimum one model 2

7 SMITHY

7.1 Understanding of smithy tools and making minimum one model 2

8 WELDING

Understanding of welding equipments and making minimum one

8.1
model 2

9 ASSEMBLY

Demonstration of assembly and dissembling of multiple parts

9.1
components 1

10 MACHINES

10.1 Demonstration of various machines 1

11 MODERN MANUFACTURING METHODS

Demonstrations of: power tools, CNC Machine tools, 3D printing,

11.1
Glass cutting 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET201 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

This course helps the students to understand the concept of stress and strain in different
types of structure/machine under various loading conditions. The course also covers simple
and compound stresses due to forces, stresses and deflection in beams due to bending,
torsion in circular section, strain energy, different theories of failure, stress in thin cylinder
thick cylinder and spheres due to external and internal pressure.

Prerequisite: EST100 ENGINEERING MECHANICS

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Determine the stresses, strains and displacements of structures by tensorial and graphical
CO 1
(Mohr’s circle) approaches
Analyse the strength of materials using stress-strain relationships for structural and thermal
CO 2
loading
Perform basic design of shafts subjected to torsional loading and analyse beams subjected
CO 3
to bending moments
Determine the deformation of structures subjected to various loading conditions using
CO 4
strain energy methods
Estimate the strength of thin cylinders, spherical vessels and columns, and appreciate the
CO 5
theories of failures and its relevance in mechanical design

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 1
CO 2 3 3 2 1
CO 3 3 3 1 2
CO 4 3 3 1 1
CO 5 3 3 1 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Continuous
Bloom’s End Semester
Assessment Tests
Category Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 20 20 30
Analyse 20 20 50
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

ESE
Total Marks CIE ESE
Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module and having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains
2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question carries 14
marks and can have a maximum of 2 subdivisions.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Determine the resultant traction at a point in a plane using the stress tensor.

2. Evaluate the principal stresses, principal strains and their directions from a given state of stress or
strain.

3. Write the stress tensor and strain tensor.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Write the generalized Hooke’s law for stress-strain relations.

2. Estimate the state of strain from a given state of stress.

3. Analyse the strength of a structure subjected to thermal loading.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Design a shaft to transmit power and torque.

2. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams.

3. Determine the bending stress on a beam subjected to pure bending.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Apply strain energy method to estimate the deformation of a structure.

2. Use strain energy method to calculate deformations for multiple loads.

3. Use strain energy method to estimate the loads acting on a structure for a maximum deflection.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Analyse a column for buckling load.

2. A bolt is subjected to a direct tensile load of 20 kN and a shear load of 15 kN. Suggest suitable size
of this bolt according to various theories of elastic failure, if the yield stress in simple tension is 360
MPa. A factor of safety 2 should be used. Assume Poisson’s ratio as 0.3.

3. Estimate the stresses on a thin cylinder or spherical vessel.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
Module 1
Deformation behaviour of elastic solids in equilibrium under the action of a system of forces, method
of sections. Stress vectors on Cartesian coordinate planes passing through a point, stress at a point in
the form of a matrix. Equality of cross shear, Cauchy's equation. Displacement, gradient of
displacement, Cartesian strain matrix, strain- displacement relations (small-strain only), Simple
problems to find strain matrix. Stress tensor and strain tensor for plane stress and plane strain
conditions. Principal planes and principal stress, meaning of stress invariants, maximum shear stress.
Mohr’s circle for 2D case.
Module 2
Stress-strain diagram, Stress–Strain curves of Ductile and Brittle Materials, Poisson’s ratio.
Constitutive equations-generalized Hooke’s law, equations for linear elastic isotropic solids in in terms
of Young’s Modulus and Poisson’s ratio, Hooke’s law for Plane stress and plane strain conditions
Relations between elastic constants E, G, ν and K.
Calculation of stress, strain and change in length in axially loaded members with single and composite
materials, Effects of thermal loading – thermal stress and thermal strain. Thermal stress on a prismatic
bar held between fixed supports.
Module 3
Torsional deformation of circular shafts, assumptions for shafts subjected to torsion within elastic
deformation range, derivation of torsion formula Torsional rigidity, Polar moment of inertia, basic
design of transmission shafts. Simple problems to estimate the stress in solid and hollow shafts.
Shear force and bending moment diagrams for cantilever and simply supported beams. Differential
equations between load, shear force and bending moment. Normal and shear stress in beams:
Derivation of flexural formula, section modulus, flexural rigidity, numerical problems to evaluate
bending stress, economic sections. Shear stress formula for beams: Derivation, shear stress
distribution for a rectangular section.
Module 4
Deflection of beams using Macauley’s method
Elastic strain energy and Complementary strain energy. Elastic strain energy for axial loading,
transverse shear, bending and torsional loads. Expressions for strain energy in terms of load, geometry
and material properties of the body for axial, shearing, bending and torsional loads. Castigliano’s
second theorem, reciprocal relation, proof for Castigliano’s second theorem.
Simple problems to find the deflections using Castigliano’s theorem.
Module 5
Fundamentals of bucking and stability, critical load, equilibrium diagram for buckling of an idealized
structure. Buckling of columns with pinned ends, Euler’s buckling theory for long columns. Critical
stress, slenderness ratio, Rankine’s formula for short columns.
Introduction to Theories of Failure, Rankine’s theory for maximum normal stress, Guest’s theory for
maximum shear stress, Saint-Venant’s theory for maximum normal strain, Hencky-von Mises theory
for maximum distortion energy, Haigh’s theory for maximum strain energy
Circumferential and Longitudinal stress in a thin cylindrical vessel, stresses in a thin spherical vessel

Text Books

1. Mechanics of materials in S.I.units, R .C. Hibbeler, Pearson Higher Education 2018

2. Advanced Mechanics of Solids, L. S. Srinath, TMH

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Design of Machine Elements, V. B Bhandari

Reference Books

1. Strength of Materials, Surendra Singh, S. K. Kataria & Sons

2. Engineering Mechanics of Solids, Popov E., PHI 2002

3. Mechanics of Materials S. I. units, Beer, Johnston, Dewolf, McGraw Hills 2017

4. Mechanics of Materials, Pytel A. and Kiusalaas J. Cengage Learning India Private Limited, 2nd
Edition, 2015

5. Strength of Materials, Rattan, McGraw Hills 2011

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE PLAN
No Topic No of lectures
1 Module 1: Stress and Strain Analysis 9 hours
Describe the deformation behaviour of elastic solids in equilibrium under the
action of a system of forces. Describe method of sections to illustrate stress as
1.1 2 hr
resisting force per unit area. Stress vectors on Cartesian coordinate planes
passing through a point and writing stress at a point in the form of a matrix.
Equality of cross shear (Derivation not required). Write Cauchy's equation
(Derivation not required),Find resultant stress, Normal and shear stress on a
1.2 2 hr
plane given stress tensor and direction cosines (no questions for finding
direction cosines).
Displacement, gradient of displacement, Cartesian strain matrix, Write strain-
displacement relations (small-strain only), Simple problems to find strain
1.3 1 hr
matrix given displacement field (2D and 3D), write stress tensor and strain
tensor for Plane stress and plane strain conditions.
Concepts of principal planes and principal stress, characteristic equation of
1.4 stress matrix and evaluation of principal stresses and principal planes as an 2 hrs
eigen value problem, meaning of stress invariants, maximum shear stress
Mohr’s circle for 2D case: find principal stress, planes, stress on an arbitrary
1.5 2 hrs
plane, maximum shear stress graphically using Mohr’s circle
2 Module 2: Stress - Strain Relationships 9 hours
Stress-strain diagram, Stress–Strain curves of Ductile and Brittle Materials,
2.1 1 hr
Poisson’s ratio
Constitutive equations-generalized Hooke’s law, equations for linear elastic
isotropic solids in in terms of Young’s Modulus and Poisson’s ratio (3D).
2.2 2 hrs
Hooke’s law for Plane stress and plane strain conditions
Relations between elastic constants E, G, ν and K, Numerical problems
Calculation of stress, strain and change in length in axially loaded members
with single and composite materials, Effects of thermal loading – thermal
2.3 2 hrs
stress and thermal strain. Thermal stress on a prismatic bar held between
fixed supports.
2.4 Numerical problems for axially loaded members 4 hrs
Module 3: Torsion of circular shafts, Shear Force-Bending Moment Diagrams
3 9 hours
and Pure bending
Torsional deformation of circular shafts, assumptions for shafts subjected to
3.1 1 hr
torsion within elastic deformation range, derivation of torsion formula
Torsional rigidity, Polar moment of inertia, comparison of solid and hollow
3.2 1 hr
shaft. Simple problems to estimate the stress in solid and hollow shafts
Numerical problems for basic design of circular shafts subjected to externally
3.3 1 hr
applied torques
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Shear force and bending moment diagrams for cantilever and simply
3.4 supported beams subjected to point load, moment, UDL and linearly varying 2 hrs
load
3.5 Differential equations between load, shear force and bending moment. 1 hrs
Normal and shear stress in beams: Derivation of flexural formula, section
modulus, flexural rigidity, numerical problems to evaluate bending stress,
3.6 economic sections 3 hrs
Shear stress formula for beams: Derivation, numerical problem to find shear
stress distribution for rectangular section
4 Module 4: Deflection of beams, Strain energy 8 hours
Deflection of cantilever and simply supported beams subjected to point load,
4.1 moment and UDL using Macauley’s method (procedure and problems with 2 hrs
multiple loads)
Linear elastic loading, elastic strain energy and Complementary strain energy.
4.2 Elastic strain energy for axial loading, transverse shear, bending and torsional 2 hr
loads (short derivations in terms of loads and deflections).
Expressions for strain energy in terms of load, geometry and material
4.3 properties of the body for axial, shearing, bending and torsional loads. Simple 2 hrs
problems to solve elastic deformations
Castigliano’s second theorem to find displacements, reciprocal relation, proof
4.4 1 hr
for Castigliano’s second theorem.
4.5 Simple problems to find the deflections using Castigliano’s theorem 1 hr
5 Module 5: Buckling of Columns, Theories of Failure, Thin pressure vessels 8 hours
Fundamentals of bucking and stability, critical load, Euler’s formula for long
5.1 columns, assumptions and limitations, effect of end conditions(derivation 2 hr
only for pinned ends), equivalent length
Critical stress, slenderness ratio, Rankine’s formula for short columns,
5.2 2 hr
Problems
Introduction to Theories of Failure. Rankine’s theory for maximum normal
5.3 stress, Guest’s theory for maximum shear stress, Saint-Venant’s theory for 1 hr
maximum normal strain
Hencky-von Mises theory for maximum distortion energy, Haigh’s theory for
5.4 1 hr
maximum strain energy
Circumferential and Longitudinal stress in a thin cylindrical vessel, stresses in
5.5 2 hrs
a thin spherical vessel (short derivations) and numerical problems
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
THIRD SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code : MET201
Course Name : MECHANICS OF SOLIDS
Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

PART – A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Express the stress invariants in terms of Cartesian components of stress and principal stress.

2. Write down the Cauchy’s strain displacement relationships.

3. Distinguish between the states of plane stress and plane strain.

4. Represent the generalized Hooke’s law for a Linear elastic isotropic material.

5. List any three important assumptions in the theory of torsion.

6. Write the significance of flexural rigidity and section modulus in the analysis of beams.

7. Discuss reciprocal relation for multiple loads on a structure.

8. Express the strain energy for a cantilever beam subjected to a transverse point load at free end.

9. Discuss Saint-Venant’s theory of failure.

10. Compare the strength of a thin spherical vessel and a thin cylindrical vessel on the basis of hoop
stress.

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1

11. a) The state of stress at a point is given by σxx = 12.31 MPa, σyy = 8.96 MPa, σzz = 4.34 MPa, τxy =
4.2 MPa, τyz = 5.27 MPa, τxz = 0.84 MPa. Determine the principal stresses. (7 marks)

b) The displacement field for a body is given by u= (x2 + y)i+ (3 + z) j + (x2 + 2y)k. What is the
deformed position of a point originally at (3,1,–2)? Write the strain tensor at the point (−3,−1,2).
(7 marks)
OR

12. a) The state of plane stress at a point is given by σxx = 40 MPa, σyy = 20 MPa and τxy = 16 MPa. Using
Mohr’s circle determine the i) principal stresses and principal planes and ii) maximum shear stress.
(7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b) The state of stress at a point is given below. Find the resultant stress vector acting on a plane
with direction cosines nx=0.47, ny=0.82 and nz=0.33. Find the normal and tangential stresses
acting on this plane. (7 marks)

MODULE – 2

13. a) Calculate Modulus of Rigidity and Young’s Modulus of a cylindrical bar of diameter 30 mm and
of 1.5 m length if the longitudinal strain in a bar during a tensile stress is four times the lateral
strain. Find the change in volume when the bar is subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of 100
N/mm2. Take E = 105 N/mm (9 marks)

b) A straight bar 450 mm long is 40 mm in diameter for the first 250 mm length and 20 mm
diameter for the remaining length. If the bar is subjected to an axial pull of 15 kN find the
maximum axial stress produced and the total extension of the bar. Take E = 2x105 N/mm2
(5 marks)

OR

14. a) A brass bar 20mm diameter is enclosed in a steel tube of 25mm internal diameter and 50mm
external diameter. Both bar and tube is of same length and fastened rigidly at their ends. The
composite bar is free of stress at 20°C. To what temperature the assembly must be heated to
generate a compressive stress of 48MPa in brass bar? Also determine the stress in steel tube. Esteel
= 200GPa and Ebrass = 84GPa, αsteel = 12 × 10−6 / °C and αbrass= 18 × 10−6 / °C. (9 marks)

b) Draw the stress-strain diagram for a ductile material and explain the salient points.
(5 marks)
MODULE – 3

15. a) Draw shear force and bending moment diagram for the beam given in the figure. (9 marks)

b) Compare the strength of a hollow shaft of diameter ratio 0.75 to that of a solid shaft by
considering the permissible shear stress. Both the shafts are of same material, of same length and
weight. (5 marks)

OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

16. a) A simply supported beam of span of 10 m carries a UDL of 40 kN/m. The cross section is of
I shape as given below. Calculate the maximum stress produced due to bending and plot the
bending stress distribution. (9 marks)

b) The shear stress of a solid shaft is not to exceed 40 N/mm2 when the power transmitted is 20
kW at 200 rpm. Determine the minimum diameter of the shaft. (5 marks)

MODULE – 4

17. a) A horizontal girder of steel having uniform section is 14 m long and is simply supported at its
ends. It carries concentrated loads of 120 kN and 80 kN at two points 3 m and 4.5 m from the two
ends respectively. Moment of inertia for the section of the girder is 16 × 108 mm4 and Es = 210
kN/mm2. Calculate the deflection of the girder at points under the two loads and maximum
deflection using Macaulay’s method. (8 marks)

b) Derive the expressions for elastic strain energy in terms of applied load/moment and material
property for the cases of a) Axial force b) Bending moment. (6 marks)

OR

18. a) Calculate the displacement in the direction of load P applied at a distance of L/3 from the left
end for a simply supported beam of span L as shown in the figure.

(8 marks)

b) State and prove Castigliano’s second theorem. (6 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. a) Find the crippling load for a hollow steel column 50mm internal diameter and 5mm thick. The
column is 5m long with one end fixed and other end hinged. Use Rankine’s formula and Rankine’s
constant as 1/7500 and σc = 335 N/mm2. Compare this load by crippling load given by Euler’s
formula. Take E = 110 GPa. (8 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b) Explain the maximum normal stress theory, maximum strain energy theory and maximum shear
stress theory of failure. (6 marks)

OR

20. a) A cylindrical shell 3m long closed at the ends has an internal diameter of 1m and wall thickness
15mm. Calculate the circumferential and longitudinal stresses induced and also the change in
dimensions of the shell, if it is subjected to an internal pressure of 1.5MPa. Take E = 2×105 N/mm2
and ν = 0.3. (9 marks)

b) Derive Euler's formula for a column with both ends hinged. (5 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET203 MECHANICS OF FLUIDS PCC 3 1 - 4

Preamble :
This course provides an introduction to the properties and behaviour of fluids. It enables to
apply the concepts in engineering, pipe networks. It introduces the concepts of boundary
layers, dimensional analysis and model testing

Prerequisite : NIL

Course Outcomes :
After completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Define Properties of Fluids and Solve hydrostatic problems
CO2 Explain fluid kinematics and Classify fluid flows
CO3 Interpret Euler and Navier-Stokes equations and Solve problems using Bernoulli’s
equation
CO4 Evaluate energy loses in pipes and sketch energy gradient lines
CO5 Explain the concept of boundary layer and its applications
CO6 Use dimensional Analysis for model studies

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2
CO2 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2
CO5 3 2 1
CO6 3 2 1

Assessment Pattern
Blooms Category CA ESA
Assignment Test - 1 Test - 2
Remember 25 20 20 10
Understand 25 40 40 20
Apply 25 40 40 70
Analyse 25
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks

Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

Mark distribution & Duration of Examination :

Total Marks CA ESE ESE Duration
150 50 100 3 Hours

End semester pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 1

1. A 3.6×1.5 m wide rectangular gate MN is vertical and is hinged at point 0.15 m below
the center of gravity of the gate. The total depth of water is 6 m. What horizontal force
must be applied at the bottom of the gate to keep the gate closed.

2. A stationary liquid is stratified so that its density is ρ0 (1 + h) at a depth h below the free
surface. At a depth h in this liquid, what is the pressure in excess of ρ0 gh?

3. If the velocity profile of a fluid is parabolic with free stream velocity 120 cm/s occurring
at 20 cm from the plate, calculate the velocity gradients and shear stress at a distance of
0, 10, 20 cm from the plate. Take the viscosity of fluid as 8.5 poise.

Course Outcome 2

1. Differentiate between the Eulerian and Lagrangian method of representing fluid motion.

2. A velocity field is given by u = 3y 2 , v = 2x and w = 0 in arbitrary units. Is this flow

steady or unsteady? Is it two or three dimensional? At (x,y,z)=(2,1,0), compute

(a) velocity
(b) local acceleration
(c) convective acceleration

3. A stream function in two dimensional flow is ψ = 2xy. Show that the flow is irrotational
and determine the corresponding velocity potential φ.
Course Outcome 3
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. A siphon consisting of a pipe of 15 cm diameter is used to empty kerosene oil (relative
density=0.8) from tank A. The siphon discharges to the atmosphere at an elevation of
1.00 m. The oil surface in the tank is at an elevation of 4.00 m. The center line of the
siphon pipe at its highest point C is at an elevation of 5.50 m. Estimate,

(a) Discharge in the pipe

(b) Pressure at point C.

The losses in the pipe can be assumed to be 0.5 m up to the summit and 1.2 m from
summit to the outlet.

2. Derive the Euler’s equation of motion along a streamline and from that derive the Bernouli’s
equation.

3. What is water hammer? Explain different cases of water hammer. Derive the expression
for pressure rise in any one of the case.

Course Outcome 4

1. Two reservoir with a difference in water surface elevation of 10 m are connected by a

pipeline AB and BC joined in series. Pipe AB is 10 cm in diameter, 20 m long and has a
value of friction factor f = 0.02. Pipe BC is 16 cm diameter, 25 m long and has a friction
factor f=0.018. The junctions with reservoirs and between pipes are abrupt.

(a) Sketch Total energy line and Hydraulic gradient line

(b) Calculate the discharge.

2. Oil of viscosity 0.1 Pas and specific gravity 0.9 flows through a horizontal pipe of 25 mm
diameter. If the pressure drop per meter length of the pipe is 12 KPa, determine

(a) Discharge through the pipe

(b) Shear stress at the pipe wall
(c) Reynolds number of the flow
 (d) Power required in Watts if the length of the pipe is 50m
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
3. In a hydraulic power plant, a reinforced concrete pipe of diameter D is used to transmit
water from the reservoir to the turbine. If H is the total head supply at the entrance of
the pipe and hf is the loss of head in the pipe, then derive the condition for maximum
power supply through the pipe.

Course Outcome 5

1. Write a short note on boundary layer separation and discuss any two methods to control
the same.

2. Find the displacement thickness, momentum thickness and energy thickness for velocity
distribution in boundary layer given by
u  y   y 2
=2 −
U∞ δ δ

3. A thin plate is moving in still atmospheric air at a velocity of 4m/s. The length of the
plate is 0.5 m and width 0.4 m. Calculate the

(a) thickness of the boundary layer at the end of the plate and
(b) drag force on one side of the plate.

Take density of air as 1.25 kg/m3 and kinematic viscosity 0.15 stokes.

Course Outcome 6

1. State and explain Buckingham’s pi theorem.

2. An underwater device is 1.5m long and is to move at 3.5 m/s speed. A geometrically
similar model 30 cm long is tested in a variable pressure wind tunnel at a speed of 35
m/s. Calculate the pressure of air in the model if the model experience a drag force of
40 N, calculate the prototype drag force. [Assume density of water = 998 kg/m3 , density
of air at standard atmospheric pressure = 1.17 kg/m3 , dynamic viscosity of air at local
atmospheric pressure = 1.95 ∗ 10−5 Pas and dynamic viscosity of water = 1 ∗ 10−3 Pas]

3. Explain the importance of dimensionless numbers and discuss any two similarity laws.
Where are these model laws used?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS
Module 1: Introduction: Fluids and continuum, Physical properties of fluids, density, specific weight,
vapour pressure, Newton’s law of viscosity. Ideal and real fluids, Newtonian and non-Newtonian
fluids. Fluid Statics- Pressure-density-height relationship, manometers, pressure on plane and curved
surfaces, center of pressure, buoyancy, stability of immersed and floating bodies, fluid masses
subjected to uniform accelerations, measurement of pressure.

Module 2: Kinematics of fluid flow: Eulerian and Lagrangian approaches, classification of fluid flow,
1-D, 2-D and 3-D flow, steady, unsteady, uniform, non-uniform, laminar, turbulent, rotational,
irrotational flows, stream lines, path lines, streak lines, stream tubes, velocity and acceleration in
fluid, circulation and vorticity, stream function and potential function, Laplace equation,
equipotential lines, flow nets, uses and limitations.

Module 3: Control volume analysis of mass, momentum and energy, Equations of fluid dynamics:
Differential equations of mass, energy and momentum (Euler’s equation), Navier-Stokes equations
(without proof) in cartesian co-ordinates. Dynamics of Fluid flow: Bernoulli’s equation, Energies in
flowing fluid, head, pressure, dynamic, static and total head, Venturi and Orifice meters, Notches
and Weirs (description only for notches and weirs). Hydraulic coefficients, Velocity measurements:
Pitot tube and Pitot-static tube.

Module 4: Pipe Flow: Viscous flow: Reynolds experiment to classify laminar and turbulent flows,
significance of Reynolds number, critical Reynolds number, shear stress and velocity distribution in a
pipe, law of fluid friction, head loss due to friction, Hagen Poiseuille equation. Turbulent flow: Darcy-
Weisbach equation, Chezy’s equation Moody’s chart, Major and minor energy losses, hydraulic
gradient and total energy line, flow through long pipes, pipes in series, pipes in parallel, equivalent
pipe, siphon, transmission of power through pipes, efficiency of transmission, Water hammer,
Cavitation.

Module 5: Boundary Layer : Growth of boundary layer over a flat plate and definition of boundary
layer thickness, displacement thickness, momentum thickness and energy thickness, laminar and
turbulent boundary layers, laminar sub layer, velocity profile, Von- Karman momentum integral
equations for the boundary layers, calculation of drag, separation of boundary and methods of
control. Dimensional Analysis: Dimensional analysis, Buckingham’s theorem, important non
dimensional numbers and their significance, geometric, Kinematic and dynamic similarity, model
studies. Froude, Reynolds, Weber, Cauchy and Mach laws- Applications and limitations of model
testing, simple problems only

Text Books
John. M. Cimbala and Yunus A. Cengel, Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications (4th
edition, SIE), 2019

Robert W. Fox, Alan T. McDonald, Philip J. Pritchard and John W. Mitchell, Fluid Mechanics, Wiley
India, 2018
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books
White, F. M., Fluid Mechanics, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited, 8th Edition, 2017
Rathakrishnan, E. Fluid Mechanics: An Introduction, Prentice Hall India, 3rd Edition 2012

COURSE PLAN

Module Topics Hours

Allotted

I Introduction: Fluids and continuum, Physical properties of fluids, density, 7-2-0

specific weight, vapour pressure, Newton’s law of viscosity. Ideal and real
fluids, Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids.
Fluid Statics- Pressure-density-height relationship, manometers, pressure
on plane and curved surfaces, center of pressure, buoyancy, stability of
immersed and floating bodies, fluid masses subjected to uniform
accelerations, measurement of pressure.
II Kinematics of fluid flow: Eulerian and Lagrangian approaches, classification 6-2-0
of fluid flow, 1-D, 2-D and 3-D flow, steady, unsteady, uniform, non-
uniform, laminar, turbulent, rotational, irrotational flows, stream lines,
path lines, streak lines, stream tubes, velocity and acceleration in fluid,
circulation and vorticity, stream function and potential function, Laplace
equation, equipotential lines, flow nets, uses and limitations.
III Control volume analysis of mass, momentum and energy, Equations of fluid 6-2-0
dynamics: Differential equations of mass, energy and momentum (Euler’s
equation), Navier-Stokes equations (without proof) in cartesian co-
ordinates
Dynamics of Fluid flow: Bernoulli’s equation, Energies in flowing fluid, head,
pressure, dynamic, static and total head, Venturi and Orifice meters,
Notches and Weirs (description only for notches and weirs). Hydraulic
coefficients, Velocity measurements: Pitot tube and Pitot-static tube.
IV Pipe Flow: Viscous flow: Reynolds experiment to classify laminar and 9-3-0
turbulent flows, significance of Reynolds number, critical Reynolds number,
shear stress and velocity distribution in a pipe, law of fluid friction, head
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
loss due to friction, Hagen Poiseuille equation. Turbulent flow: Darcy-
Weisbach equation, Chezy’s equation Moody’s chart, Major and minor
energy losses, hydraulic gradient and total energy line, flow through long
pipes, pipes in series, pipes in parallel, equivalent pipe, siphon,
transmission of power through pipes, efficiency of transmission, Water
hammer, Cavitation.
V Boundary Layer : Growth of boundary layer over a flat plate and definition 8-2-0
of boundary layer thickness, displacement thickness, momentum thickness
and energy thickness, laminar and turbulent boundary layers, laminar sub
layer, velocity profile, Von- Karman momentum integral equations for the
boundary layers, calculation of drag, separation of boundary and methods
of control.
Dimensional Analysis: Dimensional analysis, Buckingham’s theorem,
important non dimensional numbers and their significance, geometric,
Kinematic and dynamic similarity, model studies. Froude, Reynolds, Weber,
Cauchy and Mach laws- Applications and limitations of model testing,
simple problems only
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
IV SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET203: MECHANICS OF FLUIDS
Mechanical Engineering

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. The specific gravity of a liquid is 3.0. What are its specific weight, specific mass and
specific volume.

2. State Pascal’s law and give some examples where this principle is used.

3. Explain Streamlines, Streaklines and Pathlines.

4. What do you understand by the terms: (i) Total acceleration, (ii) Convective acceleration,
and (iii) Local acceleration.

5. Name the different forces present in a fluid flow. For the Euler’s equation of motion, which
forces are taken into consideration.

6. Differentiate between pitot tube and pitot static tube.

7. Define and explain the terms (i) Hydraulic gradiant line and (ii) Total energy line.

8. Show that the coefficient of friction for viscous flow through a circular pipe is given by
16
f=
Re
where Re is the Reynolds number.

9. What do you mean by repeating variables? How repeating variables are selected for
dimensional analysis.

10. How will you determine whether a boundary layer flow is attached flow, detached flow or
on the verge of separation.

(10×3=30 Marks)
 PART B
Answer one full question from each moduleMECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE-I

11. (a) Through a very narrow gap of height h, a thin plate of large extend is pulled at a
velocity V . On one side of the plate is oil of viscosity µ1 and on the other side oil of
viscosity µ2 . Calculate the position of the plate so that
i. the shear force on the two sides of the plate is equal.
ii. the pull required to drag the plate is minimum.
Assume linear velocity distribution in transverse direction. (7 Marks)
(b) A metallic cube of 30 cm side and weight 500 N is lowered into a tank containing
two fluid layers of water and mercury. Top edge of the cube is at water surface.
Determine the position of the block at water mercury interface when it has reached
equilibrium. (7 Marks)

12. (a) A rectangular tank 1.5 m wide, 3 m long and 1.8 m deep contains water to a depth
of 1.2 m. Find the horizontal acceleration which may be imparted to the tank in the
direction of length so that
i. there is just no spilling from the tank
ii. front bottom corner of the tank is just exposed.
(7 Marks)
(b) A spherical water drop of 1 mm diameter splits up in air into 64 smaller drops of
equal size. Find the work required in splitting up the drop. The surface tension
coefficient of water in air = 0.073 N/m (7 Marks)

MODULE-II

13. (a) In a fluid flow field, velocity vector is given by v = (0.5 + 8x)i + (0.5 − 0.8y)j. Find
the equation of streamline for the given velocity field. (7 Marks)
(b) The stream function ψ = 4xy in which ψ is in cm2 /s and x and y are in meters
describe the incompressible flow between the boundary shown below:

Calculate
i. Velocity at B
ii. Convective acceleration at B
 iii. Flow per unit width across AB
MECHANICAL
(7 ENGINEERING
Marks)

14. (a) Consider the velocity field given by u = x2 and v = −2xy. Find the circulation
around the area bounded by A(1, 1), B(2, 1), C(2, 2), D(1, 2). (7 Marks)
(b) Verify whether the following are valid potential functions.
i. φ = 2x + 5y
ii. φ = 4x2 − 5y 2
(7 Marks)

MODULE-III

15. (a) A submarine moves horizontally in sea and has its axis 15 m below the surface of
the water. A pitot tube properly placed just in front of the submarine and along
its axis is connected to two limbs of a U tube containing mercury. The difference
of level is found to be 170 mm. Find the speed of the submarine knowing that the
specific gravity of mercury is 13.6 and that of sea water is 1.026 with respect to
water. (7 Marks)
(b) A pitot tube is inserted in a pipe of 30 cm diameter. The static pressure of the
tube is 10 cm of mercury vacuum. The stagnation pressure at the centre of the pipe
recorded by the pitot tube is 1.0 N/cm2 . Calculate the rate of flow of water through
the pipe, if the mean velocity of flow is 0.85 times central velocity. Assume coefficient
of tube as 0.98. (7 Marks)

16. (a) A smooth pipe of uniform diameter 25 cm, a pressure of 50 KPa was observed at
section 1 which has an elevation of 10 m. At another section 2, at an elevation of 12
m, the pressure was 20 KPa and the velocity was 1.25 m/s. Determine the direction
of flow and the head loss between the two sections. The fluid in the pipe is water.
(8 Marks)
(b) Petrol of specific gravity 0.8 is following through a pipe of 30 cm diameter. The pipe
is inclined at 30◦ to horizontal. The venturi has a throat diameter of 10 cm. U tube
manometer reads 6.25 cm Hg. Calculate the discharge through the pipe. Assume
Cd = 0.98. (6 Marks)

MODULE-IV

17. (a) Assuming viscous flow through a circular pipe derive the expression for,
i. Velocity distribution
ii. Shear stress distribution
Also plot the velocity and shear stress distribution. (7 Marks)
(b) A large tank shown in the figure has a vertical pipe 70 cm long and 2 cm in diameter.
The tank contain oil of density 920 Kg/m3 and viscosity 1.5 poise. Find the discharge
through the tube when the height of oil level of the tank is 0.80 m above the pipe
inlet.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(7 Marks)
18. (a) A compound piping system consist of 1800 m of 50 cm, 1200 m of 40 cm and 600 m
of 30 com diameter pipes off same material connected in series.
i. What is the equivalent length of a 40 cm pipe of same material?
ii. What is the equivalent diameter of a pipe 3600 m long?
iii. If three pipes are in parallel what is equivalent length of 50 cm pipe?
(10 Marks)
(b) A pipe line of 2100 m is used for transmitting 103 KW. The pressure at the inlet of
the pipe is 392.4 N/cm2 . If the efficiency of transmission is 80%, find the diameter
of the pipe. Take f = 0.005. (4 Marks)
MODULE-V
19. (a) The velocity profile u of a boundary layer flow over a flat plate is given by
u 3  y  1  y 3
= −
U∞ 2 δ 2 δ
If the boundary thickness is given as
r
280νx
δ=
13U∞
develop the expression for local drag coefficient Cf x over the distance x = L from
the leading edge of the plate. (7 Marks)
(b) A model test is to be conducted in a water tunnel using a 1:20 model of a submarine
which is used to travel at a speed of 12 km/h deep under the sea. The water
temperature in the tunnel is so maintained that its kinematic viscosity is half as that
of the sea water. At what speed the model test is to be conducted. (7 Marks)
20. (a) With a neat sketch explain the different regions of the boundary layer along a long
thin flat plate. (7 Marks)
(b) Using Buckingham’s pi theorem show that the velocity through a circular orifice is
given by  
p D µ
2gHφ ,
H ρV H
where H is the head causing flow, D is the diameter of the orifice, µ is the coefficient
of viscosity, ρ is the mass density and g is the acceleration due to gravity.(7 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year of
METALLURGY CATEGORY L T P Credits
Introduction
MET 205 & MATERIAL
SCIENCE
PCC 3 1 0 4 2019
Preamble:
Understanding of the correlation between the chemical bonds and crystal structure of metallic
materials to their mechanical properties.
Recognize the importance of crystal imperfections including dislocations in plastic deformation.
Learning about different phases and heat treatment methods to tailor the properties of Fe-C
alloys.
Examine the mechanisms of materials failure through fatigue and creep.
To determine properties of unknown materials and develop an awareness to apply this
knowledge in material design
Prerequisite: PHT 110 Engineering Physics and CYT 100 Engineering Chemistry

Course Outcomes - At the end of the course students will be able to

Understand the basic chemical bonds, crystal structures (BCC, FCC, and HCP), and
CO 1
their relationship with the properties.
Analyze the microstructure of metallic materials using phase diagrams and modify the
CO 2
microstructure and properties using different heat treatments.

CO 3 How to quantify mechanical integrity and failure in materials.

Apply the basic principles of ferrous and non-ferrous metallurgy for selecting materials
CO 4
for specific applications.
Define and differentiate engineering materials on the basis of structure and properties
CO 5
for engineering applications.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirements)

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 - 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO 4 - - - 3 - - - - - - -
CO 5 - - - - - - - - - - 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

Bloom's (Marks)
Test 1 (Marks) Test 11 (Marks)
taxonomy
Remember 25 25 25
Understand 15 15 15
Apply 30 25 30
Analyze 10 10 10
Evaluate 10 15 10
Create 10 10 10

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE marks ESE marks ESE duration

150 50 100 3 Hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:

Attendance 10 marks

Regular class work/tutorials/assignments 15 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (Minimum 2 numbers) 25 marks

End semester pattern:- There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14
marks.
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
Part -A
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the basic chemical bonds, crystal structures (BCC,
FCC, and HCP), and their relationship with the properties.
1. What are the attributes of atomic and crystalline structures into the stress - strain curve?
2. Explain the significance of long range and short range order of atomic arrangement on
mechanical strength.
3. What is the difference between an allotrope and a polymorphism?
4. Draw the (112) and (111) planes in simple cubic cell.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Analyze the microstructure of metallic materials using phase diagrams
and modify the microstructure and properties using different heat treatments.
1. What is the driving force for recrystallisation and grain growth of metallic crystals?
2. What is the driving force for the formation of spheroidite.
3. What is tempered martensite?
4. Why 100 % pure metals are weak in strength?
Part -B
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): How to quantify mechanical integrity and failure in materials
1. A small hole is drilled through a steel plate ahead of a crack, whether it can stop the crack’s
progress until repairs can be made. Explain in detail and derive the equation for the principle.
2. Draw and explain S-N curves for ferrous and non-ferrous metals. Explain different methods to
improve fatigue resistance.
3. Explain different stages of creep; Give an application of creep phenomenon. What is
superplasticity?
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Apply the basic principles of ferrous and non-ferrous metallurgy for
selecting materials for specific applications.
1. What are the classification, compositions and applications of high speed steel? identify 18:4:1
2. Describe the composition, properties, and use of Bronze and Gun metal.
3. Explain the importance of all the non-ferrous alloys in automotive applications. Elaborate on
the composition, properties and typical applications of any five non-ferrous alloys.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Define and differentiate engineering materials on the basis of structure
and properties for engineering applications.
1. Carbon is allowed to diffuse through a steel plate 15 mm thick. The concentrations of carbon at
the two faces are 0.65 and 0.30kgC/m3Fe, which are maintained constant. If the pre-
exponential and activation energy are 6.2x10-7m2/s and 80,000 J/mol, respectively, compute
the temperature at which the diffusion flux is 1.43 x 10-9 kg/m2-s.
2. Explain the fundamental effects of alloying elements in steel on polymorphic transformation
temperatures, grain growth, eutectoid point, retardation of the transformation rates, formation
and stability of carbides.
3. Describe the kind of fracture which may occur as a result of a loose fitting key on a shaft.
SYLLABUS
MODULE - 1
Earlier and present development of atomic structure - Primary bonds: - characteristics of covalent,
ionic and metallic bond - properties based on atomic bonding: - Secondary bonds: - classification,
application. (Brief review only).
Crystallography: - SC, BCC, FCC, HCP structures, APF - theoretical density simple problems - Miller
Indices: - crystal plane and direction - Modes of plastic deformation: - Slip and twinning -Schmid's
law - Crystallization: Effects of grain size, Hall - Petch theory, simple problems.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE - II
Classification of crystal imperfections - forest of dislocation, role of surface defects on crack
initiation- Burgers vector –Frank Read source - Correlation of dislocation density with strength and
nano concept - high and low angle grain boundaries– driving force for grain growth and applications -
Polishing and etching - X – ray diffraction, simple problems –SEM and TEM - Diffusion in solids,
fick’s laws, mechanisms, applications of diffusion in mechanical engineering, simple problems.

MODULE - III
Phase diagrams: - need of alloying - classification of alloys - Hume Rothery`s rule - equilibrium
diagram of common types of binary systems: five types - Coring - lever rule and Gibb`s phase rule -
Reactions- Detailed discussion on Iron-Carbon equilibrium diagram with microstructure and
properties -Heat treatment: - TTT, CCT diagram, applications - Tempering- Hardenability, Jominy end
quench test, applications- Surface hardening methods.

MODULE - IV
Strengthening mechanisms - cold and hot working - alloy steels: how alloying elements affecting
properties of steel - nickel steels - chromium steels - high speed steels -cast irons - principal non
ferrous alloys.

MODULE - V
Fatigue: - creep -DBTT - super plasticity - need, properties and applications of composites, super
alloy, intermetallics, maraging steel, Titanium - Ceramics:- structures, applications.
Text Books
1. Callister William. D., Material Science and Engineering, John Wiley, 2014
2. Higgins R.A. - Engineering Metallurgy part - I – ELBS,1998
Reference
1. Avner H Sidney, Introduction to Physical Metallurgy, Tata McGraw Hill,2009
2. Anderson J.C. et.al., Material Science for Engineers, Chapman and Hall,1990
3. Clark and Varney, Physical metallurgy for Engineers, Van Nostrand,1964
4. Dieter George E, Mechanical Metallurgy, Tata McGraw Hill, 1976
5. Raghavan V, Material Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall,2004
6. Reed Hill E. Robert, Physical metallurgy principles, 4th edition, Cengage Learning,2009
7. Myers Marc and Krishna Kumar Chawla, Mechanical behavior of materials, Cambridge
University press,2008
8. Van Vlack -Elements of Material Science - Addison Wesley,1989
9. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113/106/113106032
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

METALLURGY & MATERIAL SCIENCE - MET 205

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

Part – A
Answer all questions.
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. What is a slip system? Describe the slip systems in FCC, BCC and HCP metals
2. NASA's Parker Solar Probe will be the first-ever mission to "touch" the Sun. The spacecraft,
about the size of a small car, will travel directly into the Sun's atmosphere about 4 million miles
from the earth surface. Postulate the coolant used in the parker solar probe with chemical
bonds.
3. What is the driving force for grain growth during heat treatment
4. What are the roles of surface imperfections on crack initiation
5. Explain the difference between hardness and hardenability.
6. What is tempered martensite? Explain its structure with sketch.
7. Postulate, why cast irons are brittle?

8. How are properties of aluminum affected by the inclusion of (a) copper and (b) silicon as alloying
elements?

9. What is the grain size preferred for creep applications? Why. Explain thermal fatigue?
10. Explain fracture toughness and its attributes into a screw jack?
PART -B

Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE – 1

11. a. Calculate the APF of SC, BCC and FCC (7 marks).

b. What is slip system and explain why FCC materials exhibit ductility and B C C a n d HCP
exhibit brittle nature with details of slip systems (7 marks).

OR

12. Explain the effect of: (i) Grain size; (ii) Grain size distribution and (iii) Grain orientation (iv)
Grain shape on strength and creep resistance with neat sketches. Attributes of Hall-Petch
equation and grain boundaries (14 marks).
MODULE – 2

13. a. Describe step by step procedure for metallographic specimen preparation? Name different
types etchants used for specific metals and methods to determine grain size (7 marks).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b. Carbon is allowed to diffuse through a steel plate 15 mm thick. The concentrations of carbon
at the two faces are 0.65 and 0.30 kgC/m3Fe, which are maintained constant. If the pre-
exponential and activation energy are 6.2x10-7m2/s and 80,000 J/mol, respectively, compute the
temperature at which the diffusion flux is 1.43 x 10-9 kg/m2-s (7 marks).
OR
14. a. Explain the fundamental differences of SEM and TEM with neat sketches (7 marks).

b. A beam of X-rays wavelength 1.54Å is incident on a crystal at a glancing angle of 8o35’

when the first order Bragg’s reflection occurs calculate the glancing angle for third order
reflection (7 marks).
MODULE – 3

15. Postulate with neat sketches, why 100% pure metals are weaker? What are the primary
functions of alloying? Explain the fundamental rules governing the alloying with neat sketches
and how is it accomplished in substitution and interstitial solid solutions (14 marks).
OR
16. Draw the isothermal transformation diagram of eutectoid steel and then sketch and label (1) A
time temperature path that will produce 100% pure coarse and fine pearlite (2) A time
temperature path that will produce 50% martensite and 50% bainite (3) A time temperature
path that will produce 100% martensite (4) A time temperature path that will produce 100%
bainite (14 marks).
MODULE – 4

17. Explain the effect of, polymorphic transformation temperature, formation and stability of
carbides, grain growth, displacement of the eutectoid point, retardation of the transformation
rates, improvement of corrosion resistance on adding alloy elements to steel (14 marks).
OR
18. Give the composition, microstructure, properties and applications of (i) Gray iron and SG iron.
(ii) White iron and Gray iron. (iii) Malleable iron and Gray iron. (iv) Gray iron and Mottled
iron, (v) SG iron and Vermicullar Graphite Iron (14 marks).
MODULE – 5

19. a A small hole is drilled through a steel plate ahead of a crack, whether it can stop the crack’s
progress until repairs can be made or not? Explain in detail and derive the equation
(7 marks).

b What is ductile to brittle transition in steel DBTT? What are the factors affecting ductile to
brittle transition? Narrate with neat sketch (7 marks).
OR
20. Classify ceramics with radius ratio with neat sketches. Explain with an example for each of the
AX, AmXp, AmBmXp type structures in ceramics with neat sketch (14 marks).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE CONTENT AND LECTURE SCHEDULES.

No.
Course
Module TOPIC of
outcomes
hours
Earlier and present development of atomic structure; attributes of ionization
energy and conductivity, electronegativity; correlation of atomic radius to
strength; electron configurations; - Primary bonds: - characteristics of
covalent, ionic and metallic bond: attributes of bond energy, cohesive force,
density, directional and non-directional - properties based on atomic
1.1 2 CO1
bonding:- attributes of deeper energy well and shallow energy well to melting
temperature, coefficient of thermal expansion - attributes of modulus of
elasticity in metal cutting process -Secondary bonds:- classification- hydrogen
bond and anomalous behavior of ice float on water, application- specific
heat, applications. (Brief review only).

Crystallography:- Crystal, space lattice, unit cell- SC, BCC, FCC, atomic
1.2 packing factor and HCP structures - short and long range order - effects of 2
crystalline and amorphous structure on mechanical properties. CO1
CO2
Coordination number and radius ratio; theoretical density; simple problems -
1.3 1
Polymorphism and allotropy.
Miller Indices: - crystal plane and direction - Attributes of miller indices for
1.4 slip system, brittleness of BCC, HCP and ductility of FCC - Modes of plastic 1
deformation: - Slip and twinning. CO5
Schmid's law, equation, critical resolved shear stress, correlation of slip
1.5 1
system with plastic deformation in metals and applications.
Mechanism of crystallization: Homogeneous and heterogeneous nuclei
formation, under cooling, dendritic growth, grain boundary irregularity -
1.6 Effects of grain size, grain size distribution, grain shape, grain orientation on 2 CO2
dislocation/strength and creep resistance - Hall - Petch theory, simple
problems.
2.1 Classification of crystal imperfections: - types of point and dislocations. 1
Effect of point defects on mechanical properties - forest of dislocation, role of CO2
2.2 1
surface defects on crack initiation - Burgers vector.
Dislocation source, significance of Frank-Read source in metals deformation -
2.3 Correlation of dislocation density with strength and nano concept,
applications. 3 CO2
Significance high and low angle grain boundaries on dislocation – driving
2.4
force for grain growth and applications during heat treatment.
Polishing and etching to determine the microstructure and grain size-
2.5
Fundamentals and crystal structure determination by X – ray diffraction, 2
CO2
simple problems –SEM and TEM.
CO5
Diffusion in solids, fick’s laws, mechanisms, applications of diffusion in
2.6 1
mechanical engineering, simple problems.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Phase diagrams: - Limitations of pure metals and need of alloying -

3.1 classification of alloys, solid solutions, Hume Rothery`s rule - equilibrium 2
diagram of common types of binary systems: five types. CO2
CO5
Coring - lever rule and Gibb`s phase rule - Reactions: - monotectic, eutectic,
3.2 1
eutectoid, peritectic, peritectoid.
Detailed discussion on Iron-Carbon equilibrium diagram with microstructure
3.3 and properties changes in austenite, ledeburite, ferrite, cementite, special
features of martensite transformation, bainite, spheroidite etc. CO2
3
Heat treatment: - Definition and necessity – TTT for a eutectoid iron–carbon CO5
3.4 alloy, CCT diagram, applications - annealing, normalizing, hardening,
spheroidizing.
Tempering:- austermpering, martempering and ausforming - Comparative
3.5 study on ductility and strength with structure of pearlite, bainite, spherodite, 1 CO2
martensite, tempered martensite and ausforming.
Hardenability, Jominy end quench test, applications- Surface hardening
methods:- no change in surface composition methods :- Flame, induction, laser
3.6 2
and electron beam hardening processes- change in surface composition
methods :carburizing and Nitriding; applications. CO2
Cold working: Detailed discussion on strain hardening; recovery; re-
4.1 crystallization, effect of stored energy; re- crystallization temperature - 1
hot working, Bauschinger effect and attributes in metal forming.
Alloy steels:- Effects of alloying elements on steel: dislocation movement,
polymorphic transformation temperature, alpha and beta stabilizers, formation
4.2 and stability of carbides, grain growth, displacement of the eutectoid point, 1 CO4
retardation of the transformation rates, improvement in corrosion resistance,
mechanical properties

Nickel steels, Chromium steels etc. – change of steel properties by adding

alloying elements: - Molybdenum, Nickel, Chromium, Vanadium, Tungsten,
Cobalt, Silicon, Copper and Lead - High speed steels - Cast irons:
Classifications; grey, white, malleable and spheroidal graphite cast iron etc, CO4
4.3 4
composition, microstructure, properties and applications - Principal Non CO5
ferrous Alloys: - Aluminum, Copper, Magnesium, Nickel, study of
composition, properties, applications, reference shall be made to the phase
diagrams whenever necessary.( Topic 4.3 may be considered as a assignment).

Fatigue: - Stress cycles – Primary and secondary stress raisers - Characteristics

4.4 1
of fatigue failure, fatigue tests, S-N curve.
Factors affecting fatigue strength: stress concentration, size effect, surface CO3
roughness, change in surface properties, surface residual stress - Ways to
4.5 2
improve fatigue life – effect of temperature on fatigue, thermal fatigue and its
applications in metal cutting.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Fracture: – Brittle and ductile fracture – Griffith theory of brittle fracture –

Stress concentration, stress raiser – Effect of plastic deformation on crack
5.1 propagation - transgranular, intergranular fracture - Effect of impact loading on 2
ductile material and its application in forging, applications - Mechanism of
fatigue failure. CO3
Structural features of fatigue: - crack initiation, growth, propagation - Fracture
toughness (definition only), applications - Ductile to brittle transition
5.2 1
temperature (DBTT) in steels and structural changes during DBTT,
applications.
Creep: - Creep curves – creep tests - Structural change:- deformation by slip,
sub-grain formation, grain boundary sliding - Mechanism of creep deformation
5.3 2 CO3
- threshold for creep, prevention against creep - Super plasticity: need and
applications
Composites: - Need of development of composites; fiber phase; matrix phase;
5.4 2
only need and characteristics of PMC, MMC, and CMC.
Modern engineering materials: - only fundamentals, need, properties and CO3
applications of, intermetallics, maraging steel, super alloys, Titanium- CO5
5.5 3
Ceramics:-coordination number and radius ratios- AX, AmXp, AmBmXp type
structures – applications.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year of
COMPUTER AIDED CATEGORY L T P Credits
MEL201 Introduction
MACHINE DRAWING
PCC 0 0 3 2 2019
Preamble: To introduce students to the basics and standards of engineering drawing related to
machines and components.
To make studentsfamiliarize with different types of riveted and welded joints, surface roughness
symbols; limits, fits and tolerances.
To convey the principles and requirements of machine and production drawings.
To introduce the preparation ofdrawings of assembled and disassembled view of important valves
and machine components used in mechanical engineering applications.
To introduce standard CAD packages for drafting andmodelingof engineering components.
Prerequisite: EST 110 - Engineering Graphics
Course Outcomes - At the end of the course students will be able to

CO1 Apply the knowledge of engineering drawings and standards to prepare standard
dimensioned drawings of machine parts and other engineering components.
CO2 Preparestandard assembly drawings of machine components and valvesusing part drawings
and bill of materials.
CO3 Apply limits and tolerances to components and choose appropriate fits for given
assemblies
CO 4 Interpret the symbols of welded, machining and surface roughness on the component
drawings.
CO 5 Prepare part and assembly drawings and Bill of Materials of machine components and
valves using CAD software.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirements)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2
CO4 3
CO5 3 3 3 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Continuous Assessment Tests

taxonomy Test 1 Test 2
PART A PART B
Sketching and Manual CAD Drawing
Drawing
Remember 25 20
Understand 15 15
Apply 30 20
Analyse 10 10
Evaluate 10 15
Create 10 20

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE marks ESE duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:

Attendance 15 marks
Regular class work/Drawing/Workshop 30 marks
Record/Lab Record and Class Performance
Continuous Assessment Test (minimum two tests) 30 marks

End semester examination pattern

End semester examination shall be conducted on Sketching and CAD drawing on based
complete syllabus
The following general guidelines should be maintained for the award of marks
Part A Sketching – 15 marks
Part B CAD drawing – 50marks
Viva Voce – 10 marks.

Conduct of University Practical Examinations

The Principals of the concerned Engineering Colleges with the help of the
Chairmen/Chairperson will conduct the practical examination with the approval from the
University and bonafide work / laboratory record, hall ticket, identity card issued by college
are mandatory for appearing practical University examinations. No practical examination
should be conducted without the presence of an external examiner appointed by the University.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

END SEMSTER EXAMINATION

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

MEL 201: COMPUTER AIDED MACHINE DRAWING

Duration : 2.5 hours Marks : 75

Note :
1. All dimensions in mm
2. Assume missing dimensions appropriately
3. A4 size answer booklet shall be supplied
4. Viva Voce shall be conducted for 10 marks

PART A (SKETCHING)
(Answer any TWO questions ). 15 marks

1. Sketch two views of a single riveted single strap butt joint. Take dimensions of the plate as
10mm. Mark the proportions in the drawing.

2. Show by means of neat sketches, any three methods employed for preventing nuts from
getting loose on account of vibrations

3. Compute the limit dimensions of the shaft and the hole for a clearance fit based on shaft
basis system if:
Basic size= φ30 mm
Minimum clearance = 0.007 mm
Tolerance on hole = 0.021 mm
Tolerance on shaft= 0.021 mm
Check the calculated dimensions. Represent the limit dimensions schematically.
PART B (CAD DRAWING) 50 marks

4. Draw any two assembled views of the Rams Bottom Safety Valve as per the details given in
the figure using any suitable CAD software. Also prepare bill of materials and tolerance
data sheet.

Item Description Qty Material Item Description Qty Material

1 Body 1 C.I. 8 Split Pin 3 M.S.
2 Valve Seat 2 G.M. 9 Pin for Link 2 M.S.
3 Spring 1 Steel 10 Pin for Pivot 1 M.S.
4 Valve 2 G.M. 11 Shackle 1 M.S.
5 Lever 1 M.S. 12 Washer 1 M.S.
6 Pivot 1 M.S. 13 Nut 1 M.S.
7 Link 2 M.S. 14 Lock Nut 1 M.S.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
Introduction to machine drawing, drawing standards, fits, tolerances, surface roughness, assembly
and part drawings of simple assemblies and subassemblies of machine parts viz., couplings, clutches,
bearings, I.C. engine components, valves, machine tools, etc; introduction to CAD etc.

Text Books:
1. N. D. Bhatt and V.M. Panchal, Machine Drawing, Charotar Publishing House.
2. P I Varghese and K C John, Machine Drawing, VIP Publishers.
Reference Books
1. Ajeet Singh, Machine Drawing Includes AutoCAD, Tata McGraw-hill.
2. P S Gill, Machine Drawing, Kataria& Sons.

Course content and drawing schedules.

No: List of Exercises Course No. of

outcomes hours

PART –A (Manual drawing)

(Minimum 6 drawings compulsory)
Temporary Joint:
Principles of drawing, free hand sketching, Importance of
machine Drawing. BIScode of practice for Engineering
1 Drawing, lines, types of lines, dimensioning, scales of CO 1 3
drawing, sectional views, Riveted joints.

Fasteners: CO 1 3
2 Sketching of conventional representation of welded
joints,Bolts and Nuts or Keys and Foundation Bolts.

Fits and Tolerances:

Limits, Fits – Tolerances of individual dimensions –
3 Specification of Fits – basic principles of geometric &
dimensional tolerances. CO 2 3
Surface Roughness:
Preparation of production drawings and reading of part and
assembly drawings, surface roughness, indication of
surface roughness, etc.

4 Detailed drawing of Cotter joints, Knuckle joint and Pipe CO 2 3

joints

5 Assembly drawings(2D): CO 1
Stuffing box and Screw jack CO3 3
CO4
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART –B (CAD drawing)

(Minimum 6 drawings compulsory)

Introduction to drafting software like Auto CAD, basic CO 1

commands, keyboard shortcuts. Coordinate and unit CO 2
6 setting, Drawing, Editing, Measuring, Dimensioning, CO 3 3
Plotting Commands, Layering Concepts, Matching, CO5
Detailing, Detailed drawings.
CO 1
CO 2
7 Drawing of Shaft couplings and Oldham's coupling CO 3 3
CO5
8 CO 1
Assembly drawings(2D)with Bill of materials: CO3 3
Lathe Tailstock and Universal joint CO5
CO 1
9 Assembly drawings(2D)with Bill of materials: CO3 3
Connecting rod and Plummer block CO5
CO 1
10 Assembly drawings(2D)with Bill of materials: CO3 3
Rams Bottom Safety Valve OR steam stop valve CO5
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MEL203 MATERIALS TESTING LAB PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble:

The objective of this course is to give a broad understanding of common materials related to
mechanical engineering with an emphasis on the fundamentals of structure-property-
application and its relationships. A group of 6/7 students can conduct experiment
effectively. A total of six experiments for the duration of 2 hours each is proposed for this
course.

Prerequisite: A course on Engineering Mechanics is required

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 To understand the basic concepts of analysis of circular shafts subjected to torsion.

CO 2 To understand the behaviour of engineering component subjected to cyclic loading and
failure concepts
CO 3 Evaluate the strength of ductile and brittle materials subjected to compressive, Tensile
shear and bending forces
CO 4 Evaluate the microstructural morphology of ductile or brittle materials and its fracture
modes (ductile /brittle fracture) during tension test
CO 5 To specify suitable material for applications in the field of design and manufacturing.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO
12
CO 1 3 3
CO 2 3 3 1 3 3 2 2 1
CO 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 2
CO 5 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

The following guidelines should be followed regarding award of marks

(a) Preliminary work : 15 Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and troubleshooting) : 25 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions:

Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second series test covering entire
syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be conducted under the equal
responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The number of candidates evaluated per
day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for the University examination only on
submitting the duly certified record. The external examiner shall endorse the record.

A minimum of 10 experiments are to be performed.

SYLLABUS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. To conduct tension test on ductile material (mild steel/ tor-steel/ high strength steel) using
Universal tension testing machine and Extensometer.

2. To conduct compression test on ductile material (mild steel/ tor-steel/ high strength steel)
using Universal tension testing machine and Extensometer.

3. To conduct tension test on Brittle material (cast iron) using Universal tension testing
machine and Extensometer.

4. To conduct shear test on mild steel rod.

5. To conduct microstructure features of mild steel/copper/ brass/aluminium using optical

microscope, double disc polishing machine, emery papers and etchent.

6. To conduct fractography study of ductile or brittle material using optical microscope.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
7. To conduct Hardness test of a given material. (Brinell, Vickers and Rockwell)

8. To determine torsional rigidity of mild steel/copper/brass rod.

9. To determine flexural rigidity of mild steel/ copper/brass material using universal testing
machine.

10. To determine fracture toughness of the given material using Universal tension testing
machine.

11. To study the procedure for plotting S-N curve using Fatigue testing machine.

12. To conduct a Toughness test of the given material using Izod and Charpy Machine.

13. To determine spring stiffness of close coiled/open coiled/series/parallel arrangements.

14. To conduct bending test on wooden beam.

15. To conduct stress measurements using Photo elastic methods.

16. To conduct strain measurements using strain gauges.

17. To determine moment of inertia of rotating bodies.

18. To conduct an experiment to Verify Clerk Maxwell’s law of reciprocal deflection and
determine young's Modulus of steel.

19. To determine the surface roughness of a polished specimen using surface profilometer.

Reference Books

1. G E Dieter. Mechanical Metallurgy, McGraw Hill,2013

2. Dally J W, Railey W P, Experimental Stress analysis , McGarw Hill,1991

3. Baldev Raj, Jayakumar T, Thavasimuthu M., Practical Non destructive testing, Narosa Book

Distributors,2015
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -3
MINOR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET281 MECHANICS OF MATERIALS VAC 3 1 4

Preamble:

This course helps the students to understand the concept of stress and strain, and practice
the methodologies to analyze different types of structures under various loading conditions.
The course also covers simple and compound stresses due to forces, stresses and deflection
in beams due to bending, torsion of shafts.

Prerequisite: EST100 ENGINEERING MECHANICS

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Discuss the concepts of stress and strain in deformable bodies due to structural and
thermal loading
CO 2 Analyse the behaviour of materials under shear stress due to torsional loads acting in
simple structural members
CO 3 Analyse beams using graphical and analytical methods to determine slope, deflection and
stress
CO 4 Transform stresses and strains for plane stress problems mathematically and graphically
and determine the principal stresses and its directions
CO 5 Analyze simple structures subjected to compound stresses, and columns subjected to
buckling conditions

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 1
CO 2 3 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 3 2 1
CO 5 3 2 2 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 50
Apply 20 20 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution
Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Discuss normal strain and shear strain.

2. Determine the deformation of axially loaded bars.

3. State the principle of superposition.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Compare the strength of a hollow shaft and a solid shaft.

2. List four important assumptions in the theory of torsion.

3. Determine the shear stress developed in a circular shaft subjected to torsional loading.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Draw the Shear Force Diagram and Bending Moment Diagram of a beam.

2. Determine the bending stress and shear stresses in beams.

3. Explain pure bending with example.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Estimate the deflection of the beam.

2. Discuss principal planes and principal stresses.

3. Determine principal stresses, maximum shear stress, plane of maximum shear stress and the
resultant stress on the plane of maximum shear stress

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Draw the Mohr’s circle.

2. Discuss the behaviour of structures under compound loading.

3. Calculate the safe buckling load.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODEL QUESTION PAPER

THIRD SEMESTER MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Time: 3 hrs MET281 MECHANICS OF MATERIALS Max. Marks: 100

PART – A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Discuss the significance of Poisson’s ratio.

2. Explain Hooke’s law for linearly elastic isotropic material.

3. List the important assumptions in the theory of torsion.

4. Explain the term 'point of inflection'.

5. Define i) section modulus and ii) flexural rigidity

6. Explain how shear stress is distributed over the cross section of a rectangular beam.

7. Explain how double integration method can be used to obtain slope and deflection of beams.

8. Define principal stresses and principal planes and explain its significance

9. Draw the Mohr’s circle for uniaxial tensile load acting on a mild steel bar.

10. Write a short note on Rankine's crippling load for a column.

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1

11. a) Draw a typical stress strain curve for mild steel under tension, describing briefly the salient
points . (7 marks)

b) A steel bar is fastened between two copper bars as shown in figure. The assembly is subjected
to loads at positions as in figure. Calculate the total deformation of the bar and stresses at
each section. Esteel = 200 GPa and Ecopper = 110 GPa. (7 marks)

OR

12. a) A bar made of brass and steel as shown in figure is held between two rigid supports A and C.
Find the stresses in each material if the temperature rises by 40°C. Take Eb = 1×105 N/mm2;
αb= 19 × 10-6 / °C, Es = 2 × 105 N/mm2 ; αs = 12 × 10-6 / °C. (9 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b) A straight bar 450 mm long is 40 mm in diameter for the first 250 mm length and 20 mm
diameter for the remaining length. If the bar is subjected to an axial pull of 15 kN, find the
maximum and minimum stresses produced in it and the total extension of the bar.
Take E = 2 × 105 N/mm2. (5 marks)

MODULE – 2

13. a) A solid aluminium shaft 1 m long and 50 mm diameter is to be replaced by a tubular steel
shaft of the same length and the same outside diameter such that each of the two shafts could
have the same angle of twist per unit torsional moment over the total length. What must the
inner diameter of the tubular steel shaft be? Modulus of rigidity of the steel is three times that
of aluminium. (10 marks)

b) A solid steel shaft transmits 20 kW at 120 rpm. Determine the smallest safe diameter of the
shaft if the shear stress is not to exceed 40 MPa. (4 marks)

OR

14. a) Draw shear force and bending moment diagram for the beam given in the figure and mark all
the salient points. (10 marks)

b) Explain the sign conventions used for shear forces and bending moments. (4 marks)

MODULE – 3

15. a) Derive the flexure formula for pure bending of a beam. State the assumptions (9 marks)

b) A rolled steel joist of I section has the dimensions as shown in figure. The beam carries a
uniformly distributed load of 40 kN/mm2 run on a span of 10 m, calculate the maximum
stress produced due to bending. (5 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR

16. a) At the critical section of a beam of rectangular cross section with height 200 mm and width
100 mm, the value of the vertical shear force is 40 kN. Draw the shear stress distribution across
the depth of the section. (9 marks)

b) Derive the expression for shear stress in a beam. (5 marks)

MODULE – 4

17. a) A horizontal girder of steel having uniform section is 14 m long and is simply supported at its
ends. It carries concentrated loads of 120 kN and 80 kN at two points 3 m and 4.5 m from the
two ends respectively. Moment of inertia for the section of the girder is 16 × 108 mm4 and Es =
210 kN/mm2. Calculate the deflection of the girder at points under the two loads and maximum
deflection using Macaulay’s method. (10 marks)

b) A rectangular block of material is subjected to a tensile stress of 110 N/mm2 on one plane and
a tensile stress of 47 N/mm2 on a plane at right angles, together with shear stresses of 63
N/mm2 on the same planes. Find the magnitude of the principal stresses and maximum shear
stress. (4 marks)

OR

18. a) Derive the transformation equations to determine normal and shear stress on an oblique
plane. (10 marks)

b) Define state of stress at point. Show the components of stress on a 3D rectangular element
(4 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. a) At a point in a bracket the stresses on two mutually perpendicular planes are 120 N/mm2 and
60 N/mm2 both tensile. The shear stress across these planes is 30 N/mm2. Find using the Mohr's
stress circle i) Principal stresses at the point, ii) Maximum shear stress and iii) resultant stress on
a plane inclined at 60° to the axis of the major principal stress. (10 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
b) Explain with the help of an example, how to calculate the normal stress when axial and
transverse loads act simultaneously. (4 marks)

OR

20. a) Find the crippling load for a hollow steel column 50mm internal diameter and 5mm thick. The
column is 5m long with one end fixed and other end hinged. Use Rankine’s formula and
Rankine’s constant as 1/7500 and σc = 335 N/mm2. (9 marks)

b) Derive Euler's formula for a column with both ends hinged. (5 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS
Module 1

Introduction to analysis of deformable bodies – internal forces – method of sections – assumptions

and limitations. Stress – stresses due to normal, shear and bearing loads – strength design of simple
members. Definition of linear and shear strains.
Material behavior – uniaxial tension test – stress-strain diagrams – Hooke’s law for linearly elastic
isotropic material under axial and shear deformation, Poisson’s ratio, Relationship between Young’s
modulus, Poisson’s ratio and rigidity modulus(no derivations)
Deformation in axially loaded bars – thermal effects – statically indeterminate problems – principle
of superposition.

Module 2

Torsion: Shafts - torsion theory of elastic circular bars – assumptions and limitations – polar modulus
- torsional rigidity – economic cross-sections – statically indeterminate problems – shaft design for
torsional load.
Beams- classification - diagrammatic conventions for supports and loading - axial force, shear force
and bending moment in a beam.

Shear force and bending moment diagrams for simply supported, cantilever and overhanging beams
(with concentrated loads, moment and uniformly distributed loads only), point of inflection and
contraflexure

Module 3

Stresses in beams: Pure bending – flexure formula for beams assumptions and limitations – section
modulus – flexural rigidity – economic sections, Problems to calculate bending stress for rectangular
and I cross sections.

Shearing stress formula for beams – assumptions and limitations – Problems to calculate shear stress
for beams of rectangular cross section.

Module 4

Deflection of beams: Moment-curvature relation – assumptions and limitations - double integration

method – Macaulay’s method.

Transformation of stress and strains: Definition of state of stress at a point (introduction to stress
and strain tensors and its components only) -plane stress – plane strain - equations of
transformation (2D) - principal planes and stresses - analogy between stress and strain
transformation

Module 5

Mohr’s circles of stress (2D)

Compound stresses: Combined axial, flexural and shear loads – combined bending and twisting
loads.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Theory of columns: Buckling theory – Euler’s formula for long columns – assumptions and limitations
– effect of end conditions – slenderness ratio – Rankine’s formula for intermediate columns.

Text Books

1. S.S Rattan, “Strength of Materials”, McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 2011.

Reference Books

1. Surya Patnaik, Dale Hopkins, Strength of Materials, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1st edition, 2003.

2. S. H. Crandal, N. C. Dhal, T. J. Lardner, An introduction to the Mechanics of Solids, McGraw Hill,

1999.

3. Mechanics of Materials, Pytel A. and Kiusalaas J. Cengage Learning India Private Limited, 2nd
Edition, 2015

4. R. C. Hibbeler, Mechanics of Materials, Pearson Education, 2008.

5. I.H. Shames, J. H. Pitarresi, Introduction to Solid Mechanics, PHI, 2006.

6. James M. Gere, Mechanics of Materials, Brooks/Cole–Thomson Learning, 2004.

7. F. P. Beer, E. R. Johnston, J. T. DeWolf, Mechanics of Materials, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.

8. MIT Open Courseware web course http://web.mit.edu/emech/dontindex-build/

9. Egor P. Popov, “Engineering Mechanics of Solids”, PHI, 2nd edition, 2002.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE CONTENTS AND LECTURE SCHEDULE

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Module 1: Introduction to Stress and Strain Analysis 9
1.1 Introduction to analysis of deformable bodies – internal forces – method of 1
sections – assumptions and limitations.
1.2 Stress – stresses due to normal, shear and bearing loads – strength design 2
of simple members. Definition of linear and shear strains.
1.3 Material behavior – uniaxial tension test – stress-strain diagrams for 1
ductile and brittle materials under axial loading, significance of various
points on the diagram
1.4 Hooke’s law for linearly elastic isotropic material under axial and shear 1
deformation, Poisson’s ratio.
1.5 Relationship between Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio and rigidity 1
modulus(no derivations)
1.6 Deformation in axially loaded bars – thermal effects – statically 3
indeterminate problems – principle of superposition
2 Module 2: Torsion and Introduction to beams 9
2.1 Introduction to Torsion of Shafts – torsion theory of elastic circular bars – 1
assumptions and limitations
2.2 Polar modulus - torsional rigidity – economic cross-sections – statically 2
indeterminate problems
2.3 Shaft design for torsional load and numerical problems 1
2.4 Introduction to beam bending – sign conventions for supports, loads and 2
moments, classifications of beams, demonstration of the behaviour of
beams for various types of loads
2.5 Shear force and bending moment diagrams for simply supported, 3
cantilever and overhanging beams (with concentrated loads, moment and
uniformly distributed loads only), point of inflection and contraflexure
(simple problems to draw the SF and BM diagrams)
3 Module 3: Beam Bending 9
3.1 Stresses in beams: Pure bending – flexure formula for beams assumptions, 3
limitations and derivation
3.2 Section modulus – flexural rigidity – economic sections –, numerical 3
problems to analyze the strength of beams (rectangular and I sections
only)
3.3 Shearing stress in beams – assumptions and limitations – derivation of 3
formula for shear stress, problems to calculate shear stress for beams of
rectangular cross section
4 Module 4: Deflection of Beams and Stress-Strain transformations 9
4.1 Introduction to deflection of beams: Moment-curvature relation – 1
assumptions and limitations
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
4.2 Double integration method – Macaulay’s method – Simple problems to 3
calculate deflection of cantilever and simply supported beams subjected to
point load, moment and UDL
4.3 Definition of stress at a point (introduction to stress and strain tensors and 2
its components only), plane stress, plane strain
4.4 Stress and strain transformations in 2D – transformation equations - 1
analogy between stress and strain transformation
4.5 Determination of principal stresses and principal planes 2
5 Module 5: Mohr’s Circle, Compound Stress and Column Buckling 9
5.1 Mohr’s circles of stress (2D) – problems 2
5.2 Compound stresses: Combined axial, flexural and shear loads – discussion 2
of practical situations of combined loading and compound stresses
5.3 Combined bending and twisting loads 1
5.4 Introduction to Buckling of columns – Buckling theory – Euler’s formula for 2
long columns – assumptions and limitations
5.5 Effect of end conditions – slenderness ratio – Rankine’s formula for 2
intermediate columns – numerical problems for maximum buckling
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET283 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

This course provides an introduction to the properties and behaviour of fluids. It enables to
apply the concepts in engineering. The course also gives an introduction of hydraulic pumps
and turbines.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Define Properties of Fluids and Solve hydrostatic problems

CO 2 Explain fluid kinematics and Classify fluid flows
CO 3 Interpret Euler’s equation and Solve problems using Bernoulli’s equation
CO 4 Explain the working of turbines and Select a turbine for specific application.
CO 5 Explain the characteristics of centrifugal and reciprocating pumps

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 3 2 1
CO 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 2 1
CO 5 3 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 1

1. Define total pressure on a surface and center of pressure on a surface. What do you
understand by the term hydrostatic pressure ?

2. An isosceles triangle of base 3m and altitude 6m is immersed vertically in water with its
axis of symmetry horizontal. If the head on its axis is 9m, locate the center of pressure.

3. A triangular plate of 2m base and 2.5m altitude is immersed in water at an inclination of

30◦ with the base parallel to and at a depth of 2m from the free surface. Find the total
hydrostatic force on the side of the plate and the position of its action.

Course Outcome 2

1. Define the following and give one practical example for each of the following:

(a) laminar flow

(b) Turbulent flow
(c) Steady flow
(d) Uniform flow

2. A two dimensional flow is described by the velocity components, u = 5x3 ; v = −15x2 y.

Evaluate the stream function, velocity, and acceleration at point P(1,2).

3. For the velocity components u = ay sin(xy) and v = ax sin(xy), obtain an expression for
the velocity potential function.

Course Outcome 3

1. Derive the Euler’s equation of motion along a streamline and from that derive the Bernouli’s
equation.

2. Oil of specific gravity 0.8 flows through a 0.2 m diameter pipe under a pressure of 100
KPa. If the datum is 5 m below the center line of the pipe and the total energy with
respect to the datum is 35 N m/N. Calculate the discharge.

3. A siphon consisting of a pipe of 15 cm diameter is used to empty kerosene oil (relative

density=0.8) from tank A. The siphon discharges to the atmosphere at an elevation of
1.00 m. The oil surface in the tank is at an elevation of 4.00 m. The center line of the
siphon pipe at its highest point C is at an elevation of 5.50 m. Estimate,
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(a) Discharge in the pipe

(b) Pressure at point C.

Course Outcome 4

1. Differentiate between impulse and reaction turbine.

2. Prove that for a single jet Pelton wheel, the specific speed is given by the relation
d√
Ns = 219.78 ηo
D

3. A Pelton wheel having semicircular buckets and working under a head of 120 m is running
at 500 rpm. The discharge through the nozzle is 40 L/s and the diameter of the wheel is
50 cm. Find the following:

(a) The power available at the nozzle.

(b) Hydraulic efficiency of the wheel, if coefficient of velocity is 0.96.

Course Outcome 5

1. Distinguis between positive displacement pump and roto dynamic pump

2. Expalin the phenomenon of cavitation and methods to avoid it

3. Explain the significance of NPSH in the installation of a centrifugal pump

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS

Module 1

Fundamental concepts: Properties of fluid - density, specific weight, viscosity, surface tension,
capillarity, vapour pressure, bulk modulus, compressibility, velocity, rate of shear strain, Newton’s
law of viscosity, Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids, real and ideal fluids, incompressible and
compressible fluids.

Module 2

Fluid statics: Atmospheric pressure, gauge pressure and absolute pressure. Pascal’s Law,
measurement of pressure - piezo meter, manometers, pressure gauges, energies in flowing fluid,
head - pressure, dynamic, static and total head, forces on planar surfaces immersed in fluids, centre
of pressure, buoyancy, equilibrium of floating bodies, metacentre and metacentric height.

Fluid kinematics and dynamics: Classification of flow -1D, 2D and 3D flow, steady, unsteady,
uniform, non-uniform, rotational, irrotational, laminar and turbulent flow, path line, streak line and
stream line.

Module 3

Continuity equation, Euler’s equation, Bernoulli’s equation. Reynolds experiment, Reynold’s number.
Hagen- Poiseuille equation, head loss due to friction, friction, Darcy- Weisbach equation, Chezy’s
formula, compounding pipes, branching of pipes, siphon effect, water hammer transmission of
power through pipes (simple problems) .

Flow rate measurements- venturi and orifice meters, notches and weirs (description only for
notches, weirs and meters), practical applications, velocity measurements- Pitot tube and Pitot –
static tube.

Module 4

Hydraulic turbines : Impact of jets on vanes - flat, curved, stationary and moving vanes - radial flow
over vanes. Impulse and Reaction Turbines – Pelton Wheel constructional features - speed ratio, jet
ratio & work done , losses and efficiencies, inward and outward flow reaction turbines- Francis
turbine constructional features, work done and efficiencies – axial flow turbine (Kaplan)
constructional features, work done and efficiencies, draft tubes, surge tanks, cavitation in turbines.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 5

Positive displacement pumps: reciprocating pump, indicator diagram, air vessels and their purposes,
slip, negative slip and work required and efficiency, effect of acceleration and friction on indicator
diagram (no derivations), multi cylinder pumps.

Rotary pumps: –centrifugal pump, working principle, impeller, casings, manometric head, work,
efficiency and losses, priming, specific speed, multistage pumps, selection of pumps, pump
characteristics.

Text Books
1. Mahesh Kumar, Fluid Mechanics and Machines, Pearson, 1st edition, 2019.

2. Pati, S., Textbook of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Tata McGraw Hill, 1st
Edition, 2017.

Reference Books
1. Cimbala & Cengel, Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications (4th edition, SIE) ,
McGraw Hill, 2019

COURSE CONTENTS AND LECTURE SCHEDULE

No Topic No. of Lectures

1
1.1 Fundamental concepts: Properties of fluid - density, specific weight, 3
viscosity, surface tension, capillarity, vapour pressure
1.2 Bulk modulus, compressibility, velocity, rate of shear strain, Newton’s 3
law of viscosity
1.3 Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids, real and ideal fluids, 3
incompressible and compressible fluids.
2
2.1 Fluid statics: Atmospheric pressure, gauge pressure and absolute 3
pressure. Pascal’s Law, measurement of pressure - piezo meter,
manometers, pressure gauges, energies in flowing fluid
2.2 Head - pressure, dynamic, static and total head, forces on planar 3
surfaces immersed in fluids, centre of pressure, buoyancy, equilibrium
of floating bodies, metacentre and metacentric height.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
2.3 Fluid kinematics and dynamics: Classification of flow -1D, 2D and 3D 3
flow, steady, unsteady, uniform, non-uniform, rotational, irrotational,
laminar and turbulent flow, path line, streak line and stream line

3
3.1 Continuity equation, Euler’s equation, Bernoulli’s equation. Reynolds 3
experiment, Reynold’s number. Hagen- Poiseuille equation
3.2 Head loss due to friction, friction, Darcy- Weisbach equation, Chezy’s 3
formula, compounding pipes, branching of pipes, siphon effect, water
hammer transmission of power through pipes (simple problems)
3.3 Flow rate measurements- venturi and orifice meters, notches and weirs 3
(description only for notches, weirs and meters), practical applications,
velocity measurements- Pitot tube and Pitot –static tube
4
4.1 Hydraulic turbines: Impact of jets on vanes - flat, curved, stationary and 3
moving vanes - radial flow over vanes
4.2 Impulse and Reaction Turbines – Pelton Wheel constructional features - 3
speed ratio, jet ratio & work done, losses and efficiencies, inward and
outward flow reaction turbines- Francis turbine constructional features,
work done and efficiencies
4.3 Axial flow turbine (Kaplan) constructional features, work done and 3
efficiencies, draft tubes, surge tanks, cavitation in turbines

5
5.1 Positive displacement pumps: reciprocating pump, indicator diagram, 3
air vessels and their purposes
5.2 Slip, negative slip and work required and efficiency, effect of 3
acceleration and friction on indicator diagram (no derivations), multi
cylinder pumps
5.3 Rotary pumps: –centrifugal pump, working principle, impeller, casings, 3
manometric head, work, efficiency and losses, priming, specific speed,
multistage pumps, selection of pumps, pump characteristics
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
IV SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET283: FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Define a fluid. What is the difference between ideal and real fluid?

2. Explain the phenomena of capillarity, Obtain the expression for capillary rise of a liquid

3. Distinguish between gauge pressure and absolute pressure.Estimate in meters the depth
below the surface of a lake at which the pressure is equal to twice atmospheric pressure.

4. Define and distinguish between Streamline Streak line and path line

5. Water escapes from large storage tank through a small drain hole in the bottom.If the
water depth is 2m, what is the exit velocity?If a similar tank contained gasoline what
would be the exit velocity?

6. Oil of specific gravity 0.8 flows through a 0.2m diameter pipe under a pressure of 100
kN/m2 . If the datum is 5m below the center line of the pipe and the total energy with
respect to the datum is 35m, Calculate the discharge.

7. Differentiate between impulse and reaction turbine

8. Explain the functions of Draft tube

9. Define slip and percentage slip of a reciprocating pump, what are the reasons for negative
slip.

10. What are the different classifications of centrifugal pump?

(10×3=30 Marks)
 PART B
Answer one full question from each moduleMECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE-I

11. (a) Write a short note on surface tension. Derive expressions for the pressure
i. within a droplet of water
ii. inside a soap bubble
(8 marks)
(b) Define the term viscosity,on what factors does it depend and give the units in which
it is expressed. (6 marks)

12. (a) A U-tube is made up of two capillaries of bores 1mm and 2.2mm respectively. The
tube is held vertically with zero contact angle. It is partially filled with liquid of
surface tension 0.06 N/m. If the estimated difference in the level of two menisci is
15mm, determine the mass density of the liquid. (7 marks)
(b) A volume of 3.2 m3 of certain oil weighs 27.5kN. Calculate its
i. mass denisty
ii. weight density
iii. Specific volume
iv. Specific gravity
If the kinematic viscosity of the oil is 7 ∗ 10−3 Stokes, what would be its dynamic
viscosity in centipoises. (7 marks)

MODULE-II

13. (a) A steel ball of radius 1 cm is hanging inside the water tank by means of a string
attached to a hollow plastic ball having raadius 3 cm weighing 10g floating at the
free surface, as shown in Fig. Determine the tension in the string and volume of
the plastic ball submerged in water. Take density of the steel ball to be 7850 kg/m2
(7 marks)

x y
(b) If the velocity distribution for a 2D ideal flow is given by u = 2+t , v = 1+3t Obtain
the equation of (a) the streamlines, (b) the pathlines, and (c) the streaklines that
pass through point (1, 2) at t = 0. (7 marks)
14. (a) Find out the pressure difference between points A and B for the manometers shown
in the figures MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(7 marks)
(b) Check whether the floating objects having specific gravity 0.8 shown in Fig. are
stable or not.

(7 marks)
 MODULE-III
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
15. (a) The maximum velocity for the viscous flow through a 200mm diameter pipe is 3m/s.
Determine the average velocity and the radial distance from the pipe axis at which
it occurs. In addition, determine the velocity at 25mm from the pipe wall.(7 marks)
(b) Determine the discharge in each branch of the pipe network shown in Fig. Assume
same friction factor f = 0.03 in each pipe. (7 marks)

16. (a) Prove that for power transmission through pipes transmission power is maximum
when head loss due to friction is one third of the power available at the inlet.(7 marks)
(b) A 5km long water pipeline is used to transmit 200 kW of hydraulic power. If the
pressure at the inlet is 6MPa and the pressure drop across the pipe length is 2MPa.
Determine the pipe diameter and its transmission efficiency. Take the friction factor
f = 0.04 (7 marks)

MODULE-IV

17. (a) A double jet Pelton wheel has a specific speed of 16 and is required to deliver 1200
kW. The turbine is supplied through a pipeline from a reservoir whose level is 380m
above the nozzles. Allowing 8% for friction loss in the pipe, calculate the following:
i. Speed in rpm
ii. Diameter of the jet
iii. Mean diameter of the bucket
Assume Cv = 0.98, speed ratio = 0.46, and overall efficiency = 85% (10 marks)
(b) Define the terms unit power, unit speed, ad unit discharge with reference to a hy-
draulic turbine. (4 marks)
18. (a) Show that the force exerted by a fluid jet in its direction of flow on a semicircular vane
is twice that exerted on a flat plate, both plates being fixed in position. (7 marks)
(b) A Keplan turbine runner is to be designed to develop 9000 kW. The net available
head is 5.5m. Assume a speed ratio 2, flow ratio 0.65, and total efficiency 85%. The
diameter of the boss is 1/3 the diameter of the runner. Find : (7 marks)
i. Diameter of the runner.
ii. Speed of the runner.
iii. Specific speed of the turbine.

MODULE-V

19. (a) Draw the performance curves of a centrifugal pump. Also discuss the effect of blade
outlet angles (7 marks)
 (b) A centrifugal pump discharges 0.2 m3 /s of water at a head of 25 m when running
at a speed of 1400 rpm.The manometric efficiency is 80%. If the impellerENGINEERING
MECHANICAL has an
outer diameter of 30 cm and width of 5 cm, determine the vane angle at the outlet.
(7 marks)

20. (a) A single acting reciprocating pump of 200 mm bore and 300 mm stroke runs at
30 rpm. The suction head is 4 m and the delivery head is 15 m. Considering
acceleration determine the pressure in the cylinder at the beginning and end of
suction and delivery strokes. Take the value of atmospheric pressure as 10.3 m of
water head. The length of suction pipe is 8 m and that of delivery pipe is 20 m. The
pipe diameters are 120 mm each (7 marks)
(b) The construction details of a centrifugal pump is as follows; Impeller diameter= 50
cm Impeller width=2.5 cm Speed= 1200 rpm Suction head= 6 m Delivery head=
40 m Outlet blade angle= 30◦ . Manometric efficiency : 80% Overall effrciency :75%.
Determine the power required to drive the pump. Also calculate the pressures at the
suction and delivery side of the pump. assume the frictional drop in suction is 2 m
and in the delivery 8m and inlet swirl as zero (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MATERIAL Year of
CATEGORY L T P Credits
SCIENCE AND Introduction
MET 285
TECHNOLOGY
(MINOR) VAC 4 0 0 4 2019
Preamble:
Understanding the correlation between the chemical bonds and crystal structure of metallic
materials.
Recognize the importance of crystal imperfections including dislocations in plastic deformation.
Understanding the mechanisms of materials failure through fatigue and creep.
Understanding the fundamental characteristics of conductors and resistors.
Understanding the fundamental characteristics of semi and super conductors.
Prerequisite: PHT 110 Engineering Physics and CYT 100 Engineering Chemistry

Course Outcomes - At the end of the course students will be able to

Understand the basic chemical bonds, crystal structures and their relationship with the
CO 1
properties.
CO 2 How to quantify failure of materials
Given a hypothetical or real problem with an electronic materials device or process,
CO 3
explain the cause of the problem and propose solutions.
CO 4 Understand how materials interact at the nanoscale

Define and differentiate engineering materials on the basis of structure and properties
CO 5
for engineering applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirements)

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CO 1 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 - 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO 4 - - - 3 - - - - - - -
CO 5 - - - - - - - - - - 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Continuous Assessment Tests

End Semester Examination
Bloom's Test I (Marks) Test II (Marks)
(Marks)
taxonomy
Remember 25 25 25
Understand 15 15 15
Apply 30 25 30
Analyze 10 10 10
Evaluate 10 15 10
Create 10 10 10

Mark distribution

Total
CIE marks ESE marks ESE duration
Marks

150 50 100 3 Hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:

Attendance 10 marks

Regular class work/tutorials/assignments 15 marks

Continuous Assessment Test

25 marks
(Minimum 2 numbers)
End semester pattern:- There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of
which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions and carry 14 marks.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the basic chemical bonds, crystal structures and their
relationship with the properties.
1. Why ionic and covalent bonded materials are poor conductors? Draw electronic configurations.
2. Correlate the strength of an element with atomic number.
3. What kind of bonding you expect in the following materials: NaCl, Cadmium Telluride and
Bronze.
4. Explain how grain size influences the strength of a metal
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): How to quantify failure of materials.
1. Explain the factors affecting the fatigue strength?
2. Explain the effects of crystalline and non-crystalline structure on strength of a metal.
3. What are the roles of surface defects on crack propagation?
4. A small hole is drilled through a steel plate ahead of a crack, whether it can stop the crack’s
progress until repairs can be made or not? Explain in detail and derive the equation
5. Explain the effect of impact loading on ductile materials
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Given a hypothetical or real problem with an electronic materials device
or process, explain the cause of the problem and propose solutions.
1. Explain why nichrome and not copper is used as a heating element.
2. Why does the conductivity of a semiconductor change with impurity content? Compare this
with the behavior of metallic conductors.
3. Explain why lead and zinc with an even number of electrons in the outer shell and a full
valence band are conductors.
4. When ice melts into water, the dielectric constant increases, in contrast to the decrease
observed during the melting of HCl. Explain why this is so.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Understand how materials interact at the nanoscale
1. What is the concept of nano? Correlate the significance of dislocation density to single crystal
silicon ICs used in electronic industry.
2. Explain touch screens
3. Explain flexible electronic circuits
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Define and differentiate engineering materials on the basis of structure
and properties for engineering applications
1. Explain the slip systems of BCC, FCC and HCP. Why B C C and HCP exhibit brittle nature and
FCC ductile nature?
2. Explain in detail the different strengthening mechanisms of metallic crystals
3. Explain why Aluminum used in long distance transmission lines cannot be strengthened by
solid solution.
4. Explain the attributes of surface breakdown of an insulator
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
MODULE - 1
Earlier and present development of atomic structure- primary bonds: - secondary bonds - earlier and
present development of atomic structure- primary bonds: - secondary bonds - classification of
engineering materials- levels of structure- crystallography- structure–property relationships in
materials - classification of engineering materials.

MODULE - II
Miller indices: - modes of plastic deformation - structure determination by X-ray diffraction -
Classification of crystal imperfections- Diffusion in solids, fick’s laws - dislocation density -
mechanism of crystallization: homogeneous and heterogeneous nuclei formation - Hall - Petch theory.

MODULE - III
Phase diagrams: - Limitations of pure metals and need of alloying - classification of alloys, solid
solutions, Hume Rothery`s rule - strengthening mechanisms- Fatigue: - Stress cycles – fatigue tests, S-
N curve - Ductile to brittle transition temperature (DBTT) in steels - Creep: Creep curves – creep tests
- Super plasticity - introduction to super alloys.

MODULE - IV
Composites:- fiber and composite phase - polymer matrix composites - metal matrix composites -
ceramic matrix composites - dielectric materials- conductors - resistor materials.

MODULE - V
Superconducting phenomenon - semi conductors- fabrication of integrated circuits - semiconductor
devices.

Text Books
1. Callister William. D., Material Science and Engineering, John Wiley, 2014
2. Raghavan V, Material Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall, 2004

Reference
1. Avner H Sidney, Introduction to Physical Metallurgy, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009
2. Anderson J.C. et.al., Material Science for Engineers, Chapman and Hall, 1990
3. Dieter George E, Mechanical Metallurgy, Tata McGraw Hill, 1976
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

MATERIAL SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY - MET 285

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

Part – A
Answer all questions.
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks
1. NASA's Parker Solar Probe will be the first-ever mission to "touch" the Sun. The spacecraft, about
the size of a small car, will travel directly into the Sun's atmosphere about 4 million miles from the
earth surface. Postulate the coolant used in the parker solar probe with chemical bonds.

2. Distinguish between crystal and non crystalline materials.

3. What is the driving force for diffusion?

4. What are the roles of surface imperfections on crack initiation?

5. What is the grain size preferred for creep applications? Why

6. Explain the attributes of DBTT

7. Make a list of at least four different sports implements that are made of or contain composites
8. What is the distinction between matrix and dispersed phases in a composite material?
9. Specify three elements that you would add to pure silicon to make it an extrinsic semiconductor of (i)
the n-type, and (ii) the p-type.
10. Explain why nichrome and not copper is used as a heating element
PART -B
Answer one full question from each module.

Module -1
11. Calculate the APF of SC, BCC and FCC (14 marks).
OR
12. Distinguish between characteristics of ionic, covalent ad metallic bonds (14 marks).
Module -2
13. Explain the effect of: (i) Grain size; (ii) Grain size distribution and (iii) Grain orientation (iv) Grain
shape on strength and creep resistance with neat sketches. Attributes of Hall-Petch equation and grain
boundaries (14 marks).
OR
14. Distinguish between homogeneous and heterogeneous nuclei formation (14 marks).
Module -3
15. Postulate with neat sketches, why 100 % pure metals are weaker? What are the primary functions of
alloying? Explain the fundamental rules governing the alloying with neat sketches and how is it
accomplished in substitution and interstitial solid solutions? (14 marks).
OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

16. Explain fatigue test and attributes of S-N curve (14 marks).
Module -4
17. For a polymer-matrix fiber-reinforced composite, (a) list three functions of the matrix phase; (b)
Compare the desired mechanical characteristics of matrix and fiber phases; and (c) cite two reasons why
there must be a strong bond between fiber and matrix at their interface (14 marks).
OR
18. The dielectric constant of polyethylene is independent of temperature, while that of polyvinylchloride
is not. Explain this difference in behavior on the basis of their monomer structures (14 marks).
Module -5
19. (a) Derive the kinetic energy of free electrons as a function of their wave number (7 marks).
(b) The resistivity of silver at room temperature is 1.6 x 10–8 ohm m. Calculate the collision
Time for electron scattering (7 marks).
OR
20. (a). Explain why lead and zinc with an even number of electrons in the outer shell and a full valence
band are conductors (7 marks).
(b). Calculate the fraction of holes present at 300 K in silicon doped with indium. The acceptor level is
0.16 eV above the top of the valence band (7 marks).

Course content and lecture schedules.

No.
Course
Module TOPIC of
outcomes
hours
Earlier and present development of atomic structure; correlation of atomic
radius to strength; electron configurations; - Primary bonds: -
1.1 2
characteristics of covalent, ionic and metallic bond - properties from
bonding.
Secondary bonds: - classification- hydrogen bond and anomalous
1.2 2
behavior of ice float on water, application- specific heat, applications. CO1
Classification of engineering materials- levels of structure-
1.3 crystallography:- crystal, space lattice, unit cell- APF of BCC, FCC, HCP 2
structures.
short and long range order - non crystalline - structure–property
1.4 1
relationships in materials.
Miller indices: - crystal plane and direction - attributes of miller indices
for slip system, brittleness of BCC, HCP and ductility of FCC - modes of
2.1 3
plastic deformation: - slip and twinning - structure determination by X-ray
diffraction. CO1
CO2
Classification of crystal imperfections: - types of point and dislocations.-
2.2 Diffusion in solids, fick’s laws, mechanisms, applications - dislocation 3
density and attributes of nano structures.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mechanism of crystallization: Homogeneous and heterogeneous nuclei

2.3 1
formation, under cooling, dendritic growth, grain boundary irregularity. CO1
Effects of grain size, grain size distribution, grain shape, grain orientation CO2
2.4 2
on dislocation/strength and creep resistance - Hall - Petch theory.
Phase diagrams: - Limitations of pure metals and need of alloying -
3.1 classification of alloys, solid solutions, Hume Rothery`s rule - 3
strengthening mechanisms.
Fatigue: - Stress cycles – Primary and secondary stress raisers -
3.2 2 CO2
Characteristics of fatigue failure, fatigue tests, S-N curve attributes.
CO5
Factors affecting fatigue strength: stress concentration, size effect, surface
3.3 roughness, change in surface properties, surface residual stress - Ways to 2
improve fatigue life.
3.4 Ductile to brittle transition temperature (DBTT) in steels -Creep: Creep
curves – creep tests - Super plasticity - introduction to nickel based super
alloys, characteristics and applications. 2 CO1
CO2
Composites:- fiber and composite phase - polymer matrix composites -
4.1 2
metal matrix composites - ceramic matrix composites
Dielectric materials:- polarization, temperature and frequency effects,
4.2 3 CO1
electric breakdown, ferroelectric materials.
CO2
4.3 Conductors: - the resistivity range, free electron theory. 2
4.4 Conduction by free electrons, conductor and resistor materials. 2
Superconducting phenomenon, Type I and Type II superconductors,
5.1 3
potential applications.
CO3
Semi conductors:- energy gap in solids, intrinsic and extrinsic
5.2 2
semiconductors, semiconductor materials.
Fabrication of integrated circuits: - production of metallurgical grade
5.3 silicon, semiconductor grade silicon, single crystal growth, wafer 3
manufacture, oxidation, photolithography, doping. CO4

5.4 Ion implantation, epitaxial growth, metallization. 1

Some semiconductor devices: - junction diodes, lasers and transistor,
5.5 2 CO4
photon detectors.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -4
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET202 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS PCC 3 1 - 4

Preamble :
Thermodynamics is the study of energy . Without energy life cannot exist. Activities from
breathing to the launching of rockets involves energy transactions and are subject to
thermodynamic analysis. Engineering devices like engines, turbines, refrigeration and air
conditioning systems, propulsion systems etc., work on energy transformations and must be
analysed using principles of thermodynamics. So, a thorough knowledge of thermodynamic
concepts is essential for a mechanical engineer. This course offers an introduction to the basic
concepts and laws of thermodynamics.
Prerequisite : NIL
Course Outcomes :

After completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Understand basic concepts and laws of thermodynamics
CO2 Conduct first law analysis of open and closed systems
CO3 Determine entropy and availability changes associated with different processes
CO4 Understand the application and limitations of different equations of state
CO5 Determine change in properties of pure substances during phase change processes
CO6 Evaluate properties of ideal gas mixtures

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 2
CO2 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 1
CO6 3 3 2 2 1

Assessment Pattern
Blooms Category CA ESA
Assignment Test - 1 Test - 2
Remember 25 20 20 10
Understand 25 40 40 20
Apply 25 40 40 70
Analyse 25
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:
Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks

Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

Mark distribution & Duration of Examination :

Total Marks CA ESE ESE Duration
150 50 100 3 Hours

End semester pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Course Outcome 1

1. Discuss the limitations of first law of thermodynamics.

2. Second law of thermodynamics is often called a directional law . Why?

3. Explain Joule-Kelvin effect. What is the significance of the inversion curve ?

Course Outcome 2

1. A mass of 2.4 kg of air at 150 kPa and 12°C is contained in a gas – tight, frictionless piston –
cylinder device. The air is now compressed to a final pressure of 600 kPa . During this process, heat
is transferred from the air such that the temperature inside the cylinder remains constant.
Calculate the work input during this process.

2. Carbon dioxide enters an adiabatic nozzle steadily at 1 MPa and 500°C with a mass flow rate of
600 kg/hr and leaves at 100 kPa and 450 m/s. The inlet area of the nozzle is 40 cm2. Determine (a)
the inlet velocity and (b) the exit temperature

3. A vertical piston – cylinder device initially contains 0.25 m3 of air at 600 kPa and 300°C. A valve
connected to the cylinder is now opened and air is allowed to escape until three-quarters of the
mass leave the cylinder at which point the volume is 0.05 m3. Determine the final temperature in
the cylinder and the boundary work during this process.

Course Outcome 3
1.An adiabatic vessel contains 2 kg of water at 25˚C. B paddle – wheel work transfer, the
temperature of water is increased to 30˚C. If the specific heat of water is assumed to be constant at
4.186 kJ/kg.K, find the entropy change of the universe.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
2. Two kilograms of water at 80°C is mixed adiabatically with 3 kg of water at 30°C in a constant
pressure process at 1 atm. Find the increase in entropy of the total mass of water due to the mixing
process.
3. Argon enters an insulated turbine operating under steady state at 1000˚C and 2 MPa and
exhausts at 350 kPa. The mass flow rate is 0.5 kg/s and the turbine develops power at the rate of
120 kW. Determine (a)the temperature of the argon at the turbine exit, (b) the irreversibility of the
turbine and (c) the second law efficiency. Neglect KE and PE effects. Take To = 20˚C and Po = 1 bar

Course Outcome 4
1. What are the limitations of ideal gas equation and how does Van der Waals equation overcome
these limitations ?

2. Discuss law of corresponding states and its role in the construction of compressibility chart.

3. A rigid tank contains 2 kmol of N2 and 6 kmol of CH4 gases at 200 K and 12 MPa. Estimate
the volume of the tank, using (a) ideal gas equation of state (b) the compressibility chart and
Amagat’s law

Course Outcome 5
1.Steam is throttled from 3 MPa and 600˚C to 2.5 MPa. Determine the temperature of the steam at
the end of the throttling process.
2. Determine the change in specific volume, specific enthalpy and quality of steam as saturated
steam at 15 bar expands isentropically to 1 bar. Use steam tables

3. Estimate the enthalpy of vapourization of steam at 500 kPa, using the Clapeyron equation and
compare it with the tabulated value

Course Outcome 6
1. A gaseous mixture contains , by volume, 21%nitrogen, 50% hydrogen and 29 % carbon dioxide.
Calculate the molecular weight of the mixture, the characteristic gas constant of the mixture and the
value of the reversible adiabatic expansion index - γ. At 10˚C, the Cp values of nitrogen, hydrogen
and carbon dioxide are 1.039, 14.235 and 0.828 kJ/kg.K respectively.

2. A mixture of 2 kmol of CO2 and 3 kmol of air is contained in a tank at 199 kPa and 20˚C. Treating
air to be a mixture of 79% N2 and 21% O2 by volume , calculate (a) the individual mass of CO2 , N2
and O2, (b) the percentage content of carbon by mass in the mixture and (c) the molar mass ,
characteristic gas constant and the specific volume of the mixture

3. A gas mixture in an engine cylinder has 12% CO2, 11.5 % O2 and 76.5% N2 by volume. The
mixture at 1000˚C expands reversibly, according to the law PV1.25 = constant, to 7 times its initial
volume. Determine the work transfer and heat transfer per unit mass of the mixture.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

Module 1: Role of Thermodynamics and it’s applications in Engineering and Science –Basic Concepts
Macroscopic and Microscopic viewpoints, Concept of Continuum, Thermodynamic System and
Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Types of Systems, Universe, Thermodynamic properties,
Process, Cycle, Thermodynamic Equilibrium, Quasi – static Process, State, Point and Path function.
Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics, Measurement of Temperature, reference Points, Temperature
Scales.

Module 2: Energy - Work - Pdv work and other types of work transfer, free expansion work, heat and
heat capacity. Joule’s Experiment- First law of Thermodynamics - First law applied to Non flow
Process- Enthalpy- specific heats- PMM1, First law applied to Flow Process, Mass and Energy balance
in simple steady flow process. Applications of SFEE, Transient flow –Filling and Emptying Process,
Limitations of the First Law.

Module 3: Second Law of Thermodynamics, Thermal Reservoir, Heat Engine, Heat pump – Kelvin-
Planck and Clausius Statements, Equivalence of two statements, Reversibility, Irreversible Process,
Causes of Irreversibility, PMM2, Carnot’s theorem and its corollaries, Absolute Thermodynamic
Temperature scale. Clausius Inequality, Entropy- Entropy changes in various thermodynamic
processes, principle of increase of entropy and its applications, Entropy generation, Entropy and
Disorder, Reversible adiabatic process- isentropic process, Third law of thermodynamics, Available
Energy, Availability and Irreversibility- Second law efficiency.

Module 4: Pure Substances, Phase Transformations, Triple point, properties during change of phase,
T-v, p-v and p-T diagram of pure substance, p-v-T surface, Saturation pressure and Temperature, T-h
and T-s diagrams, h-s diagrams or Mollier Charts, Dryness Fraction, steam tables. Property
calculations using steam tables. The ideal Gas Equation, Characteristic and Universal Gas constants,
Deviations from ideal Gas Model: Equation of state of real substances, Vander Waals Equation of
State, Virial Expansion, Compressibility factor, Law of corresponding state, Compressibility charts.

Module 5: Mixtures of ideal Gases – Mole Fraction, Mass fraction, Gravimetric and volumetric
Analysis, Dalton’s Law of partial pressure, Amagat’s Laws of additive volumes, Gibbs-Dalton’s law
Equivalent Gas constant and Molecular Weight, Properties of gas mixtures: Internal Energy,
Enthalpy, specific heats and Entropy, Introduction to real gas mixtures- Kay’s rule. General
Thermodynamic Relations – Combined First and Second law equations – Helmholtz and Gibb’s
functions - Maxwell’s Relations, Tds Equations. The Clapeyron Equation, equations for internal
energy, enthalpy and entropy, specific heats, Throttling process, Joule Thomson Coefficient,
inversion curve.

Text Books
1. P. K. Nag, Engineering Thermodynamics, McGraw Hill, 2013

2. E. Rathakrishnan Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics, PHI, 2005

3. Y. A. Cengel and M. A. Boles, Thermodynamics an Engineering Approach, McGraw Hill, 2011

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books:
1. Moran J., Shapiro N. M., Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics, Wiley, 2006

2. R. E. Sonntag and C. Borgnakke, Fundamentals of Thermodynamics, Wiley, 2009

3. Holman J. P. Thermodynamics, McGraw Hill, 2004

4. M. Achuthan, Engineering Thermodynamics, PHI, 2004

COURSE PLAN

Module Topics Hours

Allotted
Role of Thermodynamics and it’s applications in Engineering and Science – 1L
Basic Concepts Macroscopic and Microscopic viewpoints, Concept of
Continuum, Thermodynamic System and Control Volume, Surrounding,
1 Boundaries, Types of Systems, Universe
Thermodynamic properties, Process, Cycle, Thermodynamic Equilibrium, 1L
Quasi – static Process, State, Point and Path function.
Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics, Measurement of Temperature, reference 2L + 1T
Points, Temperature Scales.
Energy - Work - Pdv work and other types of work transfer, free expansion 2L + 1T
work, heat and heat capacity.
Joule’s Experiment- First law of Thermodynamics - First law applied to Non 2L + 1T
2 flow Process- Enthalpy- specific heats- PMM1
First law applied to Flow Process, Mass and Energy balance in simple 2L + 1T
steady flow process. Applications of SFEE
Transient flow –Filling and Emptying Process, Limitations of the First Law. 1L + 1T
Second Law of Thermodynamics, Thermal Reservoir, Heat Engine, Heat 2L
pump – Kelvin-Planck and Clausius Statements, Equivalence of two
statements
Reversibility, Irreversible Process, Causes of Irreversibility, PMM2, Carnot’s 2L + 1T
3 theorem and its corollaries, Absolute Thermodynamic Temperature scale.
Clausius Inequality, Entropy- Entropy changes in various thermodynamic 2L + 1T
processes, principle of increase of entropy and its applications, Entropy
generation, Entropy and Disorder, Reversible adiabatic process- isentropic
process, Third law of thermodynamics
Available Energy, Availability and Irreversibility- Second law efficiency. 2L + 1T
Pure Substances, Phase Transformations, Triple point, properties during 2L
change of phase, T-v, p-v and p-T diagram of pure substance, p-v-T surface,
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Saturation pressure and Temperature, T-h and T-s diagrams, h-s diagrams 2L + 1T
or Mollier Charts, Dryness Fraction, steam tables. Property calculations
4
using steam tables
The ideal Gas Equation, Characteristic and Universal Gas constants, 2L +1T
Deviations from ideal Gas Model: Equation of state of real substances,
Vander Waals Equation of State, Virial Expansion, Compressibility factor,
Law of corresponding state, Compressibility charts.
Mixtures of ideal Gases – Mole Fraction, Mass fraction, Gravimetric and 2L
volumetric Analysis, Dalton’s Law of partial pressure, Amagat’s Laws of
additive volumes, Gibbs-Dalton’s law.
Equivalent Gas constant and Molecular Weight, Properties of gas mixtures: 1L +1T
5 Internal Energy, Enthalpy, specific heats and Entropy
Introduction to real gas mixtures- Kay’s rule 1L
General Thermodynamic Relations – Combined First and Second law 2L
equations – Helmholtz and Gibb’s functions - Maxwell’s Relations
Tds Equations. The Clapeyron Equation, equations for internal energy, 2L + 1T
enthalpy and entropy, specific heats, Throttling process, Joule Thomson
Coefficient, inversion curve.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
FOURTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code : MET202
Course Name : ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS
( Permitted to use Steam Tables and Mollier Chart )
Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours
Part – A
Answer all questions.
1. Define thermodynamics. List a few of its applications

2.Differentiate between intensive and extensive properties.

3. Differentiate between heat and work.

4. Explain system approach and control volume approach as applied in the analysis of a flow process.

5. An inventor claims to have developed an engine that delivers 26 kJ of work using 82 kJ of heat
while operating between temperatures 120°C and 30°C. Is his claim valid ? Give the reason for
your answer.

6. Show that two reversible adiabatics cannot intersect

7.Define (i)critical point and (ii) triple point, with respect to water

8. Why do real gases deviate from ideal gas behaviour? When do they approach ideal behaviour?

9. Define Helmholtz function and Gibbs function and state their significance

10. Explain Kay’s rule of real gas mixtures

( 3 x 10 = 30 marks )

Part – B
Answer one full question from each module.
Module - 1
11.a] Explain macroscopic and microscopic approach to thermodynamics . ( 7 marks )
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
b] With the aid of a suitable diagram, explain the working of constant volume gas thermometer.
( 7 marks )

OR

12.a] What is meant by thermodynamic equilibrium ? What are the essential conditions for a system
to be in thermodynamic equilibrium ? ( 7 marks )

b] Express the temperature of 91⁰C in (i) Farenhiet (ii) Kelvin (iii) Rankine. ( 7 marks )

Module – 2

13.a] A mass of 2.4 kg of air at 150 kPa and 12°C is contained in a gas – tight, frictionless piston –

cylinder device. The air is now compressed to a final pressure of 600 kPa . During this process,
heat is transferred from the air such that the temperature inside the cylinder remains
constant. Calculate the work input during this process. ( 7 marks )
b] A 2 m3 rigid tank initially contains air at 100 kPa and 22⁰C. The tank is connected to a supply
line through a valve. Air is flowing in the supply line at 600 kPa and 22⁰C. The valve is
opened, and air is allowed to enter the tank until the pressure in the tank reaches the line
pressure, at which point the valve is closed. A thermometer placed in the tank indicates that
the air temperature at the final state is 77⁰C. Determine, (i) the mass of air that has entered
the tank and (ii) the amount of heat transfer. ( 7 marks )

OR

14.a] A turbine operates under steady flow conditions, receiving steam at the following conditions
: pressure 1.2 MPa, temperature 188°C, enthalpy 2785 kJ/kg, velocity 33.3 m/s and elevation
3m. The steam leaves the turbine at the following conditions : pressure 20 kPa, enthalpy
25kJ/kg, velocity 100 m/s, and elevation 0 m. Heat is lost to the surroundings at the rate of
0.29 kJ/s. If the rate of steam flow through the turbine is 0.42 kg/s, what is the power output
of the turbine in kW ? ( 7 marks )
b] State the general energy balance equation for an unsteady flow system and from it, derive the
energy balance equation for a bottle filling process, stating all assumptions. ( 7 marks )

Module – 3

15.a]State the Kelvin-Planck and Clausisus statements of the second law of thermodynamics and
prove their equivalence. ( 7 marks )

b]A heat engine operating between two reservoirs at 1000 K and 300 K is used to drive a heat
pump which extracts heat from the reservoir at 300 K at a rate twice that at which the engine
rejects heat to it. If the efficiency of the engine is 40 % of the maximum possible and the COP of
the heat pump is 50 % of the maximum possible, what is the temperature of the reservoir to
which the heat pump rejects heat ? What is the rate of heat rejection from the heat pump, if
the rate of heat supply to the engine is 50kW ? ( 7 marks )

OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
16.a] A house is to be maintained at 21°C during winter and at 26°C during summer. Heat leakage
through the walls, windows and roof is about 3000 kJ/hr per degree temperature difference
between the interior of the house and the environment. A reversible heat pump is proposed
for realising the desired heating and cooling. What is the minimum power required to run the
heat pump in the reverse, if the outside temperature during summer is 36°C? Also find the
lowest environment temperature during winter for which the inside of the house can be
maintained at 21°C consuming the same power. ( 7 marks )

b] Air enters a compressor in steady flow at 140 kPa, 17°C and 70 m/s and leaves at 350 kPa,
127°C and 110 m/s. The environment is at 100 kPa and 7°C. Calculate per kg of air (a) the
actual work required (b) the minimum work required and (c) the irreversibility of the process.
( 7 marks )

Module – 4

17.a]Show the constant pressure transformation of unit mass of ice at atmospheric pressure and
-20⁰C to superheated steam at 220⁰C on P-v , T-v and P-T coordinate systems and explain
their salient features . ( 7 marks )

b] A rigid vessel of volume 0.3 m3 contains 10 kg of oxygen at 300 K. Using (i) the perfect gas
equation and (ii) the Van der Waal’s equation of state, determine the pressure of oxygen in the
vessel. Take the Van der Waal’s constants for oxygen as a =0.1382 m6 Pa/ mol2 and
b=0.03186 m3/ kmol . ( 7 marks )
OR

18.a]Steam at 25 bar and 300⁰C expands isentropically to 5 bar. Calculate the change in enthalpy,
volume and temperature of unit mass of steam during this process using steam tables and
Mollier chart and compare the values ( 7 marks )

b]Explain law of corresponding states and its significance to the generalized compressibility
chart. ( 7 marks )

Module – 5

19.a] Derive the expressions for the equivalent molecular weight and characteristic gas constant for
a mixture of ideal gases. ( 6 marks )

b] 0.5 kg of Helium and 0.5 kg of Nitrogen are mixed at 20⁰C and at a total pressure of 100 kPa.
Find (i) volume of the mixture (ii) partial volumes of the components (iii) partial pressures of the
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
components ( iv) the specific heats of the mixture and (v) the gas constant of the mixture. Take
ratio of specific heats for Helium and Nitrogen to be 1.667 and 1.4 respectively. ( 8 marks )

OR

20.a] 2 kg of carbon dioxide at 38°C and 1.4 bar is mixed with 5 kg of nitrogen at 150°C and 1.03 bar
to form a mixture at a final pressure of 70 kPa. The process occurs adiabatically in a steady
flow apparatus. Calculate the final temperature of the mixture and the change in entropy
during the mixing process. Take specific heat at constant pressure for CO2 and N2 as
0.85 kJ/kg.K and 1.04 kJ/kg respectively. ( 7 marks )

b]Derive the Maxwell relations. Explain their significance ? ( 7 marks )

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year of
CATEGORY L T P Credits
MANUFACTURING Introduction
MET 204
PROCESS
PCC 3 1 0 4 2019
Preamble:
1. To gain theoretical and practical knowledge in material casting processes and develops an
understanding of the dependent and independent variables which control materials
casting in a production processes.
2. Provide a detailed discussion on the welding process and the physics of welding.
Introduce students to different welding processes weld testing and advanced processes to
be able to appreciate the practical applications of welding.
3. The course will also provide methods of analysis allowing a mathematical/physical
description of forming processes.
4. Correlate the material type with the possible fabrication processes
5. Generate solutions to problems that may arise in manufacturing engineering

Prerequisite: MET 205 Metallurgy and material science

Course Outcomes - At the end of the course students will be able to

Illustrate the basic principles of foundry practices and special casting processes, their
CO 1
advantages, limitations and applications.
CO 2 Categorize welding processes according to welding principle and material.
Understand requirements to achieve sound welded joint while welding different similar and
CO 3
dissimilar engineering materials.
Student will estimate the working loads for pressing, forging, wire drawing etc.
CO 4
processes
Recommend appropriate part manufacturing processes when provided a set of functional
CO 5
requirements and product development constraints.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirements)

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO 4 - - - 3 - - - - - - - -
CO 5 - 4 - - - - - - - - - -
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

A ssessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

End Semester Examination
Bloom's Test II
Test I (Marks) (Marks)
taxonomy (Marks)

Remember 25 25 25
Understand 15 15 15
Apply 30 25 30
Analyse 10 10 10
Evaluate 10 15 10
Create 10 10 10

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE marks ESE marks ESE duration

150 50 100 3 Hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:

Attendance 10 marks

Regular class work/tutorials/assignments 15 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (Minimum 2 numbers) 25 marks

End semester pattern:- There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of
which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions and carry 14 marks.
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
Part -A
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): - Illustrate the basic principles of foundry practices and
special casting processes, their Advantages, Limitations and Applications
1. Why draft allowances are important for patterns.
2. What are the importances of permeability of molding sand?
3. How runner extension is helpful for good casting quality.
4. Internal corners are more prone to solidification shrinkages than external corners.
Explain?
5. Which of the casting processes would be suitable for making small toys in large
numbers? Why?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

Categorize welding processes according to welding principle and material
1. Why is the quality of welds produced by submerged arc welding very good?
2. What does the strength of a weld nugget in resistance spot welding depends on?
3. What is the strength of a welded joint is inferior or superior to the parent metal? Why?
4. Why some joints may have to be preheated prior to welding.
Part -B
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Understand requirements to achieve sound welded joint while welding
different similar and dissimilar engineering materials.
1. Assume that you are asked to inspect a weld for a critical application. Describe the procedure
you would follow. If you find a flaw during your inspection, how would you go about
determining whether or not this flaw is important for the particular application?
2. In the building of large ships, there is a need to weld large sections of steel together to form a
hull, for this application, which welding process would you select? Why?
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Student will estimate the working loads for pressing, forging, wire
drawing etc. processes
1. How can you tell whether a certain part is forged or cast? Describe the features that you
would investigate to arrive at a conclusion.
2. Two solid cylindrical specimens A and B, made of a perfectly plastic material, are being
forged with friction and isothermally at room temperature to a reduction in height of 50%.
specimen A has a height of 2 inch and cross sectional area of 1 square inch, and specimen
B has a height of is 1 inch and a cross sectional area of 2 square inch will the work done
be the same for the two specimens? Explain.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Recommend appropriate part manufacturing processes when provided a
set of functional requirements and product development constraints.
1. Many missile components are made by spinning. What other methods would you use to make
missile components if spinning process were not available? Describe the relative advantages and
limitations of each method.
2. Suggest a suitable casting process for making an engine piston with Aluminum alloy. What type of
mould can be used?
3. Suggest and explain a suitable welding method for welding railway tracks for trains.
4. Suggest a suitable manufacturing process for screw jack, postulate the fundamentals.
SYLLABUS
Module I
Casting:-Characteristics of sand - patterns- cores- -chaplets- simple problems- solidification of metals
and Chvorinov's rule - Elements of gating system- risering -chills –simple problems- Special casting
process- Defects in castings- Super alloy Production Methods.
Module II
Welding:-welding metallurgy-heat affected zone- grain size and hardness- stress reliving- joint quality
-heat treatment of welded joints - weldability - destructive and non destructive tests of welded joints-
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Thermit welding, friction welding - Resistance welding: HAZ, process and correlation of process
parameters with welded joints - applications of each welding process- Arc welding:-HAZ, process and
correlation of process parameters with welded joints- simple problems - applications of each welding
process - Oxyacetylene welding:-chemistry, types of flame and its applications - brazing- soldering -
adhesive bonding.
Module III
Rolling:- principles - types of rolls and rolling mills - mechanics of flat rolling-Defects-vibration and
chatter - flat rolling -miscellaneous rolling process- simple problems - Bulk deformation of metals :-
State of stress; yield criteria of Tresca, von Mises, comparisons; Flow rules; power and energy
deformations; Heat generation and heat transfer in metal forming process.
Module IV
Forging: methods analysis, applications, die forging, defects in forging - simple problems - Metal
extrusion:- metal flow, mechanics of extrusion, miscellaneous process, defects, simple problems,
applications - Wire, Rod, and tube drawing:- mechanics of rod and wire drawing, simple problems,
drawing defects - swaging, applications – deep drawing.
Module V
Locating and clamping methods- locating methods- locating from plane, circular, irregular surface.
Locating methods and devices- simple problems - Basic principles of clamping -Sheet metal
operations- Press tool operations-Tension, Compression, tension and compression operations -
applications - Fundamentals of die cutting operations - simple problems - types of die construction.
Text Books
1. Donalson cyril, LeCain, Goold, Ghose:- Tool design, McGraw Hill.
2. Serope Kalpakjian, Steven R. Schmid - Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, Pearson.
Reference
1. Joseph R. Davis, S. L. Semiatin, American Society for Metals - ASM Metals Handbook, Vol. 14
Forming and Forging ASM International (1989).
2. Peter Beeley, Foundry Technology, Butterworth-Heinemann
3. Rao P.N., Manufacturing Technology, Volume -1, Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Taylan Altan, Gracious Ngaile, Gangshu Shen - Cold and Hot Forging Fundamentals and
Applications - ASM International (2004).
5. Matthew J. Donachie, Stephen J. Donachie, Super alloys A Technical Guide, Second Edition, 2002
ASM International.

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

MANUFACTURING PROCESS - MET 204
Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours
Part – A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks
1. Why does porosity have detrimental effects on the mechanical properties of castings? Which
physical properties like thermal and electrical conductivity also are affected by porosity?
explain
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

2. Large parts cannot be manufactured by the centrifugal casting, comment on the statement.
3. What does the strength of a weld nugget in resistance spot welding depends on?
4. Explain how the atmosphere around the work piece affect the weld obtained in electron beam
welding.
5. What is the importance of roll velocity and strip velocity?
6. Explain a suitable rolling process for making threaded fasteners.
7. Explain why forged parts withstand high loads compared to cast parts.
8. Explain why the die pressure in drawing process decreases towards the exit of the die.
9. What is the basic rule for applying clamping forces?
10. What is generally used as the basic reference plane for locating?

PART -B
Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE – 1

11. What is gating ratio? What considerations affect its selection? What are the typical gating
ratios for the following applications? (a) Grey iron bed castings made in cast steel, (b) Valve
body castings made in cast steel, (c) Aluminum pistons for automobiles, (d) Large gun metal
bushes for bearings (14 marks).
OR
12. Explain different types of casting defeats in detail with effects of each defect on quality of the
casting (14 marks).
MODULE – 2
13. a. Two plates were welded together and then the strength of the joint was tested. It is found
that the weld was stronger than either of the plates. Do you think that the statement is
incorrect? Postulate, giving valid reasons with neat sketches (7 marks).
b. what are the methods available for controlling the distortions in welded assembly structure?
Describe their relative effects and application(7 marks).
OR
14. a. Two 1-mm thick, flat Copper sheets are being spot welded using a current of 5000A and a
current flow time of t=0.18 seconds the electrodes are 5mm in diameter. Estimate the heat
generated in the weld zone (7 marks).
b. Explain why some joints may have to be preheated prior to welding? If the parts to be
welded are preheated, is the likelihood that porosity will form increased or decreased?
Explain(7 marks).
MODULE – 3
15. a. An annealed Copper strip 228mm wide and 25mm thick is rolled to a thickness 20mm in
one pass. The roll radius is 300mm and the rolls rotate at 100rpm. Calculate the roll force and
the power required in this operation (7 marks).
b. A 100mm square billet is to be rolled into a rod of 12.5mm diameter. Draw the sequence of
operations (7 marks).
OR
16. Explain the yield criteria of Tresca, von Mises and compare each other (14 marks).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE – 4
17. a. Explain why crankshaft of an automobile is manufactured by forging and not by casting
(7 marks).
b. Estimate the limiting drawing ratio that you would expect from a sheet metal that, when
stretched by 23 percentages in length, decreases in thickness by 10 percentages (7 marks).
OR
18. a. Assume that you are reducing the diameter of two round rods, one by simple tension and the
other by indirect extrusion. Which methods would be better? Explain (7 marks).
b. A cylindrical specimen made of annealed 4135 steel has a diameter of 6 inches and is 4inch
high. It is upset by open die forging with flat dies to a height of 2inch at room temperature.
Assuming that the coefficient of friction is 0.2, calculate the force required at the end of the
stroke. Use average pressure formula (7 marks).
MODULE – 5
19. Estimate the force required in punching a 25mm diameter hole through a 3.2mm thick
annealed Titanium Ti-6Al-4V sheet at room temperature (5 marks).
b. Explain 3-2-1 principle of locating with neat sketches (9 marks).
OR
20. a. determine the die and punch sizes for blanking a circular disc of 20mm diameter from a C20
steel sheet whose thickness is 1.5mm (7 marks).
b. Explain how is unevenness compensated for when locating against an irregular surface with
more than three locating points? (7 marks).
Course content and lecture schedules.
No. of Course
Module TOPIC
hours outcomes
Casting:-Characteristics of sand -pattern and allowances -type of patterns-
1.1 2 CO1
cores-core prints-chaplets-simple problems.
Elements of gating system-gating system, pouring time, choke area -
1.2 2
risering Caine's method-chills –simple problems.
CO1
Special casting process:-shell molding, precision investment, die casting, CO5
1.3 centrifugal casting, continues casting, squeeze casting surface roughness 2
obtainable and application of each casting process.
Defects in castings :- Shaping faults arising in pouring, Inclusions and
sand defects, Gas defects, Shrinkage defects, Contraction defects,
1.4 2
Dimensional errors, Compositional errors and segregation; significance
of defects on Mechanical properties . (Kalpakjian, Beeley, Rao). CO1
Superalloy Production Methods: Vacuum Induction Melting; Electroslag
1.5 1
Remelting; Vacuum Arc Remelting (ASM).
Welding:-welding metallurgy, diffusion, heat affected zone, driving force
for grain growth, grain size and hardness- joint quality: porosity, slag
inclusions, cracks, surface damage, residual stress lamellar tears, stress
2.1 2 CO2
reliving, heat treatment of welded joints - weldability (Kalpakjian,
Lindberg) - destructive and non destructive tests of welded joints (may be
provided as class assignment - Lindberg).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Resistance welding: HAZ, process and correlation of process parameters

CO2
2.2 with welded joints of spot, seam, projection, stud arc, percussion welding- 3
CO5
applications of each welding process –simple problems. (Kalpakjian).
Arc welding:-HAZ, process and correlation of process parameters with
welded joints of shielded metal arc, submerged, gas metal, flux cored,
2.3 electrogas, electroslag, gas tungsten, plasma arc, electron beam, laser 3
beam –simple problems - Thermit welding, friction welding- applications CO2
of each welding process. (Kalpakjian, Lindberg).
Oxyacetylene welding:-chemistry, types of flame and its applications -
2.4 1
brazing- soldering - adhesive bonding.
Rolling:- principles - types of rolls and rolling mills - mechanics of flat
rolling, roll pressure distribution, neutral point, front and back tension, CO4
3.1 3
torque and power, roll forces in hot rolling, friction, deflection and CO5
flattening, spreading -– simple problems.
rolling defects-vibration and chatter - flat rolling -miscellaneous rolling
3.2 process: shape, roll forging, ring, thread and gear, rotary tube piercing, 2
tube rolling - applications – simple problems. (Kalpakjian). CO4
Plastic deformation of metals - stress-strain relationships- State of stress -
3.3 2
yield criteria of Tresca, von Mises, and comparisons - applications.
Flow rules -power and energy deformations - Heat generation and heat
3.4 transfer in metal forming process -temperature in forging. (ASM- Taylan 1 CO4
Altan).
Forging: material characterization; grain flow and strength - Forging:-
classification - open die forging, forces and work of deformation -
Forging methods analysis:- slab method only, solid cylindrical, 3
4.1 rectangular work piece in plane strain, forging under sticking condition -
simple problems -applications.
Deformation zone geometry – die forging: - impression, close, coining, CO4
1
skew rolling etc. –simple problems– defects in forging. (Kalpakjian).
Metal extrusion: - metal flow - mechanics of extrusion:-deformation and
4.2 friction, actual forces, die angle, forces in hot extrusion - miscellaneous 2
process- defects -–simple problems- applications. (Kalpakjian, Lindberg).
Wire, Rod, and tube drawing: - mechanics of rod and wire dramwing:
deformation, friction, die pressure and angle, temperature, reduction per
4.3 2
pass, drawing flat strip and tubes- –simple problems- drawing defects-
swaging-applications. (Kalpakjian, Lindberg, Rao). CO4
Deep drawing- deep drawbility, simple problems - different drawing
4.4 1
practices
Locating and clamping methods: - basic principle of location; locating
methods; degrees of freedom; locating from plane, circular, irregular 2
5.1
surface –simple problems. CO4
Locating methods and devices: - pin and button locators, rest pads and
1
plates, nest or cavity location.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Basic principles of clamping:-strap, cam, screw, latch, wedge, hydraulic

5.2 2 CO4
and pneumatic clamping –simple problems. (Donaldson, Wilson F.W.).
Sheet metal operations: Press tool operations: shearing action, shearing
CO4
5.3 operations: blanking, piercing, simple problems, trimming, shaving, 2
CO5
nibbing, notching – simple problems - applications.
Tension operations: stretch forming - Compression operations: - coining,
sizing, ironing, hobbing - tension and compression operations: drawing,
2
spinning, bending, forming, embossing – simple problems- applications.
5.4 CO4
(Donaldson, Wilson F.W., Rao P.N).
Fundamentals of die cutting operations - inverted, progressive and
1
compound die - simple problems. (Donaldson)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET206 FLUID MACHINERY PCC 3 1 - 4

Preamble :
This course provides an understanding of reciprocating and rotary fluid machinery. The
course consists of hydraulic pumps, turbines, air compressors and gas turbines

Prerequisite : NIL

Course Outcomes :
After completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Explain the characteristics of centrifugal and reciprocating pumps
CO2 Calculate forces and work done by a jet on fixed or moving plate and curved plates
CO3 Explain the working of turbines and Select a turbine for specific application.
CO4 Analyse the working of air compressors and Select the suitable one based on
application.
CO5 Analyse gas turbines and Identify the improvements in basic gas turbine cycles.
CO6 Explain the characteristics of centrifugal and reciprocating pumps

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern
Blooms Category CA ESA
Assignment Test - 1 Test - 2
Remember 25 20 20 10
Understand 25 40 40 20
Apply 25 40 40 70
Analyse 25
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks

Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

Mark distribution & Duration of Examination :

Total Marks CA ESE ESE Duration
150 50 100 3 Hours

End semester pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 1

1. A centrifugal pump discharges 0.15 m3 /s of water against a head of 12.5 m, the speed of
the impeller being 600 r.p.m. The outer and inner diameters of impeller are 500 mm and
250 mm respectively and the vanes are bent back at 35◦ to the tangent at exit. If the area
of flow remains 0.07 m2 from inlet to outlet, calculate :

(a) Manometric efficiency of pump,

(b) Vane angle at inlet, and
(c) Loss of head at inlet to impeller when discharge is reduced by 40% without changing
the speed.

2. (a) What is slip in a reciprocating pump. What is the reason for negative slip in a
reciprocating pump.
(b) A single acting reciprocating pump having a bore of 150 mm and a stroke of 300
mm length, discharges 250 l of water per minute at 50 rpm. Neglecting losses, find
theoretical discharge and slip of the pump.
(c) With a neat sketch explain the working of a gear pump.

3. Explain the following terms as they are applied to a centrifugal pump:

(a) Static suction lift,

(b) static suction head,
(c) static discharge head and
(d) total static head.

Course Outcome 2

1. Prove that the force exerted by a jet of water on a fixed semi-circular plate in the direction
of the jet when the jet strikes at the centre of the semi-circular plate is two times the force
exerted by the jet on an fixed vertical plate.

2. Show that the angle of swing of a vertical hinged plate is given by

ρaV 2
sin θ =
W
where V = Velocity of the jet striking the plate, a = Area of the jet, and W = Weight of
the plate.

3. A jet of water moving at 60 m/s is deflected by a vane moving at 25 m/s in a direction

at 30◦ to the direction of the jet. The water jet leaves the blade normally to the motion
of the vanes. Draw the inlet and outlet velocity triangles and find the vane angles for
no shock at entry or exit. Take the relative velocity at outlet to be 0.85 of the relative
velocity at inlet.
Course Outcome 3
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. Explain the purpose of providing

(a) scroll casing

(b) stay vanes
(c) guide vanes, for a reaction turbine.

2. A Pelton wheel turbine has a mean bucket speed of 12 m/s with a jet of water flowing at
a rate of 900 l/s under a head of 40 m. The bucket deflects the jet at an angle of 165◦ .
Calculate the power given by the water to the runner and the hydraulic efficiency of the
turbine. Draw the velocity triangle. Assume the coefficient of velocity to be 0.96.

3. (a) What are the unit quantities used to analyze the performance of hydraulic turbines.
Explain its importance.
(b) What is specific speed of a turbine.

Course Outcome 4

1. With a neat sketch explain the working of centrifugal compressors.

2. An ideal single stage single acting reciprocating compressor logs a displacement volume
of 14 litres and a clearance volume of 5%. It intakes air at 1 bar and delivers the same at
7 bar. The compression is polytropic with an index of 1.3 and re-expansion is isentropic
with an index of 1.4. Determine the indicated work of a cycle.

3. What is surging in axial flow compressor? What are its effects? Describe briefly.

Course Outcome 5

1. A gas turbine unit operates at a mass flow of 30 kg/s. Air enters the compressor at
a pressure of 1 bar and temperature 15 ◦ C and is discharged from the compressor at a
pressure of 10.5 bar. Combustion occurs at constant pressure and results in a temperature
rise of 420 K. If the flow leaves the turbine at a pressure of 1.2 bar, determine the net
power output from the unit and also the thermal efficiency. Take Cp = 1.005kJ/kgK and
γ = 1.4.

2. Derive the expression for maximum specific work output of a gas turbine considering
machine efficiencies.

3. Write a short note on different type of compression chambers used in a gas turbine engine.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS

Module 1: Impact of jets: Introduction to hydrodynamic thrust of jet on a fixed and moving surface
(flat and curve),– Series of vanes - work done and efficiency. Hydraulic Turbines : Impulse and
Reaction Turbines – Degree of reaction – Pelton Wheel – Constructional features - Velocity triangles
– Euler’s equation – Speed ratio, jet ratio and work done, losses and efficiencies, design of Pelton
wheel – Inward and outward flow reaction turbines- Francis Turbine – Constructional features –
Velocity triangles, work done and efficiencies. Axial flow turbine (Kaplan) Constructional features –
Velocity triangles- work done and efficiencies

Module 2: Characteristic curves of turbines – theory of draft tubes – surge tanks – Cavitation in
turbines – Governing of turbines – Specific speed of turbine , Type Number– Characteristic curves,
scale Laws – Unit speed – Unit discharge and unit power. Rotary motion of liquids – free, forced and
spiral vortex flows Rotodynamic pumps- centrifugal pump impeller types,-velocity triangles-
manometric head- work, efficiency and losses, H-Q characteristic, typical flow system characteristics,
operating point of a pump. Cavitation in centrifugal pumps- NPSH required and available- Type
number-Pumps in series and parallel operations. Performance characteristics- Specific speed-Shape
numbers – Impeller shapes based on shape numbers.

Module 3: Positive displacement pumps- reciprocating pump – Single acting and double acting- slip,
negative slip and work required and efficiency- indicator diagram- acceleration head - effect of
acceleration and friction on indicator diagram – speed calculation- Air vessels and their purposes,
saving in work done to air vessels multi cylinder pumps. Multistage pumps-selection of pumps-
pumping devices-hydraulic ram, Accumulator, Intensifier, Jet pumps, gear pumps, vane pump and
lobe pump.

Module 4: Compressors: classification of compressors, reciprocating compressor-single stage

compressor, equation for work with and without clearance volume, efficiencies, multistage
compressor, intercooler, free air delivered (FAD).
Centrifugal compressor-working, velocity diagram, work done, power required, width of blades of
impeller and diffuser, isentropic efficiency, slip factor and pressure coefficient, surging and chocking.
Axial flow compressors:- working, velocity diagram, degree of reaction, performance. Roots blower,
vane compressor, screw compressor.

Module 5 Gas turbines: classification, Thermodynamic analysis of gas turbine cycles-open, closed
and semi closed cycle; ideal working cycle- Brayton cycle-P-v and T-s diagram, thermal efficiency.
Effect of compressor and turbine efficiencies. Optimum pressure ratio for maximum specific work
output with and without considering machine efficiencies. Comparison of gas turbine and IC engines,
Analysis of open cycle gas turbine, Improvements of the basic gas turbine cycles-regeneration,
intercooling and reheating-cycle efficiency and work output-Condition for minimum compressor
work and maximum turbine work. Combustion chambers for gas turbines. pressure loss in
combustion process and stability loop.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Text books
Subramanya, K., Hydraulic Machines, Tata McGraw Hill, 1st edition, 2017
Rathore, M., Thermal Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 1st edition, 2010

Reference Books
Ganesan, V., Gas Turbines, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd edition, 2017.
Sawhney G.S., Thermal and Hydraulic Machines, Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited;
2nd edition , 2011

COURSE PLAN

Module Topics Hours

Allotted

I Impact of jets: Introduction to hydrodynamic thrust of jet on a fixed and 6-3-0

moving surface (flat and curve),– Series of vanes - work done and efficiency
Hydraulic Turbines : Impulse and Reaction Turbines – Degree of reaction –
Pelton Wheel – Constructional features - Velocity triangles
– Euler’s equation – Speed ratio, jet ratio and work done, losses and
efficiencies, design of Pelton wheel – Inward and outward flow reaction
turbines- Francis Turbine – Constructional features – Velocity triangles, work
done and efficiencies.
Axial flow turbine (Kaplan) Constructional features – Velocity triangles-
work done and efficiencies
II Characteristic curves of turbines – theory of draft tubes – surge tanks – 7-2-0
Cavitation in turbines – Governing of turbines – Specific speed of turbine ,
Type Number– Characteristic curves, scale Laws – Unit speed – Unit
discharge and unit power.
Rotary motion of liquids – free, forced and spiral vortex flows Rotodynamic
pumps- centrifugal pump impeller types,-velocity triangles-
manometric head- work, efficiency and losses, H-Q
characteristic, typical flow system characteristics, operating point of a
pump. Cavitation in centrifugal pumps- NPSH required and available- Type
number-Pumps in series and parallel operations. Performance
characteristics- Specific speed-Shape numbers – Impeller shapes based on
shape numbers.
III Positive displacement pumps- reciprocating pump – Single acting and 7-2-0
double acting- slip, negative slip and work required and efficiency- indicator
diagram- acceleration head - effect of acceleration and friction on indicator
diagram – speed calculation- Air vessels and their purposes, saving in work
done to air vessels multi cylinder pumps. Multistage pumps-selection of
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
pumps-pumping devices-hydraulic ram, Accumulator, Intensifier, Jet
pumps, gear pumps, vane pump and lobe pump.
IV Compressors: classification of compressors, reciprocating compressor-single 7-2-0
stage compressor, equation for work with and without clearance volume,
efficiencies, multistage compressor, intercooler, free air delivered (FAD)
Centrifugal compressor-working, velocity diagram, work done, power
required, width of blades of impeller and diffuser, isentropic efficiency, slip
factor and pressure coefficient, surging and chocking.
Axial flow compressors:- working, velocity diagram, degree of reaction,
performance. Roots blower, vane compressor, screw compressor.
V Gas turbines: classification, Thermodynamic analysis of gas turbine cycles- 7-2-0
open, closed and semi closed cycle; ideal working cycle- Brayton cycle-P-v
and T-s diagram, thermal efficiency. Effect of compressor and turbine
efficiencies. Optimum pressure ratio for maximum specific work output
with and without considering machine efficiencies. Comparison of gas
turbine and IC engines, Analysis of open cycle gas turbine, Improvements of
the basic gas turbine cycles-regeneration, intercooling and reheating-cycle
efficiency and work output-Condition for minimum compressor work and
maximum turbine work. Combustion chambers for gas turbines. pressure
loss in combustion process and stability loop.
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
IV SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET206: FLUID MACHINERY
Mechanical Engineering

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. What is degree of reaction? What will be the degree of reaction for a Pelton wheel.

2. Explain speed ratio and jet ratio.

3. What is governing of a turbine? Why is it important?

4. Explain the term specific speed of a pump. How is it different from specific speed of a
turbine.

5. Define slip, percentage slip and negative slip of a reciprocating pump.

6. What is the purpose of air vessels in multi-cylinder reciprocating pump.

7. What are the classifications of compressors? Explain briefly.

8. Write a short note on axial flow compressors. Why is it preferred in aerospace applications.

9. Explain briefly the process of regeneration in a gas turbine engine.

10. Draw the p-v diagram and T-s diagram of Brayton cycle.

(10×3=30 Marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module

MODULE-I

11. (a) A 50 mm diameter jet having a velocity of 25 m/s, strikes a flat plate, the normal
of which is inclined at 30◦ to the axis of the jet. Calculate the normal force exerted
on the plate
i. when the plate is stationary,
ii. when the plate is moving with a velocity of 10 m/s in the direction of the jet.
Find also the work done and the efficiency of the jet when the plate is moving.
(7 Marks)
 (b) A Pelton wheel has a mean bucket speed of 10 m/s with a jet of water flowing at
the rate of 700 litres/s under a head of 30 m. The buckets deflect the jet through
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
◦
an angle of 160 . Calculate the power given by the water to the runner and the
hydraulic efficiency of the turbine. Assume coefficient of velocity as 0.98. (7 Marks)

12. (a) A reaction turbine works at 450 rpm under a head of 120 m. Its diameter at inlet
is 120 cm and the flow area is 0.4 m2 . The angles made by absolute and relative
velocities at inlet are 20◦ and 60◦ respectively with the tangential velocity. Determine:
i. The volume flow rate,
ii. The power developed, and
iii. Hydraulic efficiency.
Assume whirl at outlet to be zero. (7 Marks)
(b) A Kaplan turbine runner is to be designed to develop 7357.5 kW shaft power. The
net available head is 10 m. Assume that the speed ratio is 1.8 and flow ratio is 0.6.
If the overall efficiency is 70% and diameter of the boss is 0.4 times the diameter of
the runner, find the diameter of the runner, its speed and specific speed. (7 Marks)

MODULE-II

13. (a) A Pelton wheel is revolving at a speed of 190 rpm and develops 5150.25 kW when
working under a head of 220 m with an overall efficiency of 80%. Determine unit
speed, unit discharge and unit power. The speed ratio for the turbine is given as
0.47. Find the speed, discharge and power when this turbine is working under a head
of 140 m. (7 Marks)
(b) What do you understand by the characteristic curves of a turbine? Describe the
important types of characteristic curves. (7 Marks)

14. (a) Why are centrifugal pumps used sometimes in series and sometimes in parallel? Draw
the following characteristic curves for a centrifugal pump:
Head, power and efficiency versus discharge with constant speed. (7 Marks)
(b) State the effects of cavitation on the performance of water turbines and also state
how to prevent cavitation in water turbines. (7 Marks)

MODULE-III

15. (a) Draw an indicator diagram, considering the effect of acceleration and friction in
suction and delivery pipes. Find an expression for the work done per second in case
of single-acting reciprocating pump. (7 Marks)
(b) Differentiate :
i. Between a single-acting and double-acting reciprocating pump,
ii. Between a single cylinder and a double cylinder reciprocating pump. (7 Marks)

16. (a) A single-acting reciprocating pump running at 30 r.p.m, delivers 0.012 m3 /s of water.
The diameter of the piston is 25 cm and stroke length is 50 cm. Determine :
i. The theoretical discharge of the pump,
ii. Coefficient of discharge, and
iii. Slip and percentage slip of the pump. (8 Marks)
(b) Write a short note on gear pumps. Why gear pump is known as positive displacement
pump. (6 Marks)
 MODULE-IV
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
17. (a) With a neat sketch explain the working of an axial flow compressor. (7 Marks)
(b) Derive the expression for the work done in a reciprocating compressor with and
without clearance volume. (7 Marks)

18. (a) A single stage double acting air compressor is required to deliver 14 m3 of air per
minute measured at 1.013 bar and 15 ◦ C. The delivery pressure is 7 bar and the
speed 300 rpm. Take clearance volume as 5% of the swept volume with compression
and expansion index n=1.3. Calculate
i. Swept volume of the cylinder,
ii. Delivery temperature,
iii. Indicated power.
(10 Marks)
(b) Draw the velocity diagram of an axial flow compressor. (4 Marks)

MODULE-V

19. (a) The air enters the compressor of an open cycle constant pressure gas turbine at a
pressure of 1 bar and temperature 20 ◦ C. The pressure of air after compression
is 4 bar. The isentropic efficiencies of compressor and turbine are 80% and 85%
respectively. The air fuel ratio is 90:1. If flow rate of air is 3.0 kg/s, find
i. Power developed
ii. Thermal efficiency of cycle
(7 Marks)
(b) A gas turbine has a pressure ratio of 6:1 and a maximum cycle temperature of 600 ◦ C.
The isentropic efficiencies of compressor and turbine are 0.82 and 0.85 respectively.
Calculate the power output in kW of an electric generator geared to turbine when
the air enters the compressor at 15 ◦ C at the rate of 15 kg/s. Assume the working
fluid to be air with Cp = 1.005 and γ = 1.4. (7 Marks)

20. (a) What are the improvements made to the basic gas turbine cycle. Explain with
temperature entropy diagram. (8 Marks)
(b) Differentiate between open, closed and semi closed gas turbine cycles. (6 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MEL202 FM & HM LAB PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble:

This lab is mainly focussed to develop a platform where the students can enhance their
engineering knowledge in the fluid mechanics domain by applying their theoretical
knowledge acquired.

Prerequisite: MET203 Mechanics of Fluids

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Determine the coefficient of discharge of flow measuring devices (notches, orifice meter
and Venturi meter)
CO 2 Calibrate flow measuring devices (notches, orifice meter and Venturi meter)
CO 3 Evaluate the losses in pipes
CO 4 Determine the metacentric height and stability of floating bodies
CO 5 Determine the efficiency and plot the characteristic curves of different types of pumps and
turbines

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 2 1 2 3 2 2
CO 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
CO 3 2 1 2 3 2 2
CO 4 2 1 2 3 2 2
CO 5 2 1 2 3 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed regarding award of
marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15 Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and trouble shooting) : 25 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions:
Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second series test covering entire
syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be conducted under the equal
responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The number of candidates evaluated per
day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for the University examination only on
submitting the duly certified record. The external examiner shall endorse the record.

A minimum of 10 experiments are to be performed.

SYLLABUS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of coefficient of discharge and calibration of Notches.

2. Determination of coefficient of discharge and calibration of Orifice meter.

3. Determination of coefficient of discharge and calibration of Venturi meter.

4. Determination of hydraulic coefficients of orifices.

5. Determination of Chezy’s constant and Darcy’s coefficient on pipe friction apparatus.

6. Determine the minor losses in pipe.

7. Experiments on hydraulic ram.

8. Reynolds experiment.

9. Bernoulli’s experiment.

10. Determination of metacentric height and radius of gyration of floating bodies.

11. Performance test on positive displacement pumps.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
12. Performance test on centrifugal pumps, determination of operating point and efficiency.

13. Performance test on gear pump.

14. Performance test on Impulse turbines.

15. Performance test on reaction turbines (Francis and Kaplan Turbines).

16. Speed variation test on Impulse turbine.

17. Determination of best guide vane opening for Reaction turbine.

18. Impact of jet.

Reference Books

1. Yunus A. Cenegel, John M. Cimbala; Fluid Mechanics- Fundamentals and Applications (in SI
Units); McGraw Hill, 2010.

2. Bansal R.K, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines (SI Units); Laxmi Publications, 2011.

3. Modi P.N and Seth S.M, “Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics Including Hydraulic Machines”
Standard Book House, New Delhi, 20th Edition, 2015

4. Graebel. W. P, "Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Taylor & Francis, Indian Reprint, 2011

5. Robert W. Fox, Alan T. McDonald, Philip J. Pritchard, “Fluid Mechanics and Machinery”, John
Wiley and sons, 2015.

6. J. Frabzini, 'Fluid Mechanics with Engineering Applications', McGraw Hill, 1997.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year of
MACHINE CATEGORY L T P Credits
Introduction
MEL 204 TOOLS LAB- I
PCC 0 0 3 2 2019

Preamble:
1. To understand the parts of various machine tools and impart hands on experience on
lathe, drilling, shaping, milling, slotting, grinding, tool and cutter grinding machines.
2. To develop knowledge and importance of metal cutting parameters such as feed, velocity
and depth of cut etc on cutting force and surface roughness obtainable.
3. To develop fundamental knowledge on tool materials, cutting fluids and tool wear
Mechanisms.
4. To apply knowledge of basic mathematics to calculate the machining parameters for
different machining processes.
5. To study process parameters and practice on arc and gas welding technologies.
6. To gain knowledge on the structure, properties, heat treatment, testing and applications of
ferrous and non ferrous metals.

Prerequisite: MET 204 - Manufacturing Process

Course Outcomes - At the end of the course students will be able to

The students can operate different machine tools with understanding of work holders
CO 1
and operating principles to produce different part features to the desired quality.
CO 2 Apply cutting mechanics to metal machining based on cutting force and power
consumption.

CO 3 Select appropriate machining processes and process parameters for different metals.
Fabricate and assemble various metal components by welding and students will be able
CO 4
to visually examine their work and that of others for discontinuities and defects.
Infer the changes in properties of steel on annealing, normalizing, hardening and
CO 5
tempering.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirements)

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 - - 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO 4 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 - - - - 2 - - - - - - -
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

A ssessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom's Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks)
taxonomy
Remember 20 20
Understand 10 10
Apply 30 30
Analyse 20 20
Evaluate 10 10
Create 10 10
Mark distribution

Total
CIE marks ESE marks ESE duration
Marks

150 75 75 2.5 Hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:

Attendance 15 marks

Regular class work/ /Laboratory Record and

30 marks
Class Performance

Continuous Assessment Test/s 30 marks

The student’s assessment, continuous evaluation, record bonafides, awarding of sessional

marks, oral examination etc. should be carried out only by the assistant professor or above.
Any two experiments mentioned in part - B, and any eight experiments in part A and total
of minimum of ten experiments are to be performed.

End semester examination pattern

The Practical Examination will comprise of three hours. Oral examination should be conducted
and distribution of marks will be decided by the examiners.

Conduct of University Practical Examinations

The Principals of the concerned Engineering Colleges with the help of the
Chairmen/Chairperson will conduct the practical examination with the approval from the
University and bonafide work / laboratory record, hall ticket, identity card issued by college
are mandatory for appearing practical University examinations. To conduct practical
examination, an external examiner and an internal examiner should be appointed by the
University.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Maximum Marks : 75 Duration: 2.5 hours
1. To machine the hexagonal head and the slot shown in the sketch on the specimen and measure the
tool wear using toolmaker's microscope.

OR

2. To drill, file, as shown in the sketch, ream and tap holes on the mild steel plate and measure the
tool wear using toolmaker's microscope.

OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. To make the part shown in the sketch from a mild steel rod on a Lathe and measure the tool flank
wear using toolmaker's microscope.

OR

4. Prepare a metallurgical sample and determine the grain size using a optical microscope.

OR
5. To prepare a butt joint with mild steel strip using suitable welding technique and infer on the
welded joint.
OR
6. To make the part shown in the sketch from a mild steel rod on a Lathe and measure the tool flank
wear using toolmaker's microscope.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
PART - A
Safety precautions in machine shop - Exercises on machine tools: turning, knurling, drilling,
boring, reaming, trepanning, milling, hobbing, planning, shaping, slotting, broaching, grinding,
lapping, honing etc. - Welding practice.

PART - B
Metallurgy, heat treatment and testing.
Text Books:
1. Acherkan N. S. “Machine Tool”, Vol. I, II, III and IV, MIR Publications.
2. HMT, Production Technology, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. W. A. J. Chapman, Workshop Technology Part I, ELBS & Edward Arnold Publishers.

Course content and drawing schedules.

List of Experiments Course No. of

A minimum of ten experiments are to be carried out outcomes hours
Experi PART -A
ments (minimum eight experiments)
Centre Lathe
Study of lathe tools: - tool materials - selection of tool for
different operations - tool nomenclature and attributes of
each tool angles on cutting processes – effect of nose
radius, side cutting edge angle, end cutting edge angle and
feed on surface roughness obtainable – tool grinding.
1 • Study the different methods used to observe the work- CO 1 3
piece is precisely fixed on lathe.
• Study the optimum aspect ratio of work-piece to avoid
vibration and wobbling during turning.
• Machine tool alignment test on lathe.
• Re-sharpening of turning tool to specific geometry
Exercises on centre lathe:- Facing, plain turning, step turning
and parting – groove cutting, knurling and chamfering - form
turning and taper turning – eccentric turning, multi-start thread, 3
CO 1
2,3,4,5,6 square thread and internal thread etc.
CO 2
Exercises on lathe: - Measurement of cutting forces in turning
process and correlate the surface roughness obtainable by
6
varying feed, speed, feed, nose radius, side and end cutting edge
angles.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Measurement of cutting temperature and tool life in turning and

7 machine tool alignment test on lathe machine. CO 2 3

Exercises on Drilling machine

• Exercises on drilling machine: - drilling, boring,
reaming, taping and counter sinking etc. CO 1
86 3
• Exercises on drilling machine: - Measurement of cutting CO 2
forces in drilling process and correlate with process
parameters.
Exercises on Shaping machine
• Exercises on shaping machine: - flat surfaces, grooves and
key ways. CO 2
9 3
Exercises on Slotting machine
• Exercises on slotting machine: - flat surfaces, grooves and
key ways.
Planing and Broaching machine
10 Study and demonstration of broaching and hobbing CO 1 3
machine.
• Exercises on planing machine
Exercises on Grinding machine
• Exercise on surface grinding, cylindrical grinding and tool
11 grinding etc. CO 1 3
• Measurement of cutting forces and roughness in grinding
process and correlate with process parameters.
• Study and demonstration of lapping and honing machines.
Exercises on Welding machine
12 • Exercises on arc and gas welding: - butt welding and lap CO 4 3
welding of M.S. sheets.
PART - B - Metallurgy
(minimum two experiments)
CO 5 6
• Specimen preparation, etching & microscopic study of
13
Steel, Cast iron and Brass and grain size measurement.
• Heat treatment study:–Effect on mechanical properties
and microstructure of ferrous and non ferrous metals.
14 • Studies of various quenching mediums, Carryout heat CO 5 6
treatments on steel based on ASM handbook vol.4 and
observe the hardness obtained.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -4
MINOR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET282 THEORY OF MACHINES VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

Goal of this course is to expose the students to the fundamentals of kinematics of

mechanisms, design of cams, theory and analysis of gears, gear trains, clutches, brakes. The
students will also be exposed to velocity and acceleration analysis of different mechanisms.
It provides the knowledge on balancing of rotating and reciprocating masses, Gyroscopes,
Energy fluctuation in Machines.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Interpret basic principles of mechanisms and machines and Analyse a given mechanism
based on velocity and acceleration. List the basic selection requirements of different types
of mechanical clutches.
CO 2 Describe the theories of gears and gear trains. List the basic selection requirements of
different types of mechanical brakes.
CO 3 Develop the profile of CAMs as per the requirements and to understand cam profile.
CO 4 Explain the dynamic balancing of revolving and reciprocating masses. Describe the
fundamentals of gyroscope and its application.
CO 5 Analyse the performance of governors and flywheels.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 2
3
CO 2 3 2 2 3 2
3
CO 3 3 2 2 3 2
3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1
3
CO 5 3 3 3 1 3
3
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember
Understand 30 40 80
Apply 10 10
Analyse 20 10
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Interpret basic principles of mechanisms and machines. Analyse a given
mechanism based on velocity and acceleration. List the basic selection requirements of different
types of mechanical clutches.

1. Explain the inversions of a four bar mechanism.

2. Explain with neat sketches, the working of single plate clutch.

3. The crank of a slider crank mechanism rotates clockwise at a constant speed of 300 r.p.m.
The crank is 150 mm and the connecting rod is 600 mm long. Determine: 1. Linear velocity
and acceleration of the midpoint of the connecting rod, and 2. angular velocity and angular
acceleration of the connecting rod, at a crank angle of 45° from inner dead centre position

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) Describe the theories of gears and gear trains. List the basic selection
requirements of different types of mechanical brakes.

1. State and prove the law of gearing

2. In an epicyclic gear train, an arm carries two gears A and B having 36 and 45 teeth
respectively. If the arm rotates at 150 rpm in the anticlockwise direction about the centre of
the gear A which is fixed, determine the speed of gear B. If the gear A instead of being fixed
makes 300 rpm in the clockwise direction, what will be the speed of gear B?

3. Discuss the various types of the brakes.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Develop the profile of CAMs as per the requirements and and to
understand cam profile.

1. Explain the different classifications of cam and followers.

2. Draw the displacement, velocity and acceleration diagrams when the follower moves in
SHM.

3. A cam with 30 mm as minimum diameter is rotating clockwise at a uniform speed of 1200

r.p.m. and has to give the following motion to a roller follower 10 mm in diameter:
a) Follower to complete outward stroke of 25 mm during 120° of cam rotation with equal
uniform acceleration and retardation;
b) (b) Follower to dwell for 60° of cam rotation;
c) (c) Follower to return to its initial position during 90° of cam rotation with equal uniform
acceleration and retardation;
d) (d) Follower to dwell for the remaining 90° of cam rotation.
Draw the cam profile if the axis of the roller follower passes through the axis of the cam.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain the static and dynamic balancing of revolving and reciprocating
masses. Describe the fundamentals of gyroscope and its application

1. Four masses m1, m2, m3 and m4 are 200 kg, 300 kg, 240 kg and 260 kg respectively. The
corresponding radii of rotation are 0.2 m, 0.15 m, 0.25 m and 0.3 m respectively and the
angles between successive masses are 45°, 75° and 135°. Find the position and magnitude of
the balance mass required, if its radius of rotation is 0.2 m.

2. Explain with neat sketches, the terms Swaying Couple and Hammer Blow.

3. A ship propelled by a turbine rotor which has a mass of 5000 kg and a speed of 2100 r.p.m.
The rotor has a radius of gyration of 0.5 m and rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed
from the stern. Find the gyroscopic effects in the following conditions:

a. The ship sails at a speed of 30 km/h and steers to the left in a curve having 60 m radius.

b. The ship pitches 6 degree above and 6 degree below the horizontal position. The bow is
descending with its maximum velocity. The motion due to pitching is simple harmonic and
the periodic time is 20 seconds.

c. The ship rolls and at a certain instant it has an angular velocity of 0.03 rad/s clockwise
when viewed from stern.

Determine also the maximum angular acceleration during pitching. Explain how the direction
of motion due to gyroscopic effect is determined in each case.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Analyse the performance of governors and flywheels.

1. The turning moment diagram for a petrol engine is drawn to the following scales : Turning
moment, 1 mm = 5 N-m ; crank angle, 1 mm = 1°. The turning moment diagram repeats itself
at every half revolution of the engine and the areas above and below the mean turning
moment line taken in order are 295, 685, 40, 340, 960, 270 mm2. The rotating parts are
equivalent to a mass of 36 kg at a radius of gyration of 150 mm. Determine the coefficient of
fluctuation of speed when the engine runs at 1800 r.p.m

2. Explain the different types of governors.

3. The arms of a Porter governor are each 250 mm long and pivoted on the governor axis. The
mass of each ball is 5 kg and the mass of the central sleeve is 30 kg. The radius of rotation of
the balls is 150 mm when the sleeve begins to rise and reaches a value of 200 mm for
maximum speed. Determine the speed range of the governor. If the friction at the sleeve is
equivalent of 20 N of load at the sleeve, determine how the speed range is modified.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
Module 1: Kinematics - Links, mechanism, Degrees of freedom, Grashoff's law. Four-bar chain,
Slider crank chain- Inversions and practical applications. Velocity and acceleration diagrams of simple
mechanisms. Coriolis acceleration (Theory only). Friction clutch - Pressure and wear theories, pivot
and collar friction, Single and multiple disc clutches.

Module 2: Gear – Classification of gears- Gear terminology- Law of gearing, Gear trains - Simple,
compound gear trains and epicyclic gear trains. Brakes - Block and band brakes, self-energizing and
self-locking in braking.

Module 3: Cams- Types of cams, cam profiles for knife edged and roller followers with and without
offsets for SHM, constant acceleration-deceleration, and constant velocity

Module 4: Static and dynamic balancing of rotating mass- Single and several masses in different
planes. Balancing of reciprocating mass. Gyroscope –Gyroscopic torque, gyroscopic stabilization of
ships and aeroplanes.

Module 5: Governors - Types of governors- simple watt governor - Porter governor- Theory of Proell
governor - Isochronism, hunting, sensitivity and stability. Flywheel - Turning moment diagrams,
fluctuation of energy

Text Books

1. Ballaney P.L. Theory of Machines, Khanna Publishers,1994

2. S. S. Rattan, Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009

3. V. P. Singh, Theory of Machines, Dhanpat Rai,2013

Reference Books

1. C. E. Wilson, P. Sadler, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Pearson Education,2005

2. D. H. Myskza, Machines and Mechanisms Applied Kinematic Analysis, Pearson Education,2013
3. G. Erdman, G. N. Sandor, Mechanism Design: Analysis and synthesis Vol I & II, Prentice Hall of
India,1984.
4. Ghosh, A. K. Malik, Theory of Mechanisms and Machines, Affiliated East West Press,1988
5. J. E. Shigley, J. J. Uicker, Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, McGraw Hill,2010
6. Holowenko, Dynamics of Machinery, John Wiley, 1995
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE PLAN

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module 1 (CO1)
1.1 Introduction to link, constrained motions, mechanism, machine 1
1.2 Degrees of freedom, Problem, Grashof’s law 1
1.3 Inversion – Four Bar chain – Single Slider Chain – Practical 2
Applications
1.4 Velocity Analysis – I Centre Methos – Relative Velocity Method 2
1.5 Acceleration Analysis - Four Bar Mechanism – Single Slider Chain 2
1.6 Corriolis Component of Acceleration –Quick Return Mechanisms 2
1.7 Clutches – Theories - Classifications 1
2 Module 2 (CO2)
2.1 Gear – Classifications – Terminology – Law of Gearing – Velocity 3
of Sliding – Interference - Problems
2.2 Gear Train –Classifications - Problems on Epi cyclic gear trains 3
2.3 Brake – Theory – Classifications 2
3 Module 3 (CO3)
3.1 Cam – Introduction - Classifications 1
3.2 Velocity and Acceleration Diagrams – Uniform Velocity – Uniform 2
Acceleration and Deceleration – SHM – Calculations
3.3 Construction of Cam Profile 4
4 Module 4 (CO4)
4.1 Static and dynamic balancing of rotating masses –Single and 2
several masses in different planes
4.2 Balancing of reciprocating masses 3
4.3 Gyroscope – Introduction – Stabilization of Ships 2
4.4 Stabilization of Air Planes 2
5 Module 5 (CO5)
5.1 Governors – Introduction –Classifications 2
5.2 Analytical Problems 2
5.3 Hunting – Sensitivity – Isochronism -Stability 2
5.4 Flywheels – Turning Moment Diagrams –Fluctuation of Energy 2
5.5 Analytical Problems 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code : MET282
Course Name : THEORY OF MACHINES
Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

PART – A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Write down the Kutzbach criterion of movability of plane mechanisms. Derive the Grubler’s
equation from it.

2. Explain the types of constrained motions with neat sketches.

3. With a neat sketch prove the common normal at the point of contact between a pair of teeth
must always pass through the pitch point.

4. Explain the terms : (i) Module, (ii) Pressure angle, and (iii) Addendum.

5. Explain the different classifications of followers.

6. Define the following terms as applied to cam with a neat sketch :-(a) Base circle, (b) Pitch circle,
(c) Pressure angle

7. Why reciprocating masses is cannot be completely balanced by revolving mass?

8. Derive the formula for the magnitude of gyroscopic couple.

9. Write down the differences between a gyroscope and a flywheel.

10. Explain the term hunting and isochronism.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1

11. The dimensions and configuration of the four bar mechanism, shown in Figure, are as follows :
P1A = 300 mm; P2B = 360 mm; AB = 360 mm, and P1P2 = 600 mm. The angle AP1P2 = 60°. The
crank P1A has an angular velocity of 10 rad/s and an angular acceleration of 30 rad/s2, both
clockwise. Determine the angular velocities and angular accelerations of P2B, and AB and the
velocity and acceleration of the joint B. (14 marks)

OR

12. a) With neat sketches explain the inversions of a four bar mechanism. (7 marks)

b) Derive the equation for the corrioli’s component of acceleration. (7 marks)

MODULE – 2

13. An internal wheel B with 80 teeth is keyed to a shaft F. A fixed internal wheel C with 82 teeth is
concentric with B. A compound wheel D-E gears with the two internal wheels; D has 28 teeth
and gears with C while E gears with B. The compound wheels revolve freely on a pin which
projects from a disc keyed to a shaft A co-axial with F. If the wheels have the same pitch and the
shaft A makes 800 r.p.m., what is the speed of the shaft F ? Sketch the arrangement.
(14 marks)

OR

14. a) What do you mean by a self-energizing brake and self-locking brake. (4 Marks)

b) A simple band brake operates on a drum of diameter 600 mm that is running at a speed of
200 rpm. The coefficient of friction is 0.3. The brake band has an angle of contact of 270⁰. One
end of it is fastened to a fixed pin and the other end to the brake arm 125 mm and is placed
perpendicular to the line bisecting the angle of contact.

i. What is the effort necessary at the end of brake arm to stop the wheel if 30 kW power
is absorbed? What is the direction of rotation of drum for minimum pull?

ii. What is the width of steel band required for this brake if the maximum tensile stress is
not to exceed 50 N/mm2 and the thickness of band is 2.5 mm.

(10 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODULE – 3

15. A cam rotating clockwise at a uniform speed of 1000 r.p.m. is required to give a roller follower
the motion defined below : 1. Follower to move outwards through 50 mm during 120° of cam
rotation, 2. Follower to dwell for next 60° of cam rotation, 3. Follower to return to its starting
position during next 90° of cam rotation, 4. Follower to dwell for the rest of the cam rotation.
The minimum radius of the cam is 50 mm and the diameter of roller is 10 mm. The line of stroke
of the follower is off-set by 20 mm from the axis of the cam shaft. If the displacement of the
follower takes place with uniform and equal acceleration and retardation on both the outward
and return strokes, draw profile of the cam. (14 marks)

OR

16. From the following data, draw the profile of a cam in which the follower moves with simple
harmonic motion during ascent while it moves with uniformly accelerated motion during
descent : Least radius of cam = 50 mm ; Angle of ascent = 48° ; Angle of dwell between ascent
and descent = 42° ; Angle of descent = 60° ; Lift of follower = 40 mm ; Diameter of roller = 30
mm ; Distance between the line of action of follower and the axis of cam = 20 mm. If the cam
rotates at 360 r.p.m. anticlockwise, find the maximum velocity and acceleration of the follower
during descent. (14 marks)

MODULE – 4

17. a) A shaft carries four masses A, B, C and D of magnitude 200 kg, 300 kg, 400 kg and 200 kg
respectively and revolving at radii 80 mm, 70 mm, 60 mm and 80 mm in planes measured from
A at 300 mm, 400 mm and 700 mm. The angles between the cranks measured anticlockwise are
A to B 45°, B to C 70° and C to D 120°. The balancing masses are to be placed in planes X and Y.
The distance between the planes A and X is 100 mm, between X and Y is 400 mm and between
Y and D is 200 mm. If the balancing masses revolve at a radius of 100 mm, find their magnitudes
and angular positions. (10 marks)

b) Explain the term swaying couple and hammer blow (4 marks)

OR

18. A ship propelled by a turbine rotor which has a mass of 5000 kg and a speed of 2100 r.p.m. The
rotor has a radius of gyration of 0.5 m and rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from
the stern. Find the gyroscopic effects in the following conditions: 1. The ship sails at a speed of
30 km/h and steers to the left in a curve having 60 m radius. 2. The ship pitches 6 degree above
and 6 degree below the horizontal position. The bow is descending with its maximum velocity.
The motion due to pitching is simple harmonic and the periodic time is 20 seconds. 3. The ship
rolls and at a certain instant it has an angular velocity of 0.03 rad/s clockwise when viewed from
stern. Determine also the maximum angular acceleration during pitching. Explain how the
direction of motion due to gyroscopic effect is determined in each case.
(14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODULE – 5

19. a) A Porter governor has all four arms 250 mm long. The upper arms are attached on the axis of
rotation and the lower arms are attached to the sleeve at a distance of 30 mm from the axis.
The mass of each ball is 5 kg and the sleeve has a mass of 50 kg. The extreme radii of rotation
are 150 mm and 200 mm. Determine the range of speed of the governor. (10 marks)

b) What is stability of a governor? How does it differ from sensitiveness? (4marks)

OR

20. A three cylinder single acting engine has its cranks set equally at 120° and it runs at 600 r.p.m.
The torque-crank angle diagram for each cycle is a triangle for the power stroke with a maximum
torque of 90 N-m at 60° from dead centre of corresponding crank. The torque on the return
stroke is sensibly zero. Determine : 1. power developed. 2. coefficient of fluctuation of speed, if
the mass of the flywheel is 12 kg and has a radius of gyration of 80 mm, 3. coefficient of
fluctuation of energy, and 4. maximum angular acceleration of the flywheel. (14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET284 THERMODYNAMICS VAC 3 1 - 4

Preamble:
Thermodynamics is the study of energy. Without energy life cannot exist. Activities from
breathing to the launching of rockets involves energy transactions and are subject to
thermodynamic analysis. Engineering devices like engines, turbines, refrigeration and air
conditioning systems, propulsion systems etc., work on energy transformations and must be
analysed using principles of thermodynamics. So, a thorough knowledge of thermodynamic
concepts is essential for a mechanical engineer. This course offers an introduction to the basic
concepts and laws of thermodynamics.
Prerequisite: NIL
Course Outcomes:
After completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Understand basic concepts and laws of thermodynamics
CO2 Conduct first law analysis of open and closed systems
CO3 Determine entropy changes associated with different processes
CO4 Understand the application and limitations of the ideal gas equation of state
CO5 Determine change in properties of pure substances during phase change processes
CO6 Evaluate properties of ideal gas mixtures

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 2
CO2 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 1
CO6 3 3 2 2 1

Assessment Pattern
Blooms Category CA ESA
Assignment Test - 1 Test - 2
Remember 25 20 20 10
Understand 25 40 40 20
Apply 25 40 40 70
Analyse 25
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:
Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks

Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

Mark distribution & Duration of Examination :

Total Marks CA ESE ESE Duration
150 50 100 3 Hours

End semester pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Course Outcome 1
1. Discuss the limitations of first law of thermodynamics.

2. Second law of thermodynamics is often called a directional law . Why?

3. Explain Joule-Kelvin effect. What is the significance of the inversion curve ?

Course Outcome 2
1. A mass of 2.4 kg of air at 150 kPa and 12°C is contained in a gas – tight, frictionless piston –
cylinder device. The air is now compressed to a final pressure of 600 kPa . During this process, heat
is transferred from the air such that the temperature inside the cylinder remains constant.
Calculate the work input during this process.

2. Carbon dioxide enters an adiabatic nozzle steadily at 1 MPa and 500°C with a mass flow rate of
600 kg/hr and leaves at 100 kPa and 450 m/s. The inlet area of the nozzle is 40 cm2. Determine (a)
the inlet velocity and (b) the exit temperature

3. Water is being heated in a closed pan on top of a range while being stirred by a paddle – wheel.
During the process, 30 kJ of heat is transferred to the water and 5 kJ of heat is lost to the
surrounding air. The paddle – wheel work amounts to 500 N-m. Determine the final energy of
the system, if its initial energy is 10 kJ.

Course Outcome 3
1.An adiabatic vessel contains 2 kg of water at 25˚C. B paddle – wheel work transfer, the
temperature of water is increased to 30˚C. If the specific heat of water is assumed to be constant at
4.186 kJ/kg.K, find the entropy change of the universe.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
2. Two kilograms of water at 80°C is mixed adiabatically with 3 kg of water at 30°C in a constant
pressure process at 1 atm. Find the increase in entropy of the total mass of water due to the mixing
process.
3. An iron block of unknown mass at 85⁰C is dropped into an insulated tank that contains 0.1 m3 of
water at 20⁰C. At the same time a paddle-wheel driven by a 200 W motor is activated to stir the
water. Thermal equilibrium is established after 20 minutes when the final temperature is 24⁰C.
Determine the mass of the iron block and the entropy generated during this process.

Course Outcome 4
1. Discuss the limitations of ideal gas equation.

2. Discuss law of corresponding states and its role in the construction of compressibility chart.

3. A rigid tank contains 2 kmol of N2 and 6 kmol of CH4 gases at 200 K and 12 MPa. Estimate the
volume of the tank, using (a) ideal gas equation of state (b) the compressibility chart and Amagat’s
law

Course Outcome 5
1.Steam is throttled from 3 MPa and 600˚C to 2.5 MPa. Determine the temperature of the steam at
the end of the throttling process.
2. Determine the change in specific volume, specific enthalpy and quality of steam as saturated
steam at 15 bar expands isentropically to 1 bar. Use steam tables

3. Estimate the enthalpy of vapourization of steam at 500 kPa, using the Clapeyron equation and
compare it with the tabulated value

Course Outcome 6
1. A gaseous mixture contains , by volume, 21%nitrogen, 50% hydrogen and 29 % carbon dioxide.
Calculate the molecular weight of the mixture, the characteristic gas constant of the mixture and the
value of the reversible adiabatic expansion index - γ. At 10˚C, the Cp values of nitrogen, hydrogen
and carbon dioxide are 1.039, 14.235 and 0.828 kJ/kg.K respectively.

2. A mixture of 2 kmol of CO2 and 3 kmol of air is contained in a tank at 199 kPa and 20˚C. Treating
air to be a mixture of 79% N2 and 21% O2 by volume , calculate (a) the individual mass of CO2 , N2
and O2, (b) the percentage content of carbon by mass in the mixture and (c) the molar mass ,
characteristic gas constant and the specific volume of the mixture

3. A gas mixture in an engine cylinder has 12% CO2, 11.5 % O2 and 76.5% N2 by volume. The
mixture at 1000˚C expands reversibly, according to the law PV1.25 = constant, to 7 times its initial
volume. Determine the work transfer and heat transfer per unit mass of the mixture.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS

Module 1: Role of Thermodynamics and it’s applications in Engineering and Science –Basic Concepts
Macroscopic and Microscopic viewpoints, Concept of Continuum, Thermodynamic System and
Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Types of Systems, Universe, Thermodynamic properties,
Process, Cycle, Thermodynamic Equilibrium, Quasi – static Process, State, Point and Path function.
Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics, Measurement of Temperature, reference Points, Temperature
Scales.

Module 2: Energy - Work - Pdv work and other types of work transfer, free expansion work, heat and
heat capacity. Joule’s Experiment- First law of Thermodynamics - First law applied to Non flow
Process- Enthalpy- specific heats- PMM1, First law applied to Flow Process, Mass and Energy balance
in simple steady flow process. Applications of SFEE, Limitations of the First Law.

Module 3: Second Law of Thermodynamics, Thermal Reservoir, Heat Engine, Heat pump – Kelvin-
Planck and Clausius Statements, Equivalence of two statements, Reversibility, Irreversible Process,
Causes of Irreversibility, PMM2, Carnot’s theorem and its corollaries, Absolute Thermodynamic
Temperature scale. Clausius Inequality, Entropy- Entropy changes in various thermodynamic
processes, principle of increase of entropy and its applications, Entropy generation, Entropy and
Disorder, Reversible adiabatic process- isentropic process, Third law of thermodynamics.

Module 4: Pure Substances, Phase Transformations, Triple point, properties during change of phase,
T-v, p-v and p-T diagram of pure substance, p-v-T surface, Saturation pressure and Temperature, T-h
and T-s diagrams, h-s diagrams or Mollier Charts, Dryness Fraction, steam tables. Property
calculations using steam tables. The ideal Gas Equation, Characteristic and Universal Gas constants,
Limitations of ideal Gas Model: Equation of state of real substances, Compressibility factor, Law of
corresponding state, Compressibility charts.

Module 5: Mixtures of ideal Gases – Mole Fraction, Mass fraction, Gravimetric and volumetric
Analysis, Dalton’s Law of partial pressure, Amagat’s Laws of additive volumes, Gibbs-Dalton’s law
Equivalent Gas constant and Molecular Weight, Properties of gas mixtures: Internal Energy,
Enthalpy, specific heats and Entropy. General Thermodynamic Relations – Combined First and
Second law equations – Helmholtz and Gibb’s functions - Maxwell’s Relations, Tds Equations. The
Clapeyron Equation, equations for internal energy, enthalpy and entropy, specific heats, Throttling
process, Joule Thomson Coefficient, inversion curve.

Text Books
1. P. K. Nag, Engineering Thermodynamics, McGraw Hill, 2013

2. E. Rathakrishnan Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics, PHI, 2005

3. Y. A. Cengel and M. A. Boles, Thermodynamics an Engineering Approach, McGraw Hill, 2011

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Reference Books:
1. Moran J., Shapiro N. M., Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics, Wiley, 2006

2. R. E. Sonntag and C. Borgnakke, Fundamentals of Thermodynamics, Wiley, 2009

3. Holman J. P. Thermodynamics, McGraw Hill, 2004

4. M. Achuthan, Engineering Thermodynamics, PHI, 2004

COURSE PLAN

Module Topics Hours

Allotted
Role of Thermodynamics and it’s applications in Engineering and Science – 2L
Basic Concepts Macroscopic and Microscopic viewpoints, Concept of
Continuum, Thermodynamic System and Control Volume, Surrounding,
1 Boundaries, Types of Systems, Universe
Thermodynamic properties, Process, Cycle, Thermodynamic Equilibrium, 2L
Quasi – static Process, State, Point and Path function.
Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics, Measurement of Temperature, reference 2L + 1T
Points, Temperature Scales.
Energy - Work - Pdv work and other types of work transfer, free expansion 2L + 1T
work, heat and heat capacity.
Joule’s Experiment- First law of Thermodynamics - First law applied to 2L + 1T
2 Non flow Process- Enthalpy- specific heats- PMM1
First law applied to Flow Process, Mass and Energy balance in simple 2L + 1T
steady flow process. Applications of SFEE, Limitations of first law
Second Law of Thermodynamics, Thermal Reservoir, Heat Engine, Heat 3L
pump – Kelvin-Planck and Clausius Statements, Equivalence of two
statements
Reversibility, Irreversible Process, Causes of Irreversibility, PMM2, 2L + 1T
3 Carnot’s theorem and its corollaries, Absolute Thermodynamic
Temperature scale.
Clausius Inequality, Entropy- Entropy changes in various thermodynamic 2L + 2T
processes, principle of increase of entropy and its applications, Entropy
generation, Entropy and Disorder, Reversible adiabatic process- isentropic
process, Third law of thermodynamics
Pure Substances, Phase Transformations, Triple point, properties during 3L
change of phase, T-v, p-v and p-T diagram of pure substance, p-v-T
surface,
4 Saturation pressure and Temperature, T-h and T-s diagrams, h-s diagrams 2L + 1T
or Mollier Charts, Dryness Fraction, steam tables. Property calculations
using steam tables
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
The ideal Gas Equation, Characteristic and Universal Gas constants, 2L +1T
Limitations of ideal Gas Model: Equation of state of real substances,
Compressibility factor, Law of corresponding state, Compressibility charts.
Mixtures of ideal Gases – Mole Fraction, Mass fraction, Gravimetric and 2L
volumetric Analysis, Dalton’s Law of partial pressure, Amagat’s Laws of
additive volumes, Gibbs-Dalton’s law.
Equivalent Gas constant and Molecular Weight, Properties of gas 2L +1T
5 mixtures: Internal Energy, Enthalpy, specific heats and Entropy
General Thermodynamic Relations – Combined First and Second law 2L
equations – Helmholtz and Gibb’s functions - Maxwell’s Relations
Tds Equations. The Clapeyron Equation, equations for internal energy, 2L + 1T
enthalpy and entropy, specific heats, Throttling process, Joule Thomson
Coefficient, inversion curve.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
THIRD SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code : MET284
Course Name : THERMODYNAMICS
( Permitted to use Steam Tables and Mollier Chart )
Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours
Part – A
Answer all questions.
1. Define thermodynamics. List a few of its applications

2.Differentiate between intensive and extensive properties.

3. Differentiate between heat and work.

4. Explain system approach and control volume approach as applied in the analysis of a flow process.

5. An inventor claims to have developed an engine that delivers 26 kJ of work using 82 kJ of heat
while operating between temperatures 120°C and 30°C. Is his claim valid ? Give the reason for
your answer.

6. Show that two reversible adiabatics cannot intersect

7.Define (i)critical point and (ii) triple point, with respect to water

8. Why do real gases deviate from ideal gas behaviour? When do they approach ideal behaviour?

9. Define Helmholtz function and Gibbs function and state their significance

10. State Dalton’s law and Amagat’s laws for ideal gas mixtures.

( 3 x 10 = 30 marks )

Part – B
Answer any two full questions from each module.
Module - 1
11.a] Explain macroscopic and microscopic approach to thermodynamics . ( 7 marks )

b] With the aid of a suitable diagram, explain the working of constant volume gas thermometer.
( 7 marks )

OR
12.a] What is meant by thermodynamic equilibrium ? What are the essential conditions for a system
to be in thermodynamic equilibrium ? ( 7 marks )
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
b] Express the temperature of 91⁰C in (i) Farenhiet (ii) Kelvin (iii) Rankine. ( 7 marks )

Module – 2
13.a] A mass of 2.4 kg of air at 150 kPa and 12°C is contained in a gas – tight, frictionless piston –

cylinder device. The air is now compressed to a final pressure of 600 kPa . During this process,
heat is transferred from the air such that the temperature inside the cylinder remains
constant. Calculate the work input during this process. ( 7 marks )
a] Air enters a 28 cm diameter pipe steadily at 200 kPa and 20°C with a velocity of 5m/s.
Air is heated as it flows, and leaves the pipe at 180 kPa and 40°C. Determine (i) the
volume flow rate of air at the inlet (ii) the mass flow rate of air and (iii) the velocity and
volume flow rate at the exit. ( 7 marks )

OR

14.a] A turbine operates under steady flow conditions, receiving steam at the following conditions
: pressure 1.2 MPa, temperature 188°C, enthalpy 2785 kJ/kg, velocity 33.3 m/s and elevation
3m. The steam leaves the turbine at the following conditions : pressure 20 kPa, enthalpy
25kJ/kg, velocity 100 m/s, and elevation 0 m. Heat is lost to the surroundings at the rate of
0.29 kJ/s. If the rate of steam flow through the turbine is 0.42 kg/s, what is the power output
of the turbine in kW ? ( 7 marks )
b] Derive the steady flow energy equation, stating all assumptions. ( 7 marks )

Module – 3
15.a]State the Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statements of the second law of thermodynamics and
prove their equivalence. ( 7 marks )

b]A heat engine operating between two reservoirs at 1000 K and 300 K is used to drive a heat
pump which extracts heat from the reservoir at 300 K at a rate twice that at which the engine
rejects heat to it. If the efficiency of the engine is 40 % of the maximum possible and the COP of
the heat pump is 50 % of the maximum possible, what is the temperature of the reservoir to
which the heat pump rejects heat ? What is the rate of heat rejection from the heat pump, if
the rate of heat supply to the engine is 50kW ? ( 7 marks )

OR
16.a] A house is to be maintained at 21°C during winter and at 26°C during summer. Heat leakage
through the walls, windows and roof is about 3000 kJ/hr per degree temperature difference
between the interior of the house and the environment. A reversible heat pump is proposed
for realising the desired heating and cooling. What is the minimum power required to run the
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
heat pump in the reverse, if the outside temperature during summer is 36°C? Also find the
lowest environment temperature during winter for which the inside of the house can be
maintained at 21°C consuming the same power. ( 8 marks )

b] Give the Nernst statement of the third law and explain its significance. ( 6 marks )

Module – 4
17.a]Show the constant pressure transformation of unit mass of ice at atmospheric pressure and
-20⁰C to superheated steam at 220⁰C on P-v , T-v and P-T coordinate systems and explain
their salient features . ( 8 marks )

b] Nitrogen enclosed in a piston cylinder arrangement is at a pressure of 2 bar and temperature

75°C. Calculate the specific volume of Nitrogen using ideal gas equation. What would be the
specific volume of this Nitrogen , if its compressibility factor at the prevailing condition is 0.9.
. ( 6 marks )
OR

18.a]Steam at 25 bar and 300⁰C expands isentropically to 5 bar. Calculate the change in enthalpy,
volume and temperature of unit mass of steam during this process using steam tables and
Mollier chart and compare the values ( 8 marks )

b]Explain law of corresponding states and its significance to the generalized compressibility
chart. ( 6 marks )

Module – 5
19.a] Derive the expressions for the equivalent molecular weight and characteristic gas constant for
a mixture of ideal gases. ( 6 marks )

b] 0.5 kg of Helium and 0.5 kg of Nitrogen are mixed at 20⁰C and at a total pressure of 100 kPa.
Find (i) volume of the mixture (ii) partial volumes of the components (iii) partial pressures of the
components ( iv) the specific heats of the mixture and (v) the gas constant of the mixture. Take
ratio of specific heats for Helium and Nitrogen to be 1.667 and 1.4 respectively. ( 8 marks )
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
OR
20.a] 2 kg of carbon dioxide at 38°C and 1.4 bar is mixed with 5 kg of nitrogen at 150°C and 1.03 bar
to form a mixture at a final pressure of 70 kPa. The process occurs adiabatically in a steady
flow apparatus. Calculate the final temperature of the mixture and the change in entropy
during the mixing process. Take specific heat at constant pressure for CO2 and N2 as
0.85 kJ/kgK and 1.04 kJ/kg respectively. ( 7 marks )

b]Derive the Maxwell relations. Explain their significance? ( 7 marks )

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year of
MANUFACTURING CATEGORY L T P Credits
Introduction
MET 286 TECHNOLOGY
(MINOR)
VAC 3 1 0 4 2019
Preamble:
1. To understand basic manufacturing processes of casting and welding
2. Provide a detailed discussion on the welding process and the physics of welding.
3. To understand mechanisms of material removal in LBM and EBM process
4. To introduce the different forming process of forging, extrusion and drawing.
5. To introduce the different fabrication of microelectronic devices

Prerequisite: MET 255 - Material Science & Technology (Minor)

Course Outcomes - At the end of the course students will be able to

Illustrate the basic principles of foundry practices and special casting processes, their
CO 1
advantages, limitations and applications.
CO 2 Categorize welding processes according to welding principle and material.
Understand the advantages of LBM and EBM over fusion welding process.
CO 3
An ability to understand the principles of the basic microelectronic processing
CO 4
technology.
Learn about key aspects of the microelectronics industry, from device design, to
processing, to photolithography, to manufacturing and packaging. Students will come
CO 5 out knowing the core processes of ion implantation, diffusion, oxidation, deposition,
etching, including the fundamental physical mechanisms, and the necessary
understanding for using these processes in a manufacturing environment.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirements)

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO 4 - - - 3 - - - - - - - -
CO 5 - 4 - - - - - - - - - -
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

Bloom's Test I (Marks) Test II (Marks) (Marks)
taxonomy
Remember 25 25 25
Understand 15 15 15
Apply 30 25 30
Analyze 10 10 10
Evaluate 10 15 10
Create 10 10 10

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE marks ESE marks ESE duration

150 50 100 3 Hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:

Attendance 10 marks

Regular class work/tutorials/assignments 15 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) 25 marks

End semester pattern:- There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of
which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions and carry 14 marks.
Course Level Assessment Questions
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): - Illustrate the basic principles of foundry practices and
special casting processes, their advantages, limitations and applications.
1. Explain Why casting is an important manufacturing processes
2. Name the important factors in selecting sand for molds.
3. Why does die casting produce the smallest cast parts?
4. What is the difference between sand-mold and shell mold casting?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Categorize welding processes according to welding principle and
material.
1. Describe the functions and characteristics of electrodes. What functions do coatings have? How are
electrodes classified?
2. Describe the role of filler metals in welding.
3. Explain the significance of the stiffness of the components being welded on both weld quality and
part shape.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Understand the advantages of LBM and EBM over fusion welding
process.
1. What is the power of LBM and EBM used for welding?
2. Why LBM and EBM are better quality than fusion welding?
3. What is the HAZ of LBM as compared to fusion welding process.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): An ability to understand the principles of the basic microelectronic
processing technology.
1. Why is silicon the semiconductor most used in IC technology?
2. Define selectivity and isotropy and their importance in relation to etching.
3. Explain the differences between wet and dry oxidation.
4. How is epitaxy different from other techniques used for deposition? Explain.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Learn about key aspects of the microelectronics industry, from device
design, to processing, to photolithography, to manufacturing and packaging. Students will come out
knowing the core processes of ion implantation, diffusion, oxidation, deposition, etching, including the
fundamental physical mechanisms, and the necessary understanding for using these processes in a
manufacturing environment.
1. Describe bulk and surface micromachining.
2. Lithography produces projected shapes, so true three dimensional shapes are more difficult to
produce. What lithography processes are best able to produce three-dimensional shapes, such as
lenses? Explain.
3. Explain how you would produce a spur gear if its thickness was one-tenth of its diameter and its
diameter was (a) 10 um, (b) 100 um, (c) 1 mm, (d) 10 mm, and (e) 100 mm.
SYLLABUS
Module I
Metal casting:-sand casting:- shell molding, evaporative pattern casting, investment casting, permanent
mold casting, vacuum casting, slush casting, pressure casting, die casting, centrifugal casting, squeeze
casting, semi solid metal forming, casting for single crystal, casting defects.
Module II
Powder metallurgy:-powder production methods; powder characteristics; blending, mixing;
compaction of metal powders; sintering fundamentals and mechanisms; infiltration and impregnation -
Welding: arc welding: non consumable electrodes; heat affected zone; quality; case study and weld
ability of metals.
Module III
Consumable electrodes; electron and laser beam welding; heat affected zone; power density; weld
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

quality; case study; applications - Brazing:- filler metals, fluxes, joint strength; brazing methods,
applications -Soldering:- solders and fluxes - soldering methods - solder ability, case study, typical
joint designs, applications.
Module IV
Metal forging: quality, defects -Metal extrusion: process, defects, applications - Metal drawing
process, drawing practice, defects, applications - Fabrication of microelectronic devices - crystal
growing and wafer preparation - Film deposition - oxidation - Photo lithography
Module V
Different lithography methods - Etching, wet etching, dry etching- diffusion and Ion implantation-
metallization and testing - wire bonding and packing - yield and reliability - fabrication of micro
electro mechanical devices.
Text Books
1. Serope Kalpakjian, Steven R. Schmid - Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, seventh
edition, Pearson.
Reference
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103106075/
2. Principles of Metal Casting – Hine and Rosenthal
3. Materials and Processes in Manufacturing - Paul Degarma E and Ronald A. Kosher
4. Manufacturing Technology Foundry, Forming and Welding – P. N. Rao

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

MANUFACTURING PROCESS - MET 286 Max. Marks :
100 Duration : 3 Hours
Part – A
Answer all questions.
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks
1. What are composite molds? Why are they used?
2. What are the advantages of pressure casting over other processes?
3. Describe what occurs to metal powders during sintering.
4. Explain the basic principles of arc-welding processes.
5. Are fluxes necessary in brazing? If so, why?
6. Soldering is generally applied to thinner components. Explain Why.
7. Why is control of the volume of the blank important in closed-die forging?
8. Define selectivity and isotropy and their importance in relation to etching.
9. Describe the difference between isotropic etching and anisotropic etching.
10. What is the difference between chemically reactive ion etching and dry-plasma etching?
PART -B
Answer one full question from each module.
MODULE -1
11. Explain why squeeze casting produces parts with better mechanical properties, dimensional
accuracy, and surface finish than do expendable-mold processes (14 marks).
OR
12. Explain different types of casting defeats in detail (14 marks).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE -2
13. a.Explain the difference between impregnation and infiltration. Give some applications of each
(7 marks).
b.Describe the relative advantages and limitations of cold and hot isostatic pressing
(7 marks).
OR
14. Explain the factors that contribute to the differences in properties across a welded joint (14
marks).
MODULE -3
15. a.What are the principles of (a) wave soldering and (b) reflow soldering? (7 marks).
b.It is common practice to tin-plate electrical terminals to facilitate soldering. Why is it tin that
is used? (7 marks).
OR
16. Examine various household products and describe how their components are joined and
assembled. Explain why those particular processes were used and not others (14 marks).
MODULE -4
17. a.Describe the factors involved in precision forging (7 marks).
b.Explain why cold extrusion is an important manufacturing process (7 marks).

OR
18. a.A common problem in ion implantation is channeling, in which the high-velocity ions travel
deep into the material via channels along the crystallographic planes before finally being
stopped. How could this effect be avoided? Explain (7 marks).
b.Describe your understanding of the important features of clean rooms and how they are
maintained (7 marks).
MODULE -5
19. a.List the advantages and disadvantages of surface micromachining compared with bulk
micromachining (7 marks).
b.What is the difference between chemically reactive ion etching and dry-plasma etching?
(7 marks).
OR
20. a. What is the main limitation to successful application of MEMS? (7 marks).
b. What is the purpose of a spacer layer in surface micromachining? (7 marks).
Course content and lecture schedules.
No.
Course
Module TOPIC of
outcomes
hours
Metal casting:-sand casting:- sand, types of sand mold, pattern, cores,
1.1 2 CO1
casting operations.
Shell molding, plaster and ceramic mold casting; evaporative pattern
1.2 3
casting, investment casting, CO1
Permanent mold casting, vacuum casting, slush casting, pressure casting, CO5
1.3 2
die casting,
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Centrifugal casting, squeeze casting, semi solid metal forming -

1.4 2
applications of each process. CO1
1.5 Casting for single crystal, applications of each process, casting defects. 1
Powder metallurgy:-powder production methods, atomization, reduction,
2.1 2 CO2
electrolytic deposition, carbonyls, comminution.
CO2
2.2 Powder characteristics:- particle size, shape and distribution 1
CO5
2.3 Blending, mixing and compaction of metal powders, isostatic pressing 2 CO2
2.4 Sintering: fundamentals and mechanisms - infiltration and impregnation. 1
Welding: arc welding non consumable electrodes, heat transfer in arc
CO4
2.5 welding, gas tungsten arc, plasma arc and atomic hydrogen welding; heat 3
CO5
affected zone, weld ability, weld quality, applications of each processes.
Consumable electrodes:-shielded metal, submerged, gas metal arc
3.1 welding, heat affected zone, weld ability, weld quality, applications of 3
each processes. CO4
Electron and laser beam welding, heat affected area, power density, weld
3.3 1
quality, heat affected zone, case study, applications of each processes.
Brazing:- filler metals, fluxes, joint strength; brazing methods, torch,
3.4 2 CO4
furnace, induction, resistance, dip brazing, applications of each processes.
Soldering:-types of solders and fluxes - different soldering methods -
3.5 solder ability, case study, typical joint designs, applications of each 2 CO4
processes.
Metal forging:-open die, impression die, closed die, precision die, quality,
4.1 3
defects.
Metal extrusion:-process, hot, cold, impact and hydrostatic extrusion; CO4
4.2 defects, applications - Metal drawing process- drawing practice- defects, 3
applications of each processes.
Fabrication of microelectronic devices:-clean rooms-semiconductors and
4.3 2
silicon- crystal growing and wafer preparation
CO4
4.4 Film deposition - oxidation - Photo lithography 1
5.1 electron beam lithography, X-ray, Ion beam, photo resistant lithography,
1 CO4
scattering with angular limitations projection electron beam lithography.
Etching:- wet etching:- isotropic etchants, anisotropic etching - dry
5.2 etching:-sputter, reactive plasma, physical chemical and cryogenic dry 2 CO4
etching.
Diffusion and Ion implantation- metallization and testing- Wire bonding CO4
5.3 3
and packing-yield and reliability - printed circuit boards CO5
Fabrication of micro electro-mechanical devices:-micromachining of
MEMS devices: bulk and surface micro machining, single crystal silicon
5.4 reactive etching and metallization, silicon micromachining by single step 3 CO4
plasma etching, etching combined with diffusion bonding with suitable
example and applications.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -4
HONOURS
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET292 CONTINUUM MECHANICS VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

At the end of the course the students will have a comprehensive, systematic and integrated
knowledge of the principles of continuum mechanics. They be conversant with physical laws
and analytical tools such as tensor calculus required to formulate and solve continuum
problems. Also they have an in-depth understanding of the common principles which
underlie the disciplines of solid mechanics and fluid mechanics – hitherto considered mostly
separate. The course equip the students to pursue further specialized areas of study
such as aeroelasticity, nonlinear mechanics, biomechanics etc. which are essentially based
on continuum mechanics.

Prerequisite:

MECHANICS OF SOLIDS

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Make use of the concepts of tensor formalism for practical applications

CO 2 Apply deformation and strain concepts for practical situations

CO 3 Identify stresses acting on components subjected to complex loads

CO 4 Make use of fundamental laws for problem formulations and mathematical

modeling

CO 5 Develop constitutive relations and solve 2 D elasticity problems

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO10 PO PO
1 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 2 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3
CO 4 3 2 3
CO 5 3 3 3 2 1 2 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Course Outcome 1

1. With the help of mathematical derivations obtain the relation between circulation of
a vector field per unit area around a point in a plane and curl of the vector.
2. Prove the vector identity 𝑢𝑢 × (𝑣𝑣 × 𝑤𝑤) = (𝑢𝑢. 𝑤𝑤)𝑣𝑣 − (𝑢𝑢. 𝑣𝑣)𝑤𝑤
3. Show that a) 𝛿𝛿3𝑝𝑝 𝑣𝑣𝑝𝑝 = 𝑣𝑣3 b) 𝛿𝛿3𝑖𝑖 𝐴𝐴𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗 = 𝐴𝐴𝑗𝑗3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 2

1. Discuss the physical interpretations of components of Linearized strain tensor.

2. Given the displacement components 𝑢𝑢1 = 𝑘𝑘𝑥𝑥2 2 , 𝑢𝑢2 = 0, 𝑢𝑢3 = 0, 𝑘𝑘 = 10−4 , obtain
infinitesimal strain tensor E
3. Given 𝑥𝑥1 = 𝑋𝑋1 + 2𝑋𝑋2 , 𝑥𝑥2 = 𝑋𝑋2 , 𝑥𝑥3 = 𝑋𝑋3 , obtain the right Cauchy Green
deformation tensor, right stretch tensor and rotation tensor.

Course Outcome 3

1. Given a continuum, where the stress state is known at one point and is represented
1 1 0
by the Cauchy stress tensor components �𝜎𝜎𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 � = �1 1 0�Pa, find the principal
0 0 2
stresses and principal directions.
2. The stress state at one point is represented by the Cauchy stress components
𝜎𝜎 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝒃𝒃𝜎𝜎
�𝜎𝜎𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 � = �𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝜎𝜎 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 � , where 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐 constants are and 𝜎𝜎 is the value of the
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝜎𝜎
stress. Determine the constants such that the traction vector on the octahedral
plane is zero.
3. Find the maximum principal stress, maximum shear stress and their orientations for
6 9 0
the state of stress given �𝜎𝜎𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 � = �9 −6 0� 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
0 0 3
Course Outcome 4

1. Explain Reynold’s Transport Theorem

2. Prove the symmetry of stress using principle of conservation of angular momentum.
3. Obtain the Eulerian form of continuity equation

Course Outcome 5

1. From linear elastic constitutive relation for isotropic materials, deduce the strain
1+𝜈𝜈 𝜈𝜈
stress relation 𝜀𝜀𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 𝜎𝜎𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 − 𝜎𝜎𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝛿𝛿𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸
2. Formulate the stress compatibility equation for plain strain problems in the absence
of body force.
3. Derive the stress compatibility equation for a plain stress problem with body
force. State the condition under which it becomes the biharmonic equation.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
IV SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code : MET292
Course Name : CONTINUUM MECHANICS

PART A

Each question carries three marks

1. Differentiate between vector space and inner product space.

2. Prove div (A x B) = curl A.B – curl B.A, using indicial notation.
3. Differentiate between Lagrangian and Eulerian description of fluid motion.
4. The Lagrangian coordinate of a material particle is (𝑥𝑥(𝑡𝑡), 𝑦𝑦(𝑡𝑡), 𝑧𝑧(𝑡𝑡)). Obtain the
mathematical expression for the component of acceleration along the direction
of motion of the material particle.
5. Derive an equation for octahedral shear stress in terms of the stress invariants.
5 6 7
6. The Cauchy stress tensor at a point P is given 𝜎𝜎𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = �6 8 9� GPa. Obtain the
7 9 2
deviatoric and volumetric parts of the tensor.
7. Deduce the equilibrium equations from linear momentum principle.
8. Express the local and global form of Reynold’s Transport Theorem.
9. Write down the stress strain relations of a linear elastic isotropic material.
10. Write down the radial and tangential components of stress in terms of Airy’s
stress function.

PART B
Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE 1

11 a) Evaluate using indicial notation (8)

i. 𝐮𝐮 × (𝐯𝐯 × 𝐰𝐰)
ii. (𝐮𝐮𝐮𝐮) ∶ (𝐰𝐰𝐰𝐰)
b) Expand using summation convention (6)
iii. 𝜌𝜌𝑣𝑣̇ 𝑖𝑖 = 𝜌𝜌𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖 + 𝜎𝜎𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑗𝑗
iv. 𝑒𝑒′𝑖𝑖 = 𝑄𝑄𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑒𝑒𝑚𝑚
OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

𝐴𝐴. 𝐷𝐷 𝐴𝐴. 𝐸𝐸 𝐴𝐴. 𝐹𝐹

12 a) Prove that [𝐴𝐴 𝐵𝐵 𝐶𝐶 ][𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸 𝐹𝐹 ] = �𝐵𝐵. 𝐷𝐷 𝐵𝐵. 𝐸𝐸 𝐵𝐵. 𝐹𝐹 �, from there show that
𝐶𝐶. 𝐷𝐷 𝐶𝐶. 𝐸𝐸 𝐶𝐶. 𝐹𝐹

𝛿𝛿𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝛿𝛿𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝛿𝛿𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖

𝑒𝑒𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑒𝑒𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = � 𝛿𝛿𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗 𝛿𝛿𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗 𝛿𝛿𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗 � (9)
𝛿𝛿𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝛿𝛿𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝛿𝛿𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
b) Establish the identity 𝑒𝑒𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑒𝑒𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝛿𝛿𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝛿𝛿𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗 − 𝛿𝛿𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝛿𝛿𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗 (5)

MODULE 2

13 a) Given the motion of a body 𝑥𝑥𝑖𝑖 = 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 + 0.2𝑡𝑡𝑋𝑋2 𝛿𝛿1𝑖𝑖 , for a temperature field given by
𝜃𝜃 = 2𝑥𝑥1 + (𝑥𝑥 2 )2 , find the material description of temperature and the rate of
change of temperature of a particle at time t=0 , which was at the place (0,1,0).
(8)
b) Derive compatibility equation (6)
OR

√3 1 0
14 a) Given that [𝐹𝐹] = � 0 2 0� , determine the left and right stretch tensors. (14)
0 0 1
b) Explain infinitesimal deformation theory.
c) Obtain an expression for Linearized strain.

MODULE 3

15 a) The stress matrix in MPa when refereed to axes 𝑃𝑃𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥2 𝑥𝑥3 is (14)
3 10 0
�𝜎𝜎𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 � = �−10 0 30 �
0 30 −27
Determine
i. the principal stresses
ii. principal planes
iii. maximum shear stress
iv. Octahedral normal and shear stress
OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
16 a) The principal stresses of stress at a point are 𝜎𝜎1 , 𝜎𝜎2 and 𝜎𝜎3 with 𝜎𝜎1 > 𝜎𝜎2 > 𝜎𝜎3 .
Now derive equations of the direction cosines of a plane passing through this
point, which is subjected to normal and shear stress 𝜎𝜎𝑛𝑛 and 𝜏𝜏𝑛𝑛 respectively. (6)
b) For the stress state given
12 9 0
�𝜎𝜎𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 � = � 9 −12 0� 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
0 0 6

where the Cartesian coordinate variables 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 are in meters and the unit of stress are
MPa. Determine the principal stresses and principal directions of stress at the
point 𝑋𝑋 = 𝑒𝑒1 + 2𝑒𝑒2 + 3𝑒𝑒3 . (8)

MODULE 4

17 a) Derive the differential form of conservation of energy. (4)

b) What is localization theorem? Write down its relevance in the derivation of
differential equations. (6)
c) Derive the Cauchy’s equation of motion using the conservation of linear
momentum principle (4)
OR
18 a) Prove the symmetry of stress 𝜎𝜎𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 𝜎𝜎𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗 using principle of conservation of angular
momentum. (8)
b) Obtain the Eulerian form of continuity equation. (6)

MODULE 5

19 a)Show that for an isotropic elastic medium (6)

𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸
a. 𝜆𝜆 = b) 𝜇𝜇 =
(1+𝜈𝜈)(1−2𝜈𝜈) 2(1+𝜈𝜈)
b. Determine the radial stress and tangential stress developed in a thick
cylinder of internal radius 'a' and external radius 'b' subjected internal
pressure 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 and external pressure 𝑃𝑃𝑜𝑜 using stress function method. (8)

OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
20 Consider a special stress function having the form 𝜙𝜙 = 𝐵𝐵2 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥2 + 𝐷𝐷4 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥3 . Show
that this stress function ma)'- be adapted to solve for the stresses in an end-
loaded cantilever beam as shown in the sketch. Assume the body forces are zero
for this problem. (14)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS
Module 1

Mathematical preliminaries - Index notation, Einstein’s summation convention- Kronecker

delta and Levi-Civita symbols, Cartesian basis- Concept of tensor- Tensor as a linear
transformation - Vector as a first order tensor- Coordinate transformation of vectors and
tensors.

Principal values, trace and invariants-Gradient, divergence and curl of vector and tensor
fields- Vector identities-Gauss’ divergence and Stokes’ theorems.

Module 2

Concept of continua- Reference and current configuration- Deformation gradient tensor-

Lagrangian and Eulerian description of motion.

Polar decomposition theorem- Right and left Cauchy Green tensors- Infinitesimal
deformation theory- Linearized strain- Principal strains- Saint Venant’s compatibility
equations

Module 3

Traction- Cauchy stress tensor- Stress component along orthonormal basis vector-
Components of Cauchy stress tensor on any plane.

Principal planes- Principal stress components- Normal and shear stresses- Stress
transformation- Equilibrium equations

Module 4

Balance Laws - Reynold’s transportation theorem- Localization theorem- Lagrangian and

Eulerian forms of equation for mass balance.

Balance of linear momentum equation- Balance of angular momentum- Symmetry of stress

tensor- Balance of energy

Module 5

Constitutive relations - Generalized Hooke’s law for isotropic materials in indicial and matrix
forms- Relation connecting Lame’s constants with Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio and Bulk
modulus.

2D formulation of field equations; Airy’s stress function- Biharmonic equation-Uni axial

tension and pure bending of a beam; End loaded cantilever- Polar coordinates-
Axisymmetric formulation- Lame’s thick cylinder problem- Quarter circle cantilevered beam
with radial load.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. G. Thomas Mase, George E. Mase.. Ronald E. Smelser. Continuum mechanics for

engineers 3rd ed CRC Press
2. . Lawrence E. Malvern. Introduction to the Mechanics of a Continuous Medium –
Prentice Hall
Reference Books

1. J.H. Heinbockel, Introduction to Tensor Calculus and Continuum Mechanics – Open

Source
2. W. Michael Lai, David Ribin, Erhard Kaempl, Introduction to Continuum Mechanics
4th Ed., Butterworth- Heinemann
3. J. N. Reddy, An Introduction to Continuum Mechanics with applications - Cambridge
University Press
4. Y. C. Fung, A First Course in Continuum Mechanics for Physical and Biological
Engineers and scientists - Prentice Hall
5. Han-Chin W, Continuum mechanics and plasticity - CRC Press
6. Sudhakar Nair, Introduction to Continuum Mechanics – Cambridge University press
7. Morton E. Gurtin, An introduction to continuum mechanics, Academic Press
8. S.P. Timoshenko, J.N. Goodier, Theory of Elasticity, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill
Publishing

COURSE CONTENTS AND LECTURE SCHEDULE

Sl. No. Topic Number of
lecture hours

1 Index notation, Einstein’s summation convention- Kronecker 2

delta and Levi-Civita symbols

2 Cartesian basis- Concept of tensor- Tensor as a linear 1

transformation - Vector as a first order tensor

3 Coordinate transformation of vectors and tensors. 2

4 Principal values, trace and invariants 2

5 Gradient, divergence and curl of vector and tensor fields 2

6 Vector identities-Gauss’ divergence and Stokes’ theorems. 1

7 Concept of continua- Reference and current configuration, 2

Lagrangian and Eulerian description of motion

8 Deformation gradient tensor, Right and left Cauchy Green 2

tensors
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
9 Infinitesimal deformation theory- Linearized strain 2

10 Principal strains 1

11 Polar decomposition theorem 1

12 Saint Venant’s compatibility equations 1

13 Traction- Cauchy stress tensor- Stress component along 2

orthonormal basis vector

14 Components of Cauchy stress tensor on any plane., Normal and 2

shear stresses

15 Principal planes- Principal stress components 2

16 Stress transformation 2

17 Reynold’s transportation theorem- Localization theorem, 1

Introduction on Balance Laws

18 Lagrangian and Eulerian forms of equation for mass balance. 1

19 Balance of linear momentum, equilibrium equations 1

20 Balance of angular momentum, Symmetry of stress tensor 1

21 Balance of energy 1

22 Constitutive relations - Generalized Hooke’s law for isotropic 1

materials in indicial and matrix forms

23 Relation connecting Lame’s constants with Young’s modulus, 1

Poisson’s ratio and Bulk modulus.

24 2D formulation of field equations; Airy’s stress function; 4

Biharmonic equation

25 Uni axial tension and pure bending of a beam; End loaded 1

cantilever

26 Polar coordinates; Axisymmetric formulation 2

27 Lame’s thick cylinder problem 2

28 Quarter circle cantilevered beam with radial load. 2

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET294 ADVANCED MECHANICS OF FLUIDS VAC 3 1 0 4
Preamble:

This course is a survey of principal concepts and methods of fluid dynamics. Topics include
conservation equations, exact solutions of Navier-Stokes Equations, potential flow solutions,
Boundary layers; introduction to turbulence and turbulence modelling

Prerequisite:

MET 203- Mechanics of Fluids

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply conservation equations of fluid mechanics

CO 2 Use potential flow theory in fluid problems
CO 3 Utilize approximate solutions of the Navier-Stokes equations
CO 4 Compute effect on boundary layers.
CO 5 Explain turbulence and turbulence modelling

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3 2 1
CO 3 3 2 1 1
CO 4 3 2 1
CO 5 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Blooms Category CA ESA

Assignment Test - 1 Test - 2

Remember 25 20 20 10

Understand 25 40 40 20

Apply 25 40 40 70

Analyse 25

Evaluate

Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks

Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

Mark distribution & Duration of Examination :

Total Marks CA ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 Hours

End semester pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 1

1. What is the significance of RTT in the study of transport phenomena.

2. Explain the relationship between the stress tensor and the rate of deformation.

3. Derive the expression for the Navier-Stokes equation and explain the different terms in-
volved.

Course Outcome 2

1. Derive the expression for stream function and potential function of a doublet using the
potential flow theory.

2. Derive the expression for lift for flow past a cylinder with circulation.

3. What is the significance of conformal mapping?

Course Outcome 3

1. Derive the expression for the pressure gradient for Couette flow.

2. Explain the working of a Viscometer based on the flow through a rotating annulus.

3. What is Stokes’ first problem?

Course Outcome 4

1. Explain the development of boundary layer along a thin flat plate held parallel to a uniform
flow. Point out the salient features.

2. Discuss on the effect of pressure gradient on boundary layer separation.

3. Find the thickness of the boundary layer at the trailing edge of a smooth plate of length
5 m and width 1.2 m when the plate is moving at 5 m/s in stationary air. Take the
kinematic viscosity of air as 0.11 stokes.

Course Outcome 5

1. What are the semi-empirical theories associated with turbulent flow?

2. Explain the two equation models used in turbulent flow.

3. Distinguish between DNS and LES.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1: Concept of viscosity, stress tensor, relation between stress and rate of
deformation, Stokes hypothesis, Reynolds Transport Theorem, Mass, Momentum and Energy
conservation, Derivation of Navier-Stokes equations.

Module 2: Potential flow: Uniform flow, source flow, sink flow, free vortex flow and super
imposed flow-source and sink pair, doublet, plane source in a uniform flow(flow past a half
body), source and sink pair in a uniform flow(flow past a Rankine oval body), doublet in a
uniform flow(flow past a circular cylinder). Pressure distribution on the surface of the
cylinder. Flow past a cylinder with circulation, Kutta-Juokowsky’s law. Complex flow
potential, complex flow potentials for source, sink, vortex and doublet. Potential flow
between two parallel plates, potential flow in a sector. Introduction to conformal
transformation, conformal mapping.

Module 3: Exact Solutions of Navier Stokes Equations. Parallel flow through straight
channel and couette flow. Couette flow for negative, zero and positive pressure gradients,
flow in a rotating annulus, Viscometer based on rotating annulus. Flow at a wall suddenly set
to motion (Stokes first problem)

Module 4: Boundary layer equations; Boundary layer on a flat plate, Prandtl boundary layer
equations, Blasius solution for flow over a flat plate, Von- Karman momentum integral
equations, Pohlhausen approximation solution of boundary layer for non-zero pressure
gradient flow, favorable and adverse pressure gradients, flow separation and vortex shedding.
Boundary layer control.

Module 5: Introduction Statistical approach to turbulent flows, Length and time scales and
Kolomogrov’s energy cascading theory Reynolds averaged Navier Stokes equations,
Turbulence modeling. Concept of eddy viscosity and Prandtl’s mixing length hypothesis
Zero, one and two equation turbulence models and Reynold’s stress models. Concepts of LES
and DNS.

Text Books
(1) White, F. M. Viscous Fluid Flow, McGraw Hill Education; 3 edition, 2017
(2) Schlichting, H. Boundary layer theory. McGraw Hill Education; 7 edition, 2014
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE PLAN

Module Topics Hours

Allotted

I Concept of viscosity, stress tensor, relation between stress and rate of 6-2-0
deformation, Stokes hypothesis, Reynolds Transport Theorem, Mass,
Momentum and Energy conservation, Derivation of Navier-Stokes equations.

II Potential flow: Uniform flow, source flow, sink flow, free vortex flow and 7-2-0
super imposed flow-source and sink pair, doublet, plane source in a uniform
flow(flow past a half body), source and sink pair in a uniform flow(flow past a
Rankine oval body), doublet in a uniform flow(flow past a circular cylinder).
Pressure distribution on the surface of the cylinder. Flow past a cylinder with
circulation, Kutta-Juokowsky’s law. Complex flow potential, complex flow
potentials for source, sink, vortex and doublet. Potential flow between two
parallel plates, potential flow in a sector. Introduction to conformal
transformation, conformal mapping.

III Exact Solutions of Navier Stokes Equations. Parallel flow through straight 6-2-0
channel and couette flow. Couette flow for negative, zero and positive
pressure gradients, flow in a rotating annulus, Viscometer based on rotating
annulus. Flow at a wall suddenly set to motion (Stokes first problem)

IV Boundary layer equations; Boundary layer on a flat plate, Prandtl boundary 8-3-0
layer equations, Blasius solution for flow over a flat plate, Von- Karman
momentum integral equations, Pohlhausen approximation solution of
boundary layer for non-zero pressure gradient flow, favorable and adverse
pressure gradients, flow separation and vortex shedding. Boundary layer
control.

V Introduction Statistical approach to turbulent flows, Length and time scales 7-2-0
and Kolomogrov’s energy cascading theory Reynolds averaged Navier Stokes
equations, Turbulence modeling. Concept of eddy viscosity and Prandtl’s
mixing length hypothesis Zero, one and two equation turbulence models and
Reynold’s stress models. Concepts of LES and DNS.
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
IV SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET294 ADVANCED MECHANICS OF FLUIDS
Mechanical Engineering

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. What is Stokes hypothesis?

2. What is the importance of RTT in the study of transport phenomena?

3. What are the different elementary flows used in potential flow theory?

4. Draw the stream-lines and potential lines for a doublet in a uniform flow and mark the
different regions.

5. With a neat sketch explain the Stokes first problem.

6. Draw the velocity profile in Couette flow for negative, zero and positive pressure gradients.

7. With a neat sketch explain the different regions of boundary layer flow over a flat plat

8. What are the different methods employed in controlling the boundary layer separation?

9. Explain Prandtl’s Mixing length theory.

10. What is the importance of Turbulence Modeling in fluid dynamics?

(10×3=30 Marks)
 PART B
Answer one full question from each moduleMECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE-I

11. (a) Derive Reynolds Transport Theorem. (7 Marks)

(b) Derive the expression for the law of conservation of mass from RTT. (7 Marks)

12. (a) Derive Navier-Stokes equations in Cartesian coordinate system. (10 Marks)
(b) Write the expanded form of Navier-Stokes equations in Cartesian coordinate system.
(4 Marks)

MODULE-II

13. (a) Explain uniform flow with source and sink. Obtain an expression for stream and
velocity potential function and show their approximate distribution. (7 Marks)
(b) A uniform flow with a velocity of 2m/s is flowing over a source placed at the origin.
The stagnation point occurs at (−0.398, 0). Determine: (i) Strength of the source,
(ii) Maximum width of Rankine half-body and (iii) Other principal dimensions of
the Rankine half-body. (7 Marks)

14. (a) A uniform flow with a velocity of 3m/s is flowing over a plane source of strength
30m2 /s. The uniform flow and source flow are in the same plane. A point P is
situated in the flow field. The distance of the point P from the source is 0.5m and
it is at an angle of 30◦ to the uniform flow. Determine: (i) stream function at point
P (ii) resultant velocity of flow at P and (iii) location of stagnation point from the
source.hfill (10 Marks)
(b) Describe the following terms: i)Complex flow potential ii) Conformal mapping(4 Marks)

MODULE-III

15. (a) An oil of viscosity 18 poise flows between two horizontal fixed parallel plates which
are kept 150mm apart. The maximum velocity of flow is 1.5m/s. Find:
i. The pressure gradient
ii. The shear stress at the two horizontal parallel plates
iii. The discharge per unit width for laminar flow of oil.
(7 Marks)
(b) Explain the significance of Navier-Stokes equation in viscous fluid flow. Derive the
expression for flow in a rotating annulus from the Navier-Stokes Equation. (7 Marks)

16. (a) Derive the expression for pressure gradient in the parallel flow through a straight
channel. (7 Marks)
(b) Explain the working of a Viscometer based on the flow through a rotating annulus.
(7 Marks)

MODULE-IV
17. (a) Explain the essential features of Blasius method of solving laminar boundary layer
equations for a flat plate. Derive an expression for boundary layer thickness
MECHANICAL from
ENGINEERING
this solution. (7 Marks)
(b) For the velocity profile for laminar boundary layer flows given as
u
= 2(y/δ) − (y/δ)2
U
find an expression for boundary layer thickness ( δ ), shear stress ( τ0 ) and co-efficient
of drag (CD ) in terms of Reynold number. (7 Marks)

18. (a) For the velocity profile in laminar boundary layer as,
u 3  y  1  y 3
= −
U 2 δ 2 δ
find the thickness of the boundary layer and the shear stress 1.5 m from the leading
edge of a plate. The plate is 2m long and 1.4m wide and is placed in water which is
moving with a velocity of 200mm per second. Find the total drag force on the plate
if µ for water = .01 poise. (7 Marks)
(b) Derive Von Karman momentum integral equation for boundary layer flows.(7 Marks)

MODULE-V

19. (a) Explain and differentiate DNS and LES. (7 Marks)

(b) What is the difference between zero equation, one equation and two equation models
in turbulent flow? (7 Marks)

20. (a) Explain in detail any one of the two equation models. (7 Marks)
(b) Explain Kolmogrovs energy cascade theory. (7 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year of
MATERIALS IN CATEGORY L T P Credits
Introduction
MET 296 MANUFACTURING
(HONORS)
VAC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: Understanding of the correlation between the chemical bonds and crystal structure of
metallic materials to their mechanical properties.
Recognize the importance of deformation of metals at high temperature.
Enrich knowledge of various behavior and property changes inside the material structure in
raised temperature and methods to strengthening the material.
Provide in-depth proficiency in material science and engineering fields for elevated temperature
applications.

Prerequisite: MET 202 - Metallurgy and Material Science

Course Outcomes - At the end of the course students will be able to

Understand the chemical bonds, crystal structures and their relationship with the
CO 1
properties.

CO 2 Correlate structure and properties relationship for high temperature applications.

Understand the attributes and purity obtainable through triple vacuum induction melting
CO 3
process.

To have knowledge in improving material strength against high temperature

CO 4
environment and predict life time.

CO 5 Understand the properties of super alloys and its strengthening processes.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirements)

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 - 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 - - - 3 - - - - - - - -
CO 4 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 - - - - - - - - - - - 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

Bloom's (Marks)
Test 1 (Marks) Test 11 (Marks)
taxonomy
Remember 25 25 25
Understand 15 15 15
Apply 30 25 30
Analyze 10 10 10
Evaluate 10 15 10
Create 10 10 10

Mark distribution

Total
CIE marks ESE marks ESE duration
Marks

150 50 100 3 Hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:

Attendance 10 marks

Regular class work/tutorials/assignments 15 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) 25 marks

End semester pattern:- There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of
which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions and carry 14 marks.
Course Level Assessment Questions
Part -A
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the chemical bonds, crystal structures and their
relationship with the properties.
1. Why electrons of higher principal quantum number form weaker bonds.
2. Postulate why ionic and covalent bonded material exhibit bad conductors of heat and
electricity?
3. What are the roles of surface imperfections on crack initiation.
4. Which mechanism of strengthening is the Hall- Petch equation related to?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Correlate structure and properties relationship for high temperature
applications.
1. Nickel has an atomic weight of 58.71, a number which arises from the relative proportions of
isotopes of weights 58, 60, 61, 62 and 64. Why is there little contribution from the isotopes of
weight 59 and 63?
2. Comparison of the rates of interdiffusion of the transition group metals (the solutes) with nickel
(the solvent) indicates that (i) the interdiffusion rate increases with increasing misfit strain between
solvent and solute and (ii) the activation energy for interdiffusion decreases with increasing misfit
strain. Why might these observations be contrary to expectation? How might this apparent
anomaly be rationalised?
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Understand the attributes and purity level obtainable through triple
vacuum induction melting process.
1. What is the need of vacuum for obtaining purifying metals?
2. What are conditions for freckle formation and how can be eliminated?
3. Explain the need of electrode quality in ESR and VAR process?
4. Which are the factors governs the quality of vacuum arc remelting process.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): To have knowledge in improving material strength against high
temperature environment and predict life time.
1. Explain why it might not be sensible, even for single-crystal superalloys, to eliminate completely
the grain-boundary strengtheners such as carbon and boron from the melt chemistry.
2. The rate of oxide formation in Al2O3 forming single-crystal superalloys is greatly increased with
additions of Ti to the alloy chemistry. Explain why this effect occurs.
3. Non-conductive material will you recommend to use at high temperature explain?
4. Both titanium and steel melt at temperatures in excess of 1500 C. Steel can be used at temperatures
as high as 1000C but titanium cannot. Why is this?
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand the properties of super alloys and its strengthening
processes.
1. The following defects can occur during the casting of single-crystal components:(i) high-angle
grain boundaries, (ii) freckles and (iii) spurious grains. What is meant by these terms? Give a brief
explanation of the origin of each effect.
2. Suggest a high electrical conductive material which can use at 1100C.
3. Give two reasons why the use of titanium alloys is increasing at the expense of aluminum in both
civil and military aircraft.
SYLLABUS
MODULE - 1
Atomic structure- chemical bonds-crystallography-miller indices - slip - dislocation - crystallization-
frank-reed source - Structural parameters in high-temperature deformed metals - dislocation structure -
distances between dislocations in sub-boundaries - sub-boundaries as dislocation sources and obstacles
-dislocations inside sub-grains - vacancy loops and helicoids - structural peculiarities of high -
temperature deformation.
MODULE - II
Characteristics of high-temperature materials - The super alloys as high-temperature materials- The
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

requirement: the gas turbine engine- Larson–Miller approach for the ranking of creep performance-
development of the super alloys- Nickel as a high-temperature material: justification- super alloy
production methods:- vacuum induction melting (VIM), vacuum arc remelting (VAR), VIM,
electroslag remelting (ESR),VIM, ESR, VAR- Freckles, three rings, white spot- cleanliness.
MODULE - III
Superalloys:- metallurgy, characteristics - wrought, cast superalloys, properties -crystal structures,
phases in superalloys, Iron-Nickel-base superalloys, Nickel-base superalloys, Cobalt-base superalloys,
- elements causing brittle phase formation, detrimental tramp elements, elements producing oxidation
and hot corrosion resistance- microstructure, gamma prime, gamma double prime, Carbide and Boride
phases, strengthening mechanisms- Heat treatment.
MODULE - IV
Single-crystal super alloys for blade applications:- solidification, heat transfer, defects - mechanical
behavior, performance in creep, fatigue -Titanium: binary phase diagram - production of ingot -
forgings - shear bands - pickling - Ti alloys - machining and welding of Titanium - Heat Treatment -
properties of titanium aluminides - Niobium: production of niobium - niobium in steel making –
niobium alloys characteristics and applications- Niobium products for the superalloy industry.
MODULE - V
Molybdenum: Ferromolybdenum - production of molybdenum – properties - effect of molybdenum
alloying– applications - TZM, TZC- Maraging steel:- reaction in austenite - austenite to martensite
transformation- reaction in martensite - time of maraging - precipitate size - fracture toughness -
welding and ageing attributes - superior features - applications - cobalt free maraging steel -
intermetallics:- phase diagrams- Hume-Rothery phases- structures of MgCu2, MgZn2, MgNi2.
Text Books
1. Callister William. D., Material Science and Engineering, John Wiley, 2014

2. Matthew J. Donachie, Stephen J. Donachie, Super alloys A Technical Guide, Second Edition, 2002
ASM International.
Reference
1. Barrett, C. S. and Massalski, T. B. Structure of metals, Third edition. New York, N.Y.,
McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1966.
2. Decker, Raymond Frank, Source book on maraging steels: A comprehensive collection of
outstanding articles from the periodical and reference literature, Published by American
Society for Metals (1979).
3. Gerd Lutjering James C.Williams, Titanium, springer.

4. Roger C. Reed, The Super alloys Fundamentals and Applications, Cambridge university press.
5. Valim Levitin - High temperature strain of metals and alloys - physical fundamentals, Wiley-
VCH (2006).
6. https://www.phase-trans.msm.cam.ac.uk/teaching.html
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

MATERIALS IN MANUFACTURING - (HONORS) - MET -296

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours
Part – A
Answer all questions.
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks
1. NASA's Parker solar probe will be the first-ever mission to "Touch" the Sun. The spacecraft, about the
size of a small car, will travel directly into the Sun's atmosphere about 4 million miles from the earth
surface. Postulate the coolant used in the parker solar probe with chemical bonds.
2. Explain the structural parameters in time and creep curve for Nickel.
3. Explain the characteristics required for high-temperature materials
4. Explain the ways and means to improve super alloy cleanliness
5. What are the elements causing brittle phase formation in super alloys.
6. Explain the process and need of stress relieving used for super alloys
7. The preferred growth direction of a single-crystal superalloy is (100) Why?
8. Where is hundred percentage pure Titanium is used?
9. What are the special attributes of marging steel welded joint after ageing process?
10. How the structure of intermetallics are determined ?
PART -B
Answer one full question from each module.
MODULE -1
11. a. Explain the basic mechanism involved for metal deformation (7 marks).
b. Explain process involved in high temperature strain of metals and alloys (7 marks).
OR
12. What are the roles played by the fan, compressor, combustor and turbine arrangements in a typical gas
turbine engine? How do these affect (i) the pressure and (ii) the average temperature of the gas stream?
Explain why your findings justify the use of nickel based superalloys in the combustor and turbine
sections, but not in the compressor regions (14 marks).
MODULE -2
13. Explain the justification for the development of super alloys as high temperature alloys (14 marks).
OR
14. Explain the conditions of freckles, three rings and white spots formation and its implications
(14 marks).
MODULE -3
15.Explain with neat sketches of different strengthening mechanisms of super alloys with its
microstructure (14 marks).
OR
16.Explain different types of heat treatments employed for super alloys (14 marks).
MODULE -4
17. The materials used for high-pressure turbine blade aerofoils are often referred to as single-crystal
superalloys. Explain why the use of the term ‘single-crystal’ is disingenuous (14 marks).
OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

18. Explain the process of closed die forging for Titanium alloy manufacturing (14 marks).
MODULE -5
19a. Explain the different reaction in austenite in maraging steel (7 marks).
19b. Explain the Maraging steel hardness produced with aging time versus aging time and different
temperatures with neat sketches (7 marks).
OR
20a. Explain the synergetic effect of cobalt and molybdenum in maraging steel with graphs and sketch
(7 marks).
20b. Explain structures of MgCu2, MgZn2, MgNi2 with neat sketches (7 marks).
Course content and lecture schedules.
No.
Course
Module TOPIC of
outcomes
hours
Earlier and present development of atomic structure- Primary bonds:
1.1 Secondary bonds - crystallography-miller indices- slip- crystallization - 1 CO1
frank reed source
Structural parameters in high-temperature deformed metals: structural
1.2 2 CO1
parameters.
Dislocation structure - distances between dislocations in sub-boundaries -
1.3 3
sub-boundaries as dislocation sources and obstacles.
CO1
Dislocations inside sub-grains - vacancy loops and helicoids - structural
1.4 3
peculiarities of high-temperature deformation (levitin).
Characteristics of high-temperature materials - The superalloys as high-
2.1
temperature materials. CO1
3
The requirement: the gas turbine engine- Larson–Miller approach for the CO2
2.2
ranking of creep performance

Development of the super alloys- Nickel as a high-temperature material:

2.3 2 CO2
justification. (Reed).
Super alloy production methods:- melt routes for super alloys,
characteristics, process parameters, application of each process Vacuum CO2
2.4 3
induction melting (VIM), Vacuum arc remelting (VAR), VIM, electroslag CO3
remelting (ESR),VIM, ESR, VAR.
Freckles, conditions of freckles, three rings, white spot- Super alloy
cleanliness: ways and means to improve super alloy cleanliness,
2.5 2 CO3
advantages of improved cleanliness, homogenization oxide cleanliness.
(ASM).
Superalloys:- metallurgy of superalloys, superalloy characteristics -
3.1 1 CO2
applications - service temperatures for superalloys.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Wrought superalloys, cast superalloys, properties of superalloys,

3.2 mechanical properties and the application of superalloys, selecting 1 CO2
superalloys.
Crystal structures, phases in superalloys, Iron-Nickel-base superalloys,
Nickel-base superalloys, Cobalt-base superalloys, alloy elements and
3.3 microstructural effects in superalloys, elements causing brittle phase 3 CO2
formation, detrimental tramp elements, elements producing oxidation and
hot corrosion resistance.
Microstructure, gamma prime, gamma double prime, Carbide and Boride
phases, strengthening mechanisms: precipitate, gamma prime, gamma 3
3.4 CO5
double prime, Carbides, M7C3 Carbides, Borides and other beneficial
minor elements.
Heat treatment types:- stress relieving, annealing, quenching,
3.5 1 CO2
precipitation, (ASM).
Single-crystal super alloys for blade applications:- directional
solidification, heat transfer, formation of defects during directional
4.1 3 CO4
solidification - mechanical behavior of the single-crystal super alloys,
performance in creep, performance in fatigue (Reed).
Titanium: Ti-based binary phase diagram - production of ingot, Vacuum
Arc Remelting - effect of forging temperature and forging pressure - CO2
4.2 closed die forgings - shear bands - pickling of titanium - Ti alloys - scrap 4
recycling -problems in machining Titanium - welding of titanium - Heat CO5
Treatment of Ti - properties of titanium aluminides - applications.
Niobium: Production of niobium - niobium alloys - niobium in steel
4.3 making – niobium alloys characteristics and applications- Niobium 2 CO2
products for the superalloy industry.
Molybdenum: Ferromolybdenum - production of molybdenum –
5.1 properties - effect of molybdenum alloying on hot strength, corrosion 2 CO2
resistance, and toughness – applications - TZM, TZC.
Maraging steel:- Maraging steel chronology - reaction in austenite -
austenite to martensite transformation- reaction in martensite - time of CO2
5.2 maraging - precipitate size - fracture toughness - welding and ageing 4
attributes - superior features - applications - cobalt free maraging steel and CO4
comparisons.
Intermetallics:- Electronegativity, characteristics, property prediction -
phase diagrams:- Magnesium - Lead, Copper – Zinc, Nickel -Titanium CO2
5.3 phase diagram - - The Hume-Rothery phases, electron phases 3
/compounds, laves phases - Strukturbericht C15, C14, C36, etc - CO4
structures of MgCu2, MgZn2, MgNi2.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER V
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET301 MECHANICS OF MACHINERY PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

This course aims to introduce the students to the fundamentals of the kinematics of
various mechanisms and also its analysis for its displacement, velocity, and acceleration.
The course will also cover the design of cams, theory and analysis of gears, gear trains and
synthesis of mechanisms. The static force analysis of planar mechanisms and concept
of gyroscopic couple along with its effect has also been included. This course also
aids students in estimating unbalance in rotating and reciprocating masses and
suggesting methods to overcome it.

Prerequisite: Engineering Mechanics (EST 100)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the fundamentals of kinematics, various planar mechanisms and interpret the
basic principles of mechanisms and machines

CO 2 Perform analysis and synthesis of mechanisms

CO 3 Solve the problem on cams and gear drives, including selection depending on
requirement.

CO 4 Calculate the gyroscopic effect in various situations

CO 5 Analyse rotating and reciprocating masses for its unbalance

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
CO 1 2

CO 2 3 3 3 2 2

CO 3 3 3 2 2 2

CO 4 3 2 1 1 1

CO 5 3 2 2 1 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the fundamentals of kinematics, various planar

mechanisms and their components

1. Define the terms Link, Kinematic chain, Mechanism & Machine.

2. Explain Grashof’s law.

3 Apply Kutzbach criterion to find the mobility of mechanisms.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
4.Sketch and explain the various inversions of slider crank chain/fourbar chain

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Perform analysis and synthesis of mechanisms

1. Find out the velocity and acceleration of links of various planar mechanisms

2. State and prove the Arnold Kennedy’s three centre theorem

2. Derive an expression for the magnitude and direction of Coriolis component of

acceleration

3. Design a four bar mechanism to generate a given function accurate upto 3 positions

4. Do the static force analysis of four bar/slider crank mechanisms with different loading

conditions

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Solve the problem on cams and gear drives, including selection
depending on requirement

1. Why is a roller follower preferred over knife edge follower

2. Design a cam profile to suit the situations for the follower such as SHM, dwell, constant
velocity, uniform acceleration cycloidal motion etc

3. What do you understand by the term “interference” as applied to gears

4. Find out the gear train values of simple ,compound and epicyclic gear trains

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Calculate the gyroscopic effect in various situations

1. What do you understand by Gyroscopic couple? Derive its formula for its magnitude.

2. Explain the effect of the gyroscopic couple on the reaction of the four wheels of a vehicle
negotiating a curve.

3. Describe the working of a gyroscope.

4. How does gyroscopes help in guidance?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Analyse rotating and reciprocating masses for its unbalance

1. Distinguish between static balancing and dynamic balancing

2. Find out the magnitude and position of balancing masses required to balance unbalanced
masses rotating in different planes.

3. What do you mean by primary and secondary unbalanced forces?

4. Find out the value of unbalanced primary force, primary couple, secondary force and
secondary couple.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code: MET301

Course Name: MECHANICS OF MACHINERY

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Find out the degree of freedom in the following cases.

2. Describe the motion of the following items as pure rotation, pure translation or
complex planar motion.
a) The hand of a clock b) The pen in an XY plotter c) connecting rod of an IC engine
3. A rod of length 1m with its one end fixed at origin is oriented in the positive X
direction. It rotates in the XY plane with an angular velocity of 10rad/s
clockwise direction and angular acceleration of 10rad/s 2 in the counter clock
wise direction at a particular instant. Find out the total acceleration experienced
at the free end.

4. Obtain the expression for velocity when the cam follower motion is cycloidal in nature.
5. How do we bring interchangeability of gears?
6. What do you mean by type synthesis?
7. Define the term ‘friction circle’
8. How does a gyroscope help in guidance of aircrafts?
9. Does a rotor which is statically balanced require dynamic balancing?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
10. Why do we go for partial balancing in the case of balancing of reciprocating masses?

Part B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – I

11. a) Draw the inversions of the mechanism shown in Figure 1 which leads to double
crank, double rocker and crank rocker mechanisms. Describe the nature of motion of
each link in each case also (9 marks)

Figure-1
b) What are binary, ternary and quaternary links? (5 marks)

12. In the figure 2 given below the angular velocity of the crank OA is 600 r.p.m.
Determine the linear velocity of the slider and angular velocity of all other links. The
dimensions of various links are: OA=28 mm; AB = 44 mm; BC = 49 mm and BD = 46
mm. The centre distance between centres of rotation O and C is 65mm.The path of
travel of slider is 11 mm below the fixed-point C (14 marks)

Figure-2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE – II

13. a) What is meant by Coriolis component of acceleration. In which case does it occur?
How is its direction determined? (9 marks)
b) A link OB rotating with a constant angular velocity of 2 rad/s in the counter
clockwise direction and a block is sliding radially outwards on it with a uniform
velocity of 0.75 m/s with respect to the rod as shown in the figure 3 below. Given OA
=1 m and link OB is inclined to the positive X axis by 45°.Find out the absolute
acceleration of block at A in magnitude and direction. (5 marks)

Figure-3

14. A cam rotating at 150 rpm operates a reciprocating follower of radius 2.5 cm. The
follower axis is offset by 2.5 cm to the right. The least radius of the cam is 5 cm and
the stroke of the follower is 5 cm. ascent and descent with take place by uniform
acceleration and retardation. Ascent take place during 75° and descent during 90° of
cam rotation. Dwell between ascent and descent is 60°. Draw the cam profile. Also
sketch velocity and acceleration diagrams and mark salient values. (14 marks)

MODULE – III

15. In an epicyclic gear train as shown in Figure 4 the internal wheels A and B and the
compound wheels C & D rotate independently about axis O. The wheels E and F
rotate on pins fixed to the arm G.E gears with A and C and F gears with B and D. All
wheels have the same module and the number of teeth are:
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Tc = 28, TD = 26, TE = TF = 18
i) Sketch the arrangement
ii) Find the number of teeth on A and B
iii) If the arm G makes 100 r.p.m clockwise and A is fixed, find the speed B
iv) If the arm G makes 100 r.p.m clockwise and wheel A makes 10 r.p.m counter
clockwise, find the speed of wheel B (14 marks)

Figure-4

16. a) Design a four bar crank rocker to give 45° of rocker motion with a time ratio of
1:1.25 with 45° output rocker motion. (9 marks)
b) Design a slider crank mechanism to coordinate two positions of the input link and
the slider for the following angular and linear displacement of the input link and
slider respectively.

θ12 = 30° & S12 = 100 mm (5 marks)

MODULE – IV

17. The applied load on the piston of an offset slider-crank linkage shown in Fig. is 100 N,
and the coefficient of friction between the slider and the guide is 0.27, using any
method ,determine the magnitude and sense of torque T2 applied on OA for the static
equilibrium of the linkage. (14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Figure-5

18 a) The wheels of a motor cycle have a moment of inertia of 5 kg m and the engine parts, a
2

moment of inertia of 0.35 kgm2. The wheel axles and the crank shaft of the engine are all
parallel to each other. If the ratio of reduction gears is 4:1, the wheel diameter is 700 mm,
determine the magnitude and direction of the gyroscopic couple when the motor cycle
negotiates a curve of 50 m radius at a speed of 50 km/hr. If the mass of the motor cycle
with rider is 250 kg with centre of gravity at 65 cm above the ground in vertical position,
determine the speed of the motor cycle rounding a curve of 60 m if the road condition
permits an angle of heel of 45°. (10 marks)

b) Explain spin vector, precession vector, gyroscopic applied torque vector and gyroscopic
reactive torque vector. (4 marks)

MODULE – V

19. A shaft carries four masses A, B, C and D which are placed in parallel planes
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. Th unbalanced masses at planes B and C are 3.6 kg
and 2.6kg respectively and both are assumed to be concentrated at a radius of 25mm while
the masses in planed A and D are both at a radius of 40mm.The angle between the planes B
and C is 100° and that between B and A is 190°, both angles being measured in counter clock
wise direction from the plane B .The planes containing A and B are 250mm apart and those
containing B and C are 500mm.If the shaft is to be completely balanced ,determine

i) Masses at the planes A and D

ii) the distance between the planes C and D

iii) the angular position of the mass D (14 marks)

20. A five cylinder in-line engine running at 750 r.p.m. has successive cranks 144° apart, the
distance between the cylinder centre lines being 375 mm. The piston stroke is 225mm and the
ratio of the connecting rod to the crank is 4. Examine the engine for balance of primary and
secondary forces and couples. Find the maximum values of these and the position of the
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
central crank at which these maximum values occur. The reciprocating mass for each cylinder
is 15 kg. (14 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to kinematics and mechanisms - various mechanisms, kinematic

diagrams, degree of freedom- Grashof’s criterion, inversions, coupler curves mechanical
advantage, transmission angle. straight line mechanisms exact, approximate. Displacement,
velocity analysis– relative motion - relative velocity. Instantaneous centre -Kennedy’s
theorem.

Module 2

Acceleration analysis- Relative acceleration - Coriolis acceleration - graphical and

analytical methods.
Cams - classification of cam and followers - displacement diagrams, velocity and
acceleration analysis of SHM, uniform velocity, uniform acceleration, cycloidal motion
Graphical cam profile synthesis, pressure angle.

Module 3

Gears – Classification- terminology of spur gears – law of gearing -tooth profiles- involute
spur gears- contact ratio - interference - backlash - gear standardization –
interchangeability. Gear trains - simple and compound gear trains - planetary gear trains.

Kinematic synthesis (planar mechanisms) - type, number and dimensional synthesis –

precision points. Graphical synthesis for motion - path and prescribed timing - function
generator. 2 position and 3 position synthesis – overlay Method. Freudenstein's equation.

Module 4

Static force analysis- Analysis of four bar linkages and slider crank mechanism, graphical
method, Matrix method, principle of virtual work. Analysis of four bar and slider crank
mechanisms with sliding and pin friction.

Gyroscopic couples-spin, precession and applied gyroscopic couple vectors-effects on the

stability of two wheelers, four wheelers, sea vessels and air crafts, application of
gyroscopes

Module 5

Static balancing-dynamic balancing-balancing of several masses in the same plane-several

masses in different planes-graphical and analytical method-force and couple polygons.

Balancing of reciprocating masses -Single cylinder engine-multi cylinder engine -V-engine

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Text Books

1. Ballaney P. L., Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, Khanna Publishers,2005

2 . S. S. Rattan, Theory of Machines, Tata Mc Graw Hill,2009

Reference Books

1. C. E. Wilson, P. Sadler, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Pearson

Education,2005.
2. D.H. Myskza, Machines and Mechanisms Applied Kinematic
Analysis, Pearson Education,2013
3. G. Erdman, G. N. Sandor, Mechanism Design: Analysis and synthesis Vol I & II,
Prentice Hall of India,1984.
4. Ghosh, A. K. Malik, Theory of Mechanisms and Machines, Affiliated East West
Press,1988
5. J. E. Shigley, J. J. Uicker, Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, McGraw Hill,2010
6. Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Tata McGraw Hill,2009

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of lectures

1 Module-1- 10 Hours

1.1 Introduction to kinematics and mechanisms 1 Hr

1.2 Various mechanisms 2 Hr

1.3 Kinematic diagrams, degree of freedom, Grashof’s 2 Hr

criterion

1.4 Inversions 1 Hr

1.5 Coupler curves mechanical advantage, transmission 1 Hr

angle.

1.6 Straight line mechanisms exact, approximate 1 Hr

1.7 Displacement, velocity analysis, Kennedy’s theorem. 2 Hr

2 Module 2- 10 Hours
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
2.1 Acceleration analysis- Relative acceleration - Coriolis 1 Hr
acceleration -
2.2 Graphical and analytical methods. 2Hr
.

2.3 Cams - classification of cam and followers 1 Hr

2.4 Displacement diagrams, velocity and acceleration 2 Hr

analysis of SHM,

2.5 Uniform velocity,uniform acceleration and cycloidal 1 Hr

motion

2.5 Graphical cam profile synthesis, pressure angle. 2 Hr

2.6 Analysis of tangent cam with roller follower and circular 1 Hr

cam with flat follower

3 Module-3 9 Hours

3.1 Gears – terminology of spur gears – law of Gearing 1 Hr

3.2 involute spur gears - contact ratio- interference - 1 Hr

backlash - gear standardization-interchangeability

3.3 Gear trains - simple and compound gear trains - 2 Hr

planetary gear trains

3.4 Kinematic synthesis (planar mechanisms) - type, number 2 Hr

and dimensional synthesis – precision points.

3.5 Graphical synthesis for motion - path and prescribed 2 Hr

timing - function generator. 2 position and 3 position
synthesis

3.6 Overlay Method. Freudenstein's equation 1 Hr

4 Module-4- 8 Hours

4.1 Static force analysis- Analysis of four bar linkages and 2 Hr

slider crank mechanism

4.2 Graphical method, Matrix method 1 Hr

4.3 principle of virtual work 1 Hr

4.4 Analysis of four bar and slider crank mechanisms with 1 Hr

sliding and pin friction.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
4.4 Gyroscopic couples-spin, precession and applied 2 Hr
gyroscopic couple vectors

4.5 Effects on the stability of two wheelers , Four wheelers, 1 Hr

sea vessals and air crafts

5 Module-5- Kinematics-synthesis 8 Hours

5.1 Static balancing-dynamic balancing- 2 Hr

5.2 balancing of several masses in the same plane 1 Hr

5.3 several masses in different planes-graphical and 1 Hr

analytical method

5.4 force and couple polygons 1 Hr

5.5 Balancing of reciprocating masses -Single cylinder 1 Hr

engine

5.6 multi cylinder engine-v engine-inline engine 2 Hr

CODE COURSE NAME MECHANICAL
CATEGORY L ENGINEERING
T P CREDIT
MET303 THERMAL ENGINEERING PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: This course involve the application of principles studied in thermodynamics to

different energy conversion systems like steam turbine, steam nozzle, steam powerplant, IC
engines and refrigeration systems. This course also covers the methods for improving and
evaluating the performance of different energy conversion systems. This course also helps to
understand the combustion phenomenon in IC engines.

Prerequisite: MET202 Engineering Thermodynamics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the working of steam power cycle and related components

CO 2 Discuss the working of steam turbines and methods for evaluating the performance
CO 3 Illustrate the performance testing and evaluation of IC engines
CO 4 Explain the combustion phenomenon and pollution in IC engines
CO 5 Discuss the principles of refrigeration and air-conditioning and basic design considerations

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO 12
1 10 11
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 2
CO 5 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. In a reheat Rankine cycle, steam at a pressure of 40 bar and 300°C is expanded through a
turbine to a pressure of 4 bar. It is then heated at a constant pressure to 300⁰C and then
expanded to 0.1 bar. Estimate the work done per kg of steam flowing through the turbine,
the amount of heat supplied during the reheat process and the cycle efficiency. Neglect
pump work.

2. Dry saturated steam enters a frictionless adiabatic nozzle with negligible velocity at a
temperature of 300 °C. It is then expanded to a pressure of 40 bar. For a mass flow rate of
2 kg/s, calculate the exit velocity of the steam.

3. With the help of a figure explain the working of Babcock and Wilcox boiler.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. In an impulse steam turbine, steam issues from the nozzle with a velocity of 1200 m/s.
The nozzle angle is 20o and the mean blade velocity is 400 m/s. The inlet and outlet blade
angles are equal. The blade velocity coefficient is 0.8. The mass of steam flowing through
the turbine per hour is 950 kg. Calculate: (i) Blade angles. (ii) Relative velocity of steam
entering the blades (iii) Tangential force on the blades. (iv) Power developed. (v) Blade
efficiency.

2. In a reaction turbine, the mean blade speed is 150 m/s and the ratio of blade speed to
steam speed is 0.625. The outlet angles of fixed and moving blades are 20o and 30o
respectively. Calculate (i) the degree of reaction (ii) the adiabatic enthalpy drop in a pair
of blade rings and (iii) the gross stage efficiency. The specific volume of steam at fixed
blade outlet is 0.567 m3 and at moving blade outlet 0.6 m3. Assume the efficiency of
blades when considered as nozzles 0.90 and k2 = 0.86, where k is the blade velocity
coefficient.

3. Derive the conditions for maximum efficiency of a Parsons reaction turbine.

 4. Discuss the means of improving the performance of a steam turbine.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

1. A 4-cylinder four stroke petrol engine is working based on the following data: Air-fuel
ratio by weight = 15:1, calorific value of the fuel = 45000 kJ/kg, mechanical efficiency =
80 %, air- standard efficiency = 54 %, relative efficiency = 70 %, volumetric efficiency =
75 %, stroke/bore ratio = 1.25, suction conditions = 1 bar and 30 oC, r.p.m. = 2500, brake
power = 70 kW. Calculate: (i) Compression ratio. (ii) Indicated thermal efficiency. (iii)
Brake specific fuel consumption. (iv) Bore and stroke.

2. Discuss the working of a rotary engine and its merits and demerits over conventional IC
engines.

3. How Morse test and retardation test helps to find the friction power of an engine?

4. Explain the procedure for heat balance test and its significance.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain equivalence ratio and its significance in IC engine combustion.

2. Explain different stages of SI engine combustion with the help of pressure-crank angle
diagram.

3. Discuss detonation in SI engine, cause and effects and the engine variable influencing the
same.

4. Explain different pollution control methods employed for reducing the emissions in IC
engines.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Derive the expression for COP of an ideal air refrigeration cycle.

2. A food storage locker with R12 refrigerant requires a refrigeration of 2400 kJ/min. capacity
has an evaporator temperature of 263 K and a condenser temperature of 303 K.The refrigerant
is sub cooled by 6 oC before entering the expansion valve and vapour is superheated by 7 oC
before leaving the evaporator coil. The refrigeration compressor is a two cylinder single
acting with stroke equal to 1.25 times the bore and operates at 1000 rpm. Calculate i) Mass of
refrigerant circulated/min. ii) Heat removed by condenser/min iii) Theoretical bore and
stroke.

3. Sensible and latent loads on a space are 50 kW and 10 kW respectively. Cold and
dehumidified air at 10 oC DBT and 90 % RH is used to maintain the space condition at 24 oC
DBT. Find i) RSHF ii) space relative humidity and iii) mass flow rate of supply air?
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

V SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET303: THERMAL ENGINEERING

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration:3 hours

Use of Steam tables, Refrigeration tables, Charts and Psychrometric chart is permitted.

PART A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Explain Rankine cycle with help of a T-S diagram.

2. Differentiate between fire tube boiler and water tube boiler.

3. List the difference between throttle governing and nozzle governing.

4. Explain degree of reaction of a steam turbine.

5. With the help of a diagram explain turbocharging.

6. Explain the procedure of Morse test.

7. Discuss about pollutants coming from a CI engine.

8. What do you meant by Octane number?

9. Why reversed Carnot cycle is practically impossible to execute?

10. Define bypass factor and mention its significance. (10×3=30 Marks)

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a) Steam at a pressure of 15 bar and 250 ᵒC is expanded through a turbine to a

pressure of 4 bar. It is then reheated at constant pressure to initial temperature of 250
ᵒC and finally expanded to condenser pressure of 0.1 bar. Calculate efficiency of the
cycle. What will be the efficiency if reheating is not employed? Pump work can be
neglected. (8 marks)

b) Derive the expression for mass flow rate of steam through a nozzle and obtain the
critical pressure ratio. (6 marks)
12. a) With the help of a neat figure explain the working of a Benson boiler. What are its
merits over other boilers? MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
(8 marks)

b) With the help of T-s and p-h diagram explain the significance of binary vapour
cycle. (6 marks)

MODULE 2

13. a) Derive the condition for maximum efficiency of a reaction turbine. (6 marks)

b) With the help of figures enumerate the difference between pressure compounding
and velocity compounding of steam turbines. (8 marks)

14. a) What do you meant by reheat factor? List the parameters influencing the value of
reheat factor. (4 marks)

b) In an impulse steam turbine, steam issues from the nozzle with a velocity of 1200
m/s. The nozzle angle is 20o and the mean blade velocity is 400 m/s. The inlet and
outlet blade angles are equal. The blade velocity coefficient is 0.8. The mass of steam
flowing through the turbine per hour is 950 kg. Calculate: (i) Blade angles. (ii)
Relative velocity of steam entering the blades. (iii) Tangential force on the blades. (iv)
Power developed. (v) Blade efficiency. (10 marks)

MODULE 3

15. a) With the help of a neat figure explain the working of Wankel engine. Mention its
merits and demerits over conventional IC engines. (9 marks)

b) Discuss the effect of variable specific heat in actual cycle of IC engines. (5 marks)

16. a) The following observations were recorded during a trial of a four stroke single
cylinder diesel engine for a trial duration of 30 min. Fuel consumption is 4 liters,
Calorific value of fuel 43 MJ/kg, specific gravity of the fuel = 0.8, average area of
indicator diagram = 8.5 cm2, length of indicator diagram = 8.5 cm, spring constant=
5.5 bar/cm, brake load = 150 kg, spring balance reading = 20 kg, effective brake
wheel diameter = 1.5 m, speed = 200 rpm, cylinder diameter = 30 cm, stroke = 45 cm.
Calculate i) indicate power ii) brake power iii) mechanical efficiency iv) specific fuel
consumption in kg/kWh and v) indicated thermal efficiency. (10 marks)

b) Explain the concept of charge stratification in IC engines. (4 marks)

 MODULE 4
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
17. a) With the help of pressure-crank angle diagram explain different stages of CI engine
combustion. (8 marks)

b) Explain the phenomenon of detonation in SI engine based on autoignition theory.

(6 marks)

18. a) With the help of figures compare different types of SI engine combustion
chambers. (8 marks)

b) Discuss any two emission control methods employed in reducing the emission of
CI engine. (6 marks)

MODULE 5

19. a) A freezer of 20 TR capacity has evaporator and condenser temperature of -30 oC

and 25 oC respectively. The refrigerant R-12 is sub-cooled by 4 oC before entering the
expansion valve and is superheated by 5 oC before entering the evaporator. If a six
cylinder single acting compressor with stroke equal to bore running at 1000 rpm. is
used. Determine i) COP ii) Theoretical piston displacement per minute iii) Theoretical
bore and stroke. (9 marks)

b) Derive an expression for COP of a Reversed Brayton cycle for air refrigeration
system. (5 marks)

20. a) 2.5 kg of air is cooled and dehumidified from 30 oC DBT, 40% RH to 15 oC DBT
& 80% RH in a cooling and dehumidifying coil. Find (i) ADP, (ii) Bypass Factor and
(iii) Heat Transfer. If bypass factor is halved keeping the ADP same find (iv) exit air
condition and (v) Heat Transfer. (10 marks)

b) Define i) DPT ii) RH ii) SHF and iv) ADP. (4 marks)

 Syllabus
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 1

Steam engineering- Rankine cycle, Modified Rankine cycle, Relative efficiency,

Improvement in steam cycles-Reheat, Regenerative and Binary vapour cycle. Steam Boilers:
Types of boilers, Cochran boiler, Babcock and Wilcox boiler, Benson boiler, La Mont boiler,
Loeffler boiler, Velox boiler, Boiler Mountings and Accessories. Steam nozzles: -Types of
nozzle,Velocity of steam, mass flow rate, critical pressure ratio and its significance, effect of
friction, super saturated flow.

Module 2

Steam turbines: classification, compounding of turbines-pressure velocity variation, velocity

diagrams, work done, efficiency, condition for maximum efficiency, multistage turbines-
condition line, stage efficiency. Steam turbine performance-reheat factor, degree of reaction,
cycles with reheating and regenerative heating, governing of turbines.

Module 3

Actual cycle analysis of IC engines- Deviation of actual engine cycle from ideal cycle,
variable specific heats. Rotary engines, Stratified charge engine, Super charging and turbo
charging. Performance Testing of I C Engines- Indicator diagram, mean effective pressure.
Torque, Engine power- BHP, IHP. Engine efficiency, mechanical efficiency, volumetric
efficiency, thermal efficiency, relative efficiency and Specific fuel consumption. Morse test,
Heat balance test and Retardation test.

Module 4

Combustion in I.C. Engines- Analysis of fuel combustion-A/F ratio, equivalence ratio, excess
air. Combustion phenomena in S.I. engines; Ignition limits, stages of combustion in S.I.
Engines, Ignition lag, velocity of flame propagation, auto ignition, detonation; effects of
engine variables on detonation; theories of detonation, octane rating of fuels; pre-ignition;
S.I. engine combustion chambers. Combustion in C.I. Engines; delay period; variables
affecting delay period; knock in C.I. engines, Cetane rating; C.I. engine combustion
chambers. Air pollution from I.C. Engine and its control: Pollutants from S.I. and C.I.
Engines, Methods of emission control.

Module 5

Refrigeration– Reversed Carnot cycle, Air refrigeration system- Reversed Joule cycle.
Vapour compression systems-simple cycle - representation on T- s and P- h Diagrams. Effect
of operating parameters on COP, Methods of improving COP of simple cycle, Super heating
and under cooling. Psychometric properties – specific humidity, relative humidity and degree
of saturation, thermodynamic equations, enthalpy of moisture, DBT, WBT and DPT,
psychrometers, psychometric chart. Psychometric processes- adiabatic mixing, sensible
heating and cooling, humidifying and dehumidifying, air washer, bypass factor, sensible heat
factor, Comfort and industrial air conditioning, Comfort air conditioning- factors affecting
human comfort, Effective temperature, comfort chart, Summer air conditioning, factors
affecting, cooling load estimation. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Text Books

1. Rudramoorthy , Thermal Engineering, McGraw Hill Education India, 2003.

2. R.K Rajput, Thermal Engineering, Laxmi publications, 2010.

3. Arora C. P, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning, McGraw-Hill, 2008.

4. Arora S. C. and Domkundwar, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning, Dhanpat Rai, 2010.

Reference Books

1. V. Ganesan, Fundamentals of IC engines, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002.

2. J.B.Heywood, I.C engine fundamentals. McGraw-Hill, 2011.

3. Rathore, Thermal Engineering, McGraw Hill Education India, 2010.

4. Dossat. R. J, Principles of Refrigeration, Pearson Education India, 2002.

5. Stoecker W.F, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning, McGraw-Hill Publishing Company,

2009.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1
1.1 Steam engineering- Rankine cycle, Modified Rankine cycle, 4
Relative efficiency, Improvement in steam cycles-Reheat,
Regenerative and Binary vapor cycle.
1.2 Steam Boilers: Types of boilers, Cochran boiler, Babcock and 3
Wilcox boiler, Benson boiler, , La Mont boiler, Loeffler boiler,
Velox boiler, Boiler Mountings and Accessories.
1.3 Steam nozzles:-Types of nozzle- Velocity of steam, mass flow 2
rate, critical pressure ratio and its significance, effect of friction,
super saturated flow.
2
2.1 Steam turbines: classification, compounding of turbines-pressure 3
velocity variation, velocity diagrams.
2.2 Work done, efficiency, condition for maximum efficiency, 3
multistage turbines-condition line, stage efficiency.
2.3 Steam turbine performance-reheat factor, degree of reaction, 3
cycles with reheating and regenerative heating, governing of
turbines.
3
3.1 Actual cycle analysis of IC engines- Deviation of actual engine 2
cycle from ideal cycle, variable specific heats. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
3.2 Rotary engines, Stratified charge engine, Super charging and turbo 2
charging.
3.3 Performance Testing of I C Engines- Indicator diagram, mean 3
effective pressure. Torque, Engine power- BHP, IHP. Engine
efficiency, mechanical efficiency, volumetric efficiency, thermal
efficiency and relative efficiency, Specific fuel consumption.
3.4 Morse test, Heat balance test and Retardation test. 2
4
4.1 Combustion in I.C. Engines- Analysis of fuel combustion-A/F 1
ratio, equivalence ratio, excess air.
4.2 Combustion phenomena in S.I. engines; Ignition limits, stages of 3
combustion in S.I. Engines, Ignition lag, velocity of flame
propagation, auto ignition, detonation; effects of engine variables
on detonation; theories of detonation, octane rating of fuels; pre-
ignition; S.I. engine combustion chambers.

4.3 Combustion in C.I. Engines; delay period; variables affecting 3

delay period; knock in C.I. engines, Cetane rating; C.I. engine
combustion chambers.

4.4 Air pollution from I.C. Engine and its control: Pollutants from S.I. 2
and C.I. Engines, Methods of emission control.
5
5.1 Refrigeration– Reversed Carnot cycle, Air refrigeration system- 2
Reversed Joule cycle.

5.2 Vapour compression systems-simple cycle - representation on T- s 2

and P- h Diagrams. Effect of operating parameters on COP,
Methods of improving COP of simple cycle, Super heating and
under cooling.
5.3 Psychometric properties – specific humidity, relative humidity and 1
degree of saturation- thermodynamic equations- enthalpy of
moisture- DBT, WBT and DPT–psychrometers, psychometric
chart.

5.4 Psychometric processes- adiabatic mixing, sensible heating and 2

cooling, humidifying and dehumidifying, air washer, bypass
factor, sensible heat factor.

5.5 Comfort and industrial air conditioning, Comfort air conditioning- 2

factors affecting human comfort, Effective temperature, comfort
chart, Summer air conditioning, factors affecting, cooling load
estimation.
 CATEGORY
L T P CREDIT
MET305 INDUSTRIAL & SYSTEMS ENGINEERING
MECHANICAL
PCC 3 ENGINEERING
1 0 4

Preamble:

This course is designed to facilitate the students to acquire knowledge about management principles
and practices of an industry. It empowers the students to amalgamate their knowledge of materials
management, inventory management, lean manufacturing, agile manufacturing, industrial relations
and enterprise resource planning and thus inculcate the skills needed to apply these principles in an
industry.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Implement various tools and techniques in industrial engineering

CO 2 Calculate the inventory system for a given requirement
CO 3 Explain the importance of industrial relations
CO 4 Select the lean manufacturing tools to find and eliminate wastes
CO 5 Identify the framework of agile manufacturing
CO 6 Identify core and extended modules of enterprise resource planning

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2
CO 3 1 2 2 1 2
CO 4 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO 5 2 1 2 2 2
CO 6 2 3 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 40 60
Apply 20 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Calculate the breakeven point for the product.

2. What are the functions of Industrial Engineering?

3. What are the human factors to be considered while designing a new product?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. List various types of material handling equipments

2. Determine the optimum quantity to be ordered

3. Describe the role played by the materials management function in enabling an organisation to
achieve profitability.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Define ‘Job Satisfaction’.

2. Describe the causes of poor industrial relations.

3. What is meant by ‘collective bargaining’?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1.Compare the inventory levels in conventional and lean manufacturing systems.

2.Expand the Japanese terms of 5S

3.Describe the basic elements of lean manufacturing

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Describe the components of agile manufacturing system

2. List the measures that are used to measure innovation in agile production system.

3. How do strategic linkages aid the organisation to acquire agility?

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Enumerate ERP implementation stages.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
2. With the aid of a block diagram, explain the construction and working of ERP framework.

3. Describe ERP related technology

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET305 INDUSTRIAL & SYSTEMS ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer ALL questions, each carries 3 marks.

1. What are the human factors to be considered while designing a new product?
2. Describe the procedure followed while designing a product.
3. List various types of material handling equipments
4. Describe the concept of JIT manufacturing system
5. Describe the causes and effects of industrial disputes and how it can be eliminated
6. What are the methods of elimination of fatigue?
7. Expand the Japanese terms of 5S.
8. Describe the characteristics of agile manufacturing.
9. State the evolution of ERP.
10. What is Online Analytical Processing?

PART B

Module 1

11. a) How inventories are classified and costs associated by inventories? (5)

b) A manufacturer has to supply 10,000 units of product annually. The unit cost is Rs.
2 and it costs Rs.36 to place an order. The inventory carrying cost is estimated at 9%
of average inventory investment. Determine 1. EOQ 2.Optimum number of orders to
be placed per annum. 3. Minimum total cost of inventory (9)

12 a) What are the principles of good product design (10)

b) The fixed cost of producing a product in a company is Rs. 8,00,000. Variable cost
per unit of the product is Rs. 30. Each unit of the product is going to be sold at a price
of Rs. 180. Determine the breakeven point of this product. (4)
 Module 2
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
13. Describe the role played by the materials management function in enabling an

organisation to achieve profitability. (14)

14. a) What is meant by quantity discount? (4)

b) A retailer procures batteries for quartz watches and sells them to watch repair
shops. The price paid by the retailer varies on the basis of the quantities of batteries
procured by him. The quantity and the price/unit pattern offered to him are given
below:

Quantity (Q) Price per one unit of battery

0≤Q<100 Rs.20

100≤Q<200 Rs.18

200≤Q Rs.15

The monthly demand for the batteries is 600 units. The storage cost is 15% of unit
cost of the battery and the cost of ordering is Rs.30 per order. Determine the optimum
quantity to be ordered by the retailer so that the total cost of procurement is minimum.
(10)

Module 3

15. (a) List any five objectives of Trade union. (5)

(b) Trace the history of Trade unionism. (9)

16 (a) Explain conditions to be met for maintaining good industrial relations. (7)

(b) Describe the causes of poor industrial relations. (7)

Module 4

17. (a) Enumerate the objectives and key principles of lean manufacturing paradigm. (7)

(b) Compare traditional and lean manufacturing paradigms. (7)

18. List and describe any ten components of agile manufacturing system. (14)

Module 5

19. Describe the key processes of “Customer Relationship Management”. (14)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
20 a) With the aid of a block diagram, explain the construction and working of ERP
framework. (7)

(b) Explain the differences between ‘Business Engineering’ and ‘Business Process
Reengineering’. (7)

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to Industrial Engineering - Evolution of modern Concepts in Industrial Engineering -

Functions of Industrial Engineering - Field of application of Industrial Engineering - Design function
- Objectives of design- Development of designs- prototype, production and testing - Human factors in
design - Principles of good product design- tolerance design- quality and cost considerations- product
life cycle- standardization, simplification, diversification- concurrent engineering- comparison of
production alternatives - Economic aspects- C-V-P analysis – simple problems.

Module 2

Introduction to materials management – objectives – Types of material handling equipments -

principles of material handling –Material selection – value analysis – make or buy decisions-
Purchasing and procedures. Basic inventory management - Inventory -Functions, Costs,
Classifications - EOQ Models- Assumptions- Quantity discount model- Q system- P system- Reorder
level - Simple problems- Concept of JIT manufacturing system.

Module 3

Industrial relations- Psychological attitudes to work and working conditions - fatigue- Methods of
eliminating fatigue- Effect of Communication in Industry-Industrial safety-personal protective
devices-, causes and effects of industrial disputes- Collective bargaining- Trade union - Workers
participation in management.

Module 4

Principles of Lean Manufacturing(LM) – Basic elements of LM– Introduction to LM Tools- Concept

of wastes in LM and their narration - stages of 5S and waste elimination - Conventional
Manufacturing versus Lean Manufacturing - Need for LM. Agile manufacturing - Definition, business
need, conceptual frame work, characteristics, and generic features - Approaches to enhance ability in
manufacturing - Managing people in agile organization

Module 5

Introduction of enterprise resource planning (ERP)- Concept of Enterprise, ERP Overview -

Integrated information system - Myths about ERP – Evolution of ERP- Benefits of ERP
implementation - Success and failure factors of ERP implementation - Small, medium and large
enterprise vendor solutions- ERP and related technology: Business intelligence (BI), E-Commerce
and E-Business, Business Process Reengineering (BPR), Data warehousing, Data mining, Online
Analytical Processing(OLAP), Product lifecycle management(PLC), Supply chain
management(SCM), Customer relationship management (CRM)- ERP implementation challenges -
Emerging trends on ERP MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. Martand T. Telsang, “Industrial Engineering & Production Management”, S. Chand and Company
Limited, 2018.

2. M. Mahajan, “Industrial Engineering & Production Management”, Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Limited,
2015.

3. O. P. Khanna, “Industrial Engineering and Management”, Dhanpat Rai Publications, 2018.

4. James P. Womack, Daniel T. Jones and Daniel Roos, “The Machine That Changed the World”,
Free Press, New York, 2007.

5. Alexis Leon, “ERP Demystified”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2008.

Reference Books

1. Kjell Zandin and Harold Maynard, “Maynard's Industrial Engineering Handbook”, McGraw-Hill
Education, 2001.

2. Philips E. Hicks, “Industrial Engineering and Management – A new perspective”, McGraw Hill
International Editions, New York, 1994.

3. B. Kumar “Industrial Engineering and Management “, Khanna Publishers,2013.

4. S.R. Devadasan, V. Mohan Sivakumar, R. Murugesh and PR Shalij, “Lean and Agile
Manufacturing: Theoretical, Practical and Research Futurities” PHI Learning private Limited, New
Delhi, 2012.

5. Ravi Shankar, “Industrial Engineering and Management”, Golgotia Publications Pvt Ltd,
NewDelhi, 2009.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction to Industrial Engineering
1.1 Evolution of modern Concepts in Industrial Engineering - Functions of 2
Industrial Engineering - Field of application of Industrial Engineering
1.2 Design function - Objectives of design- Development of designs- 2
prototype, production and testing - Human factors in design - Principles
of good product design- tolerance design
1.3 Quality and cost considerations- product life cycle- standardization, 2
simplification, diversification- concurrent engineering
1.4 Comparison of production alternatives - Economic aspects- C-V-P 2
analysis – simple problems
2 Introduction to materials management
2.1 Objectives – Types of material handling equipments 1
2.2 Principles of material handling –Material selection – MECHANICAL
value analysis ENGINEERING
2
2.3 Make or buy decisions-Purchasing procedure 1
2.4 Inventory -Functions, Costs, Classifications 1
2.5 EOQ Models- Assumptions- Quantity discount model- Q system- P 3
system- Reorder level - Simple problems, JIT
3 Industrial relations
3.1 Psychological attitudes to work and working conditions 1
3.2 Fatigue- Methods of eliminating fatigue 1
3.3 Effect of Communication in Industry-Industrial safety-personal 2
protective devices
3.3 Causes and effects of industrial disputes- Collective bargaining 2
3.4 Trade union - Workers participation in management 1
4 Lean Manufacturing and Agile manufacturing
4.1 Principles of Lean Manufacturing(LM) – Basic elements of LM– 2
Introduction to LM Tools
4.2 Concept of wastes in LM and their narration 1
4.3 Stages of 5S and waste elimination 2
4.4 Conventional Manufacturing versus Lean Manufacturing - Need for LM. 1
4.5 Agile manufacturing – Definition , business need 1
4.6 Agile manufacturing - conceptual frame work, characteristics, and 2
generic features
4.7 Approaches to enhance ability in manufacturing - 1
4.8 Managing people in agile organization 1
5 Introduction of Enterprise Resource Planning
5.1 Introduction of enterprise resource planning (ERP)- Concept of 2
Enterprise, ERP Overview - Integrated information system - Myths
about ERP – Evolution of ERP
5.2 Myths about ERP - Basic ERP concepts - Small, medium and large 2
enterprise vendor solutions
5.3 Benefits of ERP implementation, Success and failure factors of ERP 1
implementation
5.4 Business intelligence (BI), E-Commerce and E-Business, Business 2
Process Reengineering (BPR)
5.5 Data warehousing, Data mining, Online Analytical Processing(OLAP), 2
Product lifecycle management(PLC)
5.6 Supply chain management(SCM), Customer relationship management 1
(CRM)
5.7 ERP implementation challenges, Emerging trends on ERP 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MACHINE TOOLS AND CATEGORY L T P Credits

MET 307
METROLOGY
PCC 3 1 0 4
Preamble:
To develop knowledge of appropriate process parameters to be used for various machining
operations.
Understand the fundamentals of modem quality concepts. Be able to apply statistical
techniques.
Understand the principles and operation of precision measurement tools and equipment used
in modern manufacturing.

Prerequisite: MET 205Metallurgy and Material Science and PHT 110 Engineering Physics

Course Outcomes - At the end of the course students will be able to

Analyze various machining process and calculate relevant quantities such us velocities,
CO 1 forces and powers.
Analyze of the tool nomenclature with surface roughness obtainable in each machining
CO 2
processes.
Understand the limitations of various machining process with regard to shape formation
CO 3 and surface texture.
Demonstrate knowledge of the underlying principles of measurement, as they relate to
CO 4 mechanical measurement, electronic instrumentation, and thermal effects.
CO 5 Get an exposure to advanced measuring devices and machine tool metrology.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirements)

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 1
CO 2 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO 3 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - - - 2
CO 4 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO 5 2 - - 2 3 - - - - - - 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom's End Semester Examination (Marks)

Test 1 (Marks) Test 11 (Marks)
taxonomy

Remember 25 25 25

Understand 15 15 15

Apply 30 25 30

Analyze 10 10 10

Evaluate 10 15 10

Create 10 10 10

Mark distribution
Total Marks CIE marks ESE marks ESE duration
150 50 100 3 Hours
Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:
Attendance 10 marks
Regular class work/tutorials/assignments/self learning
15 marks
(Minimum 3 numbers)
Continuous Assessment Test(Minimum 2numbers) 25 marks

End semester pattern:-There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2
questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions.
Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer anyone. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Course Outcome 1 (CO1) Analyze various machining process and calculate relevant quantities such us
velocities, forces and powers.
1. List out various types of Lathe attachment explain
2. Explain the working principle of slotter
3. In a verniercalliper, the main scale reads in millimetres with a least count of 0.1 mm.Ten
divisions on the vernier correspond to nine divisions of the main scale. Determine the
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

leastcount of the calliper.

4. A shaft is manufactured within the specified limits of 30.02 and 29.98 mm. Find the high
and low limits of the bush to give a maximum clearance of 0.10 mm and minimum
clearance of 0.02 mm.
5. What is the difference between rough grinding and precision grinding?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Analysis of the tool nomenclature with surface roughness obtainable in each
machining processes.
1. Define the terms ‘Cutting speed’, ‘feed’ and ‘depth of cut’?
2. How are abrasives selected for grinding operation?
3. Why a coolant used in grinding work?
4. How the grinding wheel is selected for a particular job?
5. Describe the nomenclature of hob.
6. Discuss the significant machining parameters for shaping machine.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Understand the limitations of various machining process with regard to shape
formation and surface texture.
1. What is the difference between drilling, boring and reaming?
2. Explain any three thread production processes.
3. Explain counter sinking and trepanning.
4. Explain different types of gear hobbing machines.
5. Explain planning of guide gibs and slotting of keyways.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Students will demonstrate knowledge of the underlying principles of measurement,
as they relate to mechanical measurement, electronic instrumentation, and thermal effects.
1. Describe the GO and NOGO gauge design procedure with neat sketch.
2.

3.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Get an exposure to advanced measuring devices and machine tool metrology.
1. Is assessment length greater/lesser than transverse length in surface roughness measurements?
Why?
2. A surface tested under an optical flat using interferometer shows the following interference fringe
pattern. Intercept the nature of the surface.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. What are difference between Rt and Rz with neat sketches

4. How are CMM classified based on their construction? With neat sketches explain the merits and
applications any one of them.

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

FIFTH SEMESTER MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MACHINE TOOLS AND METROLOGY-MET 307

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

Part – A
Answer all questions.
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. What is trepanning? Explain with sketch.

2. What are the use of face plate and angle plate in a lathe?
3. With a sketch, show rake angle of milling cutter and chip breaker.
4. What s the difference between grinding wheel dressing and truing
5. What is the principle of Gear shaping? Explain.
6. Write note on gear errors.
7. Differentiate between precision and accuracy.
8. Explain the process of wringing of slip gauges.
9. Write the importance of cut off length in surface roughness measurement

10. Explain the principle of measurement by light wave interference method.

PART –B

Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE – 1

11. a.What are the attachments used on a center lathe and what purpose do they serve? (7 marks).

b.Draw a drillsignature, name the important angles and explain their each functionand explain
plaining of guide gibs(7 marks).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

12. Draw sketch of a crank shaper, mark the important parts and explain their functions. Explain
how quick return mechanism works. (14 marks).

MODULE – 2
13. a. Explain the principle of working of centreless grinding machine. (7 marks).
b. What are ‘Through Feed’, ‘In Feed’, and ‘End Feed’ in centreless grinding operations? (7
marks).
14. a. Explain in detail with neat sketches of a) Slot and groove milling, b) profile milling c)
thread milling(7 marks).
b. What is the need of better surface finish and how honing, lapping and burnishing process
are different in its features and roughness obtainable, explain with sketches. (7 marks).

MODULE – 3
15. Why gear finishing processes are required? Write down the advantages and limitations of
gear shaving and gear lapping process with neat sketches. (14 marks).
16 Describe the different methods of manufacturing various types of gears i. Preforming
ii. Producing gear teeth by machining iii. Finishing gear teeth (14 marks).

MODULE – 4

17 Discuss all the principles of achieving accuracy. Explain all types of errors. (14
marks).
18. Determine limit dimensions for a clearance fit between mating parts of diameter 40
mm, providing a minimum clearance of 0.10 mm with a tolerance on the hole equal
to 0.025mm and on shaft 0.05mm using both systems(14 marks).

MODULE – 5
19 a ) Define the following terms in surface texture measurements: -
(i) Primary Texture.(ii) Secondary Texture.(iii) Lay(iv) Sampling Length.(7 marks).
b) Describe the method of evaluating roughness using(i) Peak to valley high method.
(ii) C.L.A. method. (7 marks).
20 a ) Discuss the different types of probes used in CMM (7 marks).
b.) Explain the various steps in machine vision system (7 marks).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
MODULE – 1
General purpose machine tools – types and classification of machine tools –types and classification of lathe –
methods of holding work and tool –lathe accessories and attachments –lathe operations -tool room lathe –
duplicate lathe –capstan and turret lathe –horizontal and vertical-single spindle and multi spindle screw machines -
Shaping, Plaining and Slotting machines – Work holding devices-types of operations - surface roughness
obtainable indexing - Drilling and boring Machines – -Drill bit nomenclature- cutting forces in drilling – tool and
work holding devices-boring tools and reamers.

MODULE – II

Milling tool nomenclature - Cutting forces in milling – Calculation of machining time- Indexing head Different
indexing methods -Grinding, honing and lapping – types of grinding machines-operations: cutting forces in
grinding -Grinding mechanisms – Grinding wheels - surface roughness obtainable in grinding, honing and
lapping.

MODULE – III

Broaching machines –different machines – cutter for broaching – broaching processes – internal external
broaching - Gear cutting –methods in gear production – form cutters –gear generating machines – gear hobbing
machines – gear broaching -Bevel gear cutting –worm gear cutting –gear finishing.

MODULE – IV

Metrology –principles of achieving accuracy -Theory of tolerances and allowances –system of limits and fits –
types of fits – interchangeability and selective assembly –standards of measurements- Gauges – classification of
gauges –principle of gauge tolerance –w ear allowance.

MODULE – V

Instruments for checking straightness, flatness and squareness–pneumatic gauging –precision gauging –
automatic gauging for inspection-Optical measuring instruments –Comparators –Measurements of surface
roughness –- gauging and measurements of screw and gears- Advanced measuring devices – Laser
interferometers- Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. Chapman W. A. J., Workshop Technology, Viva books (P) Ltd

2. HMT, Production Technology, Tata McGraw-Hill
3. Engineering Metrology and Measurements, N.V. Raghavendra, l. Krishnamurthy, oxford
university press
4. Galyer J.F.W., Schotbolt C.R., Metrology for Engineers, ELBS.
Reference
1. Acharkan. N., Machine Tool Design Vol. 1 to 4, MIR Publication
2. Chernov, Machine Tools, MIR Publication.
3. HajraChoudary, Elements of workshop technology, Vol I & II, Media Publishers.
4. ASME, Hand book of Industrial Metrology.
5. Hume K. J., Engineering Metrology, Macdonald &Co. Ltd.
6. Sharp K.W.B., Practical Engineering Metrology, Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons Ltd.

COURSE CONTENT AND LECTURE SCHEDULES.

No.of Course
Module TOPIC
hours outcomes
General purpose machine tools – types and classification of
machine tools –Lathe – types and classification of lathe – 1 CO3
specification for a lathe –
1.1
Feed,depth of cut, speed-methods of holding work and tool –
CO1
lathe accessories and attachments –lathe operations and tools 3
used for each operations -
Brief study of the machine and the nature and type of jobs
handled by the following: - tool room lathe – duplicate lathe –
1.2 3
capstan and turret lathe –horizontal and vertical-single spindle CO2
and multi spindle screw machines.
Shaping, Plaining and Slotting machines – Types and
specifications – quick return motion –hydraulic feed and its
advantages - automatic feed – speed,feed and depth of cut–
1.3
Work holding devices-types of operations and examples of 1 CO3
work done- surface roughness obtainable indexing (Self
learning portion, discretion of faculty, fundamentals to be
explained in the class)
Drilling and boring Machines – Types and specifications –
1.4 1 CO3
Brief descriptions about the machines and nature, types of job
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

handled by each of them.

-Drill bit nomenclature- cutting forces in drilling – tool and
1.5 1 CO2
work holding devices-boring tools and reamers.
2.1 Milling machines – types and specifications- Milling operations
1 CO3
and types of milling cutters used for each.
- Milling tool nomenclature - Cutting forces in milling – 1
2.2
Calculation of machining time- Indexing head and its use -
CO1
Different indexing methods - Differential indexing (Self
CO3
2.3 learning portion discretion of faculty, fundamentals to be 1
explained in the class)
Grinding, honing and lapping – types of grinding machines-
operations: cylindrical, surface and center less grinding – CO1
2.4 3
internal grinding, tool and cutter grinding - cutting forces in CO3
grinding
Grinding mechanisms – Grinding wheels: Specification – types
of abrasives, grain size -Types of bond, grade, and structure –
Marking system of grinding wheels – Selection of grinding
CO3
2.5 wheels –need of better surface finish; surface roughness 3
obtainable in grinding, honing, lapping and burnishing; Surface
roughness comparisons between different conventional metal
cutting processes.
Broaching machines –different machines – cutter for broaching
3.1 3 CO3
– different broaching processes – internal external broaching.
Gear cutting –methods used in gear production – form cutters –
CO3
3.2 gear generating machines – gear hobbing machines – gear 3
broaching.
Bevel gear cutting – straight and spiral gears-worm gear cutting
3.3 3 CO3
–gear finishing operations.
Metrology –principles of achieving accuracy –economic
4.1 machining accuracy – precision Vs accuracy - errors- standards 2 CO 4
of measurements-
Theory of tolerances and allowances –system of limits and fits
4.2 – types of fits – interchangeability and selective assembly – 4 CO 4
Taylor’s Principle-
Gauges – classification of gauges- plug, ring, taper angle, slip
CO 4
4.3 and snap gauges –feeler gauges-dial indicator –principle of 4
CO 5
gauge tolerance –wear allowance-gauge materials.
Instruments for checking straightness, angle, flatness and
squareness of guiding surface(Self learning portion, discretion
CO 4
5.1 of faculty, fundamentals to be explained in the class). – 2
CO 5
pneumatic gauging –precision gauging –automatic gauging for
inspection.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Optical measuring instruments, baisc principle –

5.2 interferometer-optical flat –optical tool makers’ microscope- 2
CO 5
autocollimator.
Comparators – mechanical, optical, pneumatic, electric and
CO 4
5.3 electronic comparators. (Self learning portion, discretion of 1
faculty, fundamentals to be explained in the class).
Measurements of surface roughness – elements of roughness –
symbols specifying –instruments and for measuring surface 1
roughness- CO 4
5.4
Measurements of screw: terminology, measurement of screw
thread elements-measurement of gears: terminology, errors in 2
spur gears, measurement of gear elements.
Advanced measuring devices – Laser interferometers-
5.5 1 CO 5
Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME: CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MEL331 MACHINE TOOLS LAB II PCC 0 0 3 2
Preamble:
1. To learn the measurement of bores by internal micrometers, bore indicators, indirect
methods etc.
2. To learn the measurement of the Angle and taper by Bevel protractor, Sine bars, indirect
methods etc.
3. Allow to study the various limits, fits and tolerances adopted in the production drawings.
4. To learn to measure straightness, flatness, roundness, profile, screw threads and gear
teeth.
5. To learn, to prepare programs for CNC machines and measurements in CMM.

Course Outcomes - At the end of the course students will be able to

CO 1
Apply the procedures to measure length, angles, width, depth, bore diameters, internal and
external tapers, tool angles, and surface roughness by using different instruments and by
different indirect methods.
CO 2
Determine limits and fits and allocate tolerances for machine components
CO 3
CNC programming and to use coordinate measuring machine to record measurements of
complex profiles with high sensitivity.
CO 4
Use effective methods of measuring straightness, Squareness, flatness, roundness, profile, screw
threads and gear teeth.
CO 5
Securing knowledge of manufacturing components within the tolerance limit and surface
roughness according to given drawings using various machine tools.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirements)

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - -
CO 4 - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 - - - - 3 - - - - - - -
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed regarding
award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15 Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and trouble shooting) : 25 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions:
Practical examination is to be conducted immediately after the second series test covering entire
syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be conducted under the equal
responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The number of candidates evaluated
per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for the University examination only on
submitting the duly certified record. The external examiner shall endorse the record.
SYLLABUS
Experiments on Grinding machine – Programming and experiments on CNC machines-
Uncertainty in metrology and measurement standards - Errors and their impact on the calculation
of uncertainties - Measurement types and instrument selection - Geometric features of parts -
Measuring straightness, squareness, flatness, roundness, and profile -Screw threads and gear
teeth, optical contour projectors - Gage measurement - Surface texture and roughness
measurement – flaw detection - Coordinate measuring machine - Modern measuring instruments
and machines.
Reference books
1. Yoram Koren, Numerical Control of Machine Tools, McGraw-Hill.
2. Shotbolt C.R. and Gayler J.F.W, Metrology for Engineers, 5th edition, ELBS, London.
3. Sharp K.W.B. and Hume, Practical Engineering Metrology, Sir Isaac Pitman and sons Ltd,
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
London.
4. Collett, C.V. and Hope, A.D, Engineering Measurements, Second edition, ELBS/Longman

Course No. of
Experiments List of Experiments
outcomes hours
Programming and experiment on CNC machines
Study and preparation of programme, simulation and
1 CO 3 3
exercise on CNC lathe:-turning, step turning, taper turning,
thread cutting, ball and cup turning etc.
Study and preparation of programme, simulation and
2 exercise on CNC milling machine: - surface milling, pocket 3
milling, contour milling etc.
Experiment on Grinding machine
Exercise on surface grinding, cylindrical grinding and tool CO 1
3 grinding etc. CO 5 3
Measurement of cutting forces and roughness in grinding
process and correlate with varying input parameters.
Basics for mechanical measurements
Calibration of vernier caliper, micrometer and dial gauge.
Determination of dimensions of given specimen using
vernier caliper, micrometer, height gauge, bore dial gauge
etc. CO 1
4 Determination of dimensions of a rectangular, square, CO 2 3
cylindrical specimens using slip gauges and comparing
with height gauge/vernier caliper etc

Experiments on Limits, Fits and Tolerance

Determine the class of fits between given shaft and hole.
etc
Experiments on Repeatability and Reproducibility CO 1
5 Study and analysis of repeatability and reproducibility of CO 2 3
given batch of steel balls. etc.
Linear measurements CO 1
6 Study of different linear measuring instruments etc. CO 5 3
Calibration of LVDT using slip gauges
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Straightness error measurement

Study of different straightness error measuring instruments –
basic principle of auto collimator, spirit level and laser
interferometer.
7 Measurement of straightness error of a CI surface plate using CO 4 3
auto collimator and comparing with sprit level.
Laser interferometer used to determine straightness error
To check straightness error of a straight edge by the wedge
method using slip gauges.
Angle measurements
Angular measurements using bevel protractor, combination
sets, clinometers, angle dekkor etc.
8 Measurement of angle and width of a V-block and comparing CO 1 3
with combination sets.
Measurement of angle using sine bar of different samples.
Determination of angle and taper of a taper plug gauge
Out of roundness measurement
Study of different methods used for measuring out of roundness
Measurement of out of roundness using form measuring
9 instrument CO 4 3

Measurement of out of roundness using V-block and dial gauge

Measurement of out of roundness using bench centre and dial
gauge etc.
Screw thread measurement
Measurement of screw thread parameters using two wire and
three wire method.
CO 4
10 Measurement of screw thread parameters using tool maker’s 3
microscope etc.
Measurement of screw thread parameters using thread ring
gage, thread plug gage, thread snap gage, screw thread
micrometer, optical comparator etc.
Bore measurement
Measurement of a bore by two ball method.
11 CO 1 3
Measurement of a bore by four ball method.
Bore measurement using slip gauges and rollers.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Bore measurement using bore dial gauge etc.

Gear metrology
Study of types of gears – gear terminology – gear errors -
Profile Projector.
12
Measurement of profile error and gear parameters using profile CO 4 3
projector etc.
Use of Comparators
Exercise on comparators: mechanical, optical, pneumatic and
electronic comparators.
Use of Tool maker’s microscope
Study of tool maker’s microscope – use at shop floor
applications.
13 CO 1 3
Measurement of gear tooth parameters using tool maker’s
microscope.
Measurement of different angles of single point cutting tool
using tool maker’s microscope.
Surface roughness measurement
14 Measurement of surface roughness using surface profilometer CO 1 3
/roughness measuring machine of turned, milled, grounded,
lapped and glass etc specimens.
Squareness measurement
15
Determination of squareness of a trisquare using angle plate and CO 1 3
slip gauges etc.
Flatness measurement
16
Study of optical flat and variation of fringe patterns for different
surfaces.
Determination of parallelism error between micrometer faces CO 4 3
etc.
Compare given surface using optical flat with interpretation
chart.
Vibration measurement
17
Measurement of displacement, velocity and acceleration of CO 5 3
vibration.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Use of Pneumatic comparator

18 Checking the limits of dimensional tolerances using pneumatic
CO 5 3
comparator
Calibration using air plug gauge etc
Rotation measurement
19 Determination of rpm using tachometer, optical tachometer and
stroboscope, etc. CO 5 3
Flaw detection
Study and use of ultrasonic flaw detector.
Other measurements
Study and making measurements with precision vernier
calipers, dial calipers, point micrometer spline micrometer, wire
groove micrometer, depth micrometer, V- anvil micrometers,
depth gear tooth micrometer, thread micrometer, disc
20
micrometer, thread pitch gauge, vernier height gauge, feeler
gauge, three pin micrometer, depth gauge, pitch gauge, CO 5 3
thickness gauge, radius gauge, hole test etc.
Analysis of automobile exhaust gas and flue gas.
Use of feeler gauge to determine the gap of spark plug.
Any other modern measuring instruments CMM, EDM, Wire
cut EDM,USM etc
A minimum of 12 sets of experiments are mandatory out of total 20 experiments but both
experiments mentioned for programming and experiments on CNC machines are
mandatory.
Besides to the skill development in performing the work, oral examination should be conducted
during end semester examination.
The student’s assessment, continuous evaluation, record bonafides, awarding of sessional marks,
oral examination etc. should be carried out by the assistant professor or above.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME: CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MEL333 THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB 1 PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble: The course is intended to impart basic understanding on the working of internal
combustion engines. This includes various performance tests on internal combustion engines
as well as makes the students familiar with the evaluation of fuel properties such as viscosity,
flash and fire points, calorific value etc. which are key to any performance test.

Prerequisite: Should have undergone a course on Thermal Engineering with emphasis

on IC engines

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Measure thermo-physical properties of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels

CO 2 Identify various systems and subsystems of Diesel and petrol engines
CO 3 Analyse the performance characteristics of internal combustion engines
CO 4 Investigate the emission characteristics of exhaust gases from IC Engines
CO 5 Interpret the performance characteristics of air compressors / blowers

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 2

CO 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 2

CO 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2

CO 4 3 2 3 2 3 2 2

CO 5 3 2 3 2 3 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed
regarding award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15 Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and trouble shooting) : 25 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions:
Practical examination is to be conducted immediately after the second series test covering
entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be conducted under the
equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The number of candidates
evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for the University
examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The external examiner shall
endorse the record.

List of Exercises/Experiments: (Lab experiments may be given considering 12 sessions of

3 hours each. Minimum 12 experiments to be performed.)

1. Determination of flash and fire points of petroleum fuels and oils

2. Determination of viscosity of lubricating oils and fuels and its variation with
temperature
3. Determination of calorific value of solid and liquid fuels- Bomb Calorimeter
4. Determination of calorific value of gaseous fuels –Gas Calorimeter
5. Familiarisation of various systems and subsystems of petrol engine / MPFI engine
6. Familiarisation of various systems and parts of Diesel engine / Turbocharged
engine
7. Performance test on petrol engines / MPFI engine
8. Performance test on Diesel engines / Turbocharged engine
9. Heat Balance test on petrol/Diesel engines
10. Determination volumetric efficiency and Air-fuel ratio of IC engines
11. Cooling curve of IC engines
12. Valve timing diagram of IC engines
13. Economic speed test on IC engines
14. Retardation test on IC engines
15. Morse test on petrol engine
16. Experiment to find flame temperature of premixed flames at different equivalence
ratios and temperature of diffusion flames at different fuel flow rates.
17. Analysis of automobile exhaust gas and flue gas using exhaust gas analyser.
18. .Performance test on reciprocating compressor
19. Performance test on rotary compressor/blower
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Reference Books

1. J.B.Heywood, I.C engine fundamentals, McGraw-Hill, 2017

2. V. Ganesan, Fundamentals of IC engines, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2017
3. Stephen R Turns, An Introduction to Combustion: Concepts and
Applications, McGraw-Hill, 2017
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER V
MINOR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE Course Name CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET381 DYNAMICS OF MACHINES VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: This course mainly covers the topics namely force analysis of engines, turning
moment diagrams, balancing of rotating and reciprocating machines and stability analysis of
vehicles. Analysis of free and forced vibration of single degree of freedom systems are
included.

Prerequisite: EST100 Engineering Mechanics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Analyse forces in a four bar mechanism

CO 2 Draw turning moment diagrams for a steam engines and internal combustion engines.
CO 3 Calculate the unbalanced masses in rotating and reciprocating machines.
CO 4 Calculate gyroscopic couple and do stability analysis of vehicles
CO 5 Analyse free and forced vibrations of single degree of freedom systems

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO PO PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
4 5 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 2
CO 5 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain D’ Alembert’s principle.

2. Determine analytically the forces such as piston effort, force in the connecting rod and
side thrust on the cylinder walls of a reciprocating engine.
3. Draw the force polygon of a four bar mechanism.
4. Use virtual work and determine the external torque required to be applied in the case
of a slider-crank engine.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2)
1. Define coefficient of fluctuation of energy
2. Draw turning moment diagrams for single cylinder double stroke steam engine.
3. Find the centrifugal stress in a flywheel for a given tangential speed.
4. Determine the maximum fluctuation of energy for a multi cylinder engine.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3)
1. Distinguish between static balancing and dynamic balancing.
2. What is single plane balancing? Explain.
3. Draw the force polygon and couple polygon when several masses rotate in different
(parallel) planes.
4. Explain i) hammer blow ii) variation in tractive effort and iii) swaying couple in
locomotives
5. What do you mean by primary and secondary unbalanced forces?
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Derive an expression relating the stress in a flywheel and its linear speed.
2. Describe with neat sketches the effects of gyroscopic couple on pitching, rolling and
steering of a ship
3. Find an expression for the angle of heel for a two wheeler
 4. Define coefficient of fluctuation of energy and maximum fluctuationENGINEERING
MECHANICAL of energy.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
1. Explain the energy method and Newton’s method to determine the natural frequencies
of a single degree of freedom system.
2. Derive an expression for the logarithmic decrement.
3. Find the forced response of a damped single degree of freedom vibrating system
subjected to a harmonic excitation.
4. Distinguish between motion transmissibility and force transmissibility.
5. What is whirling? Derive an expression for the critical speed of a shaft.
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

V SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET381: DYNAMICS OF MACHINES

Maximum:100 Marks Duration:3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Explain virtual work method of force analysis of a four-bar mechanism.

2. What is meant by equivalent dynamic systems?

3. Define coefficient of fluctuation of energy and coefficient of fluctuation of speed.

4. Why flywheels are required?

5. Distinguish between static and dynamic balancing.

6. What is meant by partial balancing? List the effects of partial balancing.

7. Describe the effect of gyroscopic couple on the stability of a two-wheeler while

negotiating a curve.

8. Define coefficient of fluctuation of speed and coefficient of fluctuation of energy.

9. Explain the energy method of obtaining the natural frequency of a single degree of
freedom vibrating system.

10. Explain transmissibility. (10×3=30Marks)

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a) A slider crank mechanism of crank radius 60 mm and connecting rod length 240
mm is acted upon by 2 kN gas force at its piston. Calculate the torque to be applied on
the crank to make the mechanism in static equilibrium when the crank makes 60° with
the line of stroke. Use graphical method. (9 marks)
b) Distinguish between static and dynamic force analyses. (5 marks)
12. a) State and explain D’ Alembert’s principle. (4 marks)
 b) The ratio of connecting rod length to crank length of a vertical gasoline
MECHANICAL engine is 4.
ENGINEERING
The engine bore and stroke are 8 cm and 10 cm respectively. The mass of the
reciprocating parts is 1 kg. The gas pressure on the piston is 6 bar, when it has moved
40° from the inner dead centre during the power stroke. Determine:
i. net load on the piston
ii. net load on the gudgeon pin and the crank pin
iii. thrust on the cylinder walls
iv. thrust on the crank bearing

MODULE 2

13. a) Derive an expression for the centrifugal stress in a flywheel as a function of the
tangential velocity. (5 marks)

b) A machine is coupled to a two stroke engine which produces a torque of 800+180

sin 3θ Nm where θ is the crank angle. The mean engine speed is 400 rpm. The
flywheel and the other rotating parts attached to the engine have a mass of 350 kg at a
radius of gyration of220 mm. Calculate: i) the power of the engine and ii) the total
fluctuation of speed of the flywheel. (9 marks)

14. . a) Draw the turning moment diagram for a 4 stroke diesel engine. (4 marks)

b) The turning moment diagram for a multi cylinder engine has been draw to a scale
of 1 cm to 5000 Nm torque and 1 cm to 60° respectively. The intercepted areas
between output torque curve and mean resistance line taken in order from one end are:
-0.3; +4.1; -2.8; +3.2; -3.3; +2.5; -3.6; +2.8; -2.6 square cm when the engine is
running at 800 rpm. The engine has a stroke of 30 cm and the fluctuation of speed is
not to exceed 2% of the mean speed. Determine a suitable diameter and cross-section
of the flywheel rim for a limiting value of shaft centrifugal stress of 280 x 105 N/m2.
The material density may be assumed as 7.2 g/cm3 . Assume thickness of the rim to
be ¼ of the width.
(10 marks)

MODULE 3

15. a) Four masses 200 kg, 300 kg, 240 kg and 260 kg with radii of rotation are
positioned at 20 cm, 15 cm, 25 cm and 30 cm respectively. Their corresponding
angular positions with respect to mass 200 kg are 45°, 75° and 135°. Find the
 magnitude and position of the balancing mass required if the radiusENGINEERING
MECHANICAL of rotation is 20
cm. (10 marks)
b) Dynamically balanced system is statically balanced, but not vice versa. Give your
comments. (4 marks)

16. a) Describe the effects of partial balancing of reciprocating engines. (9 marks)

b) Four masses are attached to shaft at planes A, B, C and D at equal radii. The
distance of planes B, C and D from A are 50 cm, 60 cm and 130 cm respectively. The
masses at A, B and C are 60 kg, 55 kg and 80 kg respectively. If the system is in
complete balance, determine the mass at D and the position of masses B, C and D
with respect to A.
(10 marks)

MODULE 4

17. a) Explain spin vector, precession vector, gyroscopic applied torque vector and
gyroscopic reactive torque vector. (4 marks)

b) Explain the effects of gyroscopic couple on the stability of a four wheeler while it
negotiates a curve. (10 marks)

18. a) What is the function of a flywheel? (4 marks)

b) Determine the maximum and minimum speeds of a flywheel of mass 25 kg and
radius of gyration of 10 cm when the fluctuation of energy is 54.5 Nm. The mean
speed of the engine is 1000 rpm. (10 marks)

MODULE 5

19. a) A machine of mass 1000 kg is acted upon by an external force of 2450 N at a

speed of 1500 rpm. To reduce the effect, vibration isolators made of rubber having a
static deflection of 2 mm under the machine load and an estimated damping factor of
0.2 are used. Determine the following:
i. Force transmitted to the foundation
ii. Amplitude of vibration of machine
iii. Phase lag between the transmitted force and the displacement of mass.
(10 marks)

b) Distinguish between motion transmissibility and displacement transmissibility.

 (5 marks) MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
20. a) A damped spring mass system has mass 3 kg, stiffness 100 N/m and damping
coefficient 3 Ns/m. Determine the following:
i. Damping ratio
ii. Damped natural frequency
iii. Logarithmic decrement
iv. Ratio of two successive amplitudes (8 marks)
b) Describe briefly Newton’s method and energy method used for obtaining the
natural frequencies. (6 marks)
 Syllabus MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 1
Static and dynamic force analysis of mechanisms (four bar linkages only)-graphical method-
virtual work method -D’Alembert’s principle-equivalent dynamic systems-reciprocating
engine force analysis

Module 2
Flywheels-turning moment diagrams for steam engines-four stroke internal combustion
engine and multi cylinder engines-coefficient of fluctuation of speed-coefficient of
fluctuation of energy-design of flywheels.

Module 3
Balancing: static balancing-dynamic balancing-balancing of several masses revolving in a
single plane-several masses in different parallel planes-balancing of single cylinder
reciprocating engines-partial balancing and its effects-balancing of multi cylinder inline
engines

Module 4
Gyroscopic couple-effects on the stability of automobiles-two wheeler and four wheeler,
stability of ships and air crafts-Flywheels-turning moment diagrams-coefficient of fluctuation
of energy, coefficient of fluctuation of speed

Module 5
Vibration-free vibration of single degree of freedom systems-equation of motion-Newton’s
method-energy method-natural frequency-undamped and damped systems-logarithmic
decrement-forced vibration-response of SDOF systems to harmonic excitation-whirling of
shaft-vibration absorber-transmissibility

Text Books

1. Ballaney, P. L. Theory of machines and mechanisms. Khanna Publishers, 2010.

2. Rattan S S, Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2005.

Reference Books

1. Charles E Wilson and J Peter Sadler, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education, 2008.

2. Amithabha Ghosh and Asok Kumar Malik, Theory of Mechanisms and Machines, East
West Press, 2011

3. Thomas Bevan, Theory of Machines, Pearson, 2013.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
No Topic No. of Lectures
1
1.1 Static analysis of mechanisms-graphical method-four bar 3
mechanisms
1.2 Virtual work method -D’Alembert’s principle-equivalent dynamic 3
systems
1.3 Reciprocating engine force analysis 2
2
2.1 Flywheels, turning moment diagrams-steam engines-four stroke 4
internal combustion engines and multi cylinder engines
2.2 Multi cylinder engine-coefficient of fluctuation of speed- 4
coefficient of fluctuation of energy-design of flywheels
3
3.1 Static and dynamic balancing- balancing of several masses in a 3
single plane-force polygon
3.2 Balancing of several masses in parallel planes-couple polygon 3
3.3 Balancing of reciprocating masses-effects of partial balancing 2
3.4 Balancing of multi cylinder in-line engines 2
4
4.1 Gyroscopic couple-introduction-spin, precession and applied 2
couple vectors
4.2 Effects of gyroscopic couple on the stability of two wheeler and 2
four wheeler
4.3 Effects on the stability of sea vessels and air crafts 3
4.4 Flywheels-turning moment diagrams-coefficient of fluctuation of 3
energy, coefficient of fluctuation of speed
5
5.1 Vibration-free vibration of single degree of freedom systems- 3
equation of motion-Newton’s method-energy method-natural
frequency

5.2 Damped systems-logarithmic decrement-forced vibration-response 3

of SDOF systems to harmonic excitation
5.3 Whirling of shaft-vibration absorber- transmissibility 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CODE
THERMAL SCIENCE AND
MET383 VAC 3 1 0 4
ENGINEERING

Preamble: This course involve the application of principles studied in thermodynamics to

different energy conversion systems like steam turbine, steam powerplant, IC engines and
refrigeration systems. This course also covers the methods for improving and evaluating the
performance of different energy conversion systems. This course also helps to understand the
combustion phenomenon in IC engines.

Prerequisite: MET284 Thermodynamics ( Minor)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the working of steam power cycle and related components

CO 2 Discuss the working of steam turbines and methods for evaluating the performance
CO 3 Illustrate the performance testing and evaluation of IC engines
CO 4 Explain the combustion phenomenon and pollution in IC engines
CO 5 Discuss the principles of refrigeration and air-conditioning and basic design considerations

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO 12
10 11
CO 3 3 2
1
CO 3 3 2
2
CO 3 3 2
3
CO 3 3 2
4
CO 3 3 2
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Total CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. In a reheat Rankine cycle, steam at a pressure of 40 bar and 300°C is expanded through a
turbine to a pressure of 4 bar. It is then heated at a constant pressure to 300⁰C and then
expanded to 0.1 bar. Estimate the work done per kg of steam flowing through the turbine,
the amount of heat supplied during the reheat process and the cycle efficiency. Neglect
pump work.

2. Explain the term boiler mountings and accessories

3. With the help of a figure explain the working of Babcock and Wilcox boiler.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. In an impulse steam turbine, steam issues from the nozzle with a velocity of 1200 m/s.
The nozzle angle is 20o and the mean blade velocity is 400 m/s. The inlet and outlet blade
angles are equal. The blade velocity coefficient is 0.8. The mass of steam flowing through
the turbine per hour is 950 kg. Calculate: (i) Blade angles. (ii) Relative velocity of steam
entering the blades (iii) Tangential force on the blades. (iv) Power developed. (v) Blade
efficiency.

2. Derive the conditions for maximum efficiency of a Parsons reaction turbine.

3. Discuss the means of improving the performance of a steam turbine.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. A 4-cylinder four stroke petrol engine is working based on the following data: Air-fuel
ratio by weight = 15:1, calorific value of the fuel = 45000 kJ/kg, mechanical efficiency =
80 %, air- standard efficiency = 54 %, relative efficiency = 70 %, volumetric efficiency =
75 %, stroke/bore ratio = 1.25, suction conditions = 1 bar and 30 oC, r.p.m. = 2500, brake
power = 70 kW. Calculate: (i) Compression ratio. (ii) Indicated thermal efficiency. (iii)
Brake specific fuel consumption. (iv) Bore and stroke.

2. Discuss the working of a rotary engine and its merits and demerits over conventional IC
engines.

3. Explain the performance testing of IC engines

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain equivalence ratio and its significance in IC engine combustion.

2. Explain different stages of SI engine combustion with the help of pressure-crank angle
diagram.

3. Discuss detonation in SI engine, cause and effects and the engine variable influencing the
same.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Derive the expression for COP of an ideal air refrigeration cycle.

2. Explain the factors affecting human comfort

3. Write brief note on summer air conditioning

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

V SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET383: THERMAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration:3 hours

Use of Steam tables, Refrigeration tables, Charts and Psychrometric chart is permitted.

PART A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Explain Rankine cycle with help of a T-S diagram.

2. Differentiate between fire tube boiler and water tube boiler.

3. List the difference between throttle governing and nozzle governing.

4. Explain degree of reaction of a steam turbine.

5. Explain the term MEP

6. Explain the meaning of Specific Fuel

7. Explain the term Preignition

8. What do you meant by Octane number?

9. Why reversed Carnot cycle is practically impossible to execute?

10. Differentiate between specific humidity and relative humidity (10×3=30 Marks)

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a) Steam at a pressure of 15 bar and 250 ᵒC is expanded through a turbine to a

pressure of 4 bar. It is then reheated at constant pressure to initial temperature of 250
ᵒC and finally expanded to condenser pressure of 0.1 bar. Calculate efficiency of the
cycle. Pump work can be neglected. (8 marks)

b) Explain in detail different boiler mountings and accessories. (6 marks)

12. a) With the help of a neat figure explain the working of a Benson boiler.
MECHANICAL What are its
ENGINEERING
merits over other boilers? (8 marks)

b) With the help of T-s and p-h diagram explain the significance of binary vapour
cycle. (6 marks)

MODULE 2

13. a) Derive the condition for maximum efficiency of a reaction turbine. (6 marks)

b) With the help of figures enumerate the difference between pressure compounding
and velocity compounding of steam turbines. (8 marks)

14. a) What do you meant by reheat factor? List the parameters influencing the value of
reheat factor. (4 marks)

b) In an impulse steam turbine, steam issues from the nozzle with a velocity of 1200
m/s. The nozzle angle is 20o and the mean blade velocity is 400 m/s. The inlet and
outlet blade angles are equal. The blade velocity coefficient is 0.8. The mass of steam
flowing through the turbine per hour is 950 kg. Calculate: (i) Blade angles. (ii)
Relative velocity of steam entering the blades. (iii) Tangential force on the blades. (iv)
Power developed. (v) Blade efficiency. (10 marks)

MODULE 3

15. a) Discuss the terms a) Mechanical efficiency b) Volumetric Efficiency c) Thermal

efficiency of an IC engine (9 marks)

b) Discuss the effect of variable specific heat in actual cycle of IC engines. (5 marks)

16. The following observations were recorded during a trial of a four stroke single
cylinder diesel engine for a trial duration of 30 min. Fuel consumption is 4 liters,
Calorific value of fuel 43 MJ/kg, specific gravity of the fuel = 0.8, average area of
indicator diagram = 8.5 cm2, length of indicator diagram = 8.5 cm, spring constant=
5.5 bar/cm, brake load = 150 kg, spring balance reading = 20 kg, effective brake
wheel diameter = 1.5 m, speed = 200 rpm, cylinder diameter = 30 cm, stroke = 45 cm.
Calculate i) indicate power ii) brake power iii) mechanical efficiency iv) specific fuel
consumption in kg/kWh and v) indicated thermal efficiency. (14 marks)
 MODULE 4MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

17. a) With the help of pressure-crank angle diagram explain different stages of CI engine
combustion. (8 marks)

b) Explain the phenomenon of detonation in SI engine based on autoignition theory.

(6 marks)

18. With the help of figures compare different types of SI and CI engine combustion
chambers. (14 marks)

MODULE 5

19. a) A freezer of 20 TR capacity has evaporator and condenser temperature of -30 oC

and 25 oC respectively. The refrigerant R-12 is sub-cooled by 4 oC before entering the
expansion valve and is superheated by 5 oC before entering the evaporator. If a six
cylinder single acting compressor with stroke equal to bore running at 1000 rpm. is
used. Determine i) COP ii) Theoretical piston displacement per minute iii) Theoretical
bore and stroke. (9 marks)

b) Derive an expression for COP of a Reversed Brayton cycle for air refrigeration
system. (5 marks)

20. a) Explain the concept of summer air conditioning (10 marks)

b) Define i) DPT ii) RH ii) SHF and iv) ADP. (4 marks)

 Syllabus MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 1

Steam engineering- Rankine cycle, Modified Rankine cycle, Relative efficiency,

Improvement in steam cycles-Reheat, Regenerative and Binary vapour cycle. Steam Boilers:
Types of boilers, Cochran boiler, Babcock and Wilcox boiler, Benson boiler, La Mont boiler,
Boiler Mountings and Accessories.

Module 2

Steam turbines: classification, compounding of turbines-pressure velocity variation, velocity

diagrams, work done, efficiency, condition for maximum efficiency, multistage turbines-
condition line, stage efficiency. Steam turbine performance-reheat factor, degree of reaction,
cycles with reheating and regenerative heating, governing of turbines.

Module 3

Actual cycle analysis of IC engines- Deviation of actual engine cycle from ideal cycle,
Performance Testing of I C Engines- Indicator diagram, mean effective pressure. Torque,
Engine power- BHP, IHP. Engine efficiency, mechanical efficiency, volumetric efficiency,
thermal efficiency, relative efficiency and Specific fuel consumption.

Module 4

Combustion in I.C. Engines- Analysis of fuel combustion-A/F ratio, equivalence ratio, excess
air. Combustion phenomena in S.I. engines; Ignition limits, stages of combustion in S.I.
Engines, Ignition lag, velocity of flame propagation, auto ignition, detonation; effects of
engine variables on detonation; theories of detonation, octane rating of fuels; pre-ignition;
S.I. engine combustion chambers. Combustion in C.I. Engines; delay period; variables
affecting delay period; knock in C.I. engines, Cetane rating; C.I. engine combustion
chambers.

Module 5

Refrigeration– Reversed Carnot cycle, Air refrigeration system- Reversed Joule cycle.
Vapour compression systems-simple cycle - representation on T- s and P- h Diagrams.
Psychometric properties – specific humidity, relative humidity and degree of saturation,
thermodynamic equations, enthalpy of moisture, DBT, WBT and DPT, psychrometers,
psychometric chart. Comfort and industrial air conditioning, Comfort air conditioning-
factors affecting human comfort, Effective temperature, comfort chart, Summer air
conditioning

Text Books

1. Rudramoorthy , Thermal Engineering, McGraw Hill Education India, 2003.

2. R.K Rajput, Thermal Engineering, Laxmi publications, 2010.

3. Arora C. P, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning, McGraw-Hill, 2008.

4. Arora S. C. and Domkundwar, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning,
MECHANICAL Dhanpat Rai, 2010.
ENGINEERING
Reference Books

1. V. Ganesan, Fundamentals of IC engines, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002.

2. J.B.Heywood, I.C engine fundamentals. McGraw-Hill, 2011.

3. Rathore, Thermal Engineering, McGraw Hill Education India, 2010.

4. Dossat. R. J, Principles of Refrigeration, Pearson Education India, 2002.

5. Stoecker W.F, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning, McGraw-Hill Publishing Company,

2009.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1
1.1 Steam engineering- Rankine cycle, Modified Rankine cycle, 4
Relative efficiency, Improvement in steam cycles-Reheat,
Regenerative and Binary vapor cycle.
1.2 Steam Boilers: Types of boilers, Cochran boiler, Babcock and 3
Wilcox boiler, Benson boiler.
1.3 La Mont boiler, Boiler Mountings and Accessories. 2
2
2.1 Steam turbines: classification, compounding of turbines-pressure 3
velocity variation, velocity diagrams.
2.2 Work done, efficiency, condition for maximum efficiency, 3
multistage turbines-condition line, stage efficiency.
2.3 Steam turbine performance-reheat factor, degree of reaction, 3
cycles with reheating and regenerative heating, governing of
turbines.
3
3.1 Actual cycle analysis of IC engines- Deviation of actual engine 2
cycle from ideal cycle
3.2 Performance Testing of I C Engines- Indicator diagram, mean 2
effective pressure. Torque
3.3 Engine power- BHP, IHP. Engine efficiency, mechanical 3
efficiency, volumetric efficiency, thermal efficiency
3.4 Relative efficiency, Specific fuel consumption. 2
4
4.1 Combustion in I.C. Engines- Analysis of fuel combustion-A/F 1
ratio, equivalence ratio, excess air.
4.2 Combustion phenomena in S.I. engines; Ignition limits, stages of 3
combustion in S.I. Engines, Ignition lag, velocity of flame
 propagation, auto ignition, detonation; effects ofMECHANICAL
engine variables ENGINEERING
on detonation; theories of detonation,

4.3 Octane rating of fuels; pre-ignition; S.I. engine combustion 3

chambers. Combustion in C.I. Engines; delay period; variables
affecting delay period;

4.4 knock in C.I. engines, Cetane rating; C.I. engine combustion 2

chambers.
5
5.1 Refrigeration– Reversed Carnot cycle, Air refrigeration system- 2
Reversed Joule cycle.

5.2 Vapour compression systems-simple cycle - representation on T- s 2

and P- h Diagrams.
5.3 Psychometric properties – specific humidity, relative humidity and 1
degree of saturation-

5.4 Thermodynamic equations- enthalpy of moisture- DBT, WBT and 2

DPT–psychrometers, psychometric chart.

5.5 Comfort and industrial air conditioning, Comfort air conditioning- 2

factors affecting human comfort, Effective temperature, comfort
chart, Summer air conditioning,
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE CATEGORY L T P Credits

MACHINE TOOLS ENGINEERING
MET385 VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

This course facilitate students to learn about various machine tools and operations performed on
them. Theoretical foundation offered by this course must help the learners to make appropriate
decisions vis-a-vis preliminary planning and selection of machine tools, acquiring adequate
supervisory skills and to help the learners to efficiently interact with their peers to arrive at
solutions for day-to-day shop floor problems.

Prerequisite:
MET285 Material Science and Technology (Minor), MET286 Manufacturing Technology (Minor)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Describe basic concepts involved in metal cutting.

CO 2 Differentiate between machine tools, their components, operations carried out and their
unique metal removing mechanisms.

CO 3 Describe how to specify machine tools and cutting tools.

CO 4 Calculate the time required for machining.

CO 5 Clarify advantages of CNC over manual machine tools.

CO 6 Clarify how non-conventional machining techniques are advantageous to finish jobs with
intricate profiles and closer tolerances.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 1 - 1 - 3 - - - 2 1 - -
CO 3 - - - 2 - - - - 2 - 1 -
CO 4 3 2 - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 5 - - - - 2 - - - 2 - - 2
CO 6 - - - - - - 1 - 2 - - 1
Assessment Pattern
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination
1 (marks) 2 (marks) (marks)
Remember 15 15 35
Understand 15 15 35
Apply 10 10 15
Analyse 10 10 15
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the geometry of a single point cutting tool with a neat diagram.

2. Define machinability.

3. List various cutting tool materials and their applications.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Examine two reasons for centre drilling on lathe.

2. Differentiate between up milling and down milling.

3. Differentiate a wire-cut EDM from a general purpose EDM.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. List all specification parameters of a lathe.

2. Specify a plain milling cutter.

3. Specify a twist drill.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Calculate the time required for drilling a 20 mm hole in metal blank having thickness of 36
mm. The cutting speed is 15 metres/minute and feed is 0.2 mm/revolution.

2. Calculate the r.p.m. of lathe to obtain a cutting speed of 25 metres/minute, when turning a
rod of diameter 32 mm diameter.

3. Calculate machining time for cylindrical grinding, if length of longitudinal travel =500 mm,
feed =1.0 mm/revolution and work piece r.p.m = 500 in a single pass.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Clarify whether a conventional machine tool can be retrofitted with a CNC system.

2. Describe advantages of CNC system in manufacturing.

3. Distinguish between open loop system and closed loop system by giving an example for each.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Describe advantages of WJM over traditional punching/manual cutting

2. Compare process capabilities of conventional drilling and laser beam drilling.

3. Clarify why an EDM is not used as a replacement to CNC milling machine.

 MODEL QUESTION PAPER
FIFTH SEMESTER MECHANICALMECHANICAL
ENGINEERING ENGINEERING
MET385 MACHINE TOOLS ENGINEERING
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part−A
Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks.
1. State the effect of cutting speed, feed and depth of cut on surface finish obtainable.
2. Explain why built up edge on a tool is undesirable.
3. A brass pin of 500 mm length and 40 mm diameter is turned on a lathe to 38.8 mm diameter
in one pass. The cutting speed is 60 metres/minute and feed is 0.8 mm/min. Calculate the
machining time.
4. How do you specify (a) portable drilling machine (b) radial drilling machine (c) multiple
spindle drilling machine.
5. List various operations that can be performed on a milling machine.
6. Differentiate between grain and grade in a grinding wheel.
7. Bring out the differences between continuous path control and point-to-point positioning.
8. List the generic advantages of CNC system over their manual counterparts.
9. Discuss the characteristics of dielectric fluids used in EDM.
10. List the advantage of WJM over traditional cutting.
Part−B

Answer one full question from each module.

Module I

11. (a) Sketch the three views of a 25 mm single point square tool bit having tool signature as
indicated below: 15,15,10,10,15,10 (3 mm) (7 marks)
(b) Define machinability. Discuss all variables affecting machinability.
(7 marks)
12. (a) Discuss various cutting tool materials and their applications.
(b) Define tool failure. List and explain 2 reasons for normal tool wear. (7 marks)
(7 marks)
Module II
13. Describe construction details of an engine lathe with a neat illustration. (14 marks)

14. Draw and explain any four operations carried out in a lathe. (14 marks)

Module III
15. Draw and explain up milling and down milling. Decide which type is suitable to prevent
backlash. (14 marks)
 MECHANICAL
16. List all factors to be considered for selection of grinding ENGINEERING
wheels. Discuss each in detail.
(14 marks)
Module IV
17. Discuss all elements of a CNC system with a suitable block diagram.
(14 marks)

18. Discuss construction details of a CNC lathe and compare process capability of CNC lathe
with that of a manual lathe. (14 marks)
Module V
19. Describe ultrasonic drilling process giving areas of application. (14 marks)

20. Discuss construction and operation of a wire-cut EDM system with the help of a suitable
diagram. (14 marks)

Syllabus
Module 1

Definition of machining−brief history of machining−role of machining in society. Introduction to

metal cutting: Elements of cutting process− orthogonal cutting− mechanism of chip
formation−machining variables -types of chips−chip breaker− geometry of single point cutting
tool− tool nomenclature- speed, feed, depth of cut – cutting fluids- effect of machining variables
on surface roughness- Cutting tool materials−types−application. Machinability−tool life and
wear.

Module 2

General purpose machine tools – Lathe: principle of operation of lathe−construction details of

lathe−work holding and tool holding parts of lathe− types of lathe and specification−machining
time calculation on lathe−main operations. Drilling Machines: principle of operation-
construction details- work holding and tool holding devices− types of drilling machine and
specification. Twist drill geometry–specification−calculation of machining time in drilling.

Module 3

Milling machines: Principle of operation of milling machine-types and specifications−principal

parts-work holding devices−types of milling cutters-elemental milling motions-up milling, down
milling calculation of machining time. Grinding machines: classification −operations− surface,
cylindrical and centerless grinding−grinding wheels−specification−types of abrasives, grain size.
Dressing and truing of grinding wheels−selection of grinding wheels.

Module 4

Machine tools with Computer Numeric Control: Principle of operation of CNC system−basic
components of CNC system− classification of CNC systems− open loop control and closed loop
control− point to point and continuous path control− absolute positioning and incremental
positioning−CNC lathe−construction and operation – CNC milling machine−construction
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING and
operation (elementary treatment only)

Module 5

Non-conventional techniques in machining: Electric Discharge Machining (EDM): mechanisms

of metal removal- elements of an EDM− spark generation− application of EDM – Wire-cut
EDM-features. UltraSonic Machining (USM): mechanism of metal removal- elements of USM-
applications. Water Jet Machining (WJM): mechanism of metal removal-elements of WJM-
applications.

Text Books

1. R.K.Jain, Production Technology, Khanna publishers, 17th ed., 2013.

2. Hajra Choudhary, Elements of Workshop Technology Vol. II, Media Promoters & Publishers
Pvt. Ltd., 2010.
Reference Books

1. Serope Kalpakjian, Steven R. Schmid – Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, 8th ed.
Pearson.
2. Chapman W.A.J., Workshop Technology, Viva books (P) Ltd, 1998.
3. Peter J. Hoffman, Eric S. Hopewell et al., Precision Machining Technology, Cengage
Learning, 2014.
4. Malkin Stephen, Grinding Technology: Theory and application of Machining with Abrasives,
Industrial press, 2008.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of COs
Lectures
1.1 Definition of Machining−brief history of machining−role of machining in 1 CO1
society – automotive- aerospace− medical−consumable goods.
1.2 Introduction to metal cutting−elements of cutting process−work piece-tool 1 CO1
interaction in orthogonal cutting- rake angle, shear angle, cutting angle,
clearance angle−mechanism of chip formation−chip breaker.
1.3 Machining variables- geometry of chips (types of chips)- cutting speed, 3 CO1
feed, depth of cut- tool geometry ( single point)-nomenclature-cutting
fluids.
1.4 Effect of machining variables on surface roughness. 2 CO1
1.5 Cutting tool materials and application. 1 CO1
1.6 Machinability-factors affecting it –machinability index. 1 CO1
1.7 Tool life and tool wear. 1 CO1
2.1 General purpose machine tools− lathe- principle and operation of lathe- 1 CO2
how to specify a lathe-types of lathe. CO3
2.2 Construction details of engine lathe-work holding and tool holding parts of 2 CO2
lathe.
2.3 Main operations in lathe- machining time calculation of plain turning. 2 CO4
2.4 Drilling machines – principle of operation-construction details. 1 CO2
2.5 Work holding and tool holding devices. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING2 CO2
2.6 Types of drilling machine- specification of radial drilling machine. 1 CO3
2.7 Twist drill geometry and specification- calculation of drilling time. 1 CO4
3.1 Milling machine- purpose and principle of operation-types an specification. 1 CO2
3.2 Differentiate Horizontal milling machine and vertical milling machine – 1 CO2
principal parts and work holding devices of vertical milling machine.
3.3 Types of milling cutters- elemental milling movements- up milling, down 2 CO4
milling – calculation of plain milling time.
3.4 Grinding machines- classification- surface, cylindrical and centre less 1 CO2
grinding.
3.5 Grinding wheels−specification−types of abrasives, grain size−dressing and 3 CO3
truing of grinding wheels−selection of grinding wheels.
4.1 Machine tools with CNC- principle of operation of CNC – basic 2 CO2
components (block diagrams)
4.2 Classification of CNC systems− open loop control and closed loop 2 CO5
control− point-to-point and continuous path control− absolute positioning
and incremental positioning.
4.3 CNC lathe- construction and operation ( elementary treatment) 2 CO5
4.4 CNC milling machine- construction and operation ( elementary treatment) 2 CO5
5.1 Non-conventional techniques in machining: Electric Discharge machining
(EDM): mechanism of metal removal- elements of an EDM− physics of 2 CO6
spark generation.
5.2 Applications of EDM process. 1 CO6
5.3 Wire-cut EDM-features and applications. 1 CO6
5.4 Ultrasonic Machining (USM): mechanism of metal removal- elements of 2 CO6
USM-applications.
5.5 Water Jet Machining (WJM): mechanism of metal removal-elements of 2 CO6
WJM- applications.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER V
HONOURS
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET 393 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

The course imparts to the students, the basic aspects of theory of elasticity and stress strain
relationship as well as experimental stress analysis that includes the most versatile
techniques like photo elasticity, strain gauges and non-destructive test NDT methods

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyse the stresses, strains and deformations of structures under 2- and 3-

dimensional loading by tensorial and graphical (Mohr’s circle) approaches

CO 2 Describe the different instrument used for strain measurement materials using stress-
strain relationships.

CO 3 Explain the concept behind the measurement and instrumentation.

CO 4 Describe the concept behind Photo elasticity and brittle coating.

CO 5 Describe the different NDT methods to evaluate the strength.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes assessment Pattern

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1

CO 2 3 1 1 1
3
CO 3 2 1 1 1
3
CO 4 2 1 1 1
3
CO 5 1 1 1 1
3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Assessment Pattern

Blooms Category Continuous Assessment Tests ESE

1 2
Remember
Understand 40 40 80
Apply 10 10
Analyse 10 10
Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 Hrs

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern

Attendance 10
Continuous Assessment Tests ( 2 nos) 25
Assignments/ Quiz/ Course Project 15

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of
which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions
and carry 14 marks.

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Analyse the stresses, strains and deformations of structures under
2- and 3-dimensional loading by tensorial and graphical (Mohr’s circle) approaches.
1. Determine the resultant traction at a point in a plane using the stress tensor.
2. Evaluate the principal stresses, principal strains and their directions from a given state of
stress or strain.
3. Write the stress tensor and strain tensor.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Describe the different instrument used for strain measurement
materials using stress-strain relationships.
1. With help of fig, explain the construction and working of any one type of strain gauge.
2. Explain how strain can be measured over a long time at high and low temperature.
3. Explain how the delta rosette can be used for analysing the strain.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Describe the concept behind the measurement and instrumentation.
1. Describe Range and Sensitivity of a circuit
2. Define error, accuracy and precision with respect to measuring instrument.
3. With help of fig, Describe any one type of displacement measuring transducer.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Describe the concept behind Photo elasticity and brittle Coating.
1. Enumerate different steps involved in brittle coating.
2. Describe the effect of stressed model in plane polariscope.
3. Describe compensation techniques in photo elasticity.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Describe the different NDT methods to evaluate the strength.
1. Describe dye penetrant test with help of figure.
2. Explain penetrameter with help of figure.
3. With help of figure, explain Magnetic particle test.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL
UNIVERSITY
FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET 393 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS
Max. Marks:100 Duration: 3Hours

PART – A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION
CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Define stress at a point.

2. Explain principal stresses and strain.

3. How static and dynamic strain can be measured over a strain circuits.

4. What are residual stresses? What are its beneficial and harmful effects?

5. What are transducers? What are its properties?

6. Explain the different principles of measurements

7. Define stress optic law

8. What are the main uses of photo elastic coatings?

9. Distinguish between Destructive testing and Non-destructive testing.

10. What are the properties of X rays and Gamma rays.

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH
MODULE)

MODULE – 1

3 −1 1
11. The state of stress at a point is given by the Cartesian stress tensor −1 5 −1
1 −1 3
Kpa. Find (a) the stress invariant (b) characteristic equation (c) Principal stresses (d)
Unit normal of the principal planes. (14marks)

12. a) Derive the expression for Cauchy's equation for stress on a given plane, normal stress
& shear stress. (7marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
b) Derive stress compatibility equation of plane strain problems. (7marks)

MODULE – 2

13. a) With help of neat sketch, explain a mechanical strain gauge (7 marks)

b) Explain how rectangular rosette can be analyzed for strain measurement. (7 marks)

14. a) With help of fig, explain a optical strain gauge. (7 Marks)

b) Describe how strain can be measured over a long period at low and high temperature.
( 7 marks )
MODULE – 3

15. a) with help of figure, explain the working of cathode ray oscilloscope. (7 marks)

b) With help of fig, explain the working of displacement transducer. (7 marks)

16. a) Prove that constant current potentiometer circuit has more sensitivity than that
of a constant voltage circuit (7 marks)

b) With help of fig, explain the working of force transducer. (7 marks)

MODULE – 4

17 a) Describe the different types of available brittle coatings. (7marks)

b) Obtain the expression for intensity of light emerging from a plane polariscope with dark field
set up. (7marks)

18 a) With help of fig, explain Tardy’s method of compensation. (10 marks)

b) Explain isochromatic and isoclinics fringe pattern (4 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. a) Explain laser testing methods in NDT. (7 marks)

b) With help of fig, explain the steps involved in LPI. (7 marks)

20. a) With help of fig, explain Radiography test. (7 marks)

b) Explain the working of X – ray fluoroscopy (7 marks)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS

Module 1: Analysis of deformable bodies: stress, stress at a point using Cartesian stress tensor,
Cauchy's equation for stress on a given plane, normal stress & shear stress; Strain, deformation
and displacement (in Cartesian coordinates), strain components, 2D plane stress and plane
strain problems, principal stresses (2D & 3D), stress invariants, Mohr's circle representation for
stress in 2D and problems, representation 3D stress in Mohr's circle using principal stresses as
input.

Module 2: Strain measurements: strain gauges and stress gauges. Mechanical, optical and
electrical gauges – Construction and applications. Variable resistance strain gauges, gauge
characteristics, gauge sensitivity, static and dynamic strain – strain measurement over a long
period at low and high temperature. Strain rosettes – Rectangular rosettes, Delta rosettes.
Residual stresses : Beneficial and harmful effects.

Module 3: Instrumentation: Strain circuits, potentiometer circuits, Range and sensitivity, The
wheatstones bridge, sensitivity, Galvanometer, Transient response, Principles of
measurements: Error, Accuracy and precision , Uncertainty analysis, Curve fitting.
Oscillograph, cathode ray oscilloscope, Transducers – Displacement, Force, Pressure, velocity
and acceleration.

Module 4: Photo elasticity: The polariscope, Stress optic law, Polariscope arrangements –
Plane polariscope and Circular Polariscope. Dark field and light field, isochromatic and
isoclinics, Use of photo elastic coatings, compensation techniques.
Brittle coatings: Coating stresses, Failure theories, steps in brittle coating tests.
Module 5: Non Destructive testing Methods – Types – dye penetrant methods, Radiography –
X – ray and Gamma ray – X – ray fluoroscopy. Penetrameter – Magnetic particle methods.
Introduction to lasers in NDT – Ultrasonic flaw detection.

Text Books

1. J W Dally and W F Riley, Experimental Stress Analysis McGraw Hill, 1991

2. L S Srinath, M R Raghavan, K Lingaiah, G Gargesa, B Pant, and K
Ramachandra, Experimental Stress Analysis, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 1984
3. A Mubin, Experimental Stress Analysis, Khanna Publishers, 2003
4. Sadhu Singh, Experimental Stress Analysis, Khanna Publishers, 1996
Reference Books

1. M Hetenyi, Handbook of Experimental Stress Analysis, John Wiley & Sons Inc,
New York, 1950
2. C C Perry and H R Lissener, Strain Gauge Primer, McGraw Hill, 2nd Ed , 1962
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
3. W J McGonnagle Non destructive Testing Mc Graw Hill, 1961

COURSE PLAN

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module 1: Stress and Strain Analysis 9 hrs
Describe the deformation behaviour of elastic solids in equilibrium
under the action of a system of forces. Describe method of sections
to illustrate stress as resisting force per unit area. Stress vectors on
1.1 Cartesian coordinate planes passing through a point . 1 hr
Direction cosines of a plane. Equality of cross shear (Derivation not
required). Write Cauchy's equation (Derivation not required) for
stress on a plane as the product of stress tensor and direction cosine
vector. Normal and tangential (shear) components of stress on a
1.2 plane. 1 hr
Deformation, displacement, gradient of deformation and strains in
elastic solids. Cartesian components of strain and Cauchy’s strain-
displacement relationships (small-strain only). Strain tensor in 2D
and 3D. Write the stress tensor and strain tensor for Plane stress
1.3 and Plane Strain analysis. 1 hr
Stress on an oblique plane under axial loading, Discuss principal
planes, characteristic equation to find principal stresses for 2D and
3D state of stress, stress invariants. Evaluate principal stresses in
2D and 3D using
1.4 characteristic equations. 2 hrs
Discuss the order of principal stress and maximum shear stress.
Compare the principal stresses in 2D and 3D state of stress.
Represent the state of stress using principal stress tensor. Determine
the direction of principal stresses as eigenvectors of the principal
1.5 stress tensor. 2 hrs
Represent the 2D and 3D state of stress using principal stress
graphically (Mohr’s circle). Determine the maximum shear stress
1.6 by Mohr’s circle method and compare with the theoretical relations. 2 hrs
2 Module 2: Strain measurements 8 hrs
Strain gauges and stress gauges, Different types of strain gauges –
construction and working, Different application of strain gauges.
2.1 Variable resistance strain gauge 2 hr
Gauge characteristics, gauge sensitivity, measurement of static and
dynamic strain, and measurement of strain over a long period at
2.2 high and low temperature. 2 hrs
Strain rosette - Rectangular rosettes and Delta rosettes (simple
2.3 problems). 2 hrs
Residual stresses, harmful effects of residual stresses, beneficial
2.4 effects of residual stresses. 2 hrs
3 Module 3 :Instrumentation 9 hrs
Strain circuits, potentiometer circuits, Range and sensitivity, The
3.1 wheatstones bridge. 2 hrs
3.2 Principles of measurements: Error, Accuracy and precision, 1 hr
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Uncertainty analysis, Curve fitting.
3.3 Oscillograph ,cathode ray oscilloscope, 1 hr
3.4 Transducer – Characteristics and properties. 1 hr
Displacement transducer – Construction and working, Pressure
3.5
transducer - Construction and working. 2 hrs
3.6 Velocity transducer - Construction and working 1 hr
3.7 Acceleration transducer - Construction and working. 1 hr
4 Module 4 : Photoelasticity. 8 hrs
The polariscope, Stress optic law, Polariscope arrangements –
4.1
Plane polariscope and Circular Polariscope. 2 hrs
Dark field and light field , isochromatics and isoclinics , Use of
4.2 photoelastic coatings.
2 hrs
4.3 Different types of compensation techniques. 2 hrs
4.4 Coating stresses, Failure theories, steps in brittle coating tests. 2 hr
5 Module 5 :Non Destructive Methods. 8 hrs
Non Destructive testing Methods – Types – dye penetrant methods,
5.1
Radiography – X – ray and Gamma ray. 2 hrs
5.2 X – ray fluoroscopy , Penetrameter (Detailed description) 2 hr
Magnetic particle methods, advantages and disadvantages,
5.3
applications. 2 hrs
Introduction to lasers in NDT – Ultrasonic flaw detection.
5.4
2 hrs
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET395 ADVANCED THERMODYNAMICS VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: This course involves the application of principles studied in thermodynamics for
analysis of thermal energy systems. This course also covers the properties of pure substances,
Energy balance of reacting systems and advances in chemical thermodynamics.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply the concepts of basic thermodynamics, entropy and energy for analyses of thermal
energy systems.
CO 2 Understand properties of pure substance and thermodynamic properties of real gases
CO 3 Apply energy balances to reacting systems for both closed and open system.

CO 4 Define the chemical equilibrium constant and apply the general criteria for chemical
equilibrium analysis to reacting ideal-gas mixtures.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 20 20 50
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. One kg of water at 273 K is brought into contact with a heat reservoir at 373 K. When the
water has reached 373 K , find the entropy change of water, of the heat reservoir and of the
universe.

2. State and prove Clausius Theorem

3. Water at 363 K flowing at the rate of 2 kg/s mixes adiabatically with another stream of water
at 303 K flowing at the rate of 1 kg/s. Estimate the entropy generation rate and rate of exergy
loss due to mixing. Take T0 = 300 K

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. A large insulated vessel is divided into two chambers one containing 5 kg of dry saturated
steam at 0.2 MPa and the other 10 Kg of steam 0.8 quality at 0.5 MPa. If the partition
between the chambers is removed and the steam is mixed thoroughly and allowed to settle,
find the final pressure , steam quality and entropy change in the process

2. Draw the phase equilibrium diagram for a pure substance on h-s plot with relevant constant
property lines.

3. Show that for an ideal gas the slope of the constant volume line on the T-S diagram is more
than that of the constant pressure line.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Determine the adiabatic flame temperature when liquid octane at 298 K is burned with 300%
theoretical air at 298 K in a steady flow process

2. What is heat of reaction? When is it positive and when negative?

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
3. Calculate the degree of ionization of cesium vapour at 10-6 atm at the two temperatures of
2260 and 2520 K

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain law of mass action

2. Explain reaction equilibrium constant.

3. Discuss second law analysis of reactive systems

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

V SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET395: ADVANCED THERMODYNAMICS

Maximum: 100Marks Duration:3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Show that entropy is a property of the system

2. What is the meaning of quality of energy

3. Draw the phase equilibrium diagram for a pure substance on T-s plot with relevant
constant property lines.

4. Write Clausius – Clapeyron equations

5. Explain law of corresponding states

6. Explain Wander-Walls equation of state

7. Explain Second-Law Analysis of Reacting systems

8. What do you meant by adiabatic flame temperature?

9. Explain law of mass action

10. What is van’t Hoff equation

(10×3=30Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. Three identical finite bodies of constant heat capacity are at temperatures 300, 300
and 100 K. If no work or heat is supplied from outside, what is the highest
temperature to which any one of the bodies can be raised by the operation of heat
engines or refrigerators (14 marks)

12. A pressure vessel has a volume of 1m3 and contains air at 1.4 MPa, 448K. The air
is cooled to 298K by heat transfer to surroundings at 298 K. Calculate the availability
in the initial and final states and irreversibility of the process. Take P0 = 100kPa
(14 marks)

MODULE 2

13. Steam initially at 0.3 MPa, 523K is cooled at constant volume. Find

a) Temperature at which steam become saturated vapour,

b) What is the quality at 353 K,

c) What is the heat transferred per kg of steam in cooling from 523 K to 353 K

(14 marks)

14. Derive Maxwell relations and TdS equations (14 marks)

MODULE 3

15. a) What are virial coefficients ? When do they become zero? (7 Marks)

b ) Express Wander – Walls constants in terms of critical properties ( 7 marks)

16. Calculate the volume of 2.5 Kg moles of steam at 236.4 atm. And 776.76 K with
the help of compressibility factor vs reduced pressure graph. At this given volume and
pressure what would be the temperature in K, if steam behaves like a Vander-Walls
gas. The critical pressure, volume and temperature of steam are 218.2 atm, 57 cm3/g
mole and 647.3 K respectively.
(14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE 4

17. a) Explain second law efficiency of a reactive system ? (4 marks)

b) Explain first law analysis of reactive systems. (10 Marks)

18. The products of combustion of an unknown hydrocarbon CxHy have the

following composition a measured by an Orsat apparatus

CO2 8%, CO 0.9%, O2 8.8% and N2 82.3 % Find a) Composition fuel b) air-fuel
ratio and c) percentage of excess air used. (14 marks)

MODULE 5

19. a) What is Gibbs function of formation (5 marks)

b) Explain the phase equilibrium for a single component system

(9 marks)

20. a) What is degree of reaction (5 marks)

b) Explain the phase equilibrium for a multi component system

(9 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Syllabus

Module 1

RECAPITULATION OF FUNDAMENTALS. Basic definition and concepts; The basic laws of

Thermodynamics, Entropy flow and entropy production, 3rd law of Thermodynamics, Availability in
steady flow open system and in a closed system, Irreversibility and effectiveness.

Module 2

PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCES. P-V-T surfaces, phase diagram, phase changes, various
properties diagram, 1st order phase transition and 2nd order phase transition, Clapeyron’s equation,
Ehrenfest’s equations, Maxwell’s equations, equation for internal energy, enthalpy, entropy, specific
heat and joule Thompson coefficient.

Module 3

EQUATION OF STATE FOR REAL GASES. Compressibility factor and generalised compressibility chart,
Law of corresponding state, law of pseudo critical pressure and temperature, reduced coordinate,
Wander-Walls equation of state and other equation of state.

Module 4

CHEMICAL REACTION. Fuels and Combustion, First-Law Analysis of Reacting Systems: Steady-Flow
Systems and Closed Systems, Entropy Change of Reacting Systems, Second-Law Analysis of Reacting
systems.

Module 5

CHEMICAL THERMODYNAMICS. Gibb’s theorem, Gibbs function of mixture of inert ideal gases,
Chemical equilibrium, Thermodynamic equation for phase, Degree of reaction, equation of reaction,
law of mass action, heat of reaction and Vant Hoff Isober, Phase Equilibrium for a Single-Component
System and Multi-Component System

Text books:

1. Richard Edwin Sonntag , G.J. Van Wylen, Introduction to Thermodynamics- Classical and Statistical
Wiley , 1991

2. Cengel and Boles.,Thermodynamics : An engineering Approach McGraw-Hill, 2007 Sixth Edition

3. P.K. Nag. Engineering Thermodynamics Tata McGraw -Hill , 2013

Reference books:

1. M. Zemansky, R H Dittman. Heat and Thermodymics –7th Edition 1998

2. E. F . Obert, Concepts of thermodynamics – McGraw-Hill, 1963

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1
1.1 Basic definition and concepts; The basic laws of Thermodynamics, 3

1.2 Entropy flow and entropy production, 3rd law of 2

Thermodynamics,
1.3 Availability in steady flow open system and in a closed system 2
1.4 Irreversibility and effectiveness. 2

2.1 PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCES. P-V-T surfaces, phase 3

diagram, phase changes, various properties diagram,
2.2 1st order phase transition and 2nd order phase transition, 3
Clapeyron’s equation, Ehrenfest’s equations,
2.3 Maxwell’s equations, equation for internal energy, enthalpy, 3
entropy, specific heat and joule Thompson coefficient.

3
3.1 EQUATION OF STATE FOR REAL GASES. Compressibility 2
factor and generalised compressibility chart,
3.2 Law of corresponding state 2
3.3 law of pseudo critical pressure and temperature 3
3.4 Reduced coordinate, Wander-Walls equation of state and other 2
equation of state.
4
4.1 CHEMICAL REACTION. Fuels and Combustion, 1
4.2 First-Law Analysis of Reacting Systems: Steady-Flow Systems 3
and Closed Systems
4.3 Entropy Change of Reacting Systems 2

4.4 Second-Law Analysis of Reacting systems 3

5
5.1 CHEMICAL THERMODYNAMICS. Gibb’s theorem, Gibbs 2
function of mixture of inert ideal gases,

5.2 Chemical equilibrium, Thermodynamic equation for phase, 2

5.3 Degree of reaction, equation of reaction, law of mass action, 2

5.4 Heat of reaction and Vant Hoff Isober, Phase Equilibrium for a 3
Single-Component System and Multi-Component System
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSENAME CATEGORY L-T-P CREDITS

MET 397 FLUID POWER AUTOMATION VAC 3-1-0 4

Preamble :
This course provides basic ideas of fluid power automation. It enables the students to
design and optimize pneumatic and hydraulic automation systems.

Prerequisite : Nil

Course Outcomes :
After completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Explain the concept of power generating elements

CO2 Describe fundamentals of actuator and accumulator
CO3 Explain in detail control and regulation elements
CO4 Illustrate different circuit design methods
CO5 Illustrate electrical control of pneumatic and hydraulics circuits

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 1
CO5 3 1

Assessment Pattern
Continuous Assessment
Bloom End Semester
Tests
Category Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution and duration of ESE

Total Marks CA ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 Hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

End semester pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions
from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions.
Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each
question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the need and benefits of automation.
2. Discuss the various components of a fluid power system.
3. Discuss about the hydraulic and pneumatic element selection criteria based with
respect to a typical example.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Write a detailed note on Linear Actuators.
2. Give a short notes on (a) Spring Return Single acting Cylinder and (b) Double acting
cylinder with a piston rod on both sides
3. Make a circuit sketch showing the use of accumulators as a shock absorber.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Explain different types of direction and flow control valves.
2. Explain the components of closed loop hydraulic systems with a block diagram.
3. With a neat sketch, describe the construction and working of pressure compensated
flow control valve.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Construct a ladder diagram for a hydraulic circuit with six cylinders used to control
industrial robot.
2. Describe combinational and sequential logical circuits.
3. Design and develop a hydraulic circuit for the following sequence using cascade
method. A+ B+ C+

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain basic electrical devices used in electro pneumatic circuits.
2. Explain the functions of relays, timers andcounters in hydraulic and pneumatic
circuits.
3. Explain the basic structure of a PLC.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
V SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET397: FLUID POWER AUTOMATION
Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours
PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks
1. What are the limitations of fluid power automation?
2. What are the factors to be considered in the selection of pump?
3. Define spool valve?
4. How is counter represented in ladder diagram?
5. What is a linear actuator?
6. What is the function Karnaugh map?
7. Define underlap and overlap in the context of servo valve spools?
8. What are the uses of relays in hydraulic and pneumatic circuits?
9. What is the function of intensifier?
10. List the components of PLC. (10 X 3 = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module

Module 1
11. Describe in brief with neat sketches any 16 ISO symbols used for fluid power elements.
(14 marks)
12. Briefly explain the working and construction details of Vane pump with a diagram (14 marks)

Module 2
13. Describe the working principle of hydraulic accumulators (14 marks)
14. With a neat sketch, explain the end cushion provided in hydraulic cylinder
(14 marks)

Module 3
15. Draw a neat sketch and explain the working of pressure and temperature compensated flow
control valve (14 marks)
16. Write short notes on direction control valves and its types with neat sketches (14 marks)

Module 4
17. Draw and explain the working principle of fail-safe circuit with overload protection (14 marks)
18. Design and draw a hydraulic circuit for A+B+B+A+ sequencing operation and
explain. (14marks)

Module 5
19. Design and draw electro hydraulic circuit for hydraulic motor braking system

(14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
20. a) Draw the fluid power symbols of any 4 accessories (4 marks)
b) Describe the advantages and disadvantages of fluid power systems

(10 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1
Need for automation, classification of drives- hydraulic and pneumatic –comparison ISO
symbols for fluid power elements, selection criteria Fluid power generating elements-hydraulic
pumps and motorgears, vane, piston pumps-motors-selection and specification

Module 2
Drive characteristics- linear actuator–types, mounting details, cushioning–power packs–
accumulators

Module 3
Control and regulation elements—direction, flow and pressure control valves-methods of
actuation, types, sizing of ports. Spool valves- operating characteristics, electro hydraulic servo
valves-different types-characteristics and performance

Module 4
Typical design methods –ladder diagram- sequencing circuits design - combinational logic circuit
design-cascade method - Karnaugh map method.

Module 5
Electrical control of pneumatic and hydraulic circuits- use of relays, timers, counters, interfacing
with PLCs, proportional control of hydraulic systems

Text Books:

1. Alavudeen A, Fluid Power Transmission and Control, Charotar Publishing House, 2007
2. Jagadeesha T, Hydraulics and Pneumatics, I K International Publishing House, 2015
3. AntonyEsposito,FluidPowerSystemsandcontrol,Prentice-Hall,1988

Reference Books:

1. PeterRohner,FluidPowerlogiccircuitdesign, MacmillanPress, 1994.

2. E.C.FitchandJ.B.Surjaatmadja.Introductiontofluidlogic,McGrawHill, 1978
3. HerbertE.Merritt,Hydrauliccontrolsystems,JohnWiley&Sons,1967
4. Dudley.A.Pease,BasicFluidPower,PrenticeHall,1967
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. Topic No. of Lectures

Need for automation, classification of drives- hydraulic and

pneumatic – comparison, ISO symbols for fluid power 4
elements, selection criteria
I
Fluid power generating elements – hydraulic pumps and
motorgears, vane, piston pumps-motors- selection and 5
specification

Drive characteristics- linear actuator–types, mounting

II 9
details, cushioning–power packs–accumulators

Control and regulation elements—direction, flow and

pressure control valves- methods of actuation, types, sizing
III of ports, spool valves-operating characteristics, Electro 10
hydraulic servo valves-different types-characteristics and
performance

Typical design methods –Ladder diagram- sequencing

IV circuits design - combinational logic circuit design-cascade 9
method – Karnaugh map method.

Electrical control of pneumatic and hydraulic circuits- use of

V relays, timers, counters ,interfacing with PLCs, proportional 8
control of hydraulic systems
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI
 CODE COURSE NAME MECHANICAL
CATEGORY L ENGINEERING
T P CREDIT
MET302 HEAT &MASS TRANSFER PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

The objectives of the course are:

• To introduce the various modes of heat transfer and to develop methodologies for solving a
wide variety of practical heat transfer problems

• To provide useful information concerning the performance and design of simple heat transfer
systems

• Conceive the energy balance in any thermal practical situation involving heat transfer
mechanisms.

• To introduce mass transfer.

Prerequisite: MET203 Mechanics of Fluids, MET202 Engineering Thermodynamics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply principles of heat and mass transfer to engineering problems

CO 2 Analyse and obtain solutions to problems involving various modes of heat transfer
CO 3 Design heat transfer systems such as heat exchangers, fins, radiation shields etc.
CO 4 Define laminar and turbulent boundary layers and ability to formulate energy equation in
flow systems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 1

CO 2 3 3 3 2

CO 3 3 3 3 2

CO 4 3 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 10 20
Apply 10 20 50
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10marks
Continuous Assessment Test(2numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. A furnace wall is made up of three layers of thicknesses 250 mm, 100 mm and 150 mm with
thermal conductivities of 1.65 W/m.K and 9.2 W/m.K respectively. The inside is exposed to
gases at 1250 oC with a convection coefficient of 25 W/m2.K. and the inside surface is at 1100
o
C, the outside surface is exposed to air at 25 oC with convection coefficient of 12 W/m2.K.
Determine (a) the unknown thermal conductivity K (b) the overall heat transfer coefficient (c)
all the intermediate temperatures?

2. Derive an expression for steady state temperature distribution in a slab with internal heat
generation.

3. Dry air at 300 0C and 1 atm flows over a wet flat plate 600 mm. long at a velocity of 50 m/s.
Calculate the mass transfer co-efficient of water vapour in air at the end of the plate. Take the
diffusion co-efficient of water vapour in air, D = 0.26 x 10 -4 m2/s.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Discuss the importance of non-dimensional numbers in heat transfer problems.

2. A hollow sphere (k = 65 W/m.K) of 120 mm inner diameter and 350 mm outer diameter is
covered 10 mm layer of insulation (k =10 W/m.K). The inside and outside temperatures are
500 °C and 50 °C respectively. Calculate the rate of heat flow through this sphere.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. A steel ball (specific heat =0.46 kJ/kg.K, and thermal conductivity 35W/m.K) having 5 cm
diameter and initially at a uniform temperature of 450 oC is suddenly placed in a control
environment in which the temperature is maintained at 100 oC. Calculate the time required for
the ball to attain a temperature of150 oC.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Water at the rate of 4 kg/s is heated from 40 oC to 55oC in a shell and tube heat exchanger. On
the shell side one pass is used with water as the heating fluid and at a mass flow rate of 2 kg/s,
and entering the heat exchanger at 95 oC. The overall heat transfer coefficient is 1500 W/m2K.
and the average water velocity in the 2 cm diameter tubes is 0.5 m/s. Because of space
limitations, the tube length must not exceed 3 m. Calculate the number of tube passes, the
number of tubes per pass and the length of the tubes, keeping in mind the design constraints.

2. Two large plates, one at 800 K and other at 600 K have emissivities 0.5 and 0.8 respectively.
A radiation shield having an emissivity 0.1 on one side and emissivity 0.05 on the other side
is placed between the plates. Calculate the heat transfer by radiation per square meter with
and without the radiation shield.

3. A rectangular aluminum fin of thermal conductivity 200 W/m.K, 3mm. thick and 7.5 cm long
protrudes out from a wall. The fin base is maintained at a temperature of 300 oC and the
ambient temperature is 50 oC with heat transfer coefficient 10W/m2K. The tip of the fin is
insulated. Calculate the heat transfer from the fin per unit depth of material.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain velocity boundary layer and thermal boundary layer with neat sketches.

2. Air at 40 oC flows over a tube with a velocity of 30 m/s. The tube surface temperature is 120
o
C. Calculate the heat transfer coefficient for the following cases:
(i) Tube is square with a side of6 cm
(ii) Tube is circular cylinder with a diameter of6 cm.

3. Air at 20 °C at atmospheric pressure flows over a flat plate at a velocity of 3 m/s. If the plate
is 1 m wide and at 80 °C, calculate the following at x = 300mm.
i. Hydrodynamic boundary layer thickness
ii. Thermal boundary layer thickness
iii. Local friction coefficient
iv. Average heat transfer coefficient
v. Heat transfer rate
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Heat and Mass Transfer-MET302

Maximum:100Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A
Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks

1. Discuss about the application of Heisler chart and Schmidt plot in heat transfer
analysis.

2. How does a numerical solution method differ from analytical one? Explain.

3. What are the characteristics of a boundary layer?

4. Write the significance of Nusselt number.

5. What is meant by condensation heat transfer? How it differs from drop wise heat
transfer?

6. What are the main factors to be considered for a heat exchanger design?

7. Explain about radiation shape factor.

8. What are the properties of blackbody?

9. Give two examples of mass transfer in day-to-day life.

10. Explain Ficks law of diffusion with suitable assumptions.

(10 X 3 = 30 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11.
a) Derive 3-dimensional unsteady state heat conduction equation with heat generation, in
Cartesian co-ordinate system for anisotropic material. (7Marks)

b) A 3 mm diameter and 5m long electric wire is tightly wrapped with a 2 mm thick

plastic cover whose thermal conductivity is k = 0.15 W/m-K. Electrical measurements
indicate that a current of 10 A passes through the wire and there is a voltage drop of 8 V
along the wire. If the insulated wire is exposed to a medium at T∞ = 30°C with a heat
transfer coefficient of h = 12 W/m²-K, determine the temperature at the interface of the
wire and the plastic cover in steady operation. Also state with reason, whether doubling
the thickness of the plastic cover will increase or decrease heat transfer.

(7 Marks)

12.

a) Derive an expression for temperature distribution for 1-dimensional slab with varying
thermal conductivity. Assume the variation of thermal conductivity of slab as k = k₀
(1+βt).

(7 Marks)

b) A square plate heater 15 cm x 15 cm is inserted between two slabs. Slab A is 2 cm

thick (k = 50W/m-K) and Slab B is 1cm thick (k = 0.2W/m-K). The outside heat transfer
coefficients on side A and side B are 200W/m²-K and 50W/m²-K respectively. The
temperature of surrounding air is 25 °C. If rating of heater is 1 KW, find (a) Maximum
temperature in the system, and (b) outer surface temperature of the two slabs. (7Marks)

MODULE II

13.

a) Saturated propane at 300 K with a velocity of 25 cm/s flows over a flat plate of length
L=2 m. and width w=1 m. maintained at uniform temperature of 400 K. Calculate the
local heat transfer coefficient at 1 m. length and the average heat transfer coefficient from
L=0 m. to L=2 m. Also find the heat transfer. (7Marks)

b) Hot air at atmospheric pressure and 80°C enters an 8 m. long uninsulated square duct
of cross section 0.2 m. x 0.2 m. that passes through the attic of a house at a rate of
0.15m³/s. The duct is observed to be nearly isothermal at 60°C. Determine the exit
temperature of the air. (7Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

14.

a) Air at 15oC, 35 m/s, flows through a hollow cylinder of 4 cm. inner diameter and 6
cm. outer diameter and leaves at 45oC. The tube passes through a room where the room
temperature is 65oC and tube wall is maintained at 60oC. Calculate the heat transfer
coefficient between the air and the inner tube. (7Marks)

b) Consider a 0.6 m. x 0.6 m. thin square plate in a room at 30°C. One side of the plate is
maintained at a temperature of 90°C, while the other side is insulated. Determine the rate
of heat transfer from the plate by natural convection. If the emissivity of the surface is
1.0, calculate the heat loss by radiation. Also calculate the percentage of heat loss by
convection. (7Marks)

MODULE III

15.

a) A counter flow double pipe heat exchanger is to heat water from 20°C to 80°C at a rate
of 1.2kg/s. The heating is to be accomplished by geothermal water available at 170°C at a
mass flow rate of 2 kg/s. The inner tube is thin walled and has a diameter of 1.5 cm. If the
overall heat transfer coefficient of the heat exchanger is 640 W/m²-K, determine the
length of the heat exchanger required to achieve the desired heating. Use ε-NTU method.

(8 Marks)

b) Derive an expression for LMTD of double pipe, parallel flow heat exchanger.

(6 Marks)
16.

a) Steam in the condenser of a power plant is to be condensed at a temperature of 30°C

with cooling water from a nearby lake, which enters the tubes of the condenser at 14°C
and leaves at 22°C. The surface area of the tubes is 45 m2and the overall heat transfer
coefficient is 2100 W/m2 · °C. Determine the mass flow rate of the cooling water
needed and the rate of condensation of the steam in the condenser. (7Marks)

b) In a double pipe heat exchanger, hot fluid with a specific heat of 2300 J/kg enters at
380oC and leaves at 300oC. Cold fluid enters at 25oC and leaves at 210oC. Calculate the
heat exchanger area required for (i) Counter flow and (ii) Parallel flow. Take overall heat
transfer coefficient as 750 W/m2 K and mass flow rate of hot fluid is 1 kg/s. (7Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODULE IV

17.

a) A 70 mm. thick metal plate with a circular hole of 35 mm. diameter along the thickness is
maintained at a uniform temperature 250 oC. Find the loss of energy to the surroundings at 27
o
C, assuming the two ends of the hole to be as parallel discs and the metallic surfaces and
surroundings have blackbody characteristics. (6Marks)

b) Two large parallel planes with emissivities of 0.3 and 0.5 are maintained at temperatures
of 527 0C and 127 0C respectively. A radiation shield having emissivities of 0.05 on both
sides is placed between them. Calculate,

(i) Heat transfer rate between them without shield.

(ii) Heat transfer rate between them with shield.

(8 Marks)

18.

a) Two parallel plates of size 1.0 m. by 1.0 m. spaced 0.5 m apart are located in a very large
room, the walls of which are maintained at a temperature of 270C. One plate is maintained
atatemperatureof900 0Candotherat400 0C.theiremissivity’sare0.2and 0.5 respectively. If the
plates exchange heat between themselves and the surroundings, find the net heat transfer to
each plate and to the room. Consider only the plate surface facing each other.
(8 Marks)

b) Two rectangular surfaces are perpendicular to each other with a common edge of 2 m. The
horizontal plane is 2 m. long and vertical plane is 3 m long. Vertical plane is at 1200 K and
has an emissivity of 0.4. the horizontal plane is 18 0C and has an emissivity of 0.3.
Determine the net heat exchange between the planes. ( 6 marks)

MODULE V
19.
a) Explain the analogy between heat and mass transfer. (6 Marks)

b) Dry air at 300C and 1 atm flows over a wet flat plate 600 mm. long at a velocity of
50 m/s. Calculate the mass transfer co-efficient of water vapour in air at the end of the
plate. Take the diffusion co-efficient of water vapour in air, D = 0.26 x 10 -4 m2/s.

(8Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
20.

a) Gaseous hydrogen is stored at elevated pressure in a rectangular steel container of 10 mm.

wall thickness. The molar concentration of hydrogen in steel at the inner surface is 2 kg
mol/m3, while the concentration of hydrogen in steel at the outer surface is 0.5 kg mol/m3. The
binary diffusion coefficient for hydrogen in steel is 0.26 x 10-12 m2/s. What is the mass flux of
hydrogen through the steel? (8 Marks)
b) Explain the phenomenon of equimolar counter diffusion. Derive an
expression for equimolar counter diffusion between two gases or liquids.
(6 Marks)

Syllabus

Module 1-
CONDUCTION HEAT TRANSFER

Introduction to heat transfer- thermodynamics and heat transfer-typical heat transfer situations- modes
of heat transfer- mechanism of heat transfer- basic laws of heat transfer- thermal conductivity-effect
of temperature on thermal conductivity- combined heat transfer mechanism-real life situations of
combined heat transfer.

Differential equations of heat conduction-boundary conditions and initial conditions, one dimensional
steady state situations – plane wall, cylinder, sphere -concept of thermal resistance, critical radius,
conduction with heat generation- Two-dimensional steady state situations, transient conduction,
Lumped capacitance model, concept of Heisler chart and Schmidt Plot-Conduction shape factor-
Numerical methods of analysis-thermal analysis of rectangular fins.
Module 2
CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER

Fundamentals, order of magnitude analysis of momentum and energy equations; hydrodynamic and
thermal boundary Layers-Relation between fluid friction and heat transfer-Concepts of fluid
mechanics, Differential equation of heat convection, Laminar flow heat transfer in circular pipe –
constant heat flux and constant wall temperature, thermal entrance region, Turbulent flow heat
transfer in circular pipe, pipes of other cross sections, Heat transfer in laminar flow and turbulent flow
over a flat plate, Reynolds analogy, Flow across a cylinder and sphere- Natural convection- basics-
free convection heat transfer on a vertical flat plate-empirical relations for free convection heat
transfer.

Module 3

HEAT EXCHANGERS

Condensation heat transfer phenomena- the condensation Number-Boiling heat transfer Phenomena-
Simplified relations for boiling heat transfer-Introduction to heat exchangers-types of heat
exchangers-the overall heat transfer coefficient-Fouling factor-LMTD analysis of heat exchangers-
effectiveness-NTU method-Analysis of variable properties-compact heat exchangers-heat exchanger
design considerations.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 4

RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER

Physical mechanism of radiation heat transfer-Radiation properties-; Black body radiation Planck’s
law, Wein’s displacement law, Stefan Boltzmann law, Kirchoff’s law; Gray body Radiation shape
factors-heat exchange between non -black bodies-Infinite parallel planes-Radiation combined with
conduction and convection.

Module 5

MASS TRANSFER

Introduction to mass transfer- Molecular diffusion in fluids- Steady state molecular diffusion in fluids
under stagnant and laminar flow conditions - Fick’s law of diffusion-Types of solid diffusion- mass
transfer coefficients in laminar and turbulent flows- Introduction to mass transfer coefficient-
Equimolar counter-diffusion- Correlation for convective mass transfer coefficient- Correlation of
mass transfer coefficients for single cylinder- Theories of mass transfer- Overall mass transfer
coefficients.

Text Books

1. Sachdeva R.C., Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer, New Age Science
Limited, 2009

2. R.K.Rajput. Heat and mass transfer, S.Chand &Co., 2015

3. Nag P.K., Heat and Mass Transfer, McGrawHill, 2011

4. Kothandaraman C.P., Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, New Age International, New
Delhi,2006

Data Book

Heat and Mass Transfer data book: C.P. Kothandaraman, S. Subramanya, New age International
Publishers,2014

Reference Books

2. Holman J.P, “Heat transfer”, Mc Graw-Hill, 10th. Ed.,2009.

3. Yunus A. Cengel, “Heat and Mass Transfer: Fundamentals and Applications” McGraw-Hill
Higher Education; 6th edition,2019.

4. Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewitt, Heat and Mass Transfer, John Wiley and sons,2011
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE PLAN

MODULE TOPICS HOURS

ALLOTED

Introduction to heat transfer- thermodynamics and heat transfer-

typical heat transfer situations- modes of heat transfer- mechanism
of heat transfer- basic laws of heat transfer- thermal conductivity- 2-0-0
thermal conductivity-effect of temperature on thermal conductivity-
combined heat transfer mechanism-real life situations of combined
1 heat transfer.

Differential equations of heat conduction-boundary conditions and

initial conditions, one dimensional steady state situations – plane
wall, cylinder, sphere -concept of thermal resistance, critical radius,
conduction with heat generation- Two-dimensional steady state
6-4-0
situations, transient conduction, Lumped capacitance model, concept
of Heisler chart and Schmidt Plot-Conduction shape factor-
Numerical methods of analysis- thermal analysis of rectangularfins.

Fundamentals, order of magnitude analysis of momentum and

energy equations; hydrodynamic and thermal boundary Layers-
Relation between fluid friction and heat transfer-Concepts of fluid
mechanics, Differential equation of heat convection, Laminar flow
6-4-0
heat transfer in circular pipe – constant heat flux and constant wall
2 temperature, thermal entrance region, Turbulent flow heat transfer
in circular pipe, pipes of other cross sections, Heat transfer in
laminar flow and turbulent flow over a flat plate, Reynolds analogy,
Flow across a cylinder and sphere- Natural convection- basics- free
convection heat transfer on a vertical flat plate- empirical relations
for free convection heattransfer.

Condensation heat transfer phenomena- the condensation Number-

Boiling heat transfer Phenomena-Simplified relations for boiling
heat transfer-Introduction to heat exchangers-types of heat
exchangers-the overall heat transfer coefficient-Fouling factor-
3 5-2-0
LMTD analysis of heat exchangers-effectiveness-NTU method-
Analysis of variable properties- compact heat exchangers-heat
exchanger design considerations.
Physical mechanism of radiation heat transfer-Radiation properties-;
Black body radiation Planck’s law, Wein’s displacement law, Stefan
4 Boltzmann law, Kirchoff’s law; Gray body Radiation shape factors- 5-2-0
heat exchange between non -black bodies-Infinite parallel planes-
Radiation combined with conduction and convection.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Introduction to mass transfer- Molecular diffusion in fluids- Steady state
molecular diffusion in fluids under stagnant and laminar flow conditions -
Fick’s law of diffusion-Types of solid diffusion- mass transfer
5 coefficients in laminar and turbulent flows- Introduction to mass transfer 7-2-0
coefficient- Equimolar counter-diffusion- Correlation for convective
mass transfer coefficient- Correlation of mass transfer coefficients for
single cylinder- Theories of mass transfer- Overall mass transfer
coefficients
 COURSE NAME
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CODE
DYNAMICS AND DESIGN OF
MET304 PCC 3 1 0 4
MACHINERY

Preamble: This course focuses on important topics of dynamics of machinery and design of
machine elements. It covers the topics namely force of four bar mechanisms, design of
flywheels, welded joints, riveted joints and spring. Design of machine elements due to
impact, shock and fatigue loading are covered in the syllabus. Analysis of free and forced
vibration of single degree of freedom systems and a brief introduction about free vibration of
two degree of freedom systems is also included.

Prerequisite: EST100 Engineering Mechanics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Do engine force analysis and to draw turning moment diagrams

CO 2 Analyse free and forced vibrations of single degree of freedom systems
CO 3 Determine the natural frequencies of a two degree of freedom vibrating system and to
calculate the stresses in a structural member due to combined loading
CO 4 Design machine elements subjected to fatigue loading and riveted joints
CO 5 Design welded joint and close coiled helical compression spring

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 2
CO 5 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain D’ Alembert’s principle.

2. Determine analytically the forces such as piston effort, force in the connecting rod and side
thrust on the cylinder walls of a reciprocating engine.

3. Draw the turning moment diagram of IC engine.

4. Derive an expression for the coefficient of fluctuation of energy.

5. Derive an expression relating the stress in a flywheel and its linear speed.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the energy method and Newton’s method to determine the natural frequencies of a
single degree of freedom system.

2. Derive an expression for the logarithmic decrement.

3. Find the forced response of a damped single degree of freedom vibrating system subjected to
a harmonic excitation.

4. Distinguish between motion transmissibility and force transmissibility.

5. What is whirling? Derive an expression for the critical speed of a shaft.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Find the natural frequencies and mode shapes of a two degree freedom vibrating system.

2. What do you mean by eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a multi degree freedom vibrating
system?

3. What are the steps in the design process?

4. Define stress concentration factor. How can we minimize it?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain Goodman’s criterion.

 2. Explain Soderberg’s criterion.

3. Define endurance limit and factor of safety. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4. Derive an expression for the impact stress due to a freely falling body.

5. Describe the modes of failure of a riveted joint.

6. What are the different efficiencies of a riveted joint?

7. Classify the riveted joints.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What are the different types of welded joint?

2. Describe AWS welding symbols with neat sketches.

3. Determine the weld size of a joint subjected to axial, bending and twisting loads.

4. Derive an expression for the shear stress in the spring wire.

5. Derive an expression for the deflection of a helical compression spring.

6. Why concentric springs are required in certain applications?

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VI SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET304 : DYNAMICS AND DESIGN OF MACHINERY

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration:3 hours

Use of Machine Design Data Book is permitted.

PART A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Describe briefly the dynamic force analysis of a reciprocating engine.

2. Derive an expression for the coefficient of fluctuation of energy.

3. Derive an expression for logarithmic decrement.

4. Define whirling speed of a shaft.

5. Explain the mode shapes of a vibrating system.

6. What are the steps in the design process?

7. Define endurance limit. What are the factors affecting it?

8. What are the failure modes of a riveted joint?

9. Describe the AWS welding symbols.

MECHANICAL
10. Explain i) surge ii) resilience and iii) curvature effect ENGINEERING
of a spring. (10×3=30 Marks)

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a) Describe with a neat sketch the turning moment diagram for a four-stroke internal
combustion engine (4 marks)

b) The turning moment of an engine is given by the equation: 2500 + 750 sin 3θ Nm
where θ is the crank angle in radians. The mean speed of the engine is 300 rpm. The
flywheel along with other rotating parts attached to the engine have a mass of 500 kg
at a radius of gyration of 0.8 m. Determine i) the power developed by the engine and
ii) the percentage of fluctuation of speed of the flywheel (10 marks)

12. a) State and explain D’ Alembert’s principle. (4 marks)

b) The ratio of connecting rod length to crank length of a vertical gasoline engine is 4.
The engine bore and stroke are 8 cm and 10 cm respectively. The mass of the
reciprocating parts is 1 kg. The gas pressure on the piston is 6 bar, when it has moved
40° from the inner dead centre during the power stroke. Determine the following:

i. Net load on the piston

ii. Net load on the gudgeon pin and the crank pin
iii. Thrust on the cylinder walls
iv. Thrust on the crank bearing

The engine runs at 2000 rpm. At what engine speed will the net load on the gudgeon
pin be zero? (10 marks)

MODULE 2

13. a) A machine of mass 1000 kg is acted upon by an external force of 2450 N at a

speed of 1500 rpm. To reduce the effect, vibration isolators made of rubber having a
static deflection of 2 mm under the machine load and an estimated damping factor of
0.2 are used. Determine the following:
i. Force transmitted to the foundation
 ii. Amplitude of vibration of machine
iii. Phase lag between the transmitted force and the displacement ENGINEERING
MECHANICAL of mass.
(9 marks)
b) Distinguish between motion transmissibility and displacement transmissibility. (5 marks)

14. a) A damped spring mass system has mass 3 kg, stiffness 100 N/m and damping
coefficient 3 Ns/m. Determine the following:
i. Damping ratio
ii. Damped natural frequency
iii. Logarithmic decrement
iv. Ratio of two successive amplitudes (8 marks)
b) Describe briefly Newton’s method and energy method used for obtaining the
natural frequencies. (6 marks)

MODULE 3

15. Find the natural frequencies and mode shapes of a two degree freedom system shown
in figure. The masses are m1 = m2 = 10 kg and the stiffness values are k1=k2=2
kN/mm.

16. a) Define stress concentration factor. How can it be minimized? (5 marks)

b) Calculate the stress at point A on the fixed end of a rod of length 80 mm and
cross-sectional area 30 mm2 shown in figure. (9 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE 4

17. a) Distinguish between Soderberg and Goodman criteria. (5 marks)

b) A round bar is subjected to the following variable loads. Torque varying from
2kNm to 5 kNm, bending moment varying from 10 kNm to 12 kNm. Calculate the
size of the bar if it is made of C40 steel with yield stress of 324 MPa. Yield stress in
shear is 50% of that in uniaxial loading. Adopt a factor of safety of 2.5 on yield stress
for shear. (9 marks)

18. a) What are the advantages of riveted joint over welded joint? (4 marks)

b) Design a double riveted butt joint with equal widths of cover plates to join two
plates of thickness 10 mm. The allowable stress for the material of the rivets and for
the plates are as follows: For plate material in tension, σt = 80 MPa, for rivet material
in compression, σc = 120 MPa, for rivet material in shear, τ = 60 MPa (10 marks)

MODULE 5

19. a) Describe with neat sketches the different types of welded joints. (5 marks)

b) An eccentrically loaded bracket is welded to a support as shown in figure. The

permissible shear stress for the weld material is 80 MPa. Determine the size of the
weld. (9 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

20. a) Derive an expression for the axial deflection of a close coiled helical spring.
(5 marks)
b) A bumper consisting of two helical springs of circular section, brings to rest a
railway wagon of mass 1500 kg moving at 1.2 m/s. While doing so, the springs are
compressed by 150 mm. The mean diameter of the coil is 6 times the wire diameter.
The permissible shear stress is 400 MPa. Determine i) the maximum force on each
spring ii) wire diameter of the spring, iii) mean diameter of the coils and iv) the
number of active coils. Take G=0.84 x 106 MPa. (9 marks)

Syllabus
Module 1

Dynamic force analysis- D’ Alembert’s principle –four bar mechanism- engine force analysis
(reciprocating engines)- piston side thrust-connecting rod force-piston effort- dynamic force
analysis considering mass of the connecting rod-analytical method.

Flywheels-turning moment diagrams for four stroke internal combustion engine and multi
cylinder engines-coefficient of fluctuation of speed-coefficient of fluctuation of energy-
design of flywheels.

Module 2

Introduction- free vibration of single degree undamped systems- natural frequency-energy

method- Newton’s second law (free body diagram)-damped systems- logarithmic decrement.

Forced vibration-single degree of freedom systems-harmonic excitation-vibration isolation-

transmissibility-whirling of shafts.

Module 3

Introduction to two degree of freedom systems- natural frequencies and mode shapes.

Introduction to design-definition, steps in the design process, materials and their properties-
elastic and plastic behaviour of metals, ductile and brittle behaviour, shear, bending and
torsional stresses, combined stresses, stress concentration factor.
Module 4

Shock and impact loads- fatigue loading- Gerber, MECHANICAL Goodman and Soderberg criteria,
ENGINEERING
endurance limit stress, factors affecting endurance limit, factor of safety.

Deign of riveted joints- material for rivets, modes of failure, efficiency of joint, design of
boiler and tank joints, structural joints.

Module 5

Design of welded joints-welding symbols, stresses in fillet and butt welds, Butt joint in
tension, fillet weld in tension, fillet joint under torsion, fillet weld under bending,
eccentrically loaded welds.

Springs- classification, spring materials, stresses and deflection of helical springs, axial
loading, curvature effect, resilience, static and fatigue loading, surge in spring, critical
frequency, concentric springs, end construction.

Text Books

1. Ballaney, P. L. Theory of machines and mechanisms. Khanna Publishers, 2010.

2. Rattan S S, Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2005.

3. Bhandari V B, Design of Machine Elements, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2010.

Design Data Books (permitted for reference in the university examination)

1. Mahadevan, K., and K. Balaveera Reddy. Design Data Handbook; Mechanical

Engineers in SI and Metric Units. CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi, 2018.
2. NarayanaIyengar B.R & Lingaiah K, Machine Design Data Handbook, Tata McGraw
Hill/Suma Publications, 1984
3. PSG Design Data, DPV Printers, Coimbatore, 2012

Reference Books

1. Charles E Wilson and J Peter Sadler, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education, 2008.

2. Amithabha Ghosh and Asok Kumar Malik, Theory of Mechanisms and Machines, East
West Press, 2011

3. Robert L Norton, Design of Machinery, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2005

4. P C Sharma and D K Aggarwal, Machine Design, S K Kataria & Sons

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

No. of Lectures
1
1.1 Dynamic force analysis- D’ Alembert’s principle –Four bar 3
mechanism-
1.2 Engine force analysis (reciprocating engines)- piston side thrust- 4
connecting rod force-piston effort- dynamic force analysis
considering mass of the connecting rod-analytical method.

1.3 Flywheels, turning moment diagrams-four stroke internal 3

combustion engines and multi cylinder engines
1.4 Coefficient of fluctuation of speed-coefficient of fluctuation of 2
energy-design of flywheels
2
2.1 Introduction- free vibration of single degree undamped systems- 3
natural frequency-energy method- Newton’s second law (free
body diagram)-damped systems- logarithmic decrement.

2.2 Forced vibration-single degree of freedom systems-harmonic 3

excitation-vibration isolation-transmissibility-whirling of shafts.

3
3.1 Introduction to two degree of freedom systems- natural 3
frequencies and mode shapes.

3.2 Introduction to design-definition, steps in design process. materials 3

and their properties- elastic and plastic behaviour of metals,
ductile and brittle behaviour
3.3 Shear, bending and torsional stresses, combined stresses, stress 4
concentration factor.

4
4.1 Shock and Impact loads, fatigue loading- Gerber, Goodman and 2
Soderberg criteria, endurance limit stress, factors affecting
endurance limit, factor of safety.

4.2 Deign of riveted joints- material for rivets, modes of failure, 3

efficiency of joint, design of boiler and tank joints, structural
joints.

5
5.1 Design of welded joints-welding symbols, stresses in fillet and 3
butt welds, butt joint in tension, fillet weld in tension,

5.2 Fillet joint under torsion, fillet weld under bending, eccentrically 2
loaded welds.

5.3 Springs- classification, spring materials, stresses and deflection of 3

 helical springs, axial loading, curvature effect, resilience, static
and fatigue loading
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
5.4 Surge in spring, critical frequency, concentric springs, end 3
construction.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ADVANCED CATEGORY L T P Credits

MET 306 MANUFACTURING
ENGINEERING PCC 3 1 0 4
Preamble:
1. Understand the capabilities, limitations of conventional manufacturing
&machining process and what the need of advanced manufacturing processes is.
2. Understand, how to formulate tool path and program CNC machines.
3. Understand, how PLC operate and control automated equipment and systems.
4. Understand the need of atomic level surface roughness and machining process.
5. Understand the need of high velocity forming of metals.
Prerequisite: MET 205 Metallurgy and material science and MET204 Manufacturing
Processes
Course Outcomes - At the end of the course students will be able to
To be conversant with the advanced machining process and to appreciate the effect of
CO 1 process parameters on the surface integrity aspects during the advanced machining
process.
CO 2 CNC programming, select appropriate tooling and fixtures.
To categorize the various nontraditional material removal process based on energy
CO 3 sources and mechanism employed.
Analyze the processes and evaluate the role of each process parameter during micro
CO 4 machining of various advanced material removal processes.
Explain the processes used in additive manufacturing for a range of materials and
CO 5 applications.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirements)

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CO 1 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2
CO 2 2 - 2 - 3 - - - - - -
CO 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - 2
CO 4 2 3 - 2 - - - - - - -
CO 5 2 - 3 2 - - - - - 2 -
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

End Semester Examination
Bloom's Test I (Marks) Test II
(Marks)
taxonomy (Marks)

Remember 25 25 25

Understand 15 15 15

Apply 30 25 30

Analyze 10 10 10

Evaluate 10 15 10

Create 10 10 10

Mark distribution
Total Marks CIE marks ESE marks ESE duration
150 50 100 3 Hours
Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:

Attendance 10 marks
Regular class work/tutorials/assignments/self-learning
15 marks
(Minimum 3numbers)

Continuous Assessment Test(Minimum 2numbers) 25 marks

End semester pattern: -There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student
should answer anyone. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14
marks.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): - To be conversant with the advanced machining process and to
appreciate the effect of process parameters on the surface integrity aspects during the advanced
machining process.

1. How carbonyls are useful in powder metallurgy?

2. A simple integrator in which p is a constant is performed with a DDA integrator. Calculate the
output Δz at the first 8 iterations. The DDA contains 3-bit register which are initially set p =5 and
q=0. If each iteration is executed in 1 ms, draw the accumulated output Δz versus time.
3. What are the process parameters affecting the performance of USM
4. Draw and explain the effect of high speed on stress strain relationship of mild steel and copper
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): CNC programming, select appropriate tooling and fixtures.
1. Draw relay ladder diagram for the following sequential operations. Start button pressed, table
motor started, package moves to the position of the limit switch and stops. Auxiliary features
required are emergency stop, red light to indicate stop condition and green light to indicate
package moving condition. Draw input and output connection diagrams also.
2. Draw a PLC ladder logic diagram to get the reciprocating motion of a punching machine using
following sequential operations. One of the two motors operates when power is supplied.
Motor drives the punch to one side. When it completes the required movement in one
direction, a limit switch detects the position of the punch. First motor is get deactivated.
Second motor starts and moves the punch to the opposite direction. When it completes
required movement in opposite direction, a second limit switch detects the position of the
punch. Second motor is get deactivated and first motor is started again and the process
continues so as to get a continuous reciprocating motion. Also draw the input and output
diagrams.
3. A DDA contains 8 bit registers. The value of its p register is constant and P=150 and the clock
frequency is 10240pps. Calculate the output frequency of DDA
4. Describe with sketch the working and construction of recirculating ball screw used in CNC
machine tools.
5. Explain linear and circular interpolations used in turning. Draw a neat sketch of circular
interpolation

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): To categorize the various nontraditional material removal process based
on energy sources and mechanism employed.
1. How the amplitude and frequency of vibration effects on material removal rate in Ultra Sonic
Machining
2. What are the functions of electrolyte in ECM? What are the properties to be considered while
selecting electrolytes in ECM?
3. What are the process parameters affecting the performance of USM
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4. Which are the factors affecting its MRR in IBM process.

5. Describe the mechanism of material removal in Ion beam machining
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Analyze the processes and evaluate the role of each process parameter
during micro machining of various advanced material removal processes.
1. What is magneto rheological lapping? What are its advantages over conventional lapping?
2. Ablation of metals with Ultra short laser pulses.
3. Explain different types of elastic body waves
4. Draw and explain the effect of high speed on stress strain relationship of mild steel and copper
5. Explain with a neat schematic the fundamental principle of material removal in an abrasive jet
machiningprocess. Plot the trend for the Material Removal Rate with Nozzle Tip Distance
(NTD) and explain why it rises,platues and falls with increasing NTD.
6. What is meant by ductile regime machine?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the processes used in additive manufacturing for a range of
materials and applications.
1. What are the two materials that are most commonly used for doing rapid prototyping of parts
2. What are themajor process parameters the involved in LIGA process?
3. A new car is designed, incorporating new technology, suggest how rapid prototyping could be
applied for the development of the product. what are the steps followed? Discuss the factors
considered.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

SIXTH SEMESTER MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MET 306 - ADVANCED MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING

Maximum Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

Part – A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Explain the different stages of sintering process in Powder metallurgy

2. Differentiate the impregnation and infiltration process in Powder metallurgy
3. What are the different word address formats used in part programming?
4. Mention the purpose of miscellaneous functions in part programming. Write any 2 M –codes with
their applications
5. Describe the mechanism of material removal in Ion beam machining
6. What are the functions and desirable properties of dielectric fluid in EDM?
7. Explain the two Techniques in Explosive forming process
8. Differentiate P wave and S wave in High Velocity Forming
9. Write a note on Elastic Emission Machining
10. Explain the LIGA and its application, what is the aspect ratio in LIGA.
PART -B
Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE – 1
11. a) Explain the need and comparison between traditional and non-traditional manufacturing
processes. (7 marks).

12. Explain Merchant’s theory with neat sketches. (14 marks).

MODULE – 2
Write a Manual Part Program for the given figure (14 marks).

13. What is meant by interpolation in NC systems? Explain different types of interpolations.

(14marks)
MODULE – 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

14. a) What are the parameters influencing the MRR in USM process (7 marks).
b) How LBM differs from and EBM (7 marks).

15. Explain IBM with neat sketch; applications and vividly the process parameters influencing on
it (14marks).
16. MODULE – 4
a) Compare high velocity forming with conventional forming process (7 marks).

b) What are stress waves? Write the equation for finding the velocity of shear wave (7 marks).

17. Explain Electro Magnetic Forming and show that it can be applied to internal, external and
surface forming operations. (14 marks).
MODULE – 5
18. a.Explain the material removal mechanism in Diamond turn machining process (7 marks).
b. With a neat sketch explain Diamond turn machining process. (7 marks).

19. . a. With a neat sketch explain Selective Laser Sintering.(7 marks).

20. b.Describe the Laminated Object Manufacturing Process (7 marks).

SYLLABUS
Module I
Powder Metallurgy- Powder Production- Powder characteristics- Mixing – Compaction: -
techniques- sintering- Theory metal cutting - Orthogonal and oblique cutting- chip formation-
Merchant’s theory-Friction force - cutting tool materials -Thermal aspects of machining -Tool
wear and wear mechanisms - Economics of machining- Machinability- Cutting fluids.

Module II
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) – CNC: systems - contouring systems: principle of
operation -DDA integrator: -Principle of operation, exponential deceleration –liner, circular and
complete interpolator - NC part programming - Computer aided part programming - machining
centers, feedback devices.

Module III
Non Traditional machining processes: - EDM, USM, ECM, LBM, EBM, PAM, IBM, AJM,
AWJM.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module IV
High velocity forming of metals - Sheet metal forming - explosive forming - Electro hydraulic
forming - Electro Magnetic Forming.

Module V
Micromachining: Diamond turn mechanism, Advanced finishing processes: - Abrasive Flow
Machining, Magnetic Abrasive Finishing. - Magnetorheological Finishing, Magnetorheological
Abrasive Flow Finishing, Magnetic Float Polishing, Elastic Emission Machining. - Material
addition processes: - stereo-lithography, selective laser sintering, fused deposition modeling,
laminated object manufacturing, laser engineered net-shaping, laser welding, LIGA process.

Text Books
1. YoramKoren, Computer control of manufacturing systems, TMH
2. Jain V.K., Introduction to Micromachining, Narosa publishers.
3. Davies K and Austin E.R, Developments in high speed metal forming, the
machinery publishing Co, 1970, SBN -853332053
Reference
1. ASTME, High velocity forming of metals, PHI, 1968.
2. Ibrahim Zeid, R Sivasubrahmanian CAD/CAM: Theory & Practice Tata McGraw Hill
Education Private Limited, Delhi.
3. .P.Groover, E.M. Zimmers, Jr.”CAD/CAM”; Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing,
Prentice Hall of India, 1987
4. PetruzellaFrank.D. - Programmable logic controllers
5. Jain V.K., Advanced Machining Processes
6. Armarego and Brown, The Machining of Metals, Prentice – Hall.
7. Paul. H. Black, Theory of Metal Cutting, McGraw Hill.
8. ASM hand book Volume 16, Machining, ASM international, 1989
9. Lal G.K., Introduction to Machining Science, New Age Publishers.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE CONTENT AND LECTURE SCHEDULES.

No.of Course
Module TOPIC
hours outcomes
Introduction: Need and comparison between traditional, non-traditional
and micro &nano machining process.
CO1
1.1 Powder Metallurgy: Need of P/M - Powder Production methods:- 2
Atomization, electrolysıs, Reduction of oxides, Carbonyls (Process
parameters, characteristics of powder produced in each method).
Powder characteristics: properties of fine powder, size, size distribution,
shape, compressibility, purity etc.
1.2 Mixing – Compaction:- techniques, pressure distribution, HIP & 2
CIP(fundamentals to be explained in the class, self-learning topic , CO1
discretion of faculty)..
Mechanism of sintering, driving force for pore shirking, solid and liquid
1.3 phase sintering - Impregnation and Infiltration Advantages, 1
disadvantages and specific applications of P/M.
Theory metal cutting in turning: Tool nomenclature, attributes, surface
roughness obtainable - Orthogonal and oblique cutting - Mechanism of CO1
1.4 3
metal removal - Mechanism of chip formation –chip breakers –
Merchant’s theory.
Friction force laws in metal cutting - development of cutting tool
CO1
1.5 materials (fundamentals to be explained in the class, self-learning topic, 1
discretion of faculty).
Thermal aspects of machining -Tool wear and wear mechanisms -
1.6 Economics of machining, Machinability, Cutting fluids(fundamentals to 1 CO1
be explained in the class, self-learning topic, discretion of faculty).
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC):need – relays - logic ladder 1
2.1
program –timers, simple problems only.
CO1
Point to point, straight cut and contouring positioning - incremental and
absolute systems – open loop and closed loop systems - control loops in CO2
2.2 contouring systems: principle of operation -DDA integrator:-Principle of 3
operation, exponential deceleration –liner, circular and complete
interpolator.

NC part programming: part programming fundamentals - manual

programming –NC coordinate systems and axes – tape format – CO1
2.3 2
sequence number, preparatory functions, dimension words, speed word, CO2
feed world, tool world, miscellaneous functions –
Computer aided part programming:– CNC languages – APT language
2.4 3 CO1
structure.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Programming exercises: simple problems on turning and drilling etc - CO2

(At least one programming exercise must be included in the end
semester University examination). - machining centers, feedback
devices (fundamentals to be explained in the class, self-learning topic,
discretion of faculty).
Non Traditional machining processes:- Electric Discharge Machining
(EDM):- Mechanism of metal removal, dielectric fluid, spark generation, CO1
2
recast layer and attributes of process characteristics on MRR, accuracy, CO3
3.1 HAZ etc, Wire EDM, applications and accessories.
Ultrasonic Machining (USM):-mechanics of cutting, effects of CO1
parameters on amplitude, frequency of vibration, grain diameter, slurry, 2
CO3
tool material attributes and hardness of work material, applications.
Electro chemical machining (ECM):- Mechanism of metal removal CO1
3.2 attributes of process characteristics on MRR, accuracy, surface 1
CO3
roughness etc, application and limitations.
Laser Beam Machining (LBM), Electron Beam Machining (EBM),
Plasma arc Machining (PAM), Ion beam Machining(IBM) - Mechanism
of metal removal, attributes of process characteristics on MRR, accuracy CO1
3.3 3
etc and structure of HAZ compared with conventional process; CO3
application, comparative study of advantages and limitations of each
process.
Abrasive Jet Machining (AJM), Abrasive Water Jet Machining (AWJM) CO1
3.4 - Working principle, Mechanism of metal removal, Influence of process 1
CO3
parameters, Applications, Advantages & disadvantages.
High velocity forming of metals:-effects of high speeds on the stress
strain relationship steel, aluminum, Copper – comparison of CO1
4.1 2
conventional and high velocity forming methods- deformation velocity, CO3
material behavior, stain distribution.
Stress waves and deformation in solids – types of elastic body waves- CO1
4.2 2
relation at free boundaries- relative particle velocity. CO3
Sheet metal forming: - explosive forming:-process variable,properties of CO1
4.3 2
explosively formed parts, etc. CO3
Electro hydraulic forming: - theory, process variables, etc, comparison CO1
4.4 2
with explosive forming -Electro Magnetic Forming. CO3
Micromachining: Diamond turn mechanism, material removal CO1
5.1 mechanism, applications.- Advanced finishing processes: - Abrasive 3 CO4
Flow Machining, Magnetic Abrasive Finishing.

5.2 Magnetorheological Finishing, Magnetorheological Abrasive Flow CO4

3
Finishing, Magnetic Float Polishing, Elastic Emission Machining.
Material addition process:- stereo-lithography, selective laser sintering,
5.3 fused deposition modeling, laminated object manufacturing, laser 3 CO5
engineered net-shaping, laser welding, LIGA process.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET308 COMPREHENSIVE COURSE WORK
PCC 1 0 0 1

Preamble: The course is designed to ensure that the students have firmly grasped the foundational
knowledge in Mechanical Engineering familiar enough with the technological concepts. It provides an
opportunity for the students to demonstrate their knowledge in various Mechanical Engineering subjects.

Pre-requisite: Nil

Course outcomes: After the course, the student will able to:

CO1 Learn to prepare for a competitive examination

Comprehend the questions in Mechanical Engineering field and answer them with
CO2 confidence
CO3 Communicate effectively with faculty in scholarly environments
Analyze the comprehensive knowledge gained in basic courses in the field of
CO4 Mechanical Engineering

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2

CO 3 3 2 2

CO 4 2 3 2

Assessment pattern

Bloom’s End Semester Examination

Category (Marks)
Remember 25

Understand 15

Apply 5
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Analyze 5
Evaluate

Create

End Semester Examination Pattern:

A written examination will be conducted by the University at the end of the sixth semester.
The written examination will be of objective type similar to the GATE examination. Syllabus
for the comprehensive examination is based on following five Mechanical Engineering core
courses.

MET203- MECHANICS OF FLUIDS

MET205- METALLURGY AND MATERIAL SCIENCE

MET202- ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS

MET204– MANUFACTURING PROCESS

MET301- MECHANICS OF MACHINERY

The written test will be of 50 marks with 50 multiple choice questions (10 questions from
each module) with 4 choices of 1 mark each covering all the five core courses. There will be
no negative marking. The pass minimum for this course is 25. The course should be mapped
with a faculty and classes shall be arranged for practicing questions based on the core courses
listed above.

Written examination: 50marks

Total : 50 marks

Course Level Assessment and Sample Questions:

1. The shear stress developed in lubricating oil, of viscosity 9.81 poise, filled between two
parallel plates 1cm apart and moving with relative velocity of 2 m/s is
(a) 20 N/m2
(b) 19.62 N/m2
(c) 29.62 N/m2
(d) 40 N/m2
2. For a Newtonian fluid
(a) Shear stress is proportional to shear strain
(b) Rate of shear stress is proportional to shear strain
(c) Shear stress is proportional to rate of shear strain
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(d) Rate of shear stress is proportional to rate of shear strain

3. Atomic packing factor (APF) in the case of copper crystal is
(a) 0.52
(b) 0.68
(c) 0.74
(d) 1.633
4. What is the approximate strain energy expression for a dislocation of unit length,
irrespective of its edge or screw character?
(a) G2b/2
(b) Gb2/2
(c) G2b/4
(d) Gb2/4
5. Consider the following statements
1. Zeroth law of thermodynamics is related to temperature
2. Entropy is related to first law of thermodynamics
3. Internal energy of an ideal gas is a function of temperature and pressure
4. Van der Waals' equation is related to an ideal gas
Which of the above statements is/are correct?
(a) 1 only
(b) 2, 3 and 4
(c) 1 and 3
(d) 2 and 4
6. A gas is compressed in a cylinder by a movable piston to a volume one-half of its original
volume. During the process, 300 kJ heat left the gas and the internal energy remained
same. What is the work done on the gas?
(a) 100 kNm
(b) 150 kNm
(c) 200 kNm
(d) 300 kNm
7. Which one of the following casting processes is best suited to make bigger size hollow
symmetrical pipes?
(a) Die casting
(b) Investment casting
(c) Shell moulding
(d) Centrifugal casting
8. In gas welding of mild steel using an oxy-acetylene flame, the total amount of acetylene
consumed was 10 litre. The oxygen consumption from the cylinder is
(a) 5 litre
(b) 10 litre
(c) 15litre
(d) 20 litre
9. The number of inversions for a slider crank mechanism is

( a) 6 (b) 5 ( c) 4 ( d) 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

10. Total number of instantaneous centers for a mechanism with n links are

( a ) n/2 (b)n ( c) ( n- 1 ) / 2 ( d ) (n(n-1)) /2

Syllabus
MODULE 1

Fluids and continuum, Physical properties of fluids, Newton’s law of viscosity. Ideal and real
fluids, Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids. Fluid Statics- Pressure-density-height relationship,
manometers, pressure on plane and curved surfaces, center of pressure, buoyancy, stability of
immersed and floating bodies

Kinematics of fluid flow: Eulerian and Lagrangian approaches, classification of fluid flow,
stream lines,path lines, streak lines, stream tubes, , stream function and potential function

Equations of fluid dynamics: Differential equations of mass, energy and momentum (Euler’s
equation), Bernoulli’s equation, Pipe Flow: Viscous flow: shear stress and velocity distribution
in a pipe Hagen Poiseuille equation. Darcy-Weisbach equation,

MODULE 2

Development of atomic structure - Primary bonds: - characteristics of covalent, ionic and

metallic bond - properties based on atomic bonding Crystallography: - SC, BCC, FCC, HCP
structures, APF , Miller Indices: - crystal plane and direction - Modes of plastic deformation: -
Slip and twinning

Classification of crystal imperfections - forest of dislocation, role of surface defects on crack

initiation- Burgers vector –Frank Read source - Correlation of dislocation density with strength
and nano concept - high and low angle grain boundaries– driving force for grain growth and
applications

Phase diagrams: - need of alloying - classification of alloys - Hume Rothery`s rule – equilibrium
diagram of common types of binary systems: five types - Coring - lever rule and Gibb`s phase
rule - Reactions- Detailed discussion on Iron-Carbon equilibrium diagram with micro structure
and properties -Heat treatment: - TTT, CCT diagram, applications - Tempering- Hardenability,
Jominy end quench test, applications- Surface hardening methods.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE 3

Basic Thermodynamic Concepts Macroscopic and Microscopic viewpoints, Concept of

Continuum, Thermodynamic System and Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Types of
Systems, Universe, Thermodynamic properties, Process, Cycle, Thermodynamic Equilibrium,
Quasi – static Process, State, Point and Path function. Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics,
Measurement of Temperature, reference Points, Temperature Scales.

First law of Thermodynamics - First law applied to Non flow and flow Process- SFEE

Second Law of Thermodynamics, Kelvin-Planck and Clausius Statements, Equivalence of two

statements Entropy- Entropy changes in various thermodynamic processes, principle of increase
of entropy and its applications,Available Energy, Availability and Irreversibility- Second law
efficiency.

MODULE 4

Casting:-Characteristics of sand - patterns- cores- -chaplets- simple problems- solidification of

metals and Chvorinov's rule - Elements of gating system- risering -chills

Welding:-welding metallurgy-heat affected zone- grain size and hardness- stress reliving- joint
quality -heat treatment of welded joints - weldability - destructive and non destructive tests of
welded joints Thermit welding, friction welding - Resistance welding, Arc Welding,
Oxyacetyline welding

Rolling:- principles - types of rolls and rolling mills - mechanics of flat rolling-Defects-vibration
and chatter - flat rolling -miscellaneous rolling process

Forging: methods analysis, applications, die forging, defects in forging

MODULE 5

Introduction to kinematics and mechanisms - various mechanisms, kinematic

diagrams, degree of freedom- Grashof’s criterion, inversions, coupler curves mechanical
advantage, transmission angle. straight line mechanisms exact, approximate. Displacement,
velocity analysis– relative motion - relative velocity. Instantaneous centre -Kennedy’s
theorem.

Acceleration analysis- Relative acceleration - Coriolis acceleration - graphical and analytical

methods.
Cams - classification of cam and followers - displacement diagrams, velocity and acceleration
analysis of SHM, uniform velocity, uniform acceleration, cycloidal motion
Graphical cam profile synthesis, pressure angle.
 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN MECHANICAL
CATEGORY L T ENGINEERING
P CREDITS
MEL332
& ANALYSIS LAB PCC 0 0 3 2
Preamble:
• To introduce students to the basics and standards of engineering design and analysis
related to machine components.
• To make students familiarize with different solid modelling and analysis soft wares
• To convey the principles and requirements ofmodelling and analysis of machine
elements.
• To introduce the preparation of part modelling and assembly modelling of machineries
• To introduce standard CAD packages to perform Finite Element Analysis of machine
parts
Prerequisite:
EST 110 - Engineering Graphics
MEL 201 - Computer Aided Machine Drawing
Course Outcomes - At the end of the course students will be able to
CO1 Gain working knowledge in Computer Aided Design and modelling procedures.
CO2 Gain knowledge in creating solid machinery parts.
CO3 Gain knowledge in assembling machine elements.
CO4 Gain working knowledge in Finite Element Analysis.
CO5 Solve simple structural, heat and fluid flow problems using standard software

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirements)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO2 3 - 1 - - - - - - 3 - -
CO3 3 3 - - - - - - 2 2 - -
CO4 3 1 3 - - - - 1 2 3 - -
CO5 3 3 2 - - - - 2 3 3 - -

Mark Distribution
Total Marks CIE Marks ESE marks ESE duration
150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:

Attendance 15 marks
Regular class work/Modelling and Analysis/Lab
30 marks
Record and Class Performance
Continuous Assessment Test (minimum two tests) 30 marks
Continuous Assessment test pattern MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Taxonomy Test 1 - PART A Test 2 - PART B
MODELLING (marks) ANALYSIS (marks)
Remember 10 10
Understand 10 10
Apply 20 20
Analyse 15 15
Evaluate 20 20
Create 25 25

End semester examination pattern

End semester examination shall be conducted on modelling and analysis and based on
complete syllabus. The following general guidelines should be maintained for the award of marks
Part A Assembly Modelling – 35 marks
Part B Analysis – 30 marks
Viva Voce – 10 marks.

Conduct of University Practical Examinations

The Principals of the concerned Engineering Colleges with the help of the
Chairmen/Chairperson will conduct the practical examination with the approval from the University
and bonafide work / laboratory record, hall ticket, identity card issued by college are mandatory for
appearing practical University examinations. No practical examination should be conducted without
the presence of an external examiner appointed by the University.

References Books:

1. Daryl Logan, A First course in Finite Element Method, Thomson Learning, 2007
2. David V Hutton, Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill,2003
3. Ibrahim Zeid, CAD/ CAM Theory and Practice, McGraw Hill, 2007
4. Mikell P. Groover and Emory W. Zimmer, CAD/ CAM – Computer aided design and
manufacturing, Pearson Education,1987
5. T. R. Chandrupatla and A. D. Belagundu, Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering,
Pearson Education, 2012
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Experiment List (Minimum 12 exercises)

COURSE
SL.NO PART - A (Minimum 6 models) HOURS
OUTCOMES
Creation of high end part models (minimum 2 models,
1 Questions for examinations must not be taken from CO1, CO2 6
this portions)
Creating assembly models of Socket and spigot joint,
Knuckle Joint, Rigid flange couplings, Bushed Pin
CO1, CO2,
2 flexible coupling, Plummer block, Single plate clutch 12
CO3
and Cone friction clutch. Pipe joints, Screw jack, Tail
stock etc. (minimum 4 models)
PART – B (Minimum 6 problems)
3 Structural analysis. (minimum 3 problems) CO4, CO5 6
4 Thermal analysis. (minimum 2 problems) CO4, CO5 3
5 Fluid flow analysis. (minimum 1 problem) CO4, CO5 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
END SEMSTER EXAMINATION
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
MEL332: COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND ANALYSIS LAB
Duration : 2.5 hours Marks : 75
Note :
1. All dimensions in mm
2. Assume missing dimensions appropriately
3. A4 size answer booklet shall be supplied
4. Viva Voce shall be conducted for 10 marks
PART A (ASSEMBLY MODELLING) – 35 marks
1. Create an assembly model using the part details given below
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART B (FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS) – 30 marks

2. Air flows over a long cylinder of 150mm diameter at a velocity of 3m/sec at a temperature of
105º F. Using this data and applying finite element technique find
a. Max velocity
b. Plot flow trajectories
c. Cut plot of velocity
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MEL334 THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB-II
PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble: The course is intended to enable the students to get exposed to equipment related
to heat and mass transfer. This includes understanding the working of equipments related to
various heat transfer processes viz conduction, convection, radiation and mass transfer. These
equipments are heat exchangers, refrigeration and air conditioning systems,
compressor/blower and their applications in real life problems. Also the thermo physical
properties of materials which are integral to these equipments will also be evaluated. Apart
from this, calibration of various instruments which are essential to these equipments will be
done.

Prerequisite: Should have undergone a course on Heat and Mass Transfer

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Evaluate thermal properties of materials in conduction, convection and radiation

CO 2 Analyse the performance of heat exchangers
CO 3 Illustrate the operational performances of refrigeration and air conditioning systems
CO 4 Perform calibration of thermocouples and pressure gauges

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 2

CO 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 2

CO 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2

CO 4 3 2 3 2 3 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed

regarding award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15 Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and trouble shooting) : 25 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions:
Practical examination is to be conducted immediately after the second series test covering
entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be conducted under the
equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The number of candidates
evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for the University
examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The external examiner shall
endorse the record.

Reference Books

1. Yunus A. Cengel, “Heat Transfer a Practical Approach”, Tata McGraw-Hill

Education, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. R. C. Sachdeva, “Fundamentals of Engineering, Heat and Mass Transfer”, New Age
publication, 3 rd Edition, 2012.
3. Holman J.P, “Heat transfer”, Mc Graw-Hill, 10th. Ed., 2009
4. Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewitt, Heat and Mass Transfer, John Wiley and
sons, 2011
5. Kothandaraman, C.P., Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, New Age
International, New Delhi, 2006
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

List of Exercises/Experiments: (Lab experiments may be given considering 12 sessions of 3

hours each. Minimum 12 experiments to be performed.)

1. Determination of LMTD and effectiveness of parallel flow, Counter flow and cross
flow heat exchangers
2. Performance studies on a shell and tube heat exchanger
3. Development of heat transfer correlation for heat exchangers/condenser using
modified Wilson Plot Method
4. Determination of heat transfer coefficients in free convection
5. Determination of heat transfer coefficients in forced convection
6. Determination of thermal conductivity of solids (composite wall/metal rod)
7. Determination of thermal conductivity of powder
8. Determination of thermal conductivity of liquids
9. Measurement of unsteady state conduction heat transfer
10. Determination of emissivity of a specimen
11. Determination of Stefan Boltzman constant
12. Measurement of solar radiation
13. Experimental study of dropwise and filmwise condensation
14. Experiments on boiling heat transfer
15. Study and performance test on refrigeration (Refrigeration Test rig)
16. Study and performance test on air conditioning equipment (Air Conditioning test rig)
17. Performance study on heat pipe
18. Calibration of Thermocouples
19. Calibration of Pressure gauge
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET 312 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:

Nondestructive Testing (NDT) plays an extremely important role in quality control, flaw
detection and structural health monitoring covering a wide range of industries. There are
varieties of NDT techniques in use. This course will first cover the fundamental science
behind the commonly used NDT methods to build the basic understanding on the underlying
principles. It will then go on to cover the process details of each of these NDT methods.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Have a basic knowledge of surface NDT which enables to carry out various inspections
in accordance with the established procedures.
CO 2 The students will be able to differentiate various defect types and select the appropriate
NDT methods for the specimen.
CO 3 Calibrate the instrument and evaluate the component for imperfections.
CO 4 Have a basic knowledge of ultrasonic testing which enables them to perform inspection
of samples.
CO 5 Have a complete theoretical and practical understanding of the radiographic testing,
interpretation and evaluation.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 1
CO 2 3 3 2 1
CO 3 3 3 1 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2
CO 5 3 3 1 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 25 25 25
Understand 25 25 25
Apply 30 30 30
Analyse 10 10 10
Evaluate 10 10 10
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain why NDT methods were initially developed

2. Describe the uses of NDT

3. Define the functionality of Destructive method

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Name the various nondestructive test methods

2. Recognize the NDT method abbreviations

3. Briefly explain each NDT method

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the discontinuities inherent in various manufacturing processes

2. Define the causes, prevention, and repair of those welding discontinuities

3. Explain the discontinuities inherent in various welding processes

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain basic principle of Radiographic examination.

2. Discuss principle of radiographic testing and give its application and limitation
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
3. Explain the principle, application and disadvantages of Radiographic Testing.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Describe the various types of RT equipment

2. Describe the basic principles of gamma and X-ray generation

3. Name the three means of protection to help reduce exposure to radiation

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

SIXTH SEMESTER MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING - MET 312

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

Part – A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Define Non-destructive testing?

2. Explain the basic principle of Visual testing?

3. Explain the sequence of operation of Liquid penetrant testing?

4. Explain the basic principle of Liquid penetrant testing?

5. How are the materials classified based on their interaction with a magnetic field?

6. Explain the Hysteresis Loop and Magnetic Properties of a material?

7. Compare X-rays and Gamma rays?

8. What is Snell’s Law and it’s significance in Ultrasonic Testing?

9. Define the terms (a) Radiation Energy, (b) Intensity

10. What are the physical aspects of E.C.T?

PART -B

Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE – 1

11. a) With the help of suitable examples, differentiate between destructive and
nondestructive testing techniques. (8 Mark)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
b) With the help of a neat diagram, explain computer enhanced visual inspection
system. (6 Mark)
OR
12. a) Explain visual inspection process. Also explain about the different types of optical
aids used in the process. (8 Mark)
b) List the applications and Limitations of Visual inspection technique in NDT (6 Mark)

MODULE – 2

13. a) How are the penetrants classified based on (8 Mark)

a. Physical properties
b. Removal techniques
c. Strength of indication
b) What are the methods used to remove excess penetrants during LPI (6 Mark)
OR
14. a) Explain the working principle of liquid penetrant inspection (LPI). With neat sketches
explain the various steps involved in performing LPI. (8 Mark)
b) Explain different types of developers and how it is being applied (6 Mark)

MODULE – 3

15. a) With the help of neat sketches explain about any four types of magnetization
techniques used in magnetic particle inspection (MPI). (8 Mark)
b) What are the differences between dry and wet continuous MPI? (6 Mark)
OR
16. a) Differentiate between direct and indirect method of magnetization. Write the
advantages and disadvantages of both methods. (8 Mark)
b) What is continuous testing and residual technique of MPI (6 Mark)

MODULE – 4

17. a) With the help of neat figures, differentiate between through transmission
technique and pulse echo testing techniques used in ultrasonic testing. (8 mark)
b) What are the different types of probes used in ultrasonic testing? (6 mark)

OR
18. a) What are the different wave forms used in ultrasonic testing? (8 Mark)
b) With neat sketches explain the following: (6 mark)
i) A-Scan ii) B-Scan iii) C-Scan

MODULE – 5
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
19. a) With neat sketches explain about the different inspection techniques in
radiography testing (RT). (8 Mark)
b) Explain about various steps involved in film processing in RT. (6 mark)

OR
20. a) Explain the following terms associated with ECT: (8 Mark)
i) Lift off effect ii) Edge effect iii) End effect
b) Explain about eddy current testing (ECT) technique in detail. (6 mark)

SYLLABUS

Module 1
NDT Versus Mechanical testing-Overview of the Non Destructive Testing Methods for the
detection of manufacturing defects as well as material characterisation-Relative merits and
limitations-various physical characteristics of materials and their applications in NDT.

Visual Inspection: Fundamentals of Visual Testing – vision, lighting, material attributes,

environmental factors, visual perception, direct and indirect methods – mirrors, magnifiers,
Boroscopes and fibro scopes– light sources and special lighting–calibration- computer
enhanced system

Module 2
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: Principles – types and properties of liquid penetrants –
developers – advantages and limitations of various methods - Preparation of test materials –
Application of penetrants to parts, removal of excess penetrants, post cleaning – Control and
measurement of penetrant process variables –selection of penetrant method – solvent
removable, water washable, post emulsifiable – Units and lighting for penetrant testing –
calibration- Interpretation and evaluation of test results - dye penetrant process applicable
codes and standards.

Module 3
Magnetic Particle Inspection (MPI): Important terminologies related to magnetic properties
of material, principle-magnetizing technique, procedure, and equipment, fluorescent magnetic
particle testing method, sensitivity-application and limitation-Methods of magnetization,
magnetization techniques such as head shot technique, cold shot technique- central conductor
testing, and magnetization using products using yokes-direct and indirect method of
magnetization - continuous testing of MPI, residual technique of MPI- checking devices in
MPI, Interpretation of MPI, indications, advantage and limitation of MPI.

Module 4
Ultrasonic Testing: Basic principles of sound propagation, types of sound waves, Principle
of UT-methods of UT, their advantages and limitations-Piezoelectric Material, Various types
of transducers/probe-Calibration methods, contact testing and immersion testing, normal beam
and straight beam testing, angle beam testing, dual crystal probe, ultrasonic testing techniques
resonance testing, through transmission technique, pulse echo testing technique, instruments
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
used UT, accessories such as transducers, types, frequencies, and sizes commonly used.
Reference of standard blocks-technique for normal beam inspection-flaw characterization
technique, defects in welded products by UT-Thickness determination by ultrasonic method;-
Study of A, B and C scan presentations-Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD).

Module 5
Radiography: X-rays and Gamma rays, Properties of X-rays relevant to NDE - Absorption of
rays - scattering. Characteristics of films- graininess, Density, Speed, Contrast. Characteristic
curves. Inspection techniques like SWSI, DWSI, DWDI, panoramic exposure, real time
radiography, films used in industrial radiography

Eddy Current Testing: Generation of eddy currents – effect of change of impedance on

instrumentation – properties of eddy currents – eddy current sensing elements, probes, type of
coil arrangement – absolute, differential, lift off, operation, applications, advantages,
limitations Field factor and lift of effect, edge effect, end effect, impedance plane diagram in
brief, depth of penetration of ECT, relation between frequency and depth of penetration in
ECT.

Text Books

1. Baldev Raj, Practical Non – Destructive Testing, Narosa Publishing House, 1997

2. J.Prasad and C. G. K. Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials, Tata

McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd edition (2011).

3. B.Raj, T. Jayakumar and M. Thavasimuthu, Practical Non Destructive Testing, Alpha

Science International Limited, 3 rd edition (2007).

4. T. Rangachari, J. Prasad and B.N.S. Murthy, Treatise on Non-destructive Testing and

Evaluation, Navbharath Enterprises, Vol.3, (1983).

5. Ed. Peter.J. Shull, Non-destructive Evaluation: Theory, Techniques, and Applications,

Marcel Dekker (2002). 2.

Reference Books

1. C. Hellier, Handbook of Non-Destructive Evaluation, McGraw-Hill Professional, 1st

edition (2001).

2. J. Thomas Schmidt, K. Skeie and P. Maclntire, ASNT Non Destructive Testing Handbook:
Magnetic Particle Testing, American Society for Non-destructive Testing, American Society
for Metals, 2nd edition (1989).

3. Krautkramer, Josef and Hebert Krautkramer, Ultrasonic Testing of Materials, Springer

Verlag, 1990
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

MODULE 1
NDT Versus Mechanical testing-Overview of the Non Destructive
1.1 Testing Methods for the detection of manufacturing defects as well 2
as material characterisation
1.2 Relative merits and limitations-various physical characteristics of 1
materials and their applications in NDT
1.3 Fundamentals of Visual Testing – vision, lighting, material 1
attributes, environmental factors, visual perception, direct and
indirect methods
1.4 Mirrors, magnifiers, Boroscopes and fibro scopes 1
1.5 light sources and special lighting, calibration- computer enhanced 2
system
MODULE 2
2.1 Liquid Penetrant Inspection: Principles – types and properties of 1
liquid penetrants – developers
2.2 Advantages and limitations of various methods - Preparation of 1
test materials
2.3 Application of penetrants to parts, removal of excess penetrants, 1
post cleaning
2.4 Control and measurement of penetrant process variables –selection 1
of penetrant method
2.5 solvent removable, water washable, post emulsifiable – Units and 1
lighting for penetrant testing
2.6 calibration- Interpretation and evaluation of test results - dye 2
penetrant process applicable codes and standards
MODULE 3
3.1 Magnetic Particle Inspection (MPI): Important terminologies 1
related to magnetic properties of material
3.2 Principle-magnetizing technique, procedure, and equipment, 1
fluorescent magnetic particle testing method, Sensitivity
3.3 Methods of magnetization, magnetization techniques such as head
shot technique, cold shot technique- central conductor testing, 1
3.4 magnetization using products using yokes-direct and indirect 1
method of magnetization - continuous testing of MPI
3.5 residual technique of MPI- checking devices in MPI 1
3.6 Indications, advantage and limitation of MPI. 1

MODULE 4
4.1 Ultrasonic Testing: Basic principles of sound propagation, types of
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
sound waves, Principle of UT-methods of UT 1
4.2 Piezoelectric Material, Various types of transducers/probe
Calibration methods, contact testing and immersion testing, 1
normal beam and straight beam testing,
4.3 Angle beam testing, dual crystal probe, ultrasonic testing
techniques resonance testing, through transmission technique, 1
pulse echo testing technique
4.4 Accessories such as transducers, types, frequencies, and sizes
commonly used. Reference of standard blocks 1
4.5 Technique for normal beam inspection Thickness determination
by ultrasonic method 1
4.6 Study of A, B and C scan presentations, Instruments used UT 1
4.7 Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD). 1
MODULE 5
5.1 Radiography: X-rays and Gamma rays, Properties of X-rays 1
relevant to NDE - Absorption of rays - scattering
5.2 Characteristics of films- graininess, Density, Speed, Contrast.
Characteristic curves. Inspection techniques like SWSI, DWSI, 1
DWDI
5.3 Panoramic exposure, real time radiography, films used in 1
industrial radiography

5.4 Eddy Current Testing: Generation of eddy currents – effect of

change of impedance on instrumentation – properties of eddy 1
currents
5.5 Eddy current sensing elements, probes, type of coil arrangement –
absolute, differential, lift off, operation, applications, advantages, 1
limitations
5.6 Field factor and lift of effect, edge effect, end effect, impedance 1
plane diagram in brief, depth of penetration of ECT
5.7 Relation between frequency and depth of penetration in ECT. 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CODE
COMPUTATIONAL FLUID
MET322 PEC 2 1 0 3
DYNAMICS

Preamble:

This course introduces the students to finite difference methods as a means of solving different types
of differential equations that arise in fluid dynamics and heat transfer. Fundamentals of numerical
analysis, ordinary differential equations and partial differential equations related to fluid mechanics
and heat transfer will be reviewed. Error control and stability considerations are discussed. A class of
methods used in computational fluid dynamics for numerically solving the Navier-Stokes equations
normally for incompressible flows will be covered in this course.

Prerequisite: MET 203 Mechanics of Fluids

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Understanding the governing equations dominating fluid flow and heat transfer and their
mathematical and physical nature.
CO 2 Understand finite difference method to fluid flow problems and the level of errors associated
with these methods.
CO 3 Understand and apply finite volume method to fluid flow and heat transfer problems.
CO 4 Understand and apply finite volume method to diffusion and convection problems and
various interpolation schemes.
CO 5 Understand various methods in numerically solving Navier Stokes equation for
incompressible flows.
CO 6 Understand various graphical techniques to present post processed results.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 3 2 1
CO 3 3 3 1
CO 4 3 3 1
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 3 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Total CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1 Derive Navier Stokes equation in conservative form

2 Write a note on elliptical, parabolic and hyperbolic PDEs as applicable to CFD

3 Explain the applications of CFD in various industries.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1 Explain finite difference method in brief. Give the justification for the choice for the finite
difference method

2 Write a note on central and upwind difference schemes for one dimensional steady convection-
diffusion equation

𝜕𝜕 2 𝜑𝜑
3 Obtain a 5-point centre-difference scheme for at grid-point iusing𝜑𝜑𝑖𝑖−2 ,𝜑𝜑𝑖𝑖−1 ,𝜑𝜑𝑖𝑖 ,𝜑𝜑𝑖𝑖+1 ,𝜑𝜑𝑖𝑖+2 and
𝜕𝜕𝑥𝑥 2
find its truncation error.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕 𝜕𝜕 2 𝑇𝑇
1. Consider a heat conduction problem governed by = 𝛼𝛼 . Develop a finite difference
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕 𝜕𝜕𝑥𝑥 2
representation for this equation by the control-volume approach. Do not assume that the grid is
uniform.
2. Explain the features of TDMA method
3. Write a note on explicit and implicit approaches and stability criteria.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. A property 𝜑𝜑 is transported by means of convection and diffusion through the one-dimensional

domain. The governing equation is [Dw (De −Fe) (Fe −Fw)]P DwW (De
−Fe)E; the boundary conditions are 𝜑𝜑01 at x 0 and𝜑𝜑L 0 at x L. Using QUICK
scheme for convection and diffusion, calculate the distribution of as a function of x for (i) Case
1: u 0.1 m/s, (ii) Case 2: u 2.5 m/s
2. Explain Crank-Nicolson implicit scheme used for solving the parabolic partial differential
equations MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
3. A property 𝜑𝜑 is transported by means of convection and diffusion through the one-dimensional
domain. The governing equation is [Dw (De −Fe) (Fe −Fw)]P DwW (De
−Fe)E; the boundary conditions are 𝜑𝜑01 at x 0 and𝜑𝜑L 0 at x L. Using upwind
differencing scheme for convection and diffusion, calculate the distribution of as a function of
x for (i) Case 1: u 0.1 m/s, (ii) Case 2: u 2.5 m/s with the coarse five-point grid

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Derive the expression for vorticity at the wall in terms of stream function. The expression should
contain the interior points only. One could use no-slip velocity boundary condition at the wall in
deriving the expression.
2. Write voticity stream function equations
3. Describe the philosophy of Pressure Correction technique. Explain how boundary conditions are
specified consistent with the philosophy of Pressure Correction method

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Explain SIMPLE Algorithm

2. Derive Pressure Correction formula considering two dimensional flows and explain step by step
procedure for SIMPLE algorithm
3. Write a note on computer graphics techniques used to present post processed CFD results
Model Question paper
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET 322
Course Name: COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Explain the merits and demerits of numerical approaches over theoretical and
experimental approaches.
2. Show that the second-order wave equation is a hyperbolic partial differential equation.
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕
3. Using Taylor series, derive a first order and a second order difference equation for 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕 .
4. Explain the relaxation techniques used in numerical schemes.
5. Explain Dirichlet, Neumann, and Robins type boundary conditions.
6. Derive the difference equation for steady one-dimensional heat conduction problem.
7. Discuss a situation where upwind differencing scheme is preferred over central
differencing scheme.
8. Suggest a numerical difference scheme for which numerical false diffusion is
desirable and justify your suggestion.
9. Explain any three graphical methods to present CFD results.
10. Discuss the importance of staggered grid in numerically solving incompressible
viscous flow problems. ( 10 X 3 = 30 Marks )

PART B
Module 1
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

11. Explain the significance of parabolic, hyperbolic and elliptic partial differential
equations in a numerical perspective. ( 14 Marks )

12. Write down the Navier-Stokes equation in vector form by clearly mentioning the
solution vector, flux vector and source vector. Convert the Navier-Stokes equations
into non-dimensional form. ( 14 Marks )
Module 2

13. Consider the viscous flow of air over a flat plate. At a given station in the flow
direction, the variation of the flow velocity, u, in the direction perpendicular to the
−𝑦𝑦
plate (the y direction) is given by the expression 𝑢𝑢 = 21582 �1 − 𝑒𝑒 � 𝐿𝐿 � � where L=
characteristic length= 0.05 m. The unit of u is m/s. The viscosity coefficient 𝜇𝜇 =
1.81 × 10−5 kg/(m.s). Using the equation for u, find the values of u at discrete grid
points equally spaced in the y direction with ∆𝑦𝑦 = 0.002𝑚𝑚. With the values obtained at
discrete grid points located at y=0, 0.002 m, 0.004 m, and 0.006 m, calculate the
shear stress at the wall 𝜏𝜏𝑤𝑤 (a) using a first order difference equation and (b) second
order difference equation. Compare these calculated finite difference results with the
exact value of tau-w which can be found by making use of the expression for u.
( 14 Marks )
 𝑑𝑑 2 𝑦𝑦 2
14. The equation for deflection of a beam is given by − 𝑒𝑒 𝑥𝑥 = 0 and deflection at
𝑑𝑑𝑥𝑥 2
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
𝑥𝑥 = 0 and 𝑥𝑥 = 1 are given by 𝜕𝜕 (0) = 0 and 𝜕𝜕 (1) = 0. Use the difference equations
to find the approximate deflection at 𝑥𝑥 = 0.25,0.5, and 0.75. ( 14 Marks )

Module 3

15. Consider the problem of source-free heat conduction in an insulated rod of 0.5 m
length whose ends are maintained at constant temperatures of 100°C and 500°C
𝑑𝑑 𝑘𝑘∗𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
respectively. The one-dimensional problem is governed by 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 � = 0. Calculate
the steady state temperature distribution in the rod using finite volume method.
Thermal conductivity k equals 1000 W/m.K, cross-sectional area A is 10 × 10−3𝑚𝑚 2.
Use cell centered grid points. ( 14 Marks )

16. Two plastic sheets, each 5 mm thick, are to be bonded together with a thin layer of
adhesive that fuses at 140 oC. For this purpose, they are pressed between two surfaces
at 250 oC. Using finite volume method, determine the time for which the two sheets
should be pressed together, if the initial temperature of the sheets (and the adhesive) is
30 oC. For plastic sheets, thermal conductivity k=0.25 W/m-K, specific heat C=2000J/
kg-K and density,ρ= 1300 kg/m3. ( 14 Marks )

Module 4
17. A property φ is transported by means of convection and diffusion through the one-
𝑑𝑑 𝑑𝑑 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
dimensional domain0 ≤ 𝑋𝑋 ≤ 𝐿𝐿. The governing equation is 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝜌𝜌𝜌𝜌𝜌𝜌 =
𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
�𝛤𝛤 �
𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
��; the
boundary conditions are 𝜑𝜑0 = 1 at 𝑥𝑥 = 0 and 𝜑𝜑𝐿𝐿 = 0 at 𝑥𝑥 = 𝐿𝐿. Using five equally
spaced cells and the central differencing scheme for convection and diffusion,
calculate the distribution of 𝜑𝜑 as a function of x for 𝑢𝑢 = 0.1m/s. Compare the results
𝜌𝜌𝜌𝜌𝜌𝜌
� �
� 𝛤𝛤 −1�
with the analytical solution (𝜑𝜑 − 𝜑𝜑 0 )(𝜑𝜑 𝐿𝐿 − 𝜑𝜑 �)=
0𝜌𝜌𝜌𝜌𝜌𝜌
�
. ( 14 Marks )
�𝑒𝑒 𝛤𝛤 −1�

18. Make a comparison of central differencing scheme and upwind differencing scheme.
Explain the influence of numerical false diffusion on these two schemes. ( 14 Marks )

Module 5

19. Derive the stream function- vorticity formulation for the Navier-Stokes equation by
clearly stating the assumptions. ( 14 Marks )

20. Explain the SIMPLE algorithm. Make a discussion of the pressure correction equation
and the boundary conditions for the pressure correction equation. ( 14 Marks )
 Syllabus
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODULE : 1
Governing equations of fluid mechanics and heat transfer; fundamental equations –
continuity equation, momentum equation and energy equation; non-dimensional form of
equations; boundary layer equations for steady incompressible flows. Physical and
mathematical classifications of partial differential equations. Comparison of experimental,
theoretical and numerical approaches; applications of CFD.
MODULE : 2
Discretization-converting derivatives to their finite difference forms-Taylor’s series
approach, polynomial fitting approach; forward, backward and central differencing
Schemes. Discretization error, truncation error, round off error. Consistency and numerical
stability, iterative convergence, condition for convergence, rate of convergence; under and
over relaxations, termination of iteration.
MODULE : 3
Finite volume method for Steady one–dimensional conduction problems; handling of
boundary conditions; two-dimensional steady state conduction problems; point-by-point and
line-by-line method of solution; dealing with Dirichlet, Neumann, and Robins type
boundary conditions; tri-diagonal matrix algorithm; transient heat conduction problems -
explicit, implicit, Crank-Nicholson and ADI schemes.
MODULE : 4
Finite volume method for diffusion and convection-diffusion problems; steady one-
dimensional convection and diffusion; upwind, hybrid, power-law and QUICK schemes;
false diffusion.
MODULE : 5
Computation of the flow field using stream function-vorticity formulation. Two dimensional
incompressible viscous flow. Staggered grid. Pressure correction methods. Solution
algorithm for pressure-velocity coupling in steady flows-SIMPLE algorithm. Boundary
conditions for the pressure correction method. Computer graphics techniques to present
CFD results.

Text Books

1. S V Patankar, Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, McGraw-Hill

2. John D Anderson Jr, Computational Fluid Dynamics, McGraw-Hill Book Company

Reference Books
1. K Muralidhar, T Sundararakjan, Computational Fluid Flow and Heat transfer, Narosa, 2nd
Edition, 2011
2. Tapan K Senguptha, Computational Fluid Dynamics, University Press, 2005
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic MECHANICAL No.
ENGINEERING
of Lectures
Module I
1 Fundamental equations fluid mechanics and heat transfer 1
2 Continuity equation, momentum equation and energy equation; 2
3 Non-dimensional form of equations 1
4 Boundary layer equations for steady incompressible flows. 1
5 Physical and mathematical classifications of partial differential 1
equations.
6 Comparison of experimental, theoretical and numerical 1
approaches; applications of CFD.
Module II
1 Discretization-converting derivatives to their finite difference 1
forms-Taylor’s series approach and polynomial fitting approach
2 Forward, backward and central differencing Schemes. 1
3 Discretization error, truncation error, round off error 1
4 Consistency and numerical stability 1
5 Iterative convergence, condition for convergence, rate of 1
convergence
6 Under and over relaxations, termination of iteration. 1
Module III
1 Finite volume method for steady one–dimensional conduction 1
problems
2 handling of boundary conditions; 1
3 two-dimensional steady state conduction problems; point-by-point 1
and line-by-line method of solution;
4 dealing with Dirichlet, Neumann, and Robins type boundary 1
conditions;
5 tri-diagonal matrix algorithm; 1
6 transient heat conduction problems -explicit, implicit, Crank- 2
Nicholson schemes
7 ADI scheme 1
Module IV
1 Finite volume method for diffusion and convection-diffusion 1
problems;
2 Upwind scheme for steady one-dimensional convection and 1
diffusion
3 Hybrid scheme and power-law scheme 2
4 QUICK scheme 1
5 Numerical false diffusion 1
Module V
1 Computation of the flow field using stream function-vorticity 2
formulation.
2 Two dimensional incompressible viscous flow. 1
3 Staggered grid. Pressure correction methods. 1
4 Solution algorithm for pressure-velocity coupling in steady flows- 2
SIMPLE algorithm.
5 Boundary conditions for the pressure correction method. 1
6 Computer graphics techniques to present CFD results. 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET332 ADVANCED MECHANICS OF SOLIDS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This elective course is designed to guide the student to move to the next level of
what was included in the third semester course on Strength of Materials (MET 201
MECHANICS OF SOLIDS). Some of the materials which are usually preliminary for a paper
like this, have got discussed in that prerequisite, and hence not repeated here. Application of
stress and strain analysis in two and three dimensions to solve engineering problems is what
is aimed at. The course is supposed to serve necessary background material for future
courses on Finite Element Method, and advanced courses on Elasticity.

Prerequisite: MET 201 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS

Course Outcomes:After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Formulate the field equations of Elasticity.

CO 2 Model some engineering problems as two-dimensional, for easy solutions involving
a Stress Function.
CO 3 Develop solutions for axi-symmetric problems for applications in thick pressure
vessels and in rotating circular discs.
CO 4 Extend the basic ideas related to theory of elastic flexure, for skewed loading and for
beams which are curved.
CO 5 Apply solution methods for torsion in components with non-circular cross sections
and thin walled structures.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 1
CO 2 2 3 1
CO 3 2 3 1
CO 4 3 2 1
CO 5 2 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Formulate all Field equations of elasticity.

2. Establishing the compatibility equations.

3. Realizing the differences between the formulation strategies of solutions in solid mechanics.

4. Formal proof for the uniqueness of the intended solutions.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Realization that a vast majority of problems reduces to two-dimensional (either plane-stress or

plane strain).

2. Formulating the Airy’s stress function for two-dimensional problems.

3. Extending the Airy’s method to solve practical problems like that encountered in contact analysis.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Formulation of equation for stresses and deflections in axi-symmetric problems.

2. Extend the axi-symmetric solutions for engineering applications in structures which are pressurised
from the inside, as well as outside.

3. Extend the axi-symmetric theory to solve stresses and deformations in spinning discs.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. Extend the basic elastic flexure formula to cases when the load is skewed.

2. Develop the necessary framework to solve stresses in curved beams.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Applying the St. Venant’s torsion theory for non-circular cross sections

2. Applying Prandtl’s Stress Function to solve Torsion and its applicability in terms of Membrane
Analogy.

3. Stress analysis in thin walled closed sections.

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code : MET332 Course Name : ADVANCED MECHANICS OF SOLIDS

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

PART – A (ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Discuss the different types of boundary conditions encountered in the solution of elasticity
problems.

2. What are Compatibility equations? Why are they essential in solving elasticity problems?

3. Express stress-strain relations in Matrix format for Plane-Stress and Plane-Strain problems.

4. Elucidate an example for the application of superposition in solving contact stress

problems.

5. Derive expressions for circumferential and axial stresses in a thin cylindrical pipe of
diameter ‘d’, thickness ’t’ and subjected to internal pressure ’P’.

6. Derive expressions for Circumferential Strain and Radial Strain for a two-dimensional
thick cylinder ( axi-symmetric) problem.

7. Discuss the significance of Shear-Centre in solving Bending of beams.

8. State all relevant assumptions in solving bending stress problems in curved beams using
Winkler- Bach theory.

9. Elucidate the difference in approach between St. Venant’s theory and Prandtl’s theory in
the solution of torsion problems.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
10. How are torsion problems solved experimentally, making use of Prandtl’s membrane
analogy?

PART – B (ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1

11. (a) For a two-dimensional stress problem described using cylindrical coordinates, derive
the equations of equilibrium in terms of (r,θ). (10 Marks)

(b) For the following plane strain distribution, verify whether the compatibility condition is
satisfied:

εxx= 3x2y, εyy= 4y2x + 10–2, γxy= 2xy + 2x3 (4 Marks)

12. (a) Given the fact that the strain energy density is positive-definite, show that the field
equations of elasticity yields a Unique solution for a given system of forces and boundary
conditions. (8 marks)

(b) Derive the equations of equilibrium in rectangular Cartesian coordinates. (6 Marks)

MODULE – 2

13. Figure shows a cantilever (of depth 2c) loaded by u.d.l. of magnitude ‘q’. If the Airy’s
stress function for this problem is φ= A [y5-2c2y3-10x2y3+30c2x2y-20c3x2], (a) show that it is
an acceptable stress function for Airy’s method and (b) evaluate ‘A’ for this problem.
(14 Marks)

14. If the Airy’ stress function (φ )in polar coordinates for solving contact stresses due to
line-load on a straight boundary is φ(r, θ)=- (W/ L π) r θ sinθ ( where ‘W/L’ is the normal
load per unit length), (a) show that it is an acceptable stress function for Airy’s method (b)
evaluate stresses for this two-dimensional stress-field (c) Show that the reactions offered by
the resulting stress balances the externally applied load.
(14 Marks)
MODULE – 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
15. (a) Assuming plane stress, the stresses in a hollow thick cylinder of radius ‘a’ and
external radius ‘b’ subjected to uniform (compressive) pressure of magnitude Pa and Pb
inside and outside respectively is of the form

𝐸𝐸 1
𝜎𝜎𝑟𝑟 = �𝐶𝐶1 (1 + 𝜈𝜈) − 𝐶𝐶2 (1 − 𝜈𝜈) �
1 − 𝜈𝜈 2 𝑟𝑟 2
𝐸𝐸 1
𝜎𝜎𝜃𝜃 = �𝐶𝐶1 (1 + 𝜈𝜈) + 𝐶𝐶2 (1 − 𝜈𝜈) �
1 − 𝜈𝜈 2 𝑟𝑟 2
where ‘r’ is the radius at any point. Evaluate the constants C1 and C2.

(b) Based on the above, develop expressions for (i) an internally pressurised thick cylinder
and (ii) thick cylinder under external pressure. Plot the variation of stresses across
thickness for bothcases. ( 14 Marks)

16. A rotating disc (N=3500 rpm) with a hole has an inner radius of 10 cm and outer radius of
35 cm. If the Poisson’s ratio of the material is 0.3 and density is 8050 kg/m3, (i) calculate and
plot the distribution of radial and circumferential stresses across the radius (ii) Find the
maximum values of radial and circumferential stresses . (14 Marks)

MODULE – 4

17. Find the maximum stress in the section A-B, if the cross-section is a square of sides 3cm
x 3cm, for an applied load of P=3000N. Also, plot the variation of stresses across section,
indicating the location of centroid and the neutral-axis. (14 Marks)

18. A rectangular beam with a 10 cm ¥ 15 cm section is usedas a simply supported beam of 3

m span. It carries a uniformly distributed load of 1470 N per meter. The load acts in a plane
making 30° with the vertical. Calculate the maximum flexural stress at all corners of the
cross-section at the mid-span and also locate the neutral axis for the same section.
(14 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE – 5

𝑥𝑥 2 𝑦𝑦 2
19. Show that the stress function 𝑚𝑚 �𝑎𝑎 2 + 𝑏𝑏 2 − 1� is a valid Prandtl’s stress function for
solving torsion problem on an elliptical cross section of major axis 2a and minor axis 2b.
Derive expressions for (i) Angle of twist per unit length (ii) Torsional rigidity (iii) Stresses
(iv) Max. Stress. (14 Marks)

20. The cross-section of an aerofoil- model in a small wind-tunnel tested for the torque induced
due to circulation around it, is idealized as shown in figure. If the shear strength of the material
used for the model is 40 MPa and if the shear-modulus, ‘G’ is 26 GPA, find the limiting-
torque for which it can be tested. How much would it deform (angular deflection) under this
condition. Use 3mm wall thickness all around. (14 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Syllabus

Module 1

Field equations of Elasticity: Equations of equilibrium in rectangular and cylindrical polar

coordinates – strain-displacement-relations - constitutive equations. Boundary value
problems: Different boundary conditions- Examples for Displacement Formulation/ Force
Formulation. Compatibility equations - Uniqueness of solution and superposition- St.
Venant’s principle.

Module 2

Two dimensional problems in elasticity: Stress-strain relations for Plane stress and Plane
strain cases. Airy’s Stress Functions for solution of stresses: problems in Rectangular as well
as in Polar coordinates- contact stresses due to concentrated normal force (line load) on a
straight boundary using Airy’s stress function, and its extension to solve for stresses due to
uniform normal pressure.

Module 3

Axisymmetric problems: Thin cylinders pressurized from inside, and thick cylinders
pressurized from inside and outside - Rotating disks.

Module 4

Unsymmetrical bending of straight beams possessing two axes of symmetry-shear center-

Winkler Bach theory for Bending of curved beams (with rectangular cross-section).

Module 5

Torsion of non-circular bars: St. Venant’s and Prandtl’s methods- solutions for elliptical
cress-section. Membrane analogy –torsion of thin walled closed sections .

Text Books

1. Nambudiripad K. B. M, “Advanced Mechanics of Solids- A Gentle Introduction”, Narosa

Publishing House, First Edition, 2018.

2. Srinath L. S., “Advanced Mechanics of Solids”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company,
Third Edition, 2009.

3. Jose S., “ Advanced Mechanics of Materials”, Pentagon Educational Services, Second

Edition, 2017.

4. Anil lal S., “ Advanced Mechanics of Solids”, Siva Publications and Distributors, First
Edition, 2017.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Reference Books

1. Ragab A. R. and Bayoumi S. E., “Engineering Solid Mechanics, Fundamentals and

Applications”, CRC Press, First Edition, 2018.

2. Timoshenko S. P., and Goodier J. N., “Theory of Elasticity”, McGraw Hill (India),
Private Limited, NewDelhi, Third Edition, 2010.

3. Sadd M. H., “ Elasticity: Theory, Applications and Numerics”, Academic Press, Indian
reprint, 2nd edition, 2012.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Module-1: Field Equations 7
1.1 Review of Stress-tensor, strain-displacement relations and strain 2 Hours
tensor. Derivation of Equilibrium equations in rectangular and
polar coordinates.
1.2 Generalised Hooke’s law for linearly elastic, homogeneous 1 Hour
isotropic solids
1.3 Boundary conditions in Elasticity problems with examples, 2 Hours
Displacement Formulation/ Force Formulation Uniqueness of
Solutions, Method of Super position
1.4 Compatibility equations, St. Venants Principle 2 Hours

2 Module-2: Two-dimensional problems 7

2.1 Stress-strain relations for Plane –stress and plane strain conditions 1 Hour
2.2 Formulation of the Airys stress function in Rectangular and Polar 2 Hours
Coordinates
2.3 Illustrative examples for solutions using Airy’s stress function 2 Hours
2.4 Contact stresses due to concentrated normal force (line load) on a 2 Hours
straight boundary using Airy’s stress function, and its extension to
solve for stresses due to uniform normal pressure.
3 Module-3: Axi-symmetric Problems 7
3.1 Stresses in Thin Cylindrical shells and numerical problems. 1 Hour

3.2 Axisymmetric problems: Basic Formulation 1 Hour

3.3 Application to thick shells 1 Hour

3.4 Numerical problems related to thick shells 1 Hour
3.5 Formulation of rotating disks 1 Hour
3.6 Numerical problems related to rotating disks 2 Hours
4 Module-4: Special Topics in Bending 7
4.1 Unsymmetrical bending of straight beams possessing two axes of 1 Hour
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
symmetry.
4.2 Numerical problems related to Unsymmetrical bending of straight 2 Hours
beams
4.3 Shear Centre 1 Hour
4.4 Winkler Bach theory for Bending of curved beams 1 Hour
4.5 Numerical problems related to Unsymmetrical bending of straight 2 Hours
beams
5 Module-5: Torsion of Non-Circular Sections 7
5.1 St. Venant’s torsion theory 2 Hours
5.2 Prandtl’s torsion theory 1 Hour
5.3 Membrane Analogy 1 Hour
5.4 Torsion of thin walled cross sections 1 Hour
5.5 Numerical problems on torsion of thin walled sections 2 Hours
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSENAME CATEGORY L-T-P CREDITS
IC ENGINE
MET 342 COMBUSTION AND PEC 2-1-0 3
POLLUTION

Preamble :
This course provides basic concepts on fuel-air mixing, theory of combustion in IC
engines. To provide knowledge on emission control technologies of IC engines.

Prerequisite : Thermal Engineering

Course Outcomes :
After completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Explain the basic concepts of fuel air mixing

CO2 Understand the combustion process of SI engine
CO3 Understand the combustion process of CI engine
CO4 Explore various alternate fuels in IC engine
CO5 Describe emission control technologies of IC engine

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1
3 2

CO2
3 1

CO3
3 1

CO4 1 1
3 2

CO5 1 1
3 1

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom Category End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Mark distribution:

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End semester pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions
from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions.
Part B contains 2questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each
question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the different air-fuel ratios required for different operating conditions of a
gasoline engine?
2. What are the different air fuel mixtures on which an engine can be operated?
3. Explain the following; 1.Richmixture, 2.Stoichiometric mixture3. Lean mixture.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. What are the major factors to be considered for the design of SI engine combustion
chamber?
2. Define the terms flame development and flame propagation in engines
3. Using the pressure crank angle diagram (P-θ) explain the different stages of desirable
combustion in a SI engine .Also explain how abnormal combustion takes place (P-θ)
diagram?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Brieflyexplain the thermodynamic analysis of CI engine combustion process.Explain
clearly assumption made.
2. Explain the various factors that influence spray penetration in CI engine.
3. What is the effect of EGR in emissions from CI engine?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Discuss the salient properties of hydrogen as a fuel.
2. What is the modification to be made in CI engine running on biodiesel? Explain in
detail about the use of the biodiesel as fuel in CI engine and various merits and
demerits of it use?
3. Explainthe fuel characteristics of alcohols,CNG,LPG & hydrogen?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. List the major pollutants from SI engines. Howcan we measure and control each of
them
2. What are the effects of pollutants from CI engines on environment and human beings?
How can these are controlled to certain extent.
3. Explain soot and particulate traps.

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
VI SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET342: IC ENGINE COMBUSTION AND POLLUTION
Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours
PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks
1. What are the different air fuel mixtures on which an engine can be operated?
2. Why a SI enginerequires a rich mixture during idling and at full load?
3. What are factors that influence the flame speed?
4. What are the various factors affecting knock in spark ignition engine?
5. State briefly about air motion in CI engines using diagrams.
6. What is the effect of delay period on Knock in CI engines?
7. List the components present in the measuring chain for pressure measurement in engine
research.
8. Write about the different types of alternate fuels available.
9. What are the various pollutants present in combustion products?
10. What are emission norms? Give the major pollutants that are to be controlled?

(10 X 3 = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module

Module 1
11. Briefly explain the different air-fuel ratios required for different operating conditions of a
gasoline engine? (14 marks)
12. Discuss the air fuel ratio requirements of SI engine? (14 marks)

Module 2
13. Explain the stages of combustion in SI engines with suitable flame propagation curve?
(14 marks)
14. What is meant by abnormal combustion .Explain the phenomena of knock in SI engine?
(14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 3
15. Explain with figures various types of combustion chambers used in CI engine.
(14 marks)
16. Explain the phenomenon of spray evaporation and combustion in CI engine
(14 marks)

Module 4
17. Explain the fuel characteristics of biodiesel, CNG,LPG &hydrogen?
(14 marks)
18. Discuss about the HCCI engine.
(14 marks)

Module 5
19. Write short notes on the formation of particulate and smooth emission in IC engines?
(14 marks)
20. Explain in detail about the different methods used for the measurement of exhaust Emission in
petrol engine?
(14 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1
Engine design and operating parameters, Thermo chemistry offuel-air mixtures
Properties of working fluids- unburned mixture composition, burned mixture charts, Exhaust
gas composition.

Module 2
Ideal models of engine cycles, Availability analysis of engine processes.Combustion in SI
engines- Thermodynamic analysis, Flame structureand speed, Cyclic variations in combustion,
partial burning and misfire,abnormal combustion

Module 3
Combustion in CI engines- Phenomenological model of CI engine combustion, Analysis of
cylinder pressure data, fuel spray behaviour

Module 4
Utilization of alternate fuels in IC engines- biodiesel, hydrogen, LPG,Natural gas- Advantages
and disadvantages- HCCI combustion, ASTMspecifications

Module 5
Engine emission and air pollution- Genesis and formation of pollutants, SI engine emission
control technology - CI engine emission control technology, fuel quality, emission standards
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Text Books:
1. Ganesan, Internal combustion engines, Tata- Mcgraw Hill Publishers, 2002
2. Ramalingam, K.K., Internal Combustion Engines, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
2004.
3. F Obert, IC Engines and air pollution, Intext educational publishers, 1973
4. Mathur,M.L., and Sharma,R.P., A Course in Internal Combustion Engines, DhanpatRai
Publications, 1993.

Reference Books:
1. Heywood JB, IC Engine fundamentals, McGraw hill book Co, 1989
2. W WPulkrabek, Engineering Fundamentals of the IC Engine, 2nd edition, PHI, 2003
3. B. P. Pundir, Engine Emissions: Pollutant formation and advances in control technology,
NarosaPublication,2007

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. Topic No. of Lectures

1
Engine design and operating parameters, Thermo
1.1 4
chemistry offuel-air mixtures
Properties of working fluids- unburned mixture
1.21.2 composition, burned mixture charts, Exhaust gas 3
composition.
2 Combustion in SI engines
Ideal models of engine cycles, Availability analysis of
2.1 2
engine processes.
Thermodynamic analysis, Flame structureand speed,
2.2 Cyclic variations in combustion, partial burning and 5
misfire,abnormal combustion
3 Combustion in CI engines

3.1 Phenomenological model of CI engine combustion 4

3.2 Analysis of cylinder pressure data, fuel spray behavior 3

4 Utilization of alternate fuels in IC engines

Biodiesel, hydrogen, LPG,Natural gas- Advantages and
4.1 5
disadvantages
4.2 HCCI combustion, ASTMspecifications 2

5 Engine emission and air pollution

5.1 Genesis and formation of pollutants 1

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
5.2 SI engine emission control technology 3
CI engine emission control technology, fuel quality,
5.3 3
emission standards
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CODE COURSE NAME

MET 352 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:
The objective of this course is
• To know the anatomy of automobile in general
• To understand the working of different automotive systems and
subsystems
• To update the latest developments in automobiles

Prerequisite: EST 120 Basics of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain different automotive systems and subsystems .

CO 2 Illustrate the principles of transmission, suspension, steering and braking systems of an
automobile.
CO 3 Build a basic knowledge about the technology in electric vehicles.
CO 4 Summarize the concept of aerodynamics in automobiles.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3

CO2 3 3

CO3 3 3

CO4 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. What is the need of clutch and gearbox in an automobile?

2. List out the factors affecting the maximum torque transmitting capacity of a friction clutch,

3. Define over drive and list out its advantages.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain Ackermann steering mechanism with a neat sketch.

2. Explain in detail the working and function of ABS braking system.

3. Explain the function and advantages of Double Wishbone Suspension system.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. What is the difference between an electric vehicle and a hybrid vehicle?

2. List out the differences in the chassis design of an electric vehicle comparing with the
conventional chassis.

3. Explain the basic operation of a fuel cell.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What is the significance of aerodynamic lift in vehicles?

2. Explain the concept of ‘Hatch back Drag’.

3. What are the functions of negative lift aerofoil wings.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Model Question Paper

SIXTH SEMESTER MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MET 352 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A (30 marks)

Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks.

1. List the three types of chassis construction.

2. Explain the loads coming on a chassis frame.

3. Differentiate body roll couple and body overturning couple.

4. Explain the features of Double Wish Bone suspension system.

5. Describe any type of a regenerative brake system.

6. Illustrate the desirable properties of brake pad materials.

7. Define the terms under steer and over steer in automobiles.

8. Explain the advantages of power assisted steering system.

9. Explain the functions of negative lift aerofoil wings.

10. List out the advantages of rear end spoiler in a vehicle.

PART B (70 marks)

Answer any one question from each module, each carries 14 marks.

Module 1

11. a) Explain the working of worm and roller steering gearbox system with the help of a (7)
neat sketch.

b) Explain the common troubles encountered in gear boxes and suggest suitable (7)
remedies.

12. Compare hydraulic, mechanical, electrical and vacuum methods of operating (14)
clutches. Describe a hydraulic operated clutch in detail with help of simple
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
diagram.

Module 2

13. a) Explain the features of McPherson strut suspension system with a neat sketch. ( 8)

b) Explain the function of an antiroll bar in a four wheeled vehicle. (6)

14. a) Illustrate the working of swing arm rear wheel drive independent suspension. (8)

b) Explain the features of De Dion axle rear wheel suspension. (6)

Module 3

15. a) Explain how the braking efficiency of a vehicle is evaluated? Also detail the (7)
parameters that affect the braking efficiency.

b) Derive an expression for the brakes applied on front and rear wheels. (7)

16. a) Discuss the working and advantages of ABS over conventional systems. (8)

b) Explain the working of a brake caliper with a neat sketch. (6)

Module 4

17. a) Explain the working and advantages of turbocharger with a neat sketch. (8)

b) Explain how oil control ring helps in piston lubrication. (6)

18. a) Explain the basic principle of a hydrogen fuel cell and its efficiency. (8)

b) Explain the technology of high speed electric trains. (6)

Module 5

19. a) Differentiate between fast back drag and hatch back drag. (7)

b) Explain the methods to control the aerodynamic lift in vehicles. (7)

20. a) Illustrate the influence of shape of vehicles on drag coefficients. (7)

b) Explain how profile edge chamfering improves drag in vehicles. (7)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Syllabus

Module 1

Components of an automobile. General classification. Conventional Chassis construction-

Types of frames- Frameless constructions. Vehicle dimensions.

Friction clutch: Principle, dry friction clutches- Pull type diaphragm clutch, multiple
diaphragm clutch, multi-plate hydraulically operated automatic transmission clutch, semi
centrifugal clutch, fully automatic centrifugal clutch, and integral single plate diaphragm
clutch. Electromagnetic clutch operation. Clutch friction materials, wet clutch.

Manual transmission- Need of gear box, power to weight ratio, speed operating range-five
speed and reverse sliding mesh, constant mesh, and synchromesh gear boxes. Automatic
transmission- Epicyclic gear box - torque convertor – Over drives. Automated manual
transmission.

Module 2

Suspension: - suspension geometry, terminology- Macpherson strut friction and spring offset
- suspension roll centers:-roll centers, roll axis, roll centre height, short swing and long arm
suspension, transverse double wishbone, parallel trailing double arm and vertical pill strut
suspension, Macpherson strut suspension, semi-trailing arm rear suspension, telescopic
suspension. High load beam axle leaf spring, sprung body roll stability. Rear axle beam
suspension- body roll stability analysis:- body roll couple, body roll stiffness, body over
turning couple.

Rear suspension: - live rigid axle suspension, non drive rear suspension- swing arm rear
wheel drive independent suspension. Low pivot split axle coil spring wheel drive independent
suspension, trailing and semi trailing arm rear wheel drive independent suspension.
Transverse double link arm rear wheel drive independent suspension, De Dion axle rear
wheel suspension - Hydrogen suspension, hydro-pneumatic automatic height correction
suspension.

Module 3

Brakes: mechanical and hydraulic brakes (review only) – properties of friction lining and pad
materials, theory of internal shoe brake, equations –effect of expanding mechanism of shoes
on total braking torque, equations. Braking of vehicles:- brakes applied on rear, front and all
four wheels, equations –calculation of mean lining pressure and heat generation during
braking operation, equations. – braking of vehicle moving on curved path, simple problems.

Anti Lock Braking system (ABS):- hydro-mechanical ABS - hydro-electric ABS - air-
electric ABS. Brake servos: - direct acting suspended vacuum assisted brake servo unit
operation - hydraulic servo assisted brake systems. Pneumatic operated disc brakes –
electronic-pneumatic brakes. Regenerative braking system.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 4

Steering:-basic principle of a steering system– Ackermann –over steer and under steer – slip
angle, camber, , king pin inclination, caster, toe-in and toe-out .Steering gear box:-worm and
roller type steering gear box – Re-circulating ball nut and rocker lever– need of power
assisted steering.

Piston for IC engine, piston rings, piston pin, connecting rod, crank shaft, crank pin, cam
shaft, valves, fly wheel, fluctuation of energy and size of fly wheel, hub and arms, stress in a
fly wheel rim, simple problems. Fuel injection systems: multiport fuel injection (MPFI) and
common rail direct injection (CRDI) systems. Super charging in engines, turbo charger,
turbo lag.

Electric Vehicle Technology (EVT): EV Architecture, types of batteries, battery parameters,

super capacitors. Fuel cells and its efficiency. EV Chassis – requirements, suspension for
EVs. Recent Electric vehicles- Electric mobility aids. Future of electric vehicles –Tesla S,
Maglev trains, Electric rail road systems.

Module 5

Aerodynamic drag: pressure drag, air resistance, opposing motion of a vehicle, equations,
after flow wake, drag coefficients, various body shapes, base drag, vortices, trailing vortex
drag, attached transverse vortices. Aerodynamic lift:-lift coefficients, vehicle lift, underbody
floor height versus aerodynamic lift and drag, aerofoil lift and drag, front end nose shape.

Car body drag reduction:-profile edge chamfering, bonnet slope and wind screen rake, roof
and side panel chamfering, rear side panel taper, under body rear end upward taper, rear end
tail extension, under body roughness. Aerodynamic lift control:- under body dams, exposed
wheel air flow pattern, partial enclosed wheel air flow pattern, rear end spoiler, negative lift
aerofoil wings. After body drag: - square back drag, fast back drag, hatch back drag, notch
back drag.

Text Books

1. Heinz Heisler, Vehicle and engine technology, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2nd edition,1998.

2. R.B. Gupta., Auto design , Satya Prakashan Publishers, New Delhi, 2016 .

3. James Larminie and John Lowry, Electric vehicle technology explained, Wiley
publications, 2nd edition, 2015.

4. Kirpal Singh, Automobile Engineering Vol.1 & Vol.2, Standard Publishers, 13th edition,
2020.

Reference Books

4. V.A.W. Hillier, Fundamentals of modern vehicle technology, Butterworth-Heinemann,

2nd edition,1998.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
5. Tom Denton, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles, Routledge Publishers, 2nd edition, 2020.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Clutch and transmission
1.1 Introduction, Chassis construction- Types of frames. 1

1.2 Frameless construction, Vehicle dimensions 1

1.3 Principle of dry friction clutches- Single plate, Multi plate. 1

1.4 Semi centrifugal clutch, fully automatic centrifugal clutch, and 1

1.5 Integral single plate diaphragm clutch. Electromagnetic clutch 1

operation., clutch friction materials, wet clutches

1.6 Sliding mesh, constant mesh , synchromesh gear boxes, epicyclic gear 1
boxes

1.7 Torque converertor, Over drives, Automated manual transmission 1

2 Suspension
2.1 Suspension: - suspension geometry, terminology. Macpherson strut 1
friction and spring offset.

2.2 Suspension roll centers:-roll centers, roll axis, roll centre height, short 1
swing and long arm suspension.

2.3 Transverse double wishbone, parallel trailing double arm and vertical 1
pill strut suspension, Macpherson strut suspension, semi-trailing arm
rear suspension, telescopic suspension.

2.4 High load beam axle leaf spring, sprung body roll stability. Rear axle 1
beam suspension- body roll stability analysis:- body roll couple, body
roll stiffness, body over turning couple.

2.5 Rear suspension: - live rigid axle suspension, non drive rear suspension- 1
swing arm rear wheel drive independent suspension.

2.6 Low pivot split axle coil spring wheel drive independent suspension, 1
trailing and semi trailing arm rear wheel drive independent suspension.

2.7 Transverse double link arm rear wheel drive independent suspension, De 1
Dion axle rear wheel suspension.Hydrogen suspension, hydro-pneumatic
automatic height correction suspension.

3 Brakes
3.1 Types of Brakes, Properties of friction lining and pad materials.Theory 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
of internal shoe brake, equations

3.2 Effect of expanding mechanism of shoes on total braking torque, 1

equations.

3.3 Braking of vehicles:- brakes applied on rear, front and all four wheels, 1
equations.

3.4 Calculation of mean lining pressure and heat generation during braking 1
operation, equations.

3.5 Braking of vehicle moving on curved path, simple problems. Hydro- 1

mechanical ABS - hydro-electric ABS

3.6 Air-electric ABS. Brake servos: -direct acting suspended vacuum 1

assisted brake servo unit operation - Hydraulic servo assisted brake
systems.

3.7 Pneumatic operated disc brakes – electronic-pneumatic brakes. 1

Regenerative braking systems.

4 Steering, Engine and EVT

4.1 Ackermann steering mechanism, over steer and under steer . 1

4.2 Worm and roller type steering gear box, Re-circulating ball nut and 1
rocker lever, power assisted steering.
4.3 IC engines, piston, rings, pin, flywheel, connecting rod.Crank shaft, 1
crank pin, cam shaft, valve mechanism
4.4 Fuel injection systems ,Turbochargers, turbo lag. 1

4.5 EV Architecture, types of batteries, battery parameters, super capacitors. 1

Fuel cells and its efficiency.

4.6 EV Chassis – requirements, suspension for EVs. Recent Electric 1

vehicles- Electric mobility aids.

4.7 Future of electric vehicles –Tesla S, Maglev trains, Electric rail road 1
systems.

5 Aerodynamics in automobiles
5.1 Aerodynamic drag: pressure drag, air resistance, opposing motion of a 1
vehicle.

5.2 Flow wake, drag coefficients, various body shapes, base drag, vortices, 1
trailing vortex drag, attached transverse vortices.

5.3 Aerodynamic lift:-lift coefficients, vehicle lift. Under body floor height 1
versus aerodynamic lift and drag.Aerofoil lift and drag, front end nose
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
shape.

5.4 Car body drag reduction:-profile edge chamfering, bonnet slope and 1
wind screen rake.

5.5 Roof and side panel chamfering, rear side panel taper, under body rear 1
end upward taper, rear end tail extension, under body roughness.

5.6 Aerodynamic lift control:- under body dams, exposed wheel air flow 1
pattern, partial enclosed wheel air flow pattern, rear end spoiler, negative
lift aerofoil wings.

5.7 After body drag: - square back drag, fast back drag, hatch back drag, 1
notch back drag.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET362 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:

• To create confidence in developing new products.

• To acquaint with methods and tools for product design and development.
• To equip with practical knowledge in conceptualization, design and development of
new product.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Determine the life cycle of a product and product development process

CO 2 Develop knowledge of robust design and conceptual design
CO 3 Introduce the concept of Design for Manufacturing and Assembly in product design.
CO 4 Use value engineering in the development of product
CO 5 Incorporate ergonomics and rapid prototyping in product development.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO 12
10 11
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 2
CO 5 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. State the features of a good product design.

2. Explain the morphology of design.

3. Describe about the product life cycle.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Discuss the brainstorming technique.

2. Discuss about the robust design.

3. Describe the industrial design process.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain DFM Method in design.

2. Explain the importance of ergonomics in product design.

3. Explain the environmental impacts derived from the manufacturing sector.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Discuss the advantages of value analysis.

2. Compare Value analysis and value engineering.

3. Discuss some of the quantitative economic analysis tool used in industry.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Describe the steps in reverse engineering.

2. Explain the concept of Concurrent Engineering, Rapid prototyping

3. Explain about the patenting system.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET362

Course Name: PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT

Max. Marks: 100
Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. How the different types of products are classified?

2. What are the various reasons for the failure of a new product?
3. What are three accuracy points in cam and follower synthesis?
4. What meant by the term “lines of maintenance”?
5. Analyze the corporate social responsibility in ethical view point?
6. Differentiate between fixed cost and variable cost?
7. Explain the term anthropometry?
8. What are the rights of a patentee?
9. Differentiate between drafting and modelling software with suitable examples?
10. Explain different steps in a 3d scanning process

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)
Module 1

11. Explain the various steps involved the morphology of design? (14 marks)

12. Analyze the steps and responsibilities involved in the development of a new product with
the help of an example? (14 marks)

Module 2

13. Discuss the various steps in robust design process? (14 marks)

14. Analyze the various activities involved in the industrial design process? (14marks)

Module 3
15. a) Elaborate the role of ergonomic factors in product design? (8 marks)
b) Analyze the ergonomic factors that need to be considered in the design of a chair?
(6 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
16. Explain how the design for assembly affects the product design with the help of two
examples?
(14 marks)

Module 4

17. Define Value Engineering. Explain the application of the value engineering concept with the
help of two case studies? (14 marks)

18. How the cost of a product is determined? Explain with suitable example. (14 marks)

Module 5

19. Analyze the major factors that contribute to the improved product quality by incorporating
the concurrent engineering concept? (14 marks)

20. Explain Stereo-lithography and Fused Deposition Modeling with sketch. Compare the
advantages and disadvantages of these techniques? (14 marks)
 Syllabus MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 1

Introduction: Classification/ Specifications of Products, Product life cycle, product mix.

Introduction to product design, Modern product development process Design by evolution, Design by
innovation, Morphology of design

Ethics in product design, legal factors and social issues.

Module 2

Creativity Techniques: Creative thinking, conceptualization, brain storming, primary design, drawing,
simulation, detail design.

Conceptual Design: Generation, selection & embodiment of concept, Product architecture.

Industrial design: process, need.

Robust Design: Taguchi Designs, Design of experiments.

Module 3

Design for Manufacturing and Assembly: Methods of designing for Manufacturing and Assembly.

Design for Maintenance. Design for Environment.

Ergonomics in product design.

Aesthetics in product design. Concepts of size and texture color.

Module 4

Value Engineering / Value Analysis: Definition. Methodology, Case studies.

Product costing.

Economic analysis: Qualitative & Quantitative.

Psychological and Physiological considerations.

Module 5

Concurrent Engineering -Elements of concurrent engineering, Benefits

Rapid prototyping: concepts, processes and advantages.

Reverse engineering: steps in reverse engineering- hardware and software in reverse engineering

Tools for product design – Drafting / Modeling software.

Patents & IP Acts- Overview, Disclosure preparation.

Text Books MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. Karl T Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger, “Product Design & Development.” Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

Reference Books

1.Baldwin E N & Neibel B W “Designing for Production.” Edwin Homewood Illinois.

2.Bralla J G (Ed.), “Handbook of Product Design for Manufacture, McGraw Hill, NewYork, 1986

3.D. T. Pham, S.S. Dimov, Rapid Manufacturing-The Technologies and Applications of Rapid
Prototyping and Rapid Tooling, Springer – Verlag, London, 2001.

4.David G Ullman, “The Mechanical Design Process.” McGraw Hill Inc Singapore 1992

5.Hollins B & Pugh S “Successful Product Design.” Butter worths London, 1990

6.Jones J C “Design Methods.” Seeds of Human Futures. John Willey, 1970

7.Kevin Otto & Kristin Wood Product Design: “Techniques in Reverse Engineering and new Product
Development.”, Pearson Education New Delhi, 2000

8.N J M Roozenberg , J Ekels , N F M Roozenberg “ Product Design Fundamentals and Methods .”

John Willey & Sons 1995.

9.Andreas Gebhardt, Rapid Prototyping, Carl Hanser – Verlag, Munich, 2003.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Module 1 6
1.1 Introduction: Classification/ Specifications of Products. Product life 2
cycle.
1.2 Product mix. Introduction to product design. Modern product 2
development process.
1.3 Innovative thinking. Morphology of design. Ethics in product design 2
Ethics in product design
2 Module 2 6
2.1 Creativity Techniques, Conceptual Design: Generation, selection & 2
embodiment of concept.
2.2 Product architecture. Industrial design: process, need. 2
2.3 Robust Design: Taguchi Designs & DOE. 2
3 Module 3 7
3.1 Design for Manufacturing and Assembly: Methods of designing for 3
Manufacturing and Assembly.
3.2 Designs for Maintainability. Designs for Environment. Product costing. 2
3.3 Ergonomics in product design. Aesthetics in product design. 2
4 Module 4 7
4.1 Value Engineering / Value Analysis: Definition. Methodology, 3
4.2 Case studies. 2
4.3 Economic analysis: Qualitative & Quantitative. Product costing. 2
5 Module 5 9
5.1 Concurrent Engineering, 3
Rapid prototyping: concepts, processes and advantages.
5.2 Reverse engineering: steps in reverse engineering- hardware and 2
software in reverse engineering
5.3 Tools for product design – Drafting / Modelling software. 2
5.4 Patents & IP Acts. Overview, Disclosure preparation. 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE CATEGORY L T P Credits

ADVANCED METAL JOINING
MET372 TECHNIQUES PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:

This course provides student to learn fundamental concepts of advanced welding techniques and
their applications to an extent to enable the learner to arrive at a firsthand conclusion on selection
of a particular technique best suited to resolve a metal joining problem.

Prerequisite:MET204 Manufacturing process.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Explain the physics, equipment, applications of EBW and LBW.

Summarise the physics, equipment, applications of diffusion welding and adhesive
CO 2
bonding processes.
CO 3 Contrast the physics, equipment, applications of explosive welding with friction welding.
CO 4 Outline the physics, equipment, applications of ultrasonic welding and brazing.

Illustrate the physics, equipment, applications of plasma arc welding and magnetically
CO 5
impelled arc butt welding.

CO 6 Select an appropriate welding technique to resolve a metal joining problem.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
1
CO 1 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - 3
CO 4 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2
CO 5 2 - - - 1 - - - - - - 2
CO 6 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 1
Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

Bloom’s Category
1 (marks) 2 (marks) (marks)
Remember 20 20 40
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse - - -
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Mark distribution
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions.

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain principle of operation of Electron Beam Welding.

2. Illustrate a typical EBW gun.

3. List 2 applications of laser beam welding. Identify the inherent process capability of LBM which
makes it suitable for above listed applications.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. With the help of suitable diagrams, describe various stages in diffusion welding process.

2. Describe various diffusion welding methods.

3. Explain the physics of adhesive bonding.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. With the help of suitable diagram, describe parallel stand-off and angular stand-off.

2. Compare the mechanism of metal joining in explosive welding with that of friction welding. Give
one application for each.

3. Show the effect of rotational speed on duration of friction welding.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Describe principle of operation of ultrasonic welding.

2. List all design considerations for a brazed joint.

3. Make a note on hand torch brazing.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Differentiate transferred and non-transferred plasma arc processes.

2. Sketch and explain a plasma arc welding system.

3. Describe the steps involved in MIAB with appropriate diagrams.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Select a welding process which is considered relatively best for underwater welding. Correlate
relevant process capability of the selected technique to support your selection.

2. Select a welding process that is considered best for welding stainless steel. Correlate relevant
process capability of the selected technique to support your selection.

3. Suggest a best welding technique to join materials having thin sections. Explain why.

Model Question Paper

SIXTH SEMESTER MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MET372 ADVANCED METAL JOINING TECHNIQUES

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part−A
Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks.
1. Draw typical joint designs for electron beam welding.
2. How do you define “f number” for a laser beam?
3. What is vacuum fusion bonding?
4. Write a short note on crack extension test performed on adhesive bonds.
5. What is Impact velocity? How critical is it in creating an explosive weld?
6. Sketch and mark a simple friction welding setup.
7. What is principle of operation of ultrasonic welding?
8. List down essential properties of brazing filler metals.
9. What is “keyholing” in plasma arc welding?
10. What are the advantages of magnetically impelled arc butt welding?

Part−B

Answer one full question from each module.

Module I

11. (a) Draw and explain an EBW equipment. (7 marks)

(b) Discuss all joint configurations commonly used for LBW. (7 marks)
12. (a) Discuss process characteristics of EBW. (7 marks)
(b) Discuss Carbon Dioxide lasers used for welding. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
(7 marks)

Module II
13. Explain the theory of diffusion welding process. (14 marks)

14. Classify adhesives used for adhesive bonding and explain their characteristics.
(14 marks)

Module III
15. With the help of a neat diagram describe different stages in explosion welding.
(14 marks)

16. Draw and explain various joint designs employed in friction welding.
(14 marks)
Module IV
17. State and explain all variables in ultrasonic welding. (14 marks)

18. Write short notes on (i) torch brazing (ii) furnace brazing (iii) vacuum brazing
(14 marks)
Module V
19. Explain the principle of operation of MIAB welding and steps involved in it with the help of
suitable diagrams. (14 marks)

20. Describe the components of a Plasma Arc Welding system and list all applications of PAW.
(14 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1

Radiant energy welding: Electron Beam Welding (EBW) - principle and theory- equipment and
systems- process characteristics and variables- weld joint design- applications- EBW process
variants. Laser Beam Welding-principle and theory-operation-types of lasers-process variables and
characteristics-applications.
Module 2
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Diffusion welding-principle and theory-methods- welding parameters-advantages and limitations-
applications. Cold pressure welding-process, equipment and set-up-applications. Adhesive Bonding-
principle and theory-types of adhesives-joint design-bonding methods- applications.

Module 3

Explosive welding-principle and theory-process variables-equipment-joint design-advantages and

limitations-applications. Friction welding-principle and theory-process variables-advantages and
limitations-applications. Friction stir welding- metal flow phenomena-tools-process variables –
applications.

Module 4

Ultrasonic welding-principle and theory-process variables and equipment-types of ultrasonic welds-

advantages and limitations-applications. Brazing- principle- brazing processes-torch brazing- furnace
brazing- vacuum brazing-induction brazing-advantages and limitations-applications.

Module 5

Plasma arc welding –principle and theory- transferred arc and non-transferred arc techniques-
equipment-advantages and limitations-applications. Magnetically impelled arc butt (MIAB) welding-
principle of operation-applications. Under water welding-wet and dry under water welding- set-up for
underwater welding systems.

Text Books

1. Parmar R.S., Welding Processes and Technology, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1998.
Reference Books

1. ASM Metals Handbook “Welding and Brazing”, Vol.6, ASM, Ohio, 1988
2. Parmar R.S., “Welding Engineering and Technology” Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1997
3. Rossi, B.E., Welding Engineering, Mc Graw-Hill, 1954
4. Schwartz M.M., “Metal Joining Manual”, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1979

5. Udin et al., Welding for Engineers, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1967
6. Welding Engineers Handbook – ASHE Vol. I, II, III, IV

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. Topic No. of COs

Lectures
1.1 Radiant energy welding: Principle of Electron Beam Welding and 1 CO1
theory.
1.2 Types of EBW welding guns. 1 CO1
1.3 EBW equipment and systems. 1 CO1
1.4 Process variables –effect of beam current on weld penetration-effect of 1 CO1
 welding speed on weld penetration.
1.5 Process variants of EBW-medium vacuum EBWMECHANICAL and non-vacuum ENGINEERING
1 CO1
EBW.
1.6 Typical weld joint design and preparation for EBW. 1 CO1
1.7 Weldable materials using EBW and applications of EBW. 1 CO1CO6
1.8 Principle of Laser Beam Welding, mechanism and operation- types of 1 CO1
laser systems- process variables and characteristics.
1.9 Weld joint design – weldable materials and applications of laser beam 1 CO1
welding. CO6
2.1 Diffusion welding- principle and theory. 1 CO2
2.2 Diffusion welding methods- Gas-pressure bonding, Vacuum fusion 1 CO2
bonding, Eutectic fusion bonding.
2.3 Diffusion welding parameters. 1 CO2
2.4 Weldable materials using diffusion welding- advantages, limitations 1 CO2
and applications. CO6
2.5 Cold pressure welding equipment and set-up-applications. 1 CO2
2.6 Adhesive bonding- principle and theory- classification of adhesives 1 CO2
and types of adhesive materials.
2.7 Joint design and bonding methods – applications. 1 CO2
CO6
3.1 Explosive welding- principle and theory- process variables. 1 CO3
3.2 Set-up for explosion welding- Joint design- advantages and limitations- 1 CO3
applications.
3.3 Friction welding- principle and theory- process variables. 2 CO3
3.4 Effect of rotational speed on duration of welding- process 1 CO3
characteristics.
3.5 Advantages and limitations-applications. Variants of friction welding- 2 CO3
friction stir welding-metal flow phenomena. CO6
4.1 Ultrasonic welding- principle and theory. 1 CO4
4.2 Ultrasonic process variables and equipment-types of ultrasonic welds. 1 CO4
4.3 Advantages and disadvantages of ultrasonic welding- applications. 1 CO4
CO6
4.4 Brazing-principle-brazing processes- torch brazing- furnace brazing- 2 CO4
vacuum brazing-induction brazing-advantages and limitations-
applications.
5.1 Plasma Arc welding –principle and theory- transferred arc and non- 1 CO5
transferred arc processes.
5.2 Plasma arc welding system. 1 CO5
5.3 Advantages, limitations and applications. 1 CO5
CO6
5.4 Magnetically Impelled Arc Butt (MIAB) welding- principle of 2 CO5
operation-applications. CO6
5.5 Under water welding techniques – wet and dry welding- general 2 CO5
arrangement for underwater welding systems.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI
MINOR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE Course Name CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET382 MACHINE DESIGN VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: This course mainly covers elementary topics of strength of materials such as
stresses, strains, stress concentration, etc. Failure theories to predict the failure of machine
elements subjected to static and fatigue loading are also covered. Design of bolts, riveted
joints, welded joints, springs and shafts are also incorporated in this syllabus.

Prerequisite: EST100 Engineering Mechanics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 To calculate the different types of stresses in a structural member.

CO 2 To apply failure theories and predict the failure of components.
CO 3 To design bolts subjected to fatigue loads.
CO 4 To design riveted and welded joints.
CO 5 To design close coiled helical compression springs and shafts subjected to static and fatigue
loads.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 2
CO 5 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Define stress concentration factor and factor of safety.

2. Calculate the principal stresses in a structural member subjected to loads in two directions.

3. Draw stress strain diagram and explain its significance in the design of machine elements.

4. Calculate the equivalent stress due to combined axial, bending and torsional loads.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the steps in the design process.

2. Distinguish between codes and standards.

3. Describe with neat sketches the different types of fits.

4. What are the different failure theories? What is the significance in design?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3)

1. Define endurance limit. What are the factors affecting it?

2. Explain Soderberg’s and Goodman’s criteria.

3. Derive an expression for the impact stress in terms of static stress.

4. What is meant by preloading or initial tension in a bolt?

5. Design a bolted joint subjected to eccentric loading.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What are the advantages of riveted joint over welded joint?

2. Describe the different modes of failure of a riveted joint.

3. Find the various efficiencies of a riveted joint.

 4. Describe the different AWS welding symbols.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
5. Design a welded joint subjected to axial loading, twisting moment and bending moment.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Design a close coiled helical compression spring subjected to axial loading.

2. Explain surge in spring.

3. What are the different types of end constructions for a close coiled helical compression
spring? How do they affect the performance of the spring?

4. What is critical speed of a shaft?

5. Why hollow shafts are preferred in certain applications compared to solid shafts?

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VI SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET382 : MACHINE DESIGN

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration:3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Define stress concentration and factor of safety.

2. Distinguish between normal stress and principal stress.

3. What are standards and codes?

4. Explain Haigh’s and Rankine’s theories of failures.

5. Why preloading of bolts is required?

6. Define endurance limit. What is its significance in design of machine elements?

7. Describe the different modes of failure of a riveted joint.

8. Explain with a neat sketch the AWS welding symbols

9. Derive an expression for the stress in a closed coiled helical compression spring.

10. What is meant by the critical speed of a shaft?

 PART B
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a) An element in plane stress is subjected to stresses σxx = 85 MPa, σyy = -30 MPa
and τxy = -32 MPa. Determine the principal stresses and the maximum shear stress
(9 marks)
b) Draw the shear stress, bending stress, axial stress and torsional shear stress in a
shaft of circular cross-section. (5 marks)
12. a) Draw the stress-strain diagram for mild steel and show all the significant regions.
(5 marks)

b) Find the maximum stress in the cantilever beam shown below. The material is
aluminium. The rod length L = 15 cm. The permissible tensile and shear stresses are
70 N/mm2 and 50 N/mm2 respectively. (10 marks)

MODULE 2

13. a) Explain allowances and tolerances. (5 marks)

b) A mild steel shaft having yield stress = 200 MPa is subjected to the following
stresses. MPa, MPa , MPa. Find the factor of safety using
a. Rankine’s theory
b. Guest’s theory (10 marks)

14. a) With neat sketches explain clearance fit, interference fit and transition fit.
(6 marks)
b) What are the steps in the design process. (6 marks)
c) Explain preferred sizes. (2 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODULE 3

15. a) A round prismatic steel bar (E = 210 GPa) of length 2 m and diameter 15 mm
hangs vertically from a support at its upper end. A sliding collar of mass 20 kg drops
from a height of 150 mm onto a flange fixed at the lower end of the bar without
rebounding. Calculate the maximum elongation of the bar due to impact. Also,
determine the maximum tensile stress in the bar and the corresponding impact factor
(10 marks)
b) Explain the Gerber criterion used in the design for fatigue loading. (4 marks)
16. a) With a neat sketch explain the nominal diameter, root diameter and pitch diameter
and pitch of a screw thread. (3 marks)

b) Find the diameter of the bolt for a bracket loaded as shown below. The allowable
shear stress for bolt material is 60 MPa. (11 marks)

MODULE 4

17. a) What are the advantages of welded joint over riveted joint? (9 marks)

b) Two plates are joined together by means of a single transverse and double parallel
fillet welds are shown in figure. The size of the fillet weld is 5 mm and allowable
shear load per mm of weld is 330 N. Find the length of each parallel fillet weld.
(10 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

18. a) Draw a zig-zag-double riveted double covered (equal) butt joint and mark all the
details. (4 marks)

b) Two flat plates of width w = 200 mm, subjected to a tensile force P = 250 kN are
connected together by means of a double-strap butt joint as shown below. The rivets
and the plates are made of the same steel and the permissible stresses in tension,
compression and shear are 70, 100 and 60 N/mm2 respectively. Calculate the i)
diameter of the rivets, ii) thickness of the plates and iv) the efficiency of the joint.

(10 marks)

MODULE 5

19. a) Explain surge in springs. (4 marks)

b) It is required to design a helical compression spring subjected to a maximum force
of 1250 N. The deflection of the spring corresponding to the maximum force should
 be approximately 30 mm. The spring index can be taken as 6. The ultimate tensile
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
strength and modulus of rigidity of the spring material are 1090 and 81370 N/mm2
respectively. The permissible shear stress for the spring wire should be taken as 50%
of the ultimate tensile strength. Design the spring and calculate: i) wire diameter, ii)
mean coil diameter, iii) number of active coils, iv) total number of coils, v) free length
of the spring and pitch of the coil. (10 marks)

20. a) A line shaft supporting two pulleys A and B is shown in figure. Power is supplied
to the shaft by means of a vertical belt on the pulley A, which is then transmitted to
the pulley Bcarrying a horizontal belt. The ratio of belt tensions on tight and loose
sides is 3:1. The limiting value of tension in the belt is 2.7 kN. The permissible shear
stress is 86 N/mm2. Pulleys are keyed to the shaft. Determine the diameter of the shaft
according to the ASME code, if Kb = 1.5 and Kt = 1.0. (10 marks)

b) Two shafts ; one solid and the other hollow, have the same weight and transmit the
same torque. Calculate the ratio of the maximum shear stress induced in the solid shat
to that in the hollow shaft. The inner diameter of the hollow shaft is 50% of the outer
diameter. (5 marks)
 Syllabus
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 1
Tension, compression, shear: Introduction, Internal force, stress, strain, elasticity, stress-strain
diagram, working stress, stress concentration, factor of safety, bending and torsional stresses,
eccentric loading, stresses due to combined axial, bending and torsional loads, principal stresses

Module 2
Machine design, steps in the design process, standards and codes, preferred sizes, tolerances,
allowances, fits, selection of materials
Theories of elastic failures- Guest’s theory, Rankine’s theory, St. Venant’s theory, Haigh’s theory,
and Von Mises and Hencky Theory.

Module 3
Shock and impact loads, fatigue loading, endurance limit stress, factors affecting endurance limit,
design for fatigue loading, Soderberg and Good man criteria.

Threaded joints, types of threads, stresses in screw threads, bolted joints, initial tension, design of
bolts for static and fatigue loading, power screws

Module 4
Design of riveted joints- material for rivets, modes of failure, efficiency of joint, design of boiler
and tank joints, structural joints
Design of welded joints- AWS welding symbols, stresses in fillet and butt welds, butt joint in
tension, fillet weld in tension, fillet joint under torsion, fillet wed under bending, eccentrically
loaded welds.

Module 5
Springs- classification, spring materials, stresses and deflection of helical springs, axial loading, ,
static and fatigue loading, surging, critical frequency, concentric springs, end construction.
Shafting- material, design considerations, causes of failure in shafts, design based on strength,
rigidity, critical speed, design for static and fatigue loads, repeated loading, reversed bending

Text Books

1. Bhandari V B, Design of Machine Elements, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2010.

2. James M Gere, Mechanics of Materials, Thomson, 2007

.
Reference Books
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. S P Timoshenko and D H Young, Elements of Strength of Materials, East West Pvt Ltd.,2011

3. Robert L Norton, Design of Machinery, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2005

4. P C Sharma and D K Aggarwal, Machine Design, S K Kataria & Sons, 2007.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

Topic No. of Lectures

No
(Hrs.)
1
1.1 Tension, compression, shear-Introduction, internal force, stress, strain, 3
elasticity
1.2 Stress-strain diagram, working stress, stress concentration, factor of 2
safety

1.3 Bending and torsional stresses, eccentric loading, stresses due to 3

combined axial, bending and torsional loads, principal stresses
2
2.1 Machine design, steps in the design process, standards and codes 3
2.2 Preferred sizes, tolerances, allowances, fits, selection of materials 2
2.3 Theories of elastic failures- Guest’s theory, Rankine’s theory, St. 3
Venant’s theory, Haigh’s theory, and Von Mises and Hencky Theory.
3
3.1 Shock and impact loads, fatigue loading, endurance limit stress, 2
factors affecting endurance limit

3.2 Design for fatigue loading, Soderberg and Goodman’s criteria. 2

3.3 Threaded joints, types of threads, stresses in screw threads, bolted 2

joints, initial tension
3.4 Design of bolts for static and fatigue loading, eccentric loading, 2
power screws

4
4.1 Design of riveted joints- material for rivets, modes of failure, rivet 3
and butt joints, efficiency of joint, design of structural joints
4.2 Design of welded joints- AWS welding symbols, stresses in fillet and 3
butt welds, Butt joint in tension, fillet weld in tension,
4.3 Fillet joint under torsion, fillet wed under bending, eccentrically 3
loaded welds.
5
5.1 Springs- classification, spring materials, stresses and deflection of 3
 helical springs, axial loading
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
5.2 Static and fatigue loading, surging, critical frequency, concentric 3
springs, end construction
5.3 Shafting- material, design considerations, causes of failure in shafts, 3
hollow and solid shafts, design based on strength, rigidity,
5.4 Critical speed, design for static and fatigue loads, repeated loading, 3
reversed bending
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET 384 HEAT TRANSFER VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

The objectives of the course are:

• To introduce the heat transfer by conduction, convection and radiation modes.

• To provide useful information for solving the heat transfer problems across the plane
and cylindrical sections

• To give enough ideas to solve the heat transfer problems involving convection heat
transfer

• To determine the performance of heat exchangers

• Present and solve the various types of radiation heat transfer problems

Prerequisite: MET203 Mechanics of fluid

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 To understand the basics of heat transfer.

CO 2 To estimate heat transfer through plane wall, cylindrical surface and fins for various
conditions.
CO 3 To solve problems involving heat convection.
CO 4 To solve the problems of heat exchangers and to determine its performance.
CO 5 To estimate radiation heat transfer between two bodies.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 2 3 2 1 1
CO 3 2 2 2 1 1
CO 4 2 3 2 1 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester

Assignment (%) Test 1 (%) Test 2 (%) Examination
Remember 30 20 20 10
Understand 30 40 40 20
Apply 40 40 40 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Total CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain Fourier’s law of heat conduction?

2. Derive the equation of general heat conduction equation in Cartesian coordinates?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. The interior temperature of a refrigerator is maintained at 7°C. The walls are constructed with
two mild steel sheets 3 mm thick with 5 cm of glass wool insulation between them. The heat
transfer coefficients on inner and outer surface of refrigerator are 10 W/m2°C and 12.5 W/m2
°C respectively. Find the rate of heat leaked the refrigerator in watts when it is kept in a
kitchen room. Also find inter wall temperatures. The temperature in kitchen room is
28°C.Take K (mild steel) =40 W/m-°C K (glass wool) = 0.04 W/m-°C3. Demonstrate the
operation of stack and stack pointer through push and pop Instructions.

2. Derive an equation for one dimensional heat conduction through a plane wall and represent it
in a form of electrical analogy?

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain Newton's law of convective heat transfer?

2. Explain hydrodynamic boundary layer with the help of a neat diagram.

3. Define Reynolds Number, Prandtl Number and Nusselt Number.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What is LMTD? What is the need of determine the LMTD?

2. In a double pipe heat exchanger hot water flows at a rate of 14 kg/s and gets cooled from
370K to 340K. At the same time 14 kg/s of cooling water at 303K enters the heat exchanger.
The flow conditions are such that overall heat transfer coefficient remains constant at 2270
 W/m2 K. Determine the effectiveness and the heat transfer area required, assuming two
streams are in parallel flow. Assume the specific heat MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
for the both the streams = 4.2 kJ/kg K.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explains Stephan Boltzmann law of heat radiation?

2. Explain Wien’s displacement law?

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Heat Transfer-MET384

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks

1. Explain Fourier’s law of heat conduction?

2. What are the factors affecting thermal conductivity of solids, liquids and gases?

3. Write the equation for one dimensional heat conduction through a plane wall and represent it
in a form of electrical analogy?

4. What is critical thickness of insulation and what is its importance?

5. Define Reynolds Number, Prandtl Number and Nusselt Number?

6. What is the difference between free and forced convection?

7. What is meant by NTU in heat exchangers? When it is used?

8. What is effectiveness of a heat exchanger?

9. Explains Stephan Boltzmann law of heat radiation?

10. Explain Wien’s displacement law?

(10 X 3 = 30 Marks)

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1
 11. a) Derive general conduction equation in Cartesian coordinate? (10 marks)
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
b)reduce the equation for steady one dimensional conduction heat transfer for homogeneous
isotropic material without heat generation. (4marks)

12. a) Explain three different modes of heat transfer? (10 marks)

b) Write down the general conduction equation in cylindrical coordinate and explain the terms?

(4 marks)

MODULE II

13. a) The interior temperature of a refrigerator is maintained at 7°C. The walls are constructed with
two mild steel sheets 3 mm thick with 5 cm of glass wool insulation between them. The heat transfer
coefficients on inner and outer surface of refrigerator are 10 W/m2°C and 12.5 W/m2 °C respectively.
Find the rate of heat leaked the refrigerator in watts when it is kept in a kitchen room. Also find inter
wall temperatures. The temperature in kitchen room is 28°C.Take K (mild steel) =40 W/m-°C K
(glass wool) = 0.04 W/m-°C. (10 marks)

b) Write an expression for one dimensional heat transfer along radial direction, through a hollow
cylindrical surface of radius R1 and R2 , thermal conductivity K and length L. express it as an
analogy of electric flow (4 marks)

14 a) Derive an expression for heat flow through “rectangular fin” of infinite length ? (12 marks)

b) What is the propose of a fins? (2 marks)

MODULE III

15 a) Air at 20°C at atmospheric pressure flows over a flat plate at a velocity of 3 m/s. If the plate is 1
m wide and at 80°C, calculate the following at x = 300 mm. Determine Hydrodynamic boundary layer
thickness, Thermal boundary layer thickness, Local friction coefficient , Average heat transfer
coefficient , Heat transfer rate (10 marks)

b) What is the difference between laminar and turbulent flow? (4 marks)

16 a) Air at pressure of 1 atm and temperature 60°C flows over a flat plate which maintains a surface
temperature of 100°C. The plate has a length of 0.2m (in the flow direction) and width of 0.1m. The
Reynolds number based on the plate length is 40000. What is the rate of heat transfer from plate to
air? If the free stream velocity of air is doubled and the pressure is increased to 2.5 atm, what is the
rate of heat transfer? (12 marks)

b) What is the importance of Reynolds number? (2 marks)

MODULE IV

17. a) Derive an expression for LMTD of “parallel flow” heat exchanger (10 marks)

b) What is fouling and scaling of heat exchangers? How to accommodate this factor in calculation

(4 marks)
18. a) A chemical having specific heat of 3.3 KJ/kg K, flowing at the rate of 20000 kg/h enters a
MECHANICAL
parallel flow heat exchanger at 120° C. The flow rate of cooling water is 50000 ENGINEERING
kg/h with an inlet
temperature of 20°C. The heat transfer area is 10 m2 and the overall heat transfer coefficient is 1050
W/m2 K. Take specific heat of water as 4.186 KJ/kg K Find: (i) The effectiveness of the heat
exchanger. (ii) The outlet temperature of water and chemical.
(12 marks)

b) Explain matrix type of heat exchangers? (2 marks)

MODULE V

19 a) Calculate the heat exchange by radiation between the surfaces of two long cylinders having
radii 120 mm and 60 mm respectively. The axes of the cylinders are parallel to each other. The
inner cylinder is maintained at a temperature of 130°C and emissivity of 0.6. Outer cylinder is
maintained at a temperature of 30°C and emissivity of 0.5. (10 marks)

b) Explains Stephan Boltzmann law of heat radiation? (4 marks)

20. a) Calculate the radiation exchange per unit area between two parallel plates of temperature
4000C and 250C. Emissivity of hot and cold plates are 0.9 and 0.7 respectively. Find the percentage
reduction in heat transfer, if a radiation shield of emissivity 0.25 is placed in between the plates

(7 marks)

b) Explain Wien’s displacement law? (7 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1- INTRODUCTION TO HEAT TRANSFER

Modes of Heat Transfer: Introduction to Conduction, Convection, radiation. Conduction: Fourier law
of heat conduction-Thermal conductivity of solids, liquids and gases-Factors affecting thermal
conductivity- Most general heat conduction equation in Cartesian and cylindrical coordinates.

Module 2 CONDUCTION HEAT TRANSFER

One dimensional steady state conduction with and without heat generation conduction through plane
walls, cylinders. Critical thickness of insulation – Heat transfer through composite wall- extended
surface heat transfer – fin performance – effect of variable thermal conductivity.

Module 3 CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER

Convection heat transfer: Newton’s law of cooling- Free and forced convection. Laminar and
Turbulent flow, Reynolds Number, Critical Reynolds Number, Prandtl Number, Nusselt Number,
Grashoff Number and Rayleigh’s Number. Elementary ideas of hydrodynamics and thermal boundary
layers-Thickness of Boundary layer-Displacement, Momentum and Energy thickness (description
only).

Module 4 HEAT EXCHANGERS

Heat exchangers: Classification – log mean temperature difference – overall heat transfer coefficient –
fouling and scaling of heat exchangers – LMTD and NTU method of performance evaluation of heat
exchangers.
Module 5 RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Radiation: Fundamentals of radiation – radiation spectrum – thermal radiation – concept of black
body and grey body – monochromatic and total emissive power – absorptivity, reflectivity and
transmissivity - laws of radiation – radiation between two surfaces – geometrical factors for simple
configuration – radiation shields – electrical network method of solving problems.

Text Books

1. Sachdeva R. C., Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer, New Age Science Limited

2. R. K. Rajput, Heat and mass transfer, S. Chand & Co.

3. Nag P. K., Heat and Mass Transfer, McGraw Hill.

4. Kothandaraman, C.P., Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, New Age International, New
Delhi.

Data Book

Heat and Mass Transfer data book: C.P. Kothandaraman, S. Subramanyan, New age International
publishers.

Reference Books

1. Holman J.P, “Heat transfer”, Mc Graw-Hill, 10th. Ed.

2. Yunus A Cengel, “Heat and Mass Transfer: Fundamentals and Applications” McGraw-Hill Higher
Education.

3. Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewitt, Heat and Mass Transfer, John Wiley and sons.

COURSE PLAN

MODULE TOPICS HOURS

ALLOTED

Modes of Heat Transfer: Introduction to Conduction, Convection,

radiation. Conduction: Fourier law of heat conduction-Thermal
conductivity of solids, liquids and gases-Factors affecting thermal 4-0-0
conductivity
1
General heat conduction equation in Cartesian coordinates. General heat
conduction equation in Cylindrical coordinates
3-1-0

One dimensional steady state conduction with and without heat

generation conduction through plane walls, cylinders. Critical thickness
2 of insulation – Heat transfer through composite wall- extended surface 8-2-0
heat transfer – fin performance – effect of variable thermal conductivity.

Convection heat transfer: Newton’s law of cooling- Free and forced

convection. Laminar and Turbulent flow, Reynolds Number, Critical
 Reynolds Number, Prandtl Number, Nusselt Number, Grashoff Number 7-2-0
MECHANICAL
and Rayleigh’s Number. Elementary ideas of hydrodynamics ENGINEERING
and thermal
3 boundary layers-Thickness of Boundary layer-Displacement, Momentum
and Energy thickness

Heat exchangers: Classification – log mean temperature difference –

overall heat transfer coefficient – fouling and scaling of heat exchangers
4 – LMTD and NTU method of performance evaluation of heat exchangers 8-2-0

Radiation: Fundamentals of radiation – radiation spectrum – thermal

radiation – concept of black body and grey body – monochromatic and
5 total emissive power – absorptivity, reflectivity and transmissivity - laws
of radiation – radiation between two surfaces – geometrical factors for
7-2-0
simple configuration – radiation shields – electrical network method of
solving problems.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET386 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING
VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: This course helps an engineering student to understand the functions and
techniques of Industrial Engineering. It addresses economic aspects of the business decision
and the concepts of human factors in design. The course involves productivity improvement
methods, Work study, Method study and Time study. Industrial Engineering Tools and
Techniques for Plant management including Plant layout and Material handling are also
covered in this course. The students also will able understand Production Planning and
Control process, and procedures. The other focus areas of Industrial Engineering, Quality
practices, Project Management and Replacement technique are also part of this course.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Understand the functions of Industrial Engineering, Economic aspects of business

and Human factors in design

CO 2 Apply Principles of Work study, Method study and Work measurement techniques.

CO 3 Develop layout for a manufacturing/service system and apply plant management and
Material handling techniques.

CO 4 Evaluate Production Planning and Control techniques and Inventory control

CO 5 Analyse Quality practices, and Apply Project Management and Replacement

techniques.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 2 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3
CO 5 3 3 3 3 3 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks

Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. State functions of an Industrial Engineer which will lead to improvement in productivity?.

2. How the productivity of s system can be improved? List factors affecting productivity that
can be controlled.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
3. Asian industries specialize in the manufacture of small capacity motors. The cost structure
of the motor is as under

Material Rs 50/-

Labour Rs 80/-

Variable overhead 75% of labour cost

Fixed cost of the company amount 2,40,000 Rs/annum

The sales price of the motor is Rs 230/- each

Determine the number of motors to be manufactured to break even

How many motors are to be sold to make a profit of Rs 1 Lakh

If the sale price is reduced by Rs. 15/- how many motors are to sold to break even

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. What is the concept of work content? What are reasons for excess of work content?

2. Differentiate between Two hand process chart and Multiple Activity chart.

3. The following data refers to the study conducted for an operation. The table shows the
actual time for elements in minutes.

Cycle 1 2 3 4 5
elements

1 2.5 2.6 2.4 2.5 2.5

2 6.0 6.2 6.1 5.9 6.0

3 2.3 2.1 2.4 2.2 2.3

4 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.5

i) Element 3 is machine elements

ii)Take performance rating as 110

Take following personal allowance of 30 minutes in shift of 8 hours, fatigue allowance 15%,
contingency allowance 2%. Estimate the standard time for the operation and production per 8
hour shift.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. List the different types of layout. Differentiate between Product and process layout based
any five parameters.

2. Consider the following assembly network relationships of a product. The number of shifts
per day is two and the number of working hours per shift is 8. The company aims to produce
80 units of the product per day. Group the activities into work stations using Ranking
Positional Weight method and compute balancing efficiency.

Operation Immediate Duration (Min)

Number predecessor
1 - 7
2 1 2
3 1 2
4 1 5
5 2,3 8
6 3,4 3
7 5 4
8 5,6 7
9 4,6 9
10 7,8,9 8

3. The initial cost of an equipment is Rs 21000/- expected salvage value Rs 1000 and
expected useful life of 10 years. Calculate the depreciation and book value after 1 year and 9
years using sinking fund method and straight line method. Take interest rate as 6%

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the steps of Production planning Process,

2. Describe the importance Product Life cycle in Product development and Management

3. A manufacturer has to supply his customer a 2400 units of his products per year. Shortages
are not permitted. Inventory carrying cost amounts to Rs. 0.8/- per unit per annum. The setup
cost per run is Rs 60/- . Find

i. EOQ

ii. Optimum number of order per annum

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
iii. Average annual inventory cost(min)

iv. Optimum period of supply per order

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the Procedure of X and R chart .

2. The mortality rate are given in the table below for certain type of electric bulb. There are
2000 bulb in use and it costs Rs 12/- to replace an individual bulb that has burnt. If all the
bulbs are replaced simultaneously, it would cost Rs. 4/- per bulb. It is proposed to replace all
the bulbs in fixed intervals, whether or not they have burnt out and to continue replacing
burnt bulbs out bulbs if they fail. At what intervals should all the bulbs be replaced?

Week 1 2 3 4 5 6
Probability
0.05 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.15 0.05
of failure

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code : MET386
Course Name : INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

Part A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. What are the factors influencing productivity?
2. Explain the role ergonomics plays in environmental man-machine interface

3. What is micro motion study? What are the steps involved?

4. Explain flow diagram with example

5. Explain REL Chart
6. Explain the criteria for selecting Material handling equipment
7. How order promising is done during Production planning
8. Briefly explain any three selective inventory control techniques
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
9. Explain the significance of Bathtub curve
10. Briefly explain the stages of TQM implementation

Part B

(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

Module 1

11. a) Explain the factors affecting make or buy decisions. (7marks)

b) ABC company plans to sell an article at local market. The articles are purchased at Rs 5
on the condition that all unsold items shall be returned. The rent for the space Rs 2000. The
article will be sold at Rs 9 . Determine the number of articles which must be sold to i) to
break even ii) to earn Rs 400 profit iii)if the company sells 750 articles . Calculate the margin
of Safety (7 marks)

12. a) Explain the principles in the application of Anthropometric data. How it can be used in
work place design? (8 marks)
b) Explain the functions of Industrial Engineering (6 Marks)

Module 2

13. a) Explain the use recording techniques in method study. Differentiate between
Operations Process chart and Flow process chart. (7 Marks)

b) The observed time and the performance rating for five elements are given. Compute the
standard time assuming rest and personal allowance as 15% and contingency as 2% of basic
time.

Element 1 2 3 4 5
Observed
0.2 0.08 0.50 0.12 0.10
time
Performance
85 80 90 85 80
rating
(7 Marks)

14 a) Explain the different techniques used for work measurement. (7 Marks)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
b) The following data refers to the study conducted for an operation. The table shows the
actual time for elements in minutes.

Cycle 1 2 3 4 5
elements
1 2.5 2.6 2.4 2.5 2.5
2 6.0 6.2 6.1 5.9 6.0
3 2.3 2.1 2.4 2.2 2.3
4 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.5

i) Element 3 is machine elements

ii)Take performance rating as 110

Take following personal allowance of 30 minutes in shift of 8 hours, fatigue allowance 15%,
contingency allowance 2%. Estimate the standard time for the operation and production per 8
hour shift. (7 Marks)

Module 3

15. a) Explain Systematic Layout planning with the help of block diagram. (6 Marks)

b) Consider the following assembly network relationship of a product. The number of shifts
per day is two and the number of working hours per shift is 12. The company aims to produce
100 units of the product per day. Group the activities into work stations using Rank Positional
Weight Method and compute balancing efficiency.

Operation number Immediate preceding Tasks Duration (Min)

1 - 7
2 1 2
3 1 2
4 1 5
5 2,3 8
6 3,4 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
7 5 4
8 5,6 7
9 4,6 9
10 7,8,9 8
(8 Marks)

16 a) The initial cost of an equipment is Rs 21000/- expected salvage value Rs 1000 and
expected useful life of 10 years. Calculate the depreciation and book value after 1 year and 9
years using sinking fund method and straight line method. Take interest rate as 6%. (6 Marks)

b)The price of an office equipment is Rs 2.5 lakhs the salvage value at the end of 10 years is
Rs 25,000/ Calculate the amortised value after 5 years by using i) sinking fund method ii)
declining balance method. (8 Marks)

Module 4

17 a) What are the different types of Production system, explain (7 Marks)

b)Consider the following 3 machine and 5 jobs flow shop problem. Check whether Johnson’s
can be extended to this problem. What is the optimal schedule for this problem and
corresponding makespan? Draw the Gantt chart.

Job Machine 1 Machine 2 Machine 3

1 11 10 12
2 13 8 20
3 15 6 15
4 12 7 19
5 20 9 7
(7 Marks)

18 a) Explain the Product Life cycle and its importance in Product management. (7 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
b) ABC industry needs 15,000 units/year of a bought out component which will be used in its
main product. The ordering cost is Rs. 125 per order and holding cost per unit per year is
20% of the purchase price per unit which is Rs. 75.

i. Find economic order quantity

ii. Number of order per year

iii. Time between successive orders

The activities involved in ABC manufacturing company are listed below with their time
estimates. Draw the network for the given activities and carry out critical path calculations.

(7 Marks)

Module 5

19 a) Differentiate between PERT and CPM, Specify the difference in application (6 Marks)

b) Consider the following data of the project

Duration (Weeks)
Activity Predecessor a m b
A _ 3 5 8
B _ 6 7 9
C A 4 5 9
D B 3 5 8
E A 4 6 9
F C,D 5 8 11
G C,D,E 3 6 9
H F 1 2 9

i. Construct the project network

ii. Find expected duration and variance of each activity

iii. What is the probability of completing the project in 30 weeks?

(8 Marks)

20 a) What is Process Capability? Explain the significance Process capability Index

(7 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
b)The cost of a machine is Rs. 60,000/-. The salvage value and the running costs of a machine
are shown in the table. Depreciation is cumulative. Find the most economical replacement age of
the machine. (7 marks)

Year 1 2 3 4 5 6
Running 12050 14100 16375 18875 20500 24550
cost in Rs.
Resale 40000 30000 25000 15000 10500 7000
value in Rs

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to Industrial Engineering - Evolution of modern Concepts in Industrial Engineering -

Functions of Industrial Engineering.
Productivity- productivity measures- dynamics of productivity change- Techniques for improving
productivity.
Production costs concepts – Manufacturing Vs Purchase- problems- Economic aspects- C-V-P
analysis – simple problems..
Ergonomics Man-Machine systems-Anthropometry Work place design and ergonomics - Value
Engineering.

Module 2
Work study-procedure-concept of work content- techniques to reduce work content.
Method Study-steps-recording techniques-operation process chart-flow process chart-two hand
process chart-multiple activity chart. Diagrams- Flow diagrams-String diagrams. Micro-motion
study-SIMO chart- critical examination. Principle of motion economy.
Work measurement- techniques of work measurement - Time Study- - Steps in time study-
calculation of standard time (problems)- allowances.

Module 3
Plant location, plant layout and material handling- Type of layouts and characteristics –Tools
and techniques for plant layout- travel chart – REL chart- Computer algorithms for layout
design CRAFT-ALDEP (methods only)- Systematic layout planning -Line balancing–RPW
(problem).
Principles of material handling-selection and type of material handling equipment- Unit load
concept- Automated Material Handling Systems- AGVs.
Depreciation -Method of providing for depreciation- straight line method- Declining balance
method- Sinking fund methods (Problems)

Module 4
Production Planning and control -Types of Production systems.
Demand forecasting- Forecasting methods, Aggregate planning- methods- Master Production
Schedule-techniques-order promising- Material Requirement Planning-bill of material-
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
product structure diagram- MRP record processing- Shop floor control - Scheduling flow
shop and job shop scheduling methods, Johnson’s algorithm-dispatching rules - Gantt charts.
Introduction and need for a new product-product life cycle.
Inventory Control, Inventory models – Basic model -price discounts -problems –
determination of safety stock - Selective inventory control techniques

Module 5
Quality control - Statistical quality control –causes of variation in quality- control charts
for X and R (problems). Process Capability- process capability index- Reliability-causes
of failures- Bath tub curve.-System reliability. Introduction to concepts of, TQM, ISO,
Six Sigma and Quality circles.
Project management- Critical Path Method, PERT, crashing of networks
Determination of economic life -Replacement policy-- Methods of replacement analysis.

Text Books

1. Martand Telsang, Industrial Engineering & Production Management, S. Chand, Third revised
edition 2018.
2. B. Kumar, Industrial Engineering Khanna Publishers, Tenth Edition 2015
3. Thomas E Vollmann , William L Berry , D Clay Whybark, F Robert Jacobs,
Manufacturing Planning and Control for Supply Chain Management, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, Fifth Edition 2017
4. M Mahajan, Industrial Engineering & Production Management, Dhanpat Rai, 2015
5. O. P. Khanna, Industrial Engineering and Management, Dhanpat Rai, 2018

Reference Books

1. E. S. Buffa, Modern Production management, John Wiley, 1983

2. Grant and Ieven Worth, Statistical Quality Control, McGraw Hill, 2000
3. Ralph M Barnes, Motion and Time Study, Wiley, 1980
4. Richard L. Francis, F. McGinnis Jr., John A. White, Facility Layout and Location: An
Analytical Approach, 2nd Edition,1991
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
Introduction to Industrial Engineering - Evolution of modern Concepts in Industrial
Engineering - Functions of Industrial Engineering.
Productivity- productivity measures- dynamics of productivity change- Techniques for
improving productivity.
1 7-2-0
Production costs concepts – Manufacturing Vs Purchase- problems- Economic aspects-
C-V-P analysis – simple problems..
Ergonomics Man-Machine systems-Anthropometry Work place design and ergonomics -
Value Engineering
Work study-procedure-concept of work content- techniques to reduce work content.
Method Study-steps-recording techniques-operation process chart-flow process chart-two
hand process chart-multiple activity chart. Diagrams- Flow diagrams-String diagrams.
2 7-2-0
Micro-motion study-SIMO chart- critical examination. Principle of motion economy.
Work measurement- techniques of work measurement - Time Study- - Steps in time
study- calculation of standard time (problems)- allowances
Plant location, plant layout and material handling- Type of layouts and characteristics –
Tools and techniques for plant layout- travel chart – REL chart- Computer algorithms for
layout design CRAFT-ALDEP (methods only)- Systematic layout planning -Line
3 balancing–RPW (problem). 7-2-0
Principles of material handling-selection and type of material handling equipment- Unit
load concept- Automated Material Handling Systems- AGVs.
Depreciation -Method of providing for depreciation- straight line method- Declining
balance method- Sinking fund methods (Problems)
Production Planning and control -Types of Production systems.
Demand forecasting- Forecasting methods, Aggregate planning- methods- Master
Production Schedule-techniques-order promising- Material Requirement Planning-bill of
material-product structure diagram- MRP record processing- Shop floor control -
4 Scheduling flow shop and job shop scheduling methods, Johnson’s algorithm- 7-2-0
dispatching rules -- Gantt charts.
Introduction and need for a new product-product life cycle.
Inventory Control, Inventory models – Basic model -price discounts -problems –
determination of safety stock - Selective inventory control techniques
Quality control - Statistical quality control –causes of variation in quality- control charts
for X and R (problems). Process Capability- process capability index- Reliability-causes
of failures- Bath tub curve.-System reliability. Introduction to concepts of, TQM, ISO,
5 7-2-0
Six Sigma and Quality circles.
Project management- Critical Path Method, PERT, crashing of networks
Determination of economic life -Replacement policy-- Methods of replacement analysis.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI
HONOURS
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET394 ADVANCED DESIGN SYNTHESIS VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

• To give an overview of the techniques used in Mechanical Engineering for the

analysis and synthesis of Mechanisms.

• To familiarize the graphical and analytical techniques commonly used in the synthesis
of mechanisms.

• To provide sufficient theoretical background to understand contemporary mechanism

design techniques.

• To develop skills for applying these theories in practice. Identify mechanisms by type
of motion (Planar, Spatial etc.)

• Select the best type of mechanism for a specific application and apply the
fundamental synthesis technique to properly dimension the mechanism

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyse Velocity and Acceleration Analysis of complex mechanisms using auxiliary

points
CO 2 Solve the synthesis of slider crank mechanism with three accuracy points
CO 3 Explain the synthesis of slider crank mechanism with four accuracy points
CO 4 Describe the algebraic methods of synthesis using displacement equations
CO 5 Demonstrate the algebraic methods of synthesis using complex numbers

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO 12
10 11
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 2
CO 5 3 3 2
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Calculate Velocity and Acceleration Analysis of complex mechanisms using auxiliary

points.

2. Describe Roberts – Chebyshev theorem.

3. Explain the Inflection circle, Euler- Savery equation, and Hartman construction.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe about the Relative poles of four bar linkages and slider crank mechanism.

2. List out the usage of Function generators.

3. Execute the synthesis of slider crank mechanism with three accuracy points.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Execute the geometric methods of synthesis with four accuracy points.

2. Discuss about the Construction of circle points, Cardinal points, opposite poles, and Pole
quadrilaterals

3. Do the synthesis of slider crank mechanism with four accuracy points.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Demonstrate the algebraic methods of synthesis using displacement equations.

2. Execute the Crank and follower synthesis.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Describe the method to get angular velocities and accelerations from crank and follower
synthesis.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Discuss about the Algebraic methods of synthesis using complex numbers.

2. Explain the importance Spatial motion and spatial linkages.

3. Demonstrate working of the Simple mechanisms in Robots.

 MODEL QUESTION PAPER
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET394

Course Name: ADVANCED DESIGN SYNTHESIS

Max. Marks: 100
Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. State and explain Robert Chebychev theorem?
2. Explain the properties of inflection circle?
3. What are three accuracy points in cam and follower synthesis?
4. Explain the relative poles of slider crank mechanism with sketch?
5. What is the significance function generator in the design of a mechanism?
6. Explain pole quadrilateral in geometric synthesis?
7. Define center point and circle point?
8. Write notes on types of errors in synthesis?
9. Draw a simple robot mechanism?
10. Classify the various types of spatial mechanisms?

PART – B

(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1

11. For the twin cylinder V engine, determine the velocity of pistons B and D and the angular
velocity of link 3. Link 2 rotates at 2000rpm. The dimensions of the various links are: O2A =
50mm ; AB = BC = 150mm ; AC =50mm ; CD = 125mm

(14 marks)

12. 12. Using overlay method and Chebychev spacing design a four-bar mechanism to generate
the function y = x1.5 for 0.5 < x < 1.5. Assume six precision points. (14 marks)
 Module 2 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
13. a) Discuss the significance of transmission angle in the design of a four-bar mechanism.
(6 marks)
b) Explain the procedure for design of a four-bar mechanism for optimum transmission
angle.
(8 marks)

14. Design a function generator linkage to solve y = 1/x in the range 1 < x < 2 using three
precision points using geometric method. ΔΦ = 90o, ΔΨ = 90o, Φ0 = 90o, Ψ0 = 45o. Plot a
curve of the desire function and the one generated by the synthesized linkage and find the
maximum error percentage. (14marks)
Module 3
15. Design a slider crank mechanism such that Φ12 = 30o and Φ23 = 50o and S12 = 25 cm and S23 =
20 cm using geometric method. The input crank moves in clockwise direction and the slider
moves away from the crank pivot. (14 marks)

16. Design a double rocker mechanism to generate the function y = ex in the range 1 ≤ x ≤ 1
using four precision points and Chebychev spacing using geometric method. (14 marks)

Module 4

17. Synthesize a four-bar generator to generate the function y = log10 x in the range 1 ≤ x ≤ 2
using algebraic method. Assume suitable starting angles and ending angles for motion of
input and output links. Use three precision points and Chebychev spacing. Find out the
maximum error. (14marks)

18. Synthesize a four-bar linkage to meet the following specification of position, velocity and
acceleration
Φ = 60o Ψ = 90o
ωΦ = 5 rad/s ωΨ = 2 rad/s
αΦ = 2 rad/s2 αΨ = 7 rad/s2 (14 marks)

Module 5
19. Synthesize a four-bar linkage to satisfy the following specifications:
ω2 = 200 rad/s, ω3 = 85 rad/s, ω4 = 130rad/s
α2 = 0 rad/s2, α3 = -1000 rad/s2, α4 = -1600 rad/s2 (14 marks)

20. Compute the link lengths of a four-bar mechanism that will in one of its positions satisfy the
following specifications: ω1 = 8 rad/sec, α1 = 0, ω2 = 1 rad/sec, α2 = 20 rad/sec2, ω3 = -3
rad/sec, α3 = 0. (14 marks)
 Syllabus
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 1

Floating Link, Special methods of velocity and acceleration analysis using auxiliary
points.Overlay method for conditioned crank mechanisms, coupler curves.

Roberts – Chebyshev theorem. Inflection circle, Euler- Savery equation, Hartman

construction, Bobillier construction.

Module 2

Synthesis using Optimum transmission angle.

Geometric methods of synthesis with three accuracy points: - poles of four bar linkages,
Relative poles of four bar linkages, Function generators, poles of slider crank mechanisms,
Relative poles of slider crank Mechanisms, Rectilinear recorder mechanisms.

Synthesis of slider crank mechanism with three accuracy points.

Module 3

Geometric methods of synthesis with four accuracy points: - pole triangles, center point
curves, Circle point curves, Construction of circle points, Cardinal points, opposite poles,
Pole quadrilaterals,

Function Generators, Synthesis of slider crank mechanism with four accuracy points.

Module 4

Algebraic methods of synthesis using displacement equations: - Crank and follower

synthesis- three accuracy points.

Crank and follower synthesis- angular velocities and accelerations.

Module 5

Rectilinear mechanisms, Algebraic methods of synthesis using complex numbers. Spatial

motion and spatial linkages. Types of spatial mechanisms, Single loop linkage and multiple
loop linkages. Simple mechanisms in robots.

Text Books

1. Kinematic synthesis of Linkages by Richard.S.Hartenberg, Jacques Denavit, McGraw Hill

book company. 1964

2. Kinematics and linkage design by Allen.S.Hall. Prentice Hall of India, Ltd. 1986

3. Theory of Mechanisms and Machines by Shigley, McGraw Hill International Edition., 4th
edition, 2014

4. Dynamics of Machinery by A.R.Holowenko. John Wiley & Sons Inc, 1955

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic MECHANICAL No. of Lectures
ENGINEERING
1 Module 1
1.1 Floating Link, Special methods of Velocity and Acceleration Analysis 3
using auxiliary points.
1.2 Overlay method for conditioned crank mechanisms, coupler curves. 3
Roberts – Chebyshev theorem
1.3 Inflection circle, Euler- Savery equation, Hartman construction, 3
Bobillier construction.
Synthesis using Optimum transmission angle
2 Module 2
2.1 Geometric methods of synthesis with three accuracy points: - poles of 3
four bar linkages, Relative poles of four bar linkages,
2.2 Function generators, poles of slider crank mechanisms, Relative poles of 3
slider crank Mechanisms, Rectilinear recorder mechanisms.
2.3 Synthesis of slider crank mechanism with three accuracy points. 3
3 Module 3
3.1 Geometric methods of synthesis with four accuracy points: - pole 3
triangles, center point curves,
3.2 Circle point curves, Construction of circle points, Cardinal points, 3
opposite poles, Pole quadrilaterals,
3.3 Function Generators, Synthesis of slider crank mechanism with four 3
accuracy points.
4 Module 4
4.1 Algebraic methods of synthesis using displacement equations: - Crank 4
and follower synthesis- three accuracy points
4.2 Crank and follower synthesis- angular velocities and accelerations 4
5 Module 5
5.1 Rectilinear mechanisms, Algebraic methods of synthesis using complex 3
numbers.
5.2 Spatial motion and spatial linkages 3
5.3 Types of spatial mechanisms, Single loop linkage and multiple loop 3
linkages. Simple mechanisms in Robots.
 CODE COURSE NAME MECHANICAL
CATEGORY L ENGINEERING
T P CREDIT

MET 396 COMPRESSIBLE FLUID FLOW VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

The objectives of the course are:

• To introduce the fundamental concepts involved in compressible flow.

• To apply the fundamental laws to one dimensional compressible isentropic flow for
the design of convergent and divergent nozzles.

• To solve the problems of compressible flow in constant area duct involving friction
and heat transfer.

• To understand the flow mechanism before and after the normal/oblique shocks

• To introduce various measurement and visualisation techniques in compressible

flows.

Prerequisite: MET203 Mechanics of fluid, MET202 Engineering Thermodynamic

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the fundamental concepts involved in compressible flow

CO 2 Formulate and solve typical problems in one dimensional isentropic compressible
flow by use of the appropriate equations and tables.
CO 3 Solve typical problems of flow in constant area duct with friction
CO 4 Solve typical problems of flow in constant area duct with friction
CO 5 Calculate the change in flow properties across normal and oblique shock waves.
CO 6 Illustrate different techniques used in measurement and visualization of
compressible flows

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 1
CO 4 3 2 2 1
CO 5 3 2 2
CO 6 3 3
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

End Semester
Assignment (%) Test 1 (%) Test 2 (%) Examination
Remember 25 20 20 10
Understand 25 40 40 20
Apply 25 40 40 70
Analyse 25
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Represent various flow regimes on steady flow adiabatic ellipse.

2. List the various conservation laws governing the compressible flow

3. Define Mach cone and Mach Angle

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1.Express stagnation enthalpy in terms of static enthalpy and velocity of flow

2. Explain the phenomenon of choking in isentropic flow.

3. Write applications of convergent nozzles and convergent-Divergent nozzles

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Describe the phenomenon of frictional chocking

2.Differentiate between Fanno flow and Isothermal flow

 3. Explain the significance of critical length in Fanno flow

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

1. Explain the process of thermal chocking in Rayleigh flow

2. Under what conditions the assumptions of Rayleigh flow is not valid in a heat exchanger

3. Locate the maximum enthalpy point in Rayleigh flow

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. State and prove Prandtl-Mayer relationship for a normal shock wave.

2. What is an expansion fan? How does it occur in supersonic flow?

3. Explain why shock is impossible in subsonic flow.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Name the various types of wind tunnels used for low and high speed testing of models

2. Difference between working principle of Shadowgraph and Schlieren techniques

3. Explain the working principle of constant current hot wire anemometer

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Compressible Fluid Flow -MET396

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks

1. Derive an expression for stagnation temperature in terms of Mach number for compressible
fluid flow.

2. Derive the condition at which flow become choked in isentropic flow?

3. Prove that Mach number is unity at the maximum entropy point on a Fanno curve.

4. Explain the significance of critical length in Fanno flow

5. What is Rayleigh flow? Explain Rayleigh flow with one practical case.

6. Under what conditions the assumptions of Rayleigh flow is not valid in a heat exchanger

7. Explain two situations where a normal shock wave is formed

 8. Explain the formation of oblique shock wave in a concave corner and expansion fan in
convex corner
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
9. Mention the difference in principle of the shadowgraph and Schlieren system

10. Explain with the help of sketches how yaw angle is eliminated in a Kiel probe.

(10 X 3 = 30 Marks)

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11.a. An air nozzle is to be designed for an exit Mach number of 2. conditions of the air available in

the reservoir are 700 kPa, 533 K. Estimate i) pressure ii) temperature iii) velocity of flow iv) area,

at throat and exit of the nozzle. Mass flow rate through the nozzle is 10000 kg/hr. 10 marks

b. Derive an expression for area ratio in terms of Mach number for isentropic flow. Explain
graphically the variation of area ratio with Mach number. 4 marks

12.a. Derive the conservation of mass equation for compressible flow through control volume
approach. 4 marks
b. A perfect gas having Cp = 1017.4 J/kg and molecular weight 28.97 flows adiabatically in a
converging passage with a mass flow rate if 27.20kg/s. At a particular location, M = 0.5, T =
500K and p = 0.25 MPa. Calculate the area of cross section of the duct at the location.

10 marks
MODULE II

13.a. A circular duct passes 8.25 kg/s of air at an exit Mach number of 0.5. The entry pressure and
temperature are 3.45 bar and 38oC respectively and the mean coefficient of friction 0.005. If the Mach
number at the entry is 0.15, determine i) diameter of the duct, ii) length of duct, iii) pressure and
temperature at exit and iv) stagnation pressure loss. 8 marks

b. Differentiate between Fanno flow and isothermal flow. Give one practical example each for
Fanno flow and isothermal flow. 6 marks

14.a. Explain the phenomenon of choking in Fanno flow. 4 marks

b. Air enters, a long circular duct of diameter 12 cm and mean coefficient of friction 0.0045, at a
Mach number of 0.5, pressure 3.5 bar and temperature 300 K. If the flow is adiabatic throughout
the duct, determine i) the length of the pipe required to change the Mach number to 0.6 ii)
pressure and temperature of air at M=0.6 iii) the length of the pipe required to attain limiting
Mach number iv) pressure, temperature and Mach number at the limiting condition 10 marks

MODULE III

15.a. Derive an equation describing a Rayleigh curve. Show that at maximum entropy point the flow

is sonic. 6 marks
 b. Data for entry of air at a constant area duct are p1 = 0.35 bar, T1 = 300 K, velocity of gas c1 =
60 m/s. If 620 kJ/kg if heat is added to the gas in the duct between entry and exit sections,
determine at the exit i) pressure ii) temperature iii) MachMECHANICAL
number iv) velocity ENGINEERING
of gas. How much
heat is required to accelerate air from initial condition to sonic condition? 8 marks

16.a. Derive an expression for maximum possible heat transfer in Rayleigh flow in terms of Mach

number. 7 marks

b. Air at Mach 1.5, pressure 300kPa and temperature 288K is brought to sonic velocity in a
frictionless constant area duct through heat transfer. Determine the final pressure, temperature
and heat added during the process. 7 marks

MODULE IV

17.a. Derive an expression for Mach number downstream of a normal shock 7 marks

b. The ratio of exit to entry area in a subsonic diffuser is 3.3. The Mach number of a jet of air
approaching the diffuser is 2.1. Stagnation pressure of the jet is 1.1 bar and its static temperature
is 330 K. There is a standing normal shock wave just outside the diffuser entry. The flow in the
diffuser is isentropic. Determine pressure, temperature and Mach number at the exit of the
diffuser. Also find the loss in stagnation pressure of the jet as it passes through the diffuser.
7 marks

18. a. What is an expansion fan? How does it occur in supersonic flow? 5 marks

18b. A stationary normal shock occurs in an air stream when the pressure, temperature and Mach
number are 85 kPa, 110 0C and 1.7 respectively. Determine its density after the shock. Compare
this value in an isentropic compression through the same pressure ratio. 9 marks

MODULE V

19 a. Explain the working of a shock tube with a neat sketch 8 marks

b. Explain the working of a constant current hot wire anemometer used for flow velocity
measurement. 6 marks

20 a. Describe with the aid of a schematic diagram the working of a closed circuit supersonic wind

tunnel. 7 marks

b. With a neat sketch explain the working of stagnation temperature probe. 7 marks
 Syllabus

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 1- FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPRESSIBLE FLOW & ISENTROPIC FLOW

Fundamentals of compressible flow: Concept of continuum-system and control volume approach-

conservation of mass, momentum and energy- Mach number and its significance- Mach waves- Mach
cone and Mach angle- physical difference between incompressible, subsonic, sonic and supersonic
flows- static and stagnation states- relationship between stagnation temperature, pressure, density and
enthalpy in terms of Mach number- Reference states in compressible fluid flows - adiabatic energy
equation-representation of various flow regimes on steady flow adiabatic ellipse.

One Dimensional Isentropic flow: General features of isentropic flow- Comparison of adiabatic and
isentropic process- One dimensional isentropic flow in ducts of varying cross-section- nozzles and
diffusers- mass flow rate in nozzles- critical properties and choking- area ratio as function of Mach
number- Impulse function- operation of nozzle under varying pressure ratios –over expansion and
under expansion in nozzles-Applications of convergent divergent nozzles- Use of gas dynamics
tables.

Module 2 FANNO FLOW

Flow in constant area duct with friction (Fanno flow): Fanno curve and Fanno flow equations - Fanno
line on h-s and p-v diagram- variation of flow properties- variation of Mach number with duct length-
Chocking due to friction- isothermal flow in constant area duct with friction- Use of gas dynamics
tables.

Module 3 RAYLEIGH FLOW

Flow through constant area duct with heat transfer (Rayleigh Flow): Rayleigh line on h-s and p-v
diagram-location of maximum enthalpy point- thermal chocking-and maximum heat transfer-
variations of flow properties- Use of gas dynamics tables.

Module 4 NORMAL & OBLIQUE SHOCK WAVES

Normal shock Waves: Development of shock wave- governing equations- Strength of shock waves-
Normal Shock on T-S diagram -Prandtl-Mayer relation, Rankine-Hugoniot relation- Mach number in
the downstream of normal shock- variation of flow parameters across the normal shock -normal shock
in Fanno and Rayleigh flows- working formula- curves and tables

Oblique shock waves: weak and strong oblique shocks-shock polar diagram-expansion waves-
Reflection and intersection of oblique shocks and expansion waves

Module 5 MEASUREMENT & VISUALIZATION TECHNIQUES

Compressible flow field measurement & visualization - Shadowgraph- Schlieren technique-

interferometer- subsonic and supersonic flow measurement (Pressure, Velocity and Temperature) –
compressibility correction factor- hot wire anemometer- Rayleigh Pitot tube- wedge probe- stagnation
temperature probe- temperature recovery factor –Kiel probe - Wind tunnels – closed and open type-
sub sonic – supersonic wind tunnels – shock tube.

Text Books

1. Fundamentals of Compressible flow, S. M. Yahya, New age international Publication, Delhi

2. Fundamentals of compressible fluid dynamics- P. Balachandran, PHI Learning, New Delhi

4. Gas Dynamics, E. Rathakrishnan, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

5. Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion- P. Murugaperumal, Scitech Publication, Chennai.

Data Book

1. Yahya S. M., Gas Tables, New Age International.

2. Balachandran P., Gas Tables, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Limited.

Reference Books

1. The dynamics and thermodynamics of Compressible fluid flow Volume-I, Ascher H. Shapiro, the
Ronald Press Company, New York.

2. Modern Compressible Flow: With Historical Perspective, John D. Anderson, McGraw-Hill Higher
Education

COURSE PLAN
MODULE TOPICS HOURS
ALLOTED

Concept of continuum-system and control volume approach-

conservation of mass, momentum and energy
3-1-0

Mach number and its significance- Mach waves- Mach cone and Mach
angle- physical difference between incompressible, subsonic, sonic and
supersonic flows- static and stagnation states- relationship between
stagnation temperature, pressure, density and enthalpy in terms of Mach
2-1-0
number- stagnation velocity of sound- adiabatic energy equation-
1 representation of various flow regimes on steady flow adiabatic ellipse

General features of isentropic flow- performance curve- Comparison of

adiabatic and isentropic process- One dimensional isentropic flow in
ducts of varying cross-section- nozzles and diffusers- mass flow rate in
nozzles- critical properties and choking- area ratio as function of Mach
4-1-0
number- Impulse function- operation of nozzle under varying pressure
ratios –over expansion and under expansion in nozzles-Applications of
convergent divergent nozzles-Working charts and gas tables.

Fanno curve and Fanno flow equations - Fanno line on h-s and P-v
diagram- solution of Fanno flow equations- variation of flow properties-
2 variation of Mach number with duct length- Chocking due to friction- 4-2-0
tables and charts for Fanno flow- isothermal flow in constant area duct
with friction.

Flow through constant area duct with heat transfer (Rayleigh Flow):
Simple heating relation of a perfect gas- Rayleigh line on h-s and P-v
diagram-location of maximum enthalpy point- thermal chocking-and
maximum heat transfer- variations of flow properties- tables and charts
3 for Rayleigh flow. 4-2-0

Development of shock wave- Thickness of MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

shock wave- governing
equations- Strength of shock waves- Normal Shock on T-S diagram -
Prandtl-Mayer relation, Rankine-Hugoniot relation- Mach number in the 4-1-0
downstream of normal shock

4 variation of flow parameters across the normal shock -normal shock in 2-1-0
Fanno and Rayleigh flows- working formula- curves and tables

weak and strong oblique shocks-shock polar diagram-expansion waves- 2-1-0

Reflection and intersection of oblique shocks and expansion waves

Shadowgraph- Schlieren technique-interferometer 2-0-0

subsonic and supersonic flow measurement (Pressure, Velocity and

Temperature) – compressibility correction factor- hot wire anemometer-
5 Rayleigh Pitot tube- wedge probe- stagnation temperature probe-
temperature recovery factor –Kiel probe - Wind tunnels – closed and 3-0-0
open type- sub sonic – supersonic wind tunnels – shock tube
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CODE ADVANCED NUMERICAL
MET398 CONTROLLED MACHINING VAC 3 1 4

Preamble:

This course will help the student to understand the concept of numerical control and the
peripheral requirements of the NC system. It familiarise the different approaches of
machining using numerical control and also to make the student familiar to the different
programming methods of NC machines.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 To study the structure of numerical control and its applications

CO 2 To understand the features and control of CNC
CO 3 To write numerical part program of simple machining
CO 4 To familiarize the structure of computer assisted part programming features
CO 5 To study the constructional and automated features of numerical controlled
machining

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 2
CO 2 2 3 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2 1
CO 4 3 2 2
CO 5 3 2 3 1 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Total CIE ESE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the structure of NC system

2. Enumerate difference between ordinary and NC Machine tools.

3. What is Machining Capabilities of a CNC Machine,.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Differentiate open and closed loop control system

2. Enlist features of CNC and DNC system

3 Define the adaptive control system

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1 Define the structure of CNC part programme

2. What is Programming using tool nose radius compensation ,Tools offsets

3. Enlist the procedure of manual Programming for simple parts

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Enumerate the structure of computer assisted part programming .

2. Generation of NC Programmes through CAD/CAM systems,.

3. Post processor design and implementation MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Machine structure of CNC machines

2. Constructional features of CNC turning center and CNC machining center

3. Design consideration of CNC machines

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code : MET398
Course Name : ADVANCED NUMERICAL CONTROLLED MACHINING
Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours
PART – A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1 How does the structure of NC/CNC machine tools differ from conventional
machine tools.
2 Explain clearly the difference between NC and CNC machine
3 Differentiate open loop and closed loop system in CNC machine.
4 Enumerate advantages and disadvantages of Direct numerical control
5 What is GO2 and GO3 in circular interpolation.
6 What is tool nose radius compensation and how to use it.
7 What is CAPP and discuss the benefits of CAPP
8 Discuss the code is used for canned cycle definition
9 Explain briefly swarf removal process in CNC machine.
10 What are the types of tools holders in CNC machine

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

Module- 1

11 a) With schematic diagram explain the basic principal of numerical. (8 Marks)

b) Explain the historical development of numerical controlled machining (6 Marks)
12 a) Explain the machining capabilities of a CNC machine tool (7 Marks)
b) Enlist and describe the advantages and dis advantages of CNC Machine (7 Marks)

Module-2

13 a) Describe the basic system of CNC machine tool (7Marks)

b) Explain programming features of CNC system (7Marks)

14 a) What is adaptive control system in CNC machining and what is its benefits (7Marks)
b) Describe the standard controllers of CNC machines (7Marks)
 Module-3 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
15 a) Explain the structure of NC part program (7Marks)

b) Describe the various programing functions of NC machining (7Marks)

16 a) Explain the fundamental element for developing manual part programme. (7Marks)
b) Describe various G code and M codes of NC programming. (7Marks)

Module-4

17 Write the APT program of a given basic geometry element (14Marks)

18 a) Explain the features CNC post processor. (8Marks)

b) Explain the generation of NC program through CAD/CAM system (6Marks)

Module-5

19 a) Explain Automatic tool changers and multiple pallet systems in CNC system(7Marks)

b) Describe the constructional details of CNC turning centre (7Marks)

20 a) Explain various tooling requirement of CNC system (6Marks)

b) What is CNC tool holder and what are the different types (8Marks)
 Syllabus MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 1

Principles of Numerical Control Structure of NC systems, Applications of CNC machines

in manufacturing, Advantages of CNC machines. Historical developments and future
trends. Future of NC Machines, Difference between ordinary and NC Machine tools,
Machining Capabilities of a CNC Machine, Methods for improving accuracy and
productivity.

Module 2

Control of NC Systems: Classification of CNC control systems Open and Closed loop
systems, Types of CNC Machine Tools systems devices, e.g. encoders and interpolators,
Features of CNC Systems, Direct Numerical Control (DNC), Standard Controllers and
General Programming features available in CNC Systems, Computer Process monitoring and
Control. Adaptive control systems.

Module 3

NC Part Programming: Axis identification and coordinate systems ,Structure of CNC

part program, Programming codes, Programming for 2 and 3 axis control systems ,Manual
part programming for a turning center ,Programming using tool nose radius compensation
,Tools offsets ,Do loops, sub routines and fixed cycles. Manual Programming for
simple parts.

Module 4

Computer aided part programming; Tools for computer aided part programming,
Computer aided NC Programming in APT language, use of canned cycles, Generation of NC
Programmes through CAD/CAM systems, Design and implementation of post processors.

Module 5

Constructional Details of CNC Machines: Machine structure ,Slide –ways ,Motion

transmission elements ,Swarf removal and safety considerations ,Automatic tool changers
and multiple pallet systems, Sensors and feedback devices in CNC machines ,Constructional
detail of CNC turning center and CNC machining center. Tooling of CNC Machines
Tooling requirements of CNC machines, Pre-set and qualified tools, Work and tool holding
devices in CNC machines. Design considerations of CNC machines.

Text Books

1. Radhakrishnan, P., “Computer Numerical Control Machines”, New Central Book

Agencies
2. Mikell P. Groover., “ Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated
Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall.
 Reference Books MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1 YoramKoren, “Computer Control of Manufacturing Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill
Book Co.,2005.

2 HMT, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi,1998.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of lectures

1 Module-1- Principles of Numerical Control 8 Hours

1.1 Structure of NC systems, Applications of CNC machines in 2 Hr

manufacturing,

1.2 Advantages of CNC machines. Historical developments 1 Hr

and future trends.

1.3 Future of NC Machines, 1 Hr

1.4 Difference between ordinary and NC Machine tools, 1 Hr

1.5 Capabilities of a CNC Machine 1 Hr

1.6 Methods for improving accuracy and productivity 2 Hr

2 Module 2-Control of NC Systems: 8 Hours

2.1 Classification of CNC control systems 1 Hr

2.2 Open and Closed loop systems, 1 Hr

2.3 Types of CNC Machine Tools systems devices, e.g. 1 Hr

encoders and interpolators

2.4 Features of CNC Systems, 1 Hr

2.5 Direct Numerical Control (DNC), 1 Hr

2.5 Standard Controllers and General Programming features 2 Hr

available in CNC Systems,

2.6 Computer Process monitoring and Control. Adaptive 1 Hr

control systems.

3 Module-3- NC Part Programming 9 Hours

3.1 Axis identification and coordinate systems 1 Hr

3.2 Structure of CNC part program, Programming codes 2 Hr ENGINEERING
MECHANICAL
3.3 Programming for 2 and 3 axis control systems 1 Hr

3.4 Manual part programming for a turning center 1 Hr

3.5 ,Programming using tool nose radius compensation 1 Hr

3.6 Tools offsets ,Do loops, sub routines and fixed cycles 1 Hr

3.7 Manual Programming for simple parts 2 hr

4 Module-4- Computer aided part programming; 8 Hours

4.1 Tools for computer aided part programming 2 Hr

4.2 Computer aided NC Programming in APT language 2 Hr

4.3 use of canned cycles, 1 Hr

4.4 Generation of NC Programmes through CAD/CAM 2 Hr

systems

4.5 , Design and implementation of post processors. 1 Hr

5 Module-5- Constructional Details of CNC Machines: 12 Hours

Tooling of CNC Machines

5.1 Machine structure ,Slide –ways ,Motion transmission 2 Hr

elements

5.2 Swarf removal and safety considerations 1 Hr

5.3 Automatic tool changers and multiple pallet systems 1 Hr

5.4 Sensors and feedback devices in CNC machines 1 Hr

5.5 Constructional detail of CNC turning center 2 Hr

5.6 CNC machining center and Tooling requirements of CNC 1 Hr

machines

5.8 Pre-set and qualified tools and Work and tool holding 2 Hr
devices in CNC machines

5.1 Design considerations of CNC machines. 2 Hr

0
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VII
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET401 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS PCC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course focuses on important topics in design of machine elements. It covers the
topics of shaft design with due consideration based on strength and rigidity. The course also
includes the design procedure of flat belts and connecting rod of IC engines. The other topics
included are journal bearings design, ball and roller bearings, spur gear and helical gear deign
considerations. The syllabus also covers design procedure of bevel gear and worm gear.

Prerequisite: MET304 Dynamics and Design of Machinery

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

Design shafts based on strength, rigidity and design for static and fatigue loads,
CO 1
design flat belts and connecting rod of IC engines

CO 2 Design clutches and brakes

Analyse sliding contact bearings and understand design procedure of journal, ball
CO 3
and roller bearings.
CO 4 Design Spur gear and helical gear
CO 5 Design Bevel gears and worm gears

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3
CO 5 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 30 30 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. What is critical speed of a shaft?

2. What are the causes of failure in shafts?

3. Differentiate between torsional rigidity and lateral rigidity of shaft.

4. Enumerate the various types of flat belt drives.

5. Explain why I section is usually preferred in the case of a connecting rod?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. What is the function of a clutch?

2. Why are cone clutches better than disc clutches?

3. What is the principle of operation of a centrifugal clutch? What are its applications?

4. What are the advantages and disadvantages of band brake?

5. What are the types of brake lining?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Explain hydrodynamic theory.

2. Discuss the significance of bearing modulus in the design of journal bearing?

3. Briefly describe the design procedure of Journal bearings

4. Define static and dynamic load carrying capacity of ball bearing.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
5. What is L10 and L50 life of ball bearing?
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. State and explain law of gearing.

2. Give an account on different modes of failure of gear tooth.

3. Explain why dynamic factors need to be considered in the design of gears.

4. Explain interference and undercutting in gears

5. What are the advantages of helical gears over spur gears?

6. What is beam strength in case of helical gears?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What are the uses of bevel gears?

2. Classify bevel gears.

3. What is formative number of teeth in case of bevel gears?

4. What are the characteristics of worm gears?

5. Enumerate the applications of worm gears?

6. Describe the design procedure of worm gears?

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VII SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET401: DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS

Maximum: 100Marks Duration:3 hours

Use of Machine Design Data Book is permitted.

PART A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Compare the strength and stiffness of a hollow shaft of same outside diameter as that of a
solid shaft.

2. Explain about the material for used for flat belts

3. How clutch is different from coupling?

4. What are the requirements for a good friction material used for the brakes?

5. What are the types of lubrication for bearings?

6. What are the causes of bearing failure?

7. Draw a neat sketch and indicate terminology used in spur Gear

8. What is virtual or equivalent number of teeth in case of helical gears?

9. What is a herringbone gear? What are its advantages?

10. Why a worm set can only be used as jack and hoists for raising loads. (10×3=30Marks)
PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a) A shaft is supported by two bearings 1 m apart. A 600 mm diameter pulley is mounted
at a distance of 300 mm to the right of left hand bearing and this drives a pulley directly
below it with the help of a belt having maximum tension of 2.25 kN. Another pulley 400
mm diameter is placed 200 mm to the left of right hand bearing and is driven with the
help of electric motor and belt, which is placed horizontally to the right. The angle of
contact for both the pulley is 1800 and μ=0.24. Determine the suitable diameter for a
solid shaft .The allowable working stress is 63 MPa in tension and 42 MPa in shear for
the material of the shaft. Assume that the torque on one pulley is equal to that on the
other pulley. (10 marks)
b) Differentiate between torsional rigidity and lateral rigidity of shaft. (4 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
12. Design a flat belt drive for a compressor running at 670 rpm, which is driven by a 25 kW,
1340 rpm motor. Space is available for a centre distance of 3 m. The belt is open type.
(14 marks)

MODULE 2

13. a) Determine the main dimensions of a cone clutch faced with leather to transmit 30 kW
at 750 rpm from an electric motor to an air compressor. Assume an over load factor of
1.75. Due to possibility of contamination of lining, a low value of coefficient of friction
0.2 is recommended. (11 marks)

b) Distinguish between multiple plate clutch and cone clutch (3 marks)

14. a)A simple band brake as shown in figure below is to be designed to absorb a power of
32 kW at a rated speed of 850 rpm. Assume μ = 0.25. Determine, (i) The effort required
to stop clockwise rotation of the brake drum, (ii) The effort required to stop counter
clockwise rotation of the brake drum,(iii) The dimensions of the rectangular cross-section
of the brake lever assuming its depth to be twice the width, and (iv) the dimensions of the
cross-section of the band assuming its width to be ten times the thickness. (10 marks)

b) What are the different types of brakes? (4 marks)

MODULE 3

15. A 360o hydrodynamic journal bearing operates at 1200 rpm and carries a load of 5.5 k N.
The journal diameter is 55 mm and length is 55 mm. The bearing is lubricated with SAE
20 oil and the operating temperature of oil is 79oC. Assume radial clearance as 0.025 mm
and the attitude angle as 60o. Determine: (i) bearing pressure, (ii) Attitude, (iii) minimum
film thickness, (iv)heat generated, (v) heat dissipated, if the ambient temperature is 25 oC,
and (vi) amount of artificial cooling if necessary. (14 marks)

16. a) A single row deep groove ball bearing has a dynamic load capacity of 40210 N and
operates on the work cycle consists of radial load of 2000 N at 1000 rpm for 25 % of the
time, radial load of 5000 N at 1500 rpm for 50 % of time, and radial load of 3000 N at
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
700 rpm for the remaining 25 % of time. Calculate the expected life of the bearing in
hours. (10 marks)

b) Explain the mechanism of fluid film lubrication (4 marks)

MODULE 4

17. A motor shaft rotating at 1440 rpm has to transmit 15 kW power to a low speed shaft
running at 500 rpm. A 200 pressure angle full depth involute system of gear tooth is used.
The pinion has 25 teeth. Both gear and pinion are made of cast iron having allowable
static strength of 55 MPa. Design a suitable spur gear drive and check the design for
dynamic load and wear. (14 marks)

18. A helical gear speed reducer is to be designed. The rated power of the speed reducer is 75
kW at a pinion speed of 1200 rpm. The speed ratio is 3:1. For medium shock conditions
and 24 hr operation, design the gear pair. The teeth are20ο full depth involute in the
normal plane and helix angle is 30ο. (14 marks)

MODULE 5

19. a) A pair of straight tooth bevel gears at right angles is to transmit 5 kW at 1200 rpm of
the pinion. The diameter of the pinion is 80 mm and the speed reduction is 3.5:1. The
tooth form is 20o full depth involute. Both the pinion and gear are made of cast iron with
allowable stress of 55 MPa. Determine module and face width from the standpoint of
strength. And also check the design from the standpoint of dynamic load and wear.

(14 marks)

20. Design a worm gear drive to transmit 20 HP from worm at 1440 rpm to the worm wheel
that should be rotated at 40 + 2% rpm. (14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Shafting:- material, design considerations, causes of failure in shafts, design based on strength,
rigidity, and critical speed, design for static and fatigue loads, repeated loading, reversed
bending.

Design of flat belt:- material for belts, slip of the belts, creep, centrifugal tension, Power
transmitted by flat belts, Design procedure of flat belts

Design of connecting rod in IC engine.

Module 2

Design of clutches: -single and multiple plate clutch, cone clutch, centrifugal clutch.

Design of brakes: -band brakes, block brakes, simple and differential band brake, internal
expanding shoe brake.

Module 3

Sliding contact bearing: - lubrication, lubricants, viscosity, journal bearings, hydrodynamic

theory, Petroff’s equation, bearing characteristic number, Sommerfeld number, Heat generated in
bearings, Heat dissipated by bearings, Design procedure of Journal bearings.

Ball and roller bearings: - Types, bearing life, static and dynamic load capacity, Stribeck’s
Equation, selection of bearings, selection of taper roller bearings, Design procedure of Ball and
roller bearings, Needle bearings.

Module 4

Gears: - Materials of gears, terminology of spur Gear, Interference and undercutting, Gear tooth
failures, Beam strength of Gear tooth, Estimation of module, Buckingham’s equation for
dynamic load, wear load, endurance strength of tooth, Gear proportions, Merits and demerits of
each type of gears, Design procedure of Spur gear.

Helical gears: - Terminology, Virtual or equivalent number of teeth, Tooth proportions, Beam
strength, and Wear strength of Helical gears, Design procedure of Helical gear

Module 5

Bevel gears: - Classification, Terminology, Pitch angle for bevel gears, Strength of bevel gear,
beam strength, wear tooth load, Formative number of teeth, Design procedure of Bevel gear.

Worm gears: - Characteristics of worm gears, Terminology, Advantages and disadvantages,

Applications, Terms in Worm gear, Strength of Worm gear, Dynamic strength, Wear tooth load,
Design procedure of Worm gear.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Design Data Books (permitted for reference in the university examination)

1. Mahadevan, K., and K. Balaveera Reddy, Design Data Handbook, Mechanical

Engineers in SI and Metric Units. CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi, 2018.
2. NarayanaIyengar B.R &Lingaiah K, Machine Design Data Handbook, Tata McGraw
Hill/Suma Publications, 1984
3. PSG Design Data, DPV Printers, Coimbatore, 2012
Reference Books
1. J. E. Shigley, Mechanical Engineering Design, McGraw Hill,2003
2. Jalaludeen, Machine Design, Anuradha Publications, 2016
3. V.B.Bhandari, Design of Machine elements, McGraw Hill, 2016
4. Juvinall R.C &Marshek K.M., Fundamentals of Machine Component Design, John
Wiley, 2011
5. M. F. Spotts, T. E. Shoup, Design of Machine Elements, Pearson Education, 2006
6. RajendraKarwa, Machine Design, Laxmi Publications (P) LTD, New Delhi, 2006
7. Siegel, Maleev& Hartman, Mechanical Design of Machines, International Book
Company, 1983

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

Module Topic No. of Lectures

Shafting: - material, design considerations, causes of failure in
shafts, design based on strength, rigidity, and critical speed,
1.1 5
design for static and fatigue loads, repeated loading, reversed
bending.
Design of flat belt:- material for belts, slip of the belts, creep,
1.2 centrifugal tension, Power transmitted by flat belts, Design 3
procedure of flat belts

1.3 Design of connecting rod in IC engine. 2

Design of clutches:-single and multiple plate clutch,cone
2.1 clutch,centrifugal clutch 2

Design of brakes:-band brakes,block brakes,simple and

2.2 differential band brake, internal expanding shoe brake. 3

Sliding contact bearing:- lubrication, lubricants, viscosity,

journal bearings, hydrodynamic theory, Petroff’s equation,
3.1 bearing characteristic number, Sommerfeld number, Heat 4
generated in bearings, Heat dissipated by bearings, Design
procedure of Journal bearings.

Ball and roller bearings:- Types, bearing life, static and dynamic
3.2 load capacity, Stribeck’s Equation, selection of bearings, 3
selection of taper roller bearings, Design procedure of Ball and
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
roller bearings, Needle bearings.

Gears:- Materials of gears, terminology of spur Gear,

Interference and undercutting, Gear tooth failures, Beam
strength of Gear tooth, Estimation of module, Buckingham’s
4.1 equation for dynamic load, wear load, endurance strength of 5
tooth, Gear proportions, Merits and demerits of each type of
gears, Design procedure of Spur gear.

Helical gears:- Terminology, Virtual or equivalent number of

4.2 teeth, Tooth proportions, Beam strength, and Wear strength of 3
Helical gears, Design procedure of Helical gear

Bevel gears:- Classification, Terminology, Pitch angle for bevel

5.1 gears, Strength of bevel gear, beam strength, wear tooth load, 3
Formative number of teeth, Design procedure of Bevel gear.

Worm gears:- Characteristics of worm gears, Terminology,

Advantages and disadvantages, Applications, Terms in Worm
5.2 gear, Strength of Worm gear, Dynamic strength, Wear tooth 2
load, Design procedure of Worm gear.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MEL411 PCC 0 0 3 2
LAB

Preamble: The course is intended to enable the students to get an exposure to equipment and
exercises related to machine dynamics, cutting forces in milling machine, basics of pneumatic
and hydraulic devices, basic concepts of stepper motors, basic ideas of data acquisition
systems and automation.

Prerequisite: Should have undergone courses on Engineering Mechanics, Theory of

Machines, Machine Tools.

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Get practical knowledge on design and analysis of mechanisms in the machines.

CO 2 Measure the cutting forces associated with milling machining operations.
CO 3 Apply the basic concepts of hydraulic and pneumatic actuators and their applications
in product and processes
CO 4 Use appropriate systems for data acquisition and control of product and processes

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
PO 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO 4 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed

regarding award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15 Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and trouble shooting) : 25 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions: Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second

series test covering entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be
conducted under the equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The
number of candidates evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for
the University examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The external
examiner shall endorse the record.

List of Exercises/Experiments: (Lab experiments may be given considering 12 sessions of

3 hours each. Minimum 10 experiments to be performed.)

1. Experiment on Whirling of shaft

2. Experiment on Gyroscope
3. Experiment on Universal governor apparatus
4. Experiment on Free vibration analysis
5. Experiment on Forced vibration analysis
6. Experiment on any Non destructive test.
7. Exercises on Milling Machine - slab milling/gear cutting
8. Milling forces – Milling parameters – measurement of milling forces in slab milling
operations
9. Exercises on pneumatic circuits using pneumatic trainer unit
10. Exercises on hydraulic circuits using hydraulic trainer unit
11. Exercises on electro pneumatic and electro hydraulic circuits using trainer units
12. Exercises on 3-D printing
13. Exercises on Motion controller using AC/DC motor, servo motors and encoders to
determine the operating characteristics.
14. Exercises on stepper motor to determine the operating characteristics.
15. Exercises on PC based data acquisition system with any software.
16. Study of SCADA and PLC programming
17. Interfacing SCADA with PLC and PC.
18. Controlling variable speed drive through PLC/SCADA
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. C.E.Wilson, P. Sadler, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Pearson

Education, 2005
2. D.H.Myskza, Machines and Mechanisms Applied Kinematic Analysis, Pearson
Education, 2013
3. W.Bolton, Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering, Person Education Limited, New Delhi, 2007
4. K.P.Ramachandran, G.K.Vijayaraghavan, M.S.Balasundaram, Mechatronics:
Integrated Mechanical Electronic Systems, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2008.
5. Serope Kalpakjian, Steven R. Schmid - Manufacturing Engineering and
Technology, Pearson
 MECHANICAL
CATEGORY L ENGINEERING
T P CREDIT
MEQ413 SEMINAR
PWS 0 0 3 2

Preamble: The course ‘Seminar’ is intended to enable a B.Tech graduate to read, understand,
present and prepare report about an academic document. The learner shall search in the
literature including peer reviewed journals, conference, books, project reports etc., and
identify an appropriate paper/thesis/report in her/his area of interest, in consultation with
her/his seminar guide. This course can help the learner to experience how a presentation can
be made about a selected academic document and also empower her/him to prepare a
technical report.

Course Objectives:

 To do literature survey in a selected area of study.

 To understand an academic document from the literate and to give a presentation
about it.
 To prepare a technical report.

Course Outcomes [COs] : After successful completion of the course, the students will be able
to:

Identify academic documents from the literature which are related to her/his areas of
CO1
interest (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Read and apprehend an academic document from the literature which is related to
CO2
her/ his areas of interest (Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).
Prepare a presentation about an academic document (Cognitive knowledge
CO3
level: Create).
Give a presentation about an academic document (Cognitive knowledge level:
CO4
Apply).

CO5 Prepare a technical report (Cognitive knowledge level: Create).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 3 1 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability
PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
Design/Development of
PO3 PO9 Individual and team work
solutions
Conduct investigations of complex PO10 Communication
PO4 problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

General Guidelines

 The Department shall form an Internal Evaluation Committee (IEC) for the seminar
with academic coordinator for that program as the Chairperson/Chairman and seminar
coordinator & seminar guide as members. During the seminar presentation of a
student, all members of IEC shall be present.

 Formation of IEC and guide allotment shall be completed within a week after the
University examination (or last working day) of the previous semester.

 Guide shall provide required input to their students regarding the selection of topic/
paper.

 Choosing a seminar topic: The topic for a UG seminar should be current and broad
based rather than a very specific research work. It's advisable to choose a topic for the
Seminar to be closely linked to the final year project area. Every member of the project
team could choose or be assigned Seminar topics that covers various aspects linked to
the Project area.

 A topic/paper relevant to the discipline shall be selected by the student during the
semester break.

 Topic/Paper shall be finalized in the first week of the semester and shall be submitted
to the IEC.

 The IEC shall approve the selected topic/paper by the second week of the semester.

 Accurate references from genuine peer reviewed published material to be given in the
report and to be verified.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Evaluation pattern

Total marks: 100, only CIE, minimum required to pass 50

Seminar Guide: 20 marks (Background Knowledge – 10 (The guide shall give deserving
marks for a candidate based on the candidate's background knowledge about the topic
selected), Relevance of the paper/topic selected – 10).

Seminar Coordinator: 20 marks (Seminar Diary – 10 (Each student shall maintain a

seminar diary and the guide shall monitor the progress of the seminar work on a weekly
basis and shall approve the entries in the seminar diary during the weekly meeting with the
student), Attendance – 10).

Presentation: 40 marks to be awarded by the IEC (Clarity of presentation – 10,

Interactions – 10 (to be based on the candidate's ability to answer questions during the
interactive session of her/his presentation), Overall participation – 10 (to be given based on
her/his involvement during interactive sessions of presentations by other students), Quality
of the slides – 10).

Report: 20 marks to be awarded by the IEC (check for technical content, overall quality,
templates followed, adequacy of references etc.).
 MECHANICAL
CATEGORY L ENGINEERING
T P CREDIT
MED415 PROJECT PHASE I
PWS 0 0 6 2

Preamble: The course ‘Project Work’ is mainly intended to evoke the innovation and invention
skills in a student. The course will provide an opportunity to synthesize and apply the knowledge
and analytical skills learned, to be developed as a prototype or simulation. The project extends to
2 semesters and will be evaluated in the 7th and 8th semester separately, based on the achieved
objectives. One third of the project credits shall be completed in 7th semester and two third in 8th
semester. It is recommended that the projects may be finalized in the thrust areas of the respective
engineering stream or as interdisciplinary projects. Importance should be given to address societal
problems and developing indigenous technologies.

Course Objectives
 To apply engineering knowledge in practical problem solving.
 To foster innovation in design of products, processes or systems.
 To develop creative thinking in finding viable solutions to engineering problems.

Course Outcomes [COs] :After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Model and solve real world problems by applying knowledge across domains
CO1
(Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Develop products, processes or technologies for sustainable and socially relevant
CO2
applications (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Function effectively as an individual and as a leader in diverse teams and to
CO3
comprehend and execute designated tasks (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Plan and execute tasks utilizing available resources within timelines, following
CO4
ethical and professional norms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Identify technology/research gaps and propose innovative/creative solutions
CO5
(Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).
Organize and communicate technical and scientific findings effectively in written
CO6
and oral forms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2

CO2 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 2 2 1

CO4 2 3 2 2 3 2

CO5 2 3 3 1 2 1

CO6 2 2 2 3 1 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of PO10 Communication
PO4
complex problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning

PROJECT PHASE I
Phase 1 Target

 Literature study/survey of published literature on the assigned topic

 Formulation of objectives
 Formulation of hypothesis/ design/ methodology
 Formulation of work plan and task allocation.
 Block level design documentation
 Seeking project funds from various agencies
 Preliminary Analysis/Modeling/Simulation/Experiment/Design/Feasibility study
 Preparation of Phase 1 report

Evaluation Guidelines & Rubrics

Total: 100 marks (Minimum required to pass: 50 marks).

 Project progress evaluation by guide: 30 Marks.

 Interim evaluation by the Evaluation Committee: 20 Marks.
 Final Evaluation by the Evaluation Committee: 30 Marks.
 Project Phase - I Report (By Evaluation Committee): 20 Marks.

(The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project coordinator
and project supervisor).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Evaluation by the Guide

The guide/supervisor shall monitor the progress being carried out by the project groups on a
regular basis. In case it is found that progress is unsatisfactory it shall be reported to the
Department Evaluation Committee for necessary action. The presence of each student in the group
and their involvement in all stages of execution of the project shall be ensured by the guide.
Project evaluation by the guide: 30 Marks. This mark shall be awarded to the students in his/her
group by considering the following aspects:
Topic Selection: innovativeness, social relevance etc. (2)
Problem definition: Identification of the social, environmental and ethical issues of the project
problem. (2)
Purpose and need of the project: Detailed and extensive explanation of the purpose and need of
the project. (3)
Project Objectives: All objectives of the proposed work are well defined; Steps to be followed to
solve the defined problem are clearly specified. (2)
Project Scheduling & Distribution of Work among Team members: Detailed and extensive
Scheduling with timelines provided for each phase of project. Work breakdown structure well
defined. (3)
Literature survey: Outstanding investigation in all aspects. (4)
Student’s Diary/ Daily Log: The main purpose of writing daily diary is to cultivate the habit of
documenting and to encourage the students to search for details. It develops the students’ thought
process and reasoning abilities. The students should record in the daily/weekly activity diary the
day to day account of the observations, impressions, information gathered and suggestions given,
if any. It should contain the sketches & drawings related to the observations made by the students.
The daily/weekly activity diary shall be signed after every day/week by the guide. (7)
Individual Contribution: The contribution of each student at various stages. (7)
 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Interim Evaluation

No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

The team has identified a topic.
Topic The team has failed to come Good evidence of the group The group has brainstormed in an
The originally selected topic
identification, with a relevant topic in time. thinking and brainstorming on excellent manner on what they were
lacks substance and needs to
selection, Needed full assistance to find what they are going to build. The going to build. The topic selected is
be revised. There were
formulation of a topic from the guide. They results of the brainstorming are highly relevant, real world problem
suggestions given to improve
objectives do not respond to documented and the selection of and is potentially innovative. The
1-a 10 the relevance and quality of the
and/or suggestions from the topic is relevant. The review of group shows extreme interest in the
project topic. Only a few
literature evaluation committee and/or related references was good, but topic and has conducted extensive
relevant references were
survey. the guide. No literature there is scope of improvement. literature survey in connection with
consulted/ studied and there is
(Group review was conducted. The Objectives formed with good the topic. The team has come up
no clear evidence to show the
assessment) team tried to gather easy clarity, however some objectives with clear objectives which are
team's understanding on the
information without verifying are not realistic enough. feasible.
same. Some objectives
[CO1] the authenticity. No
identified, but not clear enough.
objectives formed yet.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Excellent evidence of enterprising
and extensive project planning.
Gantt charts were used to depict
Project detailed project scheduling. A
Good evidence of planning
Planning, No evidence of planning or Some evidence of a primary project management/version
done. Materials were listed and
Scheduling scheduling of the project. plan. There were some ideas on control tool is used to track the
thought out, but the plan
and The students did not plan the materials /resources project, which shows familiarity
wasn't quite complete.
Resource/ what they were going to required, but not really thought with modern tools. All materials /
Schedules were prepared, but
Tasks build or plan on what out. The students have some resources were identified and listed
not detailed, and needs
Identification materials / resources to use idea on the finances required, and anticipation of procuring time
1-b 10 improvement. Project journal is
and in the project. The students but they have not formalized a is done. Detailed budgeting is done.
presented but it is not complete
allocation. do not have any idea on the budget plan. Schedules were All tasks were identified and
in all respect / detailed. There
(Group budget required. The team not prepared. The project incorporated in the schedule. A
is better task allocation and
assessment) has not yet decided on who journal has no details. Some well-kept project journal shows
individual members understand
does what. No project journal evidence on task allocation evidence for all the above, in
[CO4] about their tasks. There is
kept. among the team members. addition to the interaction with the
room for improvement.
project guide. Each member knows
well about their individual tasks.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Phase 1 Interim Evaluation Total Marks: 20
 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Final Evaluation
Sl.
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

Formulation
None of the team members The students have some The students are comfortable Shows clear evidence of having a
of Design
show any evidence of knowledge on the design with design methods adopted, well- defined design methodology and
and/or
knowledge about the design procedure to be adopted, and and they have made some adherence to it. Excellent knowledge
Methodology
and and the methodology adopted the methodologies. However, the progress as per the plan. The in design procedure and its
1-c 5 till now/ to be adopted in the team has not made much methodologies are understood adaptation. Adherence to project
Progress.
(Group later stages. The team has progress in the design, and yet to a large extent. plan is commendable.
assessment) not progressed from the to catch up with the project
[CO1] previous stage of evaluation. plan.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

The student show some interest The student shows very good
Individual and The student does not show interest in project, and takes up The student takes a leadership
and participates in some of the
any interest in the project tasks and attempts to complete position and supports the other
Teamwork activities. However, the activities
1-d activities, and is a passive them. Shows excellent team members and leads the project.
Leadership are mostly easy and superficial
10 member. responsibility and team skills. Shows clear evidence of leadership.
( Individual in nature.
assessment) Supports the other members
[CO3] well.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Preliminary The team has not done any The team has started doing There is some evidence to show Strong evidence for excellent
Analysis/ preliminary work with respect some preliminary work with that the team has done good progress in the project. The team
Modeling / to the analysis/modeling/ respect to the project. The amount of preliminary has completed the required
1-e
Simulation/ simulation/experiment/desig students however are not investigation and design/ preliminary work already and are
10
Experiment / n/feasibility study/ algorithm prepared enough for the work analysis/ modeling etc. poised to finish the phase I in an
Design/ development. and they need to improve a lot. They can improve further. excellent manner. They have shown
Feasibility results to prove their progress.
study
(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)
[CO1]
 The project stages are extensively
documented in the report.
Professional documentation tools
The team did not document
Some documentation is done, like LaTeX were used to document
Documentatio the work at all. The project
but not extensive. Interaction Most of the project details were the progress of the project along
n and journal/diary is not
1-f with the guide is minimal. documented well enough. with the project journal. The
presentation. 5 presented. The presentation
Presentation include some There is scope for documentation structure is well-
(Individual & was shallow in content and
points of interest, but overall improvement. The presentation planned and can easily grow into the
group dull in appearance.
quality needs to be improved. is satisfactory. Individual project report.
assessment). The individual student has no
Individual performance to be performance is good.
idea on the presentation of
improved. The presentation is done
[CO6] his/her part.
professionally and with great clarity.
The individual’s performance is
excellent.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Total 30 Phase - I Final Evaluation Marks: 30

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Report Evaluation
Sl.
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

Project report shows

The prepared report is Project report follows the
evidence of systematic
shallow and not as per standard format to some The report is exceptionally good. Neatly
documentation. Report is
standard format. It does not extent. However, its organized. All references cited
1-g Report [CO6] 20 following the standard
follow proper organization. organization is not very good. properly. Diagrams/Figures, Tables and
format and there are only a
Contains mostly Language needs to be equations are properly numbered, and
few issues. Organization of
Unacknowledged content. improved. All references are listed and clearly shown. Language is
the report is good. Most
Lack of effort in preparation not cited properly in the excellent and follows standard styles.
of references are cited
is evident. report.
properly.
(0 - 7 Marks) (8 - 12 Marks) (13 - 19 Marks) (20 Marks)
Phase - I Project Report Marks: 20
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VII
PROGRAM ELECTIVE II
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ADVANCED METHODS IN NON
MET413 PEC 2 1 0 3
DESTRUCTIVE TESTING

Preamble:

1. To develop a fundamental knowledge about the advanced techniques and the recent
developments in non-destructive testing so as to control the quality in manufacturing
engineering components

2. To gain practical knowledge in non-destructive testing (NDT)processes and provide a

detailed discussion on the advanced non destructive testing methods

3. To equip them with the knowledge of different NDT methods in complex geometries and
enable them to select the appropriate methods for better evaluation.

4.To gain advanced knowledge of ultrasonic testing and X- ray radiography which enables
them to perform inspection of samples.

5 To equip them with the knowledge of different NDT methods so as to control the quality in
manufacturing of engineering components.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Understand the theoretical and practical knowledge in methods of non-destructive

CO 1
testing processes
Understand the knowledge of advanced methods in ultrasonic testing which enables
CO 2
them to perform inspection of samples.
Illustrate complete theoretical and practical understanding of the radiographic
CO 3
testing, interpretation and evaluation.
CO 4 Understand the recent advances in the field of non-destructive testing
CO 5 Outline the recent and advanced developments in radiography testing

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 1 2 1
CO 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1
CO 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 1
CO 4 3 3 2 2 1 2 1
CO 5 3 3 2 2 1 2 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 10 10 50
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) 25 marks

Assignment/Quiz/Course project 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1.How visual inspection helps in non-destructive testing?
2.What is the use of field indicators in MPI?
3.What are the different types of developers ?Describe the properties of good liquid
penetrant.
4.What are the applications of eddy current testing?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1.Describe the method of generating ultrasonic waves.
2.Explain the features of ultrasonic guided waves.
3. Describe the features of electromagnetic acoustic transducer .
4.Describe a method of detecting kissing bonds in friction stir welds of aero
structures.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1.Explain the radiography testing using Cobalt 60 isotopes.
2.Describe image quality indicators in Radiography testing.
3.Explain the principle of radiation.
4.How the quality of a good radiograph is assessed.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1.Illustrate the procedure of phased array inspection.
2.Describe the techniques of Time of flight diffraction.
3.Explain the methods of structural health monitoring.
4.Explain the use of Synthetic aperture focussing technique.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1.Describe a technique for inspecting and monitoring the behaviour of
equipment and materials performing under stress.
2.Suggest a suitable inspection method for detecting potential problems in
energised electrical components.
3.Explain the advantages of digital radiography in medical application compared
to conventional x-ray film radiography.
4. Describe the applications of Computed Tomography in industry.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

Course Code: MET 413

Course Name: Advanced methods in Non Destructive Testing

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks) Marks

1 Explain any three Visual aids used in visual inspection. 3

2 Describe the principle of liquid penetrant inspection. 3

3 What is Snell’s law of critical angle? 3

4 What is laser shearography? 3

5 What is radiographic sensitivity? 3

6 What are the properties of X-rays? 3

7 What is neutron radiography? 3

8 Explain the concept of structural health monitoring. 3

9 Differentiate between digital radiography and computed tomography. 3

10 Describe the applications of thermography testing. 3

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module -1

11 a) With a simple sketch, explain any two magnetisation techniques used in 8

magnetic particle inspection.

b) Explain the procedure of magnetic particle inspection of casting. 6

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

12 a) With sketches, explain eddy current inspection process. 8

b) Explain various methods of liquid penetrant inspection. 6

Module -2

13 a) Explain the methods of generating ultrasonic waves. 8

b) Describe the features of Electro Magnetic Acoustic Transducer. 6

14 a) Explain the concept of laser ultrasonics. 8

b) Explain various modes of display in ultrasonic testing. 6

Module -3

15 a) What are the safety measures to be followed in radiography testing? 8

b) What is sensitometry? Discuss the importance of characteristics curves. 6

16 a) What is Real time radiography? Explain its advantages. 8

b) Explain the procedure of film processing in radiography testing. 6

Module -4

17 a) Explain the principle of phased array techniques. 8

b) Describe the theory of time of flight diffraction (TOFD). 6

18 a) Explain the features of Flash radiography for material motion detection. 8

b) What are the applications of thermography testing? 6

Module -5

19 a) Explain the principle of acoustic emission inspection. 8

b) Explain any four types of leak testing.. 6

20 a) Describe two methods of thermography testing. 8

b) Explain the industrial applications of computed tomography. 6

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Visual Testing -Liquid Penetrant Testing-Magnetic Particle Testing- Magnetic Particle Testing
Equipment- Eddy Current Testing – Selection of testing methods- Codes, Standards and
Specifications.

Module 2

Fundamentals of Ultrasonic Waves-- Snell’s law and critical angles – Fresnel and Fraunhofer
effects– wave propagation in other engineering materials. Generation of ultrasonic waves–
contact testing, immersion testing. Ultrasonic Guided Waves- Basics of guided waves–
Generation of guided waves–Introduction to Electro –Magnetic Acoustic Transducer(EMAT
-Optical methods in Ultrasonics- Laser Ultrasonics –optical detection of ultrasound –
measurement of in plane displacement and velocity – Laser shearography – Applications

Module 3

Basic Principles of Radiography -Film Radiography -Radiographic Image Quality and

Radiographic Techniques -Radiation Detectors and Safety - Principle of radiation- Special
Radiographic Techniques and Interpretation of radiographs of Fluoroscopy-Real-time
radioscopy – Principle of neutron radiography - – Principle and application of in-motion and
flash radiography- Interpretation of radiographs:- Interpretation for welds, castings etc,
applications, various case studies, Inspection standards - applicable codes, standards and
specifications (ASME, ASTM, AWS, BS, IBR etc.)

Module 4

Phased Array Techniques- Principles of phased array inspection – phased array probes and
their characteristics – Phased array wedges – Focal law– Beam shaping, steering –Scanning
with phased array probes- linear, sectorial, C scan. Time of Flight Diffraction Theory and
principles of Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD)–Data acquisition and interpretation– TOFD
techniques – selection of probe angle– calibration and optimization, optimizing angles– flaw
location and sizing– codes and standards–interpretation, evaluation, applications.
Introduction to Synthetic Aperture Focusing Technique (SAFT). Structural Health Monitoring
(SHM)-methods- strain gauging- genetic algorithm

Module 5

Acoustic emission inspection-Leak Testing - -Thermographic NDE- Contact and non contact
thermal inspection methods– Heat sensitive paints – Heat sensitive papers -Inspection
methods – Infrared radiation and infrared detectors–thermo mechanical behavior of
materials– IR imaging in aerospace applications-Digital Radiography and Computed
Tomography (CT) -computed radiography(CR) and direct radiography (DR) -industrial CT.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. J.Prasad and C. G. K. Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials, Tata

McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd edition (2011).
2.. B.Raj, T. Jayakumar and M. Thavasimuthu, Practical Non Destructive Testing, Alpha
Science International Limited, 3rd edition (2007).
3. J. L. Rose, Ultrasonic waves in solid media, Cambridge University Press, (2004).
4. A.S. Paipetis,T. E Matikas and D. G. Aggelis, Emerging Technologies in Non-Destructive
Testing, CRC Press, (2012).

Reference Books

1. X. P. V. Maldague, Nondestructive evaluation of materials by infrared thermography,

Springer-Verlag, 1st edition, (1993
2. Non-Destructive Examination and Quality Control, ASM International, Vol.17, 9th edition
(1989)
3. J. Krautkramer and H. Krautkramer, Ultrasonic Testing of Materials, Springer, 4th edition
(1990).
4.L. W. Schmerr, Fundamentals of Ultrasonic Phased Arrays, Springer, (2014)

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

Visual Testing Fundamentals of Visual Testing – vision, lighting,
material attributes, environmental factors, visual perception, direct
and indirect methods Liquid Penetrant Testing Principles – types
1.1 and properties of liquid penetrants – developers – advantages and 3
limitations of various methods - selection of penetrant method -
Applicable codes and standards

Magnetic Particle Testing Theory of magnetism – ferromagnetic,

1.2 2
paramagnetic materials – characteristics of magnetic fields
Magnetic Particle Testing Equipment Selecting the method of
magnetization, inspection materials, magnetic particle inspection
1.3 2
of castings and welding – Dry continuous method, wet residual
method- Applicable codes and standards
Eddy Current Testing Generation of eddy currents – effect of
change of impedance on instrumentation – properties of eddy
1.4 currents – eddy current sensing elements, probes, type of coil 2
arrangement Applicable codes and standards.

Fundamentals of Ultrasonic Waves Nature of sound waves,

wave propagation in metals– modes of sound wave generation –
2.1 longitudinal waves, transverse waves, surface waves, lamb waves– 2
Snell’s law and critical angles – Fresnel and Fraunhofer effects–
wave propagation in other engineering materials.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Generation of ultrasonic waves Methods of ultrasonic wave

generation – piezo electric effect, piezo electric materials and their
2.2 properties – crystal cuts and mode of vibration – Ultrasonic search 2
Units (transducers), types (straight, angle, dual)

Ultrasonic Inspection Methods and Equipment Principle of

pulse echo method, through transmission method, resonance
2.3 method – Advantages, limitations – contact testing, immersion 2
testing.

Ultrasonic Guided Waves- Basics of guided waves– Generation

of guided waves–Introduction to Electro –Magnetic Acoustic
Transducer -EMAT Optical methods in Ultrasonics- Laser
2.4 Ultrasonics –bulk wave and lamb wave generation mechanisms – 3
optical detection of ultrasound – measurement of in plane
displacement and velocity – Laser shearography – Applications

Basic Principles of Radiography - Radio isotopic sources X-ray

source generation and properties – industrial X-ray tubes Film
3.1 Radiography -X-ray film – structure and types for industrial 2
radiography – sensitometric properties – use of film, characteristic
curves (H & D curve).
Radiographic Image Quality and Radiographic Techniques
Radiographic sensitivity –single and double wall Radiography –
3.2 3
panoramic radiography-procedure shooting sketch/technique
sheets
Radiation Detectors and Safety Special and SI Units of radiation
3.3 2
– Principle of radiation
Special Radiographic Techniques and Interpretation of
radiographs Principles and applications of Fluoroscopy/Real-time
radioscopy – advantages and limitations –recent advances,
intensifier tubes, vidicon tubes etc– Principle of neutron
radiography - attenuation of neutrons - direct and indirect
4.1 3
technique - advantages and limitations – Principle and application
of in-motion and flash radiography. Interpretation of
radiographs:- Interpretation for welds, castings etc, applications,
various case studies, Inspection standards - applicable codes,
standards and specifications (ASME, ASTM, AWS, BS, IBR etc.
Phased Array Techniques Principles of phased array inspection –
phased array probes and their characteristics – Phased array
4.2 wedges – Focal law– Beam shaping, steering –Scanning with 2
phased array probes- linear, sectorial, C scan.

Time of Flight Diffraction Theory and principles of Time of

4.3 2
Flight Diffraction (TOFD)–Data acquisition and interpretation–
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

TOFD techniques – selection of probe angle– calibration and

optimization, optimizing angles– flaw location and sizing– codes
and standards–interpretation, evaluation, applications
Introduction to Synthetic Aperture Focusing Technique
4.4 (SAFT).Structural Health Monitoring (SHM)-methods- strain 2
gauging- genetic algorithm-
Acoustic emission inspection Principles and Theory – Signal
Propagation – Physical Considerations – The AE Process Chain -
5.1 Time Considerations – AE Parameters –AE testing during grinding 2
– pipelines – steam turbines – AE location of faults in power
transformers. .
Leak Testing Introduction to leak testing– objectives –
terminologies – measurement of leakage –Types of leak – Types of
flow in leaks – Principles of Fluid dynamics – Leak Testing of
5.2 2
Pressure Systems Without and with a Tracer Gas – Halogen diode
leak testing – Helium mass spectrometer leak testing and
subsystems –Leak testing for special applications-standards.
Thermographic NDE Introduction and fundamentals to infrared
and thermal testing– Heat transfer – Active and passive techniques
– Lock in and pulse thermography– Contact and non contact
5.3 thermal inspection methods– Heat sensitive paints – Heat sensitive 3
papers – thermally quenched phosphors liquid crystals -Inspection
methods – Infrared radiation and infrared detectors–thermo
mechanical behavior of materials
Digital Radiography and Computed Tomography (CT)
Principles of Digital Radiography-Methods of digital radiography
– digitization of X-ray films – computed radiography(CR) and
5.4 2
direct radiography (DR) – process of image formation in CR –
comparison of film, CR and DR method. Computed Tomography –
industrial CT.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES
MET423 PEC 2 1 0 3
AND APPLICATIONS

Preamble: This course introduces the students to the concept of solving engineering
problems by developing linear and non-linear mathematical models. The models involve
objectives and constraints in terms of the relevant design variables. The student learns to
apply a suitable mathematical programming technique to solve the developed model. The
course includes Linear Programming, Integer Programing, Dynamic Programming, Classical
Optimization and Metaheuristic techniques.

Prerequisite: Basic concepts of linear algebra.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Formulate engineering problems as mathematical programming problems.

CO 2 Apply Simplex and dual Simplex methods to solve linear programming problems.
CO 3 Analyse the sensitivity of the model parameters
CO 4 Solve integer programming problems.
CO 5 Apply Dynamic Programming techniques to solve sequential optimization problems
Apply classical optimization techniques and algorithms to solve nonlinear
CO 6
optimization problems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 1
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2 2
CO 5 3 3 2 2
CO 6 3 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 5
Understand 5
Apply 30 30 40
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate 10 10 20
Create 10
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Consider a chocolate manufacturing company that produces only two types of chocolate –
A and B. Both the chocolates require Milk and Choco only. Each unit of A requires 1 unit of
Milk and 3 units of Choco, and each unit of B requires 1 unit of Milk and 2 units of Choco.
The company kitchen has a total of 5 units of Milk and 12 units of Choco. On each sale, the
company makes a profit of Rs 6 per unit A sold, and Rs 5 per unit B sold. Now, the company
wishes to maximize its profit. Formulate the problem as a LPP and determine how many units
of A and B should it produce respectively?

2. A person wishes to invest Rs.14,000. He has identified four investment opportunities.

Investment 1 requires an investment of $5,000 and has a present value (a time-discounted
value) of $8,000; Investment 2 requires $7,000 and has a value of $11,000; Investment 3
requires $4,000 and has a value of $6,000; and Investment 4 requires $3,000 and has a value
of $4,000. Into which investments should he place his money so as to maximize the total
present value?

3. Find the dimensions of a box of largest volume that can be inscribed in a sphere of unit
radius.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Solve the following LPP using simplex method.

Minimize Z = 4x1 + x2
Subject to:
3x1 + x2 = 3;
4x1 + 3x2 ≥ 6;
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

x1 + 2x2 ≤ 4;
x1, x2 ≥ 0;

2. Show that the Big-M method will conclude that the following LPP has no feasible
solution.
Maximize Z = 2x1 + 5x2
Subject to:
3x1 + 2x2 ≥ 6;
2x1 + x2 ≤ 2;
x1, x2 ≥ 0;

3. Generate the dual simplex iterations for the LPP given below and find the solution.
Minimize Z = 5x1 + 6x2
Subject to :
x1 + x2 ≥ 2;
4x1 + x2 ≥ 4;
x1, x2 ≥ 0;

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. The following LPP has an optimal solution of x1 = 320; x2 =360 and Objective function
value = 4360.

Maximize Z = 8x1 + 5x2

Subject to:
2x1 + 1x2 ≤ 1000;
3x1 + 4x2 ≤ 2400;
x1 + x2 ≤ 700;
x1 - x2 ≤ 350;
x1, x2 ≥ 0.
Carry out sensitivity analysis to determine the range in which the objective function
coefficients can vary keeping the current solution as optimal.
2. Determine the shadow price corresponding to the first constraint for the LPP given in the
previous question.

3. Describe the concept of shadow price and reduced cost.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Solve the following integer programming problem using Branch and Bound algorithm.
Maximize Z = 5x1 + 4x2;
Subject to:
x1 + x2 ≤ 5;
10x1 + 6x2 ≤ 45;
x1, x2 ≥ 0, and integers.

2. Solve the following integer programming problem using the cutting plane algorithm.
Maximize Z = 7x1 + 10x2
Subject to:
-x1 + 3x2 ≤ 6;
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

7x1 + x2 ≤ 35;
x1, x2 ≥ 0, and integers.

3. Solve the following integer programming problem.

Maximize Z = 2x1 +3x2
Subject to:
5x1 + 7x2 ≤ 35;
4x1 + 9x2 ≤ 36;
x1, x2 ≥ 0, and integers.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Find the shortest distance between the origin and destination for the network given below
using dynamic programming.

2. What is Bellman’s principle of optimality?

3. A college student has 7 days remaining before the final examinations for four courses, and
she wants to allocate this study time as effectively as possible. She needs at least 1 day on
each course, and likes to concentrate on just one course each day. So she wants to allocate 1,
2, 3, or 4 days to each course. She decides to use dynamic programming to make these
allocations to maximize the total grade points to be obtained from the four courses. She
estimates that the alternative allocations for each course would yield the number of grade
points shown in the table given below. Solve this problem using dynamic programming.
Study Days Estimated grade points
Course 1 Course 2 Course 3 Course 4
1 3 5 2 6
2 5 5 4 7
3 6 6 7 9
4 7 9 8 9

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Maximize the function f (x1, x2, x3) = x1 + 2x2 + x2x3 – x12 – x22 – x32

2. Find the solution for the following problem using the Lagrange multiplier method.
Minimize f (x, y) = 5x-1y-2
subject to : g (x,y) = x2 +y2 – 9 =0

3. Use the Fibonacci search method to minimize the function

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VII SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET423: OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES AND APPLICATIONS

Maximum : 100 Marks Duration : 3 hrs.

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks.

1. How is degeneracy identified in the simplex procedure?

2. What is the role of artificial variables in simplex method?

3. Write the dual for the following LPP.

Maximize Z = 5x1 + 4x2;

Subject to:
x1 + x2 ≤ 5;
10x1 + 6x2 ≤ 45;
x1, x2 ≥ 0.
4. What is meant by shadow price?

5. Explain the importance of integer programming models and their applications.

6. What is Bellman’s principle of optimality?

7. Find the extreme points of the function

f (x) = 12 x5 - 45 x4 + 40 x3 + 5

8. State the necessary and sufficient conditions for the maximum of a multivariable
function f(X).

9. Find the Hessian matrix of the function f(x) = 3x12x22 – x22x33

10. Describe the procedure of Golden Section search method.

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

Module 1

11. a) Consider a chocolate manufacturing company that produces only two types of
chocolate – A and B. Both the chocolates require Milk and Choco only. Each unit of A
requires 1 unit of Milk and 3 units of Choco, and each unit of B requires 1 unit of Milk
and 2 units of Choco. The company kitchen has a total of 5 units of Milk and 12 units of
Choco. On each sale, the company makes a profit of Rs 6 per unit A sold, and Rs 5 per
unit B sold. Now, the company wishes to maximize its profit. Formulate the problem as a
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

LPP and graphically determine how many units of A and B should it produce
respectively?

(5 Marks)

b) Use Simplex method to solve the following LPP.

Minimize Z = 4x1 + x2
Subject to:
3x1 + x2 = 3;
4x1 + 3x2 ≥ 6;
x1 + 2x2 ≤ 4;
x1, x2 ≥ 0;

(9 Marks)

12. Solve the following LPP using Simplex method and carry out sensitivity analysis to
determine the range in which the objective function coefficients can vary keeping the
current solution as optimal.

Maximize Z = 8x1 + 5x2

Subject to:
2x1 + 1x2 ≤ 1000;
3x1 + 4x2 ≤ 2400;
x1 + x2 ≤ 700;
x1 - x2 ≤ 350;
x1, x2 ≥ 0.
(14 Marks)
Module 2

13. Generate the dual simplex iterations for the LPP given below and find the solution.
Minimize Z = 5x1 + 6x2
Subject to :
x1 + x2 ≥ 2;
4x1 + x2 ≥ 4;
x1, x2 ≥ 0;

(14 Marks)

14. Solve the following integer programming problem using Branch and Bound algorithm.
Maximize Z = 2x1 +3x2
Subject to:
5x1 + 7x2 ≤ 35;
4x1 + 9x2 ≤ 36;
x1, x2 ≥ 0, and integers

(14 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 3
15. Find the shortest distance between the origin and destination for the network given below
using dynamic programming.

(14 Marks)

16. A candidate in an election wants to purchase TV time for a total of four commercials on
TV stations located in four areas. Based on polling information, an estimate is made of
the number of votes that can be won in the different areas depending upon the number of
commercials run. These estimates are given in the table in thousands of votes. Use
dynamic programming to find how the four commercials should be distributed among the
four areas to maximize the estimated number of votes won.

Commercials Area
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 0
1 4 6 5 3
2 7 8 9 7
3 9 10 10 12
4 12 11 12 14

(14 Marks)

Module 4

17. a) Find the extreme points of the function f (X) = x13 + x23 + 2x12 + 4x22 + 6

(6 Marks)

b) Find the maximum of the function f(X) = 2x1 + x2 + 10; subject to g(X) = x1 + 2x22 = 3
using the Lagrange multiplier method.

(8 Marks)

18. a) Find the dimensions of a box of largest volume that can be inscribed in a sphere of
unit radius. (6 Marks)

b) Maximize the function f (x1, x2, x3) = x1 + 2x2 + x2x3 – x12 – x22 – x32 (8 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 5

19. a) Minimize the function f (x) = 0.65 – [0.75/(1+x2)] – 0.65x tan-1(1/x) in the interval
[0,3] using the Fibonacci method with n = 6. (7 Marks)

b) Use the steepest descent method to search for the minimum for the function f (x, y) =
25x2 +y2 . Start at (1, 3) with a step size of 0.5 (7 Marks)

20. a) Use the golden section search method to minimize the function
f (x) = x4 – 14x3 +60x2 – 70x in the range [0,2]. (7 Marks)

b) Solve cos x = 2x using Newton Raphson method. Carry out 4 iterations.

(7 Marks)

Syllabus

Module 1

Formulation of engineering problems as mathematical programming models: Linear

Programming formulations.

Solutions to Linear Programming Problems: Simplex method – Big-M and 2-phase methods
– Sensitivity Analysis for the objective function coefficients and right hand side coefficients
of constraints - Exceptional cases in LPP.

Module 2

Duality concept in LPP - Dual Simplex method.

Integer Programming problem: Applications of Integer Programming problems - Integer

Programming algorithms - Cutting Plane method - Branch and Bound method.

Module 3

Dynamic Programming: Bellman’s principle of optimality - Forward recursion and backward

recursion - Application problems- Shortest route and Knapsack problems.

Module 4

Classical optimization techniques: Single variable optimization - Multivariable optimization

with no constraints - Optimization with equality constraints - Method of Lagrange Multipliers
- Optimization with inequality constraints - Kuhn-Tucker conditions.

Module 5

Algorithms for unconstrained optimization: Fibonacci search method - Golden section search
method -Hooke and Jeeve’s method - Newton-Raphson method - Cauchy's (Steepest descent)
method.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. Hamdy A. Taha, “Operations Research, An Introduction”, Pearson Education, 10 th

edition, 2019.

2. S. S. Rao, “Engineering Optimization, Theory and Practice”, New Age International,

3rd edition, 2013

Reference Books

1. N. V. S. Raju, “ Optimization Methods for Engineers”, Prentice-Hall of India, 1st

edition, 2014

2. Ravindran, Philips and Solberg, “Operations Research, Principles and Practice”,

Wiley, 2nd edition, 2007

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Module 1
1.1 Formulation of engineering problems as mathematical
1
programming models.
1.2 Linear Programming models, Examples 1
1.3 Graphical method to solve LPP 1
1.4 Simplex method, Introduction 1
1.5 Example problems using Simplex method 2
1.6 Big-M method and 2-phase method 2
1.7 Sensitivity analysis 2
1.8 Exceptional cases 1
2 Module 2
2.1 Duality concept in LPP
1
2.2 Dual Simplex method
2
2.3 Integer Programming problem – Introduction and applications. 1
2.4 Branch and Bound method 2
2.5 Cutting Plane method 2
3 Module 3
3.1 Dynamic Programming- Introduction and Bellman’s principle of
optimality 1

3.2 Forward recursion and backward recursion 1

3.3 Application problems -Shortest route problem 2
3.4 Knapsack problem 2
4 Module 4
4.1 Classical optimization – Introduction- Single variable optimization 1
4.2 Multivariable optimization with no constraints 2
4.3 Optimization with equality constraints - Method of Lagrange 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Multipliers
4.4 Optimization with inequality constraints - Kuhn-Tucker
2
conditions.
5 Module 5
5.1 Algorithms for unconstrained optimization- Introduction 1
5.2 Fibonacci search method 1
5.3 Golden section search method 1
5.4 Hooke and Jeeve’s method 1
5.5 Newton-Raphson method. 1
5.6 Cauchy's (Steepest descent) method 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET433 FINITE ELEMENT METHOD PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course is meant to serve as an introduction to the basic aspects of Finite
Element formulation for the undergraduate student. Some formulation schemes for the
numerical solution of field problems leading to matrix equations amenable for solution with
the aid of computer, forms content of this course. This three (3) credit elective course has
retained almost all the contents of a core course in this subject offered usually. Learning the
basics of the formulation should help the student know better about the scope as well as the
limitations of a particular choice while modeling (for example, while choosing an element
type for solution).

Prerequisite: MET332 ADVANCED MECHANICS OF SOLIDS

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Apply Matrix methods for solution of some one-dimensional Stress problems based
CO 1
on FEM approach.
CO 2 Analyse some structural analysis problems involving beams and trusses, using FEM.
Formulate computational scheme for two-dimensional structural analysis based on
CO 3
Total Potential Energy Method.
Apply the strategy of coordinate transformation using natural coordinates, and
CO 4
subsequent solution, employing the Isoparametric formulation.
Formulate Galerkin’s weighted residual technique of simple one dimensional (1- D)
CO 5
problem and natural frequency analysis in 1 D problem

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO
3 3 1
1
CO
3 3 1
2
CO
3 3 1
3
CO
3 3 1
4
CO
3 3 1
5
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 10 10 30
Apply 40 40 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. List various computational schemes involving Matrix methods for solution of boundary
value problems.
2. List the mathematical strategies for converting (partial) differential equations into matrix
equations.
3. Apply the direct method of FEM formulation to introduce Matrix methods in one-
dimensional problems.
4. Apply the Principle of Total Potential energy to formulate FEM equations for 1-D spring
element.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Formulate the rotation matrix for coordinate transformation between local and global
coordinates.

2. Assembly and solution for truss analysis.

3. Formulate stiffness matrix for beam problem.

4. Solution of beam problems using FEM.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1.Review of the constitutive matrix [D] for Plane-stress and Plane-strain cases.

2.Derivation of two-dimensional FEM equations for stress-analysis, using the Total Potential
energy approach.

3. Formulate shape functions for some two dimensional elements.

4. Formulate strain-displacement gradient matrix [B] for the 3node triangular element (CST)
and four node rectangular elements.

5. Assembly, application of boundary conditions and solution of problems involving CST.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Demonstrate the motivation for Coordinate transformation using natural coordinates for
formulations involving higher order elements.

2. Deduction of shape functions in terms of natural coordinates using Serendipity and

Lagrange’s Interpolation methods.

3. Perform Isoparametric formulation to derive stiffness matrix for (i) the general four node
Quadrilateral element and (ii) eight node Quadrilateral element.

4. Perform Numerical integration in two-dimensions using Gauss Quadrature.

5. Illustration of solution of a structural problem for nodal unknowns, employing the above
features (isoparametric formulation and Gaussian integration).

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Apply Galerkin’s technique for FEM formulation.
2. Solve 1-D heat transfer problems employing FEM.
3. Formulate vibration problems using FEM
4. Solve Natural frequency (single degree of freedom, undamped) problems using FEM
5. Discuss practical aspects of FEM modelling.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

MODEL QUESTION PAPER APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL

UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code : MET433 Course Name : FINITE ELEMENT METHOD

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

PART – A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Compare and contrast FEM, FDM and FVM

2. Comment on the sources of errors in a FEM solution
3. What are local and global coordinates? How are they connected in a planar truss
problem?
4. Explain the Fixed end reactions method in solving beam problems.
5. Make a short note on the Total potential energy method of formulating a FEM
problem.
6. What are degrees of freedom in the context of an FEM element for structural
analysis?
7. What is the motivation for coordinate transformation employing natural coordinates?
8. Evaluate the following integral using two-point Gauss Quadrature. Sampling points
are at ±1/√3, and both weights are equal to unity.

9. How is the natural frequency of a system related to the eigen-value ?

10. Comment on the convergence of a static-structural FE simulation run.

PART – B

(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1

11. For the assembly shown, formulate the global stiffness matrix, and equations (in matrix
form) for the solution of the unknown global displacements and forces. P= 2kN, k1=1000
kN/m, k2=k3=500 kN/m. (14 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR
12. Using Total Potential Energy Principle, derive the global stiffness matrix for the
following assemblage of spring elements in series applied by a force (P) applied at node-4,
along the x-axis. Subsequently, using the numerical values provided, find displacements at
nodes 2 and 4, reaction forces at nodes 1 and 2, the force in each spring. P= 450 N,
k1=10,000 N/m, k2=20,000 N/m, k3=10,000 N/m. (14 Marks)

MODULE – 2

13. (a) Derive the stiffness matrix for an element for a planar truss problem in terms of the
components of the rotation (transformation) matrix. (6 Marks)

(b) Determine the nodal displacements and rotations and the global and element forces for
the beam supported and loaded as shown. E = 210 GPa, Moment of inertia of cross-section,
’I’ = 2X 10-4 m4, and spring stiffness= 200kN/m. (8 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR

14. (a) Derive the stiffness matrix for FEM analysis used to analyse beam problems based
on Euler-Bernoulli theory. (5 Marks)

(b) Find stresses in the truss (rod) elements, if both rods have E = 210 GPa, and area of cross
section 5.0X10-2 m2 (9 Marks)

MODULE – 3

15. (a) Values for the field variable at the nodes (coordinates as indicated) of a triangular
element are as shown. Assign appropriate node numbers and evaluate shape functions and
calculate the value of the field variable at the coordinates (5,7). ( 9 Marks)

(b) For a 2D stress analysis problem employing a three noded triangular element, with
vertices at (0,1), (0,-1) and (2,0), evaluate the Strain-DIsplacement Martrix. (5 Marks)

OR

16. (a) A thin plate as shown is pulled by a uniform load as shown. Should it be treated as a
plane-stress problem or Plane strain prblem? Justify. Accordingly, for the two-element
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

discretization shown, evaluate the Strain-Displavement Matrices and the Constitutive matrix.
E = 200 GPa, Poissons ration is 0.3 and thickness t= 10mm. (9 Marks)

(b) What are the unknown variables at each node and the boundary conditions>? How will
you detrmine the stiffness matrix (need not compute the stiffness matrix)? Give the Load
vector. (5 Marks)

MODULE – 4

17. (a) For a 4 node quadrilateral element for two dimensional stress analysis, derive
expression for the Jacobian Matrix connecting the derivatives in (X,Y) and (ξ, η )
coordinates (8 Marks)

(b) If the nodes of a quadrilateral with coordinates (x1,y1), (x2,y2), (x3,y3), (x4,y4), are
(20,20), (40, 30), (50,50) and (15,40), evaluate the Jacobian at ξ=0.5, η =0.5 (6 Marks)

OR

18. A bilinear rectangular element is loaded as shown. If the Jacibian at ξ=1/3, η =1/3 is
given by , evaluate the corresponding B Matrix. (10 Marks)

(b) What are the boundary conditions for this problem if the displacements at each node ‘i’
are represented as ui and vi. (1 Mark )

(c) If the problem is solved and displacements obtained, how can the strains be determined?
And also, stresses? (solutions not intended) (3 Marks).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE – 5

19. (a) Using the Galerkin’s Weak formulation, derive the finite element equations for a one-
dimensional steady state heat conduction problem with constant thermal conductivity and no
heat generation. (8 marks)

(b) A heat transfer fin of radius 1cm and length 5 cm is attached to a boiler-wall maintained
at 140oC and the other end is exposed to atmosphere. Find the temperature (at steady state)
of the tip exposed to atmosphere and also at a point at 0.5 cm from the free end, by
employing a two-element finite elements assembly. The curved surface of the fin is well
insulated. T= 40oC, h=10 W/cm2oC. K=70W/cmoC. (6 marks)

OR

20. Derive the finite element equations for free vibration analysis due to axial displacements
of rod elements using Galerkin’s technique (8 marks)

(b) Determine the first two natural frequencies of longitudinal vibrations of the stepped steel
bar shown. All dimensions are in mm. E= 200 GPa, ρ= 7800N/m3, length L=500 mm.
(6 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1 (9 Hours)

FEM as a numerical computational tool in Computer Aided Design & Analysis- general
features of numerical solutions-general strategy of Matrix Methods in Computational
Mechanics- overview of similar numerical methods (FDM, FEM, FVM, BEM)-overview of
general formulation methods leading to Matrix equations (Stiffness (direct) method, Potential
energy method, Galerkin’s etc.) - commercial and free FEM packages.

Direct approach of formulating the FEM equations for 1D stress problems:– element
stiffness – assembly of elements – properties of [K] matrix – treatment of boundary
conditions- stress computation – support reaction – simple problems.

Application of the Principle of Total Potential energy to formulate FEM equations for 1-D
spring element. Simple problems involving assemblage of spring elements.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 2 (8 Hours)

Plane truss element formulation – coordinate transformation – local and global coordinates –
element matrices – assembly of elements – treatment of boundary conditions – stress
calculation –Planar truss problems .

Beam element: Beam relationships – 1-D beam element FE formulation - element stiffness
matrix – load considerations – boundary conditions –solution of problems.

Module 3 (8 Hours)

Review of Constitutive Matrix [D] for Plane-stress and Plane-strain formulations- derivation
of two-dimensional FEM equations for stress-analysis, using the Total Potential energy
approach- Shape functions, equations for displacement field in terms of nodal displacements
for (i) the 3noded triangular element (CST) and (ii) four-node-rectangular elements. Strain-
displacement gradient matrix [B] for the above elements- numerical problems involving 3-
node-triangular elements.

Module 4 (9 Hours)

Motivation for Coordinate transformation using natural coordinates, deduction of shape

functions in terms of natural coordinates: Serendipity and Lagrange’s Interpolation methods-
Isoparametric formulation for (i) the general four- node- Quadrilateral element and (ii)
eight-node- Quadrilateral element (curved boundaries)- Gauss Quadrature in 2-dimensions-
Illustrative examples.

Module 5 (7Hours)

Strong and Weak form , , Galerkin’s weighted residual FEM formulation ; One dimensional
axially loaded bar, heat flow in a bar- numerical problems.

FEM formulation for (undamped) Natural frequency estimation in 1-D structural problems –
simple examples.

Practical considerations in FEM analysis: aspect ratio and element types, use of symmetry in
analysis, natural subdivisions at discontinuities, h and p methods of refinement, handling
concentrated point loads and infinite stress in some geometries (re-entrant corners)-treatment
of infinite medium, connecting different types of elements. Convergence of solution
(demonstration of the above aspects in a FEM software environment recommended).

Text Books

1. Daryl L. Logan, “A First Course in the Finite Element Method”, Cengage Learning India
Pvt. Ltd., 5th edition, 2012.

2. . Seshu P., “Textbook of Finite Element Analysis”, PHI Learning Private Ltd., Ninth
printing, 2010.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. Robert D Cook, David S Malkus, Michael E. Plesha and Robert J. Witt , “Concepts And
Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, Wiley Student Edition, 4th Edition, 2007.
2. J. N. Reddy, “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, McGraw Hill International
4th Edition, 2018.
3.S. S. Rao, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd; 3rd
Revised edition, 1999.
4.K. J. Bathe, “Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis”, Prentice Hall, Pearson
Education Inc., 2nd edition, 2014.
5.O. C. Zienkiewics, R. L. Taylor, “The Finite Element Method,” Vol I & II, John Wiley &
Sons Inc. 5th edition, 2000.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module-1 ( 8 Hours)
FEM as a numerical tool - general features of numerical solutions-
1.1 1 Hour
general strategy of Matrix Methods.
Overview of FDM, FEM, FVM, BEM-overview of general
1.2 1 Hour
formulation methods leading to Matrix equations.
Direct approach of formulating the FEM equations for 1D stressl
problems:– element stiffness – assembly of elements – properties
1.3 2 Hours
of [K] matrix – treatment of boundary conditions- stress
computation – support reaction
Application of the Principle of Total Potential energy to formulate
1.4 1 Hour
FEM equations for 1-D spring element.
Numerical Problems on direct method and Potential Energy
1.5 3 Hours
Principle
2 Module-2 (6 Hours)
Truss element formulation – coordinate transformation – local and
2.1 1 Hour
global coordinates – element matrices
Assembly of elements – treatment of boundary conditions – stress
2.2 1 Hour
calculation –Planar truss problems .
2.3 Tutorial on truss problems 1 Hour
2.4 1-D beam element FE formulation - element stiffness matrix – 1 Hour
2.5 Load considerations – boundary conditions for Beams 1 Hour
2.6 Tutorial on Beam problems 1 Hour
3 Module-3 (7 Hours)

derivation of two-dimensional FEM equations for stress-analysis,

3.1 2 Hours
using the Total Potential energy approach.
Shape functions, equations for displacement field in terms of nodal
3.2 displacements for (i) the three-node-triangular element (CST) and 2 Hours
(ii) four-node-rectangular elements.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Strain-displacement gradient matrix [B] for the above elements-

3.3 1 Hour

Tutorial Problems involving 3-node-triangular elements.

3.4 2 Hours

4 Module-4 (8 Hours)

Coordinate transformation using natural coordinates, of shape

4.1 functions in terms of natural coordinates: Serendipity and 2 Hours
Lagrange’s Interpolation methods.
- Isoparametric formulation for (i) the general four- node-
4.2 2 Hours
Quadrilateral element and
Isoparametric formulation for (i) the general four- node-
4.3 Quadrilateral element and (ii) eight-nod- Quadrilateral element 2 Hours
(curved boundaries)
4.4 Gauss Quadrature in 2-dimensions- Illustrative examples. 1 Hour
4.5 Tutorial Problems involving isoparametric formulation. 1 Hour
5 Module-5 (7 Hours)
5.1 Strong and weak form of simple problem 1 Hour
5.2 Galerkin’s formulation of one dimensional axially loaded bar 1 Hours
5.3 Galerkin’s formulation of one dimensional Heat flow in a bar 1 Hours
5.4 FEM formulation for (undamped) Natural frequency estimation in 1 Hour
5.5 Tutorial problems on 1-D problem 1 Hour
Practical considerations in FEM analysis and demonstration of
5.6 2 Hours
these aspects in a FEM software environment.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET443 AEROSPACE ENGINEERING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble :This course provides fundamentals of aerospace engineering and understanding of

flight instruments. To educate students the fundamental aerospace disciplines necessary to
carry out the design of an aerospace vehicle or systems.

Prerequisite : Nil

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Explain the characteristics of atmosphere
CO2 Discuss airfoil theory, 2D, 3D or Finite aero foils
CO3 Explain perform analysis of flight dynamics of aircrafts
CO4 Understand different flight instruments
CO5 Discuss the principles of wind tunnel testing

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 1
CO 2 3 2
CO 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 1

Assessment Pattern
Bloom Continuous Assessment Tests
End Semester Examination
Category 1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse

Evaluate

Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. What is meant by Standard atmosphere? Explain how the variation of pressure and
density at different altitudes can be calculated.
2. With the help of a diagram explain the variation of temperature in different regions of
atmosphere.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Derive the expression for induced drag.
2. Write a summary of different drags that are acting on a 3D aerofoil.
3. With sketches compare the maximum lift produced by different high lift
arrangements with that of a plane aerofoil.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Derive the general two-dimensional translational equations of motion of an airplane
in accelerated flight.
2. Explain how Froude’s momentum theory can be used to calculate the efficiency of a
propeller?
3. Show that at the velocity for minimum power required the airplane is flying at the
angle of attack that corresponds to a maximum Cl 3/2 /Cd.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the working of vertical speed indicator of an aircraft.
2. Explain the working of turn and bank indicator of an aircraft.
3. Explain the working of air temperature indicator of an aircraft.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the working of an indraft wind tunnel.
2. A low subsonic wind tunnel has a diffuser of area ratio 9. At a test section velocity
of 30m/s and a temperature of 330K, the diffuser is found to have 90% efficiency. If
the pressure at the inlet to the diffuser is 1.195 x 105N/m2. Calculate the head loss in
the diffuser.
3. Explain the working of supersonic wind tunnel.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VIII SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET443: AEROSPACE ENGINEERING

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Explain the variation of temperature in various regimes of earth’s atmosphere.

2. Draw the pressure distribution around a 2-D aerofoil.
3. Explain span efficiency factor.
4. What is meant by aerodynamic center?
5. What are the various propeller coefficients?
6. Derive an expression for circular velocity.
7. Define the terms Range and Endurance of an aircraft?
8. How aerodynamic balancing of control surfaces is done in aircraft?
9. What do you mean by wind tunnel balances?
10. What is meant by range and endurance of an aircraft?
(10 X 3 = 30 marks)

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

Module 1

11. a) What do you mean by temperature, pressure and density altitudes? (4 marks)

b) Consider an airplane flying at an altitude where the pressure and temperature are
25.37 Kpa and 216.66 K, respectively. Calculate the pressure and density altitudes at
which the airplane is flying. (10 marks)

12. a) Explain how lift coefficient can be obtained from pressure coefficient. (4 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b) An aircraft having wing span 9.6m and wing area 17m2 produces a lift of 80,000N
when flying at 120m/s. Calculate the induced drag when flying at sea level, Assume
e=0.8 (10 marks)
Module 2

13. a) An aircraft having wing span 9.6m and wing area 17m2 produces a lift of 80000N
when flying at 120m/s. Calculate the induced drag when flying at sea level, Assume
e=0.8 (10 marks)

b) Write some methods to reduce the wing tip vortices. (4 marks)

14. a) Explain Prandl’s lifting line theory? (4 marks)

b) Explain how the prandl’s lifting line theory can be used to calculate the
aerodynamic characteristics of a finite wing. (10 marks)

Module 3
15. a) Derive the expression for thrust required for a level unaccelerated flight. (8 marks)

b) Obtain the condition for minimum thrust required for a level unaccelerated flight
(6 marks)

16. a) What do you mean by power off glide? Derive the expression to find glide angle.
(7 marks)

b) Derive the Brequet range equation for a propeller driven airplane (7 marks)

Module 4
17. a) What is meant by static and dynamic stability of an aircraft. (7 marks)

b) With Sketch, explain the working of airspeed indicator. . (7 marks)

18. a) Explain the working and functions of different gyroscopic instruments used in
aircrafts. (7 marks)

b) With the help of diagram, explain the working of different control surfaces of
aircrafts. (7 marks)

Module 5
19. a) Explain the types of engines used for subsonic aircraft. (7 marks)

b) Define orbital velocity? Derive the expression for it. (7 marks)

20. a) Explain the working of an Indraft wind tunnel. (7 marks)

b) Briefly explain important space missions of ISRO. (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1
The atmosphere - characteristics of troposphere, stratosphere, thermosphere, and ionosphere
- pressure, temperature and density variations in the atmosphere. Application of dimensional
analysis – aerodynamic force – model study and similitude. 2D aero foils -Nomenclature
and classification- pressure distribution in inviscid and real flows- momentum and
circulation theory of aero foil- characteristics.

Module 2
3D or finite aero foils – effect of releasing the wingtips- wing tip vortices- replacement of
finite wing by horse shoe vertex system, lifting line theory-wing load distribution – aspect
ratio, induced drag calculation of induced drag from momentum considerations. Skin
friction and from drag- changes in finite wing plan shape

Module 3
Propellers – momentum and blade element theories –propeller coefficients and charts.
Aircraft performance-straight and level flight –power required and power available graphs
for propeller and jet aircraft. Gliding and climbing –rate of climb-service and absolute
ceilings-gliding angle and speed of flattest glide takeoff and landing performance – length
of runway required- aircraft ground run- circling flight – radius of tightest turn-jet and
rocket assisted take –off high lift devices-range and endurance of airplanes-charts for piston
and jet engine aircrafts.

Module 4
Flight Instruments-airspeed indicator, calculation of true air speed-altimeter, gyro horizon -
direction indicator-vertical speed indicator –turn and back indicator-air temperature
indicator. (Brief description and qualitative ideas only). Ideas on stability-static and
dynamic stability- longitudinal, lateral and directional stability- controls of an aero plane-
aerodynamic balancing of control surfaces- mass balancing (Qualitative ideas only).

Module 5
Principles of wind tunnel testing –open and closed type wind tunnels-wind tunnel balance
supersonic wind tunnels. Study of subsonic, Transonic, and supersonic aircraft engines
(Description with figures only).Elementary ideas on space travel-calculation of earth
orbiting and escape velocities ignoring air resistance and assuming circular orbit.

Text Books:
1. Anderson, Fundamentals of Aerodynamics, McGraw-Hill, 2010
2. A.C. Kermode, Mechanics of flight, Prentice Hall, 2007
3. EHJ Pallett, Aircraft Instruments and Integrated systems, Longman,1992

Reference Books:
1. Houghton and brock, Aerodynamics for Engineering Student, Hodder & Stoughton,1977
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module 1
The atmosphere - characteristics of troposphere,
1.1 stratosphere, thermosphere, and ionosphere - pressure, 3
temperature and density variations in the atmosphere.

1.21.2 Application of dimensional analysis – aerodynamic force –

1
model study and similitude
2D aero foils -Nomenclature and classification- pressure
.21.3 distribution in inviscid and real flows- momentum and 3
circulation theory of aero foil- characteristics.
2 Module 2
3D or finite aero foils – effect of releasing the wingtips-
wing tip vortices- replacement of finite wing by horse shoe
vertex system, lifting line theory-wing load distribution –
2.1 7
aspect ratio, induced drag calculation of induced drag from
momentum considerations. Skin friction and from drag-
changes in finite wing plan shape
3 Module 3
Propellers – momentum and blade element theories –
propeller coefficients and charts. Aircraft performance-
3.1 4
straight and level flight –power required and power
available graphs for propeller and jet aircraft.
Gliding and climbing –rate of climb-service and absolute
ceilings-gliding angle and speed of flattest glide takeoff
and landing performance – length of runway required-
1.23.2 aircraft ground run- circling flight – radius of tightest turn- 4
jet and rocket assisted take –off high lift devices-range
and endurance of airplanes-charts for piston and jet engine
aircrafts.
4 Module 4
Flight Instruments-airspeed indicator, calculation of true
air speed-altimeter, gyro horizon -direction indicator-
4.1 4
vertical speed indicator –turn and back indicator-air
temperature indicator.
Ideas on stability-static and dynamic stability-
longitudinal, lateral and directional stability- controls of
4.1 3
an aero plane- aerodynamic balancing of control surfaces-
mass balancing
5 Module 5
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Principles of wind tunnel testing –open and closed type

wind tunnels-wind tunnel balance supersonic wind
tunnels. Study of subsonic, Transonic, and supersonic
5.1 7
aircraft engines. Elementary ideas on space travel-
calculation of earth orbiting and escape velocities ignoring
air resistance and assuming circular orbit.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

HYBRID AND ELECTRIC
MET453 PEC 2 1 0 3
VEHICLES

Preamble: This course aims to introduce the students to general overview of Hybrid Electric
vehicle, Architecture of Hybrid Electric Drive Trains, control of various motors and drive
with its different configuration. The course will also cover the power transmission of Electric
vehicles and its components. The energy storage system with its management, charging
methods and various sensors of Electric vehicles has been included. This course also covers
the vehicle validation with its integration, Hardware & Software Interfaces, Chassis design,
and Battery Positioning of Hybrid Electric vehicle.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the general architecture of Electric vehicles

CO 2 Describe various motors and drives of Electric vehicles
Explain details of power transmission of Electric vehicles and select the appropriate
CO 3
components based on requirement
CO 4 Describe charging, various sensors and battery management of Electric vehicles
Apply vector tool simulation, do vehicle validation, chassis design and battery
CO 5
positioning of Electric vehicles

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 1 1
CO 2 3 2 1
CO 3 3 1 1
CO 4 3 2 1
CO 5 3 3 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1 With the help of block diagram explain the major components of an electric vehicle

2 Explain the EV drivetrain alternatives based on power source configuration

3 Which are the resistive forces that retard the motion of a four-wheel vehicle? Show with a
diagram

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1 How the electric motors used in EVs differs from that of used in industrial application

2 Explain the physical concept of torque production in Induction motor

3 Enlist the strategies for maintaining constant magnetic flux

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1 What is field oriented control

2 Why higher number of gears are not used in Electric vehicle

3 Explain the single speed reduction in Electric vehicles

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1 Explain the battery charging and equalization

2 What is the importance of efficient battery thermal management in electric vehicle

3 Enlist different charging protocols in Electric vehicles

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1 What is the importance of electric vehicle validation

2 What is electric control unit in Electric vehicle

3 Where is the high voltage battery located in an electric vehicle

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code : MET453
Course Name : Hybrid and Electric vehicles
Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours
PART – A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1 Differentiate between the design of Parallel HEV and Series HEV.

2 Identify the major components of the power train of a pure Electric vehicle.
3 Mention the type of electric motor suitable for an Electric vehicle. Substantiate
your answer.
4 Give the sketch of a Brushless DC motor. Show the major parts in the sketch.
5 What are the basic switching elements used in EVs?
6 Give the significance of Power Speed Ratio as applied to an electric motor in an
EV.
7 What is meant by a sensor? Identify any 3 sensors used in EVs and give their
functions.
8 Explain how a regenerative braking system helps to increase the range of an EV.
9 Draw the basic architecture of CAN .Explain its function in HEV
10 What are the design issues encountered by a system integration engineer in HEV
development ?

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

Syllabus

Module 1

11 a) With an example, explain the socio economic impact of EVs in the Indian Scenario
(8 Marks)
b) Why the first generation EVs had a premature death? In your opinion who is behind
this ? .Give the facts to substantiate your answer. (6 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
12 a)

( 7 Marks)

b) What are the basic functions of a Power train ? Illustrate the concept in HEV scenario.
(7 Marks)
Module 2

13 a) Differentiate between SPM and IPM based on Torque characteristics (8 Marks)

b) A vehicle is cruising at 36 kmph, the applied voltage is 25V, the BEMF is 24V and
the winding resistance is 20 mΩ
How much current is the motor drawing?
What is the power delivered to the vehicle?
What is the load torque due to the vehicle, reflected on the motor?
What is the efficiency of the motor?
If the applied voltage were increased by 1V, what will be the final speed of the
vehicle? (6 Marks)

14 a) What are the latest innovations in the design of high efficiency magnets ? Explain
(7 Marks)
b) What are the important losses during electric to mechanical conversion in EVs?
(7 Marks)
Module 3

15) a) Why a gear system is needed in EVs ? Explain with a comparison with its ICE
counterpart (7 Marks )

b) What are the basic function of a motor controller ? Explain its role in the
performance of EV in various terrains (7 Marks)

16) a) Why gear optimization in needed inEVs ? Explain with a practical example.

(8 Marks )

b) An EV has a DC source but works on AC motor. Explain in detail how the conversion
is carried out ? (6 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 4

17 a) How battery selection is done in EVs? Explain by taking an Electric scooter as an

example . (8 Marks)

b) A 3.5 V battery is at 2.7 V at SOC of 0% and 4.3 V at 100%. This implies the voltage
of the battery lies in between 3.5 ± Delta % volts . What is Delta? (6 Marks)

18 a) Explain the design procedure of a BMS for an E-rikshaw right from the requirements

(10 Marks)

b) Explain active thermal managent in bateery pack design. (6 Marks)

Module 5

19 a) Draw the electric diagram showing interconnections between a)ECU b)ABS sensor

c) Air conditioner using CAN protocol in HEV and explain its working (7 Marks)

b) What are the major hurdles faced in HEV integration? Explain by taking an Electric
truck as an example (7 Marks)

20 a) What are the features differ in the design of chassis for a conventional ICE and HEV

(7 Marks)

b) What are the challenges in the hardware /software interfacing in an HEV? Explain
based on an example. (7 Marks)

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to Hybrid Electric Vehicles(HEV): History of hybrid and electric vehicles, social
and environmental importance of hybrid and electric vehicles. Types of EVs, Review of
Vehicle dynamics; Hybrid Electric Drive train. General configuration of Electric hybrid
vehicles. Electric Vehicle (EV) Drive train Alternatives Based on Drive train Configuration.

Module 2

Induction motors and drives, configuration, controls and applications in EV/HEV’s;

Permanent magnet motors-neodymium and ferrite and samarium cobalt types and drives
configuration, Brushless DC Motor (BLDC), Interior Permanent magnet (IPM), Switch
reluctance motors (SRM) W-Axial,3 phase Induction controls and applications in EV/HEV’s

Module 3

Motor Controllers/Inverters, Selection of automotive IGBT and MOSFET’s, Field Oriented

Control (FOC) & Space Vector Pulse Width Modulation (SVPWM) of Motors, Gearbox,
selection of gear ratio, Different kinds of gearboxes, Gearbox optimisation, Transmission,
Different kinds of transmission.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 4

EV charging, Fast charger, DC charger, AC charger, Battery swapping, Different charging

protocols CHAdeMO,CCS2,GB/T, Customised charging protocols, Battery Box Engineering,
Battery Management Bus Bar design, Battery Pack Design, Various Sensors and Sensing
methods, Battery Safety Standards, Thermal Management – Battery

Module 5

Vehicle Validation, System Integration, Controller Area Networking (CAN) and Vector
Tools Simulation, Vehicle Sensors specific to EV sensors interfaced to the ECU’s in the
vehicle network, Hardware & Software Interfaces and Implementation challenges and
examples to solve, Chassis design, Battery Positioning.

Text Books

1. Husain I,” Electric and Hybrid Vehicles”: Design Fundamentals Boca Raton, CRC Press
2003

Reference Books

1. James Larminie, John Lowry, Electric Vehicle Technology Explained, Wiley, 2003. 2.

2.Mehrdad Ehsani, YimiGao, Sebastian E. Gay, Ali Emadi, Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric
and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory and Design, CRC Press, 2004.

3. Iqbal Hussein, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2003.

4. Sandeep Dhameja, “Electric Vehicle Battery Systems”, Newnes, 2000

.http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108103009/

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Module 1 8 Hours
Introduction to Hybrid Electric Vehicles(HEV): History of hybrid
1.1 2
and electric vehicles
social and environmental importance of hybrid and electric
1.2 1
vehicles
1.3 Types of EVs, 1
1.4 Review of Vehicle dynamics; 2
Hybrid Electric Drive train. General configuration of Electric
1.5 1
hybrid vehicles
Electric Vehicle (EV) Drive train Alternatives Based on Drive
1.6 train Configuration. 1

2 Module 2 8 Hours
Induction motors and drives, configuration, controls and
2.1 2
applications in EV/HEV’s
2.2 Permanent magnet motors 1
neodymium and ferrite and samarium cobalt types and drives
2.3 1
configuration
2.4 Brushless DC Motor (BLDC), Interior Permanent magnet (IPM),
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
2.5 Switch reluctance motors (SRM 2
2.6 W-Axial,3 phase Induction controls and applications in EV/HEV’s 1
3 phase Induction controls and applications in EV/HEV’s 1
3 Module 3 7 Hours
Motor Controllers/Inverters, Selection of automotive IGBT and
3.1 2
MOSFET’s
Field Oriented Control (FOC) & Space Vector Pulse Width
3.2 1
Modulation (SVPWM) of Motors
3.3 Gearbox, selection of gear ratio, Different kinds of gearboxes 2
3.4 Gearbox optimisation, Transmission, 1

3.5 Different kinds of transmission 1

4 Module 4 7 Hours
EV charging, Fast charger, DC charger, AC charger, Battery
4.1 1
swapping
Different charging protocols CHAdeMO,CCS2,GB/T, Customised
4.2 2
charging protocols,
4.3 Battery Box Engineering, Battery Management 1
4.4 Bus Bar design, Battery Pack Design 1
4.5 Various Sensors and Sensing methods, 1
4.6 Battery Safety Standards, Thermal Management – Batter 1
5 Module 5 7 Hours
5.1 Vehicle Validation, System Integration 1
5.2 Controller Area Networking (CAN) and Vector Tools Simulation, 1
Vehicle Sensors specific to EV sensors interfaced to the ECU’s in
5.3 2
the vehicle network,
5.4 Hardware & Software Interfaces 1
5.5 and Implementation challenges and examples to solve 1
5.6 Chassis design, Battery Positioning 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET463 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course is designed to facilitate the students to acquire knowledge about
operations management concepts, tools and techniques. This course covers system concept of
production, facility location analysis, facility layout, line balancing, demand forecasting,
aggregate planning, material requirement planning and production scheduling. It empowers
the students to amalgamate their knowledge and thus inculcate the skills needed to apply
these concepts, tools and techniques in industry.
Prerequisite: Nil
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to
CO 1 Understand operations, production system and perform facility location analysis.
CO 2 Impart knowledge of facility layout, layout planning and perform line balancing.
CO 3 Compute demand forecast and forecast accuracy.
CO 4 Perform aggregate planning and materials requirement planning.
CO 5 Apply various algorithms for production scheduling.
Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2

CO 2 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 2

CO 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2

CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 2 2

CO 5 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment
Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 20 20 60
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark Distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course Project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):
1. Demonstrate the concept of operations management.
2. List the type of production system with examples.
3. Determine the location of a facility.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. List different types of facility layouts with examples.
2. Describe layout design procedures.
3. Group the activities for line balancing.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Demonstrate need and uses of demand forecasting.
2. Compute demand forecast.
3. Compare demand forecasts from different methods.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Compare aggregate planning strategies.
2. Demonstrate lot sizing techniques for MRP.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Compute MRP tables.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Illustrate the concept of production scheduling.
2. Identify scheduling objectives might be appropriate for different manufacturing
environments.
3. Find production schedule using various techniques.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET463
Course Name: OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)
1. What are the criteria for make or buy decisions.
2. Explain how you would reengineer a process you find troubling.
3. How does a cellular layout combine a product and process layout?
4. State the basic differences between construction type and improvement type layout
algorithms.
5. Describe the difference between short- and long-range forecasts.
6. What is the difference between a trend and a cycle and a seasonal pattern?
7. Differentiate between level production strategy and chase demand strategy.
8. What are the basic inputs for MRP?
9. Explain the concept of single machine scheduling problem.
10. What is Gantt chart and when are they used so often?
PART B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE, EACH QUESTION
CARRIES 14 MARKS)
MODULE 1
11. What activities are involved in the operations function? How do operations interact with
other functional areas?
12. A development company is attempting to determine the location for a new outlet mall.
The region where the outlet mall will be constructed includes four towns, which together
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

have a sizable population base. The grid map coordinates of the four towns and the
population of each are as follows:

Coordinates Population
Town
x y (10,000s)
1 30 60 6.5
2 50 40 4.2
3 10 70 5.9
4 40 30 3.5
a. Determine the best location for the outlet mall using the centre-of-gravity
method.
b. Plot four towns and the location of the new mall on a grid map.
MODULE 2
13. Describe systematic layout planning. Narrate the steps of CRAFT and ALDEP.
14. Consider the following assembly network relationships of a product. The number of shifts
per day is two and the number of working hours per shift is 8. The company aims to produce
80 units of product per day. Group the activities into workstations using rank positional
weight method and compute balancing efficiency.
Operations
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Number
Immediate 7, 8,
- 1 1 1 2, 3 3, 4 5 5, 6 4, 6
Preceding Tasks 9
Duration (min) 7 2 2 5 8 3 4 7 9 8

MODULE 3
15. What the effect on the exponential smoothing model will increasing the smoothing
constant have? How does adjusted exponential smoothing differ from exponential
smoothing? What determines the choice of the smoothing constant for trend in an adjusted
exponential smoothing model?
16. The following table represents the sales data of milk (in litres) sold by a milk booth.
Month 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sales 90 106 92 114 108 98 99 115
a. Compute a 3-month moving average forecast for months 4 through 9.
b. Computer a weighted 3-month moving average forecast for months 4 through 9.
Assign weights of 0.50, 0.30, and 0.20 to the months in sequence, starting with the
most recent month.
c. Compare the two forecasts using MAD. Which forecast appears to be more
accurate?
MODULE 4
17. Describe the output of aggregate planning. When is aggregate planning most useful?
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using part time workers, subcontracting work,
and building up inventory as strategies for meeting demand.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

18. Given the following Product structure, BOM, MPS and inventory status, compute MRP
tables for all items.

Product Structure

Bill of Materials
Lead Time Inventory on
Part Order Quantity
(Week) Hand
A 350 1 220
B 400 2 250
C 800 1 120
D 850 1 105
E 250 1 250
Master Production Schedule
Month 1 2 3 4 5 6
Deman
200 - - 240 150 220
d
MODULE 5
19. Define the term ‘scheduling’. Explain the different performance measures in scheduling?
Give examples of four types of operations and suggest which scheduling objectives might be
appropriate for each.
20. Consider the following n jobs parallel identical machines problem
Job - j 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
tj 5 21 16 6 25 19 20 10 6
wj 3 2 4 2 4 3 1 2 1
Find the schedule which will minimize the weighted mean flow time, if the number of
parallel identical machines is three.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1
Introduction to operations management: operations function, operations strategy, system
concept of production, types of production system – job shop production – batch production –
mass production, process planning, make or buy decisions, process reengineering.
Facilities location: Facility location factors, location analysis techniques – location factor
rating – center of gravity technique – load distance technique. (7 hours)
Module 2
Capacities and facilities: capacity planning, facility layout – objectives, types of layout –
process layout – product layout – fixed position layout – cellular layout, systematic layout
planning, layout design procedures – CRAFT – CORELAP – ALDEP.
Assembly line balancing: methods for line balancing – rank positional weight method –
COMSOAL. (7 hours)
Module 3
Demand forecasting: need and uses of forecasting, components of forecasting demand, time
series methods – moving average – weighted moving average – exponential smoothing –
adjusted exponential smoothing – linear regression – seasonal adjustments, forecast accuracy.
(7 hours)
Module 4
Aggregate planning: aggregate planning strategies – heuristic method for aggregate planning.
Materials requirement planning: objectives, master production schedule, bill of materials,
MRP calculations, lot sizing in MRP – economic order quantity method for lot sizing –
minimum cost per period method – periodic order quantity method – least unit cost method,
evolution from MRP to manufacturing resource planning (MRP II). (7 hours)
Module 5
Introduction to production scheduling: objectives – processing characteristics and constraints
– performance measures, Gantt chart, single machine scheduling – SPT rule to minimize
mean flow time – EDD rule to maximum lateness, parallel processors – minimization of
makespan – mean weighted flow time – McNaughton’s algorithm, flow shop scheduling –
extension of Johnson’s rule for 3 machine problem – Palmer’s heuristic. (7 hours)

Text Books
1. Roberta S. Russell and Bernard W. Taylor III, Operations Management, John Wiley
& Sons, Inc., Seventh Edition, 2011.
2. R. Paneerselvam, Production and Operations Management, PHI, 2010
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books
1. P. B. Mahapatra, Operations Management: A Quantitative Approach, PHI, 2010
2. G. Sreenivasan, Quantitative Models in Operations and Supply Chain Management,
PHI.
3. Heizer and Render, Operations Management, Pearson Education, Eleventh Edition
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Module 1
1.1 Introduction to operations management: operations function,
operations strategy, system concept of production, types of
3
production system – job shop production – batch production –
mass production.
1.2 Process planning, make or buy decisions, process reengineering. 2
1.3 Facilities location: Facility location factors, location analysis
techniques – location factor rating – center of gravity technique – 2
load distance technique.
2 Module 2
2.1 Capacities and facilities: capacity planning, facility layout –
objectives, types of layout – process layout – product layout – 2
fixed position layout – cellular layout.
2.2 Systematic layout planning, layout design procedures – CRAFT –
3
CORELAP – ALDEP.
2.3 Assembly line balancing: methods for line balancing – rank
2
positional weight method – COMSOAL.
3 Module 3
3.1 Demand forecasting: need and uses of forecasting, components of
2
forecasting demand.
3.2 Time series methods – moving average – weighted moving
average – exponential smoothing – adjusted exponential 3
smoothing.
3.3 Linear regression – seasonal adjustments, forecast accuracy. 2
4 Module 4
4.1 Aggregate planning: aggregate planning strategies – heuristic
3
method for aggregate planning.
4.2 Materials requirement planning: objectives, master production
schedule, bill of materials, MRP calculations, lot sizing in MRP –
economic order quantity method for lot sizing – minimum cost per 3
period method – periodic order quantity method – least unit cost
method.
4.3 Evolution from MRP to manufacturing resource planning (MRP
1
II).
5 Module 5
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

5.1 Introduction to production scheduling: objectives – processing

characteristics and constraints – performance measures, Gantt 2
chart.
5.2 Single machine scheduling – SPT rule to minimize mean flow
time – EDD rule to maximum lateness, parallel processors –
3
minimization of makespan – mean weighted flow time –
McNaughton’s algorithm.
5.3 Flow shop scheduling – extension of Johnson’s rule for 3 machine
2
problem – Palmer’s heuristic.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

AIR CONDITIONING AND
MET473 PEC 2 1 0 3
REFRIGERATION

Preamble: The objectives of the course are:

 To introduce refrigeration and air conditioning systems.

 To impart knowledge in basics of vapour compression system and methods to
improve efficiency.
 To understand working principle of vapour absorption refrigeration and steam jet
refrigeration.
 To familiarize the components of refrigeration systems and to select environment
friendly refrigerants
 To determine the capacity requirement of ac machine for an application.

Pre-requisite:MET 202 Engineering Thermodynamics.

Course Outcomes:After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the basics of refrigeration process.

Analyse the vapour compression refrigeration system and to improve the
CO 2
performance.
CO 3 Describe vapour absorption and steam refrigeration system.
Design refrigeration system by selecting suitable components and environmentally
CO 4
refrigerant.
CO 5 Evaluate the cooling load and capacity requirement of ac machine

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 1 1

CO 2 3 2 2 1

CO 3 3 2 2 1

CO 4 3 1 2 3 1

CO 5 3 2 2 1 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester

Assignment Test 1 (%) Test 2 (%) Examination
(%)
Remember 25 20 20 10
Understand 25 40 40 20
Apply 25 40 40 70
Analyse 25
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Define COP of a refrigeration machine and heat pump?

2. What is a boot strap refrigeration system?
3. Why aircrafts prefer air refrigeration system?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain Vapour refrigeration system with the help of pressure- enthalpy diagram?

2. Explain flash inter-cooling method of improving efficiency of vapour compression

system?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Explain cascade system with the help of neat diagram?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Describe steam jet refrigeration system with the help of neat diagram?

2. Explain Lithium Bromide water absorption system. What are the advantages over
ammonia absorption system?

3. Compare vapour absorption system with vapour compression system?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain ODP and GWP of a refrigerant?

2. Explain scroll compressor with the help of neat sketch?

3. Explain the working principle and use of cooling tower with the help of a neat
sketch?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. An Auditorium has seating capacity 800 people is to be maintained at 23°C

DBTand50% RH. The outdoor conditions are 40°C DBT and 27°C WBT. The
various loads in the office are: Solar heat gain 10KW, sensible heat gain per
occupant 80W, Latent heat per occupant 70W, Lighting load 5KW, Sensible heating
load from other sources 12KW, Infiltration load 0.3m3/sec. Outdoor air and return
air is mixed in the ratio of 1: 6 ,before cooling coil (processing unit) and then
supplied to room. The supply temperature cannot be lower than 120C .find capacity
of the plant required, mass flow rate of air?

2. What is ESR, ISEER, GSHF and RSHF? Explain?

3. Explain different psychrometric process and represent it in a psychrometric chart?

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

MET 473- AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION.

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks

1. Define COP of a refrigeration machine and heat pump?

2. Why aircrafts prefer air refrigeration system?

3. Explain Vapour refrigeration system with the help of pressure- enthalpy diagram?

4. Write sub cooling of condenser out let method improving COP of vapour compression
system with the help of p-h diagram.

5. Compare vapour absorption system with vapour compression system?

6. Compare steam jet refrigeration system with vapour compression system?

7. Explain ODP and GWP of a refrigerant?

8. Explain the method of detection of leakage of refrigerant?

9. What are ESR, ISEER, GSHF and RSHF?

10. What is IPLV of an air conditioner? (10 X 3 = 30 Marks)

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a.Explain the application of refrigeration? 4 marks

b. A boot strap air refrigeration system is used for a flight to takes 20 TONS of cooling loads.
The ambient conditions are air conditions are 5 0C and 0.85 Bar. The air pressure increases
to 1.1 bars due to ramming action, which is considered to be ideal. The output pressure of
the main air compressor is 3.5 Bar and this is further compressed in the secondary
compressor to 4.5 Bar. The isentropic efficiency of both main and secondary compressors is
90% and that of cooling turbine is 80%. Heat exchanger effectiveness is 0.6, for both
primary and secondary heat exchangers.Determine: Power required taking the cabin load;
COP of the system, the turbine runs the secondary compressor and uses its surplus power to
run the fan for blowing ram air, Cabin to be maintained at pressure as 1 Bar, 250 C?

10 marks
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

12. a. What are the limitations of Carnot refrigeration cycle? 4 marks

b. In an aero plane uses air-refrigeration system, the air at 5 bars and 200°C is bled-off
from the main compressor and is cooled in a heat exchanger with the use of ram air. The
pressure and temperature of the air leaving the heat exchanger are 4.5 bar and 40°C. The
ram air is forced through the heat exchanger by a fan run by expander turbine. The air
coming out from the heat exchanger is passed through an expander and then supplied to
the cabin at I bar, the pressure loss between the expander and cabin is 0.2 bars. If the air
flow rate through the expander turbine is 30 kg/mm. find the followings- The temperature
of the air leaving the expander, The kW delivered to the ram air which is passed through
the heat exchanger, The refrigeration capacity in tons of refrigeration if the cold air
coming out from the expander turbine is tempered by mixing with bypassed warm air and
delivered to the cabin. The temperature of the air leaving the cabin is limited to 25° C.
Assume the followings:
Isentropic efficiency of the expander turbine = 75%.
γ (for air) = 1.4, Cp (for air) = 1KJ/kg-K
Neglect heat losses. 10 marks

MODULE II

13. a. A refrigerating machine using F12 as working fluid works between the temperatures
18°C and 37°C. The enthalpy of liquid at 37°C is 72 KJ/kg. The enthalpies of F12
entering and leaving the compressor are 195 KJ/kg and 227 KJ/kg respectively. The rate
of circulation of refrigerant is 2 kg/min and efficiency of compressor is 85% Determine;
Capacity of the plant in TONS of refrigeration. Power required running the plant, COP of
the plant? 7 marks

b. Explain Sub cooling by liquid vapour regenerative heat exchanger method of

improving COP of vapour compression system with the help of necessary sketch? .
7 marks

14. a. A simple vapour compression cycle using Freon 22 is designed for a load of 100 TR.
The suction condition of the refrigerant is saturated vapour at 5°C and discharge
condition is super heated at 40°C. Calculate (a) The mass flow rate of refrigerant; (b) The
COP.? 7 marks

b. Explain the Multi stage compression (with flash inter cooling) method of improving
COP with the help of line diagram and P- h diagram? 7 marks

MODULE III

15.a. Electrolux vapours absorption system of refrigeration with the help of line diagram?
7 marks

b. explains Steam jet refrigeration system with the help of line diagram what are the
applications, relative merits and demerits? 7 marks
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

16. a. Explain Lithium Bromide water system. What are the merits and demerits of the
system? 8 marks

b. Compare water absorption system and vapour compression system? What are the
relative merits and demerits? 6 marks

MODULE IV

17. a. Explain different types of refrigerants available and their relative merits and demerits?
7 marks

b. Explain the working of Scroll compressor with the help of neat sketch? 7 marks

18.a. Explain reciprocating compressor with the help of neat diagram? What are the relative
merits and demerits? 7 marks

b. Explain working of a cooling tower with the help of a neat sketch. What are the
applications of cooling tower? 7 marks

MODULE V

19a. An Auditorium has seating capacity 800 people is to be maintained at 23°C DBTand50%
RH. The outdoor conditions are 40°C DBT and 27°C WBT. The various loads in the office
are: Solar heat gain 10KW, sensible heat gain per occupant 80W, Latent heat per
occupant 70W, Lighting load 5KW, Sensible heating load from other sources 12KW,
Infiltration load 0.3m3/sec. Outdoor air and return air is mixed in the ratio of 1: 6 ,before
cooling coil (processing unit) and then supplied to room. The supply temperature cannot
be lower than 120C .find capacity of the plant required, mass flow rate of air 12 marks

b. Define absolute humidity and relative humidity? 2 marks

20 a. An office for seating 30 occupants is to be maintained at 22°C DBTand55% RH. The

outdoor conditions are 36°C DBT and 27°C WBT. The various loads In the office are:
Solar heat gain 8500W, Sensible heat gain per occupant 83W, Latent heat gain per
occupant 100W, Lighting load 2500W,Sensible heat load from other sources 12000W,
infiltration load 15 cubic meter/minute .Assuming 40% fresh air and 60% of re-circulated
air passing through the evaporator coil and ADP of the coil is 8 0C. Find capacity of the
plant and mass flow rate of air? 12 marks

b. What is dew point temperature and represent it in the psychrometric chart? 2 marks
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1- Introduction to refrigeration

Introduction –applications of refrigeration. Thermodynamics of refrigeration- reversed Carnot

cycle, Limitations, heat pump, COP, Unit of refrigeration- Air refrigeration systems-
Reversed Joule cycle, Air craft refrigeration systems, comparison, Boot strap system.
Numerical examples.

Module 2 Vapour compression refrigeration.

Vapour compression systems- representation on T- s and P- h Diagrams. COP- Effect of
operating parameters on COP – methods of improving COP of simple cycle- super- heating ,
under cooling, Liquid suction heat exchanger, actual cycle.Multi pressure systems - multi
compression and multi evaporator, systems, Inter cooling - flash inter cooling and flash gas
removal- numerical examples,
Cryogenic temperature system, Cascade system.

Module 3 Vapour absorption and steam jet refrigeration.

Vapour absorption systems - Ammonia – water system - simple system- drawbacks-Lithium

Bromide water system- Electrolux- comparison with vapour compression system. Steam jet
refrigeration. Applications, relative merits and demerits.

Module 4 Refrigeration system components

Refrigeration system components- Compressors, condensers, expansion devices, evaporators.

Cooling towers- Different types and their application fields- Refrigerant leakage and
detection – charging of refrigerant.
Refrigerants and their properties, CFC, HCFC, HFC, HC refrigerants -Eco-friendly
Refrigerants, ODP, GWP, selection of refrigerants for different applications

Module 5 Air conditioning.

Psychrometric, Psychrometric properties- dry, wet and dew point temperature – humidity,
specific humidity, absolute humidity, relative humidity and degree of saturation- enthalpy of
moisture- adiabatic saturation process -psychrometers. psychometric chart- Psychometric
processes- adiabatic mixing- sensible heating and cooling- humidifying and dehumidifying,
air washer – bypass factor- sensible heat factor-RSHF and GSHF line- Design condition-
Apparent dew point temperature – Numerical examples.
Air conditioning- applications, Comfort air conditioning- factors affecting human comfort.
Effective temperature – comfort chart. Unitary and central system comparison. Capacity
determination-cooling load estimation. COP, EER, IEER, IPLV, star rating, specification of
capacity TONs, HP, Numerical examples.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Arora C.P, Tata McGraw hill.

2. A Course in Refrigeration and air conditioning Arora S. C. and S. Domkundwar, Dhanpat

Rai and Company. 2002

3. A text book of Refrigeration and air conditioning – R.K .Regiput, Katson books.

4. Refrigeration and air conditioning - Ahamadul Ameen Eastern economy addition.

5. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: Analysis and Design, Faye C.

Mcquiston, Jerald D. Parker, Jeffrey D. Spitler, John Wiley and sons. New York

Data books

1. Refrigeration tables and charts including air conditioning data, C P Kothandaraman , New
Age International.

2. Refrigeration and air conditioning data book, Domkunduwar and Domkundwar, Dhanpat
Rai & co.

Reference books

1. ASHRAE Handbook 201(Volume 1,2,3)

2. Principles of heating ventilation and air conditioning in building, john Dixon, Delmar
learning

3. Analysis and design of heating ventilation and air conditioning system, Herbert W
stanferd and Adam F spach, CRC press -Taylor and Francis.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

HOURS
MODULE TOPICS
ALLOTED

Introduction –applications of refrigeration. 2-0-0

Thermodynamics of refrigeration- reversed Carnot cycle,

Limitations, heat pump, COP ,Unit of refrigeration- Air
2-1-0
refrigeration systems- Reversed Joule cycle, Air craft
1 refrigeration systems, comparison.

Boot strap system. Numerical examples 2-1-0

Vapour compression systems- representation on T- s and P- h 2-1-0

Diagrams. COP- Effect of operating parameters on COP
methods of improving COP of simple cycle- super- heating ,
2 under cooling, Liquid suction heat exchanger, actual cycle.Multi 2-1-0
pressure systems - multi compression and multi evaporator,
systems, Inter cooling - flash inter cooling and flash gas removal-
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

numerical examples .

Cryogenic temperature system, Cascade system. 2-0-0

Vapour absorption systems - Steam jet refrigeration. Applications,

relative merits and demerits - simple system- drawbacks-Lithium 3-1-0
Bromide water system.

Electrolux- comparison with vapour compression system. 1-0-0

3
Steam jet refrigeration. Applications, relative merits and demerits 1-0-0

Refrigeration system components- Compressors, condensers, 2-1-0

expansion devices, evaporators.
Cooling towers- Different types and their application fields- 2-0-0
Refrigerant leakage and detection – charging of refrigerant.
Refrigerants and their properties, CFC, HCFC, HFC, HC
refrigerants -Eco-friendly Refrigerants, ODP, GWP, selection of 2-0-0
4
refrigerants for different applications.

Psychrometric, Psychrometric properties- dry, wet and dew point

temperature – humidity, specific humidity, absolute humidity,
relative humidity and degree of saturation- enthalpy of moisture-
adiabatic saturation process -psychrometers. psychometric chart-
Psychometric processes- adiabatic mixing- sensible heating and 3-1-0
cooling- humidifying and dehumidifying, air washer – bypass
factor- sensible heat factor-RSHF and GSHF line- Design
condition- Apparent dew point temperature – Numerical
5 examples.
Air conditioning- applications, Comfort air conditioning- factors
affecting human comfort. Effective temperature – comfort chart.
Unitary and central system comparison. Capacity determination- 3-1-0
cooling load estimation. COP, EER, IEER, IPLV, star rating,
specification of capacity TONs, HP, Numerical examples.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VII
OPEN ELECTIVE
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS
MET415 OEC 2 1 0 3
ANALYTICS

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of information systems, statistics, and business environment

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Understand the fundamentals of business intelligence, analytics, and data science.

CO 2 Use real life data for effective decision making using statistical models.
Understand the basic concepts of data warehousing and use of data mining techniques
CO 3
for business analytics.
CO 4 Describe text analytics and understand the need for text mining.
CO 5 Understand the essence of business performance management and business reporting.
Explore emerging technologies, legal and ethical issues that may impact analytics and
CO 6
business intelligence.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 2 2 1 3 2 - - - - - - -
CO 3 - 2 3 1 3 - - - - - - -
CO 4 - - 2 2 2 1 - - - - - -
CO 5 - - - 2 - 2 - - 1 3 2
CO 6 - - - - - 1 - 2 - - - 1

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment
Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 20 20 20
Understand 20 20 50
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse - - 10
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

CO 1 Understand the fundamentals of business intelligence, analytics and data science

1. Differentiate between predictive analytics and prescriptive analytics.
2. What is online transaction processing system?
3. List and describe the major components of Business Intelligence.

CO 2 Use real life data for effective decision making using statistical models
1. What are the various measures of dispersion?
2. Write a short note on time series forecasting.
3. What is data pre-processing? Why is it required?

CO 3 Understand the basic concepts of data warehousing and use of data mining
techniques for business analytics
1. What is a data warehouse?
2. Identify five specific applications of data mining and a few common
characteristics.
3. List five software tools used for data mining applications.

CO 4 Describe text analytics and understand the need for text mining
1. Why is the popularity of text mining as an analytics tool increasing?
2. Explain the importance of text mining in academia.
3. What is web mining? List the applications of web mining
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CO 5 Understand the essence of business performance management and business

reporting
1. What are the various functions an effective business report fulfils?
2. What is a performance measurement system? How does it work?
3. Explain the role of business analytics in human resource management.

CO 6 Explore emerging technologies, legal and ethical issues that may impact analytics
and business intelligence.
1. How does cloud computing affect Business Intelligence?
2. How does traditional analytics make use of location-based data?
3. List a few legal issues of analytics.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET415: INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ANALYTICS
Time: 3hours
Maximum marks: 100

PART-A (Answer all Questions)

1 Define Business Intelligence. How will you relate it with Business
Analytics?
2 What do you understand by the term Big Data?
3 What are the measures of central tendency?
4 Under what circumstances the use of inter-quartile range becomes
essential?
5 How does a data warehouse differ from a transactional database?
6 Distinguish between text mining and web mining?
7 What are the distinguishing features of Key Performance Indicators?
8 What are the three components of a Business Performance System?
9 There are serious privacy concerns in analytics. Comment.
10 Name at least three major cloud service providers. (3x10=30)

PART-B
11 Detail at least seven key system-oriented trends that have fostered the growth of 14
Business Intelligence based decision making.
OR
12 Explain the various levels of analytics 14

13 a What are the characteristics that define the readiness level of data for an analytic 9
study?
b Differentiate between structured and unstructured data. 5
OR
14 What is logistic regression? With a suitable example, explain the steps involved. 14

15 a What are the important steps in data mining? 9

What are data lakes? Compare it with a data warehouse. 5
OR
16 a Write a short note on sentiment analysis 6
b What is social media analytics? Explain its significance in business. 8

17 a What are the main differences among line, bar and pi charts? When should you 7
use one over the others?
b What is an information dashboards? Why are they so popular? 7
OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

18 List and briefly describe the four phases of Business Performance Management 1
Cycle 4

19 What are the major issues managers have to keep in mind while exploring IoT? 7
What are the potential benefits of using geo-spatial data for analytics? Give 7
examples.
OR
20 List a few ethical issues in analytics. 7
Describe new organisational units that are created because of analytics 7
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Introduction to Business Intelligence- Definition, Need, and Evolution of

Business Intelligence System and its components.
Module Introduction to Business Analytics- Definition- Levels of Analytics –
1 Descriptive, Predictive and Prescriptive Analytics- Application of business
(6 Hours) analytics in industries- case studies.
Transaction Processing and Analytic Processing- Fundamentals of OLAP and
OLTP
Introduction to Big Data Analytics- Characteristics- Sources of Big Data.
Data- Definition- Sources of Data- Readiness Level of Data for Analytic study-
Unstructured and structured data- classification of data- Data pre-processing-
Module Steps in data pre-processing.
2 Statistical Modelling for Business Analytics- Descriptive Statistics- Measures
(10 Hours) of Central Tendency and Dispersion- Quartiles and inter-quartile range.
Regression Modelling for Inferential Statistics- Linear Regression, Logistic
Regression and Time Series Forecasting.
Data Warehousing: Characteristics- Design Considerations for data warehouse-
Data warehousing process- Data Lakes.
Module
Data Mining: Concepts - Data mining process- Applications- Software Tools.
3
Text and Web Analytics: Text analytics and text mining overview - Text
(8 Hours)
mining applications - Sentiment Analysis- Web mining overview-
Fundamentals of Social media analytics
Business Reporting- Concepts- Different types of charts and graphs- Data
Visualisation and Visual Analytics
Module
Business Performance Management: Business performance management cycle-
4
Performance Measurement System- Key Performance Indicators
(6 Hours)
Analytics in Business Support Functions- Sales & Marketing, Human
Resources, Financial Analytics, Production and operations analytics
Recent Trends, Privacy and Managerial Considerations in Analytics: Use of
Module
Internet of Things for Business Analytics - Cloud Computing and Business
5
Analytics- Location Based Analytics for Organisations - Issues of Legality,
(5 Hours)
Privacy and Ethics- Impacts of Analytics in Organisations

Text Book
1.R. Sharda, D. Delen, and E. Turban, “Business Intelligence, Analytics, and Data Science: A
Managerial Perspective”, Pearson, 4th edition, 2018.

Reference Books
1.R. N. Prasad and S. Acharya, “Fundamentals of Business Analytics”, Wiley, 2nd Edition,
2016
2.J. R. Evans, “Business Analytics”, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2019.
3. A. Maheshwari, “Data Analytics”, McGraw Hill Education, 1st Edition, 2017
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4. Business Analytics for Managers: Taking Business Intelligence Beyond Reporting, 2nd
Edition, Wiley, 2016

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic Hours
Module 1 (6 Hours)
1.1 Introduction to Business Intelligence- Definition, Need, and Evolution of
1
Business Intelligence System and its components
1.2 Introduction to Business Analytics- Definition- Levels of Analytics 1
1.3 Descriptive, Predictive and Prescriptive Analytics 1
1.4 Application of business analytics in industries- case studies 1
1.5 Transaction Processing and Analytic Processing- Fundamentals of OLAP and
1
OLTP
1.6 Introduction to Big Data Analytics- Characteristics- Sources of Big Data 1
Module II (10 Hours)
2.1 Data- Definition- Sources of Data- Readiness Level- Unstructured and structured
1
data
2.2 Classification of data- Data Pre-processing- Steps in data pre-processing 1
2.3 Statistical Modelling for Business Analytics- Descriptive Statistics- Measures of
2
Central Tendency and Dispersion
2.4 Quartiles and inter-quartile range. 1
2.5 Regression Modelling for Inferential Statistics- Linear Regression. 2
2.6 Logistic Regression 2
2.7 Time Series Forecasting 1
Module III (8 Hours)
3.1 Data Warehousing: Characteristics- Design Considerations for data warehouse-
2
Data warehousing process- Data Lakes
3.2 Data Mining: Concepts - Data mining process 1
3.3 Applications of Data Mining 1
3.4 Software Tools 1
3.5 Text & Web Analytics: Text analytics and text mining overview 1
3.6 Text mining applications- Sentiment Analysis 1
3.7 Web mining overview- Fundamentals of Social media analytics 1
Module IV (6 Hours)
4.1 Business Reporting- Concepts- Different types of charts and graphs- 1
4.2 Data Visualisation and Visual Analytics 1
4.3 Business Performance Management: Business performance management cycle- 1
4.4 Performance Measurement System- Key Performance Indicators 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4.5 Analytics in Business Support Functions- Sales & Marketing, Human Resources,
2
Financial Analytics, Production and operations analytics
Module V (5 Hours)
5.1 Use of Internet of Things for Business Analytics - Cloud Computing and
2
Business Analytics
5.2 Location Based Analytics for Organisations 1
5.3 Issues of Legality, Privacy and Ethics 1
5.4 Impacts of Analytics in Organisations 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES
MET425 OEC 2 1 0 3
FOR ENGINEERS

Preamble: This course is designed to facilitate the students to acquire knowledge about
quantitative techniques for engineers. This course covers linear programming, transportation
problem, assignment problem, sequencing problem, network analysis, decision theory, game
theory, queuing theory and simulation. It empowers the students to amalgamate their
knowledge and thus inculcate the skills needed to apply these techniques in industry.
Prerequisite: Nil
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to
CO 1 Solve problems using linear programming methods.
CO 2 Solve transportation problems and assignment problems.
CO 3 Solve sequencing problems and perform network analysis.
CO 4 Apply decision theory and game theory.
CO 5 Apply queuing theory and perform simulation for queuing problems.

Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO 2 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 2
CO 4 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO 5 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 2

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment
Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 30 30 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark Distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course Project : 15 marks
End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.
Course Level Assessment Questions
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):
1. Demonstrate the applications of quantitative techniques.
2. Formulate mathematical model for the given problem.
3. Apply linear programming methods to get the optimum solution.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Identify the applications of transportation problems and assignment problems.
2. Solve transportation problem to get the initial feasible solution or optimum solution.
3. Solve assignment problem in order to minimize the total cost.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Demonstrate assumptions of sequencing problems.
2. Determine the optimal sequence of operations.
3. Construct project network diagram and perform network analysis.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Compare various decision making conditions.
2. Determine the optimal decision based on the given criterion.
3. Determine the optimal strategies and value of the game.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Illustrate the concept of simulation.
2. Demonstrate Monte Carlo simulation for a queuing system.
3. Determine the parameters of the queuing system.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET425
Course Name: QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR ENGINEERS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3
Hours
PART A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)
1. Discuss the applications of quantitative techniques.
2. Explain alternate optimum solution, unbounded solution and infeasible solution.
3. What are the applications of transportation problem?
4. Explain the similarity between transportation problem and assignment problem.
5. What are the assumptions in sequencing problem?
6. What is crashing of project network?
7. Differentiate between decision under certainty and decision under risk.
8. Explain players, strategy and saddle point of game theory.
9. Define simulation and its advantages.
10. Discuss the steps of Monte Carlo simulation.
PART B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE, EACH QUESTION
CARRIES 14 MARKS)
MODULE 1
11. Solve the following LP problem using simplex method.
Maximize Z = 3X1 + 5X2
Subject to
X1 + X2 ≤ 4
3X1 + 2X2 ≤ 18
X1 and X2 ≥ 0
12. A company produces 2 types of hats A and B. Every hat A requires twice as much labour
time as the second hat B. If the company produces only hat B then it can produce a total of
500 hats per day. The market limits daily sales of hat A and B to 150 and 250 respectively.
The profit on hat A and B are Rs. 8 and Rs. 5 respectively. Solve graphically to get the
optimum solution.

MODULE 2

13. Obtain the initial basic feasible solution for the following transportation problem using (a)
North west corner rule (b) Least cost cell method (c) Vogel’s approximation method
Warehouses
X Y Z Supply
Plants
A 8 7 3 60
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

B 3 8 9 70
C 11 3 5 80
Demand 50 80 80
State which of the methods is better
14. Solve the following assignment problem in order to minimize the total cost. The costs of
doing different jobs by different operators are given below.
Operator
Job 1 2 3 4 5
1 5 6 8 6 4
2 4 8 7 7 5
3 7 7 4 5 4
4 6 5 6 7 5
5 4 7 8 6 8
MODULE 3
15. Find an optimal sequence for processing five jobs through four machines in the order A-
B-C-D-E. Find the total minimum elapsed time if no passing of jobs is permitted. Also find
idle time on each machine.
Machines
Jobs
A B C D E
1 9 7 5 4 11
2 8 8 6 7 12
3 7 6 7 8 10
4 10 5 5 4 8

16. Consider the data of a project summarized in the following table.

Immediate Duration (weeks)
Activity
Predecessor(s) a m b
A - 3 5 8
B - 6 7 9
C A 4 5 9
D B 3 5 8
E A 4 6 9
F C, D 5 8 11
G C, D. E 3 6 9
H F 1 2 9
a. Construct the project network
b. Find the expected duration and variance of each activity
c. Find the critical path and expected project completion time.
d. What is the probability of completing the project on or before 35 weeks?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE 4
17. Consider the following cost matrix and determine the best order size using the minimax
criterion.

Demand (Dj)

50 100 150 200 250

Order Size 75 950 1200 575 -675 -1425

(Qi) 150 50 1700 2000 2250 1600
225 -850 850 2550 3550 4525
300 -1800 600 1800 2000 5000
Also obtain best order size based on the Hurwicz criterion (α = 0.5).
18. Solve the following pay-off matrix. Also determine the optimal strategies and value of the
game.

1 2

1 10 8
B
2 6 12

MODULE 5
19. A weighting station has single weighing bridge. The arrival rate of the vehicles coming to
the weighting station follows Poisson distribution and it is 45 vehicles per hour. The service
rate also follows Poisson distribution and it is 55 vehicles per hour. In front of the weighing
bridge, the waiting space is sufficient for a maximum of 10 vehicles. Find the following;
a. Average waiting number of vehicles in the queue in front of the weighing bridge as
well as in the weighing station.
b. Average waiting time per vehicle in front of the weighing bridge as well as in the
weighing station.
20. The arrival rate of customers at a banking counter follows Poisson distribution with a
mean of 30 per hour. The service rate of the counter clerk also follows Poisson distribution
with a mean of 45 per hour.
a. What is the probability of having 0 customer in the system?
b. What is the probability of having 12 customers in the system?
c. Find Ls, Lq, Ws and Wq.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1
Introduction to quantitative techniques – basics of operations research – applications. Linear
programming – problem formulation – graphical method – simplex method – big-m method –
two–phase method – duality in linear programming. (7 hours)
Module 2
Transportation problem – formulation – balanced & unbalanced transportation problems –
north west corner rule – least cost method – Vogel’s approximation method – stepping stone
method. Assignment problem – formulation – optimal solution – Hungarian algorithm –
variants of assignment problems. (7 hours)
Module 3
Sequencing problem – terminology and notations – assumptions – problems with n jobs
through two machines – problems with n jobs through three machines – problems with n jobs
through m machines. Network analysis – basic terms – network construction – time analysis
– critical path method (CPM) – programme evaluation and review technique (PERT) – cost
considerations in network analysis – crashing. (7 hours)
Module 4
Decision theory – steps in decision theory approach – decision making conditions – decisions
under conditions of risk – decisions under uncertainty conditions – decision tree analysis.
Game theory – games with saddle points – games without saddle points – 2 x 2 games –
graphical method for m x 2 & 2 x n games. (7 hours)
Module 5
Introduction to queuing theory – terminologies – classification of queuing models – single
server problems – multi server problems. Simulation – generation of random numbers –
Monte Carlo simulation – queuing simulation model. (7 hours)
Text Books
1. Paneerselvam, R., Operations Research, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Taha, H. A., Operations Research: An Introduction, Pearson, 2013.
Reference Books
1. Miller, D. M. and Schmidt, J. W., Industrial Engineering and Operations Research,
John Wiley & Sons, Signapore, 1990.
2. Goel, B. S. and Mittal, S. K., Operations Research, Pragati Prakashan, Meerut, 1999.
3. Banks, J., Carson, J. S., Nelson, B. L., and Nicol, D. M., Discrete-Event System
Simulation, Third Edition, Pearson Education, Inc., 2001.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Module 1
Introduction to quantitative techniques – basics of operations
1.1 1
research – applications.
1.2 Linear programming – problem formulation – graphical method. 2
simplex method – big-m method – two–phase method – duality in
1.3 4
linear programming.
2 Module 2
Transportation problem – formulation – balanced & unbalanced
2.1 transportation problems – north west corner rule – least cost 2
method
2.2 Vogel’s method – stepping stone method. 2
Assignment problem – formulation – optimal solution – Hungarian
2.3 3
algorithm – variants of assignment problems.
3 Module 3
Sequencing problem – terminology and notations – assumptions –
problems with n jobs through two machines – problems with n
3.1 2
jobs through three machines – problems with n jobs through m
machines.
Network analysis – basic terms – network construction – time
3.2 2
analysis – critical path method (CPM).
Programme evaluation and review technique (PERT) – cost
3.3 3
considerations in network analysis – crashing.
4 Module 4
Decision theory – steps in decision theory approach – decision
4.1 2
making conditions – decisions under conditions of risk.
4.2 Decisions under uncertainty conditions – decision tree analysis. 2
Game theory – games with saddle points – games without saddle
4.3 3
points – 2 x 2 games – graphical method for m x 2 & 2 x n games.
5 Module 5
Introduction to queuing theory – terminologies – classification of
5.1 3
queuing models – single server problems.
5.2 Multi server problems. 3
Simulation – generation of random numbers – Monte Carlo
5.3 2
simulation – queuing simulation model.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET435 AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY OEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The objective of this course is

 To know the anatomy of automobile in general
 To understand the working of different automotive systems and subsystems
 To update the latest developments in automobiles

Prerequisite: EST 120 Basics of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain different automotive systems and subsystems .

Illustrate the working of transmission, suspension, steering and braking systems of an
CO 2
automobile.
CO 3 Summarize the basic technology in electric vehicles.
CO 4 Explain the various safety, security and comfort systems in automotive technology.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO 10 PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12
CO  
1
CO  
2
CO  
3
CO  
4

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 50 50 100
Apply
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.
Course Level Assessment Questions
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):
1. Explain the injection system in an SI engine.
2. Differentiate between MPFI and CRDI.
3. Describe an automobile engine layout and its components.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain Ackermann steering mechanism with a neat sketch.
2. Explain in detail the working and function of ABS braking system.
3. Describe the need of clutch and gearbox in an automobile?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. What is the difference between an electric vehicle and a hybrid vehicle?
2. List out the differences in the chassis design of an electric vehicle comparing with the
conventional chassis.
3. Explain the basic operation of a fuel cell.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the various safety features employed in automotive technology?

2. Explain the air conditioning system in an automobile.

3. Describe the functions of electro-mechanical and electronic immobilizers in the

security of an automobile?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A (30 marks)

Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks.

1. Explain turbocharger lag and the methods to reduce it.

2. Identify the difference between SI .and CI engine.

3. Describe automated manual transmission.

4. Explain the principle of dry friction clutch.

5. Compare between drum and disc brakes.

6. Summarize the features of hydro pneumatic suspension system .

7. Indicate the advantage of EV over conventional IC engines.

8. Explain Ackermann principle in steering mechanism system.

9. Explain the working of remote keyless entry in a vehicle.

10. Describe the child lock safety system.

PART B (70 marks)

Answer any one question from each module, each carries 14 marks.

Module 1

11. a) Distinguish between MPFI and CRDI systems. (6)

b) Explain the working and advantages of turbocharger with a neat sketch (8)

12. Explain the fuel supply system, injection system and ignition system in an SI (14)
engine.

Module 2

13. a) Discuss the working of Pull type diaphragm clutch with a neat sketch. ( 8)

b) Cite the principle of operation of an electromagnetic clutch . (6)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

14. a) Explain the need of a gear box and the common troubles encountered in gear (8)
boxes along with suitable remedies .

b) Describe the working of an epicyclic gear box. (6)

Module 3

15. a) Represent the features of McPherson strut suspension system with a neat (8)
sketch.

b) Explain the function of an antiroll bar in a four wheeled vehicle . (6)

16. a) Discuss the working and advantages of ABS over conventional systems. (8)

b) Explain the properties of friction lining and pad materials (6)

Module 4

17. a) Differentiate between over steering and under steering. (8)

b) Illustrate the rack and pinion steering gear box system. (6)

18. a) Explain the basic principle of a hydrogen fuel cell and its efficiency. (8)

b) Indicate different type of batteries used in an electric vehicle. (6)

Module 5

19. a) Explain the air conditioning system in an automobile. (8)

b) Discuss the methods to control the aerodynamic lift in vehicles. (6)

20. a) Classify active and passive safety systems in a car. (8)

b) Explain how an electronic immobilizer can prevent the vehicle theft. (6)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1 (7 hours)

Automobile system layout- Engine and its components, SI and CI engine, working principle,
Fuel supply and injection system-comparison, multiport fuel injection (MPFI) and common
rail direct injection (CRDI) systems. Ignition system, Engine emission and standards.

Super charging systems: fundamentals, naturally aspirated engines and supercharged

engines– Turbo charger, turbo lag

Module 2 (7 hours)

Friction clutch: Principle, dry friction clutches- Pull type diaphragm clutch, multiple
diaphragm clutch, multi-plate hydraulically operated automatic transmission clutch, semi
centrifugal clutch, fully automatic centrifugal clutch, and integral single plate diaphragm
clutch. Electromagnetic clutch operation. wet clutch, clutch friction materials, fluid friction
coupling.

Manual transmission- Need of gear box, power to weight ratio, speed operating range-five
speed and reverse sliding mesh, constant mesh, and synchromesh gear boxes. Automatic
transmission- Epicyclic gear box - torque convertor – Over drives. Automated manual
transmission.

Module 3 (7 hours)

Suspension system: - Types of suspension springs, suspension geometry and terminology,

types of suspension systems, independent suspension, Antiroll bar, Hydrogen suspension,
hydro pneumatic suspension, suspension roll center and body roll.

Brakes: Principle of brake, classification of brakes-mechanical and hydraulic brakes- Drum

and Disc brakes, properties of friction lining and pad materials, Anti-Lock Braking system
(ABS), principle of operation and types of ABS.

Module 4 (7 hours)

Steering: -basic principle of a steering system– Ackermann –over steer and under steer –
Steering geometry -slip angle, camber, king pin inclination, caster, toe-in and toe-out.
Steering gear box–types- need of power assisted steering.

Electric Vehicle Technology (EVT): EV Architecture, types of batteries, battery parameters,

super capacitors. Fuel cells and its efficiency. EV Chassis – requirements, suspension for
EVs. Recent Electric vehicles- Electric mobility aids. Future of electric vehicles –Tesla S,
Maglev trains, Electric rail road systems.

Module 5 (7 hours)

Safety-Active and passive safety, air bags, seat belt tightening system, forward collision
warning system, child lock, advanced safety systems.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Comfort system –Automotive air-conditioning, aerodynamics lift and drag reduction,

adaptive cruise control, tilt-able steering column and power window and advanced comfort
system.

Security system -Anti theft technology-mechanical, electromechanical and electronic

immobilizers, alarm system and remote keyless entry.

Text Books

1. Heinz Heisler, Vehicle and engine technology, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2nd edition,1998.

2. R.B. Gupta., Auto design , Satya Prakashan Publishers, New Delhi, 2016 .
3. James Larminie and John Lowry, Electric vehicle technology explained, Wiley
publications, 2nd edition, 2015.
4. Kirpal Singh, Automobile Engineering Vol.1 & Vol.2, Standard Publishers, 13th edition,
2020.

Reference Books

1.V.A.W. Hillier, Fundamentals of modern vehicle technology, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2nd

edition,1998.
2.Tom Denton, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles, Routledge Publishers, 2nd edition, 2020.
3.Ljubo Vlacic, Michel Parent and Fumio Harashima, Intelligent vehicle technologies,
Butterworth-Heinemann publications, Oxford 2001.
4.ShimoKim and Rakesh Shresta, Automotive Cyber Security: Introduction Challenges and
Standardization, Springer, Singapore, 1st edition. 2020.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Automobile system layout
Engine and its components- IC engines, piston, rings, pin,
1.1 1
flywheel, connecting rod.
1.2 SI and CI engine, working principle 1
1.3 Fuel supply and injection system-comparison 1
1.4 MPFI and CRDI systems 1
1.5 Ignition system 1

1.6 Engine emission and standards 1

1.7 Super charging systems 1

2 Clutch and transmission
Principle of dry friction clutches- Single plate clutch, Multi plate
2.1 hydraulically operated automatic transmission clutch. 1

2.2 Semi centrifugal clutch, fully automatic centrifugal clutch 1

2.3 Integral single plate diaphragm clutch, Electromagnetic clutch 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

operation.

2.4 Clutch friction materials, wet clutches, fluid friction coupling. 1

Need of gear box, power to weight ratio, speed operating range
2.5 .Sliding mesh, constant mesh and synchromesh gear boxes. 1

2.6 Epicyclic gear box, Torque convertor 1

2.7 Over drives, Automated manual transmission. 1

3 Suspension and brake

Suspension system: - Types of suspension springs, suspension
3.1 geometry and terminology. 1

3.2 Types of suspension systems ,independent suspension. 1

3.3 Antiroll bar, Hydrogen suspension, hydro pneumatic suspension. 1

3.4 Suspension roll center and body roll. 1

Brakes: Principle of brake, classification of brakes, mechanical
3.5 and hydraulic brakes. 1

Drum and Disc brakes, properties of friction lining and pad

3.6 materials 1

Anti-Lock Braking system (ABS), principle of operation and types

3.7 of ABS. 1

4 Steering and Electric vehicle technology

4.1 Ackermann steering mechanism, over steer and under steer . 1
Steering geometry -slip angle, camber, king pin inclination, caster,
4.2 toe-in and toe-out. 1

Steering gear box, Types of steering gear box, need of power

4.3 assisted steering. 1

EV Architecture, types of batteries, battery parameters, super

4.4 capacitors. Fuel cells and its efficiency. 1

4.5 Super capacitors. Fuel cells and its efficiency. 1

EV Chassis – requirements, suspension for EVs. Recent Electric
4.6 vehicles- Electric mobility aids. 1

Future of electric vehicles –Tesla S, Maglev trains, Electric rail

4.7 road systems. 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

5 Safety, control and security in automotive technology

Safety-Active and passive safety, air bags, seat belt tightening
5.1 system, 1

Forward collision warning system, child lock antilock braking

5.2 system 1

Comfort system - Automotive air-conditioning, aerodynamics lift

5.3 and drag reduction, 1

Adaptive cruise control, tilt-able steering column, power window

5.4 and advanced comfort system 2

Anti-theft technology-mechanical, electromechanical and

5.5 electronic immobilizers. 1

5.6 Alarm system and remote keyless entry. 1

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

RENEWABLE ENERGY
MET445 OEC 2 1 0 3
ENGINEERING

Preamble: The course is intended to give knowledge of various renewable energy sources,
systems and applications and the need in the present context. Students will be able to
compare different renewable energy techniques and choose the most appropriate based on
local conditions. To equip students in working with projects and to take up research work in
connected areas.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to
Explain renewable energy sources and evaluate the implication of renewable energy.
CO1
To predict solar radiation at a location
CO2 Explain solar energy collectors, storages, solar cell characteristics and applications
Explain the different types of wind power machines and control strategies of wind
CO3
turbines
CO4 Explain the ocean energy and conversion devices and different Geothermal sources
Explain biomass energy conversion devices. Calculate the Net Present value and
CO5
payback period

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3
CO 2 1
3 3 1 1 1 3

CO 3 1
3 3 1 1 1 3

CO 4 3 3 1 1 1 1 3

CO 5 1
3 3 1 1 1 3

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment
Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. What are the main renewable energy sources? Advantages and limitations
2. What is energy efficiency? How is it different from renewable energy use?
3. Define terms : Angle of Incidence, Declination, Solar constant

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Discuss different types of solar collectors
2. Discuss about different types of thermal storage devices
3. Draw the I-V characteristics of Solar cell under varying temperature and
irradiation level

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Types of wind turbine and components
2. Difference between wind mill and wind turbine
3. Explain importance of drag and lift force in wind power generation.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain with neat sketch the working of hybrid OTEC system
2. Explain with neat sketch the vapour dominated geothermal system

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Distinguish between Fixed dome plant and floating dome type biomass plant.
2. Write a short note on solar saving.
3. Derive expression for payback period
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VII SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET445 RENEWABLE ENERGY ENGINEERING

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Discuss in brief advantages of renewable energy.

2. Explain the following terms related to solar geometry (i) Hour Angle ((ii) Zenith
Angle (iii) Surface azimuth angle
3. List different types of solar collectors
4. Discuss about solar pond
5. List the different methods used to estimate wind speed at a location.
6. What are the advantages of wind energy conversion systems?
7. List the geothermal resources.
8. Discuss advantages and disadvantages of a tidal power plant
9. Name the different processes used for hydrogen production
10. List the need for economic analysis of renewable energy system.
(10 X 3 = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module

Module 1

11. Elucidate the necessity of energy storage in the context of renewable sources of
energy (14 Marks )
12. (a) Calculate the number of daylight hours in Srinagar for 22nd June .The latitude
of Srinagar as 34⁰05’N. (4 Marks)
(b) Compare the construction and working of Pyranometer and Pyrheliometer.
(10 Marks)

Module 2

13. (a) How solar thermal power plants classified. List the methods for converting
solar energy into electric power (10 Marks)
(b) Briefly explain the applications of a solar PV system.. (4 Marks)
14. (a) Draw and explain the operation of flat plate collectors. (10 Marks)
(b) Explain the thermal methods of energy storage (4 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 3
15. With a neat diagram explain the construction of a propeller type wind power
system (14 marks)
16. (a) Derive the expression for power in the wind turbine. ( 7 marks)
b) Explain control mechanism in wind turbines (7 marks)

Module 4
17. State the principle of Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC). Explain
working of closed cycle OTEC system. (14 marks)
18. . Explain binary cycle Geothermal system (14 marks)

Module 5
19. Explain the construction and working of KVIC (floating type) bio gas plant
(14 marks)
20. a.Define (1) Payback time (2) Return on investment .
(3) Life cycle cost (6 marks)
b. A solar PV system consisting with two lamps, a battery and other associated
components cost Rs. 55000. The cost of conventional energy saved due to its
installation is Rs. 4000 in the first year and this cost inflates at the rate of 5 %
per year. Assume discounting rate is 9%. Calculate the payback period of the
system with and without discounting (8 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1
The Energy Scenario- Commercial energy sources -World’s production and reserves-
India’ Production and reserves, Energy Alternatives, Need for alternatives –solar option-
nuclear options
Principles of solar radiation : Solar radiation outside the earth’s atmosphere and at the
earth’s surface , Solar Constant, Basic Sun-Earth Angles, Instruments for measuring solar
radiation and sunshine , Solar radiation data

Module 2
Solar Energy collectors: Solar thermal collectors -Flat plate collectors –Solar concentrators
(parabolic trough, parabolic dish, Central Tower Collector) –Solar Air Heaters
Solar thermal electric power generation -Thermal Energy storage, sensible heat storage,
latent heat storage , Thermo chemical storage , photovoltaic system for power generation ,
Solar pond -Solar Cells-Types of solar cells , principle of working and performance
characteristics, Production process- Block diagram only
Applications- Solar space heating and cooling of buildings, solar pumping, solar cooker,
solar still, solar drier, solar refrigeration and air-conditioning, heliostat, solar furnace
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 3
Wind Energy- classification of wind turbines and power performance curve, Energy in
wind, calculation of energy content, Power coefficients, Betz limit theory, , tip speed ratio,
solidity of turbine’ power control strategies, Basic principles of Wind Energy Conversion
Systems (WECS), Classification of WECS, Parts of WECS

Module 4
Ocean Energy – Devices for Wave Energy conversion, Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion
(OTEC): Principle of OTEC system, Methods of OTEC power generation – Open Cycle
(Claude cycle), Closed Cycle (Anderson cycle) and Hybrid cycle (block diagram
description of OTEC); Geothermal energy: Introduction, hot dry rock resources, magma
resources, vapor and liquid dominated systems, binary cycle, advantages and disadvantages

Module 5
Bio Mass Energy- Biomass conversion technologies –Bio Gasification, Bio ethanol, Bio
Diesel , Biogas production from waste biomass, factors affecting biogas generation Bio Gas
-KVIC and Janata model ,Hydrogen Energy – various routes for production of Hydrogen
energy,
Economic Analysis – Initial and annual cost, basic definitions, present worth calculations,
repayment of loan in equal annual installments, annual savings, cumulative saving and life
cycle cost, economic analysis of add on solar system, payback period(derivation)

Text Books:
1. S P Sukhatme , J K Nayak, Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal Collection and
Storage, Mc Graw Hill ,2015
2. Tiwari G N, Ghosal M K ,Fundamentals of renewable energy sources, Alpha Science
International Ltd.,2007
3. Jefferson W Tester et.a., Sustainable Energy Choosing among options,PHI,2006

Reference Books:
1. D.P. Kothari Renewable energy resources and emerging technologies,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,2011
2. Mehmet KanoğluYunus A. Çengel John M. Cimbala , Fundamentals and Applications
of Renewable Energy, Mc Graw Hill ,2019
3. Roland Wengenmayr, Thomas Buhrke, ‘Renewable Energy: Sustainable energy
concepts for the future, Wiley – VCH, 2012
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. Topic No. of Lectures

1 The Energy Scenario (5)
Commercial energy sources -World’s production and
1.1 1
reserves India’ Production and reserves
,Energy Alternatives- Need for alternatives –solar
1.2 1
options
Principles of solar radiation
Solar radiation outside the earth’s atmosphere and at
1.3 1
the earth’s surface , Solar Constant,
Basic Sun-Earth Angles, Instruments for measuring solar
1.4 radiation and sunshine , Solar radiation data 2

2 Solar Energy (11)

2.3 Solar thermal collectors -Flat plate collectors 2

Solar concentrators (parabolic trough, parabolic dish,

2.4 2
Central Tower Collector

Solar Air Heaters-types - Solar thermal electric power

2.5 generation Thermal Energy storage, sensible heat storage, 2
latent heat storage , Thermo chemical storage

2.7 Photovoltaic system for power generation 2

Solar Cells-Types of solar cells , principle of working and

2.8 performance characteristics, Production process- Block 2
diagram only
Applications- Solar space heating and cooling of buildings,
2.9 solar pumping, solar cooker, solar still, solar drier, solar 1
refrigeration and air-conditioning, heliostat, solar furnace

3 Wind Energy (6)

3.1 Classification of wind turbines 1
power performance curve, Energy in wind, calculation of
3.2 2
energy content,

Power coefficients, Betz limit theory, , tip speed ratio,

3.3 2
solidity of turbine’ power control strategies
Basic principles of Wind Energy Conversion Systems
3.4 1
(WECS), Classification of WECS, Parts of WECS
4 Ocean Energy (6)
Devices for Wave Energy conversion Ocean Thermal
4.1 1
Energy Conversion (OTEC): Principle of OTEC system,
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Methods of OTEC power generation – Open Cycle (Claude

4.2 cycle), Closed Cycle (Anderson cycle) and Hybrid cycle 2
(block diagram description of OTEC)
Geothermal energy: Introduction , hot dry rock resources,
4.3 1
magma resources
vapor and liquid dominated systems, binary cycle,
4.4 2
advantages and disadvantages

5 Bio Mass Energy (8)

Biomass conversion technologies –Bio Gasification, Bio

5.1 1
ethanol, Bio Diesel

Biogas production from waste biomass, factors affecting

5.2 2
biogas generation Bio Gas -KVIC and Janata model.

Hydrogen Energy – various routes for production of

5.3 1
Hydrogen energy
Economic Analysis – Initial and annual cost, basic
5.3 1
definitions,
present worth calculations, repayment of loan in equal
5.4 annual installments, annual savings, cumulative saving and 2
life cycle cost
economic analysis of add on solar system, payback
5.5 1
period(derivation)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

QUALITY ENGINEERING AND
MET455 OEC 2 1 0 3
MANAGEMENT

Preamble: This course is designed to facilitate the students to understand the concept and
culture of total quality management. It empowers the students by inculcating the skills to use
quality control techniques and other quality tools in solving quality-related problems and
apply these principles in an industry. This course will also amalgamate their knowledge about
the importance of customer satisfaction through desired quality at a competitive price.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 To be conversant with important terms for quality management in organisations

Have a complete theoretical and practical understanding of the contributions of
CO 2
Quality Gurus
CO 3 Demonstrate knowledge of the underlying principles of strategic quality management
CO 4 Identify various human dimensions of TQM
CO 5 Implement different tools and techniques in TQM
CO 6 Implement different statistical quality control techniques

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 3
CO 2 2 2
CO 3 2 2 2 3 1 3
CO 4 3 3 3 1 3
CO 5 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO 6 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

End Semester Examination
Tests
(in %)
1 (in %) 2 (in %)
Remember 20 20 20
Understand 60 40 40
Apply 20 40 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Marks Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Distinguish between quality control and inspection.

2. What are the TQM axioms?

3. What are the enablers of total quality?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe the Deming approach to TQM.

2. List out Crosby's fourteen steps for quality improvement.

3. Describe Juran’s quality trilogy.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Define strategic quality management.

2. With examples, describe the classification of quality costs.

3. Describe the concepts of Kaizen approach.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What is meant by employee empowerment with respect to total quality management?

2. What are self managing teams?

3. Describe the importance of leadership in TQM

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. “X and R charts always go hand in hand”. Elaborate.

2. What are the measures of Central tendency and dispersion?

3. Describe the principles of cause and effect diagram.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Explain a typical OC curve for a control chart?

2. What are the effects of sample size on control limits?

3. Enumerate the differences between destructive and non-destructive testing methods.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code: MET455 Course Name: Quality Engineering and Management

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer ALL questions, each carries 3 marks.

1. Define the term” Quality control”.

2. What are the enablers of total quality?
3. Describe the concept of Quality Function Deployment
4. What are the obstacles to achieving successful strategic quality management?
5. What is meant by employee empowerment?
6. Describe the importance of leadership in TQM
7. What are the applications of control charts?
8. Differentiate between 100% inspection and sampling with suitable examples.
9. Describe the principles of cause and effect diagram.
10. What are the benefits of quality auditing?

PART B

11.a) Compare Juran and Deming approaches (7)

b) Explain the characteristics of Total Quality Management. (7)

OR

12 a) Explain the three TQM axioms. (12)

b) Define Quality Planning. (2)

13. Describe the steps to be followed to integrate quality into strategic management journey
of an organization. (14)

OR

14. (a) Enumerate the objectives of 5S . (7)

(b) Describe the components of Quality cost. (7)

15. What are self managing teams? What are the benefits and problems associated with
them? Indicate the key steps to be followed to implement them in organizations. (14)

OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

16. What are the ingredients for success for a quality director? What are the activities to be
carried out by a quality director towards assisting upper management with strategic
management (14)

17. With the aid of examples, describe the types of failure. (14)

OR

18. What are the different phases of a bath tub curve? With the help of a sketch, illustrate the
important features of each phase. (14)

19. Describe the steps to be followed for conducting a quality audit. (14)

OR

20. Following are the data on the quality costs incurred in a manufacturing company in a
month:

Title of the quality cost Amount in Rupees

Product audits 1,000

Scrap Disposal 50,000

Concessions and Downgrading 40,000

Calibration 2,000

Quality planning 500

Manufacturing losses 30,000

System failure 40,000

Test materials 5,000

Training 2,000

Customer returns 25,000

Classify the above quality costs into preventive, appraisal and failure costs. Conduct Pareto
analysis and comment on the results. Suggest a proposal with anticipation on the quality
costs observable in future. (14)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to Quality Engineering - Definitions of the terms - quality, quality planning,

quality control, quality assurance, quality management, Total Quality Management (TQM)-
overview on TQM - the TQM axioms - consequences of total quality- Barriers to TQM-
Deming approach to TQM – Juran’s quality trilogy- Crosby's fourteen steps for quality
improvement

Module 2

Strategic Quality Management: Cost of Quality- Customer satisfaction- Quality Function

Deployment (QFD)- Integrating quality into strategic management - obstacles to achieving
successful strategic quality management- Concepts of 5S, Six Sigma, Kaizen.

Module 3

Human dimensions of TQM – Top management commitment- Leadership for TQM- Change
management- resources for quality activities - training for quality –Employee involvement,
motivation empowerment- teamwork- self managing teams - role of the quality director-
Quality System: ISO 9000 family of standards.

Module 4

Quality control and Inspection- Destructive and non-destructive testing methods- process
capability- Statistical quality control –Acceptance sampling- causes of variation in quality-
control charts for X and R, Problems- Reliability-types and causes of failures- Bath tub
curve.-System reliability- life testing.

Module 5

Supporting Tools, Activities And Techniques in TQM Projects : Affinity diagram -

brainstorming - cause and effect analysis - process flow chart – check sheets- Scatter
diagram - Pareto chart- Histogram and fundamentals of statistics - Taguchi’s robust design-
Total Productive maintenance- Failure Mode and Effect Analysis - Quality auditing- types
and benefits.

Text Books

1. Besterfield Dale H. , Besterfield Carol, Besterfield Glen H., Besterfield Mary,

Urdhwareshe Hemant, Urdhwareshe Rashmi, “Total Quality Management (TQM) 5e”,
Pearson Education, 2018.

2. Subburaj Ramasamy, “Total Quality Management”, McGraw Hill Education,, 2017.

3. Dr. K.C. Arora, “Total Quality Management”, S K Kataria and Sons, 2013.

4. Suganthi, L and Anand A Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited, 2009.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

5. Juran J M and Gryna, F M, "Quality Planning and Analysis - From Product Development
through Use", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Limited, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2004.

Reference Books

1. Logothetics N, "Managing for Total Quality - From Deming to Taguchi and SPC",
Prentice Hall Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.
2. Deming W E, “Out of the Crisis," MIT Press, Cambridge, MA, 1982.
3. Juran J M and Juran on “Leadership for Quality" An Executive Handbook, The Free
Press, New York, 1989.
4. Salor J H, "TQM-FIeld Manual," McGraw Hill, New York, 1992.
5. Crosby P B, "Quality is Free" McGraw Hill, New York, 1979.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction to Quality Engineering
Definitions of the terms - quality, quality planning, quality control,
1.1 2
quality assurance, quality management
Total Quality Management (TQM)- overview on TQM - the TQM
1.2 2
axioms - consequences of total quality- Barriers to TQM
Deming approach to TQM - Juran quality trilogy- Crosby's
1.3 3
fourteen steps for quality improvement
2 Strategic Quality Management
Cost of Quality- Customer satisfaction- Quality Function
2.1 2
Deployment (QFD)
Integrating quality into strategic management - quality and the
2.2 1
management cycle
2.3 obstacles to achieving successful strategic quality management 1
2.4 Concepts of 5S, Six Sigma, Kaizen 2
3 Human dimensions of TQM
Top management commitment- Leadership for TQM- Change
3.1 2
management
3.2 Resources for quality activities - training for quality 1
3.3 Employee involvement, motivation, empowerment 2
3.3 Teamwork- self managing teams - role of the quality director 1
3.4 Quality System: ISO 9000 family of standards. 1
4 Quality control and Inspection
4.1 Destructive and non-destructive testing methods 1
Process capability- Statistical quality control –acceptance
4.2 2
sampling- causes of variation in quality
4.3 Control charts for X and R. Reliability- 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4.4 causes of failures- Bath tub curve 1

4.5 System reliability- life testing 1
5 Supporting Tools, Activities And Techniques in TQM Projects
5.1 Affinity diagram - brainstorming 1
Cause and effect analysis - process flow chart – check sheets-
5.2 3
Scatter diagram - Pareto chart
5.3 Histogram and fundamentals of statistics 1
Taguchi’s robust design- Total Productive maintenance- Failure
5.4 2
Mode and Effect Analysis
5.5 Quality auditing- types and benefits 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VII
MINOR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MED481 MINI PROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 4

Preamble: Mini Project Phase I: A Project topic must be selected either from research literature
or the students themselves may propose suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The
object of Project Work I is to enable the student to take up investigative study in the broad field
of Chemical Engineering, either fully theoretical/practical or involving both theoretical and
practical work to be assigned by the Department on a group of three/four students, under the
guidance of a Supervisor. This is expected to provide a good initiation for the student(s) in
R&D work. The assignment to normally include:
♦ Survey and study of published literature on the assigned topic;
♦ Preparing an Action Plan for conducting the investigation, including team work;
♦ Working out a preliminary Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned topic;
♦ Block level design documentation
♦ Conducting preliminary Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Experiment/ Design/
Feasibility;
♦ Preparing a Written Report on the Study conducted for presentation to the Department;
CO1 Identify and synthesize problems and propose solutions to them.

CO2 Prepare work plan and liaison with the team in completing as per schedule.

Validate the above solutions by theoretical calculations and through

CO3
experimental
CO4 Write technical reports and develop proper communication skills.
CO5 Present the data and defend ideas.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
*1-slight/low mapping, 2- moderate/medium mapping, 3-substantial/high mapping
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Sl. No. Level of Evaluation Marks

1 Interim evaluation by the committee 20
2 Project Guide 30
3 Final Seminar evaluation by the committee 30
4 The report evaluated by the evaluation committee 20
Total 100
Minimum required to pass 50

The evaluation committee comprises a panel of HoD or a senior faculty member, Project
coordinator and project supervisor.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VII
HONOURS
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ADVANCED THEORY OF
MET495 VAC 4 0 0 4
VIBRATIONS

Preamble:

 To understand the principles of vibration theory.

 To introduce techniques for solving vibration problems.
 To enable development of mathematical model for engineering problems in
vibrations.

Prerequisite: MET 304 Dynamics and Design of Machinery

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyse the single degree of freedom vibration system with and without damping
CO 2 Analyse forced harmonic vibration and two degree of freedom system
CO 3 Analyse the multi degree of freedom system and the Eigen value problem
CO 4 Solve vibration of continuous systems and transient vibrations
CO 5 Solve the numerical methods used in vibration analysis

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3
CO 5 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 10 10 30
Apply 40 40 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain about different types of vibrating mechanisms.
2. Describe Energy method and Rayleigh method.
3. Explain the different damping mechanisms.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe about the magnification factor and transmissibility.
2. What is normal mode vibration and coordinate coupling.
3. Explain the working of seismometer and accelerometer.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Describe about Dynamic vibration absorbers and Vibration dampers
2. Explain the mode shape and Modal analysis.
3. What is Eigen value and Eigen vector.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Discuss about the vibrating strings and longitudinal vibration of rods.
2. Explain the Torsional vibration of rods
3. Explain the Transient vibrations

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain Matrix Iteration and Stodola method– Dunkerley’s method
2. Differentiate between Rayleigh method and Rayleigh –Ritz method
3. What is Holzer procedure for vibration analysis
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET 475
Course Name: ADVANCED THEORY OF VIBRATIONS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)
1. Distinguish between longitudinal, transverse and torsional vibrations?
2. What are beats?
3. Explain the working of a vibrometer?
4. How does the forcetransmitted to the base change as the speed of the machine
increases?
5. What is orthogonality of modes?
6. What are influence coefficients?
7. What is the Duhamel Integral? What is its use?
8. State the boundary conditions at the end of a string.
9. What is the basic principle used in Holzer’s method?
10. Write short notes on n Rayleigh Ritz Method.

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)
MODULE – 1
11. A machine of mass 18kg is supported on springs of total stiffness 12N/mm and
dashpot of 0.2Ns/m damping. The system is initially at rest and a velocity of 120mm/s
is imparted to the machine. Determine the displacement and velocity of machine as a
function of time?
(14 marks)

12. A circular cylinder as shown below, has a mass 6kg and radius 20cm, which is joined
to the fixture by a spring having stiffness 5000N/m. It is free to roll on the horizontal
surface without slipping. Find the natural frequency of the system?

(14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 2
13. A machine component having a mass of 3kg vibrates in a viscous medium. If a
harmonic force 40N is applied on the on the system causes a resonant amplitude of
15mm with a period of 0.25second, find the damping coefficient? Find the increase in
the amplitude of the forced when the damper is removed, if the frequency of exciting
force is changed to 4 Hz?
(14 marks)

14. Design Derive the general equation for damped free vibration of a single degree of
freedom system? Arrive at the equation of under damped system?
(14 marks)
Module 3
15. Find out the natural frequency of the system given below usinginfluence coefficient
method?

(14 marks)

16. A reciprocating machine has a weight of 250N which runs at a constant speed of
500rpm. It was found after final installation that the forcing frequency is very close to
the natural frequency of the system. Find the mass of the dynamic absorber to be
added to the system, the nearest natural frequency of the system should be at least 25
percent from the impressed frequency? (14 marks)

Module 4

17. Derive an expression for the torsional vibration in case of a shaft having torque T
acting at both the ends? (14 marks)

18. a) Derive the impulse response function of a damped free vvibration

ibration system? (7 marks)
b) A trailer being pulled at a high speed, hits a h cm high curb. Considering the trailer
to be single degree of freedom system, analyse the system for the response.
(7 marks)
Module 5
19. Using Stodola technique determine the first natural frequency of the following
system?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(14 marks)

20. Find out the natural frequency of the system given below using matrix iteration
method?

(14 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to mechanical vibrations- Definitions -Types of vibrations- Degrees of freedom-

Oscillatory motion – Periodic motion- Beat phenomenon

Free vibration of single degree of freedom systems with damping - Natural frequency using
Energy method- Rayleigh method- Newton’s method

Free vibration of single degree of freedom systems with damping- Viscous damping-
Logarithmic decrement-

Coulomb damping- - Structural damping

Module 2

Forced harmonic vibration- Magnification Factor-Transmissibility-Vibration Isolation-Base

Excitation-Rotating unbalance- whirling of shafts- Resonance

Vibration measuring instruments- Seismometer-Accelerometer

Two degree of freedom systems- Generalized co-ordinates- Normal mode vibration-Principal

co-ordinates-Coordinate coupling.

Module 3

Dynamic vibration absorbers- Vibration dampers- Numerical problems

Multi degree of freedom systems- Matrix formulation- Influence Coefficients-Flexibility

Matrix-Stiffness matrix
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Eigen Value problem: Eigen value and Eigen Vectors-Natural Frequency- mode shape -
Orthogonality of normal modes-Modal analysis

Module 4

Vibration of continuous systems-Vibrating strings- Longitudinal vibration of rods—Torsional

vibration of rods

Transient vibrations- Impulse excitation- Convolution integral,Response to Arbitrary

Loading.

Module 5

Numerical methods - Matrix Iteration – Stodola – Dunkerley’s method - Rayleigh method –

Rayleigh –Ritz method -Holzer procedure

Text Books

1. A. G. Ambekar, “Mechanical Vibrations and Noise Engineering, PHI, New Delhi

2. V.P. Singh “Mechanical Vibrations” DhanpatRai& Co (Pvt) Ltd.

Reference Books

1. Thomson W.T , Theory of Vibration with Applications., PHI, New Delhi

2. Rao V and J Srinivas, Mechanical Vibrations, PHI, New Delhi

3. S.S Rao, Mechanical Vibrations, Pearson Education India

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Module 1
Introduction to mechanical vibrations- Definitions -Types of
1.1 vibrations- Degrees of freedom- Oscillatory motion – Periodic 3
motion- Beat phenomenon

Free vibration of single degree of freedom (DOF) systems with

1.2 damping - Natural frequency using Energy method- Rayleigh 3
method- Newton’s method

Free vibration of single degree of freedom (DOF) systems with

damping- Viscous damping- Logarithmic decrement-
1.3 3
Coulomb damping- - Structural damping

2 Module 2
Forced harmonic vibration- Magnification Factor-
2.1 Transmissibility-Vibration Isolation-Base Excitation-Rotating 4
unbalance- whirling of shafts- Resonance

2.2 Vibration measuring instruments- Seismometer-Accelerometer 2

Two degree of freedom systems- Generalized co-ordinates-
2.3 Normal mode vibration-Principal co-ordinates-Coordinate 4
coupling.

3 Module 3
Dynamic vibration absorbers- Vibration dampers- Numerical
3.1 problems 2

Multi degree of freedom systems- Matrix formulation- Influence

3.2 Coefficients-Flexibility Matrix-Stiffness matrix 4

Eigen Value problem: Eigen value and Eigen Vectors-Natural

3.3 Frequency- mode shape -Modal analysis 4

4 Module 4
Vibration of continuous systems-Vibrating strings- Longitudinal
4.1 vibration of rods—Torsional vibration of rods 4

4.2 Transient vibrations- Impulse excitation- Convolution integral. 4

5 Module 5
Numerical methods - Matrix Iteration – Stodola – Dunkerley’s
5.1 method - 4

5.2 Rayleigh method – Rayleigh –Ritz method -Holzer procedure 4

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

COMPUTATIONAL METHODS IN
MET497 VAC 3 1 0 4
FLUID FLOW AND HEAT TRANSFER

Preamble: COMPUTATIONAL METHODS IN FLUID FLOW & HEAT TRANSFER

focuses on basic concept and principles of numerically solving governing equations for fluid
flow and heat transfer problems.

Prerequisite: MET203 Mechanics of Fluids, MET302 Heat and Mass Transfer

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain physical and mathematical classifications partial differential equations,

CO 1 discretization, Steady one-dimensional conduction in Cartesian and cylindrical
coordinates,,

Analyse One-, two, and three-dimensional steady state and transient heat conduction
CO 2
problems in Cartesian and cylindrical coordinates
Explain Explicit, implicit, Crank-Nicholson and ADIschemes,; consistency, stability
CO 3 and convergence.

CO 4 Analyse finite volume method for diffusion and convection

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO
  
1
CO
  
2
CO
  
3
CO
  
4

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the concept of discretization.

2. Explain the term “ Rate of Convergence”.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Differentiate between Dirichlet and Newmann Boundary conditions.

2. Explain how discretization of irregular boundaries are done ?

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the significance of ADI scheme

2. Give the stability criterion of Crank Nicholson Scheme.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the reason for using finite volume method for convection and diffusion problems?

2. Differentiate between Hybrid and Upwind Schemes.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code: MET497

Course Name: COMPUTATIONAL METHODS IN FLUID FLOW & HEAT

TRANSFER

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. What are the various errors encountered in the solution by computational methods?

2. Describe the Tridiagonal matrix algorithm (TDMA)

3. Explain the significance of line by line method of solutions

4. Give two examples of Dirichlet boundary conditions

5.Distinguish between Explicit and Implicit schemes, compare the advantages and
disadvantages for each.
2
∂u ∂ u
6. Write Crank-Nicolson FDE for ∂ t = α 2
∂x

7. Write a typical convection and diffusion equation in conservative form.

8. What is the benefit of conservative form of equations?

9. Differentiate between SIMPLE and SIMPLER algorthms

10. Write short notes on QUICK scheme

PART – B

(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1

11. a) What is under relaxation? Give one formula each for PSOR and LSOR. ( 7 Marks)

b) Why stability is to be ensured for numerical schemes? How is it done? (7 marks)

OR

12. With the help of suitable examples explain Taylor’s series approach and polynomial

fitting approach (14 marks)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE – 2

13. a) Explain formation of discritized equations for regular and irregular boundaries with

suitable examples (14 marks)

OR

14. Explain solution procedure for two dimensional steady state heat conduction problems

( 14 marks)

MODULE – 3
2 2
∂u
15. a) Write and explain the ADI formulation for the PDE = ¿ ∂ u+ ∂ u (9 marks)
dt 2
∂x ∂ y
2

2
∂u ∂ u
b)Write Crank-Nicolson FDE for ∂ t = α 2 (5 marks)
∂x

OR
2 2
∂ u ∂ u
16. a) Write the ADI formulation for the PDE 2
+ 2
=0 ( 6 marks)
∂x ∂ y

b) Explain the stability criterion of ADI and Crank Nicolson Schemes. (8 marks)

MODULE – 4

17. Discuss advantages and limitations of the following with respect to convection and
diffusion equation

i) Upwind scheme
ii) Hybrid scheme
iii) Power-Law scheme ( 14 Marks)

OR

18. a) Write a typical convection and diffusion equation in conservative form. (7 marks)

b) Explain the concept of false diffusion (7 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. a) What is the main difficulty in solving momentum equations ( 4 marks )

b) How the pressure correction equation is formulated for SIMPLE procedure

( 10 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR

20. a) Explain the sequence of operations in the SIMPLE procedure with a flowchart
(7 marks)

b) Explain the significance of SIMPLEC scheme using example (7 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1

Experimental, theoretical and numerical methods of predictions, physical and mathematical

classifications partial differential equations; computational economy; numerical stability;
validationof numerical results; round-off-error and accuracy of numerical results; iterative
convergence, condition for convergence, rate of convergence; under and over relaxations,
termination of iteration; tridiagonal matrix algorithm; discretization, converting derivativesto
their finite difference forms, Taylor’s series approach,polynomial fitting approach;
discretization error.

Module 2

Steady one-dimensional conduction in Cartesian and cylindrical coordinates; handling of

boundary conditions; two dimensional steady state conduction problems in Cartesian and
cylindrical coordinates, point-by-point and line-by-line method of solution, dealing with
Dirichlet, Neumann, and bins type boundary conditions, formation of discritized equations
for regular and irregular boundaries and interfaces.

Module 3

One-, two, and three-dimensional transient heat conduction problems in Cartesian and
cylindrical coordinates , explicit, implicit, Crank Nicholson and ADI schemes..Stability
criterion of these schemes, conservation form and conservative property of partial differential
and finite difference equations

Module 4

Finite volume method for diffusion and convection–diffusion problems, steady one
dimensional convection and diffusion; upwind, hybrid and power-law schemes, discretization
of equation for two dimension, false diffusion,

Module 5

SIMPLE, SIMPLER, SIMPLEC and QUICK schemes, solution algorithms for pressure
velocity coupling in steady flows; numerical marching techniques, two dimensional parabolic
flows with heat transfer.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. Anderson, D. A, Tannehill, J. C., and R. H. Pletcher, R. H., Computational Fluid

Mechanics and Heat Transfer, Second Edition, Taylor & Francis,1995.

Reference Books

1. T.J. Chung, Computational Fluid dynamics, Cambridge University Press, South Asian

Edition, 2003.

2. Muraleedhar, K. and T. Sundararaja, T., Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer,

Second Edition, Narosa Publishing House, 2003.

3. Patankar, S. V., Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Hemisphere, 1980.

4. Versteeg, H. K. and W. Malalasekera, An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics:

The Finite Volume Method, Addison Wesley–Longman,1995.

5. Hornbeck, R. W., Numerical Marching Techniques for Fluid Flows with Heat Transfer,
NASA,

SP – 297, 1973.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

Experimental, theoretical and numerical methods of predictions,
1.1 physical and mathematical classifications partial differential 4
equations; computational economy;
Validationof numerical results; round-off-error and accuracy of
1.2 numerical results; iterative convergence, condition for 3
convergence, rate of convergence; under and over relaxations,
Termination of iteration; tridiagonal matrix algorithm;
discretization, converting derivativesto their finite difference
1.3 forms, Taylor’s series approach,polynomial fitting approach; 3
discretization error.

Steady one-dimensional conduction in Cartesian and cylindrical

coordinates; handling of boundary conditions; two dimensional
2.1 3
steady state conduction problems in Cartesian and cylindrical
coordinates,
Point-by-point and line-by-line method of solution, dealing with
2.2 2
Dirichlet, Neumann, and bins type boundary conditions
Formation of discritized equations for regular and irregular
2.3 2
boundaries and interfaces.
One-, two, and three-dimensional transient heat conduction
3.1 problems in Cartesian and cylindrical coordinates , 4
explicit,implicit, Crank Nicholson and ADI schemes
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Stability criterion of these schemes, conservation form and
3.2 conservative property of partial differential and finite difference 3
equations
Finite volume method for diffusion and convection–diffusion
4.1 3
problems, steady one dimensional convection and diffusion;
Upwind, hybrid and power-law schemes, discretization of equation
4.2 for two dimension, false diffusion, 3

SIMPLE, SIMPLER, SIMPLEC and QUICK schemes, solution

5.1 3
algorithms for pressure velocity coupling in steady flows;
Numerical marching techniques, two dimensional parabolic flows
5.2 2
with heat transfer.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET499 PRECISION MACHINING VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: This course is conceived to help students understand design and process issues
associated with precision machining. The course introduces a few precision machining processes
as well.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Contrast basic premises of normal machining and precision machining

Relate consideration of error and sources of error and role of kinematic design in
CO 2
establishing precision.
CO 3 Explain various sensors and AE based monitoring in precision machining environment

CO 4 Outline the basics of process planning for precision machining

CO 5 Explain various precision machining processes.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 1 - - 3 - 1 - 2 1 1 1
CO 2 3 1 - - 3 - 1 - 2 1 1 1
CO 3 3 1 - - 3 - 1 - 2 1 1 1
CO 4 3 1 - - 3 - 1 - 2 1 1 1
CO 5 3 1 - - 3 - 1 - 2 1 1 1
CO 6 3 1 - - 3 - 1 - 2 1 1 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 (marks) 2 (marks) (marks)
Remember 20 20 40
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse - - -
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module, of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. What is Abbe’s principle? List an instrument each which (a) obeys Abbe’s principle (b) disobeys
Abbe’s principle.
2. List down various methods for testing roundness. Explain precision spindle method for checking
roundness with a suitable diagram.

3. With the help of a neat diagram, explain surface roughness terminology.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. With the help of a suitable diagram, show the directions in which errors occur for a conventional
machine tool.

2. What is an error budget? How does an error budget flow chart help in generating it?

3. Describe thermal effects in precision machining.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Explain AE based topographical mapping of grinding wheels.

2. Describe AE based monitoring of face milling.

3. Explain fast AE RMS analysis for wheel condition monitoring.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Define capability ratio.

2. Discuss the basics of process planning in precision machining process?

3. Illustrate with an example the application of capability ratio in process planning.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Discuss typical fly cutting diamond machine configurations.

2. Discuss tool-workpiece configurations for conical- circumferential milling.

3. Discuss the tool geometry of a typical single point diamond tool.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Model Question Paper

MET499 PRECISION MACHINING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part−A
Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks
.
1. Enumerate critical elements in precision manufacturing.
2. Clearly distinguish the terms accuracy, precision and resolution.
3. Distinguish between kinematic design and elastically averaged design.
4. What do you understand by macroscale and microscale structural compliance?
5. Which are the basic sensor types used in precision manufacturing set ups?
6. Tabulate various forms of energy converted by sensors.
7. Define process capability.
8. What are the factors that affect precision during machining?
9. Differentiate between fixed abrasive process and loose abrasive process.
10. Draw a schematic and hence outline a nano-grinding process.

Part−B

Answer one full question from each module.

Module I

11. Differentiate normal machining, precision machining and ultra-precision machining with examples
(14 marks)

OR

12. Describe various “competitive drivers” of precision manufacturing. (14 marks)

Module II
13. What do you understand by microscale and macroscale structural compliance. Explain.
(14 marks)
OR
14. With the help of a neat diagram explain Air bearing grinding spindle. (14 marks)

Module III
15. Explain requirements for sensor technology for precision machining. (14 marks)
OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
16. Describe an optical system for monitoring of grinding wheel topography. (14 marks)

Module IV
17. Describe how process capability can be used as a planning metric for transition from one
process stage to another. (14 marks)
OR

18. Discuss four levels of integration between the tasks of design, manufacturing and finishing.
(14 marks)
Module V
19. With the help of a diagram explain CMP process. (14 marks)

OR

20. Explain the process of diamond turning with suitable diagrams. (14 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to precision machining: Competitive drivers for precision machining. Definition of terms-
accuracy, precision and resolution. Metrology and measurement- Abbe's principle. Measurement of
dimension and angle- measurement of form- straightness, flatness and roundness. Measurement of
surface roughness.

Module 2

Sources of error in precision machining: Mechanical errors- errors due to machine elements, thermal
errors, Error due to compliance and vibration. Error budget- error budget flow chart- (elementary idea
only). Role of kinematic design in precision. Principles of design and utilisation of bearings-aerostatic
bearings.

Module 3

Sensors in precision machining: Classification of basic sensor types- overview of sensors in

manufacturing- applications- AE based monitoring of grinding wheel dressing- fast AE RMS analysis
of wheel condition monitoring (description only). Topographical mapping of grinding wheel. AE
based monitoring of face milling.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 4

Process planning for precision machining: process planning basics-factors which influence precision-
process capability-relationship between process variability and product specification- process
capability as a planning metric.

Module 5

Precision machining processes: Diamond turning and milling, fly cutting diamond machine
configuration- features of diamond machine tool design- applications. Configuration for conical
circumferential milling- applications. Typical single point diamond tool geometry. Abrasive
processes-fixed and loose. Nano grinding-Chemical mechanical Planarization (CMP)- precision
manufacturing applications.

Text Books and References

1. David Dornfeld, Dae-Eun Lee, Precision Manfacturing, Springer, 2008

2. V.C. Venkatesh, Sudin Izman, Precision Engineering, Tata McGraw- Hill, 2007
3. Michael N. Morgan, Andrew Shaw, Otar Mgaloblishvili, Precision Machining VI, Transtech
publications Ltd, Switzerland, 2012

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. Topic No. of

Lectures
1.1 Introduction to precision machining. 1
1.2 Philosophy of precision machine design 1
1.3 Competitive drivers for precision machining 2
1.4 Definition of terms- accuracy, precision and resolution 1
1.5 Metrology and measurement – Abbe's principle 1
1.6 Measurement of dimension and angle 1
1
1.7 Measurement of form- straightness, flatness and roundness

1
1.8 Measurement of surface roughness

2.1 Sources of error in precision machining 2

2.2 Mechanical errors – errors due to machine elements, thermal errors 2
2.3 Errors due to compliance and vibration 1
2.4 Error budget 1
2.5 Error budget flow chart 1
2.6 Role of kinematic design in precision 1
2.7 Principles of design and utilisation of bearings – Aerostatic bearings 1
3.1 Sensors in Precision Machining- classification 2
3.2 Overview of sensors and applications 1
3.3 AE based monitoring of grinding wheel dressing 1
3.4 Description of Fast AE RMS analysis of wheel condition monitoring 1
3.5 Topographical mapping of grinding wheel 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
3.6 AE based monitoring of face milling 1

4.1 Process planning for precision machining 2

4.2 Process planning basics 1

4.3 Factors influencing precision. 1

4.4 Process capability 2

4.5 Relationship between process variability and product specification 1
4.6 Process capability as a planning metric 1
5.1 Precision machining Processes – Diamond turning and milling 1
5.2 Fly cutting diamond machine configuration 1
5.3 Features of diamond machine tool design-applications 1
5.4 Configuration for conical circumferential milling- applications 1

5.5 Typical single point diamond tool geometry 1

5.6 Abrasive processes- fixed and loose 1

5.7 Nano grinding 1

5.8 Chemical Mechanical Planarization 1

5.9 Precision manufacturing applications 1

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET402 MECHATRONICS PCC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course provides the mechanical systems used in Mechatronics and the
Integration of mechanical, electronics, control and computer engineering in the design of
mechatronics systems.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO Level of learning
Course Outcomes
Nos domain
CO 1 Explain the sensors and actuators used in mechatronics 2
CO 2 Design hydraulic and pneumatic circuits for automation. 6
CO 3 Explain the manufacturing processes used in MEMS 2
CO 4 Demonstrate the various components of a CNC machine 2
CO 5 Create a PLC program 6
CO 6 Explain the robotic sensors and vision system 2

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2

CO 2 3 3 3 3

CO 3 3 1 1

CO 4 3 1 1

CO 5 3 3 3 3

CO 6 3 1 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 40 40 70
Apply
Analyse
Evaluate
Create 10 10 30
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Which type of sensor can be used for determining angular movement of a shaft?
2. What is the significance of grey scale in absolute encoders?
3. Which type of actuator can be used for a mechanical system?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the basic structure of a simple hydraulic circuit?

2. Explain the basic structure of a simple pneumatic circuit?
3. Design a hydraulic circuit for two hand operation of a hydraulic press?
4. Design a pneumatic circuit for the sequencing operation A+B+A-B-.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the LIGA process.

2. Explain the MEMS based gyroscope?
3. Explain the deposition-based MEMS manufacturing technique?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the working of ant frictional guideways?
2. Demonstrate suitable methods to achieve antifriction feed drive system?
3. Demonstrate suitable non-contact type measuring system that can be used in CNC?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Discuss About various type of range finders used in robotics?

2. Discuss about various image accusation techniques used in robotics?
3. Discuss various image processing techniques used in robotics?

Model Question Paper

MECHATRONICS - MET402

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

PART – A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Explain the significance of grey codes in an absolute optical encoder?

2. Explain cushioning in pneumatic actuator?
3.Explain with a neat sketch working of a poppet valve.
4. What is meant by high aspect ratio machining? List any 2 methods of manufacturing used
in it.
5. Differentiate between hydrostatic and hydro dynamic bearing used in CNC machines.
6. What is meant by stick slip phenomena in a frictional guideway?
7. Explain the XOR logic using suitable ladder diagram and truth table?
8. Explain the ladder diagram for a delay on timer circuit?
9. Differentiate between CCD and CID camera used in robots?
10. Discuss the functioning of a tactile sensors?

PART -B
Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE – 1

11. List and explain in detail the static and dynamic characteristics of a sensor (10 marks)
OR
12. a) Write a note on rotary actuators. (3 marks)
b) Explain with a suitable diagram various component of a pneumatic system.
(7 marks)

MODULE – 2
13. Develop a hydraulic circuit for the sequencing operation A+B+A-B-? (10 marks)
OR
14. Explain the working of MMS based accelerometer with a neat sketch? (8 marks)

MODULE – 3
15. a) What is meant by preloading? Explain in detail about preloading methods used in a
recirculating ball screw (6 marks)
b) Explain various load acting on a CNC machine structure (4 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR
16. Develop a mathematical model for a general fluid system (10 marks)

MODULE – 4
17.Two motors are to be controlled in a sequence. The second motor starts 30 seconds after
the starting of first motor by a push switch. Develop a PLC ladder diagram for the
following cases and describe the circuit.
Case (A): Only one motor operates at a time.
Case (B): Both the motor gets off together after 50 seconds.3DP (10 marks)
OR
18 Explain the working of an automobile engine management system using suitable diagrams.
Also explain its advantages over conventional automobile system (10 marks)

MODULE – 5
19 a) what is meant by image accusation? Illustrate the working of Charge Coupled Device
for machine vision applications. (10 marks)

OR
20 a) Explain the histogram processing technique in image processing. (6 marks)
b) What is meant by thresholding in image processing? (4 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
Module 1
Introduction to Mechatronics: Structure of Mechatronics system. Sensors - Characteristics -
Temperature, flow, pressure sensors. Displacement, position and proximity sensing by
magnetic, optical, ultrasonic, inductive, capacitive and eddy current methods. Encoders:
incremental and absolute, gray coded encoder. Resolvers and synchros. Piezoelectric sensors.
Acoustic Emission sensors. Principle and types of vibration sensors.
Actuators: Mechanical actuators, Electrical actuators, Hydraulic and Pneumatic actuators

Module 2
Directional control valves, pressure control valves, process control valves. Rotary actuators.
Development of simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits using standard Symbols.
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS): Fabrication: Deposition, Lithography,
Micromachining methods for MEMS, Deep Reactive Ion Etching (DRIE) and LIGA
processes. Principle, fabrication and working of MEMS based pressure sensor, accelerometer
and gyroscope.

Module 3
Mechatronics in Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machines: Design of modern CNC
machines - Mechatronics elements - Machine structure: guide ways, drives. Bearings: anti-
friction bearings, hydrostatic bearing and hydrodynamic bearing. Re-circulating ball screws,
pre-loading methods. Re-circulating roller screws. Measuring system for NC machines - direct
and indirect measuring system.
System modeling - Mathematical models and basic building blocks of general mechanical,
electrical, fluid and thermal systems.

Module 4
Typical elements of open and closed loop control systems. Adaptive controllers for machine
tools. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) –Basic structure, input/ output processing.
Programming: Timers, Internal Relays, Counters and Shift registers. Development of simple
ladder programs for specific purposes.
Case studies of Mechatronics systems: Automatic camera, bar code reader, pick and place
robot, automatic car park barrier system, automobile engine management system.

Module 5
Mechatronics in Robotics-Electrical drives: DC, AC, brushless, servo and stepper motors.
Harmonic drive. Force and tactile sensors. Range finders: ultrasonic and light-based range
finders
Robotic vision system - Image acquisition: Vidicon, charge coupled device (CCD) and charge
injection device (CID) cameras. Image processing techniques: histogram processing: sliding,
stretching, equalization and thresholding.

Text Books

1. Bolton W., Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical

Engineering, Person Education Limited, New Delhi, 2007
2. Ramachandran K. P., G. K. Vijayaraghavan, M. S. Balasundaram, Mechatronics: Integrated
Mechanical Electronic Systems, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
3. Saeed B. Niku, Introduction to Robotics: Analysis, Systems, Applications, Person
Education, Inc., New Delhi, 2006.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. David G. Aldatore, Michael B. Histand, Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement

Systems, McGraw-Hill Inc., USA, 2003.
2. Gordon M. Mair, Industrial Robotics, Prentice Hall International, UK, 1998.
3. HMT, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
4. Vijay K. Varadan, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalakrishnan, Smart Material Systems and MEMS:
Design and Development Methodologies, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., England, 2006.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Introduction to Mechatronics: Structure of Mechatronics system. Sensors - 1
Characteristics
1.2 Temperature, flow, pressure sensors. Displacement, position and proximity
sensing by magnetic, optical, ultrasonic, inductive, capacitive and eddy 2
current methods.
1.3 Encoders: incremental and absolute, gray coded encoder. 1
1.4 . Resolvers and synchros. Piezoelectric sensors. Acoustic Emission sensors. 1
Principle and types of vibration sensors.
1.5 Actuators: Mechanical actuators, Electrical actuators, Hydraulic and 2
Pneumatic actuators
MODULE 2
2.1 Directional control valves, pressure control valves, process control valves. 2
Rotary actuators.
2.2 Development of simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits using standard 2
Symbols.
2.3 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS): Fabrication: Deposition, 2
Lithography, Micromachining methods for MEMS,
2.4 Deep Reactive Ion Etching (DRIE) and LIGA processes. 1
2.5 Principle, fabrication and working of MEMS based pressure sensor, 2
accelerometer and gyroscope.
MODULE 3
3.1 Mechatronics in Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machines: Design of 2
modern CNC machines - Mechatronics elements - Machine structure: guide
ways, drives. Bearings: anti-friction bearings, hydrostatic bearing and
hydrodynamic bearing.
3.2 Re-circulating ball screws, pre-loading methods. Re-circulating roller 2
screws. Measuring system for NC machines - direct and indirect measuring
system.
3.3 System modeling - Mathematical models and basic building blocks of
general mechanical & electrical system 1
3.4 Mathematical models and basic building blocks of general fluid and
thermal systems 1
 MODULE 4 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
4.1 Typical elements of open and closed loop control systems. Adaptive 2
controllers for machine tools. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) –
Basic structure, input/ output processing.
4.2 Programming: Timers, Internal Relays, Counters and Shift registers.
Development of simple ladder programs for specific purposes 2
4.3 Case studies of Mechatronics systems: Automatic camera, bar code reader,
pick and place robot, automatic car park barrier system, automobile engine 2
management system.
MODULE 5
5.1 Mechatronics in Robotics-Electrical drives: DC, AC, brushless, servo and 2
stepper motors. Harmonic drive.
5.2 Force and tactile sensors. Range finders: ultrasonic and light-based range 2
finders
5.3 Robotic vision system - Image acquisition: Vidicon, charge coupled device 2
(CCD) and charge injection device (CID) cameras.

5.4 Image processing techniques: histogram processing: sliding, stretching,

equalization and thresholding. 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COMPREHENSIVE COURSE CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET404
VIVA PCC 1 0 0 1

Preamble: The objective of this Course viva is to ensure the basic knowledge of each student in the
most fundamental core courses in the curriculum. The viva voce shall be conducted based on the
core subjects studied from third to eighth semester. This course helps the learner to become
competent in placement tests and other competitive examinations.

Guidelines
1. The course should be mapped with a faculty and classes shall be arranged for practicing
questions based on the core courses listed in the curriculum.
2. The viva voce will be conducted by the same three member committee assigned for final
project phase II evaluation. It comprises of Project coordinator, expert from
Industry/research Institute and a senior faculty from a sister department.
3. The pass minimum for this course is 25.
4. The mark will be treated as internal and should be uploaded along with internal marks of
other courses.
5. Comprehensive Viva should be conducted along with final project evaluation by the three
member committee.

Mark Distribution
Total marks: 50, only CIE, minimum required to pass : 25 Marks
 MECHANICAL
CATEGORY L ENGINEERING
T P CREDIT
MED416 PROJECT PHASE II
PWS 0 0 12 4

Preamble: The course ‘Project Work’ is mainly intended to evoke the innovation and invention
skills in a student. The course will provide an opportunity to synthesize and apply the knowledge
and analytical skills learned, to be developed as a prototype or simulation. The project extends to
2 semesters and will be evaluated in the 7th and 8th semester separately, based on the achieved
objectives. One third of the project credits shall be completed in 7th semester and two third in 8th
semester. It is recommended that the projects may be finalized in the thrust areas of the
respective engineering stream or as interdisciplinary projects. Importance should be given to
address societal problems and developing indigenous technologies.

Course Objectives
 To apply engineering knowledge in practical problem solving.
 To foster innovation in design of products, processes or systems.
 To develop creative thinking in finding viable solutions to engineering problems.

Course Outcomes [COs]: After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:

Model and solve real world problems by applying knowledge across domains
CO1
(Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Develop products, processes or technologies for sustainable and socially relevant
CO2
applications (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Function effectively as an individual and as a leader in diverse teams and to
CO3
comprehend and execute designated tasks (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Plan and execute tasks utilizing available resources within timelines, following ethical
CO4
and professional norms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Identify technology/research gaps and propose innovative/creative solutions
CO5
(Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).
Organize and communicate technical and scientific findings effectively in written and
CO6
oral forms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2

CO2 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 2 2 1

CO4 2 3 2 2 3 2

CO5 2 3 3 1 2 1

CO6 2 2 2 3 1 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO # Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability
PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of
PO4 complex problems PO0 Communication

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning

PROJECT PHASE II

Phase 2 Targets

 In depth study of the topic assigned in the light of the report prepared under Phase - I;
 Review and finalization of the approach to the problem relating to the assigned topic.
 Preparing a detailed action plan for conducting the investigation, including teamwork.
 Detailed Analysis/ Modeling / Simulation/ Design/ Problem Solving/Experiment as
needed.
 Final development of product/ process, testing, results, conclusions and future
directions.
 Preparing a paper for Conference Presentation/ Publication in Journals, if possible.
 Presenting projects in Project Expos conducted by the University at the cluster level
and/ or state level as well as others conducted in India and abroad.
 Filing Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) if applicable.
 Preparing a report in the standard format for being evaluated by the Department
Assessment Board.
 Final project presentation and viva voce by the assessment board including the
external expert.

Evaluation Guidelines & Rubrics

Total: 150 marks (Minimum required to pass: 75 marks).

 Project progress evaluation by guide: 30 Marks.
 Two interim evaluations by the Evaluation Committee: 50 Marks (25 marks for each
evaluation).
 Final evaluation by the Final Evaluation committee: 40 Marks
 Quality of the report evaluated by the evaluation committee: 30 Marks

(The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project coordinator
and project supervisor. The final evaluation committee comprises of Project coordinator,
expert from Industry/research/academic Institute and a senior faculty from a sister
department).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Evaluation by the Guide
The guide/supervisor must monitor the progress being carried out by the project groups on
regular basis. In case it is found that progress is unsatisfactory it should be reported to the
Department Evaluation Committee for necessary action. The presence of each student in the
group and their involvement in all stages of execution of the project shall be ensured by the
guide. Project evaluation by the guide: 30 Marks. This mark shall be awarded to the students in
his/her group by considering the following aspects:

Project Scheduling & Distribution of Work among Team members: Detailed and extensive
Scheduling with timelines provided for each phase of project. Work breakdown structure well
defined. (5)

Literature survey: Outstanding investigation in all aspects. (4)

Student’s Diary/ Daily Log: The main purpose of writing daily diary is to cultivate the habit of
documenting and to encourage the students to search for details. It develops the students’ thought
process and reasoning abilities. The students should record in the daily/weekly activity diary the
day to day account of the observations, impressions, information gathered and suggestions given,
if any. It should contain the sketches & drawings related to the observations made by the
students. The daily/weekly activity diary shall be signed after every day/week by the guide. (7)

Individual Contribution: The contribution of each student at various stages. (9)

Completion of the project: The students should demonstrate the project to their respective
guide. The guide shall verify the results and see that the objectives are met. (5)
 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Interim Evaluation - 1
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
Good evidence of an implementable
Some of the aspects of the proposed
The project is not addressing any project. There is some evidence for The project has evolved into incorporating
idea can be implemented. There is
useful requirement. The idea is the originality of the work done by the an outstandingly novel idea. Original work
still lack of originality in the work
Novelty of idea, and evolved into a non-implementable team . There is fresh specifications/ which is not yet reported anywhere else.
done so far by the team. The project
Implementation scope one. The work presented so far is features/improvements suggested by Evidence for ingenious way of innovation
2-a 5 is a regularly done theme/topic
[CO5] lacking any amount of original work the team. The team is doing a design which is also Implementable. Could be a
without any freshness in terms of
[Group Evaluation] by the team. from fundamental principles, and patentable / publishable work.
specifications, features, and/or
there is some independent learning
improvements.
and engineering ingenuity.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Good evidence of task allocation Excellent display of task identification and

being done, supported by project distribution backed by documentary
No task distribution of any kind. Task allocation done, but not journal entries, identification of tasks evidence of team brainstorming, and
Effectiveness of task
Members are still having no clue on effectively, some members do not through discussion etc. However, the project journal entries. All members are
2-b distribution among 5 what to do. have any idea of the tasks assigned. task distribution seems to be skewed, allocated tasks according to their
team members. Some of the tasks were identified but and depends a few members heavily capabilities, and as much as possible in an
[CO3] not followed individually well. than others. Mostly the tasks are being equal manner. The individual members are
[Group Evaluation]
followed by the individual members. following the tasks in an excellent manner.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Little or no evidence of continued There is some improvement in the Good evidence of planning done and Excellent evidence of enterprising and
planning or scheduling of the primary plan prepared during phase I. being followed up to a good extent extensive project planning and follow-up
project. The students did not stick to There were some ideas on the since phase I. Continued use of project
after phase I. Materials were listed
Adherence to project the plan what they were going to materials /resources required, but not and thought out, but the plan wasn't management/version control tool to track
schedule. build nor plan on what materials / really thought out. The students have the project. Material procurement if
2-c 5 followed completely. Schedules were
[CO4] resources to use in the project. The some idea on the finances required, prepared, but not detailed, and needs applicable is progressing well. Tasks are
[Group Evaluation] students do not have any idea on the but they have not formalized a budget improvement. Project journal is updated and incorporated in the schedule.
budget required even after the end of plan. Schedules were not prepared. presented but it is neither complete A well-kept project journal showed
phase - I. No project journal kept or The project journal has no useful nor updated regularly. evidence for all the above, in addition to
the journal. details on the project. the interaction with the project guide.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

 The team showed some interim The interim results showed were good
There were significant interim results
Interim Results. results, but they are not complete / and mostly consistent/correct with
There are no interim results to show. presented which clearly shows the progress.
2-d [CO6] 5 consistent to the current stage, Some respect to the current stage. There is
[Group assessment] corrections are needed. room for improvement.
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)
Very poor presentation and there is Presentation is average, and the Good presentation. Student has good Exceptionally good presentation. Student
Presentation
no interim results. The student has student has only a feeble idea about idea about the team's project. The has excellent grasp of the project. The
2-e [Individual 5 no idea about the project proposal. the team work. overall presentation quality is good. quality of presentation is outstanding.
assessment]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Interim Evaluation - 1 Total Marks: 25

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Interim Evaluation – 2
No Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

The student does not show any The student appears to apply some The student is able to show some Excellent knowledge in design procedure
Application of evidence of applying engineering basic knowledge, but not able to evidence of application of engineering and its adaptation. The student is able to
engineering knowledge on the design and the show the design procedure and the knowledge in the design and apply knowledge from engineering
knowledge methodology adopted. The student's methodologies adopted in a development of the project to good domains to the problem and develop
2-f [CO1] 10 contribution in application of comprehensive manner. extent. solutions.
[Individual engineering knowledge in the project
Assessment] is poor.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

The individual contribution is evident.

Involvement of No evidence of any Individual There is evidence for some amount Evidence available for the student acting
The student has good amount of
individual participation in the project work. of individual contribution, but is as the core technical lead and has excellent
5 involvement in core activities of the
members limited to some of the superficial contribution to the project.
2-g [CO3] project.
tasks.
[Individual
Assessment] (0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

None of the expected outcomes are Many of the expected outcomes are Most of the stated outcomes are met.
Only a few of the expected outcomes
Results and achieved yet. The team is unable to achieved. Many observations and Extensive studies are done and inferences
are achieved. A few inferences are
inferences upon derive any inferences on the failures/ inferences are made, and attempts to drawn. Most of the failures are addressed
5 made on the observed failures/issues.
execution [CO5] issues observed. Any kind o f identify the issues are done. Some and solutions suggested. Clear and valid
2-h No further work suggested.
[Group Assessment] observations or studies are not made. suggestions are made for further work. suggestions made for further work.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Documentatio n and The individual student has no idea on The individual's presentation is done
Presentation's overall quality needs The individual’s presentation
presentation. the presentation of his/her part. The professionally and with great clarity. The
5 to be improved. performance is satisfactory.
2-i .[CO6] presentation is of poor quality. individual’s performance is excellent.
[Individual assessment]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Interim Evaluation - 2 Total Marks: 25

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Final Evaluation
No Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
The team is able to show evidence of Excellent knowledge in design procedure
Engineering The team does not show any evidence The team is able to show some of the
application of engineering knowledge and its adaptation. The team is able to
2-j knowledge. [CO1] of applying engineering knowledge design procedure and the
10 in the design and development of the apply knowledge from engineering
[Group Assessment] on the design and the methodology methodologies adopted, but not in a
project to good extent. There is scope domains to the problem and develop an
adopted. comprehensive manner.
for improvement. excellent solution.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Relevance of the The project has some relevance with The project is relevant to the society The project is exceptionally relevant to
project with respect to The project as a whole do not have respect to social and/or industrial and/or industry. The team is mostly society and/or industry. The team has
2-k societal and/or any societal / industrial relevance at application. The team has however successful in translating the problem made outstanding contribution while
5 all.
industrial needs. made not much effort to explore into an engineering specification and solving the problem in a professional and/
[Group Assessment] further and make it better. managed to solve much of it. or ethical manner.
[CO2]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)
Some of the aspects of the proposed Good evidence of an implementable
The project is not addressing any The project has evolved into incorporating
idea appears to be practical. There is project. There is some evidence for the
useful requirement. The idea is an outstandingly novel idea. Original work
still lack of originality in the work originality of the work done by the
evolved into a non-implementable which is not yet reported anywhere else.
done. The project is a regularly done team. There is fresh specifications/
Innovation / novelty / one. The work presented so far is Evidence for ingenious way of innovation
theme/topic without any freshness in features/improvements suggested by the
lacking any amount of original work which is also Implementable. Could be a
2-i Creativity 5 terms of specifications, features, and/ team. The team is doing a design from
[CO5] by the team. patentable publishable work.
or improvements. fundamental principles, and there is
[Group Assessment] some independent learning and
engineering ingenuity. Could be
translated into a product / process if
more work is done.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Only a few of the expected outcomes
None of the expected outcomes are are achieved. A few inferences are Many of the expected outcomes are Most of the stated outcomes are met.
Quality of results / achieved. The team is unable to made on the observed failures/issues. achieved. Many observations and Extensive studies are done and inferences
conclusions / 10 derive any inferences on the No further work suggested. inferences are made, and attempts to drawn. Most of the failures are addressed
2-m solutions. [CO1] failures/issues observed. Any kind of identify the issues are done. Some and solutions suggested. Clear and valid
[Group Assessment] observations or studies is not made. suggestions are made for further work. suggestions made for further work.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

 Presentation slides follow a good style
Presentation slides follow professional The presentation slides are exceptionally
The presentation slides are shallow style formats to some extent. However, format and there are only a few issues.
Organization of the slides is good. Most good. Neatly organized. All references
Presentation - Part I and in a clumsy format. It does not its organization is not very good.
of references are cited properly. The cited properly. Diagrams/Figures, Tables
Preparation of slides. 5 follow proper organization. Language needs to be improved. All and equations are properly numbered,
flow is good and team presentation is
[CO6] references are not cited properly, or and l i s ted. Results/ inferences clearly
neatly organized. Some of the results
[Group Assessment]. acknowledged. Presentation slides highlighted and readable.
are not clearly shown. There is room
needs to be more professional.
for improvement.

2-n (0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Good presentation/ communication by
Presentation - Part The student is able to explain some of Clear and concise communication
the student. The student is able to
II: Individual The student is not communicating the content. The student requires a lot exhibited by the student. The
explain most of the content very well.
Communication 5 properly. Poor response to of prompts to get to the idea. There are presentation is outstanding. Very
There are however, a few areas where
[CO6] questions. language issues. confident and tackles all the questions
the student shows lack of preparation.
[Individual without hesitation. Exceptional traits of
Language is better.
Assessment]. communicator.
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Final Evaluation, Marks: 40

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Report Evaluation
Sl.
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

The prepared report is shallow and not Project report shows evidence of
Project report follows the standard The report is exceptionally good. Neatly
as per standard format. It does not systematic documentation. Report is
format to some extent. However, its organized. All references cited properly.
follow proper organization. Contains mostly following the standard style
organization is not very good. Diagrams/Figures, Tables and equations
mostly unacknowledged content. Lack format and there are only a few issues.
2-o Report [CO6] 30 Language needs to be improved. All are properly numbered, and listed and
of effort in preparation is evident. Organization of the report is good.
references are not cited properly in the clearly shown. Language is excellent and
References are not cited. Mostly consistently formatted. Most of
report. There is lack of formatting follows professional styles. Consistent
Unprofessional and inconsistent references/sources are cited/
consistency. formatting and exceptional readability.
formatting. acknowledged properly.

(0 - 11 Marks) (12 - 18 Marks) (19 - 28 Marks) (29 - 30 Marks)

Phase - II Project Report Marks: 30

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
PROGRAM ELECTIVE III
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET414 QUALITY MANAGEMENT PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course is designed to facilitate the students to understand the concept and
culture of total quality management. It empowers the students by inculcating the skills to use
quality control techniques and other quality tools in solving quality-related problems and
apply these principles in an industry. This course will also amalgamate their knowledge about
the importance of customer satisfaction through desired quality at a competitive price.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 To be conversant with important terms for quality management in organisations

Have a complete theoretical and practical understanding of the contributions of
CO 2
Quality Gurus
CO 3 Demonstrate knowledge of the underlying principles of strategic quality management
CO 4 Identify various human dimensions of TQM
CO 5 Implement different tools and techniques in TQM
CO 6 Identify core and extended modules of ISO 9000 family of standards

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 3 3
CO 2 2 2 2
CO 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3
CO 5 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO 6 2 2 1 1 2 3 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

End Semester Examination
Tests
(in %)
1 (in %) 2 (in %)
Remember 20 20 20
Understand 60 40 40
Apply 20 40 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Marks Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Distinguish between quality control and inspection.

2. What are the TQM axioms?

3. What are the enablers of total quality?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe the Deming approach to TQM.

2. List out Crosby's fourteen steps for quality improvement.

3. Describe Juran’s quality trilogy.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Define strategic quality management.

2. With examples, describe the classification of quality costs.

3. Describe the concepts of Kaizen approach.

Course Outcome 4(CO4):

1. What is meant by employee empowerment with respect to total quality management?

2. What are self managing teams?

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Describe the importance of leadership in TQM

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. “X and R charts always go hand in hand”. Elaborate.

2. What are the measures of Central tendency and dispersion?

3. Describe the principles of cause and effect diagram.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Enumerate the benefits of ISO certification.

2. What are the benefits of quality auditing?

3. Enumerate the steps to be followed by a manufacturing organization to obtain ISO 9001

certification

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET414 Course Name: QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer ALL questions, each carries 3 marks.

1. Define the term” Quality control”.

2. What are the enablers of total quality?
3. Describe the concept of Quality Function Deployment
4. What are the obstacles to achieving successful strategic quality management?
5. What is meant by employee empowerment?
6. Describe the importance of leadership in TQM
7. Describe the principles of cause and effect diagram.
8. Describe the procedure to be followed in a brain storming meeting.
9. Explain the clause in ISO 9001 associated with resource management.
10. What are the benefits of quality auditing?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module-1

11. a) Compare Juran and Deming approaches (7)

b) Explain the characteristics of Total Quality Management. (7)

OR

12 a) Explain the three TQM axioms. (12)

b) Define Quality Planning. (2)

Module-2

13. Describe the steps to be followed to integrate quality into strategic management journey
of an organization. (14)

OR

14. (a) Enumerate the objectives and key principles of lean manufacturing paradigm. (7)

(b) Compare traditional and lean manufacturing paradigms. (7)

Module-3

15. What are self managing teams? What are the benefits and problems associated with
them? Indicate the key steps to be followed to implement them in organizations. (14)

OR

16. What are the ingredients for success for a quality director? What are the activities to be
carried out by a quality director towards assisting upper management with strategic
management (14)

Module-4

17. With the aid of an example, describe the principles of cause and effect diagram. (14)

OR

18. Following are the data on the quality costs incurred in a manufacturing company in a
month:

Title of the quality cost Amount in Rupees

Product audits 1,000

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Scrap Disposal 50,000

Concessions and Downgrading 40,000

Calibration 2,000

Quality planning 500

Manufacturing losses 30,000

System failure 40,000

Test materials 5,000

Training 2,000

Customer returns 25,000

Classify the above quality costs into preventive, appraisal and failure costs. Conduct Pareto
analysis and comment on the results. Suggest a proposal with anticipation on the quality
costs observable in future. (14)

Module-5

19. Describe the steps to be followed for conducting a quality audit. (14)

OR

20. Enumerate the steps to be followed by a manufacturing organization to obtain ISO 9001
certification. (14)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to Quality Engineering - Definitions of the terms - quality, quality planning,

quality control, quality assurance, quality management, Total Quality Management (TQM)-
overview on TQM - the TQM axioms - consequences of total quality- Barriers to TQM-
Deming approach to TQM – Juran’s quality trilogy- Crosby's fourteen steps for quality
improvement

Module 2

Strategic Quality Management: Cost of Quality- Customer satisfaction- Quality Function

Deployment (QFD)- Integrating quality into strategic management - quality and the
management cycle- obstacles to achieving successful strategic quality management- supplier
selection- Concepts of 5S, Six Sigma, Lean, Kaizen

Module 3

Human dimensions of TQM – Top management commitment- Leadership for TQM- Change
management- resources for quality activities - training for quality –Employee involvement,
motivation empowerment- teamwork- self managing teams - role of the quality director

Module 4

Supporting Tools, Activities And Techniques in TQM Projects : Affinity diagram -

brainstorming - cause and effect analysis - process flow chart – check sheets- Scatter
diagram - Pareto chart- Histogram and fundamentals of statistics - Control charts for
improving process capability- Taguchi’s robust design- Total Productive maintenance- Failure
Mode and Effect Analysis

Module 5

Quality System: ISO 9000 family of standards- ISO 9001:2000 model, quality management
system- management responsibility- resource management- product realisation- measurement
analysis and improvements- ISO 14000 family of standards- Quality auditing- types and
benefits.

Text Books

1. Besterfield Dale H. , Besterfield Carol, Besterfield Glen H., Besterfield Mary,

Urdhwareshe Hemant, Urdhwareshe Rashmi, “Total Quality Management (TQM) 5e”,
Pearson Education, 2018.

2. Subburaj Ramasamy, “Total Quality Management”, McGraw Hill Education,, 2017.

3. Dr. K.C. Arora, “Total Quality Management”, S K Kataria and Sons, 2013.

4. Suganthi, L and Anand A Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited, 2009.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

5. Juran J M and Gryna, F M, "Quality Planning and Analysis - From Product Development
through Use", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Limited, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2004.

Reference Books

1. Logothetics N, "Managing for Total Quality - From Deming to Taguchi and SPC", Prentice
Hall Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.
2. Deming W E, “Out of the Crisis," MIT Press, Cambridge, MA, 1982.
3. Juran J M and Juran on “Leadership for Quality" An Executive Handbook, The Free
Press, New York, 1989.
4. Salor J H, "TQM-FIeld Manual," McGraw Hill, New York, 1992.
5. Crosby P B, "Quality is Free" McGraw Hill, New York, 1979.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Introduction to Quality Engineering
Definitions of the terms - quality, quality planning, quality control,
1.1 2
quality assurance, quality management
Total Quality Management (TQM)- overview on TQM - the TQM
1.2 2
axioms - consequences of total quality- Barriers to TQM
Deming approach to TQM - Juran quality trilogy- Crosby's
1.3 3
fourteen steps for quality improvement
2 Strategic Quality Management
Cost of Quality- Customer satisfaction- Quality Function
2.1 2
Deployment (QFD)
Integrating quality into strategic management - quality and the
2.2 management cycle- obstacles to achieving successful strategic 2
quality management
2.3 Supplier selection 1
2.4 Concepts of 5S, Six Sigma, Lean, Kaizen 3
3 Human dimensions of TQM
Top management commitment- Leadership for TQM- Change
3.1 2
management
3.2 Resources for quality activities - training for quality 1
3.3 Employee involvement, motivation, empowerment 3
3.3 Teamwork- self managing teams - role of the quality director 1
4 Supporting Tools, Activities And Techniques in TQM Projects
Affinity diagram - brainstorming
4.1 1

Cause and effect analysis - process flow chart – check sheets-

4.2 3
Scatter diagram - Pareto chart
4.3 Histogram and fundamentals of statistics - 1
4.4 Control charts for improving process capability- 2
4.5 Taguchi’s robust design- Total Productive maintenance- Failure 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mode and Effect Analysis

5 Quality System
5.1 ISO 9000 family of standards 1
ISO 9001 model, quality management system- management
5.2 responsibility- resource management- product realisation- 2
measurement analysis and improvements
5.3 ISO 14000 family of standards 1
5.4 Quality auditing- types and benefits 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET424 INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULICS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course covers the fundamentals of operating principles, configuration

features, functionalities, and applications of various elements in typical hydraulic systems

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Identify the basic elements of a fluid power system

CO 2 Describe the properties of a hydraulic fluid
CO 3 Distinguish between different types of pumps
CO 4 Explain the operation and features of various hydraulic actuators
CO 5 Describe the purpose, construction and operation of various control valves
CO 6 Develop a hydraulic circuit to perform a desired function

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2

CO 2 3 2

CO 3 3 2

CO 4 3 2

CO 5 3 2

CO 6 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

1 2 Examination
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Differentiate between hydraulic and pneumatic system

2. Discuss the advantages of fluid power
3. Describe key applications of fluid power
4. Identify the graphical symbols used for various components of fluid power system

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Describe the properties of hydraulic fluids

2. Discuss the primary functions of hydraulic fluid

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Explain various types of pumps

2. Compare the various performance factors of gear, vane and piston pumps
3. Explain pressure intensifiers
4. Describe various types of accumulators

Course Outcome 4(CO4):

1. Describe the construction and design features of hydraulic cylinders

2. Identify the various types of hydraulic cylinder cushioning and mountings
3. Explain various types of hydraulic motors

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the construction, working and applications of various hydraulic control valves
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

2. Discuss the construction features and functions of conductors

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Illustrate different hydraulic circuits

2. Describe the applications of accumulator

Model Question Paper

Total Pages:
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH MINOR DEGREE EXAMINATION,
COURSE CODE: MET424
COURSE NAME: INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULICS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks) Marks
1 Comment on the differences between pneumatic and hydraulic fluid power 3
systems
2 Differentiate between viscosity and viscosity index. Under what conditions is 3
viscosity index important?
3 Derive an expression for the actual volumetric displacement of the vane pump in 3
terms of the dimensions of the pump components
4 Discuss about the influence of pressure, size and speed on pump noise level 3
5 Sketch and explain Tandem cylinder 3
6 List the advantages of a hydraulic motor over an electric motor 3
7 Discuss why all fluid power systems are fitted with a pressure relief valve 3
8 Explain the construction features and function of flexible hoses 3
9 Explain the purpose of a regenerative circuit 3
10 Write a note on accumulator as hydraulic shock absorber 3

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)
Module -1
11 a) With the help of a neat sketch, explain the basic components of a hydraulic
8
system
b) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a hydraulic system 6
12 a) Explain the desirable properties of hydraulic fluids 6
b) Sketch and describe a rectangular flat-topped reservoir fitted with basic
8
accessories.
Module -2
13 a) Explain with a neat sketch, the working of a gear pump. Also obtain an
8
expression for its volumetric efficiency
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b) With a neat sketch, explain the working of a lobe pump. 6

14 a) With neat sketch, explain how vane pump can be made to work as a variable
7
displacement pump without changing the speed of the prime mover
b) Explain the construction and operation of piston-type accumulators 7

Module -3
15 a) Describe end cushion provided in hydraulic cylinder with neat sketch
b) With the help of a neat sketch, explain the construction and working of a
balanced vane motor. Give its main advantage over vane motor.
16 a) Sketch a semi-rotary vane motor. Derive an expression for its torque capacity 6
b) With a neat diagram, explain the construction and working of in line piston motor
8
(Bent axis design).

Module -4
17 a) Give the classification of check valves and explain the construction and working
7
of pilot-operated check valve, giving the necessary drawing.
b) Explain with neat sketch, how three way and four way direction control valve
7
operate
18 a) With a neat sketch, explain the construction and working of pressure reducing
7
valve
b) With a neat sketch, explain spool type direction control valve used to control
7
double acting cylinder

Module -5
19 a) Describe with a neat circuit diagram, fail-safe system that provide overload
6
protection for system components.
b) Draw the sequencing circuit for operating two double acting cylinders in a
sequence in both strokes. Use appropriate component for the circuit & explain its 8
working for a hydraulic system
20 a) With a neat circuit diagram, explain the working of a meter out circuit for
6
controlling the speed of a cylinder
b) The table of a surface grinding machine needs automatic reciprocating motion.
8
Draw a hydraulic circuit to achieve this motion
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to fluid power: - Classification of fluid power systems- Basic components,

Symbols & circuits of a hydraulic and pneumatic system, Properties of fluids

Hydraulic fluids and fluid handling components: - Fluid for hydraulic systems- Hydraulic
fluids reservoirs- Hydraulic seals- Filters and Strainers

Module 2

Hydraulic pumps:- Classification and pumping theory- Principle of working and

constructional details of vane pump, gear pumps, radial and axial plunger pumps- Pump
performance

Hydraulic pressure intensifiers, Power storage devices –Accumulators

Module 3

Hydraulic actuators:- Linear hydraulic actuators-Types, Cylinder cushions, Rotary actuators –

Classification, construction and working of gear, vane, axial and radial piston motors-
Limited rotation hydraulic actuators- Hydraulic motor performance

Module 4

Hydraulic control valves:-Classification of control valves- Directional control valves-

Pressure control valves- Flow control valves- Servo valves

Hydraulic conductors

Module 5

Hydraulic circuits:- Control of single and double -acting hydraulic cylinder, Regenerative
circuit- Pump-unloading circuit, Double-pump hydraulic system, Pressure intensifier circuit,
Counter balance valve application, Hydraulic cylinder sequencing circuits, Automatic
cylinder reciprocating system, Locked cylinder using pilot check valves, Cylinder
synchronizing circuits- Speed control of a hydraulic cylinder, Bleed-off flow control circuit-
Fail-safe circuits- Hydraulic motor breaking system, Hydraulic circuit examples with
accumulator

Text Books

Anthony Esposito, Fluid Power with Applications, Pearson Education India, 2013 NIL

Reference Books

1. J. J. Pipenger, Tyler Gregory Hicks, Industrial Hydraulics, McGraw Hill,1979

2. Herbert E. Merritt, Hydraulic Control Systems, John Wiley & Sons, 1967
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. S R Majumdar, Oil hydraulic systems: Principles and Maintenance, McGraw Hill

Education, 2017
4. Qin Zhang, Basics of hydraulic systems, CRC Press, 2018

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Introduction to fluid power systems
Introduction to fluid power – Classification of fluid power
systems, Hydraulics and pneumatics systems, Hydrostatic and
1.1 1
hydrodynamic Systems, Advantages, disadvantages and
applications of fluid power
Basic components, symbols & circuits of a hydraulic and
1.2 pneumatic system, Comparison between hydraulic and pneumatic 2
systems, Comparison of different power systems
Properties of fluids- Density, Specific weight, Specific volume and
1.3 Specific gravity- Pressure, head and force- Pascal’s law and its 1
applications-Bulk modulus-Viscosity and viscosity index
Hydraulic fluids and fluid-handling components:-Fluid for
hydraulic systems-Functions of hydraulic fluid, desired properties
1.4 1
of hydraulic fluid, Types of hydraulic fluids, Additives and their
purposes, Factors influencing the selection of a fluid
Hydraulic fluids reservoirs- Functions, Design and constructional
1.5 1
features, Sizing of the reservoir
Hydraulic seals- O-rings, Compression packings, piston cup
1.6 packings, piston rings and wiper rings, Seal materials-Filters and 1
Strainers - Types of filters, Beta Ratio of filters
2 Hydraulic pumps
Hydraulic pumps: Classification and pumping theory, Gear pump-
2.1 Construction and working of external gear pump, Advantages and 1
disadvantages, Theoretical flow rate
Construction and working of Internal gear pump, Lobe pump,
2.2 1
Gerotor pumps and Screw pump
Construction and working of Vane pump, Advantages and
2.3 disadvantages ,Theoretical flow rate, Variable displacement vane 1
pump- Balanced vane pump, Advantages and disadvantages
Piston pump- Axial and radial design, Axial piston pump (Bent-
2.4 axis design, Swash-plate-type piston pump, and Radial piston 1
pump
Pump performance-Volumetric efficiency, Mechanical efficiency
2.5 and Overall efficiency, Pump performance curve, Pump noise and 1
Pump selection
2.6 Hydraulic pressure intensifier:-axial-piston style single and 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

double-acting hydraulic pressure intensifiers

Power storage devices -Accumulators: Types-Weight loaded or
2.7 gravity type, Spring loaded type and Gas loaded (Nonseparator 1
and separator) type
3 Hydraulic actuators
Linear hydraulic actuators-Types-Single acting and double acting
3.1 cylinders, Ram cylinders, Telescopic cylinders and Tandem 1
cylinders
Cylinder cushions, Cushioning pressure, Cylinder force, Velocity
3.2 1
and Power, Acceleration and deceleration of cylinder loads
Cylinder mountings, Mechanics of hydraulic cylinder loadings-
3.3 1
First class, Second class and Third class lever systems
Rotary actuators – Classification, Construction and working of
gear, vane, balanced vane, axial (Swash plate and Bent-axis
3.4 2
design) and radial piston motors, Limited rotation hydraulic
actuators
Theoretical torque, power, flow rate, hydraulic motor
performance- volumetric efficiency, mechanical efficiency and
3.5 overall efficiency, Performance characteristics of hydraulic motor, 2
Comparison of gear, vane and piston motor, Simple numerical
problems
4 Hydraulic control valves
Hydraulic control valves-Classification of control valves,
Directional control valves-symbolic representation, constructional
features of poppet, sliding spool, rotary spool valves, Manual,
4.1 2
mechanical, solenoid and pilot operated DCV, shuttle valve, and
check valves-Two way, Three way, and Four way valves-
Applications
Pressure control valves – types, Simple pressure-relief valve,
Compound pressure-relief valve, Pressure-reducing valve,
4.2 2
Unloading valve, Counterbalance valve and Pressure-sequence
valve- Applications
Flow control valves – Functions of flow control valves, Factors
that determine the flow rate across an orifice or a restrictor,
4.3 compensated and non-compensated FCV, needle valve, 1
temperature compensated, pressure compensated, pressure and
temperature compensated FCV, symbolic representation.
Servo valves-Mechanical-hydraulic servo valve, Electrohydraulic
4.4 1
servo valve, Proportional control valves
Hydraulic conductors- Conductor sizing, Pressure rating of
4.5 conductors, Steel pipes, Steel tubing, Plastic conductors and 1
Flexible hoses, Pressure losses in hydraulic conduits
5 Hydraulic circuits
5.1 Control of single and Double -acting hydraulic cylinder, 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Regenerative circuit- Expression for the cylinder extending speed

Pump-Unloading Circuit, Double-pump hydraulic system,
5.2 1
Pressure intensifier circuit, Counter balance valve application
Hydraulic cylinder sequencing circuits, Automatic cylinder
5.3 1
reciprocating system
Locked cylinder using pilot check valves, Cylinder synchronizing
5.4 1
circuits- Parallel and series
Speed control of a hydraulic cylinder-meter-in and meter-out
5.5 circuit, Meter-in and meter-out flow control of both strokes, 1
Bleed-off flow control circuit
Fail-Safe circuits- Protection from inadvertent cylinder extension
5.6 1
and fail-safe overload protection
Hydraulic motor breaking system, Hydraulic circuit examples with
accumulator- Accumulator as an auxiliary power source,
5.7 1
Accumulator as a leakage compensator, Accumulator as an
emergency power source, Accumulator as a shock absorber
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

PRESSURE VESSEL AND PIPING
MET434 PEC 2 1 0 3
DESIGN

Preamble: To gain knowledge of pressure vessel design, designing of piping and piping
systems, and familiarize with codes and practices in design.

Prerequisite: Solid mechanics/ Strength of materials

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO Level of learning
Course Outcomes
Nos domain
Explain the design considerations of various shell type
CO 1 2
pressure vessels
Explain the design considerations of thick cylinders under
CO 2 2
various kind of loadings
Apply design concepts in the design of shell and supports of
CO 3 3
vertical and horizontal pressure vessels
Solve problems involving the thickness and stiffener support
CO 4 3
requirements of cylinders under buckling loads
Solve problems involving pipe stress and flexibility analysis
CO 5 and also understand the fracture based design concepts of 3
pressure vessels

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 1

CO 2 3 1

CO 3 3 3 3 1

CO 4 3 3 3 1

CO 5 3 3 3 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 30 30 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Derive the expression for membrane stresses in axisymmetric shell structure under internal
pressure
2. Derive the expression for dilation in cylindrical and spherical pressure vessels under
internal pressure
3. Explain the conditions for buckling in ellipsoidal shells and discuss the remedies

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Derive the Lame’s equations of stresses in thick cylinder under internal pressure
2. Find out the stress pattern developed in case of built up cylinders under a given
interference
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

after assembly
3. What are thermal stresses in a pressure vessel and how they are evaluated

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the design steps in the design of tall cylindrical vessel under wind load
2. Explain with neat sketches the supports used in the case of vertical tall self-supported
cylindrical vessels
3. Explain with sketches, various stresses developed in a saddle supported horizontal pressure
vessel

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Derive the expression for critical buckling pressure for cylinder under external pressure
2. Explain with sketches the support design for pipes under external pressure
3. Explain the design curves for design of cylinders under both external pressure and
compressive axial loading

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the flexibility analysis of piping system
2. what is meant by modes of fracture? What is stress intensity factor
3. Explain failure assessment diagram and its usage

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET 434
Course Name: PRESSURE VESSEL AND PIPING DESIGN

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

Part-A

1. Explain the stresses developed in a conical cylinder under internal pressure?

2. Derive the expression for dilation of a spherical shell under internal pressure?
3. Explain with sketches the stress pattern in a built-up cylinder after assembly?
4. Derive the expression for internal pressure for the full cross section yielding of a
cylinder?
5. Explain with sketches, any two types of supports used for tall cylindrical vessels?
6. What are the different sections of ASME pressure vessel code?
7. Explain with sketches, stiffener support for pipe under external pressure?
8. Explain the design curves for pipe under both external and axial compressive
loading?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

9. What is meant by flexibility analysis?

10. What is meant by modes of fracture?
(10X3=30)

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)
MODULE – 1
11. (a) Derive the general expression for stress equilibrium in an axisymmetric shell
under internal pressure (6 marks)

(b) Derive the expression for membrane stresses in an elliptical shell and bring out the
condition for local buckling (8 marks)
OR
12. (a) Derive the expression for stresses developed in a thin cylinder under internal
pressure (6 marks)
(b) Derive the expression for membrane stresses developed in a torus under internal
pressure (8 marks)

MODULE – 2

13. (a) A short Thick cylinder with 1000 mm internal diameter and 1300mm outside
diameter subjected to an internal pressure of 40 MPa. Determine the location and
magnitude of maximum tangential, radial, shear stresses induced. Find also the
dilation of its inner and outer radii. (10 marks)

(b) Sketch the variation of stresses across the thickness of thick cylinder under
internal pressure (4 marks)

OR

14. (a) A steel tube of 240 mm external diameter is shrunk on another steel tube of 80
mm internal diameter. Diameter of junction is 160mm. The interference before
shrinking is 0.08 mm. Find the tangential stress at outer surface of inner tube (ii) the
tangential stress at the inner surface of the outer tube and (iii) radial stress at the
junction after assembly. E=200 GPa (6 marks)

(b) Derive the expression for the internal pressure for intermittent yielding of
cylindrical pressure vessels? (8 marks)

MODULE – 3

15. (a) Explain the design procedure of a tall vessel under wind load as per ASME code?
(8 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(b) Explain with sketches, various supports used in case of tall vessel? (6 marks)

OR

16. (a) Explain the procedure followed in the case of tall vessel under seismic load?
(8 marks)
(b) Explain with sketches, various supports used in case of horizontal pressure vessels
under internal pressure? (6 marks)

MODULE – 4

17. (a) Derive the critical buckling pressure for a circular ring under external pressure?
(8 marks)
(b) Explain the procedure for pipe sizing under external pressure? (6 marks)

OR

18. (a) Discuss the classification of cylinders for design for buckling as per ASME code.
(6 marks)
(b) Explain the following terms (i) factors A & B for vacuum design (ii) Buckling
coefficients (iii) effect of imperfections on buckling strength ? (8 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. (a) Discuss various methods to increase flexibility in a piping system. (6 marks)
(b) A thick walled cylinder with 300 MPa internal pressure, internal diameter 300mm
external diameter 600 mm is having a semi elliptical defect 10mm deep on the inside
surface. The aspect ratio of the flaw is 0.1. Check whether vessel is satisfactory from
fracture point of view. KIC =180 MPa√𝑚 . (8 marks)

OR

20.(a) Explain the following (i) Displacement stress range (ii) stress range reduction factor
(ii) Sustained and occasional loads. (7 marks)
(b) Explain (i) fracture toughness (ii) leak before break (iii) through thickness/surface
flaws. (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1
Pressure vessel – Terminology – Types of loads – Types of pressure- Stresses in pressure
vessels – Dilation of pressure vessels – Membrane stress analysis of vessel shell components
Cylindrical shells, spherical shells, torus, conical head, elliptical head
Bending of circular plates under uniform pressure load with simply supported and clamped
edges (no derivation)

Module 2
Stresses in thick walled cylinders – Lame’s equation for internal and external pressure
Shrink-fit stresses in Built up cylinders, autofrettage of thick cylinders, Thermal stresses and
their significance

Module 3
Design of pressure vessels- shell and support design of tall vessel under wind and seismic
load
Shell and support design of horizontal vessels
Familiarization with relevant ASME codes and standard practices in pressure vessel design

Module 4
Buckling -Elastic buckling of cylinders or pipes under external pressure- Pipe sizing under
external pressure- Design of Stiffeners
Buckling under combined compressive pressure and axial load

Module 5
Pipe stress Analysis -allowable displacement stress range for expected cyclic life-stress
intensification factor and flexibility factor-Flexibility Analysis (Analysis as per clause 119.7.1
in Code ASME B31.1/clause 319.4.1 in ASME B31.3 only)
Fracture based design of pressure vessels- modes of fracture-stress intensity factor -through
thickness and surface cracks in pressure vessels (mode-I only)-fracture toughness-leak before
break-failure assessment diagram

Text Books
1. John F. Harvey, “Theory and Design of Pressure Vessels‟ CBS Publisher and
Distributors
2. Brownell, L. E., and Young, E. H., “Process Equipment Design”, John Wiley and
Sons
3. Somnath Chathopadhyay, “Pressure Vessels Design and practice”, C. R. C Press
4. Prashant Kumar, “Elements of fracture mechanics”, McGraw Hill Education India

Reference Books
1. Henry H. Bender, “Pressure Vessels Design hand book‟
2. ASME Pressure Vessel Codes Section VIII, 2006
3. Dennis Moss,”Pressure Vessel Design Manual” Gulf publishing, 2003
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4. J. Phillip Ellenberger, “Pressure Vessels: ASME Code Simplified”, ASME

5. “American standard code for pressure piping, B 31.1”, ASME.
6. Smith P, “Fundamentals of Piping Design”, Elsevier
7. ASME Pressure Vessel and Boiler code, Section VIII Div. 1, 2, and 3”, ASME
8. T. L Anderson “Fracture Mechanics: Fundamentals and applications” Taylor
&Francis
9. D. Broek, “Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics”, Kluwer Academic
Publications

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Design of thin pressure vessels
Membrane stresses in general axisymmetric shell under internal
1.1 3
pressure
1.2 Stresses and dilation in various kinds of components 2
1.3 Bending plates 2
2 Design of thick pressure vessels
Stresses in thick walled cylinders – Lame’s equation - Shrink fit
2.1 3
stresses in built up cylinders in Built up cylinders
2.2 Autofrettage in cylinders 2
2.3 Thermal stresses and significance 2
3 Vertical and horizontal vessel design
3.1 Design of tall vertical shell structure and its supports 3
3.2 Design of shell and supports for horizontal vessels 3
3.3 Familiarization with standards and codes 2
4 Buckling Analysis
4.1 Derivation of critical buckling pressure under external pressure 2
4.2 Pipe sizing and stiffener support design 3
4.3 Combined circumferential and axial buckling design 2
5 Flexibility analysis and fracture design
5.1 Pipe stress and flexibility analysis 2
5.2 Fracture fundamentals 2
5.3 SIFs, leak before break and failure assessment diagram 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
DATA ANALYTICS FOR
MET444 PEC 2 1 0 3
ENGINEERS

Preamble: The student will understand the techniques to analyse different types of data,
characterize it and can apply them to make decision modelling process more intelligent.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain different data analysis techniques

CO 2 Discuss the concepts behind the descriptive analytics and predictive analytics of data
CO 3 Familiarize with Big Data and its sources
CO 4 Illustrate different visualization techniques in data analysis

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO
3 3 3 1 1 2
1
CO
3 3 3 3 1 1
2
CO
3 3 3 1 1 1 1
3
CO
3 3 3 3
4

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 30
Understand 30 30 40
Apply 10 10 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the different types of prediction errors.

2. What is the need for sampling? Explain about different sampling methods.

3. Compare and contrast analysis and reporting in data analytics with suitable example

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Differentiate descriptive and predictive analysis technique.

2. Explain how attribute selection is carried out in decision tree induction.

3. Write different steps in Apriori algorithm used for finding frequent item sets.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain 3V’s in big data analytics

2. List the different sources of bigdata.

3. With suitable example, give the difference between Business intelligence and data analytics.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Discuss file system used for big data analysis.

2. Explain how recommender systems help in big data analysis.

3. Explain different techniques used for data visualization,

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VIII SEMESTER B.TECH EXAMINATION

MET444 DATA ANALYTICS FOR ENGINEERS

PART A

Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks

1. Explain how significance level affects inferences drawn from data.

2. Define the term correlation between data points.

3. Differentiate classification and prediction.

4. State the different activation functions used in neural networks.

5. Give a brief description about how to perform descriptive analysis in a dataset.

6. Explain frequent item sets in association rule mining with example ?

7. Define bigdata.

8. List the challenges in big data acquisition

9. Explain the term social media analytics.

10. What is the significance of scatter plot matrix?

PART B

Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

Module I

11.Give the significance of resampling technique. Explain the different types of resampling
techniques.

12. Describe the process of hypothesis technique with the help of a suitable example.

Module II

13. Illustrate regression analysis in predictive modelling.

14. Explain how principal components are extracted using PCA.

Module III

15. Differentiate K-means and hierarchical clustering techniques with suitable example.

16. Describe market-based model used in descriptive analysis.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module IV

17. With the help of a neat diagram, describe data analytics lifecycle.

18. a. Describe the characteristics of Big data?

b. Summarize the challenges and applications of big data analytics

Module V

19. What is HDFS? How does it handle Big Data?

20. Illustrate and explain the concept of Map Reduce framework

Syllabus

Module 1 (7 hours)

Introduction to Data Analysis - Evolution of Analytic scalability, analytic processes and tools,
Analysis vs reporting - Modern data analytic tools. Statistical concepts: Sampling
distributions, re-sampling, statistical inference, prediction error.

Module 2 (7 hours)

Predictive Analytics – Regression, Decision Tree, Neural Networks. Dimensionality

Reduction - Principal component analysis

Module 3 (7 hours)

Descriptive Analytics - Mining Frequent item sets - Market based model – Association and
Sequential Rule Mining - Clustering Techniques – Hierarchical – K- Means

Module 4 (6 hours)

Introduction to Big data framework - Fundamental concepts of Big Data management and
analytics - Current challenges and trends in Big Data Acquisition

Module 5 (8 hours)

Popular Big Data Techniques and tools- Map Reduce paradigm and the Hadoop system-
Applications Social Media Analytics, Recommender Systems- Fraud Detection

Text Books

1. EMC Education Services, Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering,
Analyzing, Visualizing and Presenting Data. John Wiley & Sons, 2015.

2. Jaiwei Han, Micheline Kamber, “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Elsevier,
2006.

3. Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, Intelligent Data Analysis, Springer, 2007.2.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. Bart Baesens," Analytics in a Big Data World: The Essential Guide to Data Science
and its Business Intelligence and Analytic Trends”, John Wiley & Sons, 2013
Challenges and Future Prospects, Springer, 2014.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
Module 1
1.1 Introduction to Data Analysis - Evolution of Analytic scalability 1
1.2 Analytic processes and tools 2
1.3 Analysis vs reporting - Modern data analytic tools 2
Statistical concepts: Sampling distributions, re-sampling,
1.4 2
statistical inference, prediction error.
Module 2
2.1 Predictive Analytics – Regression 2
2.2 Decision Tree 2
2.3 Neural Networks 1
2.4 Dimensionality Reduction - Principal component analysis 2
Module 3
3.1 Descriptive Analytics - Mining Frequent item sets 2
3.2 Market based model 2
3.3 Association and Sequential Rule Mining 1
3.4 Clustering Techniques – Hierarchical 1
3.5 K- Means 1
Module 4
Introduction: Fundamental concepts of Big Data management and
4.1 1
analytics
4.2 Data Analytics Lifecycle Overview 2
4.3 Current challenges and trends in Big Data Acquisition 2
Module 5
5 Popular Big Data Techniques and tools 1
5.1 Map Reduce paradigm 2
5.2 Hadoop system 2
Applications Social Media Analytics, Recommender Systems-
5.3 2
Fraud Detection
5.4 Data Visualization techniques-overview 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET454 INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The need for structural integrity of the surfaces of components is an essential
requirement from the point of view of reliability of industrial components. Surfaces need to
possess special properties so to prevent material loss, and to perform with minimal energy
losses by way of friction. Surface treatment methods and prudent lubrication strategies
coupled with testing-equipment/probes for conducting the tribological investigations form the
basic aspects of tribological management in an industry. This course is meant to introduce the
basic aspects of tribology, which a practising engineer or an engineer-analyst working in this
area would require.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply Surface characterisation techniques for tribological investigations

CO 2 Explain theories of friction.
CO 3 Apply theories of wear for industrial problems.
CO 4 Explain Lubrication methods employed in Industrial scenarios.
CO 5 Explain Surface Coating techniques for industrial applications.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 1 3
CO 2 3 2 1
CO 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 2 1
CO 5 3 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 30 30 80
Apply 20 20 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Realize the importance of tribology in mechanical engineering design.

2. Introduce tribology as a Surface Science.

3. Introduce the student to surface characterisation.

4. Learn some specific methods for physical and chemical characterisation of surfaces.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Define coefficient of friction.

2. Learn an equipment to measure friction at the interface of a tribological pair.

3. Analyse different regimes of lubrication in terms of the Stribeck curve.

4. Learn some aspects of the theory of hydrodynamic lubrication

5. Learn the plowing and adhesion theories of friction

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Define Wear, and methods of quantifying wear.

2. Learn theories of wear.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Learn about (i) Four Ball Tester and (ii) Pin-on-disk tester equipment to quantify wear.

4. Discuss wear and friction aspects, in common mechanical engineering scenarios.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Introduce methods of classifying lubricants.

2. Learn the use of different lubricants for different industrial applications.

3. Learn about additives in industrial lubricants.

4. Create awareness related to environmental aspects while using lubricants.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Introduction to surface treatments for better tribological performance.

2. Learn some specific methods employed in surface engineering for industrial applications.

3. Introduction to maintenance of tribological components and diagnostic methods for health

assessment of bearings.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

COURSE CODE : MET454 COURSE NAME : INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY

MAX. MARKS : 100 DURATION : 3 HOURS

PART – A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Write a short note on surface failure modes of machine components.

2. Enumerate few roughness parameters and their significance.

3. Explain the Stribeck diagram with the aid of a typical sketch.

4. Explain the film-thickness-parameter used to demarcate boundary lubrication regime.

5. Differentiate between fatigue wear and fretting wear.

6. What is running-in? How is it taken care of in the case of new automobiles?

7. What are extreme pressure lubricants? Make a short note on one method of testing their
effectiveness.

8. Write a short note on SAE classification of lubricants.

9. Make a short note on coatings for metal cutting tools.

10. Write a short note on the tribological maintenance of roller chains and wire ropes in
industry.

PART – B

(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1

11. (a) Differentiate between (i) backscattered and (ii) secondary images as obtained from a
SEM and when is one imaging type preferred over the other? If you want to image surface
relief on a surface undergone wear, which type would you use? Why? (7 Marks)

(b) On the same surface, if you want to analyse the distribution of phases on it, which of the
above modes should be used? If an element-wise gross estimation of the metallic
composition of the transfer layer formed on the surface is to be obtained, can in it be made
possible within a SEM? How is it realized? Explain the phenomena. (7 Marks)

OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

12. (a) Compare finding the chemical composition of the surface layer using (I) Energy
Dispersive X-ray (EDX)analysis and (ii) X-ray photo-electron spectroscopy. When will you
prefer one method over the other? (5 Marks)

(b) Compare roughness characterization using a (i) mechanical stylus interferometry and
(ii) optical interferometry. Discuss the merits and de-merits of each method. (5 Marks)

(c) Write short notes on Fractal characterisation of surfaces (ii) Bearing- area-curve
( 4 Marks)

MODULE – 2

13. Derive the Reynolds’ one dimensional bearing lubrication equation which expresses the
pressure-gradient in terms of entraining velocity and film thickness factors. What are the
simplifying assumptions involved in the derivation? How can this equation be used to
determine the load carrying capacity of a hydrodynamic bearing? Plot the radial pressure
distribution in the case of a cylindrical journal in a long hydrodynamic bearing. (14 Marks)

OR

14. (a) Compare theories of friction. (5 Marks)

(b) Describe method to visualize and lubricant film and make measurements, in a laboratory
experiment. (7 Marks)

(c) Viscosity of the lubricant is not a significant parameter under boundary lubrication
conditions-discuss. (2 Marks)

MODULE – 3

15. (a) Derive the Archard’s wear equation. What is the usual range of values for Archard’s
wear coefficient? (5 Marks)

(b) Discuss methods of quantifying wear (2 Marks)

(c) Compare wear theories (7 marks)

OR

16. (a) Are friction and wear always correlated? Discuss (4 Marks)

(b) Compare and contrast pin-on-disk testing and four-ball-wear-testing (6 Marks)

(c) Write a short note on improving wear resistance of cylinder liners in engines. (4 Marks)

MODULE – 4

17. (a) Make short notes on the following terms in the context of liquid lubricants: (i)
Viscosity Index (ii) ISO viscosity grades (iii) SAE viscosity grades (iv) pour point
depressants (v) Anti Wear (AW) and Extreme pressure (EP) additives (vi) Bio-degradability
(vii) Eco-toxicity (14 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR

18. (a) Metal working fluids have functions different from that of usual tribological fluids
used in industry- discuss. (3 Marks)
(b)What are the factors limiting the applicability of vegetable oils for tribological
applications in automobiles. (2 Marks)
(c) Discuss methods for engine oil testing (3 Marks)
(d) Explain Environmental impact assessment related to lubricating oils (3 Marks)
(e) Explain the classification of engine oils (3 Marks)

MODULE – 5

19 (a) Explain different methods used for testing of coatings (4 Marks)

(b) Briefly describe about the application of engineering coatings in aircraft industry (4 Marks)

(c) Differentiate between PVD and CVD processes with practical examples from industry
applications (6 Marks)

OR

20 (a) What are signs of bearing failure? Explain a diagnostic method of monitoring bearing
health? (7 Marks)

(b) Discuss improvements in Cylinder-liner technologies for improved tribological

performance in IC engines. (7 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1 (7 Hours)

Tribology as a Surface Science- Tribological considerations in design of machine elements,

and industrial maintenance - surface failure of machine components-Physical and chemical
characterization of surfaces-Surface roughness- tools for roughness characterization-
Industrial norms in roughness quantification/characterization-surface finish symbols-
Characterization of surface morphology – The Scanning Electron Microscope- backscattered
and secondary imaging- X-ray dispersive analysis-. X-ray photo-electron spectroscopy and
chemical characterization of surface films.

Module 2 (7 Hours)

Friction-coefficient of friction- Stribeck curve-Lubrication regimes- Film thickness

parameter- Fundamentals of hydrodynamic lubrication - Hydrodynamic pressure profile-
Visualization and Measurement of film thickness in well lubricated contacts. Boundary
lubrication-plowing and adhesion components-Pin-on-plate arrangement to measure friction.
Theories of friction

Module 3 (7 Hours)

Wear – wear of metals-wear of polymers- Types of wear: adhesive wear-abrasive wear-

corrosive wear-fretting wear- quantification of wear- wear debris analysis. Pin-on-disk
machine and the Four Ball Tester. Friction and wear in the context of internal combustion
engines, Bearings, Gears, cams and tappets, and in metal machining.

Module 4 (8 Hours)

Lubricants: Classification according to Carbon distribution-Viscosity Index-Viscosity Grades

and their choice for various applications-Engine oil viscosity classification. Selection of
industrial Lubricating oils. Metal working lubricants. Types of additives in lubricants for
improved tribological performance. Environmental aspects and sustainability aspects related
to use and disposal of lubricating oils, recycling.

Module 5 (7 Hours)

Surface Engineering: Thermal Diffusion Methods(carburizing,Nitriding, Nitro-carburising,

boriding, chromizing) –Methodical Methods for coating development-PVD Methods-CVD
Methods-Electrochemical deposition-Thermal spraying.

Bearings-Classification of Bearings-Bearing materials-Bearing maintenance, diagnostic

maintenance of Tribological components and considerations in IC engines and automobile
parts, roller chains and wire ropes.

Text Books

1. Prasanta Sahoo, “Engineering Tribology”, PHI, New Delhi, 2005.

2. John Williams, “Engineering Tribology”, Illustrated edition, Cambridge University Press,
2005.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. R.D. Arnell, P. B. Davies, J. Halling, T. L. Whomes, “Tribology: Principles and Design

Applications “, 1991.

Reference Books

1. Theo Mang, Kirsten Bobzin, and Thorsten Bartels, “Industrial Tribology- Tribosystems,
Friction, Wear and Surface Engineering, Lubrication”, Wiley-VCH; First edition, 2011.

2. B. Bhushan,” Principles and Application of Tribology”, Wiley, Second Edition, 2013.

3. G. W. Stachowiak and A. W. Batchelor, “Engineering Tribology”, Butterworth-Heinemann,

Second revised edition, 2000.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module-1 7
1.1 Importance of Tribology in design of machine elements 1 Hour
1.2 Surface roughness- Industrial norms in roughness quantification-
1 Hour
surface finish symbols
1.3 Tools for roughness characterization- 1 Hour
1.4 The Scanning Electron Microscope- 1 Hours
1.5 backscattered and secondary imaging- X-ray dispersive analysis 1 Hours
1.6 X-ray photo-electron spectroscopy and chemical characterization
2 hours
and surface films.
2 Module-2 7

2.1 Coefficient of friction and Pin-on-plate arrangement to measure

1 Hour
friction.
2.2 Stribeck curve-Lubrication regimes- Film thickness parameter 1 Hour
2.3 Fundamentals of hydrodynamic lubrication - Hydrodynamic
2 Hours
pressure profile
2.4 Visualization and Measurement of film thickness in well
1 Hour
lubricated contacts
2.5 Boundary lubrication-plowing and adhesion components 1 Hour
2.6 Theories of friction 1 Hour
3 Module-3 7
3.1 Wear of metals 1 Hour
3.2 Types of wear 1 Hours
3.3 Quantification of wear 1 Hour
3.4 Wear of polymers 1 Hour
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3.5 Pin-on-disk machine and the Four Ball Tester. 1 Hour

3.6 Friction and wear in the context of internal combustion engines,
Bearings, Gears, cams and tappets, and in metal machining. 2 Hours

4 Module-4 8
4.1 Classification of liquid lubricants according to Carbon
1 Hour
distribution-
4.2 Viscosity Index-Viscosity Grades and their choice for various
2 Hours
applications
4.3 Engine oil viscosity classification 1 Hour
4.4 Selection of industrial Lubricating oils. Metal working lubricants. 2 Hours
4.5 Types of additives in lubricants for improved tribological
1 Hour
performance
4.6 Environmental aspects related to use and disposal of lubricating
1 Hour
oils, recycling.
5 Module-5 7
5.1 Carburizing, Nitriding, Nitro-carburising, boriding, chromizing 2 Hours
5.2 PVD-CVD-Electrochemical deposition-Thermal spraying 2 Hours
5.3 Bearings-Classification of Bearings-Bearing materials- 1 Hour
5.4 Diagnostic maintenance of Tribological components 1 Hour
5.5 Maintenance of gear boxes, roller chains and wire ropes. 1 Hour
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MICRO AND NANO
MET464 PEC 2 1 0 3
MANUFACTURING

Preamble: This course serves to enable the learners to understand the underlying principles,
processes and applications with regard to broader areas of micro manufacturing and
nanotechnology. It also covers dimensional metrology aspects and tools for micro and
nanoscale manufacturing.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO 1 Explain different techniques used in micro and nano manufacturing
CO 2 Describe conventional techniques used in micro manufacturing.
CO 3 Describe non-conventional micro-nano manufacturing approaches.
Outline the working principle and applications of micro and nano finishing
CO 4
processes
CO 5 Explain the basics of micro and nano fabrication techniques.
CO 6 Apply and select metrology systems in micro and nano manufacturing.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 - - - - - 1 - 2 1 1 -
CO 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 1 1 -
CO 3 2 - - 2 - - 1 - 2 1 1 -
CO 4 3 - - - - - 1 - 2 1 1 -
CO 5 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 1 1 -
CO 6 3 - - - 1 - 2 - 2 1 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

1 (marks) 2 (marks) Examination
(marks)
Remember 20 20 40
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse - - -
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module, of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14
marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain different techniques used in micro and nano manufacturing.

2. Explain typical fabrication process for an Integrated Chip.

3. Describe 3 basic regimes of fabrication at microscale.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Discuss application areas of micro-turned components.

2. Point out limitations and challenges of micro-extrusion process.

3. List out any 4 application areas of micro-milling process.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. How are micromolds designed?

2. Discuss the principle and process of micro-EDM.

3. Discuss the principle and process of micro-LBM.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. With the help of a suitable diagram, explain the principle of Magnetorheological finishing
process.

2. Describe Magnetic Float Polishing.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Draw the schematic of Elastic Emission Machining and explain.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain how an elastic stamp is manufactured using soft lithographic techniques.

2. Describe the structure and properties of CN tubes.

3. What are the different approaches to deposition of diamond in a CVD Diamond process.
Explain.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Explain Scanning white-light interferometry with the help of a suitable diagram.

2. Outline unique metrological challenges faced in micro-nano manufacturing?

3. Explain Scanning Electron Microscopy in detail.

Model Question Paper

MET464 MICRO AND NANOMANUFACTURING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part−A
Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks
.
1. Define microgrinding.
2. Point out any 3 differences between macroturning and microturning.
3. Why are high speed air turbine spindles useful for micromachining?
4. What is hot embossing? Why is it particularly suited for manufacturing of optical
components?
5. Draw the schematic of Chemical Mechanical Polishing process.
6. Illustrate the mechanism of material removal in Ion beam machining.
7. List out various materials used in semi-conductor industry.
8. Show by a schematic how an elastic stamp is manufactured using soft lithography?
9. Draw the schematic of typical scanning white light interferometry set up.
10. What are the merits and demerits of On-machine metrology?
Part−B

Answer one full question from each module.

Module I

11. Discuss in detail the design requirements of microturning machines. (14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR

12. Discuss the outcomes of microgrinding of ceramic materials. (14 marks)

Module II
13. Discuss the Focused Ion Beam system. (14 marks)
OR
14. Discuss various methods available for manufacturing of micromolding tools. (14 marks)

Module III
15. Describe Magnetic float polishing with a neat diagram. (14 marks)
OR
16. Discuss the principles of MRAFF process with a suitable diagram. (14 marks)

Module IV
17. Explain how a Field effect transistor is fabricated by the process of soft lithography?
(14 marks)
OR
18. Describe all properties of Carbon Nanotubes. (14 marks)

Module V
19. Explain the operation of scanning tunneling microscope. (14 marks)

OR

20. What is Atomic force microscope? Explain its modes of operation. (14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to principles of micro and nano fabrication techniques- microfabrication of semi-

conductor devices-standard micro machining flow chart- basics of micro fabrication-
manipulative techniques. Introduction to mechanical micro machining: Micro drilling-process,
tools and applications, Micro turning- principle, process, tools and applications, Diamond
micro turning- principle, process, tools and applications, Micro milling and Micro grinding-
processes, tools and applications, Micro extrusion- principle, process and applications.

Module 2

Introduction to Non-conventional micro-nano manufacturing: Abrasive Jet Micro-machining,

WAJMM- principle, process and applications. Micro EDM, Micro WEDM, Micro EBM-
principle, process and applications. Micro ECM, Micro LBM, Focused Ion Beams- process,
principle and applications. Micro moulding processes: Injection moulding, Reaction injection
moulding, hot embossing, injection compression moulding- micromolding tools-applications.

Module 3

Introduction to micro-nano finishing processes: Magnetorheological Finishing (MRF)

processes, Magneto-rheological Abrasive Flow Finishing (MRAFF) processes- Principle,
equipment and applications- Force analysis for MRAFF process. Magnetic float polishing
(MFP), Elastic Emission machining (EEM), Ion Beam Machining (IBM), Chemical
Mechanical Polishing (CMP)- principle, equipment and applications

Module 4

Introduction to Nano Fabrication: Nano fabrication using soft lithography- principle and
applications. Introduction to Carbon nano materials- CN tubes- properties and applications. CN
tube transistors-Diamonds- properties and applications- CVD Diamond technology- LIGA
process. Laser micro welding- Electron Beam Micro welding.

Module 5

Introduction to micro-nano inspection and metrology: Scanning electron microscopy, Scanning

white light interferometry, Optical Microscopy, Scanning probe Microscopy, Scanning
tunnelling microscopy, Confocal microscopy, Atomic force microscopy. Introduction to On-
machine metrology.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books and References

1. Mark J. Jackson, Micro and Nanomanufacturing, Springer, 2007.

2. N.P.Mahalik, Micromanufacturing and nanotechnology, Springer, 2006.
3. Mark J. Jackson, Microfabrication and Nanomanufacturing, Taylor and Francis-CRC
press, 2006.
4. V.K. Jain, Micromanufacturing Processes, Taylor and Francis- CRC press, 2012.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
No. Topic COs
Lectures
Introduction to micro-nano fabrication techniques- principles and 1 CO1
1.1
evolution.
Overview of microfabrication of semiconductor devices- example- 1 CO1
1.2
Integrated Chip.
Standard micro machining flow chart and basics of microfabrication- 2 CO1
1.3
manipulative techniques.
Introduction to mechanical micro machining. Micro drilling-principle, 1 CO2
1.4
process, description and applications.
1.5 Micro turning- principle, process, description and applications. 1 CO2
1.6 Diamond micro turning- principle, process, description and applications. 1 CO2
Micro milling and Micro grinding- principle, process, description and 1 CO2
1.7
applications. CO5
Micro grinding- principle, process, description and applications. 1 CO2
1.8

Micro extrusions- principle, process, description and applications. 1 CO2

1.9
CO5
Introduction to non-conventional micro-nano manufacturing- Abrasive jet 2 CO3
2.1 micro machining, WAJMM- principle, process, description and
applications.
Micro EDM, Micro WEDM, Micro EBM- process, principle, description 2 CO3
2.2
and applications.
Micro ECM, Micro LBM- process, principle, description and 1 CO3
2.3
applications.
2.4 Focused Ion Beams-process, principle and applications. 1 CO3
Micromolding process- Injection molding, reaction Injection molding- 1 CO3
2.5
process, principle, description and applications.
2.6 Hot embossing, injection compression molding- description 1 CO3
2.7 Micromolding tools- applications. 1 CO3
Introduction to micro-nano finishing processes- magnetorheological 1 CO4
3.1
finishing (MRF)- process, principle, description, application.
Magnetorheological abrasive flow finishing (MRAFF)- process, principle- 1 CO4
3.2
Force analysis- description and applications.
Magnetic float polishing (MFP)- process, principle, description and 1 CO4
3.3
applications.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Elastic emission machining (EEM), Ion beam machining (IBM)- process, 1 CO4
3.4
principle, description and applications.
Chemical mechanical polishing (CMP)- process, principle, description 1 CO4
3.5
and applications.
Introduction to Nanofabrication- Nanofabrication using soft lithography- 1 CO5
4.1
principle and applications- examples- field effect transistor, elastic stamp.
4.2 Manipulative techniques- principle and description, applications. 1 CO5
Introduction to Carbon nano materials- CN tubes- properties and 1 CO5
4.3
applications- CN tube transistors.
4.4 Diamonds- properties and applications- CVD diamond technology. 2 CO5
4.5 LIGA process. 1 CO5
4.6 Laser micro welding- Electron beam micro welding. 1 CO5
Introduction to micro-nano inspection and metrology- Scanning electron 1 CO6
5.1
microscopy- principle and description.
5.2 Scanning white light interferometry- principle and description. 1 CO6
5.3 Optical microscopy- principle and description. 1 CO6
Scanning probe microscopy, Scanning tunnelling microscopy- principle, 1 CO6
5.4
description and applications.

Confocal microscopy, Atomic force microscopy- principle and 1 CO6

5.5
description.

5.6 Introduction to On-machine metrology. 1 CO6

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

HEATING AND VENTILATION
MET474 PEC 2 1 0 3
SYSTEMS

Preamble: The objectives of the course are:

 The course aims at exposing the students to the areas of heating ventilation and air
conditioning air conditioning systems and their applications.

 The students will be capable to select suitable system for an application.

 The students will be equipped with the basic technical knowledge regarding the
subject, present trends and sustainable practices.
Pre-requisite: MET473 Refrigeration and Air conditioning.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the quality of air to be supplied for comfort and healthy condition.
CO 2 Compare different HVAC systems for an application.
CO 3 Design a HVAC system by selecting suitable components and environmentally safe
refrigerant.
CO 4 Evaluate the cooling load and capacity requirement of ac machine
CO 5 Design the duct for HVAC and make the drawing.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 1 1
CO 2 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 1
CO 4 3 3 3 3 1
CO 5 3 3 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

End Semester
Assignment Test 1 Test 2
Examination
(%) (%) (%)
Remember 25 20 20 10
Understand 25 40 40 20
Apply 25 40 40 70
Analyse 25
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each
question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. What is the need of mixing return air to outdoor air?
2. Explain different types of air filters used and their specification?
3. Explain the % outdoor air requirements for different application?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain VRF system and its advantages?
2. Explain terminal reheat system and its merits?
3. Explain all water system of refrigeration and its draw backs?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Describe different types of refrigerants and their relative ODP and GWP?
2. Differentiate between scroll type compressor and reciprocating compressor?
3. What is cooling tower and explain its working principle?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. An Auditorium has seating capacity 800 people is to be maintained at 23°C

DBTand50% RH. The outdoor conditions are 40°C DBT and 27°C WBT. The various
loads in the office are: Solar heat gain 10KW, sensible heat gain per occupant 80W,
Latent heat per occupant 70W, Lighting load 5KW, Sensible heating load from other
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

sources 12KW, Infiltration load 0.3m3/sec. Outdoor air and return air is mixed in the
ratio of 1: 6 ,before cooling coil (processing unit) and then supplied to room. The
supply temperature cannot be lower than 120C .find capacity of the plant required,
mass flow rate of air.

2. What are ESR, ISEER, GSHF and RSHF? Explain.

3. Explain the method of basement ventilation Systems?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What are the general aspects to be considered while designing a duct system?

2. Explain equal friction method of determination of duct size?

3. Write any five notations, legends, symbols used in HVAC drawing.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEMS–MET474

MAXIMUM: 100 MARKS DURATION: 3 HOURS

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks

1. What is HEPA filter? Where it is used?

2. What is the need of mixing return air to outdoor air??

3. What is the need of air water system of air conditioning system?

4. What is the difference between CAV and VAV system of air conditioning?

5. What are ODP and GWP of a refrigerant?

6. What are the disadvantages of hydrocarbon reorients?

7. What is IPLV of an ac system?

8. Explain the method of basement ventilation Systems?

9. Write any five notations, legends, symbols used in HVAC drawing.

10. What is throw of air?

(10 X 3 = 30 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a.Explain the % outdoor air requirements for different application? 7 marks

b. Explain comfort chart? How to locate comfort region for all-round air conditioning?
7 marks

12. a. Explain effective temperature? What are the factors effecting effective temperature?
. 7 marks
b. Explain any two methods of dehumidification and represent it as line diagram in
psychrometric chart.
7 marks

MODULE II

13. a. Explain Dual duct system with the help of neat sketch? 7 marks

b. Explain VRF system and its advantages over the conventional system? 7 marks

14. a. Explain all air system of air conditioning with the help of neat sketch? 7 marks

b. Explain the air conditioning system suitable for an auditorium, restaurant and bed
room with proper justifications? 7 marks

MODULE III

15. a. Explain CFC, HCFC, and HFC, HC refrigerants with suitable examples and relative
merits and demerits. 7 marks

b. What are the methods to check leak and ensure capacity during commissioning of an
ac system? 7 marks

16. a. Explain scroll type compressor with the help of a neat sketch? 7 marks

b. What is the use of a cooling tower? Explain the working with the help of a neat sketch.
7 marks

MODULE IV

17. a. An Auditorium has seating capacity 800 people is to be maintained at 23°C

DBTand50% RH. The outdoor conditions are 40°C DBT and 27°C WBT. The various loads
in the office are: Solar heat gain 10KW, sensible heat gain per occupant 80W, Latent heat
per occupant 70W, Lighting load 5KW, Sensible heating load from other sources 12KW,
Infiltration load 0.3m3/sec. Outdoor air and return air is mixed in the ratio of 1: 6 ,before
cooling coil (processing unit) and then supplied to room. The supply temperature cannot be
lower than 120C .find capacity of the plant required, mass flow rate of air. 10 marks

b. Explain different thermal insulation materials used in ac system. 4 marks

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

18.a. Explain various heating loads in an auditorium? How infiltration load accounted while
calculating RSHF 7 marks

b. explain bypass factor. Represent the bypass factor in a psychrometric chart for a cooling
coil. 7 marks

MODULE V

19 a. A packaged air conditioner serves four rooms in an apartment. The schematic layout of
the duct system together with the volume flow rate to each room is shown in Figure. The duct
shall be of standard round sections. The air velocity in the first section is not to exceed 25
m/s. There is a pressure drop of 5 Pa at each of the outlet grilles at F,H,M and K. Assume the
resistance due to the fittings as below. Assume pressure drop at Elbow 2 pa, pressure drop at
Tee joint= 1Pa. Determine the size of the duct system using the equal-friction method.
Estimate the static pressure drop in each line

12 marks

b. What is spread of air? 2 marks

20 a. Explain Principles of air distribution. 7 marks

b. draw a simple drawing of an air conditioning system for a conference hall of seating
capacity 50 people? 7 marks
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1- Introduction to HVAC

Importance of HVAC systems. Standard requirements of ventilation air for different

applications. Air changes per hour -Conditions for comfort –comfort chart, effective
temperature. Factors effecting effective temperature, Methods of dehumidification,
humidification, and temperature control. Mixing of air stream. Type of air filters and their
specification, HEPA filters.

Module 2 Air conditioning systems.

Unitary system, window , split system, central station system, all air system, all water system,
air-water system, VAV system , CAV systems Terminal reheat system, Dual duct system,
Multi- zone system, Fan Coil units , relative merits and demerits – selection of particular
system for an application. Cassette ac system. VRF system and inverter AC - relative merits.

Module 3 Components of HVAC

Type of Compressors used- rotary, reciprocating, scroll type- cooling and heating coil.
Environment friendly refrigerants.CFC, HCFC, HFC, HC refrigerants.Ozone depletion
potential(ODP), global warming potential(GWP), use of boilers in HVAC, ducts, electrical
systems for HVAC, air distribution system -types of outlets- diffusers- condensers, cooling
tower, air handling unit, pumps, air dampers. Hot water generator and chilled condenser
water piping. Testing and maintenance on ducts and pipes. Refrigerant leak detection
methods.

Module 4 Systems and Applications

Capacity determination of an ac machine. COP, EER, IEER, IPLV, star rating, specification
of capacity TONs, HP, Cooling load calculation, sensible heat loads, latent heat loads, SHF,
RSHF, GSHF, infiltration, bypass factor, Numerical examples. Methods to check the
capacity during commissioning of new ac machine. Passive techniques to reduce cooling
loads or heating loads in building. Insulation materials.

Basement ventilation Systems, Basement ventilation. Car park ventilation, Toilet, pantry
ventilation.

Module 5 Duct design

General consideration of duct design. Duct size determination. Equal friction method,
balanced capacity method, Static regains method assumed velocity method. Location with
due consideration for reduction of heat gain. Layout of supply and return air ducts. General
considerations in air duct design layout. Throw of air, Spread of air, Entrainment ratio,
Principles of air distribution, Sound and Vibration control techniques.

HVAC drawings, understanding notations, legends, symbols used in HVAC drawing.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Arora C.P, Tata McGraw hill.

2. A Course in Refrigeration and air conditioning Arora S. C. and S. Domkundwar, Dhanpat

Rai and Company. 2002

3. A text book of Refrigeration and air conditioning – R.K .Regiput, Katson books.

4. Refrigeration and air conditioning - Ahamadul Ameen Eastern economy addition.

5. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: Analysis and Design, Faye C.

Mcquiston, Jerald D. Parker, Jeffrey D. Spitler, John Wiley and sons. New York

Data books

1. Refrigeration tables and charts including air conditioning data, C P Kothandaraman, New
Age International.

2. Refrigeration and air conditioning data book, Domkunduwar and Domkundwar, Dhanpat
Rai & co.

Reference books

1. ASHRAE Handbook 201(Volume 1, 2, 3)

2. Principles of heating ventilation and air conditioning in building, john Dixon, Delmar
learning

3. Analysis and design of heating ventilation and air conditioning system, Herbert W
Stanford and Adam F spach, CRC press -Taylor and Francis.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

HOURS
MODULE TOPICS
ALLOTED

Importance of HVAC systems. Standard requirements of

2-1-0
ventilation air for different applications. Air changes per hour

Conditions for comfort –comfort chart, effective temperature.

1
Methods of dehumidification, humidification, and temperature 2-0-0
control. Mixing of air stream.

Type of air filters and their specification, HEPA filters. 1-0-0

Unitary system, window , split system, central station system, all

air system, all water system, air-water system, VAV system ,
2 CAV systems Terminal reheat system, Dual duct system, Multi-
zone system, Fan Coil units , relative merits and demerits – 3-1-0
selection of particular system for an application. Cassette ac
system. VRF system and inverter AC - relative merits.

Type of Compressors used- rotary, reciprocating, scroll type,

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

cooling and heating coil. Environment friendly refrigerants.CFC,

HCFC, HFC, HC refrigerants.Ozone depletion potential(ODP),
3 global warming potential(GWP), use of boilers in HVAC, ducts, 4-2-0
electrical systems for HVAC, air distribution system -types of
outlets- diffusers- condensers, cooling tower, air handling unit,
pumps, air dampers. Hot water generator and chilled condenser
water piping. Testing and maintenance on ducts and pipes.
Refrigerant leak detection methods.

Capacity determination of an ac machine. COP, EER, IEER,

IPLV, star rating, specification of capacity TONs, HP, Cooling
load calculation, sensible heat loads, latent heat loads, SHF, 4-2-0
RSHF, GSHF, infiltration, bypass factor, Numerical examples

4 Methods to check the capacity during commissioning of new ac

machine. Passive techniques to reduce cooling loads or heating 2-1-0
loads in building. Insulation materials.

Basement ventilation Systems, Basement ventilation. Car park

2-0-0
ventilation, Toilet, pantry ventilation.

General consideration of duct design. Duct size determination.

Equal friction method, balanced capacity method, Static regains
method assumed velocity method. Location with due
5 consideration for reduction of heat gain. Layout of supply and 3-1-0
return air ducts. General considerations in air duct design layout.
Throw of air; Spread of air, Entrainment ratio, Principles of air
distribution, Sound and Vibration control techniques.

HVAC drawings, understanding notations, legends, symbols used

in HVAC drawing. Simple drawing of a ac system for an 3-1-0
auditorium and conference room
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
PROGRAM ELECTIVE IV
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET416 COMPOSITE MATERIALS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course helps the students to understand the concept of various matrices and
reinforcements used in composites. The course also covers about types of fibers, polymer
matrix composites, metal matrix composites, ceramic matrix composites and its
manufacturing and applications, micromechanics of composites

Prerequisite: EST100 METALLURGY & MATERIAL SCIENCE

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

To understand history about composites, various matrices and reinforcements used in

CO1
composites
To understand types of fibers/ whiskers used in composites, structure, properties and
CO2
applications, manufacturing process
To know about polymer matrix composites, classification, properties, characteristics
CO3
and applications, manufacturing methods.
To know about metal matrix composites, classification, properties, characteristics and
CO4 applications, manufacturing methods. Alloys and their potential role as matrices in
composites. To understand about intermetallics.
To know about ceramic matrix composites, classification, properties, characteristics
CO5
and applications, manufacturing methods, micromechanics of composites

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 3

CO 2 3 3

CO 3 3 3

CO 4 3 3

CO 5 3 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment
Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 25 25 25
Understand 15 15 15
Apply 30 30 30
Analyse 10 10 10
Evaluate 10 10 10
Create 10 10 10

Mark distribution
ESE
Total Marks CIE ESE
Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions
from each module and having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all
questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have a maximum of 2 subdivisions.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1 Explain about history of evolution of composites
2 Explain about the function of reinforcement and matrix in composite
3 Classify the composite according to type of matrix and reinforcement
4 What are the advantages and disadvantages of composites
5 Discuss about smart composites
6 Explain about types of bonding at interface
7 Explain about wettability of composites

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1 Compare between natural fibers and synthetic fibers
2 Explain the procedure of boron fiber fabrication
3 Explain Ex-Pan carbon fiber and Ex-Pitch carbon fiber fabrication
4 With neat sketched explain Ex-cellulose carbon fiber.
5 Discuss about aramid fiber fabrication
6 Explain whiskers with examples.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1 Discuss about thermoset, thermoplastic and elastomeric polymeric materials
2 Explain different hand lay methods
3 Expalin different moulding methods for PMC

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1 How the metal matrix composites are classified
2 Explain the role of intermetallics in MMC
3 What are the properties, characteristics and applications of MMC
4 Explain different production techniques of MMC

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1 How CMC are classified and their potential role as matrices material.
2 What are the properties, characteristics and applications of CMC.
3 Explain conventional techniques for the production of CMC.
4 Explain maximum stress and strain criterion related to micromechanics of composites
5 Derive expression for Tsai-Hill and Tsai-Wu failure criterion.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code : MET416

Course Name : COMPOSITE MATERIALS

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

PART – A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1) What are the conditions to be satisfied for a material to be called as a composite

material.

2) Define wettability in fiber-matrix bonding and its importance in composite properties.

3) What are the important application of aramid fibers.

4) Write a short note on Boron fibers.

5) Compare thermosetting and thermoplastic matrix material.

6) List the function of components in pultrusion technique used in PMCs.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

7) What are the modifications required in casting process for improving the properties of
metal matrix composites.

8) Name the metals and their properties used in metal matrix composites.

9) With the aid of neat sketch explain lanxide process.

10) What are the different failure modes of fiber composites?

PART – B

(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1
11. (a) Classify the composite materials based on the geometry of the reinforcement and
matrix. ( 7 Marks)
(b) Explain the different types of bonding interfaces in composites with sketches.

( 7 Marks )
OR
12. (a) What are the advantages of composite materials over the conventional engineering
materials? (6 marks)

(b) Explain about 1) Fiber pull out 2) Delamination 3) Fiber bridging 4) Debonding
( 8 Marks )
MODULE – 2

13. (a) How the carbon fibers are produced from PAN? (7 marks)

(b) Describe the filament winding process in polymer matrix composites. (7 marks)

OR

14. (a) Explain different types of whiskers with examples. (7 marks)

(b) Write a short note on wet jet spinning process for producing aramid fibers

(7 marks)
MODULE – 3
15. (a) With neat sketch, explain the hand lay-up process? (7 marks)

(b) With neat sketches explain manufacturing of laminated composite using

prepreg (7 marks)
OR
16. (a) Explain the significance of various polymer materials used for PMC production?
(7 marks)
(b) With neat sketch, explain the bag moulding process? (7 marks)

MODULE – 4
17. (a) With neat sketches explain about In situ process by unidirectional solidification
(7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(b) With the aid of neat sketch explain Squeeze casting method for MMC?
(7 marks)
OR

18. (a) Explain application of precipitation-hardenable alloy materials used in the

manufacture of metal matrix composites (7 marks)

(b) Write a short note about diffusion bonding. (7 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. (a) With neat sketches explain liquid infiltration process in ceramic matrix composites

(7 marks)

(b) State and explain the maximum- stress theory for predicting the composite failure
(7 marks)
OR

20. (a) Explain the in-situ chemical reaction techniques for CMC production? (7 marks)

(b) Describe the Tsai-Hill failure criteria for composites. (7 marks)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

Module 1
Composite : Introduction, definition, characteristics, functions, classification of composites
based on structure and matrix , smart composites, advantages and limitations, history,
industrial scene and applications, Interfaces: wettability and bonding interface in composites.
types of bonding at interface.

Module 2
Fibers : Introduction, types of fibers, natural fibers, glass fiber fabrication, structure, properties
and applications, boron fiber fabrication, structure, properties and applications, carbon fiber,
Ex-Pan carbon fiber, Ex cellulose carbon fiber, Ex-Pitch carbon, carbon fiber structure,
properties and applications, aramid fiber fabrication, structure, properties and applications,
whiskers: characteristics, properties and applications.

Module 3
Polymer matrix composites (PMC) : thermoset, thermoplastic and elastomeric polymers,
properties, characteristics and applications as matrix materials, processing of polymer matrix
composites: hand methods, Lay up method, spray up method, moulding methods, pressure
bagging and bag moulding methods, Autoclave-based processing with prepregs, pultrusion and
filament winding process.

Module 4
Metal matrix composites (MMC) : classification of metals, intermetallics, alloys and their
potential role as matrices in composites, properties, characteristics and applications of metals
as matrix materials, production techniques: powder metallurgy, diffusion bonding, melt
stirring, squeeze casting, liquid infiltration under pressure, insitu process.

Module 5
Ceramic matrix composites (CMC) : classification of ceramics and their potential role as
matrices, properties, characteristics and applications of ceramics as matrix materials,
conventional techniques : cold pressing and sintering, hot pressing, reaction bonding, liquid
infiltration, pultrusion. lanxide process, insitu chemical technique, sol-gel technique,
Micromechanics of composites: maximum stress and strain criterion (derivations only). Tsai-
Hill and Tsai-Wu failure criterion (derivations only). mechanics of load transfer from matrix
to fiber (description)

Text Books
1. K. K. Chawla, Composite Materials : Science and Engineering, Springer, 3e, 2013.
2. P.K.Mallicak, Fiber-reinforced composites , Monal Deklar Inc., New York, 1988.
3. Reddy J N (Ed.), Mechanics of Composite Materials; Selected Works of Nicholas
J. Pagano, Springer, 1994
4. Robert M. Jones, Mechanics of Composite Materials, CRC Press, 1998
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books
1. F.L.Matthews & R.D.Rawlings, Composite Materials, Engineering and Sciences,
Chapman & hall, London, 1994
2. Hand Book of Composites, George Lubin. Van Nostrand, Reinhold Co. 1982
3. Micael hyer, Stress Analysis of Fiber - Reinforced Composite Materials , Tata
McGraw Hill, 1998.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No of
No Topic lectures +
Tutorial
1 Module 1: Introduction to composites 7 hours

1.1 Composite : Introduction, definition, characteristics, functions

1L
Classification of composites based on structure and matrix: History,
1.2
industrial scene and applications 1L

1.3 Smart composites, advantages and limitations

1L+1L

1.4 Interfaces: wettability and bonding interface in composites

1L

1.5 Types of bonding at interface. 1L + 1T

2 Module 2: Types of fibers/ whiskers used in composites 7 hours

2.1 Fibrs : Introduction, types of fibers, natural fibers 1L

Fiberization, stabilization, carbonization, graphitization, glass fiber

2.2 1L
Fabrication, structure, properties and applications

2.3 Boron fiber fabrication, structure, properties and applications 1L

Carbon fiber, Ex-Pan carbon fiber, Ex-Pitch carbon, Ex cellulose carbon

2.4 1L + 1T
fiber
2.5 Aramid fiber fabrication, structure, properties and applications 1L
2.6 Whiskers: characteristics, properties and applications. 1L

3 Module 3: Polymer matrix composites 6 hours

Polymer matrix composites (PMC) : thermoset, thermoplastic and

3.1 1L
Elastomeric polymers
3.2 Properties, characteristics and applications as matrix materials 1L
Processing of polymer matrix composites: hand methods, Lay up method,
3.3 1L
spray up method
Moulding methods, pressure bagging and bag moulding methods,
3.4 1L + 1T
Autoclave-based processing with prepregs
3.5 Pultrusion and filament winding process. 1L
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4 7 hours
Module 4: Metal matrix composites
Classification of metals, intermetallics, alloys and their potential role as
4.1 2L
matrices in composites
4.2 Properties, characteristics and applications of metals as matrix materials 1L
Production techniques: powder metallurgy, diffusion bonding, melt
4.3 1L + 1T
stirring
4.4 Squeeze casting, liquid infiltration under pressure, insitu process. 1L + 1T
Module 5: Ceramic matrix composites & Micromechanics of
5 8 hours
composites
5.1 Classification of ceramics and their potential role as matrices 1L
5.2 Properties, characteristics and applications of ceramics as matrix materials 1L
Conventional techniques : cold pressing and sintering, hot pressing,
5.3 1L
Reaction bonding, liquid infiltration, pultrusion.
5.4 Lanxide process, insitu chemical technique, sol-gel technique 1L
Micromechanics of composites: maximum stress and strain criterion
5.5 1L + 1T
(derivations only)
5.6 Tsai-Hill and Tsai-Wu failure criterion (derivations only) 1L
5.7 Mechanics of load transfer from matrix to fiber (description only) 1L
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND
MET426 PEC 2 1 0 3
MACHINE LEARNING

Preamble: This course is specifically designed for Mechanical Engineers to get

acquainted with essential mathematical concepts, brush up on their statistics and the
fundamentals of ML and AI

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to
Level of
CO
Course Outcomes learning
Nos
domain
Illustrate the basic mathematics of artificial intelligence and
CO 1 2
Machine learning
CO 2 Explain the concepts of artificial intelligence 2
Explain machine learning techniques and computing environment
CO 3 2
that are suitable for the applications under consideration
Develop scaling up machine learning techniques and associated
CO 4 3
computing techniques and technologies for various applications
CO 5 Explain data analytics and Machine learning Applications 2

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2 1
CO 2 3 2 2 1
CO 3 3 2 2 1
CO 4 3 2 2 1
CO 5 3 2 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 40 40 70
Apply 10 10 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Define Maximum error estimate
2. Define simple correlation and write formula for simple correlation coefficient
3. Write the expression for the control line and three sigma for mean Chart

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. What is Artificial Intelligence?
2. Application of Artificial Intelligence
3. Explain about neural networks?

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Machine learning concepts with examples.
2. Discuss supervised and unsupervised learning?
3. Write a program using python

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain KNN?
2. What is web scraping?
3. Discuss about Natural Language processing

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What are the benefits of Data science for Mechanical Engineers?
2. Explain about Numpy and pandas
3. Write about the potential applications of Machine learning in manufacturing sector?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Model Question Paper

MET 426 - ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

Part – A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Define Maximum error estimate

2. Write the normal equations for the least square curve of the form y = abx
3. What are the Problem Characteristics of Artificial Intelligence?
4. What is a Rule based programming?
5. Define machine learning.
6. Discuss any four examples of machine learning applications
7. Write down the major differences between K-means clustering and hierarchical clustering
8. Explain the different string formats available in Python with examples
9. What is data science and its benefits?
10. What are the goals of data science?
PART -B
Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE – 1
11. Find moment generating function for binomial distribution and hence find its mean and
variance (14 marks)
OR
12. Samples of size 2 are taken from the population 4,8,12,16,20,24 with replacement. Find
a) The mean of the population
b) The standard deviation of the population
c) Mean of the sampling distribution of means
d) The standard deviation of the sampling distribution of mean. (14 marks)

MODULE – 2
13. Give details of the year-wise development of AI. How AI is being used in the area of
Mechanical engineering research (14 marks)
OR
14. (a) Differentiate between the various learning methods: neural networks, reinforcement
learning and genetic algorithm (8 marks)
(b) What are the various heuristic techniques .Explain how they are different from the
solution guaranteed techniques (6 marks)

MODULE – 3
15. Distinguish between supervised learning and Reinforcement learning. Illustrate with an
example (14 marks)
OR
16. (a) Write a program to print the sum of the following series 1 + 1/2 + 1/3 +. …. + 1/n
(8 marks)
b) Explain the need for continue and break statements. Write a program to check whether
a number is prime or not. Prompt the user for input. (6 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE – 4
17. Explain about web scraping and discuss about the possibility of usage (14 marks)
OR
18. (a) Explain about Semantic Analysis? (4 marks)
b) What do you understand by Natural Language Processing? List any two real-life
applications of Natural Language Processing. (10 marks)

MODULE – 5
19. (a) Illustrate with an example different stages of data science project. (8 marks)
b) How the AI technology used in automobile industry (6 marks)

OR
20. Explain the importance of Machine learning concepts in manufacturing sector (14 marks)

Syllabus
Module 1

Fundamentals of probability and statistics – Probability theory- sample and population –

statistical interference – random process – logical relations – conditional probability – density
function – distributions – regressions – parametric estimation – non parametric – statistical
test.

Module 2
Introduction to artificial intelligence - Typical Applications, Keras API, Artificial Neural
Networks (ANNs): Concept, Activation Functions, Feed Forward Neural Networks and Back
Propagation-Working of CNN, Convolutional Layer, Pooling, Flatten, Image recognition
techniques and feature Extraction fundamentals

Module 3
Machine learning: Introduction, Types of Machine Learning: Supervised, Unsupervised and
Reinforcement learning, Applications, Classification vs Prediction Problems, Linear
Regression Algorithm, Python Basics – string, number, list, tuple, Dictionary, functions,
conditional statement, Loop statements, simple programming exercises using python

Module 4
Introduction to KNN (K Nearest Neighbor), Working of KNN, Decide the value of K,
Confusion Matrix, Accuracy Score, Web Scraping Basics- Need of Web Scraping, Natural
Language Processing: Introduction, Stages in natural language Processing, Application of
NLP in Real world applications

Module 5
Introduction to Data Science, Flow of Data Science, Numpy, Pandas, Matplotlib. Machine
Learning Applications across Industries.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Text Books

1. T.K.V. Iyengar “Probability & Statistics”, S.Chand (G/L) & Company Ltd, 2008
2. Schalkoff, R.J., “Artificial Intelligence: An Engineering Approach”, McGraw-Hill,
1990
3. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A modern approach”. Prentice
Hall, New Jersey, 1995
4. Ethem Alpaydin, Introduction to Machine Learning, 2nd edition, MIT Press 2010
5. Tom Mitchell, Machine Learning, McGraw-Hill, 1997

Reference Books

1. Nilson, N. J., “Principles of Artificial Intelligence”, Springer Verlag, Berlin, 1980

2. Eugene Charniak and Drew McDermot, “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence”,
Addison Wesley Longman Inc., 1998
3. Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome Friedman, The Elements Of Statistical
Learning, Second edition Springer 2007

4. Shai Shalev-Shwartz and Shai Ben-David., Understanding Machine Learning ,

Cambridge University Press. 2017

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Probability theory- sample and population – statistical interference 2
1.2 random process – logical relations 2

1.3 conditional probability – density function – distributions

2
1.4 Parametric estimation – non parametric – statistical test. 1
MODULE 2
2.1 Introduction to artificial intelligence - Typical Applications 1
2.2 Keras, API 1
2.3 Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs): Concept, Activation Functions 2
2.4 Feed Forward Neural Networks and Back Propagation- 1
Working of CNN, Convolutional Layer, Pooling, Flatten, Image
2.5 2
recognition techniques
MODULE 3
3.1 Machine learning: Introduction 1
3.2 Supervised, Unsupervised and Reinforcement learning, 2

3.3 Classification vs Prediction Problems, Linear Regression Algorithm

2

3.4 Python Basics, simple programming exercises using python

2
MODULE 4
4.1 Introduction to KNN (K Nearest Neighbor), Working of KNN 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4.2 Confusion Matrix, Accuracy Score

2

4.3 Web Scraping Basics- Need of Web Scraping

2
Natural Language Processing: Introduction, Stages in natural language
4.4
Processing 1
MODULE 5
5.1 Introduction to Data Science 2
5.2 Flow of Data Science 2
5.3 Numpy, Pandas, Matplotlib 2

5.4 Machine Learning Applications across Mechanical Industries

2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ACOUSTICS AND NOISE
MET436 PEC 2 1 0 3
CONTROL

Preamble: Course objectives:

 To understand the principles of acoustics.

 To give awareness about different acoustic measurement instruments and analysis
equipment.
 To introduce the importance of noise control
 To give awareness about regulations and standards related to noise exposure.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Level of
CO No. Course Outcomes learning
domain
Explain various acoustic terminologies and understand the physics
CO 1 2
behind acoustic wave propagation
Evaluate reflection and transmission coefficients in sound transmission
CO 2 5
through different media and understand the concept of standing waves
Explain the mechanism of hearing, concept of noise, various noise
CO 3 2
criteria and standards
Explain different noise measures and various noise measurement
CO 4 2
devices
CO 5 Apply noise control measures to different machines and devices 3

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2

CO 2 3 3 3 3

CO 3 3 3 2 3 3

CO 4 3 3 2 3

CO 5 3 3 3 3 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 20 20 50
Analyse
Evaluate 10 10 20
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Derive acoustic wave equation. Deduce the equation for plane acoustic wave

2. Describe about Acoustic impedance, Energy density and Sound intensity.

3. a) Discuss about different ‘levels’ of sound measurement

b) A harmonic plane wave is propagating with frequency 35 Hz in air at room temperature.

The acoustic pressure at a point 1.5 m from the sound source at a time 2 s from the instant
of observation is 0.2 Pa. Find the acoustic pressure at the same point at 4 s.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe about spherical waves, beam width and directivity index.

2. Sound wave is propagating from a fluid medium of density𝜌 to a fluid medium of density
𝜌 at an angle of incidence 𝜃 . Speed of sound in first medium is 𝑐 and that in second
medium is 𝑐 . Obtain the pressure reflection and pressure transmission coefficient.

3. There was some concern that over-water flights of the supersonic transport would harm
marine life. A plane sound wave from the aircraft in air (ρ = 1.1kg/m 3 , c= 347 m/s) has a
sound pressure of 140 dB. The sound wave strikes the surface of the sea water (ρ =
1022kg/m3 , c=1500 m/s) normally .Determine the intensity of the transmitted wave in sea
water and the magnitude of the rms acoustic pressure of the transmitted wave

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. With the help of a neat sketch explain the hearing mechanism in human beings

2. a)Describe about speech interference level and perceived noise level

b)Explain about threshold of hearing

3. Describe about any two noise standards

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Brief about sound level meter and dosimeter

2. a) Explain about the working of noise analyser

b) What are microphones?

3. How sound is measured in a reverberation chamber and in an anechoic chamber

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain about absorption coefficient. What are acoustic absorbers? Brief about any one
type of acoustic absorber

2. a) Suggest some measures to control the noise produced by sound source.

b) How noise can be controlled in reciprocating machines?

3. What are possible causes for noise in a rotating machinery? Explain some measures to
control such noise
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET436
Course Name: ACOUSTICS AND NOISE CONTROL

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A
(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)
1. What are plane acoustic waves?
2. Explain about sound pressure level?
3. A fan alone produces a sound intensity level of 80 dB. A pump and a fan together
produce an intensity level of 86.2 dB. Determine the intensity level of the sound
produced by the pump.
4. What are Helmholtz resonators?
5. Describe about plenum chambers.
6. Discuss about phon.
7. How standing waves are generated?
8. Brief about spherical waves
9. Describe about frequency weighting
10. Discuss about Number noise index

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)
Module – 1
11. a) Derive acoustic wave equation. Deduce the equation for plane acoustic wave
(9 Marks)
b) A harmonic plane wave is propagating with frequency 35 Hz in air at room
temperature. The acoustic pressure at a point 1.5 m from the sound source at a time 2
s from the instant of observation is 0.2 Pa. Find the acoustic pressure at the same point
at 4 s. (5 Marks)
12. a) Elaborate about particle velocity and phase velocity (4 Marks)
b) Obtain the D Alembert’s solution of plane acoustic wave equation
c) Calculate the speed of sound in air having a density of 1.225 kg/m3 and pressure of
101 kPa. Take the adiabatic constant as 1.44. (3 Marks)

Module 2
13. a) A plane wave is incident at the boundary between air and helium at 20 degree C.
Given that at 20degree C air density is 1.2041 kg/m3 , speed of sound in air is 343
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

m/s, helium density is 0.179 kg/m3 and speed of sound in helium is 972 m/s. Find the
reflection coefficient, transmission coefficient and absorption coefficient (7 marks)
b) Brief about beam width and directivity index. (5 Marks)
c)What are resonators? (2 Marks)

14. a) Obtain the pressure reflection and pressure transmission coefficient for the oblique
incidence of sound on a medium boundary. (10 marks)

b) Obtain the acoustic pressure developed in a pipe of length L whose one end is
closed. Sound source is a vibrating piston attached to the open end of the pipe.
(4 Marks)

Module 3
15. a)With suitable figure, explain the hearing mechanism in human ear. (8 Marks)

b)With suitable example describe about perceived noise level and speech interference
level (6 Marks)

16. a) Human react differently to different sounds. With suitable instances describe about
human reactions to various sounds and noises (8 Marks)
b) Brief about OSHA noise exposure criteria (6 Marks)

Module 4

17. a) Brief about reverberation chambers and anechoic chambers. Describe in detail
about how measurements are done in them (10 marks)

b)Explain the working of dosimeter (4 Marks)

18. a) With the help of a neat diagram, explain the working of sound level meter (8 marks)
b) What are microphones. Brief about any one type (6 marks)

Module 5
19. a)Describe about (8 Marks)

(i) Mufflers
(ii) Acoustic filers
b)Brief about acoustic absorbers (6 Marks)

20.a) What are bafflers. Explain how noise reduction is attained through baffler(7 Marks)
b)Discuss the ways by which noise produced by rotating machines can be controlled
(7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction – Basic acoustic principles, sound pressure, acoustic velocity, particle velocity,
acoustic wave equation, Plane acoustic wave, harmonic solution.

Frequency, wavelength, acoustic impedance, sound power, sound intensity, Energy density,
Decibel scale – relationship between pressure, intensity and power

Module 2

Spherical waves – radiation – simple source – hemispherical source- radiating piston –

pressure intensity distribution – Beam width and directivity index

Transmission through one, two and three media – Transmission through pipes – branched and
unbranched, resonators – Transmission loss- reflection at plane surface, standing waves,
standing wave apparatus.

Module 3

Ear its structure and function, Hearing Thresholds, Loudness of Sound, and Sound
Adaptation, Human reaction to sound – definitions of speech interference level, perceived
noise level, phon and sone, hearing loss. Noise criteria and standards – noise and number
index guide lines for designing quieter equipments

Module 4

Noise measurement- microphones, sound level meters, sound intensity probes, dosimeters,
noise analyzer and graphic level recorder, spectrum Analysis, Measurement in anechoic and
reverberation chambers

Module 5

Principles of noise control, control at source, during transmission and at receiver- protection
of receiver, Acoustic insulation – acoustic materials – acoustic filter and mufflers – plenum
chamber, advanced acoustic absorbers

Principles of noise control in machinery such as pumps, rotating machines, reciprocating

machines etc

Text Books

1. Kinsler and frey – Fundamentals of Acoustics

2. I. L. Ver, L. L. Beranek– Noise and Vibration Control Engineering
3. Grad – Industrial noise and vibration

Reference Books

1. Malcom J Crocker , Handbook of noise and vibration control, John Wiley & Sons,
Inc.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

2. Heinrich Kuttruff, Acoustics an introduction, Taylor & Francis

3. David-A Bies. Collin H Hansen, Engineering Noise control- Theory and Practice,
Fourth edition, Spon press, London
4. Michael Moser, Engineering Acoustics, Springer

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module 1
Introduction – Basic acoustic principles, sound pressure, acoustic
1.1 velocity, particle velocity 1

1.2 Acoustic wave equation, Plane acoustic wave, harmonic solution 3

Frequency, wavelength, acoustic impedance, sound power, sound
1.3 intensity, Energy density, Decibel scale – relationship between 3
pressure, intensity and power

2 Module 2
Spherical waves – radiation – simple source – hemispherical
2.1 source- radiating piston – pressure intensity distribution – Beam 1
width and directivity index

2.2 Transmission through one, two and three media 3

Transmission through pipes – branched and unbranched,
2.3 resonators – Transmission loss- reflection at plane surface, 3
standing waves, standing wave apparatus.

3 Module 3
Ear its structure and function, Hearing Thresholds, Loudness of
3.1 Sound, and Sound Adaptation 2

Human reaction to sound – definitions of speech interference

3.2 level, perceived noise level, phon and sone, hearing loss 2

Noise criteria and standards – noise and number index guide lines
3.3 for designing quieter equipments 3

4 Module 4
Noise measurement- microphones, sound level meters, sound
4.1 intensity probes, dosimeters, noise analyzer and graphic level 5
recorder, spectrum Analysis

4.2 Measurement in anechoic and reverberation chambers 3

5 Module 5
Principles of noise control, control at source, during transmission
5.1 4
and at receiver- protection of receiver, Acoustic insulation –
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

acoustic materials – acoustic filter and mufflers – plenum

chamber, advanced acoustic absorbers

Principles of noise control in machinery such as pumps, rotating

5.2 machines, reciprocating machines etc 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT
MET446 PEC 2 1 0 3
DESIGN

Preamble: The course is designed to provide a complete design knowledge of various heat
transfer equipments which are invariably used in most of the chemical process industries.

Prerequisite: MET204 Thermodynamics, MET302 Heat and Mass Transfer

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyse thermal performance of heat exchangers

CO 2 Explain performance of cooling towers

CO 3 Design heat pipes for different applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO
  
1
CO
  
2
CO
  
3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. How double pipe heat exchangers are classified

2. Explain the concept of true temperature difference in a 1-2 heat exchanger.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Illustrate and explain the functions of cooling tower.

2. Explain briefly how performance evaluation of cooling towers are done .

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the working principle of heat pipes

2. Explain briefly the heat pipe design procedure.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

COURSE CODE: MET446

COURSE NAME: HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT DESIGN

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. What do you mean by compact heat exchanger and write the importance of area density in
it.

2. Under what condition, the effectiveness NTU method is preferred over LMTD method as a
method of analysis of Heat exchanger.

3.Are we really getting extra advantage by providing Baffles in Shell and tube heat
exchanger. Justify your answer.

4. What are the causes of pressure drop in shell and tube heat exchanger?

5. How size of cooling tower and wet bulb temperature are related?

6. How do you calculate evaporation loss in cooling tower?

7. Explain the term liquid pressure drop as applicable to heat pipes

8. How effective thermal conductivity of a wick structure is determined ?

9. How heat pipes work against gravity ?

10. Write short notes on micro heat pipes.

PART – B

(Answer one full question from each module)

MODULE – 1

11. a) How fouling is dealt while designing heat exchangers. ( 4 Marks )

b) A counter-flow double-pipe heat exchanger is to heat the cold fluid from 30°C to 65°C
at a rate of 2 kg/s. The heath ig is to be accomplished by hot fluid available at 100°C at a
mass flow rate of 1 kg/s. The inner tube is thin-walled and has a diameter of 1.5 cm. Specific
heat of the hot fluid is 10kJ/kgK and that of the cold fluid is 5 kJ /kgK. If the overall heat
transfer coefficient of the heat exchanger is 640 W/m2 °C, determine the length of the heat
exchanger required to achieve the desired heating. (10 Marks )
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR

12 a) Derive the effectiveness of counter flow heat exchanger ( 8 Marks )

b) What would be the effectiveness of counter flow heat exchanger if Cmin/Cmax = 0 and
Cmin/Cmax=1 (6 Marks )

MODULE – 2

13.The condenser of a large steam power plant is a heat exchanger in which stem is
condensed to liquid water. Assume the condenser to be a shell-and-tube heat exchanger
consisting of a single shell and 30,000 tubes, each executing two passes. The tubes are of thin
wall construction with D=25 mm, and steam condenses on their outer surface with an
associated convection coefficient of h0=11,000 W/m.K the heat transfer rate that must be
effected by the exchanger is q=2×10^9 W , and this is accomplished by passing cooling water
through the tubes at a rate of 3×10^4 kg/sec. the water enters at 20°C while the steam
condenses at 50 degree C. What is the temperature of the cooling water emerging from the
condenser? What is the required tube length L per pass? ( 14 Marks)

OR

14. a) Draw rough sketch of temperature distribution curve for condenser and evaporator
type heat exchangers. Derive the expression for overall heat transfer coefficient for
shell and tube type heat exchanger (7 marks)

b) A heat exchanger is to be designed to condensate 8 kg/s of an organic liquid having

saturation temperature 800C and hfg = 600kJ/kg. Cooling water is available at 150C
and at a flow rate of 60 kg/s. The overall heat transfer co-efficient is 480 W/m2 -K.
Determine: (1) The number of tubes required if tubes are to be 2mm thick,4.85 m in
length and 25mm OD. (2) No.s of tube passes if limiting velocity of cooling water is 2
m/s. (7 marks)

MODULE – 3

15. a) Explain different types of cooling towers (8 marks)

b) Explain the terms a) Cooling range b) Approach and c) Effectiveness as applied to a

cooling tower (6 marks)

OR

16. a) Write about the importance of wet bulb temperature in cooling towers? (7 marks)

b) What is the effect of change in heat load on cooling tower performance? Explain.

(7 marks)

MODULE – 4

17. Write short notes on a ) Working fluids b ) Wick Structures as applicable to heat pipes?
(14 marks)

OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

18. Explain briefly capillary, sonic, entrainment and boiling limitations applied to heat pipes

(14 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. Explain how fluid selection, wick selection and material selection are done in a heat pipe
design. (14 marks)

OR

20. Write brief notes on Non conventional heat pipes (14 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1

Thermal performance analysis of heat exchangers - compact, cross flow, liquid to gas, and
double pipe heat exchangers, film coefficients for tubes and annuli, equivalent diameter of
annuli, fouling factors, caloric or average fluid temperature, true temperature difference;
Design calculation of double pipe heat exchanger, double pipe exchangers in series-parallel
arrangements.

Module 2

Shell and tube heat exchangers - tube layouts, baffle spacing, classification of shell and tube
exchangers, Design calculation of shell and tube heat exchangers, shell-side film coefficients,
shell-side equivalent diameter, true temperature difference in a 1-2 heat exchanger,
performance analysis of 1-2 heat exchangers, flow arrangements for increased heat recovery.

Module 3

Direct contact heat transfer - Classification of cooling towers, wet-bulb and dew point
temperatures, Lewis number, cooling-tower internals, heat balance, heat transfer by
simultaneous diffusion and convection; Design and analysis of cooling towers, determination
of the number of diffusion units, performance evaluation of cooling towers, influence of
process conditions and operating variables on their design .

Module 4

Heat pipes - types and applications, operating principles, working fluids, wick structures,
control techniques, pressure balance, maximum capillary pressure, liquid and vapor pressure
drops, effective thermal conductivity of wick structures, capillary limitation on heat transport
capability, sonic, entrainment, and boiling limitations, determination of operating conditions

Module 5

Heat pipe design – fluid selection, wick selection, material selection, preliminary design
considerations, heat pipe design procedure, determination of heat pipe diameter, design of
heat pipe containers, wick design, entertainment and boiling limitations, design problems;
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Non conventional heat pipes – flat, rotating, reciprocating and disc shaped heat pipes, heat
pipes in cooling microelectronics – micro and mini heat pipes.

Text Books

1 Kern, D. Q., Process Heat Transfer, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2000.

2. Chi, S. W., Heat Pipe Theory and Practice- A Source Book, McGraw-Hill, 1976

3. Fraas, A. P., Heat Exchanger Design, Second Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1989

Reference Books

1. R K Shah, Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design, John Wiley & Sons.

2. Dunn, P. D. and Reay, D. A., Heat Pipes, Fourth Edition, Pergamon Press, 1994.

3. Das, S.K., Prosess heat transfer, Narosa publishing house.2005

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

Thermal performance analysis of heat exchangers - compact, cross
1.1 2
flow, liquid to gas, and double pipe heat exchangers,
Film coefficients for tubes and annuli, equivalent diameter of
annuli, fouling factors, caloric or average fluid temperature, true
1.2 3
temperature difference; Design calculation of double pipe heat
exchanger
1.3 Double pipe exchangers in series-parallel arrangements. 2
Shell and tube heat exchangers - tube layouts, baffle spacing,
classification of shell and tube exchangers, Design calculation of
2.1 shell and tube heat exchangers, shell-side film coefficients, shell- 4
side equivalent diameter, true temperature difference in a 1-2 heat
exchanger,
performance analysis of 1-2 heat exchangers, flow arrangements
2.2 3
for increased heat recovery.
Direct contact heat transfer - Classification of cooling towers,
wet-bulb and dew point temperatures, Lewis number, cooling-
3.1 3
tower internals, heat balance, heat transfer by simultaneous
diffusion and convection;
Design and analysis of cooling towers, determination of the
number of diffusion units, performance evaluation of cooling
3.2 4
towers, influence of process conditions and operating variables on
their design .
Heat pipes - types and applications, operating principles, working
fluids, wick structures, control techniques, pressure balance,
4.1 3
maximum capillary pressure, liquid and vapor pressure drops,
effective thermal conductivity of wick structures,
4.2 capillary limitation on heat transport capability, sonic, 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

entrainment, and boiling limitations, determination of operating

conditions
Heat pipe design – fluid selection, wick selection, material
selection, preliminary design considerations, heat pipe design
5.1 5
procedure, determination of heat pipe diameter, design of heat pipe
containers, wick design, entertainment and boiling limitations,
design problems; Non conventional heat pipes – flat, rotating,
5.2 reciprocating and disc shaped heat pipes, heat pipes in cooling 3
microelectronics – micro and mini heat pipes.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET456 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The objective of this course is

 To know the wide applications of Robotic technology in various domains
 To familiarize various robot sensors and their perception principles that
enable a robot
 To get a basic understanding about the kinematics and dynamics of robot.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the concept, development and key components of robotics.

CO 2 Apply the mathematics used to describe positions and orientations in space.

CO 3 Solve numerical problems in the statics and dynamics of robotic models.

CO 4 Explain various robot sensors and their perception principles.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 20 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the major elements of an industrial robot.

2. What is work volume?

3. Compare pneumatic drive robots with stepper motor drive robot.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Define base and tool coordinate systems.

2. Determine the translated vector for the given vector v=25i+10j+20k, perform a
translation by a distance of 8 units in “X” direction, 5 units in “Y” direction and 0
units in “Z” direction.

3. Explain any two commands associated with the programming of end effectors.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Describe briefly the dynamics of a robot.

2. A single-link robot with a rotary joint is motionless at θ=-50 . It is desired to move the
joint in a smooth manner to θ = 80° in 4 seconds. Find the coefficients of a cubic
which accomplishes this motion and brings the arm to rest at the goal.

3. Write a critical note on forward kinematics of a 2 degrees of freedom robot.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Differentiate between the sensor & transducer.

2. Explain the working principle of inductive proximity sensor.

3. What are the applications of machine vision system?

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A (30 marks)

Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks.

1. Briefly explain the need of robots in healthcare.

2. Explain the working of a UAV.

3. Differentiate between open and closed kinematic chain with the help of
examples.

4. What is the difference between internal grippers and external grippers?

5. Define the singularities of a mechanism.

6. How will you obtain the dynamic model of a robot?

7. Explain the need of mapping in the kinematics of robots.

8. What is trajectory planning in robotics?

9. Briefly explain the function of a LVDT.

10. What are the applications of machine vision system?

PART B (70 marks)

Answer any one question from each module, each carries 14 marks.

Module 1

11. a) Classify the industrial robots and briefly describe it. (7)

b) Explain the various parts of a robot with neat sketch. (7)

12. a) Explain the working of DC servo motors used in robotics. (7)

b) Discuss about the salient features of servo motor with limitations. (7)

Module 2

13. a) Explain RRR and RPR mechanism. ( 8)

b) Explain actuator space, joint space and Cartesian space of a manipulator. (6)

14. Explain the different types of frames used in robot motion. (14)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 3

15. a) What are the four parameters in DH representation? Explain how they are (8)
determined?

b) If the two links of a two-link planar manipulator have equal lengths, find out (6)
the expression for the homogeneous transformation matrix.

16. Illustrate the forward and reverse kinematics of a robot with an example. (14)

Module 4

17. Obtain equations of dynamics for 2-R manipulator using lagrangian method. (14)

18. a) Explain the propagation of velocity from link to link in a manipulator. (8)

b) Explain the joint space and cartesian space descriptions of robot trajectory (6)

Module 5

19. a) Describe the classification of sensors and the factors to be considered for its (7)
selection.

b) Describe force sensing with strain gauge and wrist force sensor. (7)

20. a) Explain the segmentation methods used in vision system with suitable (7)
example.

b) Describe any one algorithm for image edge detection with advantages. (7)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1 (7 hours)

Introduction: History and evolution of Robotics, Industrial Robots, Field and Service Robots,
Wheeled Mobile Robots, Underwater Robots, remotely operated vehicles, Autonomous
Underwater Vehicle, Robotics for Healthcare, Rehabilitation Robotics, Aerial Robotics,
Domestic Robots. Components of a Robot: Mechanical systems, Electrical systems. Robot
drive systems: Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives –Mechanical Drives – Electrical Drives
– D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper Motor, A.C. Servo Motors – Salient Features. Applications.

Module 2 (7 hours)

Spatial description and Transformations: Description of Position and Orientation, Rotation

matrix, Euler angles, Frames and Displacement mappings, Homogeneous transforms,
Transformation of free vectors.
Robot Manipulator: Manipulator joints- linear and rotary, Types. Link description, Link-
connection description. Robot architecture, Convention for affixing frames to links, reference
frames, degree of freedom. Common body and arm configurations in industrial robots-
Cartesian, polar, cylindrical, jointed arm, SCARA. Wrist assembly- end effector, Mechanical
gripper.

Module 3 (7 hours)

Robot Kinematics: Robot Coordinates- global and tool coordinates. Link and joint parameters
Denavit and Hartenberg convention, DH algorithm. Typical examples of forward and Inverse
Kinematics problem.
General considerations in trajectory description and generation: joint-space schemes,
Cartesian-space schemes.

Module 4 (7 hours)

Robot statics: motion of the links of a robot, velocity propagation from link to link, geometric
Jacobian, Jacobian computation, kinematic singularities, static forces in manipulators,
Jacobians in the force domain, Cartesian transformation of velocities and static forces.
Robot Dynamics: manipulator dynamic equations, Lagrangian formulation of manipulator
dynamics, dynamical model of simple manipulator structures.

Module 5 (7 hours)

Sensors and machine vision: Requirements of a sensor, Principles and Applications of the
following types of sensors – Position of sensors (Piezo Electric Sensor, LVDT, Resolvers,
Optical Encoders), Range Sensors (Triangulation Principle, Structured, Lighting Approach,
Laser Range Meters).
Proximity Sensors (Inductive, Capacitive and Ultrasonic), Touch Sensors, (Binary Sensors,
Analog Sensors), Wrist Sensors, Compliance Sensors, Slip Sensors. Camera, Frame Grabber,
Sensing and Digitizing Image Data – Signal Conversion, Image Storage, Lighting
Techniques.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text/Reference Books

1. Craig, J.J., Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control, Pearson Education

India; 3rd edition ,2008.
2. M.P.Groover, Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and Applications,
McGraw-Hill, 2001.
3. Fu.K.S., Gonzalz.R.C. and Lee C.S.G., Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and
Intelligence, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1987
4. Janakiraman.P.A., Robotics and Image Processing, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1995.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Introduction to robotics
History and evolution of Robotics, Industrial Robots, Field and
1.1 Service Robots. 1

Wheeled Mobile Robots, Underwater Robots, remotely operated

1.2 vehicles, Autonomous Underwater Vehicle 1

1.3 Robotics for Healthcare, Rehabilitation Robotics 1

Aerial Robotics, Domestic Robots. Components of a Robot:
1.4 Mechanical systems, Electrical systems. 1

Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives –Mechanical Drives –

1.5 Electrical Drives 1

1.6 D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper Motor 1

1.7 A.C. Servo Motors 1

2 Robot Manipulator
Spatial description and Transformations: Description of Position
2.1 1
and Orientation, Rotation matrix, Euler angles.
2.2 Frames and Displacement mappings, Homogeneous transforms. 1
2.3 Transformation of free vectors. 1
Robot Manipulator: Manipulator joints- linear and rotary, Types.
2.4 1
link description, link-connection description.
Robot architecture, convention for affixing frames to links,
2.5 1
reference frames, degree of freedom.
Common body and arm configurations in industrial robots-
2.6 1
cartesian, polar, cylindrical, jointed arm, SCARA.
2.7 Wrist assembly-end effector, Mechanical gripper. 1

3 Robot Kinematics
3.1 Global and tool coordinates. Link and joint parameters. 1
3.2 Denavit and Hartenberg convention. 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3.3 DH algorithm. 1
3.4 Examples of forward Kinematics of planar robots. 1
Inverse manipulator klinematics. Solvability. Algebraic vs
3.5 1
Geometric Solutions
3.6 Inverse Kinematics of RR and RP planar manipulators 1
General considerations in trajectory description and generation:
3.7 1
joint-space schemes, cartesian-space schemes

4 Robot Statics and Dynamics

Motion of the links of a robot, velocity propagation from link to
4.1 1
link,
4.2 Geometric Jacobian, Jacobian computation 1
4.3 Kinematic singularities 1
4.4 Static forces in manipulators, Jacobians in the force domain. 1
4.5 Cartesian transformation of velocities and static forces. 1
4.6 Lagrangian formulation of manipulator dynamics. 1
4.7 Dynamical model of 2 DOF planar manipulators 1

5 Sensors and machine vision system

Requirements of a sensor, Piezo Electric Sensor, LVDT, Resolvers,
5.1 1
Optical Encoders.
Range Sensors, Triangulation Principle, Structured, Lighting
5.2 1
Approach, Laser Range Meters.
5.3 Proximity Sensors-Inductive, Capacitive and Ultrasonic. 1
Touch Sensors, (Binary Sensors, Analog Sensors), Wrist Sensors,
5.4 Compliance Sensors, Slip Sensors. 1

5.5 Camera, Frame Grabber. 1

5.6 Sensing and Digitizing Image Data – Signal Conversion. 1

5.7 Image Storage, Lighting Techniques. 1

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET466 TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Management of innovation and technology is important an organisation. This

course is designed to facilitate the students to understand the concept of technology
management, Key issues in managing technology. This course will also help the students to
gain a fair understanding on contemporary topics in technology and innovation management.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Be conversant with important terms for technology management in organisations

CO 2 Explain the need of technology forecasting
CO 3 Understand the essence of technology acquisition
CO 4 Describe the elements of technology strategy
CO 5 Outline the basics of innovation
CO 6 Identify human factors in technology management

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2 1

CO 2 2 2 2 2

CO 3 2 2 2

CO 4 3 2 2

CO 5 3 2 2 2

CO 6 2 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

End Semester Examination
Tests
(in %)
1 (in %) 2 (in %)
Remember 20 20 20
Understand 60 40 40
Apply 20 40 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Marks Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Distinguish between process technology and product technology

2. What are the impacts of technology on society?

3. Describe the significance of technology management.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe the need of technology forecasting.

2. List out technology forecasting methods.

3. Describe characteristics of technology forecasting.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. What is technology acquisition?

2. With examples, describe the process of managing acquired technology.

3. Describe the importance of technology generation.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What are the constraints in technology absorption?

2. What are elements of technology strategy?

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
3. Describe the science and technology policy in India

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Differentiate between invention and innovation.

2. Describe the importance of innovation in product lifecycle

3. Enumerate the importance of trademarks.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Explain the challenges of automation in India

2. What are the HR issues in R&D?

3. What are the different organisational factors to be considered in technology management.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

COURSE CODE: MET466 COURSE NAME: TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer ALL questions, each carries 3 marks.

1. Describe the impact of technology in competition

2. Distinguish between process technology and product technology
3. What is technology acquisition?
4. Describe the need of technology forecasting.
5. How technology absorption improves competitiveness?
6. Describe the benefits of technology absorption
7. How is R&D affects production costs?
8. Describe the role of government in innovation.
9. How does organisational structure affect technology?
10. What are the HR issues in R&D?

PART B

11. What are the elements of technological innovation? Explain with examples (14)
OR

12. Enumerate the impact of technology on society (14)

13. Describe characteristics of technology forecasting. (14)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
OR

14. With examples, describe the process of managing acquired technology. (14)

15. Describe the constraints in technology absorption (14)

OR

16. What are the different elements of science and technology policy in India (14)

17. With the aid of examples, describe how innovation helps new product development
(14)
OR

18. What are the different remedial measures against infringement (14)

19. Describe various human factors to be considered in technology management. (14)

OR

20. Describe the challenges of automation in India. (14)

Syllabus

Module 1

Technology and Technology Management - Technology- evolution and growth of

technology, technology management: concepts and definitions, role and significance of
technology management, impact of technology on society and business. Technology and
competition, organizing technology at the enterprise level, key issues in managing
technological innovation and forms of technology- process technology, product technology.

Module 2

Technology Acquisition and Technology Forecasting - Technology acquisition, new

technology, alternatives for acquiring new technologies, management of acquired technology,
technology forecasting, characteristics of technology forecasting, technology forecast
methods, principles of technology forecasting, technology forecasting process, need and role
of technology forecasting, forecasting methods and techniques, planning and forecasting.
Technology generation and development, technology generation, process, technology
development, importance of technology generation and development.

Module 3

Technology strategy and management - Need for technology strategy, technology

adoption, diffusion, absorption and competitiveness, elements of technology strategy, role of
technology absorption, benefits of technology absorption, constraints in technology
absorption, technology package and technological dependence, Indian experience in
technology absorption efforts, issues involved in the management of technology absorption
and government initiatives, technology policies, science and technology policy in India.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 4

Management of R&D and innovation - Importance of Research and Development (R&D),

corporate research and product lifecycle, production costs and R&D, translation of R&D
efforts to technology, innovation, types of innovation, difference between innovation and
invention, framework for management of innovation, organizational characteristics that
facilitate innovation, trademarks, copyrights, patents and their use in innovation
management, remedy against infringement, the role of technology transfer in innovation and
new product development, role of government in innovation, globalisation and innovations,
technology and innovation management - case studies about management of R&D and
innovation.

Module 5

Human Aspects in Technology Management - Integration of people and technology,

human factors to be considered in technology management - organisational factors and
psychological factors, organisational structure and technology, implications of technological
change, implementation of rationalization and automation in India, impact of technological
change, human resource management issues in R&D and innovation, technology assessment
and environmental impact analysis

Text Books

1. P N Rastogi, Management of Technology and Innovation: Competing Through

Technological Excellence, SAGE Publications, 2009

2. Tushman, M.L. and Anderson ,P., Managing Strategic Innovation & Change, Oxford
University Press, New York, 2004.

3. Khurana, V. K., Management of Technology and Innovation, Ane Books New Delhi, 2012

4. Narayanan, V. K, Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage,

Pearson Education, 2002

5. Ettile, J. E, Managing Innovation: New technology, New Products and New Services in a
Global Economy, A Butterworth-Heinemann Title, 2006

Reference Books

1. Afuah, A, Innovation Management, Strategies, Implementation and Profits, Oxford

University Press, 2009

2. Paul Trott, Innovation Management and New Product Development, Pearson Education,
2004.

3. Robert A Burgelman, Clayton.M.Christensen, Steven.C.Wheelright, Strategic

Management of Technology and Innovation (Fifth Edition), McGraw-Hill Education, 2009
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

Topic No. of
No
Lectures
1 Technology and Technology Management

1.1 Technology- evolution and growth of technology 1

Technology management: concepts and definitions, role and

1.2 1
significance of technology management
Impact of technology on society and business. technology and
1.3 2
competition, organizing technology at the enterprise level
1.3 Key issues in managing technological innovation 1
1.3 Forms of technology- process technology, product technology. 1
2 Technology Acquisition and Technology Forecasting

Technology acquisition, new technology, alternatives for acquiring

2.1 new technologies, management of acquired technology 2

Technology forecasting, characteristics of technology forecasting,

technology forecast method, principles of technology forecasting,
2.2 technology forecasting process, need and role of technology 3
forecasting, forecasting methods and techniques, planning and
forecasting.
Technology generation and development, technology generation-
2.3 process, technology development, importance of technology 2
generation and development.
3 Technology strategy and management
Need for technology strategy, technology adoption, diffusion,
3.1 absorption and competitiveness, elements of technology strategy 2

Role of technology absorption, benefits of technology absorption,

constraints in technology absorption, technology package and
3.2 3
technological dependence, Indian experience in technology
absorption efforts.
Issues involved in the management of technology absorption,
3.3 government initiatives, technology policies - science and 2
technology policy in India.
4 Management of R&D and Innovation
Importance of Research and Development (R&D), corporate
4.1 research and product lifecycle, production costs and R&D, 2
translation of R&D efforts to technology.

Innovation, types of innovation, difference between innovation

4.2 2
and invention,
Framework for management of innovation, organizational
4.3 1
characteristics that facilitate innovation,
4.4 Trademarks, copyrights, patents and their use in innovation 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
management, remedy against infringement,
The role of technology transfer in innovation and new product
4.5 development, role of government in innovation, globalisation and 2
innovations, technology and innovation management.
4.6 Case studies about management of R&D and innovation. 1
5 Human Aspects in Technology Management
Integration of people and technology, factors to be considered in
5.1 technology management, organisational factors and psychological 2
factors
Organisational structure and technology, implications of
5.2 technological change 2

Implementation of rationalization and automation in India, impact

5.3 1
of technological change
Human resource management issues in R&D and innovation,
5.4 2
technology assessment and environmental impact analysis
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET476 CRYOGENIC ENGINEERING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course provides fundamental knowledge of types of cryogenic fluids,

behavior of materials and properties at temperatures, liquefaction systems, cryogenic
refrigeration, gas separation, purification, insulators, cryogenic storage, transfer and
measuring instruments

Prerequisite: MET202-Engineering Thermodynamics, MET303-Thermal Engineering

Course Outcomes :After completion of the course the student will be able to
Explain the properties of cryogenic liquids and properties of material at
CO1
cryogenic temperatures
CO2 Describe and analyze cryogenic liquefaction systems using first principles of
thermodynamics
CO3 Describe and analyze cryogenics refrigeration using first principles of
thermodynamics
CO4 Identify insulation system for cryogenic application and explain cryogenic storage
vessels.
CO5 Understand gas separation and purification methods

CO6 Understand instrumentation for various measurements in cryogenic engineering.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 1
CO 2 3 2
CO 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
End Semester Examination
Bloom’s Category Tests
(in %)
1 (in %) 2 (in %)
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Marks Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe in detail the variation of mechanical properties of various materials at
cryogenic temperatures
2. Explain the terms i) Transition temperature and ii) Critical current of
superconductors.
3. Explain the application of cryogenics in space technology.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain the production of low temperatures using Joule-Thomson effect.
2. How the cryo coolers are classified? Explain the working of strilling cycle cryo
cooler.
3. Explain about the working of a precooled Linde-Hampson system with suitable
diagram for neon and hydrogen.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Explain the working of Vuilleumier refrigerator with neat sketch.
2. Explain briefly the importance of refrigerator effectiveness.
3. Explain refrigerators using solids as working media.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain about the basic design parameters of cryogenic fluid storage vessels.
2. Explain the different types and use of insulations in cryogenic applications.
3. Explain about the cryogenic fluid transfer system.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the pressure measurement system used in cryogenic applications.
2. Explain the working principle of different types of cryogenic liquid level
indicators.
3. Explain different temperature measuring techniques used in cryogenic
applications.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VIII SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET476: CRYOGENIC ENGINEERING

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks
1. Explain the historical development of cryogenics?
2. Distinguish between Ortho Hydrogen and Para Hydrogen.
3. Explain Meissner effect?
4. Explain Joule Thomson coefficient.
5. What are the performance parameters to be considered in gas liquefaction systems?
6. Define FOM for the refrigerator.
7. What is vapour shielding in cryogenic vessels?
8. What are super insulations?
9. Write a short note on hydrostatic liquid level gauge.
10. List few heat exchangers used in cryogenic systems.
(10 X 3 = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module
Module 1
11. a) What is cryogenics? Mention the few areas involving cryogenic engineering
(7 marks)
b) Determine the thermal conductivity of air at 250 K and 101.3 kPa if the mean free
path of air at this condition is 49 nm, the gas constant for air is 287 J/kg K, the
specific heat ratio is 1.4 and the specific heat at constant volume is 716.5 J/kg K.
(7 marks)
12. a) With sketches, explain the different critical components present in gas liquefaction
systems. (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b) With the help of a T-s diagram explain working of a Simon Helium liquefier.
(7 marks)

Module 2
13. a) Compare Claude Liquefaction system and Linde Hampson Liquefaction systems.
(4 marks)
b) Explain the Joule Thomson effect. Show the inversion curve of a real gas on a T-p
diagram.
Prove that an ideal gas will not experience a temperature change upon isenthalpic
expansion. (10 marks)

14. a) With sketches, explain the different critical components present in gas liquefaction
systems. (7 marks)
b) With the help of a T-s diagram explain working of a Simon Helium liquefier.
(7 marks)

Module 3
15. a) Explain the working of a dilution refrigerator with neat schematic. (7 marks)

b) With the help of schematic and T-S diagram, explain Philips Refrigerator. Also
explain briefly the importance of refrigerator effectiveness. (7 marks)

16. a) What are the gas purification methods? With sketches, explain adsorption purifier
along with refrigerator purifier. (7 marks)

b) With sketches, explain Linde single column gas separation system. (7 marks)

Module 4
17. a) With sketches, explain the cryogenic fluid storage vessels. (7 marks)

b) Write about vacuum insulation and opacified powder insulation used in cryogenics.
(7 marks)

18. a) Explain about cryogenic fluid transfer systems. (7 marks)

b) With Sketch, explain the functions of different components in a Dewar vessel.

(7 marks)

Module 5
19. a) Explain the working of a turbine flow meter. (7 marks)

b) Write short notes on the various heat exchanger configurations used in cryogenic
systems. (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

20. a) Explain the different temperature measurement techniques used in cryogenic

application (7 marks)
b) Explain different safety devices used in cryogenic liquid storage systems.
(7 marks)

Syllabus
Module 1
Introduction to cryogenic engineering, Historical background - Major events in the
development of cryogenic engineering, Low Temperature properties of Engineering
Materials - Mechanical properties- Thermal properties- Electric and magnetic properties,
Cryogenic fluids and their properties.
Applications of cryogenics: Applications in space, food processing, super conductivity,
electrical power, biology, medicine, electronics and cutting tool industry.

Module 2
Liquefaction systems – System performance parameters, ideal liquefaction system,
Joule-Thomson expansion, Adiabatic expansion, Liquefaction systems for gases other
than Neon. Hydrogen and Helium. Simple Linde - Hampson system, Claude &
Cascaded System.
Liquefaction systems for Neon. Hydrogen and Helium – LN2 precooled Linde
Hampson and Claude systems, Ortho to Para conversion arrangement in hydrogen
liquefaction system, Simon Helium liquefaction system, Collins Helium liquefaction
system. Critical components of Liquefaction systems – critical components and their
effect on system performance.

Module 3
Cryogenic Refrigeration systems: Ideal isothermal and isobaric refrigeration systems-
Refrigeration using liquids as refrigerant- Linde-Hampson refrigerator, Claude refrigerator.
Refrigeration using gases as refrigerant- Stirling cycle cryocoolers, Philips refrigerator,
Effect of regenerator effectiveness on performance of Philips refrigerator, Gifford
McMahon refrigerators. Refrigerators using solids as working media-Magnetic refrigerators
– Thermodynamics of magnetic refrigerators, dilution refrigerators.

Module 4
Gas separation and purification: - Thermodynamic ideal separation system, mixture
characteristics, principle of gas separation, separation of air, hydrogen and helium, gas
purification methods

Cryogenic fluid storage and transfer systems:, Cryogenic fluid storage vessel, Thermal
insulation and their performance at cryogenic temperatures, Super Insulations, Vacuum
insulation, Powder insulation, Cryogenic fluid transfer systems, Cryo pumping.

Module 5
Cryogenic instrumentation, Pressure measurement – Mc Leod gauge, Pirani gauge and
Penning gauge, Flow measurement – Orifice meter, Venturi meter and Turbine flow
meter. Liquid level gauges- hydrostatic, resistance gauge,, capacitance gauge anf
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

thermodynamic gauge, Temperature measurements- ITS-90, Thermocouple, RTD,

magnetic thermometers and vapor pressure thermometers, Types of heat exchangers
used in cryogenic systems, Safety in cryogenic fluid handling, storage and use.

Text Books:
1. Randal F. Barron, Cryogenic systems, McGraw Hill, 1986
2. M Mukhopadhyay, Fundamentals of Cryogenic Engineering, PHI Learning , 2010
3. K. D. Timmerhaus and T. M. Flynn, Cryogenic Process Engineering, Springer, 2013
4. S.S Thipse, Cryogenics, Narrosa, 2012

Reference Books:
1. A. R. Jha, Cryogenic Technology and applications, Elsevier Science, 2011
2. R. B. Scott, Cryogenic Engineering, Van Nostrand Co., 1989
3. M. D. Atrey (Ed.) Cryocoolers: Theory and Applications, 1st ed., International Cryogenics
Monograph Series, Springer International Publishing, 2020

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module 1
Introduction to Cryogenic Systems, Historical
development, Low Temperature properties of
1.1 Engineering Materials, Mechanical properties- Thermal 4
properties- Electric and magnetic properties –Cryogenic
fluids and their properties.
Applications of Cryogenics: Applications in space, Food
Processing, super conductivity, Electrical Power,
1.21.2 Biology, Medicine, Electronics and Cutting Tool 3
Industry. Low temperature properties of engineering
materials
2 Module 2
Liquefaction systems ideal system, Joule Thomson
expansion, Adiabatic expansion, Linde - Hampson
2.1 4
Cycle, Claude & Cascaded System, Magnetic Cooling,
Stirling Cycle Cryo Coolers.
Gas liquefaction systems: Introduction-Production of
1.22.2 low temperatures-General Liquefaction systems-
4
Liquefaction systems for Neon. Hydrogen and Helium –
Critical components of Liquefaction systems
3 Module 3
Cryogenic Refrigeration systems: Ideal Refrigeration
3.1 systems- Refrigeration using liquids and gases as 4
refrigerant- Refrigerators using solids as working media
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Gas separation and purification: Thermodynamic ideal

1.23.2 separation system, mixture characteristics, principle of gas
3
separation, separation of air, hydrogen and helium, gas
purification methods
4 Module 4
Cryogenic fluid storage and transfer systems:
Cryogenic Storage vessels and Transportation, Thermal
insulation and their performance at cryogenic
4.1 7
temperatures, Super Insulations, Vacuum insulation,
Powder insulation, Cryogenic fluid transfer systems,
Cryo pumping.
5 Module 5
Cryogenic instrumentation, Pressure flow-level and
temperature measurements, Types of heat exchangers
5.1 7
used in cryogenic systems, Safety in cryogenic fluid
handling, storage and use.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
PROGRAM ELECTIVE V
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET418 RELIABILITY ENGINEERING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:

1. To induce in students an attitude towards reliability which will ensure that they lookout for
steps to avoid failures to achieve success in all assignments they take up. That will help them
become true engineers.

2. To generate in students an awareness of the importance of statistical concepts, and to make

them realise that engineering is also largely statistics based.

Prerequisite: MAT 202 Probability, Statistics and Numerical Methods

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

Explain the basic concepts of reliability, various models of reliability and failure
CO 1
concepts.

CO 2 Analyse mathematical models of reliability and failure modes.

CO 3 Perform the design process of reliability.

CO 4 Explain the relation between reliability, availability and maintainability.

Explain economic aspects of reliability and Perform reliability

CO 5
managementeffectively.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 2 2 1 1

CO 2 2 3 2 2 2

CO 3 3 2 1 2 1 2

CO 4 3 1 3 1 1 1

CO 5 2 2 1 2 3 1 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

ESE
Total Marks CIE ESE
Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Define the term reliability? Explain the reliability function.
2. RelateReliability and Quality.
3. What is component failure and system failure?
4. Explain Weibull distribution and Normal distribution.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe Weakest-link Technique.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

2. Explain various mathematical models of reliability.

3. Explain Redundancy optimization.
4. Explain load sharing systems and standby system.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. How quality and reliability is related?
2. Explain System safety and Fault Tree Analysis.
3. What is Tie-set and Cut-set methods?
4. Explain the use of Boolean Algebra in reliability analysis.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Describe repair time distribution in maintainability.
2. What is relationship between reliability and availability?
3. What is achieved availability and operational availability?
4. Explain Markovian models?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What are the costs considered in reliability engineering?
2. Describe reliability achievement cost model?
3. Explain reliability utility cost model.
4. What are the functions of reliability management groups?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VIII SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET418: RELIABILITY ENGINEERING

Maximum:100 Marks Duration:3 hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Define the term reliability? Explain the reliability function.

2. Explain the term MTTF. Also derive it with respect to reliability and CDF.

3. State k-out-of-m system redundancy?

4. What is mixed redundancy?

5. Explain the static model for constant strength and load?

6. What is a tie and cut set?

7. Explain inherent availability?

8. What is MTBF?

9. Discuss the economic issues of reliability.

10. Draw and explain reliability-cost curves of a product.

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a) Draw and explain Bath tub Curve. (4)

b) The time to wear for a cutting tool is distributed normally with a mean of 2.8 hour and
standard deviation of 0.6 hour. Find
I.The probability that the tool will wear out in 1.5 hours
II.Find out the reliability for 1.5 hours
III.How often the cutting edge of the tool must be replaced in order to keep the failure less than
10 percentage? (10)

12.a)Find out the system reliability for a serial and parallel configuration with 2 components. (7)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b)Find out the reliability of the following system with 1,2,3,4,5 and 6 as 0.85,0.90,
0.95,0.90,0.80 and 0.85 respectively. Find out the tie sets and cut sets (7)

MODULE 2

13. a) Compare unit vs Component Redundancy with sketches (6)

b) Given a budget of Rs 700 and the following data on three components that must
operate in series. Determine, using marginal analysis, the optimum number of
redundant units. Compute the achieved reliability. (8)
Components Reliability Unit Cost (In rupees)
1 0.80 200
2 0.90 100
3 0.95 75

14. a) Find out the reliability using markov analysis for load sharing units? (6)

b) A manufacturing company operates two production lines when both lines are operating, the
production rate on each line is 500 units per hour. At this production rate the failure rate of
line 1 is 3 failures per 8-hr day (CFR) and the failure rate of line 2 is 2 failures per 8-hr day.
When one line fails, the production rate of the second line must be increased in order to make
production quotas. At the increased rate of 800 units per hour, the failure rate of line 1 is 6 per
8 hr day and the failure rate of line is 3 per 8-hr day. Find the reliability and the MTTF and
the reliability of the production system over a 1 hr and over an 8 hr production run. (8)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE 3

15. a) With a block diagram explain the reliability design process. (5)

b) A system consists of three components in series having the following parameters. The
reliability goal is 0.90 for the system. Do the reliability allocation. (9)

Components Reliability Unit Cost (In rupees)

1 0.85 25
2 0.80 20
3 0.90 40
16.a) Explain the steps in FMECA. (6)

b) In the context of fault tree analysis, explain the meaning of each of the following: an ‘AND’
gate, an ‘OR’ gate, a priority ‘AND’ gate, ‘top’ event, a ‘basic’ event, an ‘undeveloped’ event.
In each of the case, sketch the conversional symbol used and give a practical example. (8)

MODULE 4
17. a) Compute markov analysis of availability model for two component stand by system. (6)

b) A generator system consist of primary and a standby unit. The primary fails at a constant rate
of 2 per month, and the stand by system fails only when online at a constant rate of 4 per month.
Repair can begin only when both units have failed. Both units are repaired at the same time with
an MTTR of 20 days. Derive the steady state equations for the state probabilities and solve for
the system availability. (8)

18. a) What is inspection and repair availability model? Explain a case for it. (6)

b) Determine the upper bound for each of the following aircraft subsystems MTTRs if a system
availability goal of 0.95 is desired. Assume the repair restores the subsystem to as good as new
and each system has the same availability. (8)

Subsystem Time Between failures Parameters

Propulsion Weibull θ =1000, β=1.7
Avionics Exponential λ=0.003
Structures Weibull θ =2000, β=2.1
Electrical Weibull θ =870, β=1.8
Environmental Exponential λ=0.001
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE 5

19. Explain reliability achievement cost model (7)

20. Explain Reliability management by objectives (7)

SYLLABUS

Module – I

Reliability concepts: Definition of reliability, Reliability vs. Quality, Reliability function, MTTF,
hazard rate function, bathtub curve, derivation of the reliability function, Failure and Failure
modes, Causes of Failures and Unreliability. Reliability Models: constant failure rate model
,time dependent failure models. Weibull distribution, Normal distribution, log normal
distribution. Serial configuration, parallel configuration, combined series parallel systems, K-
out-of-m systems.

Module – II
Redundancy Techniques in System design: Component vs Unit redundancy, Weakest-link
Technique, Mixed redundancy, Standby redundancy, Redundancy optimization, Double failures
and Redundancy. Markov analysis, load sharing systems, standby system, degraded systems,
three state devices, covariate models.

Module – III
Reliability design process, system effectiveness, economic analysis and life cycle cost,
Reliability allocation, optimal allocations, ARINC, AGREE methods. System safety and Fault
Tree Analysis, Tie-set and Cut-set methods, Use of Boolean Algebra in reliability analysis.

Module – IV
Maintainability and Availability: Definitions and basic concepts, Relationship between
reliability, availability and maintainability, Inherent availability, Achieved availability,
Operational availability, Repairable systems, Markovian models. Reliability Allocation: for
series system.

Module – V
Economics of Reliability: Economic issues, Manufacturers cost, Customers cost, reliability
achievement cost models, reliability utility cost models, depreciation cost models, availability
cost model for parallel systems. Reliability management, Reliability management by objectives
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text books:
1. Balagurusamy E., Reliability Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Srinath L. S., Reliability Engineering, East West Press.
3. Charles E. Ebeling, Reliability and Maintainability Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Patrick D. T. O’Connor, Practical Reliability Engineering, John

Reference Books:

1. E.E. Lewis, Introduction to Reliability Engineering, JW.

2. NVR Naidu, et al, Total Quality Management, New Age International Publishers.
3. J.M. Juran and Frank M. Gryna, Quality Planning and Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
Definition of reliability, Reliability vs. Quality, Reliability function,
1.1 MTTF,hazard rate function, bathtub curve, derivation of the reliability 2
function
1.2 Failure and Failure modes, Causes of Failures and Unreliability 2
Reliability Models: constant failure rate model,
1.3 1
time dependent failure models.
1.4 Weibull distribution, Normal distribution, lognormal distribution. 1
Serial configuration, parallel configuration, combined series parallel
1.5 1
systems, K-out-of-m systems.
Redundancy Techniques in System design: Component vs Unit redundancy,
2.1 3
Weakest-link Technique,
Mixed redundancy, Standby redundancy, Redundancy optimization Double
2.2 3
failures and Redundancy.
2.3 Markov analysis, load sharing systems, standby system 1
Reliability design process, system effectiveness, economic analysis and life
3.1 cycle cost 2

3.2 Reliability allocation, optimal allocations 1

3.3 ARINC, AGREE methods 1

3.4 System safety and Fault Tree Analysis, Tie-set and Cut-set methods 2

3.5 Use of Boolean Algebra in reliability analysis. 1

Maintainability and Availability: Definitions and basic concepts,
4.1 3
Relationship between reliability, availability and maintainability
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4.2 Inherent availability, Achieved availability, Operational availability 2

4.3 Operational availability, Repairable systems, Markovian models 2
4.4 Reliability Allocation: for series system. 1
Economics of Reliability: Economic issues, Manufacturers cost, Customers
5.1 cost, reliability achievement cost models 3

reliability utility cost models, depreciation cost models, availability cost

5.2 model for parallel systems 3

5.3 Reliability management, Reliability management by objectives 1

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

PROJECT PLANNING AND
MET428 PEC 2 1 0 3
MANAGEMENT

Preamble: This course involves the application of principles studied in Project planning,
Analysis, Selection Implementation of different project which has social cost, multiple
projects, project review, financial analysis. This course also covers the financials of projects,
improving and evaluating review the performance of the project. This course also helps to
understand the risk analysis and capital budgeting and working capital management.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Overview about the Capital investment, Strategy, Generation & Screening of Project
CO 1
Idea, Demand analysis.
Discuss the Technical Analysis, Product Mix, Plant Capacity, Cost of project and
CO 2 means finance. Cash flow, Projected Balance sheet, Trial balance, Profit and Loss
account, Time value of money.
Discus about the investment analysis, Cash flow of the project, Cost of capital, Project
CO 3
Risk, Multiple projects, Social Cost Benefit Analysis, Capital Budgeting.
Rate return of projects, Project financing, Financing infrastructure projects, Financial
CO 4
Institutions, Working capital management. Term loan appraisal.
Discuss the principles of Project Management, PERT, CPM, Project overview, Post
CO 5
audit, Critical path.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2
CO 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2
CO 4 3 2 2 2
CO 5 2 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester

Tests Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total
CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Types of capital investments and phases of capital budgeting. The detailed

explanations of project analysis and key issues in major investment decisions.

2. Explain the grand strategy and diversification debates and SPACE.

3. What is positive NPV (net present value), explain tools for identifying investment
opportunity.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. What is the industry specific source of secondary information and characteristics

of market? Demand forecasting and trend projection.

2. What are the sources of uncertainties in demand? Describes the aspects covered
in market planning.

3. Explain Plant capacity, Product mix, Location and Site? Describe the important
charts and layout drawings.

4. Discuss the importance of Balance sheet and cash flow statement. Explain the
means of finance.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. What is an annuity? State the formula for the present value of an annuity?

2. What is NPV, IRR, Payback period? Explain the properties of the NPV rule?

3. Explain the principles of cash flow estimation? explain WACC and technics for
risk analysis.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the portfolio theory and capital budgeting. Explain why the firms set a
hurdle rate higher than the WACC.

2. How the economic life of a project determined? What is NPV and how is it
calculate ?

3. Explain the public sector investment decision in India? Explain working capital
management and project financing.

4. Explain capital structure? Explain key factors in determining the Debt- Equity
ratio?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Describe the PPP and its advantage and disadvantage.

2. Describe the tools of project planning and explain how the performance is analysed?

3. What are the pre-requisites for successful project implementation, explain?

4. What is essence of Project Management? Describe the notion of hierarchy of plans?

5. Explain network techniques and time estimations? Explain PERT and CPM.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VIII SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET428 : PROJECT PLANNING & MANAGEMENT

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration:3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Explain Types of Capital Investments.

2. Explain the preliminary screening of project ideas.

3. What are the uncertainties in demand forecasting?

4. What are the factors influenced by the selection of Technology?

5. Explain Cash flow and cost of capital of a project?

6. Explain the procedure of Morse test.

7. Discuss about benefit cost ratio and IRR.

8. Explain sources, Measures and Perspectives on Risk?

9. Discus the key factors in determining the Debt-Equity Ratio.

10. Define Network techniques for project management. Explain PERT and CPM.
(10×3=30 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a) Explain the phases of Capital budgeting and Common weakness of Capital
Budgeting? (8 marks)

b) Derive the components of Marketing plan and key project inter-linkage?

(6 marks)

12. a) Explain strategic planning and capital budgeting? Discus the various strategies for
growth strategy and contraction strategies. (8 marks)

b) Discus the source of positive NPV and qualities and traits required for a successful
entrepreneur. (6 marks)

MODULE 2

13. a) What is information required for preparing the project implementation schedule.
Discus the importance of considering alternative ways of transferring an idea in to a
concrete project. (6 marks)

b) Describe Cost project, Cost of Product and Means of finance ? (8 marks)

14. a) Explain cost of project, means of finance. Discus contribution of a projected

Balance sheet in a project? (6 marks)

b) Explain Cash flow Statement, Balance sheet, Trail Balance and Profit and Loss
account and Time value of Money? (8 marks)

MODULE 3

15. a) What are the Investment Criteria? Describe NPV and IRR and properties of the
NPV rule. (8 marks)

b) Discuss the elements of Cash flow stream and basic principles of Cash flow
estimation. (6 marks)

16. a) Describe the Sources, Measures and Perspectives on Risk. What are the techniques
of Risk analysis and ways and means of mitigating Risk. (8 Marks)

b) Explain Social cost and benefit differ from monetary costs and benefits. (4 marks)

MODULE 4

17. a) Explain the Inventory management and Economic order quantity? (6 marks)

b) Discus the PPP and its relevance in India. Explain how financial institutions
appraise a project.? (8 marks)

18. a) Explain the Working Capital Management? Discus components of Credit policy
and Impact of credit policy. (8 marks)

b) Discus the Cash flow process and its relevance. (6 marks)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODULE 5

19. a) Explain PERT and CPM? Discus the rules for the construction of Network
Diagram? (6 marks)

b) Why post audit be done? What is the advantage of conducting performance

review? (4 marks)

c) Explain the difference between Economic rate of return and Book return on
Investment? (4 marks)

20. A project consisting of 12 activities and their time activities are shown

Activity. Time (in weeks)

to tm tp

1-2 4 6 9

1-3 3 8 12

1-4 5 5 8

1-7 2 4 6

2-4 6 10 18

2-6 3 4 7

2-7 5 10 16

3-4 3 6 11

4-5 2 4 6

5-6 1 3 7

3-7 2 4 8

6-7 1 2 6

a) Draw the Network diagram. (3 marks)

b) Determine the Critical path. (3 marks)

c) Calculate event slacks and activity floats. (3 marks)

d) Find the standard Deviation of the critical path duration? (3 marks)

e) Compute the probability of completing the project in 30 weeks. (2 marks)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Capital Investment – importance and differences, Phases of Capital Budgeting, Decision

making, Project analysis- Risks, Discounted cash flow (DCF), Financing, Earning per share
(EPS), weakness in capital budgeting, Formulation of strategies, grand strategy,
Diversification-risk reduction- value creation, portfolio strategy, business level strategies,
screening of project idea, tools for identifying investment analysis, preliminary screening,
positive net present value, demand forecasting, marketing plan, marketing survey.Demand
analysis.

Module 2

Manufacturing process/ technology, raw materials, product mix, plant capacity, location and
site, plant and machinery, project chart and layout, project implementation, need for
alternatives, project inter linkage, cost of project, means of finance, profitability projection,
basic acceptation and principles of cash flow statement, projected balance sheet, trial
balance, profit and loss account, time value of money.

Module 3

Various investment criteria, net present value (NPV), benefit cost ratio (BCR), internal rate of
return (IRR), pay back period, accounting rate of return, project cash flow – basic principle,
biases in cash flow estimation, difference between company cost of capital and project cost of
capital, project risk analysis, sources,-measures and perspective risk, break even analysis,
scenario analysis, managing risk, social cost benefit analysis, UNIDO approach, features of
capital budgeting, NPV-IRR comparison, multiple project and constrains.

Module 4

Project financing, capital structure, key factors in determining the Debt-Equity ratio, sources
of finances, equity capital, preference capital, term loan, working capital, project financing
structure, financial closure, financial institutions, information and documents for term loan
appraisal, project appraisal, credit risk rating, private public partnership (PPP)managing risk
in private infrastructure project, working capital management, working capital policy,
estimation of working capital, inventory management, purchase, optimum level of inventory,
economic order quantity, just in time (JIT). Cash Management, Cash flow process. Term loan
appraisal, PPP, Inventory Management, Receivable Management, Cash Management.

Module 5

Project management, principle- forms of project organisation, project planning, project

control, authority, orientation , motivation, group function, pre-requisite for successful
project implementation, accounts receivable, impact of credit policy, components of credit
policy, cash management, motives for holding cash, cash flow process and its relevance,
principles of cash management, collection and disbursement management, cash forecasting,
network techniques in project management, development of project network, rules for
network construction, time estimation, determination of critical path, schedule when
resources are limited, Network Technologies, PERT model, CPM model, network cost
system, project review, post audit, abandonment analysis, overcome resistance, managing
divestments, Project review.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. Weist, J.D,and F,K. Levy, A management Guide to PERT/CPM, Prectice-Hall of

India, New Delhi, 1974.

2. Pouliquen.L.Y, Risk analysis in Project aAprisal, Johns Hopkins Press, Baltimore,

California. 1970.

3. Rajiv Srivastava and Anil Misra, Financial Management, Oxford University Press,
New Delhi.

4. Dr.Prasanna Chandra. Project Planning, Implementation and Review. Tata McGraw

Hill , NewDelhi.

Reference Books

1. Amran M and N.Kulatilalka, Managing strategic investment in Uncertian world.

HArward Business school press, Boston 2000.

2. Reghuram G Infrastructure development and financing, Macmilloan India, Delhi, 1999

3. UNIDO, Guidline for project evaluation, United nations, 1972

4. Weingartner, M.H., Mathematical programming and Analysis of capital budjeting

problemes, Prentice-Hall, EnglewoodmCliffs, N.J, 1963.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1
Capital Investment – importance and differences, Phases of
Capital Budgeting, Decision making, Project analysis- Risks,
1.1 Discounted cash flow (DCF), Financing, Earning per share (EPS), 3
weakness in capital budgeting, Formulation of strategies, grand
strategy,

Diversification-risk reduction- value creation, portfolio strategy,

1.2 business level strategies, screening of project idea, tools for 2
identifying investment analysis,

preliminary screening, positive net present value, demand

1.3 forecasting, marketing plan, marketing survey, Demand analysis. 2

2
Manufacturing process/ technology, raw materials, product mix,
plant capacity, location and site, plant and machinery, project chart
2.1 and layout, project implementation, need for alternatives, project 2
inter linkage,

Cost of project, means of finance, profitability projection, basic

2.2 acceptation and principle of cash flow statement, time value of 2
money.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
2.3 Projected balance sheet, trial balance, profit and loss account, 3
3
Various investment criteria, net present value (NPV), benefit cost
ratio (BCR), internal rate of return (IRR), payback period,
3.1 accounting rate of return, project cash flow – basic principle, 3
biases in cash flow estimation

Difference between cost of capital and project cost of capital,

3.2 project risk analysis, sources, -measures and perspective risk, 2
break even analysis, scenario analysis, managing risk.

social cost benefit analysis, UNIDO approach, features of capital

3.3 2
budgeting, NPV-IRR comparison, multiple projects and constrains
4
Project financing, capital structure, key factors in determining the
Debt-Equity ration, sources of finances, equity capital, preference
4.1 capital, term loan, working capital, project financing structure, 3
financial closure, financial institutions,

information and documents for term loan appraisal, project

appraisal, credit risk rating, private public partnership
4.2 (PPP)managing risk in private infrastructure project, working 2
capital management, working capital policy, estimation of working
capital, Term loan appraisal, PPP.

Inventory management, purchase, optimum level of inventory,

4.3 economic order quantity, just in time (JIT). Cash Management, 2
cash flow process, Cash management.

5
Project management, principle- forms of project organisation,
project planning, project control, authority, orientation,
5.1 motivation, group function, pre-requisite for successful project 2
implementation

Accounts receivable, impact of credit policy, components of credit

policy, cash management, motives for holding cash, cash flow
5.2 process and its relevance, principles of cash management, 2
collection and disbursement management, cash forecasting,

Network techniques in project management, development of

project network, rules for network construction, time estimation,
determination of critical path, schedule when resources are
5.3 limited, PERT model, CPM model, network cost system, project 3
review, post audit, abandonment analysis, overcome resistance,
managing divestments, decision making, Project review.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET438 FRACTURE MECHANICS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Fracture mechanics is a relatively new engineering discipline concerned with the
study of the propagation of cracks, fracture failure and methods to arrest the crack in
materials. This subject is based on the implicit assumption that there exists a crack in a
material. There are many machine components, plants and equipment that fail through fatigue
and fracture. Knowledge of fracture mechanics can assist the machine designer to safeguard
structures against catastrophic fracture. Fracture mechanics is applied extensively to many
engineering fields like nuclear power plant, aircraft, spaceship, etc. This undergraduate
course offers an introduction to the basic concepts of fracture mechanics.

Prerequisite: MET201 Mechanics of solids

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the basic concepts of conventional design methodologies, failure mechanics

CO 1
and fracture
Apply the conservation of energy law for the mathematical formulation of energy
CO 2
release rate
Solve the problems related to stresses and displacement fields of linear elastic
CO 3
materials
Apply the principal stresses, various theory of yield criteria and failure theories to
CO 4
find the plastic zone shape, size and effective crack length
Analyze the elastic-plastic behaviour near crack tip by solving path independent
CO 5
integral
CO 6 Explain the environmentally assisted cracking and corrosion fatigue

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 3 2 1
CO 3 3 3 1
CO 4 3 3 1
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 3 2 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 30 30 30
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total
CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the historical perspective of fracture and failure studies.

2. Explain the different modes of fracture failure.

3. Explain damage tolerance approach in design.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the concept of crank propagation based on energy release rate and surface
energy.

2. Explain change in compliance approach and change in strain energy approach in crack
propagation study.

3. Explain the difference between stable and unstable crack growth using R curve.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the advantages of Stress Intensity factor over Energy release rate in fracture
studies.

2. Solve simple problems using stress Intensity factor equations for mode 1, mode 2 and
mode 3 type fracture failure.

3. Derive the stress Intensity factor equations for mode 1, mode 2 and mode 3 type
fracture failure.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the plastic zone shape for plane stress and plane strain using a neat figure

2. Explain Irwin’s correction for determining plastic zone size.

3. Explain Dugdale approach to find the size of the crack tip plastic zone.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the conditions for rapid crack propagation and crack arrest

2. Explain Paris Law and crack closure.

3. Explain the different causes of corrosion

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

MET438 FRACTURE MECHANICS

Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks

(10 X 3 = 30 Marks)

1. List any six causes of mechanical failure.

2. Differentiate between brittle and ductile fracture.

3. Define Griffith’s theory.

4. Explain Surface energy of a solid.

5. Explain Stress Intensity Factor.

6. What is a singularity? What kind of singularity describes a stress field near the
vicinity of a crack tip in LEFM?

7. In comparison to a plane strain case, a plane stress loading gives much larger plastic
zone for the same SIF? Why?

8. Explain the term ‘effective crack length’.

9. Explain the effect of an overload pulse inside a constant amplitude fatigue load on
crack propagation.

10. Why does the environment-assisted cracking occur mostly through inter-granular
growth?

PART B

Answer one question from each module

MODULE 1

11. Explain with neat sketch the different modes of fracture failure.

OR

12. Discuss the historic overview of Fracture Mechanics.

MODULE 2

13. Derive the equation to find the energy release rate, G of a double cantilever beam
(DCB), subjected to (i) constant load P and (ii) constant displacement.

OR

14. Explain the conditions for stable and unstable crack growth in a ductile material using
R curve
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE 3

15. For a centre crack in an infinite plate loaded in Mode II, determine stress components
and displacement components (plane stress) near the vicinity of a crack tip in terms of
KII.

OR

16. In a large plate, a crack of length 2a is inclined with an angle a with x1-axis as shown
in figure. The plate is loaded in x2 direction with σ22 = σ. (i) Find the stress intensity
factors. (ii) For σ = 80 MPa, 2a = 20 mm and α = 30°, determine KI and KII.

MODULE 4

17. Explain with neat sketch, the plastic zone shape for plane stress condition.

OR

18. A large plate of 5 mm thickness, made of medium carbon steel (σys = 350 MPa) with a
through-the-thickness centre-crack of 2a = 40 mm length, is subjected to a stress of
150 MPa. For Mode I loading, determine the effective crack length using Irwin's
correction.

MODULE 5

19. What do you mean by crack closure? What are the factors affecting crack closure?
Explain its effects on crack propagation.

OR

20. Explain the major factors influencing environment-assisted fracture.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to fracture mechanics: - Review on conventional design methodologies, Brittle

and ductile fracture, Modes of fracture failure, Damage tolerance, Spectacular failures,
Lessons from spectacular failures, fracture mechanics approach to design, damage tolerance
approach to design (review).

Module 2

Griffith’s Dilemma – surface energy- Griffith analysis – Energy Release Rate – Double
cantilever beam (DCB) with constant load, DCB with fixed grip, Energy release rate of DCB
specimen.

Anelastic deformation at crack-tip, Crack resistance, stable and unstable crack growth, R-
curve, Critical energy release rate (concepts only).

Module 3

Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics (LEFM): - stress and displacement fields in isotropic
elastic materials - Stress intensity factor - Field equations - Airy's Stress Function -
Biharmonic Equation, Westergaard’s Approach (concepts only, no derivations, final result).

Module 4

Anelastic Plastic Zone Shape and Size: - plastic zone shape for plane stress - plastic zone
shape for plane strain. Effective Crack Length: - approximate approach - Irwin’s correction –
Dugdale approach.

Module 5

J - Integral: Path independence of J - integral (concepts only), stress strain relation, Engineer
approach to J – integral, Ramberg - Osgood relation (simple problem only). Fatigue Crack
Propagation: - Paris Law – crack closure. Environmentally Assisted Cracking: - types of
corrosion – cracking mechanism. Corrosion Fatigue (concepts only).

Text Books

1. Prashant Kumar, Elements of Fracture Mechanics, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, India,
2009

Reference Books

1. T.L. Anderson, Fracture Mechanics – Fundamentals and Applications, 3rd Edition, Taylor
and Francis Group, 2005.

2. K. Ramesh, e-Book on Engineering Fracture Mechanics, IIT Madras, 2007. URL:

http://apm.iitm.ac.in/smlab/kramesh/book_4.htm
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. K. R.Y. Simha, Fracture Mechanics for Modern Engineering Design, Universities Press
(India) Limited, 2001

4. Kare Hellan, “Introduction of Fracture Mechanics”, McGraw-Hill Book Company,1985.

5. David Broek,” Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics “, Fifth off and Noerdhoff
International Publisher, 1978.

6. Kachanov.L.M., “Foundations of Theory of Plasticity”, North-Holland Publishing Co.,

1971.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module-1 6 Hr
Introduction to fracture mechanics: - Review on conventional
1.1 1
design methodologies
1.2 Brittle and ductile fracture, Modes of fracture failure 1
1.3 Damage tolerance, Spectacular failures 1
1.4 ,Lessons from spectacular failures, 1
1.5 fracture mechanics approach to design 1
1.6 Damage tolerance approach to design (review). 1
2 Module-2 7 Hr
2.1 Griffith’s Dilemma – surface energy- 1
2.2 Griffith analysis – Energy Release Rate – 1
Double cantilever beam (DCB) with constant load, DCB with
2.3 1
fixed grip,
2.4 Energy release rate of DCB specimen 1
2.5 Anelastic deformation at crack-tip, R-curve, 1
2.6 Crack resistance, stable and unstable crack growth, 1
2.7 R-curve, Critical energy release rate (concepts only). 1
3 Module-3 8 Hr
3.1 Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics (LEFM): 2
3.2 - stress and displacement fields in isotropic elastic materials - -, 1
3.3 Stress intensity factor - Field equations - Airy's Stress Function 2
Biharmonic Equation 1
Westergaard’s Approach (concepts only, no derivations, final
3.4 2
result)
4 Module-4 8 Hr
4.1 Anelastic Plastic Zone Shape and Size: 2
4.2 plastic zone shape for plane stress 1
4.3 Effective Crack Length: - approximate approach 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4.4 plastic zone shape for plane strain. 2

4.5 Irwin’s correction 1
4.6 Dugdale approach 1
5 Module-5 8 Hr
5.1 J - Integral: Path independence of J - integral (concepts only) 1
5.2 Stress strain relation 1
5.3 Engineer approach to J – integral 1
5.4 Ramberg - Osgood relation (simple problem only) 1
5.5 Paris Law – crack closure. Environmentally Assisted Cracking 2
Types of corrosion – cracking mechanism. Corrosion Fatigue
5.6 2
(concepts onl
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
GAS TURBINES AND JET
MET448 PEC 2 1 0 3
PROPULSION

Preamble: The objectives of the course are:

 To know about the concepts of compressible fluid flow

 To know about the operation of gas turbines and compressors.

 To know about various types of combustion systems

 To identify factors affecting efficiency and performance of turbomachines

 To know about the basics of propulsion systems

Prerequisite: MET203 Mechanics of fluid, MET202 Engineering Thermodynamic, MET

302 Heat and Mass Transfer

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the basic fundamentals of the various gas turbine cycles

CO 2 Discuss various laws pertaining to gas turbines and jet propulsion
CO 3 Identify, formulate and solve problems related to gas turbines and jet propulsion
CO 4 Specify, interpret data, and make a judgement about the best possible solution
Aspire for developing career with specialization in areas of thermo-fluid drives,
CO 5 recognize the need to learn, to engage and to adapt in a world of constantly changing
environment.
CO 6 Illustrate different techniques used in rocket propulsion

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 1
CO 4 3 2 2 1
CO 5 3 2 2
CO 6 3 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

End Semester
Assignment
Test 1 (%) Test 2 (%) Examination
(%)
Remember 25 20 20 10
Understand 25 40 40 20
Apply 25 40 40 70
Analyse 25
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Represent Brayton cycle in PV and TS coordinates.

2. Define closed cycle and semi closed cycle gas turbines

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1.Discuss laws pertaining to Gas Turbines

2. Discuss laws pertaining to Jet Propulsion

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Discuss problems related to Gas Turbines

2. Discuss problems related to Jet Propulsion

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Discuss about the solutions related to Gas Turbine problems

2. Discuss about the solutions related to Jet Propulsion problems

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Discuss about the applications in the field

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Discuss about different techniques in rocket propulsion

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

GAS TURBINES AND JET PROPULSION -MET448

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks

(10 X 3 = 30 Marks)

1. What are the applications of gas turbines?

2. List the advantages of closed cycle gas turbine system over open cycle system.

3. What are the different methods used to improve the efficiency of gas turbine

4. plant?
Explain the significance of intercooler. What is meant by perfect intercooling?

5. Why are propeller engines not commonly used nowadays in aircrafts?

6. State the difference between air breathing and non-air breathing propulsion

7. systems.
Define thrust power and propulsive power.

8. What is propellant? How are propellants classified?

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
9. Explain about free radical propulsion.

10. What is meant by thrust and its limiting factors?

PART B

Answer one question from each module

MODULE 1

11. An air nozzle is to be designed for an exit Mach number of 2. conditions of the air
available in the reservoir are 700 kPa, 533 K. Estimate i) pressure ii) temperature iii) velocity
of flow iv) area, at throat and exit of the nozzle. Mass flow rate through the nozzle is 10000
kg/hr.

14 marks

12..Derive the conservation of mass equation for compressible flow through control volume
approach. 14 marks

MODULE II

13. Explain constant pressure and constant volume gas turbines with diagrams
14 marks

14. Explain intercooling, reheating and their combinations 14 marks

MODULE III

15. Explain the operation of single stage reciprocating compressor 14 marks

16. Explain centrifugal compressors and axial flow compressors 14 marks

MODULE IV

17. Explain factors affecting combustion chamber design 14 marks

18.Explain gas turbine combustion chamber performance 14 marks

MODULE V

19. Explain air breathing propulsion system 14 marks

20. Explain rocket propulsion system 14 marks

Note: Problems also can be asked from module 2 and 3. Each question can have maximum
two sub divisions
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1- Compressible Flow: Wave propagation and sound velocity; Mach number and
compressible flow regimes; basic equations for one-dimensional compressible flow,
isentropic flow relations; area-velocity relation; normal shock waves, relation between
upstream and downstream flow parameters.

Module 2- Gas Turbine Systems and Cycles: System of operation of gas turbines-constant
volume and constant pressure gas turbines; thermodynamics of Brayton cycle; regeneration-
inter-cooling, reheating and their combinations; closed cycle and semi-closed cycle gas
turbines; Compare Gas turbines, I.C engines and steam turbines.

Module 3- Compressors: Classification-positive displacement and dynamic compressors,

Operation of single stage reciprocating compressors; isothermal efficiency; volumetric
efficiency; multi-stage compression. Centrifugal compressors; principle of operation; work
done and pressure rise; diffuser; compressibility effects; non dimensional quantities for
plotting compressor characteristics; compressor characteristics. Axial flow compressors;
basic operation; elementary theory; factors effecting stage pressure ratio; degree of reaction;
calculation of stage performance; Axial flow characteristics.

Module 4- Combustion Systems: Types, operational requirements; combustion process;

factors affecting combustor design; combustion chamber performance; Gas turbine
emissions.

Module 5- Air-breathing Propulsion Systems: Principle of jet propulsion; analysis and

performance characteristics of turbojet, turboprop, ramjet and pulsejet; thrust power and
propulsion efficiency. Rocket Propulsion: Operating principle; solid and liquid propellants,
performance analysis-calculations for specific impulse and propulsive efficiency.

Text Books

1. Gas Turbine Theory – Saravanamuttoo, Cohen and Rogers, Pearson Education Asia

2. Gas Turbines – V. Ganesan, Tata McGraw Hill

Reference books

1. Elements of Gas Turbine Propulsion- James Mattingly, Tata McGraw Hill

2. Gas Turbine Engine Technology – Irwin E Treager, McGraw Hill Education, 2013
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

HOURS
MODULE TOPICS
ALLOTED

Compressible Flow: Wave propagation and sound velocity; Mach

number and compressible flow regimes; basic equations for one-
dimensional compressible flow, isentropic flow relations; area-
1 velocity relation; normal shock waves, relation between upstream 4-1-0
and downstream flow parameters.

Gas Turbine Systems and Cycles: System of operation of gas

turbines-constant volume and constant pressure gas turbines;
thermodynamics of Brayton cycle; regeneration- inter-cooling,
2 reheating and their combinations; closed cycle and semi-closed 4-2-0
cycle gas turbines; gas turbine v/s I.C engines and steam turbines.

Compressors: Classification-positive displacement and dynamic

compressors, Operation of single stage reciprocating compressors;
isothermal efficiency; volumetric efficiency; multi-stage
compression. Centrifugal compressors; principle of operation; work
done and pressure rise; diffuser; compressibility effects; non
dimensional quantities for plotting compressor characteristics;
3 compressor characteristics. Axial flow compressors; basic operation; 6-2-0
elementary theory; factors effecting stage pressure ratio; degree of
reaction; calculation of stage performance; Axial flow
characteristics.
Combustion Systems: Types, operational requirements;
combustion process; factors affecting combustor design; combustion
4 chamber performance; Gas turbine emissions. 4-1-0

Air-breathing Propulsion Systems: Principle of jet propulsion;

analysis and performance characteristics of turbojet, turboprop, 4-1-0
ramjet and pulsejet; thrust power and propulsion efficiency

Rocket Propulsion: Operating principle; solid and liquid

5 propellants, performance analysis-calculations for specific impulse
and propulsive efficiency. 5-1-0
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ADVANCED ENERGY
MET458 PEC 2 1 0 3
ENGINEERING

Preamble: This course provides basic ideas about various energy source and its environmental
impacts.

Prerequisite : Nil

Course Outcomes :After completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Explain the concept of various types of power generation

CO2 Explain solar and wind power generation and its economics

CO3 Explain biomass energy sources and its economics

CO4 Explain various renewable energy sources

CO5 Explain environmental impacts of various energy generation

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3 1
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 1 1 1

CO 6 3 1

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Discuss the renewable energy potential of India.
2. Explain briefly global energy resources.
3. Explain the working and components of a thermal power plant with the help of a neat layout.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain briefly about the different types of solar collectors with neat sketches.
2. Explain the working of solar photovoltaic cells.
3. List the different methods used to estimate wind speed at a location.
4. Discuss site selection for wind power plants?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Which are the main sources of Biomass?
2. With a neat sketch explain the working of a fixed dome type biogas plant.
3. Explain the biochemical and thermo chemical methods of biomass conversion.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the working principle of MHD power generation with a sketch.
2. Explain the components and working principle of any one hybrid power plant with sketches.
3. With the help of a neat diagram explain the working principle and applications of fuel cells.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain any three methods for controlling air pollution by thermal power plants.
2. What is cause for the loss of biodiversity and how is biodiversity protected?
3. Describe the actions to be taken for sustainability of energy.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VI SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET458: ADVANCED ENERGY ENGINEERING
Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours
PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1.Elaborate on the current global energy supply scenario.

2. What are the renewable energy resources? Discuss their importance in India’s power
requirement contest.
3. Explain the basic principle of wind energy conversion.
4. Distinguish between active and passive solar energy systems.
5. Explain the category of biomass resources.
6. “Energy released from biomass comes from Sun”. elaborate on this point
7. Mention the impact of tidal energy power plants in the environment
8. Name the different processes used for Hydrogen production.
9. What is biodiversity?
10. List any four sources of land degradation ( 10 X 3 = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module

Module 1
11. (i) Sketch the layout of a diesel power plant. Explain the layout. (10 marks)
(ii)How do Industry Nation and Globe would benefit from energy efficiency programs.

(4 marks)

OR

12. Give the schematic layout of a thermal power plant and explain its working with the help of
Rankine cycle (14 marks)

Module 2
13 Explain briefly about the different types of solar collectors with neat sketches.

(14 marks)
OR

14. (i) Elaborate on the construction and working of the different types of horizontal axis wind
turbine. (10 marks)

(ii).What is the advantages of wind energy conversion systems? (4 marks)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 3

15. (i) Explain the biochemical and thermo chemical methods of biomass conversion (10 marks)

(ii) What is the difference between biomass and biogas? (4 marks)

OR

16. (i).With a neat sketch explain the working of a fixed dome type biogas plant. (10 marks)

(ii). Write a short note on gasification of biomass? (4 marks)

Module 4

17. With the help of a schematic diagram explain the closed cycle MHD and open cycle MHD
(14 marks)

OR
18.With the help of a neat diagram explain the working principle and applications of fuel cells.
(14 marks)

Module 5

19.(i).Briefly explain any four air pollutants and their effects (8 marks)
(ii) Explain the causes and effects of eutrophication (6 marks)

OR

20 (i).Define Global warming. What are the reasons for Global warming? (10 marks)
(ii). List out the environmental impact of utilizing hydroelectric power (4 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1
Introduction to the course,Global and Indian energy resources. Energy demand and supply.
components, layout and working principles of steam, hydro, nuclear, gas turbine and diesel power
plants .

Module 2
Solar Energy- passive and active solar thermal energy, solar collectors, solar thermal electric
systems, solar photovoltaic systems,economics of solar power
Wind Energy-Principle of wind energy conversion system, wind turbines, aerodynamics of wind
turbines, wind power economics,Introduction to solar-wind hybrid energy

Module 3
Biomass Energy – Biomass as a fuel, thermo-chemical, bio-chemical and agro-chemical
conversion of biomass- pyrolysis, gasification, combustion and fermentation, transesterification,
economics of biomass power generation, future prospects

Module 4
Other Renewable Energy sources – Brief account of Geothermal, Tidal, Wave, MHD power
generation. Fuel cells – general description, types, applications. Hydrogen energy conversion
systems, hybrid systems- Economics and technical feasibility

Module 5
Environmental impact of energy conversion – ozone layer depletion, global warming,
greenhouse effect, loss of biodiversity, eutrophication, acid rain, air and water pollution, land
degradation, thermal pollution, Sustainable energy, promising technologies,
developmentpathways

Text Books:
1. P K Nag, Power Plant Engineering, TMH,2002
2. Jefferson W Tester, Sustainable Energy Choosing among options, PHI, 2006
3. Tiwari G N, Ghosal M K, Fundamentals of renewable energy sources, Alpha Science
International Ltd., 2007

Reference Books:
1.David Merick, Richard Marshall, Energy, Present and Future Options, Vol.I & II, John Wiley &
Sons, 2001
2. Godfrey Boyle, Renewable Energy : Power for a Sustainable Future, Oxford University Press,
2012
3. HerbertE.Merritt,Hydraulic control systems,JohnWiley&Sons,2012
4. Roland Wengenmayr, Thomas Buhrke, ‘Renewable Energy: Sustainable energy concepts for the
future, Wiley – VCH, 2012
5. Twidell J W and Weir A D, Renewable Energy Resources, UK, E&F.N. Spon Ltd., 2006
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. Topic No. of Lectures

Introduction to the course, Global and Indian energy
resources. Energy demand and supply. Components, layout
I 7
and working principles of steam, hydro, nuclear, gas
turbine and diesel power plants
Solar Energy- passive and active solar thermal energy, solar
collectors, solar thermal electric systems, solar photovoltaic 6
systems, economics of solar power
II
Wind Energy-Principle of wind energy conversion system,
wind turbines, aerodynamics of wind turbines, wind power 5
economics, Introduction to solar-wind hybrid energy
Biomass Energy – Biomass as a fuel, thermo-chemical,
bio-chemical and agro-chemical conversion of biomass-
III pyrolysis, gasification, combustion and fermentation, 6
transesterification, economics of biomass power
generation, future prospects
Other Renewable Energy sources – Brief account of
Geothermal, Tidal , Wave, MHD power generation. Fuel
IV cells – general description, types, applications. Hydrogen 6
energy conversion systems, hybrid systems- Economics
and technical feasibility
Environmental impact of energy conversion – ozone layer
depletion, global warming, greenhouse effect, loss of
V biodiversity, eutrophication, acid rain, air and water 6
pollution, land degradation, thermal pollution, Sustainable
energy, promising technologies, development pathways`
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET468 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course addresses additive manufacturing principles, variety and its concept,
scope of additive manufacturing and areas of application

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO Level of learning
Course Outcomes
Nos domain

CO 1 Discuss various additive manufacturing processes

2

CO 2 Explain slicing operations in additive manufacturing

2

CO 3 Use liquid and solid based additive manufacturing system

3

CO 4 Select powder based and use of pre requirement of AM

2

CO 5 Apply rapid prototyping techniques for obtaining solutions

3

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 2 1
CO 2 3 2 2 2 1
CO 3 2 2 2 1
CO 4 2 2 2 1
CO 5 3 2 2 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 25 25 25
Understand 35 35 35
Apply 40 40 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. What is additive manufacturing?

2. What is STL file?
3. What is AM process chain?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. What is Model Slicing?

2. What are the softwares used for Tool path generation
3. What are the softwares currently used for AM?
4. What are the limitations of Tool path generation?

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Brief the post processing types of LENS.

2. What are process variables in FDM?
3. What are the applications of EDM?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What is STL file?
2. How does 3d Printing Work?
3. What are the merits of SLM?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What are the benefits of rapid tooling?

2. What are the applications of rapid tooling?
3. What is Rapid Tooling?

Model Question Paper

MET 468 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3

Hours

Part – A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Write a note on product development by AM?

2. Classify and Explain of additive manufacturing processes?
3.Brief about Support structure design?
4. What are the advantages of Part orientation?
5. Brief the LOM process.
6. What are the materials used in SLS
7. What are the strength and weakness of 3DP?
8. What are the merits of SLM?
9. What are the fundamentals of Rapid Prototyping?
10. List the types of industries that RP can be used in industrial applications?

PART -B
Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE – 1
11 a) Write a note on the benefits and applications of AM. (6 marks)
b) Write a note on the impact of AM on product development. (8 marks)

OR
12. a) Write a note on the need and development of AM systems. (8 marks)
b) Classify and explain the AM process. (6 marks)

MODULE – 2
13. a) Explain about data formats and data interfacing? (6 marks)
b) What is part orientation? Explain with illustrations? (8 marks)

OR
14. a) Explain the need of support generation with flow charts? (8 marks)
b) What are the steps involved in model slicing? (6 marks)

MODULE – 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

15. a) Brief about strength, Weakness and applications of SLA? (8 marks)

b) Explain the working principle and process variables of FDM. (6 marks)

OR
16 a) Brief about strength, Weakness and applications of SLS? (8 marks)
b) Explain the working principle and process variables of LOM. (6 marks)

MODULE – 4
17.a) Explain the working principle and process variables of 3DP (6 marks)
b) Compare solid, liquid and powder based system of 3DP. (8 marks)

OR
18 a) what is STL Format? Explain any two translators used in place of STL? (8 marks)
b) Explain the working principle and process variables of 3DP? (6 marks)

MODULE – 5
19 a) what are the benefits of using color in production of medical models? (6 marks)
b) What AM materials are already approved for medical applications and for what types of
application are they suitable? (8 marks)

OR
20 a) Discuss the steps followed in rapid prototyping process. (6 marks)
b) What is rapid tooling and explain the applications of RPT in manufacturing and tooling.
(8 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
Module 1

Introduction to Additive manufacturing: Importance of Additive Manufacturing- Basic

principle of additive manufacturing- Procedure of product development in additive
manufacturing. Classification of additive manufacturing processes, Materials used in additive
manufacturing- Benefits & Challenges in Additive Manufacturing.

Module 2
Basic Concept — Digitization techniques — Model Reconstruction — Data Processing for
Additive Manufacturing Technology: CAD model preparation — Part Orientation and support
generation — Model Slicing —Tool path Generation- Introduction to slicing softwares: Cura.

Module 3
Principle, process parameters, advantages and applications of: Fused Deposition Modelling
(FDM), Selective Laser Sintering (SLS), Stereo Lithography (SLA). Laminated Object
Manufacturing (LOM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM), Laser Engineering Net Shaping
(LENS),

Module 4
Principle, process parameters, advantages and applications of: Selection Laser Melting
(SLM), Jetting, 3D Printing-STL Format, STL File Problems, consequence of building valid
and invalid tessellated models, STL file Repairs: Generic Solution, other Translators, Newly
Proposed Formats.

Module 5
Direct processes: - Rapid Prototyping, Rapid Tooling. Rapid Manufacturing; Indirect
Processes: - Indirect Prototyping. Indirect Tooling, Indirect Manufacturing. Applications and
case studies of Additive Manufacturing: –Biomedical- Manufacturing- Aerospace-
Automotive- Food- Electronics.

Text Books

1. Gibson, I, Rosen, D W., and Stucker,B., Additive Manufacturing Methodologies: Rapid

Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing,Springer, 2010
2. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”,
Third Edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010
3. Chee Kai Chua, Kah Fai Leong, 3D Printing and Additive Manufacturing: Principles and
Applications: Fourth Edition of Rapid Prototyping, World Scientific Publishers, 2014
4. Gebhardt A., “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003

Reference Books

1. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press, 2007
2. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006
3. Mahamood R.M., Laser Metal Deposition Process of Metals, Alloys, and Composite
Materials, Engineering Materials and Processes, Springer International Publishing AG 2018
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4. Ehsan Toyserkani, Amir Khajepour, Stephen F. Corbin, “Laser Cladding”, CRC Press, 2004
5. Christopher Barnatt, “3D Printing”, Explaining The Future.com, 2014.

6 . Paul F Jacobs, “Stereolithography and other RP&M Technologies: from Rapid Prototyping
to Rapid Tooling”, Society of Manufacturing Engineers and the Rapid Prototyping
Association, New York, 1996.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Introduction to Additive manufacturing: Importance of Additive 2
Manufacturing
1.2 Basic principle of additive manufacturing- Procedure of product
development in additive manufacturing. 2
1.3 Classification of additive manufacturing processes, Materials used in
additive manufacturing 2
1.4 Benefits & Challenges in Additive Manufacturing. 1
MODULE 2
2.1 Basic Concept — Digitization techniques — Model Reconstruction 1
2.2 Data Processing for Additive Manufacturing Technology: 1
2.3 CAD model preparation — Part Orientation and support generation 1
2.4 Model Slicing —Tool path Generation 1
2.5 Introduction to slicing softwares: Cura. 2
MODULE 3
3.1 Principle, process, advantages and applications of: Fused Deposition 1
Modelling(FDM),
3.2 Principle, process, advantages and applications of: Selective Laser 2
Sintering(SLS), Stereo Lithography(SLA),
3.3 Principle, process, advantages and applications of: Laser Engineering Net
Shaping (LENS) 2
3.4 Principle, process, advantages and applications of: Laminated Object
Manufacturing (LOM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM). 2
MODULE 4
4.1 Principle, process, advantages and applications of: Selection Laser Melting
(SLM), Jetting, 3D Printing 2
4.2 Principle, process, advantages and applications of 3D Printing
2
4.3 STL Format, STL File Problems, consequence of building valid and invalid
tessellated models, 2
4.4 STL file Repairs: Generic Solution, other Translators, Newly Proposed
Formats. 1
MODULE 5
5.1 Direct processes: - Rapid Prototyping, Rapid Tooling. Rapid 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Manufacturing
5.2 Indirect Processes: - Indirect Prototyping. Indirect Tooling, Indirect
Manufacturing. 2
5.3 Applications and case studies of Additive Manufacturing: –Biomedical- 2
Manufacturing-

5.4 Applications and case studies of Additive Manufacturing: –Aerospace-

Automotive- Food- Electronics. 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET478 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Power Plant Engineering basically focuses on power generation principles for real
world applications. This course is focused on application of energy principles and power
generation cycles. The main purpose of implementing this course in curriculum is to learn
about how the power is generated in a power plant and its applications

Prerequisite: MET205 THERMODYNAMICS, MET303 THERMAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside a thermal
CO 1
power plant
Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside a Diesel, Gas
CO 2
and Combined cycle power plants.
Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside nuclear power
CO 3
plants.
Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside Renewable
CO 4
energy power plants.
Identify applications of power plants, plant economics, environmental hazards and
CO 5
estimate the costs of electrical energy production.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 2
CO 2 2 2 2
CO 3 2 2 2
CO 4 2 2 2
CO 5 2 2 2

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment
Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Comment on the methods used for handling of coal.

2. State the advantages and disadvantages of pulverized coal firing.

3. Illustrate and explain the functions of cooling tower.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. State the applications of diesel electric power plants.

2. List the components present in the diesel electric power plants.

3. Illustrate and explain working of a regenerative gas turbine and re-heater with a help of a
Pv diagram.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. List down the basic factors to be considered for the design of a nuclear power reactor

2. Give example for the components of pressurized water reactor nuclear power plan.

3. Describe the functionality of moderator.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Enumerate the advantages and disadvantages of hydropower plants.

2. Comment on different types of ocean thermal energy conversion system.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Explain in detail about the various types of Wind energy system.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Illustrate and explain the load duration curve.

2. A power station has two 60MW units each running for 1500 hours a year. The energy
produced per year is 700 x 106 kW-hr. Calculate the plant load factor and plant use factor.

3. Define depreciation and elaborate its role in operation of a power plant.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code: MET478

Course Name: POWER PLANT ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Define drift? How drift is eliminated in cooling towers?

2. Comment on the types of burner employed for pulverized coals in the thermal power
plants.

3. What are the methods of cooling in a diesel engine power plant?

4. List out the difference between open cycle and closed cycle gas turbine plant.

5. Mention the advantages of nuclear power plant.

6. Define “half-life” of nuclear fuels.

7. Comment on the working of a solar cell.

8. What are the advantages and limitations of tidal power plant?

9. Define the importance of capital cost in a power plant.

10. Define load factor and list out methods for improvement in load factor.

PART – B

(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1

11. a) Explain the analysis of pollution from thermal power plants. (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b) How ash is handled in the power plant? Explain the ash handling system. (7 marks)

OR

12. a) Explain the principle involved in preparation of coal and what are the methods of
preparation? (7 marks)

b) Illustrate and explain the working different types of cooling towers. (7 marks)

MODULE – 2

13. a) Give the layout of diesel engine power plant. What are the advantages and
disadvantages of diesel power plants? (7 marks)

b) List out the difference between the closed cycle and open cycle gas turbine power
plants (7 marks)

OR

14. a) Illustrate and explain working of a regenerative gas turbine and re-heater with help of
a P-v diagram (7 marks)

b) What are the methods used for improving the efficiency of a gas turbine plant?
(7 marks)

MODULE – 3

15. a) Explain with neat sketches and with examples difference between controlled and
uncontrolled chain reaction? (7 marks)

b) Describe the boiling water reactor with the help of neat sketch and explain its chief
characteristics (7 marks)

OR

16. a) Explain the working of a typical fast breeder nuclear reactor power plant, with the help
of neat diagram (7 marks)

b) Define commonly used methods of nuclear waste disposal and discuss their salient
features. (7 marks)

MODULE – 4

17. a) Explain the factors to be considered while selecting the site of a hydro power plant?
(7 marks)

b) Explain the construction and working of Geo thermal power plant (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR

18. a) Explain with a neat diagram of wind electric generating power plant. (7 marks)

b) Explain in detail about the various types of Wind energy system. (7 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. A central power station has annual factors as follows: Load factor = 60%, Capacity factor
= 40%, Use factor = 45%, Power station has a maximum demand of 15,000 kW. Determine:
Annual energy production, Reserve capacity over and above peak load, Hours per year not in
service. (14 marks)

OR

20. a) What are the elements which contribute to the cost of the electricity? How can the cost
power generation be reduced? (7 marks)

b) Define power plant economics? Explain the fixed and operating cost of a power station
(7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS

Rankine cycle – improvisations, Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critical Boilers,
FBC Boilers, Turbines, Condensers, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal power plants
– Fuel and ash handling, Draught system, Feed water treatment. Binary Cycles and
Cogeneration systems.

Module 2

DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER PLANTS

Otto, Diesel, Dual & Brayton Cycle – Analysis & Optimisation. Components of Diesel and
Gas Turbine power plants. Combined Cycle Power Plants. Integrated Gasifier based
Combined Cycle systems.

Module 3

NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS

Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of
Nuclear Reactors : Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR),
CANada Deuterium- Uranium reactor (CANDU), Breeder, Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal
Cooled Reactors. Safety measures for Nuclear Power plants.

Module 4

POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY

Hydro Electric Power Plants – Classification, Typical Layout and associated components
including Turbines. Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar Photo Voltaic
(SPV), Solar Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cell power systems.

Module 5

ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES OF POWER PLANTS

Power tariff types, Load distribution parameters, load curve, Comparison of site selection
criteria, relative merits & demerits, Capital & Operating Cost of different power plants.
Pollution control technologies including Waste Disposal Options for Coal and Nuclear Power
Plants.

Text Books

1. P.C.Sharma, “Power Plant Engineering”, S.K.Kataria Publication, 3rd Edition, 2015.

2. Arora and S. Domkundwar , “A Course in Power Plant Engineering”, Dhanpat rai & Co
Publication, 5th Edition, 2016.

3. P.K. Nag, “Power Plant Engineering”, TMH Publication, 4th Edition, 2017.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. R.K. Rajput, “A Text Book of Power Plant Engineering”, Laxmi Publications, 5th Edition,
2016.

2. K. K. Ramalingam, “Power plant Engineering”, Scitech Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2015

3. G.D. Rai, “An Introduction to Power Plant Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 3 rd Edition,
2011.

4. C. Elanchezhian , “Power Plant Engineering” , I.K. International Publications, 2nd Edition,

2013.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS
1.1 Rankine cycle – improvisations 1
Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critical Boilers, FBC
1.2 2
Boilers
Turbines, Condensers, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal
1.3 2
power plants.
1.4 Fuel and ash handling, Draught system. 2
1.5 Feed water treatment. Binary Cycles and Cogeneration systems 1
2 DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER PLANTS
2.1 Otto, Diesel, Dual & Brayton Cycle – Analysis & Optimisation. 2
2.2 Components of Diesel and Gas Turbine power plants. 2
2.3 Combined Cycle Power Plants. 2
2.4 Integrated Gasifier based Combined Cycle systems. 2
3 NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS
Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear
3.1 2
Power Plants, Working of Nuclear Reactors
Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR),
3.2 2
CANada Deuterium- Uranium reactor (CANDU),
3.3 Breeder, Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal Cooled Reactors. 2
3.4 Safety measures for Nuclear Power plants. 2
4 POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY
Hydro Electric Power Plants – Classification, Typical Layout and
4.1 2
associated components including Turbines.
Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar Photo
4.2 Voltaic (SPV), Solar Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cell 4
power systems.
ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES OF POWER
5
PLANTS
Power tariff types, Load distribution parameters, load curve,
5.1 2
Comparison of site selection criteria, relative merits & demerits,
5.2 Capital & Operating Cost of different power plants. 2
5.3 Pollution control technologies 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
MINOR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MED482 MINI PROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 4

Preamble: Mini Project Phase I: A Project topic must be selected either from research literature
or the students themselves may propose suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The
object of Project Work I is to enable the student to take up investigative study in the broad field
of Chemical Engineering, either fully theoretical/practical or involving both theoretical and
practical work to be assigned by the Department on a group of three/four students, under the
guidance of a Supervisor. This is expected to provide a good initiation for the student(s) in
R&D work. The assignment to normally include:
♦ Survey and study of published literature on the assigned topic;
♦ Preparing an Action Plan for conducting the investigation, including team work;
♦ Working out a preliminary Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned topic;
♦ Block level design documentation
♦ Conducting preliminary Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Experiment/ Design/
Feasibility;
♦ Preparing a Written Report on the Study conducted for presentation to the Department;
CO1 Identify and synthesize problems and propose solutions to them.

CO2 Prepare work plan and liaison with the team in completing as per schedule.

Validate the above solutions by theoretical calculations and through

CO3
experimental
CO4 Write technical reports and develop proper communication skills.
CO5 Present the data and defend ideas.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
*1-slight/low mapping, 2- moderate/medium mapping, 3-substantial/high mapping
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Sl. No. Level of Evaluation Marks

1 Interim evaluation by the committee 20
2 Project Guide 30
3 Final Seminar evaluation by the committee 30
4 The report evaluated by the evaluation committee 20
Total 100
Minimum required to pass 50

The evaluation committee comprises a panel of HoD or a senior faculty member, Project
coordinator and project supervisor.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
HONOURS
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MED496 MINI PROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 4

Preamble: Mini Project Phase I: A Project topic must be selected either from research literature
or the students themselves may propose suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The
object of Project Work I is to enable the student to take up investigative study in the broad field
of Chemical Engineering, either fully theoretical/practical or involving both theoretical and
practical work to be assigned by the Department on a group of three/four students, under the
guidance of a Supervisor. This is expected to provide a good initiation for the student(s) in
R&D work. The assignment to normally include:
♦ Survey and study of published literature on the assigned topic;
♦ Preparing an Action Plan for conducting the investigation, including team work;
♦ Working out a preliminary Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned topic;
♦ Block level design documentation
♦ Conducting preliminary Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Experiment/ Design/
Feasibility;
♦ Preparing a Written Report on the Study conducted for presentation to the Department;
CO1 Identify and synthesize problems and propose solutions to them.

CO2 Prepare work plan and liaison with the team in completing as per schedule.

Validate the above solutions by theoretical calculations and through

CO3
experimental
CO4 Write technical reports and develop proper communication skills.
CO5 Present the data and defend ideas.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
*1-slight/low mapping, 2- moderate/medium mapping, 3-substantial/high mapping
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Sl. No. Level of Evaluation Marks

1 Interim evaluation by the committee 20
2 Project Guide 30
3 Final Seminar evaluation by the committee 30
4 The report evaluated by the evaluation committee 20
Total 100
Minimum required to pass 50

The evaluation committee comprises a panel of HoD or a senior faculty member, Project
coordinator and project supervisor.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET402 MECHATRONICS PCC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course provides the mechanical systems used in Mechatronics and the
Integration of mechanical, electronics, control and computer engineering in the design of
mechatronics systems.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO Level of learning
Course Outcomes
Nos domain
CO 1 Explain the sensors and actuators used in mechatronics 2
CO 2 Design hydraulic and pneumatic circuits for automation. 6
CO 3 Explain the manufacturing processes used in MEMS 2
CO 4 Demonstrate the various components of a CNC machine 2
CO 5 Create a PLC program 6
CO 6 Explain the robotic sensors and vision system 2

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2

CO 2 3 3 3 3

CO 3 3 1 1

CO 4 3 1 1

CO 5 3 3 3 3

CO 6 3 1 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 40 40 70
Apply
Analyse
Evaluate
Create 10 10 30
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Which type of sensor can be used for determining angular movement of a shaft?
2. What is the significance of grey scale in absolute encoders?
3. Which type of actuator can be used for a mechanical system?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the basic structure of a simple hydraulic circuit?

2. Explain the basic structure of a simple pneumatic circuit?
3. Design a hydraulic circuit for two hand operation of a hydraulic press?
4. Design a pneumatic circuit for the sequencing operation A+B+A-B-.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the LIGA process.

2. Explain the MEMS based gyroscope?
3. Explain the deposition-based MEMS manufacturing technique?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the working of ant frictional guideways?
2. Demonstrate suitable methods to achieve antifriction feed drive system?
3. Demonstrate suitable non-contact type measuring system that can be used in CNC?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Discuss About various type of range finders used in robotics?

2. Discuss about various image accusation techniques used in robotics?
3. Discuss various image processing techniques used in robotics?

Model Question Paper

MECHATRONICS - MET402

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

PART – A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Explain the significance of grey codes in an absolute optical encoder?

2. Explain cushioning in pneumatic actuator?
3.Explain with a neat sketch working of a poppet valve.
4. What is meant by high aspect ratio machining? List any 2 methods of manufacturing used
in it.
5. Differentiate between hydrostatic and hydro dynamic bearing used in CNC machines.
6. What is meant by stick slip phenomena in a frictional guideway?
7. Explain the XOR logic using suitable ladder diagram and truth table?
8. Explain the ladder diagram for a delay on timer circuit?
9. Differentiate between CCD and CID camera used in robots?
10. Discuss the functioning of a tactile sensors?

PART -B
Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE – 1

11. List and explain in detail the static and dynamic characteristics of a sensor (10 marks)
OR
12. a) Write a note on rotary actuators. (3 marks)
b) Explain with a suitable diagram various component of a pneumatic system.
(7 marks)

MODULE – 2
13. Develop a hydraulic circuit for the sequencing operation A+B+A-B-? (10 marks)
OR
14. Explain the working of MMS based accelerometer with a neat sketch? (8 marks)

MODULE – 3
15. a) What is meant by preloading? Explain in detail about preloading methods used in a
recirculating ball screw (6 marks)
b) Explain various load acting on a CNC machine structure (4 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR
16. Develop a mathematical model for a general fluid system (10 marks)

MODULE – 4
17.Two motors are to be controlled in a sequence. The second motor starts 30 seconds after
the starting of first motor by a push switch. Develop a PLC ladder diagram for the
following cases and describe the circuit.
Case (A): Only one motor operates at a time.
Case (B): Both the motor gets off together after 50 seconds.3DP (10 marks)
OR
18 Explain the working of an automobile engine management system using suitable diagrams.
Also explain its advantages over conventional automobile system (10 marks)

MODULE – 5
19 a) what is meant by image accusation? Illustrate the working of Charge Coupled Device
for machine vision applications. (10 marks)

OR
20 a) Explain the histogram processing technique in image processing. (6 marks)
b) What is meant by thresholding in image processing? (4 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
Module 1
Introduction to Mechatronics: Structure of Mechatronics system. Sensors - Characteristics -
Temperature, flow, pressure sensors. Displacement, position and proximity sensing by
magnetic, optical, ultrasonic, inductive, capacitive and eddy current methods. Encoders:
incremental and absolute, gray coded encoder. Resolvers and synchros. Piezoelectric sensors.
Acoustic Emission sensors. Principle and types of vibration sensors.
Actuators: Mechanical actuators, Electrical actuators, Hydraulic and Pneumatic actuators

Module 2
Directional control valves, pressure control valves, process control valves. Rotary actuators.
Development of simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits using standard Symbols.
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS): Fabrication: Deposition, Lithography,
Micromachining methods for MEMS, Deep Reactive Ion Etching (DRIE) and LIGA
processes. Principle, fabrication and working of MEMS based pressure sensor, accelerometer
and gyroscope.

Module 3
Mechatronics in Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machines: Design of modern CNC
machines - Mechatronics elements - Machine structure: guide ways, drives. Bearings: anti-
friction bearings, hydrostatic bearing and hydrodynamic bearing. Re-circulating ball screws,
pre-loading methods. Re-circulating roller screws. Measuring system for NC machines - direct
and indirect measuring system.
System modeling - Mathematical models and basic building blocks of general mechanical,
electrical, fluid and thermal systems.

Module 4
Typical elements of open and closed loop control systems. Adaptive controllers for machine
tools. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) –Basic structure, input/ output processing.
Programming: Timers, Internal Relays, Counters and Shift registers. Development of simple
ladder programs for specific purposes.
Case studies of Mechatronics systems: Automatic camera, bar code reader, pick and place
robot, automatic car park barrier system, automobile engine management system.

Module 5
Mechatronics in Robotics-Electrical drives: DC, AC, brushless, servo and stepper motors.
Harmonic drive. Force and tactile sensors. Range finders: ultrasonic and light-based range
finders
Robotic vision system - Image acquisition: Vidicon, charge coupled device (CCD) and charge
injection device (CID) cameras. Image processing techniques: histogram processing: sliding,
stretching, equalization and thresholding.

Text Books

1. Bolton W., Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical

Engineering, Person Education Limited, New Delhi, 2007
2. Ramachandran K. P., G. K. Vijayaraghavan, M. S. Balasundaram, Mechatronics: Integrated
Mechanical Electronic Systems, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
3. Saeed B. Niku, Introduction to Robotics: Analysis, Systems, Applications, Person
Education, Inc., New Delhi, 2006.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. David G. Aldatore, Michael B. Histand, Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement

Systems, McGraw-Hill Inc., USA, 2003.
2. Gordon M. Mair, Industrial Robotics, Prentice Hall International, UK, 1998.
3. HMT, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
4. Vijay K. Varadan, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalakrishnan, Smart Material Systems and MEMS:
Design and Development Methodologies, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., England, 2006.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Introduction to Mechatronics: Structure of Mechatronics system. Sensors - 1
Characteristics
1.2 Temperature, flow, pressure sensors. Displacement, position and proximity
sensing by magnetic, optical, ultrasonic, inductive, capacitive and eddy 2
current methods.
1.3 Encoders: incremental and absolute, gray coded encoder. 1
1.4 . Resolvers and synchros. Piezoelectric sensors. Acoustic Emission sensors. 1
Principle and types of vibration sensors.
1.5 Actuators: Mechanical actuators, Electrical actuators, Hydraulic and 2
Pneumatic actuators
MODULE 2
2.1 Directional control valves, pressure control valves, process control valves. 2
Rotary actuators.
2.2 Development of simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits using standard 2
Symbols.
2.3 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS): Fabrication: Deposition, 2
Lithography, Micromachining methods for MEMS,
2.4 Deep Reactive Ion Etching (DRIE) and LIGA processes. 1
2.5 Principle, fabrication and working of MEMS based pressure sensor, 2
accelerometer and gyroscope.
MODULE 3
3.1 Mechatronics in Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machines: Design of 2
modern CNC machines - Mechatronics elements - Machine structure: guide
ways, drives. Bearings: anti-friction bearings, hydrostatic bearing and
hydrodynamic bearing.
3.2 Re-circulating ball screws, pre-loading methods. Re-circulating roller 2
screws. Measuring system for NC machines - direct and indirect measuring
system.
3.3 System modeling - Mathematical models and basic building blocks of
general mechanical & electrical system 1
3.4 Mathematical models and basic building blocks of general fluid and
thermal systems 1
 MODULE 4 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
4.1 Typical elements of open and closed loop control systems. Adaptive 2
controllers for machine tools. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) –
Basic structure, input/ output processing.
4.2 Programming: Timers, Internal Relays, Counters and Shift registers.
Development of simple ladder programs for specific purposes 2
4.3 Case studies of Mechatronics systems: Automatic camera, bar code reader,
pick and place robot, automatic car park barrier system, automobile engine 2
management system.
MODULE 5
5.1 Mechatronics in Robotics-Electrical drives: DC, AC, brushless, servo and 2
stepper motors. Harmonic drive.
5.2 Force and tactile sensors. Range finders: ultrasonic and light-based range 2
finders
5.3 Robotic vision system - Image acquisition: Vidicon, charge coupled device 2
(CCD) and charge injection device (CID) cameras.

5.4 Image processing techniques: histogram processing: sliding, stretching,

equalization and thresholding. 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COMPREHENSIVE COURSE CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET404
VIVA PCC 1 0 0 1

Preamble: The objective of this Course viva is to ensure the basic knowledge of each student in the
most fundamental core courses in the curriculum. The viva voce shall be conducted based on the
core subjects studied from third to eighth semester. This course helps the learner to become
competent in placement tests and other competitive examinations.

Guidelines
1. The course should be mapped with a faculty and classes shall be arranged for practicing
questions based on the core courses listed in the curriculum.
2. The viva voce will be conducted by the same three member committee assigned for final
project phase II evaluation. It comprises of Project coordinator, expert from
Industry/research Institute and a senior faculty from a sister department.
3. The pass minimum for this course is 25.
4. The mark will be treated as internal and should be uploaded along with internal marks of
other courses.
5. Comprehensive Viva should be conducted along with final project evaluation by the three
member committee.

Mark Distribution
Total marks: 50, only CIE, minimum required to pass : 25 Marks
 MECHANICAL
CATEGORY L ENGINEERING
T P CREDIT
MED416 PROJECT PHASE II
PWS 0 0 12 4

Preamble: The course ‘Project Work’ is mainly intended to evoke the innovation and invention
skills in a student. The course will provide an opportunity to synthesize and apply the knowledge
and analytical skills learned, to be developed as a prototype or simulation. The project extends to
2 semesters and will be evaluated in the 7th and 8th semester separately, based on the achieved
objectives. One third of the project credits shall be completed in 7th semester and two third in 8th
semester. It is recommended that the projects may be finalized in the thrust areas of the
respective engineering stream or as interdisciplinary projects. Importance should be given to
address societal problems and developing indigenous technologies.

Course Objectives
 To apply engineering knowledge in practical problem solving.
 To foster innovation in design of products, processes or systems.
 To develop creative thinking in finding viable solutions to engineering problems.

Course Outcomes [COs]: After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:

Model and solve real world problems by applying knowledge across domains
CO1
(Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Develop products, processes or technologies for sustainable and socially relevant
CO2
applications (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Function effectively as an individual and as a leader in diverse teams and to
CO3
comprehend and execute designated tasks (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Plan and execute tasks utilizing available resources within timelines, following ethical
CO4
and professional norms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Identify technology/research gaps and propose innovative/creative solutions
CO5
(Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).
Organize and communicate technical and scientific findings effectively in written and
CO6
oral forms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2

CO2 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 2 2 1

CO4 2 3 2 2 3 2

CO5 2 3 3 1 2 1

CO6 2 2 2 3 1 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO # Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability
PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of
PO4 complex problems PO0 Communication

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning

PROJECT PHASE II

Phase 2 Targets

 In depth study of the topic assigned in the light of the report prepared under Phase - I;
 Review and finalization of the approach to the problem relating to the assigned topic.
 Preparing a detailed action plan for conducting the investigation, including teamwork.
 Detailed Analysis/ Modeling / Simulation/ Design/ Problem Solving/Experiment as
needed.
 Final development of product/ process, testing, results, conclusions and future
directions.
 Preparing a paper for Conference Presentation/ Publication in Journals, if possible.
 Presenting projects in Project Expos conducted by the University at the cluster level
and/ or state level as well as others conducted in India and abroad.
 Filing Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) if applicable.
 Preparing a report in the standard format for being evaluated by the Department
Assessment Board.
 Final project presentation and viva voce by the assessment board including the
external expert.

Evaluation Guidelines & Rubrics

Total: 150 marks (Minimum required to pass: 75 marks).

 Project progress evaluation by guide: 30 Marks.
 Two interim evaluations by the Evaluation Committee: 50 Marks (25 marks for each
evaluation).
 Final evaluation by the Final Evaluation committee: 40 Marks
 Quality of the report evaluated by the evaluation committee: 30 Marks

(The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project coordinator
and project supervisor. The final evaluation committee comprises of Project coordinator,
expert from Industry/research/academic Institute and a senior faculty from a sister
department).
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Evaluation by the Guide
The guide/supervisor must monitor the progress being carried out by the project groups on
regular basis. In case it is found that progress is unsatisfactory it should be reported to the
Department Evaluation Committee for necessary action. The presence of each student in the
group and their involvement in all stages of execution of the project shall be ensured by the
guide. Project evaluation by the guide: 30 Marks. This mark shall be awarded to the students in
his/her group by considering the following aspects:

Project Scheduling & Distribution of Work among Team members: Detailed and extensive
Scheduling with timelines provided for each phase of project. Work breakdown structure well
defined. (5)

Literature survey: Outstanding investigation in all aspects. (4)

Student’s Diary/ Daily Log: The main purpose of writing daily diary is to cultivate the habit of
documenting and to encourage the students to search for details. It develops the students’ thought
process and reasoning abilities. The students should record in the daily/weekly activity diary the
day to day account of the observations, impressions, information gathered and suggestions given,
if any. It should contain the sketches & drawings related to the observations made by the
students. The daily/weekly activity diary shall be signed after every day/week by the guide. (7)

Individual Contribution: The contribution of each student at various stages. (9)

Completion of the project: The students should demonstrate the project to their respective
guide. The guide shall verify the results and see that the objectives are met. (5)
 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Interim Evaluation - 1
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
Good evidence of an implementable
Some of the aspects of the proposed
The project is not addressing any project. There is some evidence for The project has evolved into incorporating
idea can be implemented. There is
useful requirement. The idea is the originality of the work done by the an outstandingly novel idea. Original work
still lack of originality in the work
Novelty of idea, and evolved into a non-implementable team . There is fresh specifications/ which is not yet reported anywhere else.
done so far by the team. The project
Implementation scope one. The work presented so far is features/improvements suggested by Evidence for ingenious way of innovation
2-a 5 is a regularly done theme/topic
[CO5] lacking any amount of original work the team. The team is doing a design which is also Implementable. Could be a
without any freshness in terms of
[Group Evaluation] by the team. from fundamental principles, and patentable / publishable work.
specifications, features, and/or
there is some independent learning
improvements.
and engineering ingenuity.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Good evidence of task allocation Excellent display of task identification and

being done, supported by project distribution backed by documentary
No task distribution of any kind. Task allocation done, but not journal entries, identification of tasks evidence of team brainstorming, and
Effectiveness of task
Members are still having no clue on effectively, some members do not through discussion etc. However, the project journal entries. All members are
2-b distribution among 5 what to do. have any idea of the tasks assigned. task distribution seems to be skewed, allocated tasks according to their
team members. Some of the tasks were identified but and depends a few members heavily capabilities, and as much as possible in an
[CO3] not followed individually well. than others. Mostly the tasks are being equal manner. The individual members are
[Group Evaluation]
followed by the individual members. following the tasks in an excellent manner.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Little or no evidence of continued There is some improvement in the Good evidence of planning done and Excellent evidence of enterprising and
planning or scheduling of the primary plan prepared during phase I. being followed up to a good extent extensive project planning and follow-up
project. The students did not stick to There were some ideas on the since phase I. Continued use of project
after phase I. Materials were listed
Adherence to project the plan what they were going to materials /resources required, but not and thought out, but the plan wasn't management/version control tool to track
schedule. build nor plan on what materials / really thought out. The students have the project. Material procurement if
2-c 5 followed completely. Schedules were
[CO4] resources to use in the project. The some idea on the finances required, prepared, but not detailed, and needs applicable is progressing well. Tasks are
[Group Evaluation] students do not have any idea on the but they have not formalized a budget improvement. Project journal is updated and incorporated in the schedule.
budget required even after the end of plan. Schedules were not prepared. presented but it is neither complete A well-kept project journal showed
phase - I. No project journal kept or The project journal has no useful nor updated regularly. evidence for all the above, in addition to
the journal. details on the project. the interaction with the project guide.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

 The team showed some interim The interim results showed were good
There were significant interim results
Interim Results. results, but they are not complete / and mostly consistent/correct with
There are no interim results to show. presented which clearly shows the progress.
2-d [CO6] 5 consistent to the current stage, Some respect to the current stage. There is
[Group assessment] corrections are needed. room for improvement.
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)
Very poor presentation and there is Presentation is average, and the Good presentation. Student has good Exceptionally good presentation. Student
Presentation
no interim results. The student has student has only a feeble idea about idea about the team's project. The has excellent grasp of the project. The
2-e [Individual 5 no idea about the project proposal. the team work. overall presentation quality is good. quality of presentation is outstanding.
assessment]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Interim Evaluation - 1 Total Marks: 25

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Interim Evaluation – 2
No Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

The student does not show any The student appears to apply some The student is able to show some Excellent knowledge in design procedure
Application of evidence of applying engineering basic knowledge, but not able to evidence of application of engineering and its adaptation. The student is able to
engineering knowledge on the design and the show the design procedure and the knowledge in the design and apply knowledge from engineering
knowledge methodology adopted. The student's methodologies adopted in a development of the project to good domains to the problem and develop
2-f [CO1] 10 contribution in application of comprehensive manner. extent. solutions.
[Individual engineering knowledge in the project
Assessment] is poor.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

The individual contribution is evident.

Involvement of No evidence of any Individual There is evidence for some amount Evidence available for the student acting
The student has good amount of
individual participation in the project work. of individual contribution, but is as the core technical lead and has excellent
5 involvement in core activities of the
members limited to some of the superficial contribution to the project.
2-g [CO3] project.
tasks.
[Individual
Assessment] (0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

None of the expected outcomes are Many of the expected outcomes are Most of the stated outcomes are met.
Only a few of the expected outcomes
Results and achieved yet. The team is unable to achieved. Many observations and Extensive studies are done and inferences
are achieved. A few inferences are
inferences upon derive any inferences on the failures/ inferences are made, and attempts to drawn. Most of the failures are addressed
5 made on the observed failures/issues.
execution [CO5] issues observed. Any kind o f identify the issues are done. Some and solutions suggested. Clear and valid
2-h No further work suggested.
[Group Assessment] observations or studies are not made. suggestions are made for further work. suggestions made for further work.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Documentatio n and The individual student has no idea on The individual's presentation is done
Presentation's overall quality needs The individual’s presentation
presentation. the presentation of his/her part. The professionally and with great clarity. The
5 to be improved. performance is satisfactory.
2-i .[CO6] presentation is of poor quality. individual’s performance is excellent.
[Individual assessment]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Interim Evaluation - 2 Total Marks: 25

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Final Evaluation
No Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
The team is able to show evidence of Excellent knowledge in design procedure
Engineering The team does not show any evidence The team is able to show some of the
application of engineering knowledge and its adaptation. The team is able to
2-j knowledge. [CO1] of applying engineering knowledge design procedure and the
10 in the design and development of the apply knowledge from engineering
[Group Assessment] on the design and the methodology methodologies adopted, but not in a
project to good extent. There is scope domains to the problem and develop an
adopted. comprehensive manner.
for improvement. excellent solution.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Relevance of the The project has some relevance with The project is relevant to the society The project is exceptionally relevant to
project with respect to The project as a whole do not have respect to social and/or industrial and/or industry. The team is mostly society and/or industry. The team has
2-k societal and/or any societal / industrial relevance at application. The team has however successful in translating the problem made outstanding contribution while
5 all.
industrial needs. made not much effort to explore into an engineering specification and solving the problem in a professional and/
[Group Assessment] further and make it better. managed to solve much of it. or ethical manner.
[CO2]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)
Some of the aspects of the proposed Good evidence of an implementable
The project is not addressing any The project has evolved into incorporating
idea appears to be practical. There is project. There is some evidence for the
useful requirement. The idea is an outstandingly novel idea. Original work
still lack of originality in the work originality of the work done by the
evolved into a non-implementable which is not yet reported anywhere else.
done. The project is a regularly done team. There is fresh specifications/
Innovation / novelty / one. The work presented so far is Evidence for ingenious way of innovation
theme/topic without any freshness in features/improvements suggested by the
lacking any amount of original work which is also Implementable. Could be a
2-i Creativity 5 terms of specifications, features, and/ team. The team is doing a design from
[CO5] by the team. patentable publishable work.
or improvements. fundamental principles, and there is
[Group Assessment] some independent learning and
engineering ingenuity. Could be
translated into a product / process if
more work is done.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Only a few of the expected outcomes
None of the expected outcomes are are achieved. A few inferences are Many of the expected outcomes are Most of the stated outcomes are met.
Quality of results / achieved. The team is unable to made on the observed failures/issues. achieved. Many observations and Extensive studies are done and inferences
conclusions / 10 derive any inferences on the No further work suggested. inferences are made, and attempts to drawn. Most of the failures are addressed
2-m solutions. [CO1] failures/issues observed. Any kind of identify the issues are done. Some and solutions suggested. Clear and valid
[Group Assessment] observations or studies is not made. suggestions are made for further work. suggestions made for further work.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

 Presentation slides follow a good style
Presentation slides follow professional The presentation slides are exceptionally
The presentation slides are shallow style formats to some extent. However, format and there are only a few issues.
Organization of the slides is good. Most good. Neatly organized. All references
Presentation - Part I and in a clumsy format. It does not its organization is not very good.
of references are cited properly. The cited properly. Diagrams/Figures, Tables
Preparation of slides. 5 follow proper organization. Language needs to be improved. All and equations are properly numbered,
flow is good and team presentation is
[CO6] references are not cited properly, or and l i s ted. Results/ inferences clearly
neatly organized. Some of the results
[Group Assessment]. acknowledged. Presentation slides highlighted and readable.
are not clearly shown. There is room
needs to be more professional.
for improvement.

2-n (0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Good presentation/ communication by
Presentation - Part The student is able to explain some of Clear and concise communication
the student. The student is able to
II: Individual The student is not communicating the content. The student requires a lot exhibited by the student. The
explain most of the content very well.
Communication 5 properly. Poor response to of prompts to get to the idea. There are presentation is outstanding. Very
There are however, a few areas where
[CO6] questions. language issues. confident and tackles all the questions
the student shows lack of preparation.
[Individual without hesitation. Exceptional traits of
Language is better.
Assessment]. communicator.
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Final Evaluation, Marks: 40

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Report Evaluation
Sl.
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

The prepared report is shallow and not Project report shows evidence of
Project report follows the standard The report is exceptionally good. Neatly
as per standard format. It does not systematic documentation. Report is
format to some extent. However, its organized. All references cited properly.
follow proper organization. Contains mostly following the standard style
organization is not very good. Diagrams/Figures, Tables and equations
mostly unacknowledged content. Lack format and there are only a few issues.
2-o Report [CO6] 30 Language needs to be improved. All are properly numbered, and listed and
of effort in preparation is evident. Organization of the report is good.
references are not cited properly in the clearly shown. Language is excellent and
References are not cited. Mostly consistently formatted. Most of
report. There is lack of formatting follows professional styles. Consistent
Unprofessional and inconsistent references/sources are cited/
consistency. formatting and exceptional readability.
formatting. acknowledged properly.

(0 - 11 Marks) (12 - 18 Marks) (19 - 28 Marks) (29 - 30 Marks)

Phase - II Project Report Marks: 30

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
PROGRAM ELECTIVE III
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET414 QUALITY MANAGEMENT PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course is designed to facilitate the students to understand the concept and
culture of total quality management. It empowers the students by inculcating the skills to use
quality control techniques and other quality tools in solving quality-related problems and
apply these principles in an industry. This course will also amalgamate their knowledge about
the importance of customer satisfaction through desired quality at a competitive price.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 To be conversant with important terms for quality management in organisations

Have a complete theoretical and practical understanding of the contributions of
CO 2
Quality Gurus
CO 3 Demonstrate knowledge of the underlying principles of strategic quality management
CO 4 Identify various human dimensions of TQM
CO 5 Implement different tools and techniques in TQM
CO 6 Identify core and extended modules of ISO 9000 family of standards

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 3 3
CO 2 2 2 2
CO 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3
CO 5 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO 6 2 2 1 1 2 3 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

End Semester Examination
Tests
(in %)
1 (in %) 2 (in %)
Remember 20 20 20
Understand 60 40 40
Apply 20 40 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Marks Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Distinguish between quality control and inspection.

2. What are the TQM axioms?

3. What are the enablers of total quality?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe the Deming approach to TQM.

2. List out Crosby's fourteen steps for quality improvement.

3. Describe Juran’s quality trilogy.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Define strategic quality management.

2. With examples, describe the classification of quality costs.

3. Describe the concepts of Kaizen approach.

Course Outcome 4(CO4):

1. What is meant by employee empowerment with respect to total quality management?

2. What are self managing teams?

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Describe the importance of leadership in TQM

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. “X and R charts always go hand in hand”. Elaborate.

2. What are the measures of Central tendency and dispersion?

3. Describe the principles of cause and effect diagram.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Enumerate the benefits of ISO certification.

2. What are the benefits of quality auditing?

3. Enumerate the steps to be followed by a manufacturing organization to obtain ISO 9001

certification

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET414 Course Name: QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer ALL questions, each carries 3 marks.

1. Define the term” Quality control”.

2. What are the enablers of total quality?
3. Describe the concept of Quality Function Deployment
4. What are the obstacles to achieving successful strategic quality management?
5. What is meant by employee empowerment?
6. Describe the importance of leadership in TQM
7. Describe the principles of cause and effect diagram.
8. Describe the procedure to be followed in a brain storming meeting.
9. Explain the clause in ISO 9001 associated with resource management.
10. What are the benefits of quality auditing?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module-1

11. a) Compare Juran and Deming approaches (7)

b) Explain the characteristics of Total Quality Management. (7)

OR

12 a) Explain the three TQM axioms. (12)

b) Define Quality Planning. (2)

Module-2

13. Describe the steps to be followed to integrate quality into strategic management journey
of an organization. (14)

OR

14. (a) Enumerate the objectives and key principles of lean manufacturing paradigm. (7)

(b) Compare traditional and lean manufacturing paradigms. (7)

Module-3

15. What are self managing teams? What are the benefits and problems associated with
them? Indicate the key steps to be followed to implement them in organizations. (14)

OR

16. What are the ingredients for success for a quality director? What are the activities to be
carried out by a quality director towards assisting upper management with strategic
management (14)

Module-4

17. With the aid of an example, describe the principles of cause and effect diagram. (14)

OR

18. Following are the data on the quality costs incurred in a manufacturing company in a
month:

Title of the quality cost Amount in Rupees

Product audits 1,000

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Scrap Disposal 50,000

Concessions and Downgrading 40,000

Calibration 2,000

Quality planning 500

Manufacturing losses 30,000

System failure 40,000

Test materials 5,000

Training 2,000

Customer returns 25,000

Classify the above quality costs into preventive, appraisal and failure costs. Conduct Pareto
analysis and comment on the results. Suggest a proposal with anticipation on the quality
costs observable in future. (14)

Module-5

19. Describe the steps to be followed for conducting a quality audit. (14)

OR

20. Enumerate the steps to be followed by a manufacturing organization to obtain ISO 9001
certification. (14)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to Quality Engineering - Definitions of the terms - quality, quality planning,

quality control, quality assurance, quality management, Total Quality Management (TQM)-
overview on TQM - the TQM axioms - consequences of total quality- Barriers to TQM-
Deming approach to TQM – Juran’s quality trilogy- Crosby's fourteen steps for quality
improvement

Module 2

Strategic Quality Management: Cost of Quality- Customer satisfaction- Quality Function

Deployment (QFD)- Integrating quality into strategic management - quality and the
management cycle- obstacles to achieving successful strategic quality management- supplier
selection- Concepts of 5S, Six Sigma, Lean, Kaizen

Module 3

Human dimensions of TQM – Top management commitment- Leadership for TQM- Change
management- resources for quality activities - training for quality –Employee involvement,
motivation empowerment- teamwork- self managing teams - role of the quality director

Module 4

Supporting Tools, Activities And Techniques in TQM Projects : Affinity diagram -

brainstorming - cause and effect analysis - process flow chart – check sheets- Scatter
diagram - Pareto chart- Histogram and fundamentals of statistics - Control charts for
improving process capability- Taguchi’s robust design- Total Productive maintenance- Failure
Mode and Effect Analysis

Module 5

Quality System: ISO 9000 family of standards- ISO 9001:2000 model, quality management
system- management responsibility- resource management- product realisation- measurement
analysis and improvements- ISO 14000 family of standards- Quality auditing- types and
benefits.

Text Books

1. Besterfield Dale H. , Besterfield Carol, Besterfield Glen H., Besterfield Mary,

Urdhwareshe Hemant, Urdhwareshe Rashmi, “Total Quality Management (TQM) 5e”,
Pearson Education, 2018.

2. Subburaj Ramasamy, “Total Quality Management”, McGraw Hill Education,, 2017.

3. Dr. K.C. Arora, “Total Quality Management”, S K Kataria and Sons, 2013.

4. Suganthi, L and Anand A Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited, 2009.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

5. Juran J M and Gryna, F M, "Quality Planning and Analysis - From Product Development
through Use", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Limited, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2004.

Reference Books

1. Logothetics N, "Managing for Total Quality - From Deming to Taguchi and SPC", Prentice
Hall Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.
2. Deming W E, “Out of the Crisis," MIT Press, Cambridge, MA, 1982.
3. Juran J M and Juran on “Leadership for Quality" An Executive Handbook, The Free
Press, New York, 1989.
4. Salor J H, "TQM-FIeld Manual," McGraw Hill, New York, 1992.
5. Crosby P B, "Quality is Free" McGraw Hill, New York, 1979.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Introduction to Quality Engineering
Definitions of the terms - quality, quality planning, quality control,
1.1 2
quality assurance, quality management
Total Quality Management (TQM)- overview on TQM - the TQM
1.2 2
axioms - consequences of total quality- Barriers to TQM
Deming approach to TQM - Juran quality trilogy- Crosby's
1.3 3
fourteen steps for quality improvement
2 Strategic Quality Management
Cost of Quality- Customer satisfaction- Quality Function
2.1 2
Deployment (QFD)
Integrating quality into strategic management - quality and the
2.2 management cycle- obstacles to achieving successful strategic 2
quality management
2.3 Supplier selection 1
2.4 Concepts of 5S, Six Sigma, Lean, Kaizen 3
3 Human dimensions of TQM
Top management commitment- Leadership for TQM- Change
3.1 2
management
3.2 Resources for quality activities - training for quality 1
3.3 Employee involvement, motivation, empowerment 3
3.3 Teamwork- self managing teams - role of the quality director 1
4 Supporting Tools, Activities And Techniques in TQM Projects
Affinity diagram - brainstorming
4.1 1

Cause and effect analysis - process flow chart – check sheets-

4.2 3
Scatter diagram - Pareto chart
4.3 Histogram and fundamentals of statistics - 1
4.4 Control charts for improving process capability- 2
4.5 Taguchi’s robust design- Total Productive maintenance- Failure 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mode and Effect Analysis

5 Quality System
5.1 ISO 9000 family of standards 1
ISO 9001 model, quality management system- management
5.2 responsibility- resource management- product realisation- 2
measurement analysis and improvements
5.3 ISO 14000 family of standards 1
5.4 Quality auditing- types and benefits 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET424 INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULICS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course covers the fundamentals of operating principles, configuration

features, functionalities, and applications of various elements in typical hydraulic systems

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Identify the basic elements of a fluid power system

CO 2 Describe the properties of a hydraulic fluid
CO 3 Distinguish between different types of pumps
CO 4 Explain the operation and features of various hydraulic actuators
CO 5 Describe the purpose, construction and operation of various control valves
CO 6 Develop a hydraulic circuit to perform a desired function

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2

CO 2 3 2

CO 3 3 2

CO 4 3 2

CO 5 3 2

CO 6 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

1 2 Examination
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Differentiate between hydraulic and pneumatic system

2. Discuss the advantages of fluid power
3. Describe key applications of fluid power
4. Identify the graphical symbols used for various components of fluid power system

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Describe the properties of hydraulic fluids

2. Discuss the primary functions of hydraulic fluid

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Explain various types of pumps

2. Compare the various performance factors of gear, vane and piston pumps
3. Explain pressure intensifiers
4. Describe various types of accumulators

Course Outcome 4(CO4):

1. Describe the construction and design features of hydraulic cylinders

2. Identify the various types of hydraulic cylinder cushioning and mountings
3. Explain various types of hydraulic motors

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the construction, working and applications of various hydraulic control valves
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

2. Discuss the construction features and functions of conductors

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Illustrate different hydraulic circuits

2. Describe the applications of accumulator

Model Question Paper

Total Pages:
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH MINOR DEGREE EXAMINATION,
COURSE CODE: MET424
COURSE NAME: INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULICS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks) Marks
1 Comment on the differences between pneumatic and hydraulic fluid power 3
systems
2 Differentiate between viscosity and viscosity index. Under what conditions is 3
viscosity index important?
3 Derive an expression for the actual volumetric displacement of the vane pump in 3
terms of the dimensions of the pump components
4 Discuss about the influence of pressure, size and speed on pump noise level 3
5 Sketch and explain Tandem cylinder 3
6 List the advantages of a hydraulic motor over an electric motor 3
7 Discuss why all fluid power systems are fitted with a pressure relief valve 3
8 Explain the construction features and function of flexible hoses 3
9 Explain the purpose of a regenerative circuit 3
10 Write a note on accumulator as hydraulic shock absorber 3

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)
Module -1
11 a) With the help of a neat sketch, explain the basic components of a hydraulic
8
system
b) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a hydraulic system 6
12 a) Explain the desirable properties of hydraulic fluids 6
b) Sketch and describe a rectangular flat-topped reservoir fitted with basic
8
accessories.
Module -2
13 a) Explain with a neat sketch, the working of a gear pump. Also obtain an
8
expression for its volumetric efficiency
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b) With a neat sketch, explain the working of a lobe pump. 6

14 a) With neat sketch, explain how vane pump can be made to work as a variable
7
displacement pump without changing the speed of the prime mover
b) Explain the construction and operation of piston-type accumulators 7

Module -3
15 a) Describe end cushion provided in hydraulic cylinder with neat sketch
b) With the help of a neat sketch, explain the construction and working of a
balanced vane motor. Give its main advantage over vane motor.
16 a) Sketch a semi-rotary vane motor. Derive an expression for its torque capacity 6
b) With a neat diagram, explain the construction and working of in line piston motor
8
(Bent axis design).

Module -4
17 a) Give the classification of check valves and explain the construction and working
7
of pilot-operated check valve, giving the necessary drawing.
b) Explain with neat sketch, how three way and four way direction control valve
7
operate
18 a) With a neat sketch, explain the construction and working of pressure reducing
7
valve
b) With a neat sketch, explain spool type direction control valve used to control
7
double acting cylinder

Module -5
19 a) Describe with a neat circuit diagram, fail-safe system that provide overload
6
protection for system components.
b) Draw the sequencing circuit for operating two double acting cylinders in a
sequence in both strokes. Use appropriate component for the circuit & explain its 8
working for a hydraulic system
20 a) With a neat circuit diagram, explain the working of a meter out circuit for
6
controlling the speed of a cylinder
b) The table of a surface grinding machine needs automatic reciprocating motion.
8
Draw a hydraulic circuit to achieve this motion
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to fluid power: - Classification of fluid power systems- Basic components,

Symbols & circuits of a hydraulic and pneumatic system, Properties of fluids

Hydraulic fluids and fluid handling components: - Fluid for hydraulic systems- Hydraulic
fluids reservoirs- Hydraulic seals- Filters and Strainers

Module 2

Hydraulic pumps:- Classification and pumping theory- Principle of working and

constructional details of vane pump, gear pumps, radial and axial plunger pumps- Pump
performance

Hydraulic pressure intensifiers, Power storage devices –Accumulators

Module 3

Hydraulic actuators:- Linear hydraulic actuators-Types, Cylinder cushions, Rotary actuators –

Classification, construction and working of gear, vane, axial and radial piston motors-
Limited rotation hydraulic actuators- Hydraulic motor performance

Module 4

Hydraulic control valves:-Classification of control valves- Directional control valves-

Pressure control valves- Flow control valves- Servo valves

Hydraulic conductors

Module 5

Hydraulic circuits:- Control of single and double -acting hydraulic cylinder, Regenerative
circuit- Pump-unloading circuit, Double-pump hydraulic system, Pressure intensifier circuit,
Counter balance valve application, Hydraulic cylinder sequencing circuits, Automatic
cylinder reciprocating system, Locked cylinder using pilot check valves, Cylinder
synchronizing circuits- Speed control of a hydraulic cylinder, Bleed-off flow control circuit-
Fail-safe circuits- Hydraulic motor breaking system, Hydraulic circuit examples with
accumulator

Text Books

Anthony Esposito, Fluid Power with Applications, Pearson Education India, 2013 NIL

Reference Books

1. J. J. Pipenger, Tyler Gregory Hicks, Industrial Hydraulics, McGraw Hill,1979

2. Herbert E. Merritt, Hydraulic Control Systems, John Wiley & Sons, 1967
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. S R Majumdar, Oil hydraulic systems: Principles and Maintenance, McGraw Hill

Education, 2017
4. Qin Zhang, Basics of hydraulic systems, CRC Press, 2018

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Introduction to fluid power systems
Introduction to fluid power – Classification of fluid power
systems, Hydraulics and pneumatics systems, Hydrostatic and
1.1 1
hydrodynamic Systems, Advantages, disadvantages and
applications of fluid power
Basic components, symbols & circuits of a hydraulic and
1.2 pneumatic system, Comparison between hydraulic and pneumatic 2
systems, Comparison of different power systems
Properties of fluids- Density, Specific weight, Specific volume and
1.3 Specific gravity- Pressure, head and force- Pascal’s law and its 1
applications-Bulk modulus-Viscosity and viscosity index
Hydraulic fluids and fluid-handling components:-Fluid for
hydraulic systems-Functions of hydraulic fluid, desired properties
1.4 1
of hydraulic fluid, Types of hydraulic fluids, Additives and their
purposes, Factors influencing the selection of a fluid
Hydraulic fluids reservoirs- Functions, Design and constructional
1.5 1
features, Sizing of the reservoir
Hydraulic seals- O-rings, Compression packings, piston cup
1.6 packings, piston rings and wiper rings, Seal materials-Filters and 1
Strainers - Types of filters, Beta Ratio of filters
2 Hydraulic pumps
Hydraulic pumps: Classification and pumping theory, Gear pump-
2.1 Construction and working of external gear pump, Advantages and 1
disadvantages, Theoretical flow rate
Construction and working of Internal gear pump, Lobe pump,
2.2 1
Gerotor pumps and Screw pump
Construction and working of Vane pump, Advantages and
2.3 disadvantages ,Theoretical flow rate, Variable displacement vane 1
pump- Balanced vane pump, Advantages and disadvantages
Piston pump- Axial and radial design, Axial piston pump (Bent-
2.4 axis design, Swash-plate-type piston pump, and Radial piston 1
pump
Pump performance-Volumetric efficiency, Mechanical efficiency
2.5 and Overall efficiency, Pump performance curve, Pump noise and 1
Pump selection
2.6 Hydraulic pressure intensifier:-axial-piston style single and 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

double-acting hydraulic pressure intensifiers

Power storage devices -Accumulators: Types-Weight loaded or
2.7 gravity type, Spring loaded type and Gas loaded (Nonseparator 1
and separator) type
3 Hydraulic actuators
Linear hydraulic actuators-Types-Single acting and double acting
3.1 cylinders, Ram cylinders, Telescopic cylinders and Tandem 1
cylinders
Cylinder cushions, Cushioning pressure, Cylinder force, Velocity
3.2 1
and Power, Acceleration and deceleration of cylinder loads
Cylinder mountings, Mechanics of hydraulic cylinder loadings-
3.3 1
First class, Second class and Third class lever systems
Rotary actuators – Classification, Construction and working of
gear, vane, balanced vane, axial (Swash plate and Bent-axis
3.4 2
design) and radial piston motors, Limited rotation hydraulic
actuators
Theoretical torque, power, flow rate, hydraulic motor
performance- volumetric efficiency, mechanical efficiency and
3.5 overall efficiency, Performance characteristics of hydraulic motor, 2
Comparison of gear, vane and piston motor, Simple numerical
problems
4 Hydraulic control valves
Hydraulic control valves-Classification of control valves,
Directional control valves-symbolic representation, constructional
features of poppet, sliding spool, rotary spool valves, Manual,
4.1 2
mechanical, solenoid and pilot operated DCV, shuttle valve, and
check valves-Two way, Three way, and Four way valves-
Applications
Pressure control valves – types, Simple pressure-relief valve,
Compound pressure-relief valve, Pressure-reducing valve,
4.2 2
Unloading valve, Counterbalance valve and Pressure-sequence
valve- Applications
Flow control valves – Functions of flow control valves, Factors
that determine the flow rate across an orifice or a restrictor,
4.3 compensated and non-compensated FCV, needle valve, 1
temperature compensated, pressure compensated, pressure and
temperature compensated FCV, symbolic representation.
Servo valves-Mechanical-hydraulic servo valve, Electrohydraulic
4.4 1
servo valve, Proportional control valves
Hydraulic conductors- Conductor sizing, Pressure rating of
4.5 conductors, Steel pipes, Steel tubing, Plastic conductors and 1
Flexible hoses, Pressure losses in hydraulic conduits
5 Hydraulic circuits
5.1 Control of single and Double -acting hydraulic cylinder, 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Regenerative circuit- Expression for the cylinder extending speed

Pump-Unloading Circuit, Double-pump hydraulic system,
5.2 1
Pressure intensifier circuit, Counter balance valve application
Hydraulic cylinder sequencing circuits, Automatic cylinder
5.3 1
reciprocating system
Locked cylinder using pilot check valves, Cylinder synchronizing
5.4 1
circuits- Parallel and series
Speed control of a hydraulic cylinder-meter-in and meter-out
5.5 circuit, Meter-in and meter-out flow control of both strokes, 1
Bleed-off flow control circuit
Fail-Safe circuits- Protection from inadvertent cylinder extension
5.6 1
and fail-safe overload protection
Hydraulic motor breaking system, Hydraulic circuit examples with
accumulator- Accumulator as an auxiliary power source,
5.7 1
Accumulator as a leakage compensator, Accumulator as an
emergency power source, Accumulator as a shock absorber
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

PRESSURE VESSEL AND PIPING
MET434 PEC 2 1 0 3
DESIGN

Preamble: To gain knowledge of pressure vessel design, designing of piping and piping
systems, and familiarize with codes and practices in design.

Prerequisite: Solid mechanics/ Strength of materials

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO Level of learning
Course Outcomes
Nos domain
Explain the design considerations of various shell type
CO 1 2
pressure vessels
Explain the design considerations of thick cylinders under
CO 2 2
various kind of loadings
Apply design concepts in the design of shell and supports of
CO 3 3
vertical and horizontal pressure vessels
Solve problems involving the thickness and stiffener support
CO 4 3
requirements of cylinders under buckling loads
Solve problems involving pipe stress and flexibility analysis
CO 5 and also understand the fracture based design concepts of 3
pressure vessels

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 1

CO 2 3 1

CO 3 3 3 3 1

CO 4 3 3 3 1

CO 5 3 3 3 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 30 30 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Derive the expression for membrane stresses in axisymmetric shell structure under internal
pressure
2. Derive the expression for dilation in cylindrical and spherical pressure vessels under
internal pressure
3. Explain the conditions for buckling in ellipsoidal shells and discuss the remedies

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Derive the Lame’s equations of stresses in thick cylinder under internal pressure
2. Find out the stress pattern developed in case of built up cylinders under a given
interference
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

after assembly
3. What are thermal stresses in a pressure vessel and how they are evaluated

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the design steps in the design of tall cylindrical vessel under wind load
2. Explain with neat sketches the supports used in the case of vertical tall self-supported
cylindrical vessels
3. Explain with sketches, various stresses developed in a saddle supported horizontal pressure
vessel

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Derive the expression for critical buckling pressure for cylinder under external pressure
2. Explain with sketches the support design for pipes under external pressure
3. Explain the design curves for design of cylinders under both external pressure and
compressive axial loading

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the flexibility analysis of piping system
2. what is meant by modes of fracture? What is stress intensity factor
3. Explain failure assessment diagram and its usage

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET 434
Course Name: PRESSURE VESSEL AND PIPING DESIGN

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

Part-A

1. Explain the stresses developed in a conical cylinder under internal pressure?

2. Derive the expression for dilation of a spherical shell under internal pressure?
3. Explain with sketches the stress pattern in a built-up cylinder after assembly?
4. Derive the expression for internal pressure for the full cross section yielding of a
cylinder?
5. Explain with sketches, any two types of supports used for tall cylindrical vessels?
6. What are the different sections of ASME pressure vessel code?
7. Explain with sketches, stiffener support for pipe under external pressure?
8. Explain the design curves for pipe under both external and axial compressive
loading?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

9. What is meant by flexibility analysis?

10. What is meant by modes of fracture?
(10X3=30)

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)
MODULE – 1
11. (a) Derive the general expression for stress equilibrium in an axisymmetric shell
under internal pressure (6 marks)

(b) Derive the expression for membrane stresses in an elliptical shell and bring out the
condition for local buckling (8 marks)
OR
12. (a) Derive the expression for stresses developed in a thin cylinder under internal
pressure (6 marks)
(b) Derive the expression for membrane stresses developed in a torus under internal
pressure (8 marks)

MODULE – 2

13. (a) A short Thick cylinder with 1000 mm internal diameter and 1300mm outside
diameter subjected to an internal pressure of 40 MPa. Determine the location and
magnitude of maximum tangential, radial, shear stresses induced. Find also the
dilation of its inner and outer radii. (10 marks)

(b) Sketch the variation of stresses across the thickness of thick cylinder under
internal pressure (4 marks)

OR

14. (a) A steel tube of 240 mm external diameter is shrunk on another steel tube of 80
mm internal diameter. Diameter of junction is 160mm. The interference before
shrinking is 0.08 mm. Find the tangential stress at outer surface of inner tube (ii) the
tangential stress at the inner surface of the outer tube and (iii) radial stress at the
junction after assembly. E=200 GPa (6 marks)

(b) Derive the expression for the internal pressure for intermittent yielding of
cylindrical pressure vessels? (8 marks)

MODULE – 3

15. (a) Explain the design procedure of a tall vessel under wind load as per ASME code?
(8 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(b) Explain with sketches, various supports used in case of tall vessel? (6 marks)

OR

16. (a) Explain the procedure followed in the case of tall vessel under seismic load?
(8 marks)
(b) Explain with sketches, various supports used in case of horizontal pressure vessels
under internal pressure? (6 marks)

MODULE – 4

17. (a) Derive the critical buckling pressure for a circular ring under external pressure?
(8 marks)
(b) Explain the procedure for pipe sizing under external pressure? (6 marks)

OR

18. (a) Discuss the classification of cylinders for design for buckling as per ASME code.
(6 marks)
(b) Explain the following terms (i) factors A & B for vacuum design (ii) Buckling
coefficients (iii) effect of imperfections on buckling strength ? (8 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. (a) Discuss various methods to increase flexibility in a piping system. (6 marks)
(b) A thick walled cylinder with 300 MPa internal pressure, internal diameter 300mm
external diameter 600 mm is having a semi elliptical defect 10mm deep on the inside
surface. The aspect ratio of the flaw is 0.1. Check whether vessel is satisfactory from
fracture point of view. KIC =180 MPa√𝑚 . (8 marks)

OR

20.(a) Explain the following (i) Displacement stress range (ii) stress range reduction factor
(ii) Sustained and occasional loads. (7 marks)
(b) Explain (i) fracture toughness (ii) leak before break (iii) through thickness/surface
flaws. (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1
Pressure vessel – Terminology – Types of loads – Types of pressure- Stresses in pressure
vessels – Dilation of pressure vessels – Membrane stress analysis of vessel shell components
Cylindrical shells, spherical shells, torus, conical head, elliptical head
Bending of circular plates under uniform pressure load with simply supported and clamped
edges (no derivation)

Module 2
Stresses in thick walled cylinders – Lame’s equation for internal and external pressure
Shrink-fit stresses in Built up cylinders, autofrettage of thick cylinders, Thermal stresses and
their significance

Module 3
Design of pressure vessels- shell and support design of tall vessel under wind and seismic
load
Shell and support design of horizontal vessels
Familiarization with relevant ASME codes and standard practices in pressure vessel design

Module 4
Buckling -Elastic buckling of cylinders or pipes under external pressure- Pipe sizing under
external pressure- Design of Stiffeners
Buckling under combined compressive pressure and axial load

Module 5
Pipe stress Analysis -allowable displacement stress range for expected cyclic life-stress
intensification factor and flexibility factor-Flexibility Analysis (Analysis as per clause 119.7.1
in Code ASME B31.1/clause 319.4.1 in ASME B31.3 only)
Fracture based design of pressure vessels- modes of fracture-stress intensity factor -through
thickness and surface cracks in pressure vessels (mode-I only)-fracture toughness-leak before
break-failure assessment diagram

Text Books
1. John F. Harvey, “Theory and Design of Pressure Vessels‟ CBS Publisher and
Distributors
2. Brownell, L. E., and Young, E. H., “Process Equipment Design”, John Wiley and
Sons
3. Somnath Chathopadhyay, “Pressure Vessels Design and practice”, C. R. C Press
4. Prashant Kumar, “Elements of fracture mechanics”, McGraw Hill Education India

Reference Books
1. Henry H. Bender, “Pressure Vessels Design hand book‟
2. ASME Pressure Vessel Codes Section VIII, 2006
3. Dennis Moss,”Pressure Vessel Design Manual” Gulf publishing, 2003
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4. J. Phillip Ellenberger, “Pressure Vessels: ASME Code Simplified”, ASME

5. “American standard code for pressure piping, B 31.1”, ASME.
6. Smith P, “Fundamentals of Piping Design”, Elsevier
7. ASME Pressure Vessel and Boiler code, Section VIII Div. 1, 2, and 3”, ASME
8. T. L Anderson “Fracture Mechanics: Fundamentals and applications” Taylor
&Francis
9. D. Broek, “Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics”, Kluwer Academic
Publications

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Design of thin pressure vessels
Membrane stresses in general axisymmetric shell under internal
1.1 3
pressure
1.2 Stresses and dilation in various kinds of components 2
1.3 Bending plates 2
2 Design of thick pressure vessels
Stresses in thick walled cylinders – Lame’s equation - Shrink fit
2.1 3
stresses in built up cylinders in Built up cylinders
2.2 Autofrettage in cylinders 2
2.3 Thermal stresses and significance 2
3 Vertical and horizontal vessel design
3.1 Design of tall vertical shell structure and its supports 3
3.2 Design of shell and supports for horizontal vessels 3
3.3 Familiarization with standards and codes 2
4 Buckling Analysis
4.1 Derivation of critical buckling pressure under external pressure 2
4.2 Pipe sizing and stiffener support design 3
4.3 Combined circumferential and axial buckling design 2
5 Flexibility analysis and fracture design
5.1 Pipe stress and flexibility analysis 2
5.2 Fracture fundamentals 2
5.3 SIFs, leak before break and failure assessment diagram 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
DATA ANALYTICS FOR
MET444 PEC 2 1 0 3
ENGINEERS

Preamble: The student will understand the techniques to analyse different types of data,
characterize it and can apply them to make decision modelling process more intelligent.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain different data analysis techniques

CO 2 Discuss the concepts behind the descriptive analytics and predictive analytics of data
CO 3 Familiarize with Big Data and its sources
CO 4 Illustrate different visualization techniques in data analysis

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO
3 3 3 1 1 2
1
CO
3 3 3 3 1 1
2
CO
3 3 3 1 1 1 1
3
CO
3 3 3 3
4

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 30
Understand 30 30 40
Apply 10 10 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the different types of prediction errors.

2. What is the need for sampling? Explain about different sampling methods.

3. Compare and contrast analysis and reporting in data analytics with suitable example

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Differentiate descriptive and predictive analysis technique.

2. Explain how attribute selection is carried out in decision tree induction.

3. Write different steps in Apriori algorithm used for finding frequent item sets.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain 3V’s in big data analytics

2. List the different sources of bigdata.

3. With suitable example, give the difference between Business intelligence and data analytics.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Discuss file system used for big data analysis.

2. Explain how recommender systems help in big data analysis.

3. Explain different techniques used for data visualization,

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VIII SEMESTER B.TECH EXAMINATION

MET444 DATA ANALYTICS FOR ENGINEERS

PART A

Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks

1. Explain how significance level affects inferences drawn from data.

2. Define the term correlation between data points.

3. Differentiate classification and prediction.

4. State the different activation functions used in neural networks.

5. Give a brief description about how to perform descriptive analysis in a dataset.

6. Explain frequent item sets in association rule mining with example ?

7. Define bigdata.

8. List the challenges in big data acquisition

9. Explain the term social media analytics.

10. What is the significance of scatter plot matrix?

PART B

Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

Module I

11.Give the significance of resampling technique. Explain the different types of resampling
techniques.

12. Describe the process of hypothesis technique with the help of a suitable example.

Module II

13. Illustrate regression analysis in predictive modelling.

14. Explain how principal components are extracted using PCA.

Module III

15. Differentiate K-means and hierarchical clustering techniques with suitable example.

16. Describe market-based model used in descriptive analysis.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module IV

17. With the help of a neat diagram, describe data analytics lifecycle.

18. a. Describe the characteristics of Big data?

b. Summarize the challenges and applications of big data analytics

Module V

19. What is HDFS? How does it handle Big Data?

20. Illustrate and explain the concept of Map Reduce framework

Syllabus

Module 1 (7 hours)

Introduction to Data Analysis - Evolution of Analytic scalability, analytic processes and tools,
Analysis vs reporting - Modern data analytic tools. Statistical concepts: Sampling
distributions, re-sampling, statistical inference, prediction error.

Module 2 (7 hours)

Predictive Analytics – Regression, Decision Tree, Neural Networks. Dimensionality

Reduction - Principal component analysis

Module 3 (7 hours)

Descriptive Analytics - Mining Frequent item sets - Market based model – Association and
Sequential Rule Mining - Clustering Techniques – Hierarchical – K- Means

Module 4 (6 hours)

Introduction to Big data framework - Fundamental concepts of Big Data management and
analytics - Current challenges and trends in Big Data Acquisition

Module 5 (8 hours)

Popular Big Data Techniques and tools- Map Reduce paradigm and the Hadoop system-
Applications Social Media Analytics, Recommender Systems- Fraud Detection

Text Books

1. EMC Education Services, Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering,
Analyzing, Visualizing and Presenting Data. John Wiley & Sons, 2015.

2. Jaiwei Han, Micheline Kamber, “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Elsevier,
2006.

3. Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, Intelligent Data Analysis, Springer, 2007.2.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. Bart Baesens," Analytics in a Big Data World: The Essential Guide to Data Science
and its Business Intelligence and Analytic Trends”, John Wiley & Sons, 2013
Challenges and Future Prospects, Springer, 2014.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
Module 1
1.1 Introduction to Data Analysis - Evolution of Analytic scalability 1
1.2 Analytic processes and tools 2
1.3 Analysis vs reporting - Modern data analytic tools 2
Statistical concepts: Sampling distributions, re-sampling,
1.4 2
statistical inference, prediction error.
Module 2
2.1 Predictive Analytics – Regression 2
2.2 Decision Tree 2
2.3 Neural Networks 1
2.4 Dimensionality Reduction - Principal component analysis 2
Module 3
3.1 Descriptive Analytics - Mining Frequent item sets 2
3.2 Market based model 2
3.3 Association and Sequential Rule Mining 1
3.4 Clustering Techniques – Hierarchical 1
3.5 K- Means 1
Module 4
Introduction: Fundamental concepts of Big Data management and
4.1 1
analytics
4.2 Data Analytics Lifecycle Overview 2
4.3 Current challenges and trends in Big Data Acquisition 2
Module 5
5 Popular Big Data Techniques and tools 1
5.1 Map Reduce paradigm 2
5.2 Hadoop system 2
Applications Social Media Analytics, Recommender Systems-
5.3 2
Fraud Detection
5.4 Data Visualization techniques-overview 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET454 INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The need for structural integrity of the surfaces of components is an essential
requirement from the point of view of reliability of industrial components. Surfaces need to
possess special properties so to prevent material loss, and to perform with minimal energy
losses by way of friction. Surface treatment methods and prudent lubrication strategies
coupled with testing-equipment/probes for conducting the tribological investigations form the
basic aspects of tribological management in an industry. This course is meant to introduce the
basic aspects of tribology, which a practising engineer or an engineer-analyst working in this
area would require.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply Surface characterisation techniques for tribological investigations

CO 2 Explain theories of friction.
CO 3 Apply theories of wear for industrial problems.
CO 4 Explain Lubrication methods employed in Industrial scenarios.
CO 5 Explain Surface Coating techniques for industrial applications.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 1 3
CO 2 3 2 1
CO 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 2 1
CO 5 3 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 30 30 80
Apply 20 20 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Realize the importance of tribology in mechanical engineering design.

2. Introduce tribology as a Surface Science.

3. Introduce the student to surface characterisation.

4. Learn some specific methods for physical and chemical characterisation of surfaces.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Define coefficient of friction.

2. Learn an equipment to measure friction at the interface of a tribological pair.

3. Analyse different regimes of lubrication in terms of the Stribeck curve.

4. Learn some aspects of the theory of hydrodynamic lubrication

5. Learn the plowing and adhesion theories of friction

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Define Wear, and methods of quantifying wear.

2. Learn theories of wear.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Learn about (i) Four Ball Tester and (ii) Pin-on-disk tester equipment to quantify wear.

4. Discuss wear and friction aspects, in common mechanical engineering scenarios.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Introduce methods of classifying lubricants.

2. Learn the use of different lubricants for different industrial applications.

3. Learn about additives in industrial lubricants.

4. Create awareness related to environmental aspects while using lubricants.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Introduction to surface treatments for better tribological performance.

2. Learn some specific methods employed in surface engineering for industrial applications.

3. Introduction to maintenance of tribological components and diagnostic methods for health

assessment of bearings.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

COURSE CODE : MET454 COURSE NAME : INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY

MAX. MARKS : 100 DURATION : 3 HOURS

PART – A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Write a short note on surface failure modes of machine components.

2. Enumerate few roughness parameters and their significance.

3. Explain the Stribeck diagram with the aid of a typical sketch.

4. Explain the film-thickness-parameter used to demarcate boundary lubrication regime.

5. Differentiate between fatigue wear and fretting wear.

6. What is running-in? How is it taken care of in the case of new automobiles?

7. What are extreme pressure lubricants? Make a short note on one method of testing their
effectiveness.

8. Write a short note on SAE classification of lubricants.

9. Make a short note on coatings for metal cutting tools.

10. Write a short note on the tribological maintenance of roller chains and wire ropes in
industry.

PART – B

(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1

11. (a) Differentiate between (i) backscattered and (ii) secondary images as obtained from a
SEM and when is one imaging type preferred over the other? If you want to image surface
relief on a surface undergone wear, which type would you use? Why? (7 Marks)

(b) On the same surface, if you want to analyse the distribution of phases on it, which of the
above modes should be used? If an element-wise gross estimation of the metallic
composition of the transfer layer formed on the surface is to be obtained, can in it be made
possible within a SEM? How is it realized? Explain the phenomena. (7 Marks)

OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

12. (a) Compare finding the chemical composition of the surface layer using (I) Energy
Dispersive X-ray (EDX)analysis and (ii) X-ray photo-electron spectroscopy. When will you
prefer one method over the other? (5 Marks)

(b) Compare roughness characterization using a (i) mechanical stylus interferometry and
(ii) optical interferometry. Discuss the merits and de-merits of each method. (5 Marks)

(c) Write short notes on Fractal characterisation of surfaces (ii) Bearing- area-curve
( 4 Marks)

MODULE – 2

13. Derive the Reynolds’ one dimensional bearing lubrication equation which expresses the
pressure-gradient in terms of entraining velocity and film thickness factors. What are the
simplifying assumptions involved in the derivation? How can this equation be used to
determine the load carrying capacity of a hydrodynamic bearing? Plot the radial pressure
distribution in the case of a cylindrical journal in a long hydrodynamic bearing. (14 Marks)

OR

14. (a) Compare theories of friction. (5 Marks)

(b) Describe method to visualize and lubricant film and make measurements, in a laboratory
experiment. (7 Marks)

(c) Viscosity of the lubricant is not a significant parameter under boundary lubrication
conditions-discuss. (2 Marks)

MODULE – 3

15. (a) Derive the Archard’s wear equation. What is the usual range of values for Archard’s
wear coefficient? (5 Marks)

(b) Discuss methods of quantifying wear (2 Marks)

(c) Compare wear theories (7 marks)

OR

16. (a) Are friction and wear always correlated? Discuss (4 Marks)

(b) Compare and contrast pin-on-disk testing and four-ball-wear-testing (6 Marks)

(c) Write a short note on improving wear resistance of cylinder liners in engines. (4 Marks)

MODULE – 4

17. (a) Make short notes on the following terms in the context of liquid lubricants: (i)
Viscosity Index (ii) ISO viscosity grades (iii) SAE viscosity grades (iv) pour point
depressants (v) Anti Wear (AW) and Extreme pressure (EP) additives (vi) Bio-degradability
(vii) Eco-toxicity (14 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR

18. (a) Metal working fluids have functions different from that of usual tribological fluids
used in industry- discuss. (3 Marks)
(b)What are the factors limiting the applicability of vegetable oils for tribological
applications in automobiles. (2 Marks)
(c) Discuss methods for engine oil testing (3 Marks)
(d) Explain Environmental impact assessment related to lubricating oils (3 Marks)
(e) Explain the classification of engine oils (3 Marks)

MODULE – 5

19 (a) Explain different methods used for testing of coatings (4 Marks)

(b) Briefly describe about the application of engineering coatings in aircraft industry (4 Marks)

(c) Differentiate between PVD and CVD processes with practical examples from industry
applications (6 Marks)

OR

20 (a) What are signs of bearing failure? Explain a diagnostic method of monitoring bearing
health? (7 Marks)

(b) Discuss improvements in Cylinder-liner technologies for improved tribological

performance in IC engines. (7 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1 (7 Hours)

Tribology as a Surface Science- Tribological considerations in design of machine elements,

and industrial maintenance - surface failure of machine components-Physical and chemical
characterization of surfaces-Surface roughness- tools for roughness characterization-
Industrial norms in roughness quantification/characterization-surface finish symbols-
Characterization of surface morphology – The Scanning Electron Microscope- backscattered
and secondary imaging- X-ray dispersive analysis-. X-ray photo-electron spectroscopy and
chemical characterization of surface films.

Module 2 (7 Hours)

Friction-coefficient of friction- Stribeck curve-Lubrication regimes- Film thickness

parameter- Fundamentals of hydrodynamic lubrication - Hydrodynamic pressure profile-
Visualization and Measurement of film thickness in well lubricated contacts. Boundary
lubrication-plowing and adhesion components-Pin-on-plate arrangement to measure friction.
Theories of friction

Module 3 (7 Hours)

Wear – wear of metals-wear of polymers- Types of wear: adhesive wear-abrasive wear-

corrosive wear-fretting wear- quantification of wear- wear debris analysis. Pin-on-disk
machine and the Four Ball Tester. Friction and wear in the context of internal combustion
engines, Bearings, Gears, cams and tappets, and in metal machining.

Module 4 (8 Hours)

Lubricants: Classification according to Carbon distribution-Viscosity Index-Viscosity Grades

and their choice for various applications-Engine oil viscosity classification. Selection of
industrial Lubricating oils. Metal working lubricants. Types of additives in lubricants for
improved tribological performance. Environmental aspects and sustainability aspects related
to use and disposal of lubricating oils, recycling.

Module 5 (7 Hours)

Surface Engineering: Thermal Diffusion Methods(carburizing,Nitriding, Nitro-carburising,

boriding, chromizing) –Methodical Methods for coating development-PVD Methods-CVD
Methods-Electrochemical deposition-Thermal spraying.

Bearings-Classification of Bearings-Bearing materials-Bearing maintenance, diagnostic

maintenance of Tribological components and considerations in IC engines and automobile
parts, roller chains and wire ropes.

Text Books

1. Prasanta Sahoo, “Engineering Tribology”, PHI, New Delhi, 2005.

2. John Williams, “Engineering Tribology”, Illustrated edition, Cambridge University Press,
2005.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. R.D. Arnell, P. B. Davies, J. Halling, T. L. Whomes, “Tribology: Principles and Design

Applications “, 1991.

Reference Books

1. Theo Mang, Kirsten Bobzin, and Thorsten Bartels, “Industrial Tribology- Tribosystems,
Friction, Wear and Surface Engineering, Lubrication”, Wiley-VCH; First edition, 2011.

2. B. Bhushan,” Principles and Application of Tribology”, Wiley, Second Edition, 2013.

3. G. W. Stachowiak and A. W. Batchelor, “Engineering Tribology”, Butterworth-Heinemann,

Second revised edition, 2000.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module-1 7
1.1 Importance of Tribology in design of machine elements 1 Hour
1.2 Surface roughness- Industrial norms in roughness quantification-
1 Hour
surface finish symbols
1.3 Tools for roughness characterization- 1 Hour
1.4 The Scanning Electron Microscope- 1 Hours
1.5 backscattered and secondary imaging- X-ray dispersive analysis 1 Hours
1.6 X-ray photo-electron spectroscopy and chemical characterization
2 hours
and surface films.
2 Module-2 7

2.1 Coefficient of friction and Pin-on-plate arrangement to measure

1 Hour
friction.
2.2 Stribeck curve-Lubrication regimes- Film thickness parameter 1 Hour
2.3 Fundamentals of hydrodynamic lubrication - Hydrodynamic
2 Hours
pressure profile
2.4 Visualization and Measurement of film thickness in well
1 Hour
lubricated contacts
2.5 Boundary lubrication-plowing and adhesion components 1 Hour
2.6 Theories of friction 1 Hour
3 Module-3 7
3.1 Wear of metals 1 Hour
3.2 Types of wear 1 Hours
3.3 Quantification of wear 1 Hour
3.4 Wear of polymers 1 Hour
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3.5 Pin-on-disk machine and the Four Ball Tester. 1 Hour

3.6 Friction and wear in the context of internal combustion engines,
Bearings, Gears, cams and tappets, and in metal machining. 2 Hours

4 Module-4 8
4.1 Classification of liquid lubricants according to Carbon
1 Hour
distribution-
4.2 Viscosity Index-Viscosity Grades and their choice for various
2 Hours
applications
4.3 Engine oil viscosity classification 1 Hour
4.4 Selection of industrial Lubricating oils. Metal working lubricants. 2 Hours
4.5 Types of additives in lubricants for improved tribological
1 Hour
performance
4.6 Environmental aspects related to use and disposal of lubricating
1 Hour
oils, recycling.
5 Module-5 7
5.1 Carburizing, Nitriding, Nitro-carburising, boriding, chromizing 2 Hours
5.2 PVD-CVD-Electrochemical deposition-Thermal spraying 2 Hours
5.3 Bearings-Classification of Bearings-Bearing materials- 1 Hour
5.4 Diagnostic maintenance of Tribological components 1 Hour
5.5 Maintenance of gear boxes, roller chains and wire ropes. 1 Hour
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MICRO AND NANO
MET464 PEC 2 1 0 3
MANUFACTURING

Preamble: This course serves to enable the learners to understand the underlying principles,
processes and applications with regard to broader areas of micro manufacturing and
nanotechnology. It also covers dimensional metrology aspects and tools for micro and
nanoscale manufacturing.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO 1 Explain different techniques used in micro and nano manufacturing
CO 2 Describe conventional techniques used in micro manufacturing.
CO 3 Describe non-conventional micro-nano manufacturing approaches.
Outline the working principle and applications of micro and nano finishing
CO 4
processes
CO 5 Explain the basics of micro and nano fabrication techniques.
CO 6 Apply and select metrology systems in micro and nano manufacturing.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 - - - - - 1 - 2 1 1 -
CO 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 1 1 -
CO 3 2 - - 2 - - 1 - 2 1 1 -
CO 4 3 - - - - - 1 - 2 1 1 -
CO 5 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 1 1 -
CO 6 3 - - - 1 - 2 - 2 1 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

1 (marks) 2 (marks) Examination
(marks)
Remember 20 20 40
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse - - -
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module, of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14
marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain different techniques used in micro and nano manufacturing.

2. Explain typical fabrication process for an Integrated Chip.

3. Describe 3 basic regimes of fabrication at microscale.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Discuss application areas of micro-turned components.

2. Point out limitations and challenges of micro-extrusion process.

3. List out any 4 application areas of micro-milling process.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. How are micromolds designed?

2. Discuss the principle and process of micro-EDM.

3. Discuss the principle and process of micro-LBM.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. With the help of a suitable diagram, explain the principle of Magnetorheological finishing
process.

2. Describe Magnetic Float Polishing.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Draw the schematic of Elastic Emission Machining and explain.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain how an elastic stamp is manufactured using soft lithographic techniques.

2. Describe the structure and properties of CN tubes.

3. What are the different approaches to deposition of diamond in a CVD Diamond process.
Explain.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Explain Scanning white-light interferometry with the help of a suitable diagram.

2. Outline unique metrological challenges faced in micro-nano manufacturing?

3. Explain Scanning Electron Microscopy in detail.

Model Question Paper

MET464 MICRO AND NANOMANUFACTURING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part−A
Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks
.
1. Define microgrinding.
2. Point out any 3 differences between macroturning and microturning.
3. Why are high speed air turbine spindles useful for micromachining?
4. What is hot embossing? Why is it particularly suited for manufacturing of optical
components?
5. Draw the schematic of Chemical Mechanical Polishing process.
6. Illustrate the mechanism of material removal in Ion beam machining.
7. List out various materials used in semi-conductor industry.
8. Show by a schematic how an elastic stamp is manufactured using soft lithography?
9. Draw the schematic of typical scanning white light interferometry set up.
10. What are the merits and demerits of On-machine metrology?
Part−B

Answer one full question from each module.

Module I

11. Discuss in detail the design requirements of microturning machines. (14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR

12. Discuss the outcomes of microgrinding of ceramic materials. (14 marks)

Module II
13. Discuss the Focused Ion Beam system. (14 marks)
OR
14. Discuss various methods available for manufacturing of micromolding tools. (14 marks)

Module III
15. Describe Magnetic float polishing with a neat diagram. (14 marks)
OR
16. Discuss the principles of MRAFF process with a suitable diagram. (14 marks)

Module IV
17. Explain how a Field effect transistor is fabricated by the process of soft lithography?
(14 marks)
OR
18. Describe all properties of Carbon Nanotubes. (14 marks)

Module V
19. Explain the operation of scanning tunneling microscope. (14 marks)

OR

20. What is Atomic force microscope? Explain its modes of operation. (14 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to principles of micro and nano fabrication techniques- microfabrication of semi-

conductor devices-standard micro machining flow chart- basics of micro fabrication-
manipulative techniques. Introduction to mechanical micro machining: Micro drilling-process,
tools and applications, Micro turning- principle, process, tools and applications, Diamond
micro turning- principle, process, tools and applications, Micro milling and Micro grinding-
processes, tools and applications, Micro extrusion- principle, process and applications.

Module 2

Introduction to Non-conventional micro-nano manufacturing: Abrasive Jet Micro-machining,

WAJMM- principle, process and applications. Micro EDM, Micro WEDM, Micro EBM-
principle, process and applications. Micro ECM, Micro LBM, Focused Ion Beams- process,
principle and applications. Micro moulding processes: Injection moulding, Reaction injection
moulding, hot embossing, injection compression moulding- micromolding tools-applications.

Module 3

Introduction to micro-nano finishing processes: Magnetorheological Finishing (MRF)

processes, Magneto-rheological Abrasive Flow Finishing (MRAFF) processes- Principle,
equipment and applications- Force analysis for MRAFF process. Magnetic float polishing
(MFP), Elastic Emission machining (EEM), Ion Beam Machining (IBM), Chemical
Mechanical Polishing (CMP)- principle, equipment and applications

Module 4

Introduction to Nano Fabrication: Nano fabrication using soft lithography- principle and
applications. Introduction to Carbon nano materials- CN tubes- properties and applications. CN
tube transistors-Diamonds- properties and applications- CVD Diamond technology- LIGA
process. Laser micro welding- Electron Beam Micro welding.

Module 5

Introduction to micro-nano inspection and metrology: Scanning electron microscopy, Scanning

white light interferometry, Optical Microscopy, Scanning probe Microscopy, Scanning
tunnelling microscopy, Confocal microscopy, Atomic force microscopy. Introduction to On-
machine metrology.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books and References

1. Mark J. Jackson, Micro and Nanomanufacturing, Springer, 2007.

2. N.P.Mahalik, Micromanufacturing and nanotechnology, Springer, 2006.
3. Mark J. Jackson, Microfabrication and Nanomanufacturing, Taylor and Francis-CRC
press, 2006.
4. V.K. Jain, Micromanufacturing Processes, Taylor and Francis- CRC press, 2012.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
No. Topic COs
Lectures
Introduction to micro-nano fabrication techniques- principles and 1 CO1
1.1
evolution.
Overview of microfabrication of semiconductor devices- example- 1 CO1
1.2
Integrated Chip.
Standard micro machining flow chart and basics of microfabrication- 2 CO1
1.3
manipulative techniques.
Introduction to mechanical micro machining. Micro drilling-principle, 1 CO2
1.4
process, description and applications.
1.5 Micro turning- principle, process, description and applications. 1 CO2
1.6 Diamond micro turning- principle, process, description and applications. 1 CO2
Micro milling and Micro grinding- principle, process, description and 1 CO2
1.7
applications. CO5
Micro grinding- principle, process, description and applications. 1 CO2
1.8

Micro extrusions- principle, process, description and applications. 1 CO2

1.9
CO5
Introduction to non-conventional micro-nano manufacturing- Abrasive jet 2 CO3
2.1 micro machining, WAJMM- principle, process, description and
applications.
Micro EDM, Micro WEDM, Micro EBM- process, principle, description 2 CO3
2.2
and applications.
Micro ECM, Micro LBM- process, principle, description and 1 CO3
2.3
applications.
2.4 Focused Ion Beams-process, principle and applications. 1 CO3
Micromolding process- Injection molding, reaction Injection molding- 1 CO3
2.5
process, principle, description and applications.
2.6 Hot embossing, injection compression molding- description 1 CO3
2.7 Micromolding tools- applications. 1 CO3
Introduction to micro-nano finishing processes- magnetorheological 1 CO4
3.1
finishing (MRF)- process, principle, description, application.
Magnetorheological abrasive flow finishing (MRAFF)- process, principle- 1 CO4
3.2
Force analysis- description and applications.
Magnetic float polishing (MFP)- process, principle, description and 1 CO4
3.3
applications.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Elastic emission machining (EEM), Ion beam machining (IBM)- process, 1 CO4
3.4
principle, description and applications.
Chemical mechanical polishing (CMP)- process, principle, description 1 CO4
3.5
and applications.
Introduction to Nanofabrication- Nanofabrication using soft lithography- 1 CO5
4.1
principle and applications- examples- field effect transistor, elastic stamp.
4.2 Manipulative techniques- principle and description, applications. 1 CO5
Introduction to Carbon nano materials- CN tubes- properties and 1 CO5
4.3
applications- CN tube transistors.
4.4 Diamonds- properties and applications- CVD diamond technology. 2 CO5
4.5 LIGA process. 1 CO5
4.6 Laser micro welding- Electron beam micro welding. 1 CO5
Introduction to micro-nano inspection and metrology- Scanning electron 1 CO6
5.1
microscopy- principle and description.
5.2 Scanning white light interferometry- principle and description. 1 CO6
5.3 Optical microscopy- principle and description. 1 CO6
Scanning probe microscopy, Scanning tunnelling microscopy- principle, 1 CO6
5.4
description and applications.

Confocal microscopy, Atomic force microscopy- principle and 1 CO6

5.5
description.

5.6 Introduction to On-machine metrology. 1 CO6

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

HEATING AND VENTILATION
MET474 PEC 2 1 0 3
SYSTEMS

Preamble: The objectives of the course are:

 The course aims at exposing the students to the areas of heating ventilation and air
conditioning air conditioning systems and their applications.

 The students will be capable to select suitable system for an application.

 The students will be equipped with the basic technical knowledge regarding the
subject, present trends and sustainable practices.
Pre-requisite: MET473 Refrigeration and Air conditioning.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the quality of air to be supplied for comfort and healthy condition.
CO 2 Compare different HVAC systems for an application.
CO 3 Design a HVAC system by selecting suitable components and environmentally safe
refrigerant.
CO 4 Evaluate the cooling load and capacity requirement of ac machine
CO 5 Design the duct for HVAC and make the drawing.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 1 1
CO 2 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 1
CO 4 3 3 3 3 1
CO 5 3 3 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

End Semester
Assignment Test 1 Test 2
Examination
(%) (%) (%)
Remember 25 20 20 10
Understand 25 40 40 20
Apply 25 40 40 70
Analyse 25
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each
question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. What is the need of mixing return air to outdoor air?
2. Explain different types of air filters used and their specification?
3. Explain the % outdoor air requirements for different application?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain VRF system and its advantages?
2. Explain terminal reheat system and its merits?
3. Explain all water system of refrigeration and its draw backs?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Describe different types of refrigerants and their relative ODP and GWP?
2. Differentiate between scroll type compressor and reciprocating compressor?
3. What is cooling tower and explain its working principle?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. An Auditorium has seating capacity 800 people is to be maintained at 23°C

DBTand50% RH. The outdoor conditions are 40°C DBT and 27°C WBT. The various
loads in the office are: Solar heat gain 10KW, sensible heat gain per occupant 80W,
Latent heat per occupant 70W, Lighting load 5KW, Sensible heating load from other
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

sources 12KW, Infiltration load 0.3m3/sec. Outdoor air and return air is mixed in the
ratio of 1: 6 ,before cooling coil (processing unit) and then supplied to room. The
supply temperature cannot be lower than 120C .find capacity of the plant required,
mass flow rate of air.

2. What are ESR, ISEER, GSHF and RSHF? Explain.

3. Explain the method of basement ventilation Systems?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What are the general aspects to be considered while designing a duct system?

2. Explain equal friction method of determination of duct size?

3. Write any five notations, legends, symbols used in HVAC drawing.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEMS–MET474

MAXIMUM: 100 MARKS DURATION: 3 HOURS

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks

1. What is HEPA filter? Where it is used?

2. What is the need of mixing return air to outdoor air??

3. What is the need of air water system of air conditioning system?

4. What is the difference between CAV and VAV system of air conditioning?

5. What are ODP and GWP of a refrigerant?

6. What are the disadvantages of hydrocarbon reorients?

7. What is IPLV of an ac system?

8. Explain the method of basement ventilation Systems?

9. Write any five notations, legends, symbols used in HVAC drawing.

10. What is throw of air?

(10 X 3 = 30 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a.Explain the % outdoor air requirements for different application? 7 marks

b. Explain comfort chart? How to locate comfort region for all-round air conditioning?
7 marks

12. a. Explain effective temperature? What are the factors effecting effective temperature?
. 7 marks
b. Explain any two methods of dehumidification and represent it as line diagram in
psychrometric chart.
7 marks

MODULE II

13. a. Explain Dual duct system with the help of neat sketch? 7 marks

b. Explain VRF system and its advantages over the conventional system? 7 marks

14. a. Explain all air system of air conditioning with the help of neat sketch? 7 marks

b. Explain the air conditioning system suitable for an auditorium, restaurant and bed
room with proper justifications? 7 marks

MODULE III

15. a. Explain CFC, HCFC, and HFC, HC refrigerants with suitable examples and relative
merits and demerits. 7 marks

b. What are the methods to check leak and ensure capacity during commissioning of an
ac system? 7 marks

16. a. Explain scroll type compressor with the help of a neat sketch? 7 marks

b. What is the use of a cooling tower? Explain the working with the help of a neat sketch.
7 marks

MODULE IV

17. a. An Auditorium has seating capacity 800 people is to be maintained at 23°C

DBTand50% RH. The outdoor conditions are 40°C DBT and 27°C WBT. The various loads
in the office are: Solar heat gain 10KW, sensible heat gain per occupant 80W, Latent heat
per occupant 70W, Lighting load 5KW, Sensible heating load from other sources 12KW,
Infiltration load 0.3m3/sec. Outdoor air and return air is mixed in the ratio of 1: 6 ,before
cooling coil (processing unit) and then supplied to room. The supply temperature cannot be
lower than 120C .find capacity of the plant required, mass flow rate of air. 10 marks

b. Explain different thermal insulation materials used in ac system. 4 marks

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

18.a. Explain various heating loads in an auditorium? How infiltration load accounted while
calculating RSHF 7 marks

b. explain bypass factor. Represent the bypass factor in a psychrometric chart for a cooling
coil. 7 marks

MODULE V

19 a. A packaged air conditioner serves four rooms in an apartment. The schematic layout of
the duct system together with the volume flow rate to each room is shown in Figure. The duct
shall be of standard round sections. The air velocity in the first section is not to exceed 25
m/s. There is a pressure drop of 5 Pa at each of the outlet grilles at F,H,M and K. Assume the
resistance due to the fittings as below. Assume pressure drop at Elbow 2 pa, pressure drop at
Tee joint= 1Pa. Determine the size of the duct system using the equal-friction method.
Estimate the static pressure drop in each line

12 marks

b. What is spread of air? 2 marks

20 a. Explain Principles of air distribution. 7 marks

b. draw a simple drawing of an air conditioning system for a conference hall of seating
capacity 50 people? 7 marks
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1- Introduction to HVAC

Importance of HVAC systems. Standard requirements of ventilation air for different

applications. Air changes per hour -Conditions for comfort –comfort chart, effective
temperature. Factors effecting effective temperature, Methods of dehumidification,
humidification, and temperature control. Mixing of air stream. Type of air filters and their
specification, HEPA filters.

Module 2 Air conditioning systems.

Unitary system, window , split system, central station system, all air system, all water system,
air-water system, VAV system , CAV systems Terminal reheat system, Dual duct system,
Multi- zone system, Fan Coil units , relative merits and demerits – selection of particular
system for an application. Cassette ac system. VRF system and inverter AC - relative merits.

Module 3 Components of HVAC

Type of Compressors used- rotary, reciprocating, scroll type- cooling and heating coil.
Environment friendly refrigerants.CFC, HCFC, HFC, HC refrigerants.Ozone depletion
potential(ODP), global warming potential(GWP), use of boilers in HVAC, ducts, electrical
systems for HVAC, air distribution system -types of outlets- diffusers- condensers, cooling
tower, air handling unit, pumps, air dampers. Hot water generator and chilled condenser
water piping. Testing and maintenance on ducts and pipes. Refrigerant leak detection
methods.

Module 4 Systems and Applications

Capacity determination of an ac machine. COP, EER, IEER, IPLV, star rating, specification
of capacity TONs, HP, Cooling load calculation, sensible heat loads, latent heat loads, SHF,
RSHF, GSHF, infiltration, bypass factor, Numerical examples. Methods to check the
capacity during commissioning of new ac machine. Passive techniques to reduce cooling
loads or heating loads in building. Insulation materials.

Basement ventilation Systems, Basement ventilation. Car park ventilation, Toilet, pantry
ventilation.

Module 5 Duct design

General consideration of duct design. Duct size determination. Equal friction method,
balanced capacity method, Static regains method assumed velocity method. Location with
due consideration for reduction of heat gain. Layout of supply and return air ducts. General
considerations in air duct design layout. Throw of air, Spread of air, Entrainment ratio,
Principles of air distribution, Sound and Vibration control techniques.

HVAC drawings, understanding notations, legends, symbols used in HVAC drawing.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Arora C.P, Tata McGraw hill.

2. A Course in Refrigeration and air conditioning Arora S. C. and S. Domkundwar, Dhanpat

Rai and Company. 2002

3. A text book of Refrigeration and air conditioning – R.K .Regiput, Katson books.

4. Refrigeration and air conditioning - Ahamadul Ameen Eastern economy addition.

5. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: Analysis and Design, Faye C.

Mcquiston, Jerald D. Parker, Jeffrey D. Spitler, John Wiley and sons. New York

Data books

1. Refrigeration tables and charts including air conditioning data, C P Kothandaraman, New
Age International.

2. Refrigeration and air conditioning data book, Domkunduwar and Domkundwar, Dhanpat
Rai & co.

Reference books

1. ASHRAE Handbook 201(Volume 1, 2, 3)

2. Principles of heating ventilation and air conditioning in building, john Dixon, Delmar
learning

3. Analysis and design of heating ventilation and air conditioning system, Herbert W
Stanford and Adam F spach, CRC press -Taylor and Francis.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

HOURS
MODULE TOPICS
ALLOTED

Importance of HVAC systems. Standard requirements of

2-1-0
ventilation air for different applications. Air changes per hour

Conditions for comfort –comfort chart, effective temperature.

1
Methods of dehumidification, humidification, and temperature 2-0-0
control. Mixing of air stream.

Type of air filters and their specification, HEPA filters. 1-0-0

Unitary system, window , split system, central station system, all

air system, all water system, air-water system, VAV system ,
2 CAV systems Terminal reheat system, Dual duct system, Multi-
zone system, Fan Coil units , relative merits and demerits – 3-1-0
selection of particular system for an application. Cassette ac
system. VRF system and inverter AC - relative merits.

Type of Compressors used- rotary, reciprocating, scroll type,

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

cooling and heating coil. Environment friendly refrigerants.CFC,

HCFC, HFC, HC refrigerants.Ozone depletion potential(ODP),
3 global warming potential(GWP), use of boilers in HVAC, ducts, 4-2-0
electrical systems for HVAC, air distribution system -types of
outlets- diffusers- condensers, cooling tower, air handling unit,
pumps, air dampers. Hot water generator and chilled condenser
water piping. Testing and maintenance on ducts and pipes.
Refrigerant leak detection methods.

Capacity determination of an ac machine. COP, EER, IEER,

IPLV, star rating, specification of capacity TONs, HP, Cooling
load calculation, sensible heat loads, latent heat loads, SHF, 4-2-0
RSHF, GSHF, infiltration, bypass factor, Numerical examples

4 Methods to check the capacity during commissioning of new ac

machine. Passive techniques to reduce cooling loads or heating 2-1-0
loads in building. Insulation materials.

Basement ventilation Systems, Basement ventilation. Car park

2-0-0
ventilation, Toilet, pantry ventilation.

General consideration of duct design. Duct size determination.

Equal friction method, balanced capacity method, Static regains
method assumed velocity method. Location with due
5 consideration for reduction of heat gain. Layout of supply and 3-1-0
return air ducts. General considerations in air duct design layout.
Throw of air; Spread of air, Entrainment ratio, Principles of air
distribution, Sound and Vibration control techniques.

HVAC drawings, understanding notations, legends, symbols used

in HVAC drawing. Simple drawing of a ac system for an 3-1-0
auditorium and conference room
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
PROGRAM ELECTIVE IV
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET416 COMPOSITE MATERIALS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course helps the students to understand the concept of various matrices and
reinforcements used in composites. The course also covers about types of fibers, polymer
matrix composites, metal matrix composites, ceramic matrix composites and its
manufacturing and applications, micromechanics of composites

Prerequisite: EST100 METALLURGY & MATERIAL SCIENCE

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

To understand history about composites, various matrices and reinforcements used in

CO1
composites
To understand types of fibers/ whiskers used in composites, structure, properties and
CO2
applications, manufacturing process
To know about polymer matrix composites, classification, properties, characteristics
CO3
and applications, manufacturing methods.
To know about metal matrix composites, classification, properties, characteristics and
CO4 applications, manufacturing methods. Alloys and their potential role as matrices in
composites. To understand about intermetallics.
To know about ceramic matrix composites, classification, properties, characteristics
CO5
and applications, manufacturing methods, micromechanics of composites

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 3

CO 2 3 3

CO 3 3 3

CO 4 3 3

CO 5 3 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment
Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 25 25 25
Understand 15 15 15
Apply 30 30 30
Analyse 10 10 10
Evaluate 10 10 10
Create 10 10 10

Mark distribution
ESE
Total Marks CIE ESE
Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions
from each module and having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all
questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have a maximum of 2 subdivisions.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1 Explain about history of evolution of composites
2 Explain about the function of reinforcement and matrix in composite
3 Classify the composite according to type of matrix and reinforcement
4 What are the advantages and disadvantages of composites
5 Discuss about smart composites
6 Explain about types of bonding at interface
7 Explain about wettability of composites

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1 Compare between natural fibers and synthetic fibers
2 Explain the procedure of boron fiber fabrication
3 Explain Ex-Pan carbon fiber and Ex-Pitch carbon fiber fabrication
4 With neat sketched explain Ex-cellulose carbon fiber.
5 Discuss about aramid fiber fabrication
6 Explain whiskers with examples.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1 Discuss about thermoset, thermoplastic and elastomeric polymeric materials
2 Explain different hand lay methods
3 Expalin different moulding methods for PMC

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1 How the metal matrix composites are classified
2 Explain the role of intermetallics in MMC
3 What are the properties, characteristics and applications of MMC
4 Explain different production techniques of MMC

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1 How CMC are classified and their potential role as matrices material.
2 What are the properties, characteristics and applications of CMC.
3 Explain conventional techniques for the production of CMC.
4 Explain maximum stress and strain criterion related to micromechanics of composites
5 Derive expression for Tsai-Hill and Tsai-Wu failure criterion.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code : MET416

Course Name : COMPOSITE MATERIALS

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

PART – A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1) What are the conditions to be satisfied for a material to be called as a composite

material.

2) Define wettability in fiber-matrix bonding and its importance in composite properties.

3) What are the important application of aramid fibers.

4) Write a short note on Boron fibers.

5) Compare thermosetting and thermoplastic matrix material.

6) List the function of components in pultrusion technique used in PMCs.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

7) What are the modifications required in casting process for improving the properties of
metal matrix composites.

8) Name the metals and their properties used in metal matrix composites.

9) With the aid of neat sketch explain lanxide process.

10) What are the different failure modes of fiber composites?

PART – B

(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1
11. (a) Classify the composite materials based on the geometry of the reinforcement and
matrix. ( 7 Marks)
(b) Explain the different types of bonding interfaces in composites with sketches.

( 7 Marks )
OR
12. (a) What are the advantages of composite materials over the conventional engineering
materials? (6 marks)

(b) Explain about 1) Fiber pull out 2) Delamination 3) Fiber bridging 4) Debonding
( 8 Marks )
MODULE – 2

13. (a) How the carbon fibers are produced from PAN? (7 marks)

(b) Describe the filament winding process in polymer matrix composites. (7 marks)

OR

14. (a) Explain different types of whiskers with examples. (7 marks)

(b) Write a short note on wet jet spinning process for producing aramid fibers

(7 marks)
MODULE – 3
15. (a) With neat sketch, explain the hand lay-up process? (7 marks)

(b) With neat sketches explain manufacturing of laminated composite using

prepreg (7 marks)
OR
16. (a) Explain the significance of various polymer materials used for PMC production?
(7 marks)
(b) With neat sketch, explain the bag moulding process? (7 marks)

MODULE – 4
17. (a) With neat sketches explain about In situ process by unidirectional solidification
(7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(b) With the aid of neat sketch explain Squeeze casting method for MMC?
(7 marks)
OR

18. (a) Explain application of precipitation-hardenable alloy materials used in the

manufacture of metal matrix composites (7 marks)

(b) Write a short note about diffusion bonding. (7 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. (a) With neat sketches explain liquid infiltration process in ceramic matrix composites

(7 marks)

(b) State and explain the maximum- stress theory for predicting the composite failure
(7 marks)
OR

20. (a) Explain the in-situ chemical reaction techniques for CMC production? (7 marks)

(b) Describe the Tsai-Hill failure criteria for composites. (7 marks)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

Module 1
Composite : Introduction, definition, characteristics, functions, classification of composites
based on structure and matrix , smart composites, advantages and limitations, history,
industrial scene and applications, Interfaces: wettability and bonding interface in composites.
types of bonding at interface.

Module 2
Fibers : Introduction, types of fibers, natural fibers, glass fiber fabrication, structure, properties
and applications, boron fiber fabrication, structure, properties and applications, carbon fiber,
Ex-Pan carbon fiber, Ex cellulose carbon fiber, Ex-Pitch carbon, carbon fiber structure,
properties and applications, aramid fiber fabrication, structure, properties and applications,
whiskers: characteristics, properties and applications.

Module 3
Polymer matrix composites (PMC) : thermoset, thermoplastic and elastomeric polymers,
properties, characteristics and applications as matrix materials, processing of polymer matrix
composites: hand methods, Lay up method, spray up method, moulding methods, pressure
bagging and bag moulding methods, Autoclave-based processing with prepregs, pultrusion and
filament winding process.

Module 4
Metal matrix composites (MMC) : classification of metals, intermetallics, alloys and their
potential role as matrices in composites, properties, characteristics and applications of metals
as matrix materials, production techniques: powder metallurgy, diffusion bonding, melt
stirring, squeeze casting, liquid infiltration under pressure, insitu process.

Module 5
Ceramic matrix composites (CMC) : classification of ceramics and their potential role as
matrices, properties, characteristics and applications of ceramics as matrix materials,
conventional techniques : cold pressing and sintering, hot pressing, reaction bonding, liquid
infiltration, pultrusion. lanxide process, insitu chemical technique, sol-gel technique,
Micromechanics of composites: maximum stress and strain criterion (derivations only). Tsai-
Hill and Tsai-Wu failure criterion (derivations only). mechanics of load transfer from matrix
to fiber (description)

Text Books
1. K. K. Chawla, Composite Materials : Science and Engineering, Springer, 3e, 2013.
2. P.K.Mallicak, Fiber-reinforced composites , Monal Deklar Inc., New York, 1988.
3. Reddy J N (Ed.), Mechanics of Composite Materials; Selected Works of Nicholas
J. Pagano, Springer, 1994
4. Robert M. Jones, Mechanics of Composite Materials, CRC Press, 1998
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books
1. F.L.Matthews & R.D.Rawlings, Composite Materials, Engineering and Sciences,
Chapman & hall, London, 1994
2. Hand Book of Composites, George Lubin. Van Nostrand, Reinhold Co. 1982
3. Micael hyer, Stress Analysis of Fiber - Reinforced Composite Materials , Tata
McGraw Hill, 1998.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No of
No Topic lectures +
Tutorial
1 Module 1: Introduction to composites 7 hours

1.1 Composite : Introduction, definition, characteristics, functions

1L
Classification of composites based on structure and matrix: History,
1.2
industrial scene and applications 1L

1.3 Smart composites, advantages and limitations

1L+1L

1.4 Interfaces: wettability and bonding interface in composites

1L

1.5 Types of bonding at interface. 1L + 1T

2 Module 2: Types of fibers/ whiskers used in composites 7 hours

2.1 Fibrs : Introduction, types of fibers, natural fibers 1L

Fiberization, stabilization, carbonization, graphitization, glass fiber

2.2 1L
Fabrication, structure, properties and applications

2.3 Boron fiber fabrication, structure, properties and applications 1L

Carbon fiber, Ex-Pan carbon fiber, Ex-Pitch carbon, Ex cellulose carbon

2.4 1L + 1T
fiber
2.5 Aramid fiber fabrication, structure, properties and applications 1L
2.6 Whiskers: characteristics, properties and applications. 1L

3 Module 3: Polymer matrix composites 6 hours

Polymer matrix composites (PMC) : thermoset, thermoplastic and

3.1 1L
Elastomeric polymers
3.2 Properties, characteristics and applications as matrix materials 1L
Processing of polymer matrix composites: hand methods, Lay up method,
3.3 1L
spray up method
Moulding methods, pressure bagging and bag moulding methods,
3.4 1L + 1T
Autoclave-based processing with prepregs
3.5 Pultrusion and filament winding process. 1L
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4 7 hours
Module 4: Metal matrix composites
Classification of metals, intermetallics, alloys and their potential role as
4.1 2L
matrices in composites
4.2 Properties, characteristics and applications of metals as matrix materials 1L
Production techniques: powder metallurgy, diffusion bonding, melt
4.3 1L + 1T
stirring
4.4 Squeeze casting, liquid infiltration under pressure, insitu process. 1L + 1T
Module 5: Ceramic matrix composites & Micromechanics of
5 8 hours
composites
5.1 Classification of ceramics and their potential role as matrices 1L
5.2 Properties, characteristics and applications of ceramics as matrix materials 1L
Conventional techniques : cold pressing and sintering, hot pressing,
5.3 1L
Reaction bonding, liquid infiltration, pultrusion.
5.4 Lanxide process, insitu chemical technique, sol-gel technique 1L
Micromechanics of composites: maximum stress and strain criterion
5.5 1L + 1T
(derivations only)
5.6 Tsai-Hill and Tsai-Wu failure criterion (derivations only) 1L
5.7 Mechanics of load transfer from matrix to fiber (description only) 1L
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND
MET426 PEC 2 1 0 3
MACHINE LEARNING

Preamble: This course is specifically designed for Mechanical Engineers to get

acquainted with essential mathematical concepts, brush up on their statistics and the
fundamentals of ML and AI

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to
Level of
CO
Course Outcomes learning
Nos
domain
Illustrate the basic mathematics of artificial intelligence and
CO 1 2
Machine learning
CO 2 Explain the concepts of artificial intelligence 2
Explain machine learning techniques and computing environment
CO 3 2
that are suitable for the applications under consideration
Develop scaling up machine learning techniques and associated
CO 4 3
computing techniques and technologies for various applications
CO 5 Explain data analytics and Machine learning Applications 2

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2 1
CO 2 3 2 2 1
CO 3 3 2 2 1
CO 4 3 2 2 1
CO 5 3 2 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 40 40 70
Apply 10 10 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Define Maximum error estimate
2. Define simple correlation and write formula for simple correlation coefficient
3. Write the expression for the control line and three sigma for mean Chart

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. What is Artificial Intelligence?
2. Application of Artificial Intelligence
3. Explain about neural networks?

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Machine learning concepts with examples.
2. Discuss supervised and unsupervised learning?
3. Write a program using python

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain KNN?
2. What is web scraping?
3. Discuss about Natural Language processing

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What are the benefits of Data science for Mechanical Engineers?
2. Explain about Numpy and pandas
3. Write about the potential applications of Machine learning in manufacturing sector?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Model Question Paper

MET 426 - ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours

Part – A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Define Maximum error estimate

2. Write the normal equations for the least square curve of the form y = abx
3. What are the Problem Characteristics of Artificial Intelligence?
4. What is a Rule based programming?
5. Define machine learning.
6. Discuss any four examples of machine learning applications
7. Write down the major differences between K-means clustering and hierarchical clustering
8. Explain the different string formats available in Python with examples
9. What is data science and its benefits?
10. What are the goals of data science?
PART -B
Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE – 1
11. Find moment generating function for binomial distribution and hence find its mean and
variance (14 marks)
OR
12. Samples of size 2 are taken from the population 4,8,12,16,20,24 with replacement. Find
a) The mean of the population
b) The standard deviation of the population
c) Mean of the sampling distribution of means
d) The standard deviation of the sampling distribution of mean. (14 marks)

MODULE – 2
13. Give details of the year-wise development of AI. How AI is being used in the area of
Mechanical engineering research (14 marks)
OR
14. (a) Differentiate between the various learning methods: neural networks, reinforcement
learning and genetic algorithm (8 marks)
(b) What are the various heuristic techniques .Explain how they are different from the
solution guaranteed techniques (6 marks)

MODULE – 3
15. Distinguish between supervised learning and Reinforcement learning. Illustrate with an
example (14 marks)
OR
16. (a) Write a program to print the sum of the following series 1 + 1/2 + 1/3 +. …. + 1/n
(8 marks)
b) Explain the need for continue and break statements. Write a program to check whether
a number is prime or not. Prompt the user for input. (6 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE – 4
17. Explain about web scraping and discuss about the possibility of usage (14 marks)
OR
18. (a) Explain about Semantic Analysis? (4 marks)
b) What do you understand by Natural Language Processing? List any two real-life
applications of Natural Language Processing. (10 marks)

MODULE – 5
19. (a) Illustrate with an example different stages of data science project. (8 marks)
b) How the AI technology used in automobile industry (6 marks)

OR
20. Explain the importance of Machine learning concepts in manufacturing sector (14 marks)

Syllabus
Module 1

Fundamentals of probability and statistics – Probability theory- sample and population –

statistical interference – random process – logical relations – conditional probability – density
function – distributions – regressions – parametric estimation – non parametric – statistical
test.

Module 2
Introduction to artificial intelligence - Typical Applications, Keras API, Artificial Neural
Networks (ANNs): Concept, Activation Functions, Feed Forward Neural Networks and Back
Propagation-Working of CNN, Convolutional Layer, Pooling, Flatten, Image recognition
techniques and feature Extraction fundamentals

Module 3
Machine learning: Introduction, Types of Machine Learning: Supervised, Unsupervised and
Reinforcement learning, Applications, Classification vs Prediction Problems, Linear
Regression Algorithm, Python Basics – string, number, list, tuple, Dictionary, functions,
conditional statement, Loop statements, simple programming exercises using python

Module 4
Introduction to KNN (K Nearest Neighbor), Working of KNN, Decide the value of K,
Confusion Matrix, Accuracy Score, Web Scraping Basics- Need of Web Scraping, Natural
Language Processing: Introduction, Stages in natural language Processing, Application of
NLP in Real world applications

Module 5
Introduction to Data Science, Flow of Data Science, Numpy, Pandas, Matplotlib. Machine
Learning Applications across Industries.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Text Books

1. T.K.V. Iyengar “Probability & Statistics”, S.Chand (G/L) & Company Ltd, 2008
2. Schalkoff, R.J., “Artificial Intelligence: An Engineering Approach”, McGraw-Hill,
1990
3. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A modern approach”. Prentice
Hall, New Jersey, 1995
4. Ethem Alpaydin, Introduction to Machine Learning, 2nd edition, MIT Press 2010
5. Tom Mitchell, Machine Learning, McGraw-Hill, 1997

Reference Books

1. Nilson, N. J., “Principles of Artificial Intelligence”, Springer Verlag, Berlin, 1980

2. Eugene Charniak and Drew McDermot, “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence”,
Addison Wesley Longman Inc., 1998
3. Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome Friedman, The Elements Of Statistical
Learning, Second edition Springer 2007

4. Shai Shalev-Shwartz and Shai Ben-David., Understanding Machine Learning ,

Cambridge University Press. 2017

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Probability theory- sample and population – statistical interference 2
1.2 random process – logical relations 2

1.3 conditional probability – density function – distributions

2
1.4 Parametric estimation – non parametric – statistical test. 1
MODULE 2
2.1 Introduction to artificial intelligence - Typical Applications 1
2.2 Keras, API 1
2.3 Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs): Concept, Activation Functions 2
2.4 Feed Forward Neural Networks and Back Propagation- 1
Working of CNN, Convolutional Layer, Pooling, Flatten, Image
2.5 2
recognition techniques
MODULE 3
3.1 Machine learning: Introduction 1
3.2 Supervised, Unsupervised and Reinforcement learning, 2

3.3 Classification vs Prediction Problems, Linear Regression Algorithm

2

3.4 Python Basics, simple programming exercises using python

2
MODULE 4
4.1 Introduction to KNN (K Nearest Neighbor), Working of KNN 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4.2 Confusion Matrix, Accuracy Score

2

4.3 Web Scraping Basics- Need of Web Scraping

2
Natural Language Processing: Introduction, Stages in natural language
4.4
Processing 1
MODULE 5
5.1 Introduction to Data Science 2
5.2 Flow of Data Science 2
5.3 Numpy, Pandas, Matplotlib 2

5.4 Machine Learning Applications across Mechanical Industries

2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ACOUSTICS AND NOISE
MET436 PEC 2 1 0 3
CONTROL

Preamble: Course objectives:

 To understand the principles of acoustics.

 To give awareness about different acoustic measurement instruments and analysis
equipment.
 To introduce the importance of noise control
 To give awareness about regulations and standards related to noise exposure.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Level of
CO No. Course Outcomes learning
domain
Explain various acoustic terminologies and understand the physics
CO 1 2
behind acoustic wave propagation
Evaluate reflection and transmission coefficients in sound transmission
CO 2 5
through different media and understand the concept of standing waves
Explain the mechanism of hearing, concept of noise, various noise
CO 3 2
criteria and standards
Explain different noise measures and various noise measurement
CO 4 2
devices
CO 5 Apply noise control measures to different machines and devices 3

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2

CO 2 3 3 3 3

CO 3 3 3 2 3 3

CO 4 3 3 2 3

CO 5 3 3 3 3 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 20 20 50
Analyse
Evaluate 10 10 20
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Derive acoustic wave equation. Deduce the equation for plane acoustic wave

2. Describe about Acoustic impedance, Energy density and Sound intensity.

3. a) Discuss about different ‘levels’ of sound measurement

b) A harmonic plane wave is propagating with frequency 35 Hz in air at room temperature.

The acoustic pressure at a point 1.5 m from the sound source at a time 2 s from the instant
of observation is 0.2 Pa. Find the acoustic pressure at the same point at 4 s.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe about spherical waves, beam width and directivity index.

2. Sound wave is propagating from a fluid medium of density𝜌 to a fluid medium of density
𝜌 at an angle of incidence 𝜃 . Speed of sound in first medium is 𝑐 and that in second
medium is 𝑐 . Obtain the pressure reflection and pressure transmission coefficient.

3. There was some concern that over-water flights of the supersonic transport would harm
marine life. A plane sound wave from the aircraft in air (ρ = 1.1kg/m 3 , c= 347 m/s) has a
sound pressure of 140 dB. The sound wave strikes the surface of the sea water (ρ =
1022kg/m3 , c=1500 m/s) normally .Determine the intensity of the transmitted wave in sea
water and the magnitude of the rms acoustic pressure of the transmitted wave

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. With the help of a neat sketch explain the hearing mechanism in human beings

2. a)Describe about speech interference level and perceived noise level

b)Explain about threshold of hearing

3. Describe about any two noise standards

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Brief about sound level meter and dosimeter

2. a) Explain about the working of noise analyser

b) What are microphones?

3. How sound is measured in a reverberation chamber and in an anechoic chamber

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain about absorption coefficient. What are acoustic absorbers? Brief about any one
type of acoustic absorber

2. a) Suggest some measures to control the noise produced by sound source.

b) How noise can be controlled in reciprocating machines?

3. What are possible causes for noise in a rotating machinery? Explain some measures to
control such noise
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: MET436
Course Name: ACOUSTICS AND NOISE CONTROL

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A
(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)
1. What are plane acoustic waves?
2. Explain about sound pressure level?
3. A fan alone produces a sound intensity level of 80 dB. A pump and a fan together
produce an intensity level of 86.2 dB. Determine the intensity level of the sound
produced by the pump.
4. What are Helmholtz resonators?
5. Describe about plenum chambers.
6. Discuss about phon.
7. How standing waves are generated?
8. Brief about spherical waves
9. Describe about frequency weighting
10. Discuss about Number noise index

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)
Module – 1
11. a) Derive acoustic wave equation. Deduce the equation for plane acoustic wave
(9 Marks)
b) A harmonic plane wave is propagating with frequency 35 Hz in air at room
temperature. The acoustic pressure at a point 1.5 m from the sound source at a time 2
s from the instant of observation is 0.2 Pa. Find the acoustic pressure at the same point
at 4 s. (5 Marks)
12. a) Elaborate about particle velocity and phase velocity (4 Marks)
b) Obtain the D Alembert’s solution of plane acoustic wave equation
c) Calculate the speed of sound in air having a density of 1.225 kg/m3 and pressure of
101 kPa. Take the adiabatic constant as 1.44. (3 Marks)

Module 2
13. a) A plane wave is incident at the boundary between air and helium at 20 degree C.
Given that at 20degree C air density is 1.2041 kg/m3 , speed of sound in air is 343
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

m/s, helium density is 0.179 kg/m3 and speed of sound in helium is 972 m/s. Find the
reflection coefficient, transmission coefficient and absorption coefficient (7 marks)
b) Brief about beam width and directivity index. (5 Marks)
c)What are resonators? (2 Marks)

14. a) Obtain the pressure reflection and pressure transmission coefficient for the oblique
incidence of sound on a medium boundary. (10 marks)

b) Obtain the acoustic pressure developed in a pipe of length L whose one end is
closed. Sound source is a vibrating piston attached to the open end of the pipe.
(4 Marks)

Module 3
15. a)With suitable figure, explain the hearing mechanism in human ear. (8 Marks)

b)With suitable example describe about perceived noise level and speech interference
level (6 Marks)

16. a) Human react differently to different sounds. With suitable instances describe about
human reactions to various sounds and noises (8 Marks)
b) Brief about OSHA noise exposure criteria (6 Marks)

Module 4

17. a) Brief about reverberation chambers and anechoic chambers. Describe in detail
about how measurements are done in them (10 marks)

b)Explain the working of dosimeter (4 Marks)

18. a) With the help of a neat diagram, explain the working of sound level meter (8 marks)
b) What are microphones. Brief about any one type (6 marks)

Module 5
19. a)Describe about (8 Marks)

(i) Mufflers
(ii) Acoustic filers
b)Brief about acoustic absorbers (6 Marks)

20.a) What are bafflers. Explain how noise reduction is attained through baffler(7 Marks)
b)Discuss the ways by which noise produced by rotating machines can be controlled
(7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction – Basic acoustic principles, sound pressure, acoustic velocity, particle velocity,
acoustic wave equation, Plane acoustic wave, harmonic solution.

Frequency, wavelength, acoustic impedance, sound power, sound intensity, Energy density,
Decibel scale – relationship between pressure, intensity and power

Module 2

Spherical waves – radiation – simple source – hemispherical source- radiating piston –

pressure intensity distribution – Beam width and directivity index

Transmission through one, two and three media – Transmission through pipes – branched and
unbranched, resonators – Transmission loss- reflection at plane surface, standing waves,
standing wave apparatus.

Module 3

Ear its structure and function, Hearing Thresholds, Loudness of Sound, and Sound
Adaptation, Human reaction to sound – definitions of speech interference level, perceived
noise level, phon and sone, hearing loss. Noise criteria and standards – noise and number
index guide lines for designing quieter equipments

Module 4

Noise measurement- microphones, sound level meters, sound intensity probes, dosimeters,
noise analyzer and graphic level recorder, spectrum Analysis, Measurement in anechoic and
reverberation chambers

Module 5

Principles of noise control, control at source, during transmission and at receiver- protection
of receiver, Acoustic insulation – acoustic materials – acoustic filter and mufflers – plenum
chamber, advanced acoustic absorbers

Principles of noise control in machinery such as pumps, rotating machines, reciprocating

machines etc

Text Books

1. Kinsler and frey – Fundamentals of Acoustics

2. I. L. Ver, L. L. Beranek– Noise and Vibration Control Engineering
3. Grad – Industrial noise and vibration

Reference Books

1. Malcom J Crocker , Handbook of noise and vibration control, John Wiley & Sons,
Inc.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

2. Heinrich Kuttruff, Acoustics an introduction, Taylor & Francis

3. David-A Bies. Collin H Hansen, Engineering Noise control- Theory and Practice,
Fourth edition, Spon press, London
4. Michael Moser, Engineering Acoustics, Springer

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module 1
Introduction – Basic acoustic principles, sound pressure, acoustic
1.1 velocity, particle velocity 1

1.2 Acoustic wave equation, Plane acoustic wave, harmonic solution 3

Frequency, wavelength, acoustic impedance, sound power, sound
1.3 intensity, Energy density, Decibel scale – relationship between 3
pressure, intensity and power

2 Module 2
Spherical waves – radiation – simple source – hemispherical
2.1 source- radiating piston – pressure intensity distribution – Beam 1
width and directivity index

2.2 Transmission through one, two and three media 3

Transmission through pipes – branched and unbranched,
2.3 resonators – Transmission loss- reflection at plane surface, 3
standing waves, standing wave apparatus.

3 Module 3
Ear its structure and function, Hearing Thresholds, Loudness of
3.1 Sound, and Sound Adaptation 2

Human reaction to sound – definitions of speech interference

3.2 level, perceived noise level, phon and sone, hearing loss 2

Noise criteria and standards – noise and number index guide lines
3.3 for designing quieter equipments 3

4 Module 4
Noise measurement- microphones, sound level meters, sound
4.1 intensity probes, dosimeters, noise analyzer and graphic level 5
recorder, spectrum Analysis

4.2 Measurement in anechoic and reverberation chambers 3

5 Module 5
Principles of noise control, control at source, during transmission
5.1 4
and at receiver- protection of receiver, Acoustic insulation –
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

acoustic materials – acoustic filter and mufflers – plenum

chamber, advanced acoustic absorbers

Principles of noise control in machinery such as pumps, rotating

5.2 machines, reciprocating machines etc 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT
MET446 PEC 2 1 0 3
DESIGN

Preamble: The course is designed to provide a complete design knowledge of various heat
transfer equipments which are invariably used in most of the chemical process industries.

Prerequisite: MET204 Thermodynamics, MET302 Heat and Mass Transfer

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyse thermal performance of heat exchangers

CO 2 Explain performance of cooling towers

CO 3 Design heat pipes for different applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO
  
1
CO
  
2
CO
  
3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. How double pipe heat exchangers are classified

2. Explain the concept of true temperature difference in a 1-2 heat exchanger.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Illustrate and explain the functions of cooling tower.

2. Explain briefly how performance evaluation of cooling towers are done .

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the working principle of heat pipes

2. Explain briefly the heat pipe design procedure.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

COURSE CODE: MET446

COURSE NAME: HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT DESIGN

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. What do you mean by compact heat exchanger and write the importance of area density in
it.

2. Under what condition, the effectiveness NTU method is preferred over LMTD method as a
method of analysis of Heat exchanger.

3.Are we really getting extra advantage by providing Baffles in Shell and tube heat
exchanger. Justify your answer.

4. What are the causes of pressure drop in shell and tube heat exchanger?

5. How size of cooling tower and wet bulb temperature are related?

6. How do you calculate evaporation loss in cooling tower?

7. Explain the term liquid pressure drop as applicable to heat pipes

8. How effective thermal conductivity of a wick structure is determined ?

9. How heat pipes work against gravity ?

10. Write short notes on micro heat pipes.

PART – B

(Answer one full question from each module)

MODULE – 1

11. a) How fouling is dealt while designing heat exchangers. ( 4 Marks )

b) A counter-flow double-pipe heat exchanger is to heat the cold fluid from 30°C to 65°C
at a rate of 2 kg/s. The heath ig is to be accomplished by hot fluid available at 100°C at a
mass flow rate of 1 kg/s. The inner tube is thin-walled and has a diameter of 1.5 cm. Specific
heat of the hot fluid is 10kJ/kgK and that of the cold fluid is 5 kJ /kgK. If the overall heat
transfer coefficient of the heat exchanger is 640 W/m2 °C, determine the length of the heat
exchanger required to achieve the desired heating. (10 Marks )
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR

12 a) Derive the effectiveness of counter flow heat exchanger ( 8 Marks )

b) What would be the effectiveness of counter flow heat exchanger if Cmin/Cmax = 0 and
Cmin/Cmax=1 (6 Marks )

MODULE – 2

13.The condenser of a large steam power plant is a heat exchanger in which stem is
condensed to liquid water. Assume the condenser to be a shell-and-tube heat exchanger
consisting of a single shell and 30,000 tubes, each executing two passes. The tubes are of thin
wall construction with D=25 mm, and steam condenses on their outer surface with an
associated convection coefficient of h0=11,000 W/m.K the heat transfer rate that must be
effected by the exchanger is q=2×10^9 W , and this is accomplished by passing cooling water
through the tubes at a rate of 3×10^4 kg/sec. the water enters at 20°C while the steam
condenses at 50 degree C. What is the temperature of the cooling water emerging from the
condenser? What is the required tube length L per pass? ( 14 Marks)

OR

14. a) Draw rough sketch of temperature distribution curve for condenser and evaporator
type heat exchangers. Derive the expression for overall heat transfer coefficient for
shell and tube type heat exchanger (7 marks)

b) A heat exchanger is to be designed to condensate 8 kg/s of an organic liquid having

saturation temperature 800C and hfg = 600kJ/kg. Cooling water is available at 150C
and at a flow rate of 60 kg/s. The overall heat transfer co-efficient is 480 W/m2 -K.
Determine: (1) The number of tubes required if tubes are to be 2mm thick,4.85 m in
length and 25mm OD. (2) No.s of tube passes if limiting velocity of cooling water is 2
m/s. (7 marks)

MODULE – 3

15. a) Explain different types of cooling towers (8 marks)

b) Explain the terms a) Cooling range b) Approach and c) Effectiveness as applied to a

cooling tower (6 marks)

OR

16. a) Write about the importance of wet bulb temperature in cooling towers? (7 marks)

b) What is the effect of change in heat load on cooling tower performance? Explain.

(7 marks)

MODULE – 4

17. Write short notes on a ) Working fluids b ) Wick Structures as applicable to heat pipes?
(14 marks)

OR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

18. Explain briefly capillary, sonic, entrainment and boiling limitations applied to heat pipes

(14 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. Explain how fluid selection, wick selection and material selection are done in a heat pipe
design. (14 marks)

OR

20. Write brief notes on Non conventional heat pipes (14 marks)

Syllabus

Module 1

Thermal performance analysis of heat exchangers - compact, cross flow, liquid to gas, and
double pipe heat exchangers, film coefficients for tubes and annuli, equivalent diameter of
annuli, fouling factors, caloric or average fluid temperature, true temperature difference;
Design calculation of double pipe heat exchanger, double pipe exchangers in series-parallel
arrangements.

Module 2

Shell and tube heat exchangers - tube layouts, baffle spacing, classification of shell and tube
exchangers, Design calculation of shell and tube heat exchangers, shell-side film coefficients,
shell-side equivalent diameter, true temperature difference in a 1-2 heat exchanger,
performance analysis of 1-2 heat exchangers, flow arrangements for increased heat recovery.

Module 3

Direct contact heat transfer - Classification of cooling towers, wet-bulb and dew point
temperatures, Lewis number, cooling-tower internals, heat balance, heat transfer by
simultaneous diffusion and convection; Design and analysis of cooling towers, determination
of the number of diffusion units, performance evaluation of cooling towers, influence of
process conditions and operating variables on their design .

Module 4

Heat pipes - types and applications, operating principles, working fluids, wick structures,
control techniques, pressure balance, maximum capillary pressure, liquid and vapor pressure
drops, effective thermal conductivity of wick structures, capillary limitation on heat transport
capability, sonic, entrainment, and boiling limitations, determination of operating conditions

Module 5

Heat pipe design – fluid selection, wick selection, material selection, preliminary design
considerations, heat pipe design procedure, determination of heat pipe diameter, design of
heat pipe containers, wick design, entertainment and boiling limitations, design problems;
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Non conventional heat pipes – flat, rotating, reciprocating and disc shaped heat pipes, heat
pipes in cooling microelectronics – micro and mini heat pipes.

Text Books

1 Kern, D. Q., Process Heat Transfer, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2000.

2. Chi, S. W., Heat Pipe Theory and Practice- A Source Book, McGraw-Hill, 1976

3. Fraas, A. P., Heat Exchanger Design, Second Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1989

Reference Books

1. R K Shah, Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design, John Wiley & Sons.

2. Dunn, P. D. and Reay, D. A., Heat Pipes, Fourth Edition, Pergamon Press, 1994.

3. Das, S.K., Prosess heat transfer, Narosa publishing house.2005

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

Thermal performance analysis of heat exchangers - compact, cross
1.1 2
flow, liquid to gas, and double pipe heat exchangers,
Film coefficients for tubes and annuli, equivalent diameter of
annuli, fouling factors, caloric or average fluid temperature, true
1.2 3
temperature difference; Design calculation of double pipe heat
exchanger
1.3 Double pipe exchangers in series-parallel arrangements. 2
Shell and tube heat exchangers - tube layouts, baffle spacing,
classification of shell and tube exchangers, Design calculation of
2.1 shell and tube heat exchangers, shell-side film coefficients, shell- 4
side equivalent diameter, true temperature difference in a 1-2 heat
exchanger,
performance analysis of 1-2 heat exchangers, flow arrangements
2.2 3
for increased heat recovery.
Direct contact heat transfer - Classification of cooling towers,
wet-bulb and dew point temperatures, Lewis number, cooling-
3.1 3
tower internals, heat balance, heat transfer by simultaneous
diffusion and convection;
Design and analysis of cooling towers, determination of the
number of diffusion units, performance evaluation of cooling
3.2 4
towers, influence of process conditions and operating variables on
their design .
Heat pipes - types and applications, operating principles, working
fluids, wick structures, control techniques, pressure balance,
4.1 3
maximum capillary pressure, liquid and vapor pressure drops,
effective thermal conductivity of wick structures,
4.2 capillary limitation on heat transport capability, sonic, 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

entrainment, and boiling limitations, determination of operating

conditions
Heat pipe design – fluid selection, wick selection, material
selection, preliminary design considerations, heat pipe design
5.1 5
procedure, determination of heat pipe diameter, design of heat pipe
containers, wick design, entertainment and boiling limitations,
design problems; Non conventional heat pipes – flat, rotating,
5.2 reciprocating and disc shaped heat pipes, heat pipes in cooling 3
microelectronics – micro and mini heat pipes.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET456 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The objective of this course is

 To know the wide applications of Robotic technology in various domains
 To familiarize various robot sensors and their perception principles that
enable a robot
 To get a basic understanding about the kinematics and dynamics of robot.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the concept, development and key components of robotics.

CO 2 Apply the mathematics used to describe positions and orientations in space.

CO 3 Solve numerical problems in the statics and dynamics of robotic models.

CO 4 Explain various robot sensors and their perception principles.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 20 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the major elements of an industrial robot.

2. What is work volume?

3. Compare pneumatic drive robots with stepper motor drive robot.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Define base and tool coordinate systems.

2. Determine the translated vector for the given vector v=25i+10j+20k, perform a
translation by a distance of 8 units in “X” direction, 5 units in “Y” direction and 0
units in “Z” direction.

3. Explain any two commands associated with the programming of end effectors.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Describe briefly the dynamics of a robot.

2. A single-link robot with a rotary joint is motionless at θ=-50 . It is desired to move the
joint in a smooth manner to θ = 80° in 4 seconds. Find the coefficients of a cubic
which accomplishes this motion and brings the arm to rest at the goal.

3. Write a critical note on forward kinematics of a 2 degrees of freedom robot.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Differentiate between the sensor & transducer.

2. Explain the working principle of inductive proximity sensor.

3. What are the applications of machine vision system?

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A (30 marks)

Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks.

1. Briefly explain the need of robots in healthcare.

2. Explain the working of a UAV.

3. Differentiate between open and closed kinematic chain with the help of
examples.

4. What is the difference between internal grippers and external grippers?

5. Define the singularities of a mechanism.

6. How will you obtain the dynamic model of a robot?

7. Explain the need of mapping in the kinematics of robots.

8. What is trajectory planning in robotics?

9. Briefly explain the function of a LVDT.

10. What are the applications of machine vision system?

PART B (70 marks)

Answer any one question from each module, each carries 14 marks.

Module 1

11. a) Classify the industrial robots and briefly describe it. (7)

b) Explain the various parts of a robot with neat sketch. (7)

12. a) Explain the working of DC servo motors used in robotics. (7)

b) Discuss about the salient features of servo motor with limitations. (7)

Module 2

13. a) Explain RRR and RPR mechanism. ( 8)

b) Explain actuator space, joint space and Cartesian space of a manipulator. (6)

14. Explain the different types of frames used in robot motion. (14)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 3

15. a) What are the four parameters in DH representation? Explain how they are (8)
determined?

b) If the two links of a two-link planar manipulator have equal lengths, find out (6)
the expression for the homogeneous transformation matrix.

16. Illustrate the forward and reverse kinematics of a robot with an example. (14)

Module 4

17. Obtain equations of dynamics for 2-R manipulator using lagrangian method. (14)

18. a) Explain the propagation of velocity from link to link in a manipulator. (8)

b) Explain the joint space and cartesian space descriptions of robot trajectory (6)

Module 5

19. a) Describe the classification of sensors and the factors to be considered for its (7)
selection.

b) Describe force sensing with strain gauge and wrist force sensor. (7)

20. a) Explain the segmentation methods used in vision system with suitable (7)
example.

b) Describe any one algorithm for image edge detection with advantages. (7)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1 (7 hours)

Introduction: History and evolution of Robotics, Industrial Robots, Field and Service Robots,
Wheeled Mobile Robots, Underwater Robots, remotely operated vehicles, Autonomous
Underwater Vehicle, Robotics for Healthcare, Rehabilitation Robotics, Aerial Robotics,
Domestic Robots. Components of a Robot: Mechanical systems, Electrical systems. Robot
drive systems: Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives –Mechanical Drives – Electrical Drives
– D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper Motor, A.C. Servo Motors – Salient Features. Applications.

Module 2 (7 hours)

Spatial description and Transformations: Description of Position and Orientation, Rotation

matrix, Euler angles, Frames and Displacement mappings, Homogeneous transforms,
Transformation of free vectors.
Robot Manipulator: Manipulator joints- linear and rotary, Types. Link description, Link-
connection description. Robot architecture, Convention for affixing frames to links, reference
frames, degree of freedom. Common body and arm configurations in industrial robots-
Cartesian, polar, cylindrical, jointed arm, SCARA. Wrist assembly- end effector, Mechanical
gripper.

Module 3 (7 hours)

Robot Kinematics: Robot Coordinates- global and tool coordinates. Link and joint parameters
Denavit and Hartenberg convention, DH algorithm. Typical examples of forward and Inverse
Kinematics problem.
General considerations in trajectory description and generation: joint-space schemes,
Cartesian-space schemes.

Module 4 (7 hours)

Robot statics: motion of the links of a robot, velocity propagation from link to link, geometric
Jacobian, Jacobian computation, kinematic singularities, static forces in manipulators,
Jacobians in the force domain, Cartesian transformation of velocities and static forces.
Robot Dynamics: manipulator dynamic equations, Lagrangian formulation of manipulator
dynamics, dynamical model of simple manipulator structures.

Module 5 (7 hours)

Sensors and machine vision: Requirements of a sensor, Principles and Applications of the
following types of sensors – Position of sensors (Piezo Electric Sensor, LVDT, Resolvers,
Optical Encoders), Range Sensors (Triangulation Principle, Structured, Lighting Approach,
Laser Range Meters).
Proximity Sensors (Inductive, Capacitive and Ultrasonic), Touch Sensors, (Binary Sensors,
Analog Sensors), Wrist Sensors, Compliance Sensors, Slip Sensors. Camera, Frame Grabber,
Sensing and Digitizing Image Data – Signal Conversion, Image Storage, Lighting
Techniques.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text/Reference Books

1. Craig, J.J., Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control, Pearson Education

India; 3rd edition ,2008.
2. M.P.Groover, Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and Applications,
McGraw-Hill, 2001.
3. Fu.K.S., Gonzalz.R.C. and Lee C.S.G., Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and
Intelligence, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1987
4. Janakiraman.P.A., Robotics and Image Processing, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1995.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Introduction to robotics
History and evolution of Robotics, Industrial Robots, Field and
1.1 Service Robots. 1

Wheeled Mobile Robots, Underwater Robots, remotely operated

1.2 vehicles, Autonomous Underwater Vehicle 1

1.3 Robotics for Healthcare, Rehabilitation Robotics 1

Aerial Robotics, Domestic Robots. Components of a Robot:
1.4 Mechanical systems, Electrical systems. 1

Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives –Mechanical Drives –

1.5 Electrical Drives 1

1.6 D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper Motor 1

1.7 A.C. Servo Motors 1

2 Robot Manipulator
Spatial description and Transformations: Description of Position
2.1 1
and Orientation, Rotation matrix, Euler angles.
2.2 Frames and Displacement mappings, Homogeneous transforms. 1
2.3 Transformation of free vectors. 1
Robot Manipulator: Manipulator joints- linear and rotary, Types.
2.4 1
link description, link-connection description.
Robot architecture, convention for affixing frames to links,
2.5 1
reference frames, degree of freedom.
Common body and arm configurations in industrial robots-
2.6 1
cartesian, polar, cylindrical, jointed arm, SCARA.
2.7 Wrist assembly-end effector, Mechanical gripper. 1

3 Robot Kinematics
3.1 Global and tool coordinates. Link and joint parameters. 1
3.2 Denavit and Hartenberg convention. 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3.3 DH algorithm. 1
3.4 Examples of forward Kinematics of planar robots. 1
Inverse manipulator klinematics. Solvability. Algebraic vs
3.5 1
Geometric Solutions
3.6 Inverse Kinematics of RR and RP planar manipulators 1
General considerations in trajectory description and generation:
3.7 1
joint-space schemes, cartesian-space schemes

4 Robot Statics and Dynamics

Motion of the links of a robot, velocity propagation from link to
4.1 1
link,
4.2 Geometric Jacobian, Jacobian computation 1
4.3 Kinematic singularities 1
4.4 Static forces in manipulators, Jacobians in the force domain. 1
4.5 Cartesian transformation of velocities and static forces. 1
4.6 Lagrangian formulation of manipulator dynamics. 1
4.7 Dynamical model of 2 DOF planar manipulators 1

5 Sensors and machine vision system

Requirements of a sensor, Piezo Electric Sensor, LVDT, Resolvers,
5.1 1
Optical Encoders.
Range Sensors, Triangulation Principle, Structured, Lighting
5.2 1
Approach, Laser Range Meters.
5.3 Proximity Sensors-Inductive, Capacitive and Ultrasonic. 1
Touch Sensors, (Binary Sensors, Analog Sensors), Wrist Sensors,
5.4 Compliance Sensors, Slip Sensors. 1

5.5 Camera, Frame Grabber. 1

5.6 Sensing and Digitizing Image Data – Signal Conversion. 1

5.7 Image Storage, Lighting Techniques. 1

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MET466 TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Management of innovation and technology is important an organisation. This

course is designed to facilitate the students to understand the concept of technology
management, Key issues in managing technology. This course will also help the students to
gain a fair understanding on contemporary topics in technology and innovation management.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Be conversant with important terms for technology management in organisations

CO 2 Explain the need of technology forecasting
CO 3 Understand the essence of technology acquisition
CO 4 Describe the elements of technology strategy
CO 5 Outline the basics of innovation
CO 6 Identify human factors in technology management

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2 1

CO 2 2 2 2 2

CO 3 2 2 2

CO 4 3 2 2

CO 5 3 2 2 2

CO 6 2 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

End Semester Examination
Tests
(in %)
1 (in %) 2 (in %)
Remember 20 20 20
Understand 60 40 40
Apply 20 40 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Marks Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Distinguish between process technology and product technology

2. What are the impacts of technology on society?

3. Describe the significance of technology management.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe the need of technology forecasting.

2. List out technology forecasting methods.

3. Describe characteristics of technology forecasting.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. What is technology acquisition?

2. With examples, describe the process of managing acquired technology.

3. Describe the importance of technology generation.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What are the constraints in technology absorption?

2. What are elements of technology strategy?

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
3. Describe the science and technology policy in India

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Differentiate between invention and innovation.

2. Describe the importance of innovation in product lifecycle

3. Enumerate the importance of trademarks.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Explain the challenges of automation in India

2. What are the HR issues in R&D?

3. What are the different organisational factors to be considered in technology management.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

COURSE CODE: MET466 COURSE NAME: TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer ALL questions, each carries 3 marks.

1. Describe the impact of technology in competition

2. Distinguish between process technology and product technology
3. What is technology acquisition?
4. Describe the need of technology forecasting.
5. How technology absorption improves competitiveness?
6. Describe the benefits of technology absorption
7. How is R&D affects production costs?
8. Describe the role of government in innovation.
9. How does organisational structure affect technology?
10. What are the HR issues in R&D?

PART B

11. What are the elements of technological innovation? Explain with examples (14)
OR

12. Enumerate the impact of technology on society (14)

13. Describe characteristics of technology forecasting. (14)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
OR

14. With examples, describe the process of managing acquired technology. (14)

15. Describe the constraints in technology absorption (14)

OR

16. What are the different elements of science and technology policy in India (14)

17. With the aid of examples, describe how innovation helps new product development
(14)
OR

18. What are the different remedial measures against infringement (14)

19. Describe various human factors to be considered in technology management. (14)

OR

20. Describe the challenges of automation in India. (14)

Syllabus

Module 1

Technology and Technology Management - Technology- evolution and growth of

technology, technology management: concepts and definitions, role and significance of
technology management, impact of technology on society and business. Technology and
competition, organizing technology at the enterprise level, key issues in managing
technological innovation and forms of technology- process technology, product technology.

Module 2

Technology Acquisition and Technology Forecasting - Technology acquisition, new

technology, alternatives for acquiring new technologies, management of acquired technology,
technology forecasting, characteristics of technology forecasting, technology forecast
methods, principles of technology forecasting, technology forecasting process, need and role
of technology forecasting, forecasting methods and techniques, planning and forecasting.
Technology generation and development, technology generation, process, technology
development, importance of technology generation and development.

Module 3

Technology strategy and management - Need for technology strategy, technology

adoption, diffusion, absorption and competitiveness, elements of technology strategy, role of
technology absorption, benefits of technology absorption, constraints in technology
absorption, technology package and technological dependence, Indian experience in
technology absorption efforts, issues involved in the management of technology absorption
and government initiatives, technology policies, science and technology policy in India.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Module 4

Management of R&D and innovation - Importance of Research and Development (R&D),

corporate research and product lifecycle, production costs and R&D, translation of R&D
efforts to technology, innovation, types of innovation, difference between innovation and
invention, framework for management of innovation, organizational characteristics that
facilitate innovation, trademarks, copyrights, patents and their use in innovation
management, remedy against infringement, the role of technology transfer in innovation and
new product development, role of government in innovation, globalisation and innovations,
technology and innovation management - case studies about management of R&D and
innovation.

Module 5

Human Aspects in Technology Management - Integration of people and technology,

human factors to be considered in technology management - organisational factors and
psychological factors, organisational structure and technology, implications of technological
change, implementation of rationalization and automation in India, impact of technological
change, human resource management issues in R&D and innovation, technology assessment
and environmental impact analysis

Text Books

1. P N Rastogi, Management of Technology and Innovation: Competing Through

Technological Excellence, SAGE Publications, 2009

2. Tushman, M.L. and Anderson ,P., Managing Strategic Innovation & Change, Oxford
University Press, New York, 2004.

3. Khurana, V. K., Management of Technology and Innovation, Ane Books New Delhi, 2012

4. Narayanan, V. K, Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage,

Pearson Education, 2002

5. Ettile, J. E, Managing Innovation: New technology, New Products and New Services in a
Global Economy, A Butterworth-Heinemann Title, 2006

Reference Books

1. Afuah, A, Innovation Management, Strategies, Implementation and Profits, Oxford

University Press, 2009

2. Paul Trott, Innovation Management and New Product Development, Pearson Education,
2004.

3. Robert A Burgelman, Clayton.M.Christensen, Steven.C.Wheelright, Strategic

Management of Technology and Innovation (Fifth Edition), McGraw-Hill Education, 2009
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

Topic No. of
No
Lectures
1 Technology and Technology Management

1.1 Technology- evolution and growth of technology 1

Technology management: concepts and definitions, role and

1.2 1
significance of technology management
Impact of technology on society and business. technology and
1.3 2
competition, organizing technology at the enterprise level
1.3 Key issues in managing technological innovation 1
1.3 Forms of technology- process technology, product technology. 1
2 Technology Acquisition and Technology Forecasting

Technology acquisition, new technology, alternatives for acquiring

2.1 new technologies, management of acquired technology 2

Technology forecasting, characteristics of technology forecasting,

technology forecast method, principles of technology forecasting,
2.2 technology forecasting process, need and role of technology 3
forecasting, forecasting methods and techniques, planning and
forecasting.
Technology generation and development, technology generation-
2.3 process, technology development, importance of technology 2
generation and development.
3 Technology strategy and management
Need for technology strategy, technology adoption, diffusion,
3.1 absorption and competitiveness, elements of technology strategy 2

Role of technology absorption, benefits of technology absorption,

constraints in technology absorption, technology package and
3.2 3
technological dependence, Indian experience in technology
absorption efforts.
Issues involved in the management of technology absorption,
3.3 government initiatives, technology policies - science and 2
technology policy in India.
4 Management of R&D and Innovation
Importance of Research and Development (R&D), corporate
4.1 research and product lifecycle, production costs and R&D, 2
translation of R&D efforts to technology.

Innovation, types of innovation, difference between innovation

4.2 2
and invention,
Framework for management of innovation, organizational
4.3 1
characteristics that facilitate innovation,
4.4 Trademarks, copyrights, patents and their use in innovation 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
management, remedy against infringement,
The role of technology transfer in innovation and new product
4.5 development, role of government in innovation, globalisation and 2
innovations, technology and innovation management.
4.6 Case studies about management of R&D and innovation. 1
5 Human Aspects in Technology Management
Integration of people and technology, factors to be considered in
5.1 technology management, organisational factors and psychological 2
factors
Organisational structure and technology, implications of
5.2 technological change 2

Implementation of rationalization and automation in India, impact

5.3 1
of technological change
Human resource management issues in R&D and innovation,
5.4 2
technology assessment and environmental impact analysis
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET476 CRYOGENIC ENGINEERING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course provides fundamental knowledge of types of cryogenic fluids,

behavior of materials and properties at temperatures, liquefaction systems, cryogenic
refrigeration, gas separation, purification, insulators, cryogenic storage, transfer and
measuring instruments

Prerequisite: MET202-Engineering Thermodynamics, MET303-Thermal Engineering

Course Outcomes :After completion of the course the student will be able to
Explain the properties of cryogenic liquids and properties of material at
CO1
cryogenic temperatures
CO2 Describe and analyze cryogenic liquefaction systems using first principles of
thermodynamics
CO3 Describe and analyze cryogenics refrigeration using first principles of
thermodynamics
CO4 Identify insulation system for cryogenic application and explain cryogenic storage
vessels.
CO5 Understand gas separation and purification methods

CO6 Understand instrumentation for various measurements in cryogenic engineering.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 1
CO 2 3 2
CO 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
End Semester Examination
Bloom’s Category Tests
(in %)
1 (in %) 2 (in %)
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Marks Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe in detail the variation of mechanical properties of various materials at
cryogenic temperatures
2. Explain the terms i) Transition temperature and ii) Critical current of
superconductors.
3. Explain the application of cryogenics in space technology.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain the production of low temperatures using Joule-Thomson effect.
2. How the cryo coolers are classified? Explain the working of strilling cycle cryo
cooler.
3. Explain about the working of a precooled Linde-Hampson system with suitable
diagram for neon and hydrogen.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Explain the working of Vuilleumier refrigerator with neat sketch.
2. Explain briefly the importance of refrigerator effectiveness.
3. Explain refrigerators using solids as working media.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain about the basic design parameters of cryogenic fluid storage vessels.
2. Explain the different types and use of insulations in cryogenic applications.
3. Explain about the cryogenic fluid transfer system.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the pressure measurement system used in cryogenic applications.
2. Explain the working principle of different types of cryogenic liquid level
indicators.
3. Explain different temperature measuring techniques used in cryogenic
applications.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VIII SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET476: CRYOGENIC ENGINEERING

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks
1. Explain the historical development of cryogenics?
2. Distinguish between Ortho Hydrogen and Para Hydrogen.
3. Explain Meissner effect?
4. Explain Joule Thomson coefficient.
5. What are the performance parameters to be considered in gas liquefaction systems?
6. Define FOM for the refrigerator.
7. What is vapour shielding in cryogenic vessels?
8. What are super insulations?
9. Write a short note on hydrostatic liquid level gauge.
10. List few heat exchangers used in cryogenic systems.
(10 X 3 = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module
Module 1
11. a) What is cryogenics? Mention the few areas involving cryogenic engineering
(7 marks)
b) Determine the thermal conductivity of air at 250 K and 101.3 kPa if the mean free
path of air at this condition is 49 nm, the gas constant for air is 287 J/kg K, the
specific heat ratio is 1.4 and the specific heat at constant volume is 716.5 J/kg K.
(7 marks)
12. a) With sketches, explain the different critical components present in gas liquefaction
systems. (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b) With the help of a T-s diagram explain working of a Simon Helium liquefier.
(7 marks)

Module 2
13. a) Compare Claude Liquefaction system and Linde Hampson Liquefaction systems.
(4 marks)
b) Explain the Joule Thomson effect. Show the inversion curve of a real gas on a T-p
diagram.
Prove that an ideal gas will not experience a temperature change upon isenthalpic
expansion. (10 marks)

14. a) With sketches, explain the different critical components present in gas liquefaction
systems. (7 marks)
b) With the help of a T-s diagram explain working of a Simon Helium liquefier.
(7 marks)

Module 3
15. a) Explain the working of a dilution refrigerator with neat schematic. (7 marks)

b) With the help of schematic and T-S diagram, explain Philips Refrigerator. Also
explain briefly the importance of refrigerator effectiveness. (7 marks)

16. a) What are the gas purification methods? With sketches, explain adsorption purifier
along with refrigerator purifier. (7 marks)

b) With sketches, explain Linde single column gas separation system. (7 marks)

Module 4
17. a) With sketches, explain the cryogenic fluid storage vessels. (7 marks)

b) Write about vacuum insulation and opacified powder insulation used in cryogenics.
(7 marks)

18. a) Explain about cryogenic fluid transfer systems. (7 marks)

b) With Sketch, explain the functions of different components in a Dewar vessel.

(7 marks)

Module 5
19. a) Explain the working of a turbine flow meter. (7 marks)

b) Write short notes on the various heat exchanger configurations used in cryogenic
systems. (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

20. a) Explain the different temperature measurement techniques used in cryogenic

application (7 marks)
b) Explain different safety devices used in cryogenic liquid storage systems.
(7 marks)

Syllabus
Module 1
Introduction to cryogenic engineering, Historical background - Major events in the
development of cryogenic engineering, Low Temperature properties of Engineering
Materials - Mechanical properties- Thermal properties- Electric and magnetic properties,
Cryogenic fluids and their properties.
Applications of cryogenics: Applications in space, food processing, super conductivity,
electrical power, biology, medicine, electronics and cutting tool industry.

Module 2
Liquefaction systems – System performance parameters, ideal liquefaction system,
Joule-Thomson expansion, Adiabatic expansion, Liquefaction systems for gases other
than Neon. Hydrogen and Helium. Simple Linde - Hampson system, Claude &
Cascaded System.
Liquefaction systems for Neon. Hydrogen and Helium – LN2 precooled Linde
Hampson and Claude systems, Ortho to Para conversion arrangement in hydrogen
liquefaction system, Simon Helium liquefaction system, Collins Helium liquefaction
system. Critical components of Liquefaction systems – critical components and their
effect on system performance.

Module 3
Cryogenic Refrigeration systems: Ideal isothermal and isobaric refrigeration systems-
Refrigeration using liquids as refrigerant- Linde-Hampson refrigerator, Claude refrigerator.
Refrigeration using gases as refrigerant- Stirling cycle cryocoolers, Philips refrigerator,
Effect of regenerator effectiveness on performance of Philips refrigerator, Gifford
McMahon refrigerators. Refrigerators using solids as working media-Magnetic refrigerators
– Thermodynamics of magnetic refrigerators, dilution refrigerators.

Module 4
Gas separation and purification: - Thermodynamic ideal separation system, mixture
characteristics, principle of gas separation, separation of air, hydrogen and helium, gas
purification methods

Cryogenic fluid storage and transfer systems:, Cryogenic fluid storage vessel, Thermal
insulation and their performance at cryogenic temperatures, Super Insulations, Vacuum
insulation, Powder insulation, Cryogenic fluid transfer systems, Cryo pumping.

Module 5
Cryogenic instrumentation, Pressure measurement – Mc Leod gauge, Pirani gauge and
Penning gauge, Flow measurement – Orifice meter, Venturi meter and Turbine flow
meter. Liquid level gauges- hydrostatic, resistance gauge,, capacitance gauge anf
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

thermodynamic gauge, Temperature measurements- ITS-90, Thermocouple, RTD,

magnetic thermometers and vapor pressure thermometers, Types of heat exchangers
used in cryogenic systems, Safety in cryogenic fluid handling, storage and use.

Text Books:
1. Randal F. Barron, Cryogenic systems, McGraw Hill, 1986
2. M Mukhopadhyay, Fundamentals of Cryogenic Engineering, PHI Learning , 2010
3. K. D. Timmerhaus and T. M. Flynn, Cryogenic Process Engineering, Springer, 2013
4. S.S Thipse, Cryogenics, Narrosa, 2012

Reference Books:
1. A. R. Jha, Cryogenic Technology and applications, Elsevier Science, 2011
2. R. B. Scott, Cryogenic Engineering, Van Nostrand Co., 1989
3. M. D. Atrey (Ed.) Cryocoolers: Theory and Applications, 1st ed., International Cryogenics
Monograph Series, Springer International Publishing, 2020

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module 1
Introduction to Cryogenic Systems, Historical
development, Low Temperature properties of
1.1 Engineering Materials, Mechanical properties- Thermal 4
properties- Electric and magnetic properties –Cryogenic
fluids and their properties.
Applications of Cryogenics: Applications in space, Food
Processing, super conductivity, Electrical Power,
1.21.2 Biology, Medicine, Electronics and Cutting Tool 3
Industry. Low temperature properties of engineering
materials
2 Module 2
Liquefaction systems ideal system, Joule Thomson
expansion, Adiabatic expansion, Linde - Hampson
2.1 4
Cycle, Claude & Cascaded System, Magnetic Cooling,
Stirling Cycle Cryo Coolers.
Gas liquefaction systems: Introduction-Production of
1.22.2 low temperatures-General Liquefaction systems-
4
Liquefaction systems for Neon. Hydrogen and Helium –
Critical components of Liquefaction systems
3 Module 3
Cryogenic Refrigeration systems: Ideal Refrigeration
3.1 systems- Refrigeration using liquids and gases as 4
refrigerant- Refrigerators using solids as working media
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Gas separation and purification: Thermodynamic ideal

1.23.2 separation system, mixture characteristics, principle of gas
3
separation, separation of air, hydrogen and helium, gas
purification methods
4 Module 4
Cryogenic fluid storage and transfer systems:
Cryogenic Storage vessels and Transportation, Thermal
insulation and their performance at cryogenic
4.1 7
temperatures, Super Insulations, Vacuum insulation,
Powder insulation, Cryogenic fluid transfer systems,
Cryo pumping.
5 Module 5
Cryogenic instrumentation, Pressure flow-level and
temperature measurements, Types of heat exchangers
5.1 7
used in cryogenic systems, Safety in cryogenic fluid
handling, storage and use.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
PROGRAM ELECTIVE V
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET418 RELIABILITY ENGINEERING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:

1. To induce in students an attitude towards reliability which will ensure that they lookout for
steps to avoid failures to achieve success in all assignments they take up. That will help them
become true engineers.

2. To generate in students an awareness of the importance of statistical concepts, and to make

them realise that engineering is also largely statistics based.

Prerequisite: MAT 202 Probability, Statistics and Numerical Methods

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

Explain the basic concepts of reliability, various models of reliability and failure
CO 1
concepts.

CO 2 Analyse mathematical models of reliability and failure modes.

CO 3 Perform the design process of reliability.

CO 4 Explain the relation between reliability, availability and maintainability.

Explain economic aspects of reliability and Perform reliability

CO 5
managementeffectively.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 2 2 1 1

CO 2 2 3 2 2 2

CO 3 3 2 1 2 1 2

CO 4 3 1 3 1 1 1

CO 5 2 2 1 2 3 1 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

ESE
Total Marks CIE ESE
Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Define the term reliability? Explain the reliability function.
2. RelateReliability and Quality.
3. What is component failure and system failure?
4. Explain Weibull distribution and Normal distribution.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe Weakest-link Technique.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

2. Explain various mathematical models of reliability.

3. Explain Redundancy optimization.
4. Explain load sharing systems and standby system.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. How quality and reliability is related?
2. Explain System safety and Fault Tree Analysis.
3. What is Tie-set and Cut-set methods?
4. Explain the use of Boolean Algebra in reliability analysis.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Describe repair time distribution in maintainability.
2. What is relationship between reliability and availability?
3. What is achieved availability and operational availability?
4. Explain Markovian models?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What are the costs considered in reliability engineering?
2. Describe reliability achievement cost model?
3. Explain reliability utility cost model.
4. What are the functions of reliability management groups?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VIII SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET418: RELIABILITY ENGINEERING

Maximum:100 Marks Duration:3 hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Define the term reliability? Explain the reliability function.

2. Explain the term MTTF. Also derive it with respect to reliability and CDF.

3. State k-out-of-m system redundancy?

4. What is mixed redundancy?

5. Explain the static model for constant strength and load?

6. What is a tie and cut set?

7. Explain inherent availability?

8. What is MTBF?

9. Discuss the economic issues of reliability.

10. Draw and explain reliability-cost curves of a product.

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a) Draw and explain Bath tub Curve. (4)

b) The time to wear for a cutting tool is distributed normally with a mean of 2.8 hour and
standard deviation of 0.6 hour. Find
I.The probability that the tool will wear out in 1.5 hours
II.Find out the reliability for 1.5 hours
III.How often the cutting edge of the tool must be replaced in order to keep the failure less than
10 percentage? (10)

12.a)Find out the system reliability for a serial and parallel configuration with 2 components. (7)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b)Find out the reliability of the following system with 1,2,3,4,5 and 6 as 0.85,0.90,
0.95,0.90,0.80 and 0.85 respectively. Find out the tie sets and cut sets (7)

MODULE 2

13. a) Compare unit vs Component Redundancy with sketches (6)

b) Given a budget of Rs 700 and the following data on three components that must
operate in series. Determine, using marginal analysis, the optimum number of
redundant units. Compute the achieved reliability. (8)
Components Reliability Unit Cost (In rupees)
1 0.80 200
2 0.90 100
3 0.95 75

14. a) Find out the reliability using markov analysis for load sharing units? (6)

b) A manufacturing company operates two production lines when both lines are operating, the
production rate on each line is 500 units per hour. At this production rate the failure rate of
line 1 is 3 failures per 8-hr day (CFR) and the failure rate of line 2 is 2 failures per 8-hr day.
When one line fails, the production rate of the second line must be increased in order to make
production quotas. At the increased rate of 800 units per hour, the failure rate of line 1 is 6 per
8 hr day and the failure rate of line is 3 per 8-hr day. Find the reliability and the MTTF and
the reliability of the production system over a 1 hr and over an 8 hr production run. (8)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE 3

15. a) With a block diagram explain the reliability design process. (5)

b) A system consists of three components in series having the following parameters. The
reliability goal is 0.90 for the system. Do the reliability allocation. (9)

Components Reliability Unit Cost (In rupees)

1 0.85 25
2 0.80 20
3 0.90 40
16.a) Explain the steps in FMECA. (6)

b) In the context of fault tree analysis, explain the meaning of each of the following: an ‘AND’
gate, an ‘OR’ gate, a priority ‘AND’ gate, ‘top’ event, a ‘basic’ event, an ‘undeveloped’ event.
In each of the case, sketch the conversional symbol used and give a practical example. (8)

MODULE 4
17. a) Compute markov analysis of availability model for two component stand by system. (6)

b) A generator system consist of primary and a standby unit. The primary fails at a constant rate
of 2 per month, and the stand by system fails only when online at a constant rate of 4 per month.
Repair can begin only when both units have failed. Both units are repaired at the same time with
an MTTR of 20 days. Derive the steady state equations for the state probabilities and solve for
the system availability. (8)

18. a) What is inspection and repair availability model? Explain a case for it. (6)

b) Determine the upper bound for each of the following aircraft subsystems MTTRs if a system
availability goal of 0.95 is desired. Assume the repair restores the subsystem to as good as new
and each system has the same availability. (8)

Subsystem Time Between failures Parameters

Propulsion Weibull θ =1000, β=1.7
Avionics Exponential λ=0.003
Structures Weibull θ =2000, β=2.1
Electrical Weibull θ =870, β=1.8
Environmental Exponential λ=0.001
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE 5

19. Explain reliability achievement cost model (7)

20. Explain Reliability management by objectives (7)

SYLLABUS

Module – I

Reliability concepts: Definition of reliability, Reliability vs. Quality, Reliability function, MTTF,
hazard rate function, bathtub curve, derivation of the reliability function, Failure and Failure
modes, Causes of Failures and Unreliability. Reliability Models: constant failure rate model
,time dependent failure models. Weibull distribution, Normal distribution, log normal
distribution. Serial configuration, parallel configuration, combined series parallel systems, K-
out-of-m systems.

Module – II
Redundancy Techniques in System design: Component vs Unit redundancy, Weakest-link
Technique, Mixed redundancy, Standby redundancy, Redundancy optimization, Double failures
and Redundancy. Markov analysis, load sharing systems, standby system, degraded systems,
three state devices, covariate models.

Module – III
Reliability design process, system effectiveness, economic analysis and life cycle cost,
Reliability allocation, optimal allocations, ARINC, AGREE methods. System safety and Fault
Tree Analysis, Tie-set and Cut-set methods, Use of Boolean Algebra in reliability analysis.

Module – IV
Maintainability and Availability: Definitions and basic concepts, Relationship between
reliability, availability and maintainability, Inherent availability, Achieved availability,
Operational availability, Repairable systems, Markovian models. Reliability Allocation: for
series system.

Module – V
Economics of Reliability: Economic issues, Manufacturers cost, Customers cost, reliability
achievement cost models, reliability utility cost models, depreciation cost models, availability
cost model for parallel systems. Reliability management, Reliability management by objectives
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text books:
1. Balagurusamy E., Reliability Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Srinath L. S., Reliability Engineering, East West Press.
3. Charles E. Ebeling, Reliability and Maintainability Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Patrick D. T. O’Connor, Practical Reliability Engineering, John

Reference Books:

1. E.E. Lewis, Introduction to Reliability Engineering, JW.

2. NVR Naidu, et al, Total Quality Management, New Age International Publishers.
3. J.M. Juran and Frank M. Gryna, Quality Planning and Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
Definition of reliability, Reliability vs. Quality, Reliability function,
1.1 MTTF,hazard rate function, bathtub curve, derivation of the reliability 2
function
1.2 Failure and Failure modes, Causes of Failures and Unreliability 2
Reliability Models: constant failure rate model,
1.3 1
time dependent failure models.
1.4 Weibull distribution, Normal distribution, lognormal distribution. 1
Serial configuration, parallel configuration, combined series parallel
1.5 1
systems, K-out-of-m systems.
Redundancy Techniques in System design: Component vs Unit redundancy,
2.1 3
Weakest-link Technique,
Mixed redundancy, Standby redundancy, Redundancy optimization Double
2.2 3
failures and Redundancy.
2.3 Markov analysis, load sharing systems, standby system 1
Reliability design process, system effectiveness, economic analysis and life
3.1 cycle cost 2

3.2 Reliability allocation, optimal allocations 1

3.3 ARINC, AGREE methods 1

3.4 System safety and Fault Tree Analysis, Tie-set and Cut-set methods 2

3.5 Use of Boolean Algebra in reliability analysis. 1

Maintainability and Availability: Definitions and basic concepts,
4.1 3
Relationship between reliability, availability and maintainability
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4.2 Inherent availability, Achieved availability, Operational availability 2

4.3 Operational availability, Repairable systems, Markovian models 2
4.4 Reliability Allocation: for series system. 1
Economics of Reliability: Economic issues, Manufacturers cost, Customers
5.1 cost, reliability achievement cost models 3

reliability utility cost models, depreciation cost models, availability cost

5.2 model for parallel systems 3

5.3 Reliability management, Reliability management by objectives 1

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

PROJECT PLANNING AND
MET428 PEC 2 1 0 3
MANAGEMENT

Preamble: This course involves the application of principles studied in Project planning,
Analysis, Selection Implementation of different project which has social cost, multiple
projects, project review, financial analysis. This course also covers the financials of projects,
improving and evaluating review the performance of the project. This course also helps to
understand the risk analysis and capital budgeting and working capital management.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Overview about the Capital investment, Strategy, Generation & Screening of Project
CO 1
Idea, Demand analysis.
Discuss the Technical Analysis, Product Mix, Plant Capacity, Cost of project and
CO 2 means finance. Cash flow, Projected Balance sheet, Trial balance, Profit and Loss
account, Time value of money.
Discus about the investment analysis, Cash flow of the project, Cost of capital, Project
CO 3
Risk, Multiple projects, Social Cost Benefit Analysis, Capital Budgeting.
Rate return of projects, Project financing, Financing infrastructure projects, Financial
CO 4
Institutions, Working capital management. Term loan appraisal.
Discuss the principles of Project Management, PERT, CPM, Project overview, Post
CO 5
audit, Critical path.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2
CO 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2
CO 4 3 2 2 2
CO 5 2 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester

Tests Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total
CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Types of capital investments and phases of capital budgeting. The detailed

explanations of project analysis and key issues in major investment decisions.

2. Explain the grand strategy and diversification debates and SPACE.

3. What is positive NPV (net present value), explain tools for identifying investment
opportunity.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. What is the industry specific source of secondary information and characteristics

of market? Demand forecasting and trend projection.

2. What are the sources of uncertainties in demand? Describes the aspects covered
in market planning.

3. Explain Plant capacity, Product mix, Location and Site? Describe the important
charts and layout drawings.

4. Discuss the importance of Balance sheet and cash flow statement. Explain the
means of finance.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. What is an annuity? State the formula for the present value of an annuity?

2. What is NPV, IRR, Payback period? Explain the properties of the NPV rule?

3. Explain the principles of cash flow estimation? explain WACC and technics for
risk analysis.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the portfolio theory and capital budgeting. Explain why the firms set a
hurdle rate higher than the WACC.

2. How the economic life of a project determined? What is NPV and how is it
calculate ?

3. Explain the public sector investment decision in India? Explain working capital
management and project financing.

4. Explain capital structure? Explain key factors in determining the Debt- Equity
ratio?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Describe the PPP and its advantage and disadvantage.

2. Describe the tools of project planning and explain how the performance is analysed?

3. What are the pre-requisites for successful project implementation, explain?

4. What is essence of Project Management? Describe the notion of hierarchy of plans?

5. Explain network techniques and time estimations? Explain PERT and CPM.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VIII SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

MET428 : PROJECT PLANNING & MANAGEMENT

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration:3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Explain Types of Capital Investments.

2. Explain the preliminary screening of project ideas.

3. What are the uncertainties in demand forecasting?

4. What are the factors influenced by the selection of Technology?

5. Explain Cash flow and cost of capital of a project?

6. Explain the procedure of Morse test.

7. Discuss about benefit cost ratio and IRR.

8. Explain sources, Measures and Perspectives on Risk?

9. Discus the key factors in determining the Debt-Equity Ratio.

10. Define Network techniques for project management. Explain PERT and CPM.
(10×3=30 Marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART B

Answer one full question from each module

MODULE 1

11. a) Explain the phases of Capital budgeting and Common weakness of Capital
Budgeting? (8 marks)

b) Derive the components of Marketing plan and key project inter-linkage?

(6 marks)

12. a) Explain strategic planning and capital budgeting? Discus the various strategies for
growth strategy and contraction strategies. (8 marks)

b) Discus the source of positive NPV and qualities and traits required for a successful
entrepreneur. (6 marks)

MODULE 2

13. a) What is information required for preparing the project implementation schedule.
Discus the importance of considering alternative ways of transferring an idea in to a
concrete project. (6 marks)

b) Describe Cost project, Cost of Product and Means of finance ? (8 marks)

14. a) Explain cost of project, means of finance. Discus contribution of a projected

Balance sheet in a project? (6 marks)

b) Explain Cash flow Statement, Balance sheet, Trail Balance and Profit and Loss
account and Time value of Money? (8 marks)

MODULE 3

15. a) What are the Investment Criteria? Describe NPV and IRR and properties of the
NPV rule. (8 marks)

b) Discuss the elements of Cash flow stream and basic principles of Cash flow
estimation. (6 marks)

16. a) Describe the Sources, Measures and Perspectives on Risk. What are the techniques
of Risk analysis and ways and means of mitigating Risk. (8 Marks)

b) Explain Social cost and benefit differ from monetary costs and benefits. (4 marks)

MODULE 4

17. a) Explain the Inventory management and Economic order quantity? (6 marks)

b) Discus the PPP and its relevance in India. Explain how financial institutions
appraise a project.? (8 marks)

18. a) Explain the Working Capital Management? Discus components of Credit policy
and Impact of credit policy. (8 marks)

b) Discus the Cash flow process and its relevance. (6 marks)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
MODULE 5

19. a) Explain PERT and CPM? Discus the rules for the construction of Network
Diagram? (6 marks)

b) Why post audit be done? What is the advantage of conducting performance

review? (4 marks)

c) Explain the difference between Economic rate of return and Book return on
Investment? (4 marks)

20. A project consisting of 12 activities and their time activities are shown

Activity. Time (in weeks)

to tm tp

1-2 4 6 9

1-3 3 8 12

1-4 5 5 8

1-7 2 4 6

2-4 6 10 18

2-6 3 4 7

2-7 5 10 16

3-4 3 6 11

4-5 2 4 6

5-6 1 3 7

3-7 2 4 8

6-7 1 2 6

a) Draw the Network diagram. (3 marks)

b) Determine the Critical path. (3 marks)

c) Calculate event slacks and activity floats. (3 marks)

d) Find the standard Deviation of the critical path duration? (3 marks)

e) Compute the probability of completing the project in 30 weeks. (2 marks)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Capital Investment – importance and differences, Phases of Capital Budgeting, Decision

making, Project analysis- Risks, Discounted cash flow (DCF), Financing, Earning per share
(EPS), weakness in capital budgeting, Formulation of strategies, grand strategy,
Diversification-risk reduction- value creation, portfolio strategy, business level strategies,
screening of project idea, tools for identifying investment analysis, preliminary screening,
positive net present value, demand forecasting, marketing plan, marketing survey.Demand
analysis.

Module 2

Manufacturing process/ technology, raw materials, product mix, plant capacity, location and
site, plant and machinery, project chart and layout, project implementation, need for
alternatives, project inter linkage, cost of project, means of finance, profitability projection,
basic acceptation and principles of cash flow statement, projected balance sheet, trial
balance, profit and loss account, time value of money.

Module 3

Various investment criteria, net present value (NPV), benefit cost ratio (BCR), internal rate of
return (IRR), pay back period, accounting rate of return, project cash flow – basic principle,
biases in cash flow estimation, difference between company cost of capital and project cost of
capital, project risk analysis, sources,-measures and perspective risk, break even analysis,
scenario analysis, managing risk, social cost benefit analysis, UNIDO approach, features of
capital budgeting, NPV-IRR comparison, multiple project and constrains.

Module 4

Project financing, capital structure, key factors in determining the Debt-Equity ratio, sources
of finances, equity capital, preference capital, term loan, working capital, project financing
structure, financial closure, financial institutions, information and documents for term loan
appraisal, project appraisal, credit risk rating, private public partnership (PPP)managing risk
in private infrastructure project, working capital management, working capital policy,
estimation of working capital, inventory management, purchase, optimum level of inventory,
economic order quantity, just in time (JIT). Cash Management, Cash flow process. Term loan
appraisal, PPP, Inventory Management, Receivable Management, Cash Management.

Module 5

Project management, principle- forms of project organisation, project planning, project

control, authority, orientation , motivation, group function, pre-requisite for successful
project implementation, accounts receivable, impact of credit policy, components of credit
policy, cash management, motives for holding cash, cash flow process and its relevance,
principles of cash management, collection and disbursement management, cash forecasting,
network techniques in project management, development of project network, rules for
network construction, time estimation, determination of critical path, schedule when
resources are limited, Network Technologies, PERT model, CPM model, network cost
system, project review, post audit, abandonment analysis, overcome resistance, managing
divestments, Project review.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. Weist, J.D,and F,K. Levy, A management Guide to PERT/CPM, Prectice-Hall of

India, New Delhi, 1974.

2. Pouliquen.L.Y, Risk analysis in Project aAprisal, Johns Hopkins Press, Baltimore,

California. 1970.

3. Rajiv Srivastava and Anil Misra, Financial Management, Oxford University Press,
New Delhi.

4. Dr.Prasanna Chandra. Project Planning, Implementation and Review. Tata McGraw

Hill , NewDelhi.

Reference Books

1. Amran M and N.Kulatilalka, Managing strategic investment in Uncertian world.

HArward Business school press, Boston 2000.

2. Reghuram G Infrastructure development and financing, Macmilloan India, Delhi, 1999

3. UNIDO, Guidline for project evaluation, United nations, 1972

4. Weingartner, M.H., Mathematical programming and Analysis of capital budjeting

problemes, Prentice-Hall, EnglewoodmCliffs, N.J, 1963.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1
Capital Investment – importance and differences, Phases of
Capital Budgeting, Decision making, Project analysis- Risks,
1.1 Discounted cash flow (DCF), Financing, Earning per share (EPS), 3
weakness in capital budgeting, Formulation of strategies, grand
strategy,

Diversification-risk reduction- value creation, portfolio strategy,

1.2 business level strategies, screening of project idea, tools for 2
identifying investment analysis,

preliminary screening, positive net present value, demand

1.3 forecasting, marketing plan, marketing survey, Demand analysis. 2

2
Manufacturing process/ technology, raw materials, product mix,
plant capacity, location and site, plant and machinery, project chart
2.1 and layout, project implementation, need for alternatives, project 2
inter linkage,

Cost of project, means of finance, profitability projection, basic

2.2 acceptation and principle of cash flow statement, time value of 2
money.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
2.3 Projected balance sheet, trial balance, profit and loss account, 3
3
Various investment criteria, net present value (NPV), benefit cost
ratio (BCR), internal rate of return (IRR), payback period,
3.1 accounting rate of return, project cash flow – basic principle, 3
biases in cash flow estimation

Difference between cost of capital and project cost of capital,

3.2 project risk analysis, sources, -measures and perspective risk, 2
break even analysis, scenario analysis, managing risk.

social cost benefit analysis, UNIDO approach, features of capital

3.3 2
budgeting, NPV-IRR comparison, multiple projects and constrains
4
Project financing, capital structure, key factors in determining the
Debt-Equity ration, sources of finances, equity capital, preference
4.1 capital, term loan, working capital, project financing structure, 3
financial closure, financial institutions,

information and documents for term loan appraisal, project

appraisal, credit risk rating, private public partnership
4.2 (PPP)managing risk in private infrastructure project, working 2
capital management, working capital policy, estimation of working
capital, Term loan appraisal, PPP.

Inventory management, purchase, optimum level of inventory,

4.3 economic order quantity, just in time (JIT). Cash Management, 2
cash flow process, Cash management.

5
Project management, principle- forms of project organisation,
project planning, project control, authority, orientation,
5.1 motivation, group function, pre-requisite for successful project 2
implementation

Accounts receivable, impact of credit policy, components of credit

policy, cash management, motives for holding cash, cash flow
5.2 process and its relevance, principles of cash management, 2
collection and disbursement management, cash forecasting,

Network techniques in project management, development of

project network, rules for network construction, time estimation,
determination of critical path, schedule when resources are
5.3 limited, PERT model, CPM model, network cost system, project 3
review, post audit, abandonment analysis, overcome resistance,
managing divestments, decision making, Project review.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET438 FRACTURE MECHANICS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Fracture mechanics is a relatively new engineering discipline concerned with the
study of the propagation of cracks, fracture failure and methods to arrest the crack in
materials. This subject is based on the implicit assumption that there exists a crack in a
material. There are many machine components, plants and equipment that fail through fatigue
and fracture. Knowledge of fracture mechanics can assist the machine designer to safeguard
structures against catastrophic fracture. Fracture mechanics is applied extensively to many
engineering fields like nuclear power plant, aircraft, spaceship, etc. This undergraduate
course offers an introduction to the basic concepts of fracture mechanics.

Prerequisite: MET201 Mechanics of solids

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the basic concepts of conventional design methodologies, failure mechanics

CO 1
and fracture
Apply the conservation of energy law for the mathematical formulation of energy
CO 2
release rate
Solve the problems related to stresses and displacement fields of linear elastic
CO 3
materials
Apply the principal stresses, various theory of yield criteria and failure theories to
CO 4
find the plastic zone shape, size and effective crack length
Analyze the elastic-plastic behaviour near crack tip by solving path independent
CO 5
integral
CO 6 Explain the environmentally assisted cracking and corrosion fatigue

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 3 2 1
CO 3 3 3 1
CO 4 3 3 1
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 3 2 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 30 30 30
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total
CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the historical perspective of fracture and failure studies.

2. Explain the different modes of fracture failure.

3. Explain damage tolerance approach in design.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the concept of crank propagation based on energy release rate and surface
energy.

2. Explain change in compliance approach and change in strain energy approach in crack
propagation study.

3. Explain the difference between stable and unstable crack growth using R curve.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the advantages of Stress Intensity factor over Energy release rate in fracture
studies.

2. Solve simple problems using stress Intensity factor equations for mode 1, mode 2 and
mode 3 type fracture failure.

3. Derive the stress Intensity factor equations for mode 1, mode 2 and mode 3 type
fracture failure.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the plastic zone shape for plane stress and plane strain using a neat figure

2. Explain Irwin’s correction for determining plastic zone size.

3. Explain Dugdale approach to find the size of the crack tip plastic zone.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the conditions for rapid crack propagation and crack arrest

2. Explain Paris Law and crack closure.

3. Explain the different causes of corrosion

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

MET438 FRACTURE MECHANICS

Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks

(10 X 3 = 30 Marks)

1. List any six causes of mechanical failure.

2. Differentiate between brittle and ductile fracture.

3. Define Griffith’s theory.

4. Explain Surface energy of a solid.

5. Explain Stress Intensity Factor.

6. What is a singularity? What kind of singularity describes a stress field near the
vicinity of a crack tip in LEFM?

7. In comparison to a plane strain case, a plane stress loading gives much larger plastic
zone for the same SIF? Why?

8. Explain the term ‘effective crack length’.

9. Explain the effect of an overload pulse inside a constant amplitude fatigue load on
crack propagation.

10. Why does the environment-assisted cracking occur mostly through inter-granular
growth?

PART B

Answer one question from each module

MODULE 1

11. Explain with neat sketch the different modes of fracture failure.

OR

12. Discuss the historic overview of Fracture Mechanics.

MODULE 2

13. Derive the equation to find the energy release rate, G of a double cantilever beam
(DCB), subjected to (i) constant load P and (ii) constant displacement.

OR

14. Explain the conditions for stable and unstable crack growth in a ductile material using
R curve
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MODULE 3

15. For a centre crack in an infinite plate loaded in Mode II, determine stress components
and displacement components (plane stress) near the vicinity of a crack tip in terms of
KII.

OR

16. In a large plate, a crack of length 2a is inclined with an angle a with x1-axis as shown
in figure. The plate is loaded in x2 direction with σ22 = σ. (i) Find the stress intensity
factors. (ii) For σ = 80 MPa, 2a = 20 mm and α = 30°, determine KI and KII.

MODULE 4

17. Explain with neat sketch, the plastic zone shape for plane stress condition.

OR

18. A large plate of 5 mm thickness, made of medium carbon steel (σys = 350 MPa) with a
through-the-thickness centre-crack of 2a = 40 mm length, is subjected to a stress of
150 MPa. For Mode I loading, determine the effective crack length using Irwin's
correction.

MODULE 5

19. What do you mean by crack closure? What are the factors affecting crack closure?
Explain its effects on crack propagation.

OR

20. Explain the major factors influencing environment-assisted fracture.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to fracture mechanics: - Review on conventional design methodologies, Brittle

and ductile fracture, Modes of fracture failure, Damage tolerance, Spectacular failures,
Lessons from spectacular failures, fracture mechanics approach to design, damage tolerance
approach to design (review).

Module 2

Griffith’s Dilemma – surface energy- Griffith analysis – Energy Release Rate – Double
cantilever beam (DCB) with constant load, DCB with fixed grip, Energy release rate of DCB
specimen.

Anelastic deformation at crack-tip, Crack resistance, stable and unstable crack growth, R-
curve, Critical energy release rate (concepts only).

Module 3

Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics (LEFM): - stress and displacement fields in isotropic
elastic materials - Stress intensity factor - Field equations - Airy's Stress Function -
Biharmonic Equation, Westergaard’s Approach (concepts only, no derivations, final result).

Module 4

Anelastic Plastic Zone Shape and Size: - plastic zone shape for plane stress - plastic zone
shape for plane strain. Effective Crack Length: - approximate approach - Irwin’s correction –
Dugdale approach.

Module 5

J - Integral: Path independence of J - integral (concepts only), stress strain relation, Engineer
approach to J – integral, Ramberg - Osgood relation (simple problem only). Fatigue Crack
Propagation: - Paris Law – crack closure. Environmentally Assisted Cracking: - types of
corrosion – cracking mechanism. Corrosion Fatigue (concepts only).

Text Books

1. Prashant Kumar, Elements of Fracture Mechanics, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, India,
2009

Reference Books

1. T.L. Anderson, Fracture Mechanics – Fundamentals and Applications, 3rd Edition, Taylor
and Francis Group, 2005.

2. K. Ramesh, e-Book on Engineering Fracture Mechanics, IIT Madras, 2007. URL:

http://apm.iitm.ac.in/smlab/kramesh/book_4.htm
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. K. R.Y. Simha, Fracture Mechanics for Modern Engineering Design, Universities Press
(India) Limited, 2001

4. Kare Hellan, “Introduction of Fracture Mechanics”, McGraw-Hill Book Company,1985.

5. David Broek,” Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics “, Fifth off and Noerdhoff
International Publisher, 1978.

6. Kachanov.L.M., “Foundations of Theory of Plasticity”, North-Holland Publishing Co.,

1971.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Module-1 6 Hr
Introduction to fracture mechanics: - Review on conventional
1.1 1
design methodologies
1.2 Brittle and ductile fracture, Modes of fracture failure 1
1.3 Damage tolerance, Spectacular failures 1
1.4 ,Lessons from spectacular failures, 1
1.5 fracture mechanics approach to design 1
1.6 Damage tolerance approach to design (review). 1
2 Module-2 7 Hr
2.1 Griffith’s Dilemma – surface energy- 1
2.2 Griffith analysis – Energy Release Rate – 1
Double cantilever beam (DCB) with constant load, DCB with
2.3 1
fixed grip,
2.4 Energy release rate of DCB specimen 1
2.5 Anelastic deformation at crack-tip, R-curve, 1
2.6 Crack resistance, stable and unstable crack growth, 1
2.7 R-curve, Critical energy release rate (concepts only). 1
3 Module-3 8 Hr
3.1 Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics (LEFM): 2
3.2 - stress and displacement fields in isotropic elastic materials - -, 1
3.3 Stress intensity factor - Field equations - Airy's Stress Function 2
Biharmonic Equation 1
Westergaard’s Approach (concepts only, no derivations, final
3.4 2
result)
4 Module-4 8 Hr
4.1 Anelastic Plastic Zone Shape and Size: 2
4.2 plastic zone shape for plane stress 1
4.3 Effective Crack Length: - approximate approach 1
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4.4 plastic zone shape for plane strain. 2

4.5 Irwin’s correction 1
4.6 Dugdale approach 1
5 Module-5 8 Hr
5.1 J - Integral: Path independence of J - integral (concepts only) 1
5.2 Stress strain relation 1
5.3 Engineer approach to J – integral 1
5.4 Ramberg - Osgood relation (simple problem only) 1
5.5 Paris Law – crack closure. Environmentally Assisted Cracking 2
Types of corrosion – cracking mechanism. Corrosion Fatigue
5.6 2
(concepts onl
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
GAS TURBINES AND JET
MET448 PEC 2 1 0 3
PROPULSION

Preamble: The objectives of the course are:

 To know about the concepts of compressible fluid flow

 To know about the operation of gas turbines and compressors.

 To know about various types of combustion systems

 To identify factors affecting efficiency and performance of turbomachines

 To know about the basics of propulsion systems

Prerequisite: MET203 Mechanics of fluid, MET202 Engineering Thermodynamic, MET

302 Heat and Mass Transfer

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the basic fundamentals of the various gas turbine cycles

CO 2 Discuss various laws pertaining to gas turbines and jet propulsion
CO 3 Identify, formulate and solve problems related to gas turbines and jet propulsion
CO 4 Specify, interpret data, and make a judgement about the best possible solution
Aspire for developing career with specialization in areas of thermo-fluid drives,
CO 5 recognize the need to learn, to engage and to adapt in a world of constantly changing
environment.
CO 6 Illustrate different techniques used in rocket propulsion

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 1
CO 4 3 2 2 1
CO 5 3 2 2
CO 6 3 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

End Semester
Assignment
Test 1 (%) Test 2 (%) Examination
(%)
Remember 25 20 20 10
Understand 25 40 40 20
Apply 25 40 40 70
Analyse 25
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Represent Brayton cycle in PV and TS coordinates.

2. Define closed cycle and semi closed cycle gas turbines

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1.Discuss laws pertaining to Gas Turbines

2. Discuss laws pertaining to Jet Propulsion

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Discuss problems related to Gas Turbines

2. Discuss problems related to Jet Propulsion

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Discuss about the solutions related to Gas Turbine problems

2. Discuss about the solutions related to Jet Propulsion problems

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Discuss about the applications in the field

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Discuss about different techniques in rocket propulsion

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

GAS TURBINES AND JET PROPULSION -MET448

Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks

(10 X 3 = 30 Marks)

1. What are the applications of gas turbines?

2. List the advantages of closed cycle gas turbine system over open cycle system.

3. What are the different methods used to improve the efficiency of gas turbine

4. plant?
Explain the significance of intercooler. What is meant by perfect intercooling?

5. Why are propeller engines not commonly used nowadays in aircrafts?

6. State the difference between air breathing and non-air breathing propulsion

7. systems.
Define thrust power and propulsive power.

8. What is propellant? How are propellants classified?

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
9. Explain about free radical propulsion.

10. What is meant by thrust and its limiting factors?

PART B

Answer one question from each module

MODULE 1

11. An air nozzle is to be designed for an exit Mach number of 2. conditions of the air
available in the reservoir are 700 kPa, 533 K. Estimate i) pressure ii) temperature iii) velocity
of flow iv) area, at throat and exit of the nozzle. Mass flow rate through the nozzle is 10000
kg/hr.

14 marks

12..Derive the conservation of mass equation for compressible flow through control volume
approach. 14 marks

MODULE II

13. Explain constant pressure and constant volume gas turbines with diagrams
14 marks

14. Explain intercooling, reheating and their combinations 14 marks

MODULE III

15. Explain the operation of single stage reciprocating compressor 14 marks

16. Explain centrifugal compressors and axial flow compressors 14 marks

MODULE IV

17. Explain factors affecting combustion chamber design 14 marks

18.Explain gas turbine combustion chamber performance 14 marks

MODULE V

19. Explain air breathing propulsion system 14 marks

20. Explain rocket propulsion system 14 marks

Note: Problems also can be asked from module 2 and 3. Each question can have maximum
two sub divisions
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1- Compressible Flow: Wave propagation and sound velocity; Mach number and
compressible flow regimes; basic equations for one-dimensional compressible flow,
isentropic flow relations; area-velocity relation; normal shock waves, relation between
upstream and downstream flow parameters.

Module 2- Gas Turbine Systems and Cycles: System of operation of gas turbines-constant
volume and constant pressure gas turbines; thermodynamics of Brayton cycle; regeneration-
inter-cooling, reheating and their combinations; closed cycle and semi-closed cycle gas
turbines; Compare Gas turbines, I.C engines and steam turbines.

Module 3- Compressors: Classification-positive displacement and dynamic compressors,

Operation of single stage reciprocating compressors; isothermal efficiency; volumetric
efficiency; multi-stage compression. Centrifugal compressors; principle of operation; work
done and pressure rise; diffuser; compressibility effects; non dimensional quantities for
plotting compressor characteristics; compressor characteristics. Axial flow compressors;
basic operation; elementary theory; factors effecting stage pressure ratio; degree of reaction;
calculation of stage performance; Axial flow characteristics.

Module 4- Combustion Systems: Types, operational requirements; combustion process;

factors affecting combustor design; combustion chamber performance; Gas turbine
emissions.

Module 5- Air-breathing Propulsion Systems: Principle of jet propulsion; analysis and

performance characteristics of turbojet, turboprop, ramjet and pulsejet; thrust power and
propulsion efficiency. Rocket Propulsion: Operating principle; solid and liquid propellants,
performance analysis-calculations for specific impulse and propulsive efficiency.

Text Books

1. Gas Turbine Theory – Saravanamuttoo, Cohen and Rogers, Pearson Education Asia

2. Gas Turbines – V. Ganesan, Tata McGraw Hill

Reference books

1. Elements of Gas Turbine Propulsion- James Mattingly, Tata McGraw Hill

2. Gas Turbine Engine Technology – Irwin E Treager, McGraw Hill Education, 2013
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

HOURS
MODULE TOPICS
ALLOTED

Compressible Flow: Wave propagation and sound velocity; Mach

number and compressible flow regimes; basic equations for one-
dimensional compressible flow, isentropic flow relations; area-
1 velocity relation; normal shock waves, relation between upstream 4-1-0
and downstream flow parameters.

Gas Turbine Systems and Cycles: System of operation of gas

turbines-constant volume and constant pressure gas turbines;
thermodynamics of Brayton cycle; regeneration- inter-cooling,
2 reheating and their combinations; closed cycle and semi-closed 4-2-0
cycle gas turbines; gas turbine v/s I.C engines and steam turbines.

Compressors: Classification-positive displacement and dynamic

compressors, Operation of single stage reciprocating compressors;
isothermal efficiency; volumetric efficiency; multi-stage
compression. Centrifugal compressors; principle of operation; work
done and pressure rise; diffuser; compressibility effects; non
dimensional quantities for plotting compressor characteristics;
3 compressor characteristics. Axial flow compressors; basic operation; 6-2-0
elementary theory; factors effecting stage pressure ratio; degree of
reaction; calculation of stage performance; Axial flow
characteristics.
Combustion Systems: Types, operational requirements;
combustion process; factors affecting combustor design; combustion
4 chamber performance; Gas turbine emissions. 4-1-0

Air-breathing Propulsion Systems: Principle of jet propulsion;

analysis and performance characteristics of turbojet, turboprop, 4-1-0
ramjet and pulsejet; thrust power and propulsion efficiency

Rocket Propulsion: Operating principle; solid and liquid

5 propellants, performance analysis-calculations for specific impulse
and propulsive efficiency. 5-1-0
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ADVANCED ENERGY
MET458 PEC 2 1 0 3
ENGINEERING

Preamble: This course provides basic ideas about various energy source and its environmental
impacts.

Prerequisite : Nil

Course Outcomes :After completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Explain the concept of various types of power generation

CO2 Explain solar and wind power generation and its economics

CO3 Explain biomass energy sources and its economics

CO4 Explain various renewable energy sources

CO5 Explain environmental impacts of various energy generation

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3 1
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 1 1 1

CO 6 3 1

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Discuss the renewable energy potential of India.
2. Explain briefly global energy resources.
3. Explain the working and components of a thermal power plant with the help of a neat layout.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain briefly about the different types of solar collectors with neat sketches.
2. Explain the working of solar photovoltaic cells.
3. List the different methods used to estimate wind speed at a location.
4. Discuss site selection for wind power plants?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Which are the main sources of Biomass?
2. With a neat sketch explain the working of a fixed dome type biogas plant.
3. Explain the biochemical and thermo chemical methods of biomass conversion.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the working principle of MHD power generation with a sketch.
2. Explain the components and working principle of any one hybrid power plant with sketches.
3. With the help of a neat diagram explain the working principle and applications of fuel cells.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain any three methods for controlling air pollution by thermal power plants.
2. What is cause for the loss of biodiversity and how is biodiversity protected?
3. Describe the actions to be taken for sustainability of energy.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

VI SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
MET458: ADVANCED ENERGY ENGINEERING
Maximum: 100 Marks Duration: 3 hours
PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1.Elaborate on the current global energy supply scenario.

2. What are the renewable energy resources? Discuss their importance in India’s power
requirement contest.
3. Explain the basic principle of wind energy conversion.
4. Distinguish between active and passive solar energy systems.
5. Explain the category of biomass resources.
6. “Energy released from biomass comes from Sun”. elaborate on this point
7. Mention the impact of tidal energy power plants in the environment
8. Name the different processes used for Hydrogen production.
9. What is biodiversity?
10. List any four sources of land degradation ( 10 X 3 = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module

Module 1
11. (i) Sketch the layout of a diesel power plant. Explain the layout. (10 marks)
(ii)How do Industry Nation and Globe would benefit from energy efficiency programs.

(4 marks)

OR

12. Give the schematic layout of a thermal power plant and explain its working with the help of
Rankine cycle (14 marks)

Module 2
13 Explain briefly about the different types of solar collectors with neat sketches.

(14 marks)
OR

14. (i) Elaborate on the construction and working of the different types of horizontal axis wind
turbine. (10 marks)

(ii).What is the advantages of wind energy conversion systems? (4 marks)

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Module 3

15. (i) Explain the biochemical and thermo chemical methods of biomass conversion (10 marks)

(ii) What is the difference between biomass and biogas? (4 marks)

OR

16. (i).With a neat sketch explain the working of a fixed dome type biogas plant. (10 marks)

(ii). Write a short note on gasification of biomass? (4 marks)

Module 4

17. With the help of a schematic diagram explain the closed cycle MHD and open cycle MHD
(14 marks)

OR
18.With the help of a neat diagram explain the working principle and applications of fuel cells.
(14 marks)

Module 5

19.(i).Briefly explain any four air pollutants and their effects (8 marks)
(ii) Explain the causes and effects of eutrophication (6 marks)

OR

20 (i).Define Global warming. What are the reasons for Global warming? (10 marks)
(ii). List out the environmental impact of utilizing hydroelectric power (4 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1
Introduction to the course,Global and Indian energy resources. Energy demand and supply.
components, layout and working principles of steam, hydro, nuclear, gas turbine and diesel power
plants .

Module 2
Solar Energy- passive and active solar thermal energy, solar collectors, solar thermal electric
systems, solar photovoltaic systems,economics of solar power
Wind Energy-Principle of wind energy conversion system, wind turbines, aerodynamics of wind
turbines, wind power economics,Introduction to solar-wind hybrid energy

Module 3
Biomass Energy – Biomass as a fuel, thermo-chemical, bio-chemical and agro-chemical
conversion of biomass- pyrolysis, gasification, combustion and fermentation, transesterification,
economics of biomass power generation, future prospects

Module 4
Other Renewable Energy sources – Brief account of Geothermal, Tidal, Wave, MHD power
generation. Fuel cells – general description, types, applications. Hydrogen energy conversion
systems, hybrid systems- Economics and technical feasibility

Module 5
Environmental impact of energy conversion – ozone layer depletion, global warming,
greenhouse effect, loss of biodiversity, eutrophication, acid rain, air and water pollution, land
degradation, thermal pollution, Sustainable energy, promising technologies,
developmentpathways

Text Books:
1. P K Nag, Power Plant Engineering, TMH,2002
2. Jefferson W Tester, Sustainable Energy Choosing among options, PHI, 2006
3. Tiwari G N, Ghosal M K, Fundamentals of renewable energy sources, Alpha Science
International Ltd., 2007

Reference Books:
1.David Merick, Richard Marshall, Energy, Present and Future Options, Vol.I & II, John Wiley &
Sons, 2001
2. Godfrey Boyle, Renewable Energy : Power for a Sustainable Future, Oxford University Press,
2012
3. HerbertE.Merritt,Hydraulic control systems,JohnWiley&Sons,2012
4. Roland Wengenmayr, Thomas Buhrke, ‘Renewable Energy: Sustainable energy concepts for the
future, Wiley – VCH, 2012
5. Twidell J W and Weir A D, Renewable Energy Resources, UK, E&F.N. Spon Ltd., 2006
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. Topic No. of Lectures

Introduction to the course, Global and Indian energy
resources. Energy demand and supply. Components, layout
I 7
and working principles of steam, hydro, nuclear, gas
turbine and diesel power plants
Solar Energy- passive and active solar thermal energy, solar
collectors, solar thermal electric systems, solar photovoltaic 6
systems, economics of solar power
II
Wind Energy-Principle of wind energy conversion system,
wind turbines, aerodynamics of wind turbines, wind power 5
economics, Introduction to solar-wind hybrid energy
Biomass Energy – Biomass as a fuel, thermo-chemical,
bio-chemical and agro-chemical conversion of biomass-
III pyrolysis, gasification, combustion and fermentation, 6
transesterification, economics of biomass power
generation, future prospects
Other Renewable Energy sources – Brief account of
Geothermal, Tidal , Wave, MHD power generation. Fuel
IV cells – general description, types, applications. Hydrogen 6
energy conversion systems, hybrid systems- Economics
and technical feasibility
Environmental impact of energy conversion – ozone layer
depletion, global warming, greenhouse effect, loss of
V biodiversity, eutrophication, acid rain, air and water 6
pollution, land degradation, thermal pollution, Sustainable
energy, promising technologies, development pathways`
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET468 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course addresses additive manufacturing principles, variety and its concept,
scope of additive manufacturing and areas of application

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO Level of learning
Course Outcomes
Nos domain

CO 1 Discuss various additive manufacturing processes

2

CO 2 Explain slicing operations in additive manufacturing

2

CO 3 Use liquid and solid based additive manufacturing system

3

CO 4 Select powder based and use of pre requirement of AM

2

CO 5 Apply rapid prototyping techniques for obtaining solutions

3

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 2 1
CO 2 3 2 2 2 1
CO 3 2 2 2 1
CO 4 2 2 2 1
CO 5 3 2 2 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 25 25 25
Understand 35 35 35
Apply 40 40 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. What is additive manufacturing?

2. What is STL file?
3. What is AM process chain?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. What is Model Slicing?

2. What are the softwares used for Tool path generation
3. What are the softwares currently used for AM?
4. What are the limitations of Tool path generation?

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Brief the post processing types of LENS.

2. What are process variables in FDM?
3. What are the applications of EDM?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What is STL file?
2. How does 3d Printing Work?
3. What are the merits of SLM?
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What are the benefits of rapid tooling?

2. What are the applications of rapid tooling?
3. What is Rapid Tooling?

Model Question Paper

MET 468 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING

Max. Marks : 100 Duration : 3

Hours

Part – A

Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks

1. Write a note on product development by AM?

2. Classify and Explain of additive manufacturing processes?
3.Brief about Support structure design?
4. What are the advantages of Part orientation?
5. Brief the LOM process.
6. What are the materials used in SLS
7. What are the strength and weakness of 3DP?
8. What are the merits of SLM?
9. What are the fundamentals of Rapid Prototyping?
10. List the types of industries that RP can be used in industrial applications?

PART -B
Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE – 1
11 a) Write a note on the benefits and applications of AM. (6 marks)
b) Write a note on the impact of AM on product development. (8 marks)

OR
12. a) Write a note on the need and development of AM systems. (8 marks)
b) Classify and explain the AM process. (6 marks)

MODULE – 2
13. a) Explain about data formats and data interfacing? (6 marks)
b) What is part orientation? Explain with illustrations? (8 marks)

OR
14. a) Explain the need of support generation with flow charts? (8 marks)
b) What are the steps involved in model slicing? (6 marks)

MODULE – 3
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

15. a) Brief about strength, Weakness and applications of SLA? (8 marks)

b) Explain the working principle and process variables of FDM. (6 marks)

OR
16 a) Brief about strength, Weakness and applications of SLS? (8 marks)
b) Explain the working principle and process variables of LOM. (6 marks)

MODULE – 4
17.a) Explain the working principle and process variables of 3DP (6 marks)
b) Compare solid, liquid and powder based system of 3DP. (8 marks)

OR
18 a) what is STL Format? Explain any two translators used in place of STL? (8 marks)
b) Explain the working principle and process variables of 3DP? (6 marks)

MODULE – 5
19 a) what are the benefits of using color in production of medical models? (6 marks)
b) What AM materials are already approved for medical applications and for what types of
application are they suitable? (8 marks)

OR
20 a) Discuss the steps followed in rapid prototyping process. (6 marks)
b) What is rapid tooling and explain the applications of RPT in manufacturing and tooling.
(8 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
Module 1

Introduction to Additive manufacturing: Importance of Additive Manufacturing- Basic

principle of additive manufacturing- Procedure of product development in additive
manufacturing. Classification of additive manufacturing processes, Materials used in additive
manufacturing- Benefits & Challenges in Additive Manufacturing.

Module 2
Basic Concept — Digitization techniques — Model Reconstruction — Data Processing for
Additive Manufacturing Technology: CAD model preparation — Part Orientation and support
generation — Model Slicing —Tool path Generation- Introduction to slicing softwares: Cura.

Module 3
Principle, process parameters, advantages and applications of: Fused Deposition Modelling
(FDM), Selective Laser Sintering (SLS), Stereo Lithography (SLA). Laminated Object
Manufacturing (LOM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM), Laser Engineering Net Shaping
(LENS),

Module 4
Principle, process parameters, advantages and applications of: Selection Laser Melting
(SLM), Jetting, 3D Printing-STL Format, STL File Problems, consequence of building valid
and invalid tessellated models, STL file Repairs: Generic Solution, other Translators, Newly
Proposed Formats.

Module 5
Direct processes: - Rapid Prototyping, Rapid Tooling. Rapid Manufacturing; Indirect
Processes: - Indirect Prototyping. Indirect Tooling, Indirect Manufacturing. Applications and
case studies of Additive Manufacturing: –Biomedical- Manufacturing- Aerospace-
Automotive- Food- Electronics.

Text Books

1. Gibson, I, Rosen, D W., and Stucker,B., Additive Manufacturing Methodologies: Rapid

Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing,Springer, 2010
2. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”,
Third Edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010
3. Chee Kai Chua, Kah Fai Leong, 3D Printing and Additive Manufacturing: Principles and
Applications: Fourth Edition of Rapid Prototyping, World Scientific Publishers, 2014
4. Gebhardt A., “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003

Reference Books

1. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press, 2007
2. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006
3. Mahamood R.M., Laser Metal Deposition Process of Metals, Alloys, and Composite
Materials, Engineering Materials and Processes, Springer International Publishing AG 2018
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4. Ehsan Toyserkani, Amir Khajepour, Stephen F. Corbin, “Laser Cladding”, CRC Press, 2004
5. Christopher Barnatt, “3D Printing”, Explaining The Future.com, 2014.

6 . Paul F Jacobs, “Stereolithography and other RP&M Technologies: from Rapid Prototyping
to Rapid Tooling”, Society of Manufacturing Engineers and the Rapid Prototyping
Association, New York, 1996.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Introduction to Additive manufacturing: Importance of Additive 2
Manufacturing
1.2 Basic principle of additive manufacturing- Procedure of product
development in additive manufacturing. 2
1.3 Classification of additive manufacturing processes, Materials used in
additive manufacturing 2
1.4 Benefits & Challenges in Additive Manufacturing. 1
MODULE 2
2.1 Basic Concept — Digitization techniques — Model Reconstruction 1
2.2 Data Processing for Additive Manufacturing Technology: 1
2.3 CAD model preparation — Part Orientation and support generation 1
2.4 Model Slicing —Tool path Generation 1
2.5 Introduction to slicing softwares: Cura. 2
MODULE 3
3.1 Principle, process, advantages and applications of: Fused Deposition 1
Modelling(FDM),
3.2 Principle, process, advantages and applications of: Selective Laser 2
Sintering(SLS), Stereo Lithography(SLA),
3.3 Principle, process, advantages and applications of: Laser Engineering Net
Shaping (LENS) 2
3.4 Principle, process, advantages and applications of: Laminated Object
Manufacturing (LOM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM). 2
MODULE 4
4.1 Principle, process, advantages and applications of: Selection Laser Melting
(SLM), Jetting, 3D Printing 2
4.2 Principle, process, advantages and applications of 3D Printing
2
4.3 STL Format, STL File Problems, consequence of building valid and invalid
tessellated models, 2
4.4 STL file Repairs: Generic Solution, other Translators, Newly Proposed
Formats. 1
MODULE 5
5.1 Direct processes: - Rapid Prototyping, Rapid Tooling. Rapid 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Manufacturing
5.2 Indirect Processes: - Indirect Prototyping. Indirect Tooling, Indirect
Manufacturing. 2
5.3 Applications and case studies of Additive Manufacturing: –Biomedical- 2
Manufacturing-

5.4 Applications and case studies of Additive Manufacturing: –Aerospace-

Automotive- Food- Electronics. 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MET478 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Power Plant Engineering basically focuses on power generation principles for real
world applications. This course is focused on application of energy principles and power
generation cycles. The main purpose of implementing this course in curriculum is to learn
about how the power is generated in a power plant and its applications

Prerequisite: MET205 THERMODYNAMICS, MET303 THERMAL ENGINEERING

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside a thermal
CO 1
power plant
Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside a Diesel, Gas
CO 2
and Combined cycle power plants.
Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside nuclear power
CO 3
plants.
Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside Renewable
CO 4
energy power plants.
Identify applications of power plants, plant economics, environmental hazards and
CO 5
estimate the costs of electrical energy production.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 2
CO 2 2 2 2
CO 3 2 2 2
CO 4 2 2 2
CO 5 2 2 2

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment
Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Comment on the methods used for handling of coal.

2. State the advantages and disadvantages of pulverized coal firing.

3. Illustrate and explain the functions of cooling tower.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. State the applications of diesel electric power plants.

2. List the components present in the diesel electric power plants.

3. Illustrate and explain working of a regenerative gas turbine and re-heater with a help of a
Pv diagram.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. List down the basic factors to be considered for the design of a nuclear power reactor

2. Give example for the components of pressurized water reactor nuclear power plan.

3. Describe the functionality of moderator.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Enumerate the advantages and disadvantages of hydropower plants.

2. Comment on different types of ocean thermal energy conversion system.

 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

3. Explain in detail about the various types of Wind energy system.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Illustrate and explain the load duration curve.

2. A power station has two 60MW units each running for 1500 hours a year. The energy
produced per year is 700 x 106 kW-hr. Calculate the plant load factor and plant use factor.

3. Define depreciation and elaborate its role in operation of a power plant.

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code: MET478

Course Name: POWER PLANT ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A

(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)

1. Define drift? How drift is eliminated in cooling towers?

2. Comment on the types of burner employed for pulverized coals in the thermal power
plants.

3. What are the methods of cooling in a diesel engine power plant?

4. List out the difference between open cycle and closed cycle gas turbine plant.

5. Mention the advantages of nuclear power plant.

6. Define “half-life” of nuclear fuels.

7. Comment on the working of a solar cell.

8. What are the advantages and limitations of tidal power plant?

9. Define the importance of capital cost in a power plant.

10. Define load factor and list out methods for improvement in load factor.

PART – B

(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

MODULE – 1

11. a) Explain the analysis of pollution from thermal power plants. (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

b) How ash is handled in the power plant? Explain the ash handling system. (7 marks)

OR

12. a) Explain the principle involved in preparation of coal and what are the methods of
preparation? (7 marks)

b) Illustrate and explain the working different types of cooling towers. (7 marks)

MODULE – 2

13. a) Give the layout of diesel engine power plant. What are the advantages and
disadvantages of diesel power plants? (7 marks)

b) List out the difference between the closed cycle and open cycle gas turbine power
plants (7 marks)

OR

14. a) Illustrate and explain working of a regenerative gas turbine and re-heater with help of
a P-v diagram (7 marks)

b) What are the methods used for improving the efficiency of a gas turbine plant?
(7 marks)

MODULE – 3

15. a) Explain with neat sketches and with examples difference between controlled and
uncontrolled chain reaction? (7 marks)

b) Describe the boiling water reactor with the help of neat sketch and explain its chief
characteristics (7 marks)

OR

16. a) Explain the working of a typical fast breeder nuclear reactor power plant, with the help
of neat diagram (7 marks)

b) Define commonly used methods of nuclear waste disposal and discuss their salient
features. (7 marks)

MODULE – 4

17. a) Explain the factors to be considered while selecting the site of a hydro power plant?
(7 marks)

b) Explain the construction and working of Geo thermal power plant (7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OR

18. a) Explain with a neat diagram of wind electric generating power plant. (7 marks)

b) Explain in detail about the various types of Wind energy system. (7 marks)

MODULE – 5

19. A central power station has annual factors as follows: Load factor = 60%, Capacity factor
= 40%, Use factor = 45%, Power station has a maximum demand of 15,000 kW. Determine:
Annual energy production, Reserve capacity over and above peak load, Hours per year not in
service. (14 marks)

OR

20. a) What are the elements which contribute to the cost of the electricity? How can the cost
power generation be reduced? (7 marks)

b) Define power plant economics? Explain the fixed and operating cost of a power station
(7 marks)
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS

Rankine cycle – improvisations, Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critical Boilers,
FBC Boilers, Turbines, Condensers, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal power plants
– Fuel and ash handling, Draught system, Feed water treatment. Binary Cycles and
Cogeneration systems.

Module 2

DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER PLANTS

Otto, Diesel, Dual & Brayton Cycle – Analysis & Optimisation. Components of Diesel and
Gas Turbine power plants. Combined Cycle Power Plants. Integrated Gasifier based
Combined Cycle systems.

Module 3

NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS

Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of
Nuclear Reactors : Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR),
CANada Deuterium- Uranium reactor (CANDU), Breeder, Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal
Cooled Reactors. Safety measures for Nuclear Power plants.

Module 4

POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY

Hydro Electric Power Plants – Classification, Typical Layout and associated components
including Turbines. Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar Photo Voltaic
(SPV), Solar Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cell power systems.

Module 5

ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES OF POWER PLANTS

Power tariff types, Load distribution parameters, load curve, Comparison of site selection
criteria, relative merits & demerits, Capital & Operating Cost of different power plants.
Pollution control technologies including Waste Disposal Options for Coal and Nuclear Power
Plants.

Text Books

1. P.C.Sharma, “Power Plant Engineering”, S.K.Kataria Publication, 3rd Edition, 2015.

2. Arora and S. Domkundwar , “A Course in Power Plant Engineering”, Dhanpat rai & Co
Publication, 5th Edition, 2016.

3. P.K. Nag, “Power Plant Engineering”, TMH Publication, 4th Edition, 2017.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. R.K. Rajput, “A Text Book of Power Plant Engineering”, Laxmi Publications, 5th Edition,
2016.

2. K. K. Ramalingam, “Power plant Engineering”, Scitech Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2015

3. G.D. Rai, “An Introduction to Power Plant Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 3 rd Edition,
2011.

4. C. Elanchezhian , “Power Plant Engineering” , I.K. International Publications, 2nd Edition,

2013.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS
1.1 Rankine cycle – improvisations 1
Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critical Boilers, FBC
1.2 2
Boilers
Turbines, Condensers, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal
1.3 2
power plants.
1.4 Fuel and ash handling, Draught system. 2
1.5 Feed water treatment. Binary Cycles and Cogeneration systems 1
2 DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER PLANTS
2.1 Otto, Diesel, Dual & Brayton Cycle – Analysis & Optimisation. 2
2.2 Components of Diesel and Gas Turbine power plants. 2
2.3 Combined Cycle Power Plants. 2
2.4 Integrated Gasifier based Combined Cycle systems. 2
3 NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS
Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear
3.1 2
Power Plants, Working of Nuclear Reactors
Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR),
3.2 2
CANada Deuterium- Uranium reactor (CANDU),
3.3 Breeder, Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal Cooled Reactors. 2
3.4 Safety measures for Nuclear Power plants. 2
4 POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY
Hydro Electric Power Plants – Classification, Typical Layout and
4.1 2
associated components including Turbines.
Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar Photo
4.2 Voltaic (SPV), Solar Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cell 4
power systems.
ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES OF POWER
5
PLANTS
Power tariff types, Load distribution parameters, load curve,
5.1 2
Comparison of site selection criteria, relative merits & demerits,
5.2 Capital & Operating Cost of different power plants. 2
5.3 Pollution control technologies 2
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
MINOR
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MED482 MINI PROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 4

Preamble: Mini Project Phase I: A Project topic must be selected either from research literature
or the students themselves may propose suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The
object of Project Work I is to enable the student to take up investigative study in the broad field
of Chemical Engineering, either fully theoretical/practical or involving both theoretical and
practical work to be assigned by the Department on a group of three/four students, under the
guidance of a Supervisor. This is expected to provide a good initiation for the student(s) in
R&D work. The assignment to normally include:
♦ Survey and study of published literature on the assigned topic;
♦ Preparing an Action Plan for conducting the investigation, including team work;
♦ Working out a preliminary Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned topic;
♦ Block level design documentation
♦ Conducting preliminary Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Experiment/ Design/
Feasibility;
♦ Preparing a Written Report on the Study conducted for presentation to the Department;
CO1 Identify and synthesize problems and propose solutions to them.

CO2 Prepare work plan and liaison with the team in completing as per schedule.

Validate the above solutions by theoretical calculations and through

CO3
experimental
CO4 Write technical reports and develop proper communication skills.
CO5 Present the data and defend ideas.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
*1-slight/low mapping, 2- moderate/medium mapping, 3-substantial/high mapping
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Sl. No. Level of Evaluation Marks

1 Interim evaluation by the committee 20
2 Project Guide 30
3 Final Seminar evaluation by the committee 30
4 The report evaluated by the evaluation committee 20
Total 100
Minimum required to pass 50

The evaluation committee comprises a panel of HoD or a senior faculty member, Project
coordinator and project supervisor.
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VIII
HONOURS
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MED496 MINI PROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 4

Preamble: Mini Project Phase I: A Project topic must be selected either from research literature
or the students themselves may propose suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The
object of Project Work I is to enable the student to take up investigative study in the broad field
of Chemical Engineering, either fully theoretical/practical or involving both theoretical and
practical work to be assigned by the Department on a group of three/four students, under the
guidance of a Supervisor. This is expected to provide a good initiation for the student(s) in
R&D work. The assignment to normally include:
♦ Survey and study of published literature on the assigned topic;
♦ Preparing an Action Plan for conducting the investigation, including team work;
♦ Working out a preliminary Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned topic;
♦ Block level design documentation
♦ Conducting preliminary Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Experiment/ Design/
Feasibility;
♦ Preparing a Written Report on the Study conducted for presentation to the Department;
CO1 Identify and synthesize problems and propose solutions to them.

CO2 Prepare work plan and liaison with the team in completing as per schedule.

Validate the above solutions by theoretical calculations and through

CO3
experimental
CO4 Write technical reports and develop proper communication skills.
CO5 Present the data and defend ideas.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
*1-slight/low mapping, 2- moderate/medium mapping, 3-substantial/high mapping
 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Sl. No. Level of Evaluation Marks

1 Interim evaluation by the committee 20
2 Project Guide 30
3 Final Seminar evaluation by the committee 30
4 The report evaluated by the evaluation committee 20
Total 100
Minimum required to pass 50

The evaluation committee comprises a panel of HoD or a senior faculty member, Project
coordinator and project supervisor.